Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http: //books .google .com/I
t
H
4- +
^1
M
^
M
IM
,vnfOi»
+ + +
f
.**.
•S^S^'J-
i
4-
I^[
AWOji.
i
'•'O ill**'
f
.<%.
+
I ^ i
*«» Oji.
-♦- 4- +
+ + + 4-
**»;™»/j.
M
i
i«2°*^
+
+
^
•'O ill**
+ + -♦■ +
IM
*:
1%
M
^
SB
^1
f
'■^^^#-
^11
+ + +
W
-*fi
■^ -^ ^-
M
'*^^*"
M
^^
M
r^
■''iSi^*
K
^ 4 i + +
+
■S.'^Sfj.
H
m
GRAMMATICAL FUNDAMENTALS
• * * •
OF THE
INNUIT LANGUAGE
AS SPOKEN BY THE
ESKIMO OF THE WESTERN COAST
OF ALASKA
BY THE
REVEREND FRANCIS BARNUM, SJ.
OF GEORGETOWN UNIVERSITY, WASHINGTON, D.C.
Boston, U.S.A., and London
GINN & COMPANY, PUBLISHERS
Cte 9[t(nutitm prtM
1 901
Entered at Stationers' Hall
Copyright, 1901,
By GINN & COMPANY
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
TO HIS DEAR FRIEND
PATRICK H. O'DONNELL, A.M., Georgiop.
PUBLIC ADMINISTRATOR
CHICAGO
WHO BY HIS ENCOURAGEMENT AND LIBERALITY
HAS MADE THE PUBLICATION POSSIBLE
THE AUTHOR
IN TOKEN OF AFFECTION AND GRATITUDE
DEDICATES HIS WORK
PREFACE
This work treats only of the Western dialect of the widespread
Innuit language. By this is meant the dialect spoken by the Eskimo,
who dwell along the coast of Alaska, from Nushagak up by the
mouth of the Kuskokwim River, and through the great interfluvial
tract between that river and the Yukon ; also throughout the Yukon
delta, and finally around the coast to St. Michael's Island in Norton
Sound.
During my sojourn in Alaska I was obliged to traverse this extent
of country many times, and I noticed that throughout the whole of
it the dialect with a few trifling exceptions was uniform.
When travelling along the coast of the Arctic Ocean, the
region extending northward from St. Michael's Island, including
Unalaklik, Golovine Bay, Port Clarence, Cape Prince of Wales,
the Kotzebue Sound district. Point Hope, Point Lay, and on up
to Point Barrow, I observed a variation in the language sufficient
to constitute another dialect. Hence the region extending from
Unalaklik to Point Barrow may be termed the range of the Northern
dialect of Innuit.
In presenting this contribution to our stock of researches on the
American aborigines I desire to explain the circumstances under
which its compilation was effected, in order that the reader may
judge of the difficulties which confronted me.
In 1 89 1 I received my appointment to serve on the Alaskan mis-
sion, and in the early part of June I left San Francisco for the North
on a steamer belonging to the Alaska Commercial Company. After
a journey of eleven days we reached Unalaska, and then our vessel
proceeded through the lonely expanse of Bering Sea to St. Michael's
Island, which was at that time the chief trading post of the Alaska
Commercial Company for the Yukon district. Soon after my arrival
at this remote little settlement I was sent together with another Jesuit
father, to establish a mission station at Tununa, a small Eskimo
village situated on the western extremity of Nelson Island, directly
opposite Nunivak.
vi ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
On reaching Tununa our first work after erecting a little hut
was to acquire some knowledge of the language, and this proved to
be a slow and laborious occupation. Until we had become familiar
with the proper terms for making inquiries, our method was simply
to point to some object and to write down as well as we could
whatever would be said to us in reply. In order to be sure of our
work we usually asked the name of the same object several times
and from different persons. On comparing notes many diversities
would be found, which caused us much perplexity. Afterwards,
when we had madie some little progress, we discovered that very
frequently in place of the real name we had taken down such
expressions as, **I do not know," "Do you want it.^'* "It belongs
to my father," etc. Amid many difficulties I succeeded slowly
in accumulating words and short sentences which I felt sure were
fairly correct, until I had a sufficiently large number to enable me
to begin the work of searching out the grammatical structure of
the language.
After we had become acquainted with the villagers I was accustomed
to invite some of the old people to the mission, and would encourage
them in relating stories. At the outset it was very difficult to
prevail upon them to speak slowly enough to take down their words.
Some of them displayed a childish dread of being near me while I
was writing, for it seemed to them a mysterious and uncanny per-
formance that savored of sorcery. After much patient management
two or three were trained to dictate properly, and thus dozens of
native stories were written out. The analysis of these stories afforded
material for study. Various classifications were made of all of the
words thus collected; paradigm after paradigm was devised and
worked on until the discovery of some new inflection would show
it to be erroneous and a fresh start would have to be made. More
than once all the work of months had to be cast aside. Much of
this work has been done in the gloomy underground abodes of the
Innuit. Many words were taken down while travelling by dog sled
over the ice fields, when the very act of making a hurried note in the
intense cold meant a degree of misery which the written account but
feebly expresses. Frequently have I risked having my hand frozen
by removing the mitten in order to make a memorandum of a chance
expression which would help to elucidate some point which till then
had seemed hopelessly obscure.
PREFACE . Vll
We were destitute of means for consulting any standard works,
and without the assistance of an interpreter. We were in a miser-
able little hut with barely the necessaries of life and entirely
dependent on our own resources, alone among the natives in a
remote and frozen wilderness. At that time the standard alphabet
issued by the United States Bureau of Ethnology for writing aborig-
inal languages had not reached us, so in transcribing Eskimo words
I made use of our English alphabet, which I found to answer very
well for the purpose. The collection and many revisions of this
work occupied most of the time not taken up by professional duties
during the eight years of my sojourn among the Eskimo.
In conclusion I must state in justice to myself that this book was
never undertaken with a view to publication, for it was composed
solely for our personal use on the Innuit missions. Since my return
a number of persons who have examined the manuscript have stren-
uously urged me to have it printed. As my present occupations
prevent me from bestowing more time upon it, I submit it to philolo-
gists in its actual state, no one knowing its many deficiencies better
than myself. The Eskimo matter herein contained may be relied
upon as being correct ; regarding the form, however, in which it is
presented, I leave that to the improvement of those more profoundly
versed in the science of linguistics.
^^ Feci quod potuiy faciant ntajora potentesy
FRANCIS BARNUM, S.J.
CONTENTS
PAGE
Jl RlSl' A\^ti) •••••••••••¥
Introduction xi
Essentials of Innuit i
Native Stories 271
Ethnographical Remarks and Definitions of Certain Innuit
1 ERMS . . . . . • •'. • 3^4
Vocabulary 319
Index ........... 377
IX
INTRODUCTION
Our earliest information concerning the Innuit race dates from
the voyages of discovery made during the sixteenth century by Sir
Martin Frobisher and other navigators, who, in their search for the
*« Northwest Passage," boldly extended their explorations far into
the Arctic region of America. It is from the records of these
adventurous journeys that we first learn of the strange and secluded
people who were found dwelling along these inhospitable shores.
The next reference to the Innuit appears in the famous Lettres
Edifiantes, This valuable work consists of a number of volumes,
which were published annually in Paris, and which were composed
of letters, reports, etc., sent home from various remote regions by
the French missionaries of the Society of Jesus.
Among these letters is one written by Fr. Charlevoix, S.J., a
missionary in Canada, or, as it was then called, La Nouvelle France,
This letter contains an account of the Labrador Innuit, which the
writer compiled from information imparted by the Abnaki Indians,
whose territory then extended to the Gulf of St. Lawrence.
It is to Fr. Charlevoix that we owe the appellation Esquimaux^
which he first made use of to designate these strangers. The word
is a corrupted Abnaki term, meaning those who eat their food raw.
For a long time the French mode of spelling this word held
the supremacy, until supplanted by the more simple Danish form,
Eskimo,
At present, owing to the advance of ethnological research, and
a closer acquaintanceship with the Eskimo, their own native term,
Innuit^ signifying the people^ has become the usual distinctive title
of this race and language.
The Innuit constitute a most homogeneous people; they never
venture beyond their own borders, and they have no near neigh-
bors ; moreover, they are strictly American, being entirely unknown
in Europe.
They enjoy the distinction of being one of the most widely spread
aboriginal races in the world.
xi
xii ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Their territory comprises the whole of Greenland, and the entire
northern coast line of the American continent, extending from the
Straits of Belle Isle on the Atlantic side up to and along the Arctic
Ocean, and down the coast of Bering Sea to the Pacific.
Hardly another race of men lives in a more rigorous climate, or
in a more dreary and inhospitable region. While their extent of
> territory is so enormous, still the greater part of it is but a desolate,
uninhabited waste.
The Innuit are coast dwellers, in the strictest sense of the
term ; the earth is a cruel parent to her polar children and yields
nothing whatsoever for their support, while the sea supplies all
their needs; hence their faithfulness in remaining always in its
immediate vicinity.
Their residences are invariably built by the shore, or else along
. the lower stretches of the more important rivers, so that there does
, not exist a single inland Innuit village, that is, one not accessible
by water.
Rarely, if ever, do the Innuit penetrate into the vast interior of
I their country, or explore its tablelands and mountain ranges. The
! latter they consider to be the abode of evil spirits, a notion which
' is fostered by a certain popular superstition, which may be styled
? a variant of the Rip Van Winkle legend. See 838.
\ On account of the difficulty in obtaining food, the Innuit are
forced to travel about a great deal ; yet they are not a nomadic race.
Every year when the salmon arrive, all the inhabitants migrate to
their regular fishing stations, but they return to their respective
villages after the winter's supply of salmon has been obtained.
The Innuit have no chiefs, either civil or military ; neither have
they any tribal organization. There appears to be a perfect social
equality among them.
They are very fond of visiting ; so that there is a constant
\ interchange of hospitality carried on all along the coast. The
I months of November and December constitute their season for
j feasts. All the inhabitants of a village will set out together to
I spend four or five days at some other village to which they have
. been invited. These invitations are given with great ceremony,
and often a month before the feast is to be held.
; The amount of food consumed during the feasts would sound like
{ an exaggeration, were a full statement given here of the number
INTRODUCTION xiii
of bags of frozen fish, skins of oil, as well as the quantity of blubber,
seal-meat, dried salmon, and other dainties which go to make up an
Innuit banquet.
The worst effect of these feasts is that as so much food is
consumed in the early part of the winter, there is always a shortage
around March ; in fact, many villages are reduced to starvation
every year simply on this account.
Most of the writers who have treated of the subject of the Innuit
race either quietly accept or strongly support the theory that they
came over from the Asiatic coast.
According to one author, the Innuit are supposed to have started
forth from the vicinity of China, coasting along until they arrived
at the extremity of the Aleutian chain, which they followed to the
mainland. From here they moved steadily on around the entire
northern coast until they reached the district known at present as
Labrador. This theory is supported by arguments based upon the
resemblance of a few customs, such as women wearing false hair,
the so-called Tartar tonsure of the men, the custom of eating raw
food, etc., all of which customs may be noticed any day in New
York, London, Paris, and Vienna.
Any one who has travelled through Egypt and Mexico will admit
that there exists a greater and far more wonderful resemblance in
the habitation, dress, diet, and general customs of these two nations
than can ever be found between the Innuit and any other people.
Those who are familiar with the rigors of the Arctic regions
will require far stronger arguments to convince them that a great
migratory horde from the Asiatic side, having reached the American
mainland, instead of proceeding at once in a southerly direction,
after the experience of their first winter, would continue obstinately
to push their way northwards. The leaders of the party would
surely have remarked that the myriads of swans, geese, ducks, and
cranes, as well as the whales and innumerable swarms of seals,
herring, salmon, etc., came up annually from the south ; and hence
it appears incredible that a vast concourse of people searching for
a new home would deliberately turn their backs upon the direction
from whence came their sole supply of food. Furthermore, if these
most hardy pioneers went entirely around that desolate, storm-
tortured coast to the Gulf of St. Lawrence, it is strange that enough
XIV ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
remained all along the road to people the entire five thousand miles
of shore line, without ever attempting to follow the leading party.
The strongest argument against the migration theory, and one
which will appeal most conclusively to any person who has ever
had the slightest experience in winter travel in the Arctic regions,
consists in the difficulty of transporting sufficient food to last a
large multitude during a winter.
It can hardly be supposed that these wanderers travelled during
the short open season, styled by courtesy Summer ; this is the
harvest time, during which they have to employ themselves in
catching and drying fish, as well as hunting seals, deer, wild fowl,
etc., and preserving these for use. The short summer season barely
affords even the most industrious Eskimo sufficient time to collect
and prepare food enough to last his family through the long Arctic
winter. Moreover, food such as the country affords is particularly
hard to transport, as it is either very heavy or very bulky. Dried
fish take up much room, while blubber, oil, and frozen fish make a
very weighty load. The best-equipped dog sled will hardly convey
food enough for two men and the team for a week.
The presence of one homogeneous race around our entire northern
coast may be accounted for in another way. Supposing that the
Innuit were once the occupants of the upper portion of the vast
central region of the American continent, and that, being driven
from thence upwards and outwards by some superior invading force
bent upon their utter expulsion, they would have been scattered all
around the coast line about the same time, by means of the numerous
great rivers flowing to the north. A tradition among the Innuit of
the Yukon delta tells that their ancestors at first endured great
privation because they were ignorant of the proper mode of catching
fish. This would imply that they came from the interior, where frsh
was not one of the staple articles of food. A single local tradition
is of itself insufficient to base a theory upon, but a closer knowledge
of this interesting race may produce more light upon their past.
It is difficult to give any precise statement concerning the number
of this race, on account of the many and great obstacles in the way
of procuring the necessary information.
In the United States census of 1890 the number of Innuit
inhabiting Alaska is set down as twelve thousand. It may be safely
INTRODUCTION XV
asserted that this is a rather liberal estimate. The Danish census
of 1870 gives ten thousand for all Greenland.
Regarding the number of Innuit who dwell along the Arctic
Ocean and throughout the Hudson Bay region, as well as along
the Labrador coast, there is probably no satisfactory account.
At present the Alaska Innuit are rapidly decreasing in number,
owing to the contaminating influences exercised over them by the
whites. Unless immediate and stringent measures be taken for
their preservation, this gentle, inoffensive race is doomed to speedy
extinction.
There is abundant evidence to show that up to a comparatively
recent date they were exceedingly numerous. Prior to the advent
of white men, villages, having from five hundred to a thousand
inhabitants, were thickly dotted along the entire coast line.
Certain districts, which possessed special advantages in regard to
abundance of food, such as around Point Barrow and Point Hope,
as well as a few stretches along Kotzebue Sound, Norton Bay, and
around Eskinok, present even yet ancient vestiges sufficiently exten-
sive to warrant the opinion that these particular settlements must
have numbered as high as five thousand inhabitants.
The first and greatest misfortune which the Innuit suffered from
contact with the whites was the smallpox epidemic which broke out
in 1837. This terrible disease, which raged for four years, spread
all along the coast, and thousands upon thousands of these poor
people were numbered among its victims. Many villages were
almost entirely depopulated, and old persons still relate how the
survivors, not being sufficiently numerous to dispose of the dead
according to the usual custom, were obliged to deposit them in
caches.^ The saddest feature connected with this visitation of the
smallpox is that it is said to have been deliberately and maliciously
introduced in order to thin out the population.
Hardly had the Innuit begun to recuperate from the ravages
wrought by the smallpox when fresh misfortunes fell upon them.
In 1848 an American whaling vessel commanded by Captain Roy
^ The native cache, or storehouse, consists of a small, square building, which for
the sake of security from dogs, etc., is erected upon four high posts. Near Tununa
(Cape Vancouver) in 1891 I visited the ruins of three large caches which were filled
with human bones. An aged native woman who remembered the epidemic told me that
these were the remains of the * pupilraet ' or smallpox victims.
XVI ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
first passed through Bering Strait and penetrated into the icy fast-
ness of the Arctic Ocean. The results of this bold venture proved
so very rich that in a few years this remote region became the
regular cruising ground of the whaling fleet.
The inroad made by the whalers upon the food supply of the
Innuit in their slaughter of the walrus, and the dreadful effects
produced upon the natives by the introduction of liquor and disease
can only be fully understood by those who are familiar with these
people. Nothing but the utmost vigilance and care can avert the
total extermination of the native inhabitants of our Arctic coast.
In respect to the Innuit language, as yet philologists have too
meagre an amount of matter to admit of a full and satisfactory
investigation and comparison of all its local variations.
In the absence of anything better, a convenient classification of
the dialects might be as follows :
I. The Eastern — comprising two sections, viz., Greenland
and Labrador.
II. The Central — i.e., the Churchill River district and the
Mackenzie delta.
III. The Northern — from Point Barrow down to Norton Bay.
IV. The Western — from Norton Bay down to Bristol Bay.
The dialect of the Eastern Innuit has received by far the most
attention. A large number of works relating to this subject has
been published, as will be seen by consulting Filling's Bibliography
of the Eskimo Language^ edited by the Smithsonian Institution,
Washington, D.C.
The earliest writer mentioned is Hans Egede, a native of Norway,
who went to Greenland in 1721. Egede spent fifteen years there,
engaged in missionary labor, during which time he composed a
grammar and began the translation of the New Testament, which
was completed by his son.
Among more modem works the most important and exhaustive
has been written by Dr. Rink of Copenhagen. This work, published
in Danish, consists of several volumes, comprising a vast amount of
Innuit folklore, together with ethnographic and linguistic studies,
collected by the author during his long sojourn in Greenland in the
service of the Crown.
INTRODUCTION - xvil
This dialect has been carefully investigated by the Moravian mis-
sionaries who have been long laboring in those parts, and to them is
due the credit of the following works : Grammatik der Gronlandischen
Sprache. Samuel Kleinschmidt, Berlin, 1857; and Grammatik der
Eskimo-Sprache wie sie an der Labradorkuste gesprochen wird,
Theodor Bourquin, London, 1891.
The Customs of the Central Innuit^ together with a very brief
sketch of their dialect, has been published in French by the Rev.
F. Petitot, O.M.I.
The dialect of the Northern Innuit has the smallest represen-
tation. The principal information on this is to be found in the
United States government publication entitled Report of the Inter-
national Polar Expedition to Point Barrow in 1885, By Lieut.
P. H. Ray, U.S.A. This contains a vocabulary of 711 words and
307 phrases, collected by Lieutenant Ray around Point Barrow and
Cape Smythe.
The dialect of the Western Innuit has been the latest to be inves-
tigated. Dr. W. H. Dall in his work on Alaska and its Resources^
1870, gives some vocabularies collected around the Yukon delta ;
however, the honor of publishing the pioneer work on Western Innuit
is due to the Rev. Augustus Schultze, D.D., President of the Mora-
vian College at Bethlehem, Penn. Dr. Schultze's work appeared in
1891, and is based chiefly upon notes furnished him by the Rev.
John Kilbuck, Director of the Moravian Mission at the mouth of
the Kuskokwim River.
Mention should also be made of a small pamphlet by the Rev.
Zachary Belkoff, of the Russian Mission at Ikogmute on the Yukon.
This is entitled Prayers and Hymns in the Yukon-Kuskokwim
Language f and was printed in New York in 1896. It is printed
entirely in Russian characters, but its value is much impaired on
account of abounding in typographical errors.
A comparison of the grammars and vocabularies just mentioned
will show very clearly that they all apply to one and the same lan-
guage. When the enormous extent of country embraced by these
four groups is considered, as well as the fact that there has been
no mutual intercourse among them since their original separation,
it is truly wonderful that the lapse of ages should have produced
so slight a variation. One cause of this is probably due to the
fact that throughout this whole area the conditions of life are
xvm
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
ever the same ; still this extraordinary uniformity in so widespread
a language deserves to rank as an interesting fact in comparative
philology.
A few lists of words are presented here, in order to afford those
who may not have convenient access to the works referred to a
slight opportunity for comparison.
I. Words exactly Alike
STERN InNUIT.
Western Innuit
{Labrador.)
{Alaska,)
nuna
land
nun^
kilak
heaven
k^mk
inuit
men
innuit
auk
blood
auq
tingmiak
bird
t!ngmeik
mannik
^gg
minik
nutarak
fresh
nut^ik
kajak
canoe
kiyik
umiak
open skin boat
ami^k
una
this one
On^
imnd
that one
!mYni
kina
who
ken&
kia
who
ke^
mane
here
m^ne
nane
where
n&ne
Many other adverbs of place are also alike.
II. Words nearly Alike
{Labrador.)
tukto
tulugak
torngak
tikkek
igalak
pannik
kivgak
ovane
imek
imarbik
{Alaska.)
deer
tiintu
raven
tOlukik
evil spirit
tiingr5k
forefinger
tlikki
smoke hole
ghildk
daughter
p^nnlk^
fox
kivwe^k
here
hw^ne
water
mtik
sea
emiqplk
INTRODUCTION
XIX
Eastern Innuit.
{Labrador,)
mikkijok
mikkivok
tokovok
naglikpok
naglikpanga
unnukpok
child
it is small
he is dead
he loves
he loves me
it is night
Western Innuit.
(Alaska.)
mikklll!gn5k
mikkdk
tokok
nikkllkk5k
nikklikk^"n&
UQuqtok
There is also the word tafiqpSk, meaning all night ; see 6i6.
uvanga
hwe-hw^ng
None of the other personal pronouns have much resemblance.
sikko
ice
chikku
The use of a for ch appears to be one of the chief characteristics
of the Eastern Innuit.
The Variation in the Numerals
Labrador,
Greenland.
Western Alaska.
I
attausek
atausek
itauch^k
2
magguk
mardluk
m^lrtik
3
pingasut
pingasut
plnggTiiyun
4
sittamat
sisamat
st^m^n
S
tellimat
tatdlimat
t^tlim^n
6
arvingat
arfinigdlit
ihvinliggin
lO
kolit
kulit
k5ln
sivorlek
first
cha5kl$k
aipanga
second
iep^
pingajuak
third
pin'gghiyuik
sittamangat
fourth
stimek
tellimangat
fifth
titlimek
The following words are taken from a volume entitled Vocabutaire
Franqais Esquimaude : Dialect dcs Tchiglit, Par le R. P. Petitot,
Paris, 1876.
There are also a few words from the Churchill River district,
Hudson Bay, which are given in the same work.
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
These will afford a slight comparison between the Central and
Western Innuit.
Mackentie Delta,
sang
glace
fum^e
peau
phoque
homme {tnr)
homme mari^
femme
coq de bruyfere
corbeau
embouchure
Pautre
fleuve
eau
voleur
mai
awk
t^iko
ame^k
nat^e^k
afihon
wi
a^na^k
a^k^edjige^k
tulu^a^k
paiia
aypa
ku^vik
imme^k
tigmiye^vik
Western,
auq
chlkku
pQyok
&m6k
niy&k =5 harbor seal
&gntin
(iw6 = her husband
it'nik
ikldzhzhigik =» ptarmigan
tuluklik = raven
pighi = its mouth
i€pa = its other
kwlq
muk
tiguliqtok = he steals
tingmir'vik = March
Churchill R,
ikku
puyok
amek
nadjek
afi^enak
akadjiek
immek
tigiliktok
The following words are taken from the vocabulary collected by
Lieutenant Ray, U.S.A., and will show the variation existing between
the Northern and Western dialects.
Words Alike
*
Northern.
Western,
man
afiun
^ntin
husband (my ?)
uina
Qek^
name (my ?)
atka
itki
blood
au
auk
here
mani
m^ne
sky
sila
sVk
land
nuna
nuni
who
kina
ken&
and
lu
hi
kiyak
kaiak
kly^k
brother
anina
H n!ng a
index finger
tika
tKkk^
akutok
akutok
ikutik (852)
sinew thread
ivalu
{ililu
INTRODUCTION
XXI
Words nearly Alike
Northern,
Western,
youth
girl
ear
nukutpia
niviuksia
siu
nayilthpe^
nuva^qchi
cheu
ice
siko
chiku
tattoo marks
tablurutin
timlurQtJt
water
imuk
muk
woman's knife
ulura
tilla5k
mast
deer
napaksa
tuktu
n^p^t^k
tiintu
raven
tulua
tulukak
bad
asiruk
^shet5k
down
summuiia
chamina
ptarmigan
walrus
akudagin
aibwuk
&kkizhzh!gik
^zhvdk
body (breast ?)
rain
katigai
silalu
katganka (19)
sl^thlak
flood tide
uliktua
(ill5k
wind
anoe
^noki
smoke hole
igala
thai6k
small
mikilyera
mikknmi
bladder
nakasun
n^k&chuk
pipe
I
killer shark
kuinya
uvana
axlo
kwinrik
hwe and hwang
aqhlu (835)
The next list presents some common words which have no
resemblance whatever.
house
river
Northern,
iglu
ku
Western,
iini
kw!q
The Kowak River, which empties into Kotzebue Sound, is
evidently Kuwak = great river ; just as Kwlqpak (224).
snow
apun
kinlksh^k
trail
apkotin
tuma
to-morrow
ublaxo
dnw^kQ
XXll
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
bow
fur coat
skin boat
Northern,
piziksi
atige
(See attegay in the Frobisher list.)
umiak
Western.
6r'lQv0k
itkOk
&nggiik
There is also the word umialik given as captain of a boat; this
corresponds exactly with the suffix in lik (124).
sled
kamotin
€kimrik
At St. Michael's the word for sled is kimaut, and my sled^ kiminlri.
dog
kgmtiqt^
kimmer
(which means a pulUr)
summer upinaksa ka&k
(This may have been meant for spring and so agrees with fip'nlqklk.)
when (in the past)
when (in the future)
kuna
kakogo
Idlnv&k
k^ka (624)
Northern,
Numerals
Western,
atauzik
madro
pinasun
sessaman
tudlima
kodlin
I
2
3
4
S
10
italich^k
m^lr5k
pIngguiyQn
st^m^n
t^tlem^n
koln
3th dialects express
100 in the same
manner; see 586.
tudlimub ipia
100
tatlemSn epeit
A very interesting example, illustrating how slightly this language
has been affected by the flight of time, is shown by the following
extract from The First Voyage of Master Martin Frobisher, The
journey was made in 1576, and the account contains a list of words,
collected along the north shore of the strait leading into Hudson
Bay, and it is entitled
INTRODUCTION
xxui
The Language of the People of Meta Incognita
argotteyt
a hand
callagay
breeches
cangnawe
a nose
attegay
coat
arered
an eye
polleuetagay
a knife
keiotot
a tooth
accaskay
a ship
mutchatet
the head
coblone
a thumb
chewat
an ear
teckkere
the forefinger
comagaye
a leg
ketteckle
the middle finger
atoniagay
a foot
mekellacane
the little finger
In the account of The Second Voyage of Master John Davis in
1586 a longer list is given.
a knife
will you have this ?
my son
a seal
awennye
yonder
icune
come hither
sambah
below
panygmah
a needle
sawygmeg
maconmeg
ugnera
ataneg
Some of these words are interesting from the fact that they show
the diflficulty of the first attempt at obtaining a vocabulary, owing to
not knowing the grammatical structure of the language, and to the
mistakes arising from mutual miscomprehension.
For example, the word panygmah, which is given as the equivalent
of needle^ is evidently a mistake. The word pftnniin& means of my
daughter or my daughter s^ and refers probably to the owner of the
needle.
It frequently happens, in asking a native the name of an object,
that unless the questioner is able to express himself clearly, he will
be told who is the owner.
This applies also to the word given for seal, as ftt&nOk means the
principal man of the village.
Ugnera, for my son, is a similar error ; it is evidently tiginft = that
one over there^ and was the word used by the parent in pointing out
his son.
Icune, for come hither^ is probably meant for iUdnA = that one comings
the one approaching,
Maconmeg, for will you have this? resembles more the query
m&kQchSk or m&kQchSmilk, meaning this sort, some of this kind.
In the first list the words for nose, ear, coat, thumb, forefinger, and
little finger digr^Q fairly well with the modern terms.
XXIV ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
These earliest Eskimo vocabularies are exceedingly interesting,
for when due allowance is made for hasty transliteration of unfamiliar
sounds, as well as for typographical errors through the various
reprints of the original report, the remarkable fact remains that a
list of words collected three hundred years ago, among the Eastern
Innuit of Labrador, should vary so slightly from those in use at the
present day among the Western Innuit of Alaska.
The Russian occupation of Alaska very naturally left a certain
impress upon the native languages, particularly in the vicinity of the
more important trading posts, as Sitka, Kodiak, and Unalaska.
The Russian half-breeds and their descendants residing in these
settlements continue to make use of that language, but throughout
the rest of the Territory it has been supplanted by English.
In the Northern district, from the Arctic Ocean down to the region
around Kotzebue Sound, the Russians had no permanent stations.
Along the Yukon and Kuskokwim Rivers there were several trading
posts, but the only impress left on the Innuit language there consists
of a few words designating imported articles of trade or foreign
objects.
Although adopted into the language, ^most of these words have
been so transformed as to be almost newly coined terms ; thus in the
Russian word ' parahot ' = steamboat^ the r is changed to 1, and with
the Innuit case terminations added, it becomes pSHUiutak, etc.
The following list presents the most of the Russian words which
remain in use throughout the Yukon district.
Many of the words in this list are used only by the whites, to
designate native objects, and have never been adopted by the natives.
No Innuit will ever make u^e of the word * bidarka ' in speaking of
his kiyak, nor will he ever term his house a * bairabora.' Dr. W. Dall,
in his pioneer work on Alaska, which he composed while the Territory
was yet under the dominion of the Czar, very naturally introduced
the Russian names of the various objects which he describes ; thus
the words 'Bi'darka,' 'Bidarra',' 'Shaman,' 'Tundra,' 'Parka,' etc.,
having been made familiar to English readers, his example has been
followed by subsequent writers on Alaska.
INTRODUCTION
XXV
AHrKTL
angel
agiyutGm kuviig^
BAHMPA
native open skin boat
&ngg6^k, umi&k
BAHAAPRA
native skin canoe
kiyak
BAPABOPA
native hut
iini
BAPRA
foreign boat
b&lkis^k
ByjABRA
pin
BMVrA
white whale
shtok
HrpyiiiKA
native feast
kisheyur'nak, etc.
KAHKAH'h
steel trap
kipk&ndk
KAnyffL
adz, imported
kpun
KAMHJTAERA
native waterproof coat
k^sprtik
KAPABHffL
musket
k^ldpenilk
KAPMAH'L
pouch
kirm&n^k
KOJIOKOJB
bell
k^thlakutak, etc.
KOHBKH
skates, imported
kinkak
KHYTL
whip
knutik
KPECTB
crucifix
krist^k
JOKKA
spoon
!pp(in — wel5k
MKUIO
soap
melomiik
MVKA
flour
muklimuk
HEPHA
seal
niyik, etc.
HOWHKT>
foreign knife
nQsek, ch^wtk, etc.
O^KH
goggles
egauk — atskek
IIAUyib
a bunch of tobacco
leaves
kilththlttqtat
IIA-IATKA
tent
p^litkdk
HAPKA
native fur coat
itkuk
nAPOxo;i;i>
steamer
piUhutik
nJATOKt
handkerchief
pl&t5k
nopoxt
gunpowder
puyoqkak
PEMEHB
native skin rope
t^phr^k
CAXAPA
sugar
s^klir
CHHIKA
matches
kinner^t, etc., spltsk^k
TyH;tPA
Arctic moorlands
^kulii
THCflHA
thousand
titlem^n epa&t kdldq-
konuk
XJIM
bread
hl^b^k
HAH
tea
chi
^HHHKt
teakettle
chinek
HP'-PTB
devil
ttingr^niy&k
niAMAFB
sorcerer
ttingrai!k
K)KA.1A
dried fish
tmithltik
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
1. The Innuit language is rich in vowels.
English.
German,
I
A
ale
Rehe
2
A
at
Stadt
3
••
A
ah
Rath
4
A
air
Meer
S
£
he
Dieb
6
E
net
Retter
7
I
ice
Ei
8
I
in
Ritt
9
no
Roth
lO
6
not
Rotte
II
u
rule
Ruthe
12
tJ
pull
Hund
13
•
u
but
14
u
pew
kuhl
15
u»
16
AU
how
Thau
17
YA
ja
18
OtJ
French,
Italian.
aimer
deh
ma
amore
armoire
Amo
cher
clero
si
io
cet
senza
mais
ai
minime
sicuro
mot
come
loi
onda
vodte
uno
botte
tu
piu
i'ya
aura
Baia
^ Neutral vowel. See 7.
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
On the Consonants
2. The following table will present the consonants which occur
in Innuit, and also most of the usual combinations :
ch
3
d
4
f
5
8:
6
ghw
7
h
8
hi
9
hr
lO
hw
II
J
12
k
13
14
k
V
k
15
kl
16
kn
17
kr
18^
k8
19
20
1^
kuk
21
kw
22
kz
23
k
24
tt
25
48m
occurs only in the Kuskokwim River region, where it
replaces p.
has always the sound of ch, as in ' chapter/ — like the
Russian t{. C is the next most common letter after k ;
Italian 'cielo.'
like b, occurs only along the Kuskokwim, where it replaces t.
exactly as in English : mS-luf-kak, small bell ; skaftoa, /
scatter,
always pronounced hard, as in * get ' ; French ' gant ' ; German
* Geld/
a common ending in verbs is ghwu ; it is a subtle sound,
which should be heard from a native. It occurs much
in the dual (see 519), where it sounds as gunneyghwo.
as in English.
a common combination in verbs : kini-u-hlo-nA.
used in third dual of verbs : hrftCk, also pis-kai-hrftt-nilk.
as *wh' in English: hw6, // Idt-tu-hwl ; Spanish *huerta.'
as in 'jam'; Italian 'giorno/
as in English. This is the most-used letter in the language ;
French * quart'
a strong rasping guttural.
k sounded alone (see 8). This k * solus ' is very common :
tumktok, sounded just as tumknrtok with the kur short
and obscure,
as in * sprinkle,' * tinkle,' etc.
almost the same as k : knOrOk.
as in English.
ftkfiksitoa. Sometimes it is aspirated ksh : kshar-kfttA-mun.
strongly hissed : tolth-ks-sag-m&ut.
an explosive of frequent occurrence : unA-kik-kC.
used as q : kwechoa = German * Quelle' ; French * quoi.'
kzjSflnuk as IdzhzhCftnuk.
one of the most difficult sounds, resembling the Polish *• 1,'
which is used to represent it : Hn, 4mSg&ka.
'this and the next are combinations of the preceding and
have to be learned from a native. They prevail in the
dual of pronouns : ieldnka, iemug'nuk.
27
28
1
IP
29
so
m
31
32
n
n
33
ng
34
gu
35
36
mw
P
OJV THE CONSONANTS 3
26 11 exactly as in Spanish. This frequently occurs with u:
pil-Uu-gha.
as in English.
Ipunguuk, Ipu-gC-tut.
as in English.
or m alone as in Irish and Scotch patronymics : &chiknauqtoa.
as in English.
alone as IlvA,^ house ; sounded SnnA.
very common and just as in English : ekamrangkatoa, I have
a sled,
the same sound only used as initial : Ignu, man,
mwCrtok, // is full,
as in English. Very often some will pronounce it much
like b ; however, the majority give its clear, true sound.
37 $ common among the duals of the participial forms of the
verb ^hun.
as in * preparatory.*
has the sound usually given to the Greek ^ : tup-psftq-kok.
nippt&.
this letter is used to represent the common guttural ; ^ Iq is to
be sounded exactly as the German < ich/ oq as the Scotch
Moch' or Irish * lough ': chukftnrftqtoa = chukanrachtoa.
as in English,
the most difficult and subtle sound in the language, and
also of very frequent occurrence. Somewhat like * hgr '
strongly aspirated,
as in English : sCvIqchftmft.
alone and hissed is very common : tA-Uu-S-ugna.
nlqsfutak, the toggle on dog harness = nach sfew tak ; Italian
* sfumata.'
as in English : nish-kg ; French < chasse.'
as in English : 9-ki-yfi-8k&-nA ; Italian ' schiavo.'
as in English : sldq-tok.
as in English : sid-ru-tok, snC.
as in English : stuk, pik-ste-ghwu.
the Russian m,: nuq-atchC.
as in English.
alone very frequent : t-hAlth-ko-nuk, tketoa.
as in English : Idthl&n.
thlmft.
^ 3. Q was selected to avoid the awkward combinations arising from having two distinct
sounds for ch. Thus, chaq instead of chach, and chaqchaq instead of chachchach, etc.
38
?r
39
ps
40
Pt
41
q
42
r
43
f
44
8
45
\
46
8f
47
8h
48
8k
49
8l
SO
an
51
8t
52
8tch
53
t
54
t
55
thl
56
thlm
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
agiya-yas-thlrttt
aq-thr-hir'lOkQ.
tlis-tfik-kft-nilk.
as in English ' battle,' ' cattle/ etc. : tuU-hiil.
same aspirated : cbl-ti-tlth-h&-&giii.
IttrSlnOkft = my ring finger, Tr initial is very rare ; one
of the few words beginning thus is tr^ldLn-ny&k,
wolverine,
alone and hissed : pAk-U-klin-ntt, Iq-ts-thlin-nea.
is t alone, but very guttural : tqhSus^iiA, / am stiff; German
* doch.'
tvSthienilrfta, triqtok.
as in English : pivn&k, tttwdft, Iv-ySu-rft-kft.
as in English : wCksklfine ; French * oui.'
as in English : i-yOx-ku-mftn-rit-ta, IwalSxkluka.
as in English: yIntOk ; Spanish 'ya'; German 'ja/
as in English : Pizi ; German * Hase * ; French * zHe.*
ta-zh^tOk = Idlh&zhghwa : as in * azure '; French * jour.'
On the Diacritic Points
4. In addition to the ordinary long and short marks, it is necessary,
in order to convey some semblance of certain sounds peculiar to the
Innuit language, to adopt a few extra signs, which may greatly assist
the student in acquiring a good pronunciation.
57
thlr
58
thr
59
tl
60
61
Uth
62
tr
63
ts
64
tq
65
tv
66
V
67
w
68
X
69
y
70
z
71
zh
I
+
Prolongation
^
2
>
Voice glide
yag'
3
■■ut
Brevissime
ki^ik
4
-^
Brace
pr
5
V
Solus
t
6
2
Trill
a»
5. Prolongation, — Dwelling long on one sound. This is shown
in the word for yes, which is ah. In narratives toi is often toi.
6. Voice Glide, — This is very common : for example, iyag'yuqtoa
is sounded iy&g g6r yuq toa. In the duals of verbs it is constantly
met with : mug'nuk, nim'nC, pilig'mft sound as muggSmuk, idmmSme,
pniggSrmft.
7. Brevissime, — This is to render the vowel extremely short, and
occurs chiefly over u in the duals : kSputAtuk. The vowel is slurred
ON THE DIACRITIC POINTS 5
SO that it sounds as ik or Sk: izhl ^yolk of eggy pronounced almost
as if one syllable — ^zhe.
8. Solus, — This means that the consonant under it is to be pro-
V
nounced or hissed by itself : tkfitnrfttok is to be pronounced t-kfit-n-rft-tok.
Turn k tok, travelling is good^ the k sounds like * cur ' but very short
and obscure. This solus sign occurs over many letters.
9. Brace. — This signifies that the letters under it are to be
sounded, as just explained in the solus paragraph.
10. Trill, — This occurs over the short a ; the vowel is duplicated
or pronounced twice : tftgomSa^une = tft-gu-mft-ah-ahlune. There is
always a long a before it. This differs entirely from simple pro-
longation ; here the same note is struck twice.
11. On Nunivak Island, and in the villages around Cape Van-
couver, the first personal pronoun hw6 is pronounced wft.
12. From the northern shore of Norton Sound, and up along the
Arctic Ocean, hwC is replaced by uyftngnX.
13. Throughout the villages of the Yukon delta, St. Michael's
Island, and parts of the Norton Sound region, z is a much favored
letter, as
niy^5l0k girl n&zauhol5k
tungr&niy&k devil tungr^LgnS^&k
kithlun peet how are you ? kithlun pizet
Oyok you there ! uzok
The Kuskokwim Innuit term these folks in derision pizzUdlrSet
14. Among the Innuit around the mouth of the Kuskokwim River
there is a tendency to sound t as d.
tinggauh5l5k boy d&ngauholok
15. There are but few words beginning with a.
s^kisek a grade of sorcerer next to tuyuk
s&liy3.k a summer cache for fish
seyuk a little bird like a thrush
16. It will be noticed that a short vowel very frequently becomes
lengthened in certain cases.
On account of this peculiarity of the language, an Innuit vocabu-
lary cannot present all the words belonging to one group in regular
order.
slln a hone slegoa I hone
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Dual Nouns
17. Certain nouns are naturally always used in the dual.
ptipshuk scissors
p^nruk socks of native work
chukek imported socks
t&nglQk snowshoes
Extra examples will be found in 66.
18. Many others are used idiomatically in the dual.
hw3.nkiik you and I = we both
y^lla^gne day before yesterday = two days ago
t&pt&lraek pocket knife = which folds over twice
ek&mr^k sled = pair of runners
^kuyutuk snuff mortar
chKvoa.qka my upper front teeth
kognuk grave
The verb must agree in number when the subject is dual,
kognuk Imkuk uthl^g^qta I approach that grave
Plural Nouns
19. Certain nouns are
generally
used in the plural.
tumtit
track, trail
tumilthhrit
an old trail
likaat
herring roe on sea grass
puUiyirit
a path through bushes
Examples in the possessive form
•
•
kitgSnka
my breast
kikevenki
my needle case
tailuyinka
my fish trap
uy&kunk^
my neck
20. Some nouns have a different signification in the plural.
nun^, sing. the earth, land
nun^t, plur. village
kSiak, sing. roof, sky
kSlet, plur. heaven
ughet beard
AO(/AS — GENDER 7
21. The verb, the demonstratives, etc., must be in the plural.
m^kut pulliy^r^t n^nv&mun kannaumaut
this path leads to (ends at) a lake (858)
nun&t uetilraet em^qpem snene
there is a village on the seashore
kSlet klegh^tne
in heaven = of the heavens in their uponess
Collective Nouns
22. Distinct collective nouns appear to be very scarce in the
Innuit language, the only example met with thus far being
k^tgh^t a herd
kitgnit ttintut tingh&nki I see a herd of deer
This want is supplied by the suffix mentioned in 221.
Gender
23. In Innuit there is no grammatical distinction made regarding
gender.
It is only from the context that the gender is known, hence the
third personal pronoun is used indifferently for ///;;/, her^ or //.
24. Great care is always shown in expressing the sex, and this
sometimes makes the sentence appear overloaded.
Toine Agiyuttim Katunra yorqtok thlenuk tiingauhau'lune
then the son of God was born of her, a boy
EXTRA EXAMPLES
matft angta ^
ii-rerthlenilraa
tSngauh6r6muk
n^zauh5l6romuk
when it comes forth, that which is bom [is] a boy (girl)
3.1thk3.nkatoa ai'r^rnS.muk I have an older sister, a woman
,,,+.. r n^zauholoromuk I have a younger sister, a girl
kinggnoklingkatoa \ ^ - .^^. . ti t, 1
°° L tilngauloromuk I have a younger brother, a boy
!min& nukilthpe^r&t^k k^tunr^ngkilthlune tangaliholor'muk
that chief = best hunter having a son, a boy
8
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
On Words having a Resemblance
25. The Innuit language presents a number of words which at
first appear to sound alike, but on closer examination these will be
found to differ sufficiently either in accent or quantity to preclude
any ambiguity.
The following are a few of the most common examples.
List of Words sounding much Alike
26.
iln^ki
my mother
ntiki
it is his house
&nm
faeces meae
nQqtoa
I grin
illleghoa
I fear
ntiqtoa
I get up
^lleghoa
I have sleeves
mtik
water
ilmek
skin
muk
milk
ilmek
door
pimyok
tail
chi
tea
p^myok
you up there !
chi
his things
p&nghun
double blade paddle
chinggnauqka I combine
p^nghtin
fin
chinggn^qka
I kiss
peviit
up
ikkCrtok
it is too small
peviit
ours
Ikkitok
it is clean
pHilra^Lgn^
I am making
lilulSkkoa
I have colic
pithlilra^gna
maybe I did
niuthlSkkoa
I am sorry
p(]igwo&
I am
Iqtoa
I fall
pugwo&
I bob up
eqtoa
I am snow blind
sTqtoa
I prepare fish to dry
Iggoa
I swallow
stiqtoa
I sweat
irqtoa
I hide
stuk
finger nail
iyautuk
mud poles for kiyak
stiik
both drift down
iyauqtuk
they both went
tim^kinki
all the things I have lost
k^ntiqtoa
I am angry
t^m^qkinldL
all of both
k^nntiqtoa
I speak
tangle5qtoa
I repair my snowshoes
ke^
who
t^nglo&qtoa
I walk in snowshoes
keya
why
uet^lgn5qtoa
I am tired of staying
kistik
tassel
uet^lgnauqtoa I am still staying
kist6k
convulsion
uni
this
ninggnoa
I reach for
un^
down
ningghoa
I have a new house
tiqt2.ka
I pick it up
na'uhwS
where
tiqt^ka
I cast it away
naliw^
its fruit
yuet6k
no one is there
n6k&
my house
yuet6k
it is nobody's
WORDS HAVING A RESEMBLANCE 9
27. Among these words there will be found some which are per-
fect homonyms ; still all ambiguity is avoided by the fact that these
homonyms differ in their increments.
^mek = entrance
or door
= ^megiim
^mek = a skin or
pelt
= ^mem
miik = water
= mrhiim
muk = milk
= mugiim
un^ = this
= urn
lina = down
= unum
28. The Innuit language presents one general form or declension,
according to which not only all the nouns, but also the whole of
the pronouns, and the various possessive and participial forms, are
declined.
It often happens that in the course of declension a short vowel
will become lengthened.
There are six cases in Innuit, the first of which is double : these
are explained in 36.
29.
2
3
4
5
6
,. ,. {Intransitive
Localis
Modaiis
Terminalis
yialis
j£qualis
Agiyun
God
Agiyuttim
God
Agiyutme
in God
Agiyutmtik
about God
Agiyutmiin
to God
Agiyiitktin
through God
Agiyiitttin
as God
NoTS. — The names of the second, third, fourth, and fifth cases are the same as used
by Dr. Bourquin in his Grammatik der Eskimo Sprtuhe,
30.
Cases.
Land.
Creek,
Moon.
Intrans,
ntm&
kwecho^
6rral6k
Trans.
nun&m
kwecho^r^m
^rraltim
Loc,
nun&me
kwecho^r^me
^rraltime
Mod.
nun^m&k
kwecho2.r^mtik
^rralumtik
Term.
nun^mun
kwecho^r^mtin
^rralumQn
Vial.
nun&ktin
kwecho^rqkiin
^rraluktin
j£^qual.
nun^tiin
kwechoirqtiln
^rraluttin
lO
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Cases.
Intratis,
Trans,
Loc,
Mod,
Temi,
ViaL
yEguaL
Water.
mtik
mrhtim
mtirh'mg
iniirh'mtik
mtirh'mtin
mtiqkiin
mtiqtiin
Smoke.
puyok
puytlm
puyQm6
puyumtik
puyumtin
puyukiin
puyuttin
Ice.
chiku
chikum
chikama
chlkumtik
chikum tin
chlkukiin
chikutiin
31. The following examples show the three numbers.
Cases.
Intrans,
Trans.
Loc.
Mod.
Term.
Vial,
^qual.
Cases.
Intrans.
Trans.
Loc.
Mod.
Term.
Vial.
^qual.
Sing.
kw!q
kwlgiim
kwlg^me
kwlg^mtik
kwlg^miin
kwlqktin
kwlqtiin
Sing.
ingrik
ingrim
ingrime
ingrimtik
ingrimtin
ingriktin
ingritiin
River
Dual.
kwlguk
Ingrig'ne
ingrig'ntik
ingr][g*ntin
ingrigin'ghtin
ingriqtiin
Plur.
kwegtit
kwigiig'ne
kwegne
kwfgiig'ntik
kwegniik
kwigtig'ntin
kwegniin
kwigtiqkttn
kweqktin
kwlgiiqtiin
kweqtiin
Mauniain
y
Dual.
Plur.
ingrlk
Ingrift
ingrine
ingriniik
fngriniin
ingritthiin
ingr!tttin
On the Terminations
32. Class I ending with a vowel :
I
&
&m
sVk
sl^m
weather
2
&
Cim
kemtiqt^
kemiiqtHm
dog
3
&
em
^tulra^
^tulraem
singer
4
oa
Olr&m
kwecho^
kwecho&r&m
creek
S
s
Im
sne
sn^m
shore
6
s
em
k^zhge
k^zhgdm
house
ON THE TERMINATIONS
1 1
7
e
im
^tuyule
^tuyulim
singer
8
i
fm
pi
pirn
outlet
9
u
&m
chikku
chlkkum
ice
lO
8t2
stiim
pelista
pellsttim
doer
II
8te
8ten
iikfukste
likftiksten
believer
33. Class II ending with a consonant:
I
ftk
&m
kantak
k^ntim
wooden bowl
2
ftk
em
k^imk
keilem
sky
3
Sn
&tfim
ghan
gh&tQm
native bucket
4
thIXk
thlriim
klingthiak
klingthlrtim
scar
5
ek
egtim
^mek
^megum
entrance
6
ek
em
^mek
Smem
hide
7
ik
em
Sgiyuvik
igiyuvem
church
8
ik
im
Ingrik
ingrim
mountain
9
ilk
Igum
tungraiik
ttingrSlgum
sorcerer
lO
5k
um
ok6k
okum
blubber
II
60k
oftm
tiinttighook
ttintiighoSm
picture of a deer
12
fik
•fim
yuk
yum
man
13
iq
igilm
kwKq
kwigtim
river
14
en
etiim
Sken
aketQm
bed place
15
aun
autum
nufkalin
niifkaiittim
native tool
16
iln
iltum
sl^shun
sl^shutiim
thermometer
34. It is a very remarkable feature of Innuit that the character-
istic of number always precedes the case termination.
Loc,
' Sing.
kw!giime
in a river
Dual
kw!gtig'ne
in both rivers
Plur,
kwegne
in rivers
It is very usual for a short vowel in the singular to become
lengthened in the plural.
35. The vialis and aequalis cases generally revert to the form of
the intransitive, as :
Intrans, kw!q
ViaL kwiqkiin
^quaL kwlqttin
while the other cases follow the theme of the transitive.
12
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
On the Agentialls Case
36. This case has two forms in the singular, both of which have
the force of the nominative : one form has an accidental force of the
accusative, and the other an accidental force of the genitive.
The first of these forms is the intransitive and the second is the
transitive, and they are used as follows :
37. The intransitive of the agentialis with a verb
in first aspect intransitive is equal to the nominative,
and answers the question who.
Intrans,
Trans,
V
Agiyun &tinr5k nun^me
AgiyQn €t6k
God is Master in the world
God is
38. The intransitive of the a^^entialis with a verb
in first aspect transitive is equal to the accusative, and
answers the question wfiom or what,
tdkklor^piit Agiyun tim^lthko^n pen&roOk
we term him Almighty God
39. The transitive of the agentialis with a verb in
first aspect transitive is also equal to the nominative.
AgiyutHm p!lle^knthh5&ktit
AgiyatQm plsk^ktit netsklune
ch^rov&nrhtim ^tr^qt^
God made us
God orders us to obey him
the current carries it down
40. The transitive of the agentialis with a subordinate
substantive is equal to the genitive, and answers the
question whose.
AgiyutQm k^nniirqy^ri of God his message = the Gospel
tim^tft yOt n6tnaur^tgh^: AgiyutQm kinrair^ntik k&thl^thlo^
let the people hear me : I speak the words of God
Note. — See 397, how this case supplies the want of a or an and the.
41. The transitive is to be used in all expressions of place.
tiinuerutHm o^tmiin plgh^ y^kshlnratdk
the upper mouth of the slough is not far off
m^riyir^m kien^nne enungkalik it is Ipng on the mud
AGENTIALIS CASE 1 3
In most of the inflected languages, particularly the Classical and
Sclavonic groups, all expressions relating to location are very much
complicated, as the various prepositions, etc., require different cases.
Innuit differs from these languages, by presenting a wonderful
instance of uniformity in this respect.
nQm ^cha^ne beneath the house
nUm ^m^tene beyond the house
nQm ch&nni^ne close to the house
nQm nio&ne in the house
nliin killo&ne back of the house
These are all possessives and are treated in 386.
nQm ^cha^ne of the house in its undemess (lit.)
chiktim nid^n6 of the ice in its inn ess
^megtim kull€ne above the door, of the door in its
aboveness
These may all be used in the personal form (371).
nQm Hia&ntoa I am in the house
42. If the idea of motion toward is to be combined, the only
change necessary is to give the governing word its appropriate
case, as :
n^vSMm k5kine in the centre of the lake
iy^'yuqtoa n^nv^h^m k5ktoiin I want to go to the centre of
the lake
43. The transitive of the agentialis is always to be used when-
ever possession is to be expressed.
ntimti puyo& of our house, its smoke
kw!qpem chlkkue of the great river, its ice
emiLqpepem tqhiL of the ocean, its bottom
kw6ch5ar^m pign^ of the streamlet, its mouth
chUsklUn em& of the cup, its contents
Note. — As this idiom is clear, all similar expressions will appear in their usual
English form, as, the middle of the rsver^ etc.
14
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
On the Localis Case
44. The characteristic of this case is C.
The localis answers the question where^ and expresses in.
kw!g^me kwematok
At^mti finena uet&chShkokQt
he swims in the river
we will be in our Father's house
Note. — All expressions of location, position, etc., are rendered by the localis.
A reference to 41 will show the importance of this case.
45. In expressing comparison the localis is always used. (See
572.)
ume t^k!nr55k
Qn& kemtiqt^ peningro5k tsiume
it is longer than this
this dog is stronger than that one
46. Time when is always expressed by the localis. (See 616.)
tikshOme
m&tume
in winter time
in this time
47. A distinctive feature of the Innuit langu^e is the idiomatic
use of the localis case :
In all indefinite terms, such as are shown in 619.
Also in general expressions, as in jj^.
On the Modalis Case
48. The characteristic of this case is muk, gnuk, nuk.
The modalis answers the questions ivliaty about w/iat.
The modalis expresses any, some^ part of.
ch^miik peyuqchet
chuy^mtik peyuqtoa
^tiilra^muk nechtiqtoa
Agiyutmtik k&thlauchuw&mk!n
chlker&nki chiyumiik
ch&miik ki peyuqtutft
what do you want ?
I want some tobacco
I want to hear some music
I want to speak to you about God
I gave them some tea
do you want anything ?
TERMINALIS CASE
IS
49. The modalis case is used also instead of the indefinite article,
which is lacking in Innuit. (See 689.)
50. Sometimes in conversation certain words in the modalis are
abbreviated, as :
ftmthlSkyfth ? in place of the full &mtiaSkyfth'milk ? more still, eh ?
On the Terminalis Case
51. The characteristic is un.
This case occurs with verbs of motion.
It answers the questions to whom, to w/iat, in or on what,
whither, etc.
kwKg'mtin ly^k^ltht^
iySg'yuqtoa taukuntin Ingrintin
iy^g'yuge^koa ninv^h^m ikko&ntin
unS. ka kwiq ^numaiik em&qpig'miin
kinn^ 3.numauk n3.nv&h3.p3.g'miin
tleu kiner^mtin
k^tglntin thle^k
n&tmtin iyikchet
p^l^hwut&miin tikkdi
mtiq'mun Iqtok
ttingle^niin nummiin iy3.qtoa
kw!q ero&qpKg'mtin ^num^lune
let us go to the river
I want to go to those mountains
I would like to go to the end of the lake
does this river flow to the sea ?
no, it flows into a large lake
put it in the comer
they both laid it on his breast
where are you going ?
I embark on the steamer
it fell into the water
I go to the next house
the river flows to the sea
52. Certain idiomatic expressions require this case.
itg&tft slSkluke yuku'timtin keep your feet dry =
thy feet, take care of them to the dampness
In like manner :
eqktn sl3.kluke puyumtin
{ngrimtin k^sketoa
keep your eyes from the smoke
I scale the mountain
53. Verbs of exchanging require this case.
n&vrotaka okoh^k ^ts&r^ntin I swap a chunk of blubber for some
berries
n^vrot^nka ^ts^tkwenr^t dkoh^g'mtin I exchange a few berries for some oil
n^vrot&ki eldLmr&k kiy^tin I barter a sled for a canoe
1 6 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
On the Vialis Case
54. The characteristic of this case is kan. In possessive nouns
this ending varies according to euphonic changes.
The vialis answers the questions by wliat means^ in what fnann€r,
by what way^ etc.
iy^qtoa ^tim^ kiyakiin I go in my father's kiyak
fhaloqkiin uy^ngtdk he looks down through the smoke hole
ek^mr^mkiin iye go on my sled
^tauchekiin k^ iy^qt&k did they both go together ? (i.e., as one)
tumllthhrSkiin lye go by his trail
stok ^chemekiin it drifts down
ch^mekiin ^pkuchi^qta
what does he complain of ? (i.e., a sick person)
chelign^kiin k^ t^m^ntlhtinratutft
have you been there before ?
V
ch6(itnciin taguluku niyagn^ti tupaqts^'luku
taking her by the ear, he shook her to try to awaken her
n^nt& imln^ yuntlkhr^ {ggyarS.mekiin naiithlulrlUl .^
where is that young man who is suffering from his throat ?
iimyu^mekiin tokutnrachuy^kluku
in his mind he did not want to kill him
sn&kiin iy^qtoa
I go by the bank = along the shore
kwiqpem snekiin iyiqtoa
I go by the bank of the Yukon (i.e., its bank ; see 43)
55. Verbs of following take the vialis.
toitlu klnggho^kiin m^Uqk^gh^ then he followed behind him
iy^g'3^qtoa ^pprukiqkiin I want to go by the Apruka
tunuerutkiin uktin iyelthta let us go by this slough
tifngluwSki tikso^kiin
I hit him on the head = I fist him by his head
tingluw3gn^ kitg^nkiln
he hits me on the breast
ptnggniyQthtin k^nra^thtin kithlitliqtdk
he speaks three languages = by three languages
jequaus case— time forms — past form 17
On the iBqualis Case
56. The characteristic of this case is tttn.
The aequalis answers the questions like what or as what^ according
to what,
pivstiln iyokklereluku make it like yours
yuplqstiin nechukum^ when I hear as a native = when 1 41 speak Innuit
irkthlutiin pe^kon^ku do not do it wrong
V
pechlr'y^r^mthiin peukQt we act according to our custom
mlkklUigndktiin lydkutft you are like a baby
hwegnS. iydkuchak^ lyokinratok ip^tsttin
my way is not like yours
nun^ uet<hluqput ^ngk^tsttin lyokdk taugw^m ^ngghdk
the earth we inhabit is like a ball only it is large
mumlqtaugw5k yiiqstiin
it is translated into Innuit
n&kllkk^mkin kitiinr^mttin
I love you as my son (i.e., as I love him)
In the opposite sense the sentence would be as follows :
nS.klikk^mk!n kS.tilnr^kilra^tiin I love you as my son (i.e., as he loves me)
On the Time Forms
57. Innuit nouns possess the property of combining with the
characteristics of tense, and thus adding to each word a present, past,
or future signification.
The tense characteristic precedes the case ending.
Pres, kepQtndk trading
Past keputhiak trading
Fut, keputik^k trading
On the Past Form
58. These words are much used where in English the relative is
employed.
^kkw^w^k ImlnS. yuk ly^thlflk tokok the man who went yesterday is dead
Here iyathluk means the person who went.
1 8 ESSENTIALS OF INN (/IT
59. This form is declined as follows :
iy&thmk iy^lthhrQk lyilthhri^t
iydlthriini
iyathlQr'me iyilthhrtig'ne iyithllir'ne
nauthluthlCik an invalid = a person who was sick
iy^'yOthlCik one who wanted to go
yundlththlCik a deceased person
dngthlQmdkshithKik one not yet baptized
The negatives are formed in the usual way.
kik{fk^thl(ik a rheumatic kilklfkiinrithKik a non-rheumatic
a'uqkut yunrflthhrilit k^n'y^r^k^t
those ceased to be folks, it is their language
On the Future Form
60.
lethl^qk&k the learning thloldthl^qldik the curing
iydthl^qk&k the going t^kuthldqkdk the finishing
pillethl^qkdk the making tithl^qk&k the coming
p!llethlSqka.k chiprniqkok it is difficult to make = the making (future)
61. The use of this future form constitutes an idiom which at
times is very difficult to translate.
V
ningllkiqtirutilkan taugw&m kuttrit tketldqtut
This is a saying connected with the weather. In April the
myriads of geese, ducks, cranes, and other migratory birds begin to
arrive around the shores of Norton Sound. The cranes are the
latest to come, and their presence marks the final close of the long
Arctic winter. This gives rise to the saying that *' There is no
more cold after the coming of the cranes."
Pres, ningli cold
Past ninglithliik cold
Fut, ninglikak cold
NingUk&qtirut&kftn, when (future) cold is lacking (i.e., when there is
no more cold weather). This is derived from ningUkftqtirQtok (see
Mode IX), and is the third singular of a form explained in 522.
THE POSSESSIVES I9
Tketllqtfit, they habitually come^ third plural of tketl&qtoa. Mode CLIV,
V
of the verb tketoa, / come, *
The above saying is :
The cranes regularly come only when there will be no more cold.
62. Sometimes the future form of a word will have a secondary
meaning of its own, as :
Pres, puyok smoke
Past puyQthltik what was smoke
Fut, puyoqkak what will be smoke (term for gunpowder)
The Possessives
63. Possession is always expressed by means of suffixes, which
convey also the idea of person and number.
64. The following is a partial paradigm showing the intransitive
form of the possessive suffix.
65. It will be noticed that the endings presented in the following
paradigm correspond with those of the verb. (See 467.)
ist
' Sing, my kS we both, our hpuk our hput
Dual both my qka. we both, both our qpuk both our qput
Plur, my nka, we both, our puk our put
' Sing, thy fi you both, your zuk your ze
2d - Dual both thy qkfi you both, both your qtuk both your qche
Plur, thy tn you both, your tuk your che
3d
' Sing, his & they both, their ak their ^t
Dual both his ak they both, both their qkSk both their rqkSt
Plur, his i they both, their k5k their it
EXAMPLES OF POSSESSIVES
66. The following list will serve as examples for forming the
possessive.
Note. — These examples are all in the intransitive.
my paddle ^no&rutka ^gno^ruthft ^gno^rute
my dear mother an^chugn^k^ ^.n^chugn^n ^n^chugne
my aunt ^n^nn^ka ^n^nn^n ^n^nne
20
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
my beloved mother
my brother
my elder brother
my father
my fur blouse
my mother
my stone axe
my big knife
my future
my knee
my knees
my eye
my eyes
my members
my little finger
my little fingers
my neighbor
my water boots
my elbow
my heart
my leg
my legs
my custom
my breast
crown of my head
my body
the small of my back
my grandmother
my head
my little house
my wife
my village
my gun
my bow
my workman
my toe
my lungs
my intelligence
my arm
my shoulder
my toes
my mind
^nikswalatikH
^n^kswalatin
in^kswalet&
inlnggn^kH
^nlnggn^n
^ninggni
^mdkklir'holuk^
S.m5kklirhulun
im5kklirhuloa
^tllk^
^tlln
^ta
^tkuka
^tkiin
^tko^
ch&kutik^
ch&katii
ch^kute
ch&kyutlk^
ch^kyutii
ch&kyute
ch^wiqp&ldl
ch^wiqpen
ch^wiqpa
cheuniiqkaka
chaonuqldln
cheunuqldl
chlskdki
cheskiin
chasko&
chlskiikkH
cheskukkiin
chaskuk
ak^
en
agni
aqka
eqkOn
ak
epink^
apiqtft
apa
Ikkllthkoki
!kkilthkiin
ikknthkoa
ikkllthkukkil
Hckilthkiiqkiin
!kknthkuk
!liar'16ka
lliar'mn
iliar'loa
iwruchilthk^
Iwruchllthktln
Iwrtichak
ikkuyeki
Ikktizhghiin
Ikkiizhghi
irqch^kok^
Irqch^kiin
irqch^qkoa
Irruki
Irrtin
!rrho^
Irruqka
irrtiqkQn
!rruk
iyokuchaki
lydkuchin
iyokucha^
k&tg^nki
kiitg^n
k^tgi
kdkkiki
kikh^n
k^khi
kiki
kin
k!n^
kiik^kii
kukin
kuk^
mauqholuk^
mauqholun
mauqholo^
nS.shkok^
n^shkiin
nishko^
nltchoika
n!tcho^rS.n
nltchoire
nulek^
nula^n
nulah^
nun^ka
nunin
nuna
nuttki
nutthft
nut hi
dr'luvuki
dr'luvhrttn
dr'luvhra
pishtkika
p!shtkin
pishte
pokutokii
pokuttin
pokutoa
ptiktautiika
ptiktauttatii
puktautti
sl^k^
slin
sl&ne
t&thlirka
tathUn
t&thiaa
tuzhika
tuzh!ghiin
tuzhgi
ughar^nki
ugh^ritft
ughlri
timyuilk^
limyMn
timyug^
EXAMPLES OF POSSESSIVES
21
my heart
my head
my neck
my life
my song
my man
my folks
ilnggnuvatka
dnggnuvitft
ttnggnuvite
iikshuka
tikshtin
tikshaa
uyakiinka
uyakutft
uyakue
yuchaka
yuchin
yuchaa
yuSrutka
jruirtin
yu^rute
yuka
yun
yune
yunka
yutft
yue
67. Possessive endings, present ;
-ki
-qka
-nka
Sing,
Dual *
r
Plur, ^
« "
f r
— fi
— qkfi
— tn
— e
— Qk
— i
— hpuk
— qpuk
— puk
— sQk
— qttlk
— tGk
— ek
— qk6k
— kSk
— hput
— qput
— put
— se
— qche
— che
— et
— qkSt
—it
— ma
— ^gma
— mi
> my
<
' object
two objects
objects
hfdt 1
— qpttt
fttt
4
► thy
<
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
— en
— qkn
— in
• his
4
' Sing.
Dual
Plur.
— mug'nuk
— gmug*nuk
— mug'nuk
' we both, (
our
' Sing.
Dual
Plur.
ftQk ]
— qf)tQk
ftQk
► you both.
your *
' Sing,
Dual
Plur,
— eg'nuk
— qkgnki
k^nka
► they both,
f their -
' Sing,
Dual
Plur,
— mta
— gmta
— mta
► our
^
' Sing,
Dual
Plur.
— fche
— qjiche
— fche
► your
4
' Sing.
Dual
Plur.
—eta
— qketa
ita
► their
4
' Sing.
Dual
Plur.
22
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
My Stm
68.
my
our
our
thy
your*
your
his
their
their
Sing,
Dual,
Plur,
Intrans,
kitiinr^ldl
kUttinr&qkJl
kitiinr&nka
Trans.
Idltiinr&mil
kUtiinrag'mi
kUtiinrimi
Intrans,
Idltiinrihpuk
kitiinriqpuk
k^tiinrapuk
Trans,
k^ttinramug'nuk
k^tiinrag'mugnuk
kUttinramug'nuk
Intrans,
Idltiinr&hput
k&tiinraqput
kUtiinraput
Trans,
Idltiinr^mt^
k&tiinrag&ta
k^tiinramta
Intrans,
kitiinr^n
k&tilnraqkn
k&tiinratii
Trans,
k^tiinrahpQt
kUttinraqplit
kitiinrapQt
Intrans,
k^tiinrahtlik
k&tiinraqtuk
k^tiinratlik
Trans,
k^tiinrah|^tuk
kUtiinraqptuk
k&tiinraptuk
Intrans,
k^ttinr^ze
k&tiinr^qche
kitiinrachS
Trans,
k^tiinrahpch6
k&tiinraqpche
k&tiinraf>che
Intrans,
kattinri
k^tiinriek
k^tiinrie
Trans,
k&tiinrin
kUtiinraqkn
k^tiinri6n
Intrans,
k^ttinrak
k^tiinraqkSk
kitiinrakSk
Trans,
kittinrag'nuk
kitiinraqk^nka
kittinrakSnka
Intrans,
katiinrit
kUtiinrarqk^t
k^tiinriet
Trans,
kitiinr^ti
k^tiinrarqk^ti
k^tiinraeti
On the Double Thirds
69. In the Innuit language there are two distinct endings for the
third persons of the possessive. The first of these signifies his own
or he himself^ and the other one, his^ another* s.
These double thirds extend through :
pechShkok iy^qpillg'ma
pechShkok iy^qpilgan
k^nrut^Lgha .chilththl^r'menuk
k^nrut^gha chilththlSrhr^nuk
he will do it before he goes (i.e., he himself)
he will do it before he goes (i.e., he, another)
he tells me about his doings (suus)
he tells me about l^is doings (ejus)
70. This system of double thirds forms an interesting feature of
the language, as by its means Innuit is entirely free from the
ambiguity in such English sentences as :
Basil met John and gave him his hat
DOUBLE THIRDS
23
If by this the speaker means to say that Basil brought John's own
hat to him, it is at once clearly expressed by :
V^sldlm V&nk& p^^thluku iikkdrsu^nuk chikkarh^
But, on the other hand, if Basil gave away his hat, it runs thus :
V^kim V^k& p^^thluku iikkdrsumenuk chlkk&rh^
kiylLm6ne uetalik
kiyine uetaiik
kiy&miigng uetalik
kiy^qk^tne uetaiik
kiy^mtigne uetaiit
kiyitne uetalit
71.
his own coat
his own two coats
his own coats
he is in his own canoe
he is in his canoe
they both are in their own canoes
they both are in their canoes
they are in their own canoes
they are in their canoes
5.
' S. ^tkung ^tkurne
D, ^tkQgne ^tkugme
P, ^tkune ^tkume
^tkumene
^tkQg'mene
^tkumen6
they both, their own coat
they both, their own two coats Z>.
they both, their own coats
their own coat
their own two coats
their own coats
P.
' S, itkuztlk ^tkumiigniik ^tkumtig'ne
Z>. ^tkuqtlik ^tkQg'miigniik ^tkugmiigne
P, ^tkQttlk ^tkumtigntik ^tkumiigne
' S. ^tkQztlng ^tkumiing ^tkQmtiqne
D. ^tkQqtling ^tkug'miing ^tkugmiiqn6
P, ^tkOtUng ^tkumting itkumiiqne
72. The following paradigm of kfttttnriUci, my son^ presents an
example of an Innuit noun complete in all its persons and
cases.
It will be noticed that down each column the declension is
according to person, while outwards it is according to case. This
paradigm will serve as a general model, as all words follow the
same form.
For the past and future consult 90 and 97.
It is unnecessary to present complete paradigms of these, as the
endings are uniform throughout.
ESSE.Vr/ALS OF tXXUIT
Sing. ^
JnlraMi.
Trans,
Log.
5.
katanrika
katQnr&ma
kiitflnrftntDe
my
D.
P.
katOnriqka
kltanrinki
katanrlgma
katdnrama
kitanrilg'inn«
kAtiinramne
thy
S.
■ D.
P.
kitiinran
katQnraqkA
kltOnratA
katOnrahpnt
katOnraqpDt
kat&nrap&t
katOnrAh^nc
katOoraqfine
katOoraj)nc
S.
katOnra
katOnran
katJlnrine
his
■ D.
P.
k;ltanrak
katQnri
katQnraqkn
katOnrin
katJlnriqkne
katanriD«
S.
katilnrana
kdtitnrami
katfinrimenc
his on-n
■ D.
P.
katOnragne
katflnrSne
katOnragme
katflnrame
katdnrag'menc
katflDr&m«ne
we,* our
S.
D.
r.
tltQnravQk
katanraqpQk
katQnrapuk
katflnramQg'nilk
katOnrag'mOg'nak
katQnramOg'nOk
kAliinramflg'ne
kaianrag'mQg'ne
katftnrim&g'ne
you.' your
s.
■ D.
P.
katCnrazQk
kdtQnraqtuk
katflnratuk
katiln^ah^tuk
kati)nraq{)tuk
katQnra^tuk
katanrahfjtug'ne
katOnraq^tug'ne
kaiQnra^tug'DC
they,* their
S.
1).
P.
kattinrak
katdnraqkCk
kitQnrakt^k
katOnragnuk
k^t&nraqkenkS
katonrakanka
katianrag'ne
katiinraqkfg'ne
kaiunrikeg'ac
they,' their
own
s.
■ D.
P.
katiinrazQk
kat&nraqt&k
katfinraiak
katQnTamdg'nfik
katftnrag'miig'nak
katdnTamOg'nuk
kaiimramiig'ne
katflnrag'mdg'ne
katdnramOg'oe
S.
katOnravilt
katilnramta
katOnramtne
our
D.
r.
katOnraqpilt
katflnrapat
katdnragmta
katdnramta
kfltflnrigmtne
katiinraratne
your
s.
D.
p.
katanraze
katiinraqche
kattinrache
katanraht>che
katdnraqt>che
kaifinra^hS
kaiQnriihtichne
katdnrlq^hne
katdnrafichn^
s.
kittinrat
kSttlnrata
katdnrfttaS
their
■ D.
P.
katflnraqkCt
kattlnr[t
katflnraqketa
katflnriia
kat&nriqkStnC
kXtilnritne
their own
(5.
katflnrazting
katflnraqtilng
katQnratiing
katflnrahmting
kai&nragmang
katilnramtlng
katfinrahmfiqnC
katQnrag'mnqne
katfinramOqne
DOUBLE THIRDS
25
Mod,
k^ttinr^mniik
kiltiinrig'mnuk
k^tiinr^mniik
k^ttinr^hpniik
kltiinr^qj^ntik
k^tiinr^pniik
k^tiinr^niik
k^ttinr^qkniik
k^tiinnniik
kS,tiinr^meniik
k^ttinrig'mentik
kitiinrimentik
Term,
kitiinr^mniin
kitiinrig'mntin
k^tiinr^mniin
k^tiinr^hpniin
kiltiinr^qpntin
kiltiinr^pniin
k^ttinr^ntin
kittinriqkniin
k^tiinrintin
k^ttinr^meniin
k&tiinr^g'meniin
k&tiinr^mentin
Vial,
kitiinriinkiin
kitiinr^g&gmiiqktin
kitiinrlmkiin
k^ttinr^hpghiin
k^ttinriqpghiin
k^tiinr^i^ghiin
k^ttinr^ktin
k^tiinrlqktin
kiltiinriktin
k^ttinr&mekun
k^ttinrag'mekun
k^tiinrlmektin
jEqual.
k^tiinr^mstiin
kitiinr^g'miigsttin
kiltiinr^msttin
kitiinr^hp^tsttin
kitiinr^qpetstiin
k^ttinr^p^tstiin
k^tiinr^hsttin
kitiinr^qstiin
kilttinrlstiin
k^tunr^m^tiin
k^ttinrig'metiin
k^tunr^metiin
kitiinr^miig'niik
kattinrig'mtig* ntik
k^ttinr^mug'ntik
k^ttinrahptug'nttk
kdttinr^qptug'niik
k^ttinrlptug'ntik
k^tiinrig'ntik
k^tunriqkeg'ntik
k^tunr^k^g'ne
k^tiinr^mtigniik
kittinrag*mug*niik
k&ttinr^mug'niik
k&ttinr^mtntik
k^tiinr&gmtniik
k^tiinr^mtniik
k^tiinr^hjSchniik
k^ttinr^qpchniik
k^tiinr^pchnuk
k^tiinr^tntik
k^ttinr^qk^tniik
kltiinritniik
k^tiinr^mtig'ntin
kittinrSg'mug'ntin
k^ttinr^mug'nun
k^tiinr&hj^tug'niin
kittinr&qptug'ntin
k^tunr^ptug'niin
k&tiinr&g'ntin
kilttinr^qk^g*ntin
k^ttinr^keg'ntin
k^ttinr^mug'nun
kitiinr^g*mug*niin
k^tiinr^mug'ntin
k^ttinr^mtntin
k^tiinr^gmtniin
k^tiinr^mtniin
k^tiinr^h^hnun
k^ttinriqpchntin
k^ttinr^pchnun
k^tdnrltniin
k^ttinr^qk^tniin
k^tunrltntin
k&tiinr^hmug'niik k&ttinr&hmug'ntin
k&ttinrag'mug'niik kittinrig'mug'ntin
k^tiinr^mug'ntik k&tiinrimug'niin
kitQnr^hmug^nSrghiin
k3.ttinra.g'mug*nSrghtin
k^ttinr^mug'n^rghiin
k^tiinr&hptug'nSrghun
k^ttinriqptug'nSrghiin
katiinrlptug'nSrghtin
k^tiinr&g'nSrghtin
k&ttinraqkSg'nSrghtin
k^tiinr^k§g*nSrghtin
klttinrahmug'nSrghtin
kittinr3,ginug*nSrghtin
k^ttinramug'nSrghtin
k^tiinrlmthun
k^ttinrigmthiin
k^ttinrlmthiin
k3.ttinrih p§ tshtin
k^tiinr^qp^chthiin
k^tiinrap^tshun
V
kiltunr^thiin
kltQnraqkeg'nSrghtin
k^ttinrlthtin
kitiin ra.hmug'n6rghtin
k^tunriig'mug'nSrghtin
kittinramug'nSrghtin
kittinrihmiiqsttin
kiittinriig'muqsttin
k^ttinrlmtiqstun
k^tunr^hj^ttiqsttin
k^ttinr^qj^tuqsttin
k^ttinr^ptiiqstiin
kS,tiinr&qsttin
k^tiinr^qk^qsttin
k^tiinr^k^qstiin
k^tiinr^hmtiqsti^n
k^tunrSg'mOqsttin
k^tiinr^mtiqstiin
k^ttinr&mstiin
k^ttinr^gmtstiin
k^ttinr^msttin
kitiinr^hp^tsttin
k^tiinr^qp^tstiin
kittinrap^tstun
k&tiinratstiin
k^tiinr^qk^tstiin
kittinritstun
k^tiinr^hmiiqstiin
k^tttnrilg'mtiqstiin
k^ttinr&miiqstiin
26 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
On the Time Forms of Possesdyes
74. These words take the characteristics of tense, and thus a
present, past, or future signification is added to the original meaning.
75.
My Saying
Example of
a Possessive in
the Present
kinrutM
Idlnratlmi
k^nrutimng
Unrutft
k^nrutfiit
kinrtitivng
Idlnrute
kinrut^n
k&nraten^
The condensed paradigm is given in 78.
See also 73.
76. The Past Form of the Possessive
k^nrutlki kilnruthllm^ ldlnriithl!mne
kinrutlhft k&nriitthlirpit kinrQthlirqpne
k^nratlhr^ k^nrutlhr^n ldlnrtitlhr^n6
Additional examples and paradigms are given further on.
77. The Future Forpn of the Possessive
k^nratk^k^ k^nrutkim^ k^nrutkimne
k^nrutkiln kdnrutk^qplt k^nrutkaqpne
k^nrutk^ . k&nrutkiin k^nrutkane
Note i. — Klnrfitk&ldl is the same as I tell about it to some one (see Mode CLIII).
Note 2. — In kftnratildl the final A is longer than in k&nrfitlki = my saying.
TIME FORMS OF POSSESSIVES
27
N.
5o
A fft C M
H •"! *^
S
9
9
9
a
M
►i
5i*
f^
Ok
■^
^
1
9
1
1
1
1
B
B
E2<
»i
•■-<
»^
5
PC
9
•3
s
B
rti
%
s
a
a*
at
ic ff rtc §
S^ §c S^ 9L
-- 5^ B- ?r
i ^ ^ B
& H, 25 ff
a cc
'^ B
» (» s
•1 "I "I
o
I I I I
B B B B
5* K< ^ 5S<
J* " s ^
(1^
B
OH.
B
1
B
B
B
B
s
f
at
5
1
at
fie
B
1
B
S
B
B
-1
3
f
1
•3<
B
5
&
^
?r
K
?r
a
B
B
B
3
!
B
t
B
'9
B
•9
0^
B
B
B
B* B* ft g
pm» tirf. 3^ £3
CO CO v< v^
o
I I I I I:
B B B B ^
s S' I ?r I
I I 'I I ^
*•**■ *^ f^ *^< ^
B § ^ B I
ai
B B B B
^ 3 ^
'I. pc
g. «>' g, rti
ai
2, 3
^ 3^ •a 3 ^
3 2. 3 3 r
B ^ g. ^
i I I I
S3 3 S, 3 so
a" 3 "S 3 ^
g' 3
3
3 3
3
3- S^ 'S 3
3 & 25 3.
B- 5i
'^ 3
3- ^ 'S 3
3 S 2< 5^
fie s^ rv ?t
CO ^
3
pc
^ >?
*TD<
*^- pc A 3
3 ««l ^ cc
Cc B C Orq
<W «< <^. 3
B oIq 3 (V
^ S ^ Q'*'
&* B ST Cc
Cc gc 3
ill!
3
3
fie
S dc 3
3 3
S ^ ^
B ^
3
SI * S a
3
•1
pc
3
I I
B dc
B
a >J
28 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
79. Examples of the localis :
ilULqtoa kilnrutlmne I err in my saying
key^tlmne nunurlghi he scolded me in my crying
80-81. Examples of the terminalis :
yurqthr^nlmntik tdkulthk^mniin from my birth till my death
td^tlu nunlkimeniin iy^qtdk then he goes to his dwelling
82. Examples of the modalis :
V V
m^ntiiqtok tkethrinlmntik he has stayed here since my coming
V V
m&nt&qtoa tkethr^nr&niik I have stayed here since his coming
tkeflh^nimntik nauthlumaligh^
from my coming I have been sick = since my coming
mivut thlirhinlmniik netukshitikl
I have not yet heard it since my being here
83. Examples of the vialis :
In these examples the vialis is to be rendered as at the time or
just as or as soon as^ etc.
nechug'neklnr^kiin p&mikiin klllointik llrauraiqtimtik netdk
just at his listening from down there behind him some (one) walking
he hears =
at the time he was listening, he heard some one approaching behind
him from down there
to^tlu uySngtuk, uyingtkilnlr'mug'nSrghiin netuk klmmiktin ntlm flloliniik
kiinilrodmiik
then they both looked down (i.e., by the smoke hole) just as they both
look down, they both heard some talking below in the house
kepuchemiranlmktin tinghikl iemchemathlenilra^
just after my having bought it, I see what proves to be a broken
thing = that it is broken (Mode LXXII)
netnimkiin toSvut iyig'laa as soon as I heard it I went there
tamant&r&kanraktin just at the time he was there
84. Example of the aequalis :
Sing,
' pet3.chah&mtun peiiko^
pet^chah^ptiin pe^kutn
petichahimetun peikok
TIME FORMS OF POSSESSIVES
29
Dual
Plur.
' petllchah^mtiqtiin pe^kokuk
' petllchah^ptiiqttin pe^kotuk
[ petllchah^miiqtiin pe^kuk
' pet^chah^msttin pe^kokut
petS.chah^p$tsttin pe^koche
petllchah&miiqsttin pe^kut
This means I do as much as I am able^ I do my best^ according to
my ability.
It is the aequalis of pSt&ch&hlkft, pgtachghgmg, petfichfihamne, etc.
The future is petftchfihkSkft kSmft, etc.
^
Note. — PStXchlmSton — as he can or as he does.
85. The past form of the possessive :
Sing.
Dual
Flur,
Sing,
' peyulthka
peyulthhrin
peyulthhri
peyulththlerpuk
peyulththlertuk
peyulthhrik
peyulththl^rput
peyulththlerche
peyulthhrit
My Wanting
Plur.
peyulthhinkii
peyulththn
peyulthhre
peyulthpuk
pey tilth tuk
peyulthkuk
peyulthput
peyulthche
peyulthhret
^mthl^rp^k^qt^ peyulthhr^n
your wanting is too great = you want too much
V V
^mthl^rp^klqt^t pe3rulththn
your wantings are too great = you want too many
y^kshikp^kaqta iy^g'yulthhr^n
your wanting to go is too far = you want to go too far
86.
iyilthka
my going
kauw^lthk^
my sleeping
m5qsiilthka
my thirsting
tilthka
my coming
nauthlulthk^
my illness
piiktilthki
my doing
pllthka
my deed
pttqtlilthhank^
my no more
plulthki
my passage
used things (derelicta)
30 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
AkUtlttSk s seldom may be used with this form.
iy<hldl ^kOlthtdk my going is seldom
^Lkw&w^lfr itulthkA my yesterday used one = the one I
used yesterday
mithinthkH my moving towards
mithlllthk^ millqthlakQ ^nglaran^r'lane
it appears larger the more I approach
itlki my going in place
87. By reason of^ on account of^ because can also be expressed with
this form and petiOddfUcli (745).
^rruliyQqtoa m5qstilthkip€ti[kklaka I want to stop because I am thirsty
88. Many peculiar idiomatic expressions are due to this form.
n^thluy^LgQch&kdn&ke netltlm
your hearings (the by you heard things), do not forget them
nithlo^ka k^nthl^rhr^
I ignore his saying = I do not know what he says
^tauhwaimratdk pech^gVekllthhr^ tungr^gh!y6m
it is not good to invoke the devil
89. This form takes the place of the relative pronoun, and in
English these must be added.
tingv^lthk^ an I saw thing = that which I have seen
umyu5rtkilthh^nk& the things of which I am thinking
m^lthhllthk^ that which I am getting near to
pech^lthki what I ask for
lUekiin ^rr^l5k thllrqk^ma ^kullg'ntin nundrnt^ ^k5qtlimthlu, toanS
tingn^rqlir^ ^k5qti thlma'muk, hwlnkut^ itiqp&qtl^put plulthhr^
^kkul!g'n^rghiin. 'LpSche tauqktin ^k5qt^ n^llagna^qklukQ, kithlame
ik5qt^ nlll^chShk^ ktinr^rlunel
Sometimes the moon comes between our earth and the sun, then but
little of the sun appears. We call it the passing through, but you
[call it] the sun is nearly dying. How can the sun die, being
a fire!
TIME FORMS OF POSSESSIVES
31
t*
8-
O
— \
o
e
^
^
1
1
«s»
r*
3*
cr
2
■^
9*
2*
&
9*
i
e<
01
r»
9
09
1
^
1
1
5
cr
1
Cf
Ol
9
Oq
X.
i^
^
X.
r*
r*
«^
r^
cr
J^
cr
cr
»♦
BT
«^
0^
3*
f
fit
9
cr
1
cr
f
*a
Ai
9
cr
Ai
9
J-
X.
^
I,
cr
cr
S"
cr
cr
cr
5-
i
s;
*d
B
r
(3<
9
cr
>r
Ei
9
^
g-'
^
J-
i.
I,
r»
r*
«^
r^
3*
cr
cr
cr
cr
cr
Ck
i
9
9
3
C(
9
cr
9
c*
9
9
ec
9
^
1
1
1
•!«
1
»♦
r*
^»
^^
cr
cr
cr
cr
•— <
c
si
cr
9;
•— <
B
c<
Cc
9
cr
^
n
c<
cr'
cr
9
e<
9*
9
9
^
1
^
1
^
r«
r*
r»
7
9*
cr
cr
5S
••
i
3
c<
9
r*
»♦
*a
n
ec
?
9
3
C(
9
» •» "
cr 5- o
A A e
J!
O
c
^
i.
1
1
cr
5-
cr
&
cr
cr
1
f
pr
J-
^
l
J.
cr
&
g
cr
CT*
9"
Ck
5*
3<
^
•3<
i
B
e
e
09
g
^
9
ec
pr
K
\^
\^
1
1
.1 .
r»
r*
r^
r«
cr
cr
cr
9"
r*
9*
»♦
«^
cr
*<
cr
2
3
f
Ai
^
r*
§
e
C
£
g
g
•3
Si
Al
Ai
^
^
1
1
9*
cr
?
«^
3*
^»
r*
cr
9
9*
cr
5!
B
I
3
f
e
■§
^
•9
C
c<
g:
^
^
\^
1
r«
r*
r*
&
cr
9"
cr
r*
cr
r«
r*
cr
•*
■1
gr
cr
i
9
Cc
fit
i
ec
"9
9
■s
"9
^
9
ec
9
i.
^
^
^
a
r»
^»
r^
cr
cr
9*
cr
r»
gi"
r»
r*
9;
^
Ck
g
i
9
•3<
i
P<
(V
ec
ec
on
9
i
9
OQ
9
«3
c«
9
cr
9"
e<
ec
Cc
9
9
9
^
1
X.
^
cr
^
9*
9*
»♦
gr
»♦
r*
cr
5
&
5:
2
3
3
C(
9
cc
Cc
>a
*a
*o
p^f
r»
r*
s
§'
CC
9
9- cr g.
o
3
I
Al
cr
cr
Sc
3
Al
cr
B
Ai
9
Ai
B
m
9
e<
§
9
ec
cr
i
Ai
ec
9
^ I
I
I
cr 9- 9*
9- 9* cr
3c 3
cr
9 r*
cr
B
PC
L L L L
cr
3c
9
1^ X
pi* r*
cr cr
9" cr
i- J-
cr
cr
Sc
9
CC
cr
cr
3c
9
ec
9
J- J-
cr 9*
:? S^
oi
e<
9
•* i
9 •*
cr cr
•a I
Cc e<
cr cr
■>«< Ck
9 9
ec ^
9 9
i- i-
9* 9"
" I
CC 3
9
L L L L
cr cr cr
3* S. a
2« 2: 5:
? J* 9
gc ec
5*
^
1^
I
1
s
o
CO
CO
CO
CO
CO
P
CO
32 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
9L
nauthliilthm^ n^thl6n6 in the time of my sickness
taguthllm^ ch!mme& in exchange for the one I took
hw&nehw^ ^no^rutii t^m^thllm^ chlmm^l
here it is, your paddle, of my lost one its exchange =
here is a paddle for you in exchange for the one I lost
92. Examples of the localis :
keputoS, plskllthllmne I buy at the place I am ordered
n^ntlhr^ne uetilyiiqtoa I want to be where he is = in his whereness
tqkuthlimne nintlhuyet where were you when I fell = in my falling
penilrakiplktlhrilne just exactly at the right time
nangtauliqtut i:etathlir*miiqne they suffer during their stay
peyulththlirpne tikenl come at your pleasure = in your wishing
kaunkilthho^ mekllgno^raiilthhriine
he took care of him in his childhood
iy^k^t^thllmne kemiiqtimtik t^mHraughl
I lost a dog at my start = in my starting to go. (See Mode XXI and
also 688.)
V
lllekiin puktthlimne ttimthltiqkl&qtoa
sometimes in my travelling I get a bad trail
Itgilnkd n3.ngk5rtut tiingllurdrathlimne
my feet are blistered from snowshoeing
niyorha, emtime a.m3.ne tangthlir'mene
he watched out for it over there (where he had seen it) in his own
having seen it place
to^thlii h6k a.ngn6S.roathlir*mugne jlma^kklad !min& iydg'yuqtok kauwivtit
so once while they both were paddling around that elder brother
wanted to go up stream
93. Examples of the modalis :
kinruchehk^mche cha^lththlimnuk
I will tell you about my doing
kinrutign^ chalththlir'menuk
he tells me about his own doing
kilnruskechekuk chaiththlirptug'nuk
you both tell us about the doing of you both
kinrutfiratapchekut chdlththlirp^tchniik
you did not tell me about your doing
TIME FORMS OF POSSESSIVES 33
kdnratk^tgn^ chalththllrhr^tntik
they tell me about their (others*) doing
keput5k piskilthlimntik
he buys what I ordered him
keputo^ pIskHthlirpntik
I buy what you order = your ordering
kUnrutlho^kH t^ngingrathHmniik
I told him what I have not seen = my not seen thing
^psghwu peyulthhr^ntik
ask him what he wants = about his wanting
&pskeke n^ktin tketlhr^tntik
ask them from whence their coming
k^nrutlho^k^ k^nthUrj^ntik
I told him what you said = your saying
peugh^ p!sktinr!tlhr&tniik
I do what they tell me not to do = their telling me not to do
tkech^kHqtoa pthl^m^thl!mntik
I arrive at last from my being lost = my straying
ntikk^kghitoa ut^kHthlimntik
I have no idea that any one is expecting me
td^tlu kauw^thlir'menilk tup^qt5k, putdkuk kllthhut^ngk^thlutuk
as he rose from his sleeping his (two) toes were tied together
94. Examples of the terminalis :
n^thluy^gut^k^ thlethlimntin
I forget where I put it = my putting to
iy^qtoa pKskllhr^tntin
I go whither they tell me = to my their ordered
iy^qt5k entiqkutlhr^niin
he goes whither he is forbidden = to his forbidden place
iy^g'yuqtoa Oetilthhr^ntin
I wish to go where he is = to his place of being
sl^m n^nnllthhr^ntin until the end of the world
uet&kSr'le unw^kulthhr^ntin I will stay till to-morrow
95. Examples of the vialis :
tukoqtoa keputhllmkiin I get rich by my trading
unwiku iy&qchShkoi iyilthhr^ktin to-morrow I will go by the way he went
34
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
to&tlQ iy&qtok taum tlngm^^chOgh&m tilngnllthhiiLkiin
then he went (of that little bird by its flight) in the direction the
little bird flew
96t
hwe peyuqtoa Hn p!lthhr&tiin
I want to do like he has done
97. The future form :
iy&thlSqkiki
tithl^qk^lki
my going
my coming
pathlSqkiki
uet<hlSqkiki
my work
my lifetime
The form in 223 combines with this.
n{ngthl{6qp^kim^ ^rr^nloUitok hw^ iy^thlSqldlkll
my going is impeded because of the great cold = it is too cold for
me to go
n&thlo^k^ ch^la k^ku tithl^qkik^
I do not know when my coming (will be) again
pethl^qkik^ n5qch6k^k&
I fail in what I am to do
n^thluy^guthUnn^^ plllethl^qkHne
he forgot to make it = his having to make it
98. This is declined just as in 73.
f .
Sing.
iy^thl^qkUki
ly^thl^qkHn
iy^thl^qk^
iy^thl^qkine
Dual
' ly^thlSqkUhpuk
iy^thl^qk^htiik
ly^thl^qk^k
iy^thl^qkigniik
Plur,
' iy^thl^qk&hput
iy^thlgqkihche
iy&thlCqkat
iyathieqkatnng
99. Modalis:
^pt^mldn k^ku ly^thl^qk^mntik
I ask you when I am to go = about my going to go
^IgghoS. uet^lthlSqk&mntik ^w^vtit
I dread living over there
n^thluy^guch^kon^ka tokuthlSqkipntik
do not forget you are to die = about your having to die
tigo^ ^pch^qtdg'lQtii pethlSqk^qpntik
I come to ask you to do it = about your doing it
Sl/FFIXES 35
100. Terminalis :
ytirqthr^nr^ntik tdkQlthkHmentin from his birth till his death
m&nt&qken^ tkethl^qk^mntin stay here till my coming
On the Suffixes
101. As adjectives strictly speaking have no place in Innuit, their
place is supplied either by the verbs or by certain particles suffixed
to the nouns.
These suffixes are very- numerous; many of them are derived
from the modes of verbs. In this manner one verb may produce
a number of suffixes, each affording a distinct variation in meaning,
according to the mode from which it is derived.
The following are a few of the most common suffixes :
102. MSat, meaning the residents of^ those living there^ they live at.
The endings are : singular, msd ; dual, mCuk ; plural, mSat.
The names of most Innuit villages terminate in this manner.
The village on the KXnSlik slough in the Yukon delta is called
K&nfilig'mSat, and its inhabitants are known as KXnOig'mSat 7^1 =
the Kanelik folks, A person from that village would speak of
himself as :
hwegna K^n^llgmedighugh^ I am a resident of Kanelik (571)
These village names are declined according to the regular plural
form.
K^nSUg'mgQntin ly^qtoa I am going to Kanelik
103. Frequently villages are named from some prominent natural
object near by. The village at St. Michael's, Norton Sound, is
situated on a fine bay, and is known as TXchSk, and its inhabitants
as TXcher'meat.
T^chimiin iy^qtoa I go to the bay (i.e., St. Michael's)
Near Andreievsky, at the head of the Yukon delta, is IngrechOft'me&t,
from ingT6ch0X, hill. (See 230.)
Again, names of villages may often end in vDc (see 117): Niikklfir-
chOr'vik, Niikkierch»rvig'me&t.
36 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
104.
kdzhgemeut the young men of a village
Old men who have no families, orphans, visitors, etc., are all
classed thus, meaning those who occupy the Uzhgi or communal
house,
k^zhgemeugnutii k& ? do you reside in the kazhga ?
is equivalent to asking whether one is married.
m^kumeut residents of this place
snafmeut coast folks
MS&t may be added to all the locatives. (See 380.)
105. meatlk. This termination signifies a trait or quality, belong-
ing tOf etc.
Sing. Dual. Plur.
Intrans. — meut^k — meut^k — meut&t
Trans. — meut^m
Loc. — meut^r'me — meut&g'ne — meut&r'ne
etc. etc. etc. etc.
kwiqp^g'meutik a thing or person belonging to the Yukon (KwiqpS.k)
2,kumkunieut&k a thing belonging to the other side (379)
Note i. — This is the name given to any foreign or imported object.
k&qkumeutik a thing belonging to the far north
k&nggnemeut&t belonging to the head or upper portion
Note 2. — KaiQ;^imiutftt is the term used to designate the last of the running ice
at the annual break-up of the Yukon and other rivers. It is composed of the words
kwigfim kligiifnift, the river's source or head waters.
kSlag'meutat belonging to the sky
Note 3. — This is the name given to white mice or lemming, which are occasionally
found and are supposed to have dropped from the sky.
106. The verb form is mefitaugwOk (Mode LXVIII). Generally
it is used in Mode LXXII.
t^n'glu un^ kwiqp&g'meutauthlinnedk
this snowshoe is evidently from the Yukon region
6r'l6vuk un^ k^qkumeutalithlinneok
this bow is clearly from the far north
Sl/FF/XES 37
ukut &kumkuineQtaugwQt
these are foreign articles (said of things brought up from San Francisco,
Seattle, etc.)
107. Pres. Past. Fut.
Intrans, yuqt&k yuqt&thluk yuqt&k^k
Trans. yuqt&m yuqt^thlOm yuqt^k^m
Loc, yuqt&me ytiqt&thl^rme yuqt^k^me
etc, etc. etc. etc
tdkom^lra^qt^k belonging or appertaining to death
&thUintiqt&k belonging or appertaining to another = a stranger
tiingr^gnly&qt^k belonging to the devil (i.e., the paraphernalia of
sorcery)
108. Sun or shun signifies the means or instrument.
By means of these suffixes the Innuit readily coin new terms to
designate the various foreign objects which the whites have intro-
duced into this region. For example: The verb guenaqtoa in its
primary sense means / mark or impress a sign^ figure^ etc., upon
anything ; from this is derived the word SlUlnSqshun, meaning an
instrument for markings which term is now applied to lead pencils,
pens, etc., while the verb itself has as a secondary signification,
/ write^ draw^ etc.
109. The school children during their drawing lessons were
supplied with a number of pieces of india rubber; as soon as they
understood their use they were immediately termed ftwaresdtit, from
the verb ftwaretaka, / obliterate it,
110. After the introduction of flour " slapjacks " became known,
and were termed minnj^t ; hence a frying-pan is called mannerqshun
or slapjacker.
Thermometers^ etc., are known as sULshiLn or weat/ier instruments.
V
From ndngkoa, / sew^ comes ndnkshiLn, term for sewing machine,
111. All the words of this group have their transitive in sfitum or
shutilm, according to the following paradigm.
Dual, Plur,
^giyushtitCik ^giyushutit
Sing.
Intrans,
^.giyushiin
Trans,
^giyushtitllm
Loc,
^giytishutme
etc.
etc.
&giyushuti!ig*n€ ^giyushutne
etc. etc.
38 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
112. The time forms of these words in un are as follows :
NoTK. — Bglqtoa is the equivalent of / wriU^ so a pen, pencil, etc., is expressed by :
Pres, eg^qchOn pencil
Past gg^qchuthluk what was a pencil
FuL eg^qchQtk&k what is to he a pencil
113. The possessive form :
Sing, eg^qchutlki my pencil
Dual eg^qchutlqklL my two pencils
Plur, eg^qchutiikH my pencils
114. The full personal form, intransitive and transitive :
my eg^qchutildl eg^qchutm^
Sing. \ thy egSqchutft egiqchutflXt
his eg^qchute eg^qchuten
our eg^qchutftik egiqchumug'ntik
Dual \ your egilqchutsiik eg^qchuttifttik
their egiqchutek egiqchutegntik
our eg^qchutftit eg^qchutumt^
Plur, \ your eg^qchutse eg&qchutiifche
their egiqchutet egiqchuteti
This has the other cases also, just as in 73.
The dual and plural with all their cases occur just as in 73.
115.
tisfin from tig^oa, I come^ expresses any conveyance.
tQntQyftqchfin a dog trained to hunt moose; from tftntQvak, a moose, the
augmentative of tQnt&, a deer,
ftnOksfin from ftnOkft, wind, expresses wind vane, the little strip of calico
at the masthead of the large skin sailboat or angiak. This
word is now generally used to designate yfd'^.
chftkyiin the native stone axe of Jade, etc, ; from ch&ketoa, / chop,
pikkSyHn a gift; from plkkeiit&kil, I make him a present
chikkSyHn a small gift ; from chikkeiit&k&, /give him a little gift.
ipplin a thing to ladle with, a dipper ; from ipptLqtoa, / ladle out.
This word designates only the native dipper. These
wooden ladles are very large and handsomely carved.
ftng^ghoShto the single-blade kiyak pcuidle ; from ftngghoatoa, I paddle.
Ulilfin a mark.
mOqriln . the triangular wooden cup belonging to a kiyak outfit.
SUFFIXES
39
n&thllin&qktin an emblem^ that which makes something known.
kfipftsAghiLn an object presented for sale ; kSplisftqtoa = / come to trade ^ to
sell, etc.
Note. — KipflsAgatkftnkft, I sell them, and kSpflsAgatflksar&nkft (Mode XXIX).
fQeHn i.e., covering, term for the broad muscle from which the sinew
thread is made, from filSgftkft, I cover it.
116. aim. In some districts this broader sound is used (319).
niifkaun a native tool of horn tip
pltlqchaun arrow
yumchaun medicine
ptiqtaun lung
tupkSrchalin perfume
miydrqhraun native pole ladder
117. vik. This suffix signifies the place where an act is accom-
plished. Words with this ending are derived from verbs, as follows :
iy&qto^
I go
iySg'vflc
destination
tigoi
I come
tivik
place of coming from = source
keputd^
I trade
kepuzvik
store
^giyughi
I pray
igiyuvik
church
uetaugh^
I am
uetivflc
place of being
^llughok
he laps
allungvKk
feed trough for sled dogs
puydqtok
it smokes
puydqchivflc
smoke house for fish, etc.
118. The endings :
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
Intrans.
vik
— vek
— vet
Trans,
— vem
Loc.
— vigine
— vegne
— vigne
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
iikshev!k wintering place (i.e., a winter village)
iikshuwevflc a fall village
tippenaqkevflc a spring village
Note i. — Compare with Upemayik, on the coast of Greenland,
The augment atives (223) combine as follows :
ktivy&qplr'vlk •a place to set big nets = kuvyiqpik (i.e., net for salmon)
t^lluyaqplr'vik a place for a large fish trap
Note 2. — In some districts there is a tendency to sound iVt as wlk.
Note 3. — Euphony often requires the y to be sounded f : mlngkoa, / sew ; mlnkflt,
sewing place.
40
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
119. The term used to express a blacksmith's shop is an interesting
example of the power of Innuit to coin words. The word for iron com-
bined with the verb expressing to work^ together with this suffix, gives :
ch^wMl66r'-vlk iron-working place
120. The declension of this gn'oup in the possessive present :
my place of staying
Intrans. uet&vik^
Trans. Oet^v^m^
Loc. u€tivimne
etc, etc.
thyy etc.
u€t&v€n
uet&viqput
uetiviqfne
etc.
hisy etc.
Q€t^v€i
uet&ven
uet&ve&ne
etc.
iyag'vik^ y^kshlqtok
kwlqpem tlve^
nauhw& en^qven
my destination is far away
the source of the Yukon = of the great river, its
place of coming from
where is your bunk ? (i.e., sleeping place)
121.
Intrans.
Trans,
Loc.
etc.
The time forms in the past and future :
my^ etc. thy^ etc.
. uet^vilthka uetavilthft
uetivllthma Qetiv!lthl!rpet
uet^vithllmne uet^vilthlirpne
etc. etc.
hisy etc.
Getavilthhri
aetavilthhr&n
Qet&vilthhr&ne
etc.
utr^qchuge&kd^ uet^v!lthl!mntin
I would like to return to my old (former) home
122.
my^ etc.
thy^ etc.
hisy etc.
Intrans.
u6t^viqk^ka
uet&viqkin
u€t^viqka
Trans.
uetilvlqk^m^
uet&viqk^put
uet^viqkHn
Loc.
uetaviqkimne
Qet&viqk&pne
uet^viqk&ne
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
yi iyiig'viqkak&
yonder is
my
destination
123.
Mode variations :
I. net&vfldAlthkft = where I used to be, generally was, etc., nni, house,
being understood.
nun^t uet^vlkl^lthh&nk^ the village I used to live in (19)
uet^vfkliilthh^nki 3rut folks I used to live with
II. netiviksiUthkft = where I desire to be (Mode LXII).
III. tiet&vOdUdUcft = which had been my residence.
IV. fiet&vfldnkiqtaqkftkft = where I am to dwell again (Mode XLI).
SUFFIXES
41
124. lik. This suffix denotes owner^ ofie possessed of. The end-
ings are :
Intrans,
Trans.
Loc,
etc.
Sing.
—lik
— ^llgum
— ligume
etc.
Dual,
— llguk
Plur,
— llgut
-Hgtig'ne
etc.
-ligune
etc.
^ngy^Uk
!g*yarai!k
pupsullk
ugn^llk
p^myiiqp^Uk
ttingrilik
the owner of an angiak = native skin sailboat
a clam
a crab = possessor of cutters
a bearded man = possessor of a beard
a comet = one possessing a long tail
a sorcerer = one having a familiar spirit = tiingrdk
125. In most accounts of Alaska, the Siberian term < shamdn ' is
used for sorcerer. This word was introduced by the Russians, but
it has never been adopted by the Innuit.
!nglupe^l!k having one of a pair = a one-eyed person
peiig^Uk used to express a bear with her cubs
nur^lik used to express a doe with a fawn
126. Words in lik may be combined with other suffixes :
Withvik (117):
nalitst&rVik
nalitstirVillik
With chOft (230) :
^ngy^chd^r'lik
With pSk (223) :
^ngy<iqp&l!k
With vaatlk (208) :
^ngy^ve^lulthh&lik
With kSrtah (200) :
^ngy^kSrt^r^lIk
a garden
a person having a garden
an owner of a small boat
an owner of a large boat
an owner of an old boat
an owner of a new boat
Note. — These words use for their negatives or privatives the form in 131.
127. tilik. This suffix denotes the place where the object abounds.
Sing, Dual, Plur,
Intrans. — t^llk — t^lguk — t^lgtit
Trans, — tilgtim
Loc, — taHgtime — t^ligtig'ng — t^ligune
etc, etc etc. etc.
42 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
128. The time forms :
Pres, awiy^talik
Past iwiy^lethluk
Fut, ^wiy^t^Uqkik
129. «wiy«k = btish (Mode XVII).
2,w!y^t^l!k a place with many bushes, bushy
iy^qtok ^wiy^t^Ug'intin he goes to a thicket
Note. — These words use the form in 131 for their negative.
mdqt^llk a place abounding in water
moqtilgn5k a region without water
130.
ingriqt^llk a mountainous district t5kom&lra^t&l!k burial place
yiiqtillk an inhabited place ch&rriy^t^lik place of devils, hell
n&nv^h^t&lik a place full of lakes ttinttitilik deer hunting ground
pit&Uk a kiyak for three persons ; the circular hatch of a kiyak is
termed pi
131. UghOk. This is one of the important endings and means
one who is.
Sing. Dual. Plur.
Intrans. — Ughdk — Hghuk — lignut
Trans. — ^Wgnum
Loc. — ligh6r*ne — llghiig'ne — lighor'ne
etc, etc. etc. etc.
m!kk!ingh5k one who is small = baby
peyunrilghdk one who is unwilling
132. This ending forms a numerous group in the locatives. (See
385.)
Note. — The time forms occur as usual.
Past mlkkJlUgnothmk Fut. mflckmigho^qk^k
133. The various modes also present their representatives.
OghSk = one who is without. (See Mode VII.)
ch&qthluelgn5k one being without sin = a virtuous person
tukwelgndk one being without wealth = a pauper
Sl/FFIXES 43
nigiiSk. From Mode VI.
^wiy^tlllghok a place without any bushes
&ngyill!gh6k one who has not an angiak
sl!l!gh5k an idiot
stkflgnSk. From Mode XIV. (See 145.)
Example : SkiyOrqstke, his /telper, with this suffix becomes eidyOiq-
stkflgnSk = one witfiout his helper = a helpless person.
V
ekiy5rqstkilgn5k one lacking an assistant
V
klinntikstkilgndk one without a lover = with no one to love him
V
2,ngthl5rstkllgn5k one who has no one to baptize him
mdqt^ngkr^qkaunrHgndk a place where there will be no water
134. ntbkOk. These are derivatives from Mode VI.
Sing. Dual, Plur,
Intrans. ch^tifthk6k chitilthkuk chatilthkut
Trans, ch^tllthkum
Loc, chitilthkume chitilthktig'ne chitilthkune
etc, etc. etc. etc.
ch&tilthk6k where there is nothing m6qtilthk6k a place with no water
ntikkllthkdk a stream with no fish iiwiy^tilthkok a spot without bushes
n^nvilthkdk a place without lakes
iy&loyilthkuttik (dual)
the stays on the mast of a sailboat (i.e., preventers from leaning over)
n&nggn ug*y ilthktin
native oarlock (i.e., preventer from wearing the gunwale)
135. QthkOk. A companion form to the above, from Mode VII.
ch!kkwelthk6k an air hole in the ice = where there is no ice
yuelthkdk a desolate place iikfelthk5k a treeless place
136. sti, stfi. These endings belong to a large group of words,
which are formed in the following manner.
I. Sta signifies one who acts. These are all derived from intransi-
tive verbs.
pilleugha I do, I act pillisti an actor
II. St6 signifies one who makes, etc. These are derived from the
transitive verbs.
pHle&k^ I make it pille^kste the maker of it
Note. — This g^oup consists simply of the third persons of the possessive form.
For the paradigm see 144.
44 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
137. Both of these groups present the usual time forms as follows :
Intrans, Trans,
Pres, pllllsta pflle&kste
Past pillethmk pllleaksthliik
Put. pmistk&k
pllle^kstkik
138. Both assume the regular set of cases. For the transitive
sec 147.
Cases.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
Agen, Intrans,
pllllst^
pimstiik
pHHstat
Agen, Trans.
pflHsdlm
Loc,
pfllistme
pilHstug'ne
pilllstne
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
cheulista
leader
rhaiista
worker
yumcharista
healer
chaugnoildst^
squanderer
139. Cheaiistft, from the verb to be t/ie first, is the term used to
designate the dog which is harnessed at the head of the team.
140. The cases in the past form :
Cases.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
Agen. Intrans.
Agen. Trans.
Loc,
pillethmk
pKllelthhriim
pHlethlur'me
pnielthhriik
pHlelthhrOg^ne
pillelthhriit
pillethlur'ne
141. The cases in the future form :
Cases.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
Agen. Intrans.
Agen. Trans.
Loc.
pUUstkik
pTllIstk&m
pllllstk^me
pUlIstkik
pni!stk&g*ne
pmistk&t
pUHstk^ne
Note. — Tftgnstk&k, one who will take or arrest^ tenn used to express soldier.
142. The cases in the future perfect :
Cases. Sing. Dual.
Agen. Intrans. pniistkathliik pttHstkaithhriik
Agen. Trans. pfllistk^lthhriim
Loc. piinstkaiththlur'me pnUstkHlthhriig'ne plllistkalththlur'ne
Plur.
pniistkaithhriit
143. To all these primary forms of 6t& and ste many mode char-
acteristics may be combined, as, the one who helps often or helps
SUFFIXES
45
again^ etc. These with their negatives produce a vast number of
new groups, having, however, always the same terminations.
144.
Cases. the maker of it
Agen, Intrans, pille^kste
Sing.
both makers of it
pHle^kstek
the makers of it
pflle^kstet
Agen, Trans,
Loc,
pllle^ksten
pllle&kstene
pflle^ksteg'ne
pHle^kstetne
Cases. the maker of both
Agen, Intrans, pilleikstuk
Dual.
the two makers of both the makers of both
pnieSkstkak pille&kstkCt
Agen, Trans,
Loc,
pHle^kstqkii
pillaakstiig'ne
pHle^kstkug'ne
pllleilkstkutne
Cases. the maker of them
Agen, Intrans, pllle&ksti
Agen, Trans, pflleikstin
Loc. pllle^kstine
Plur.
the two makers of them the makers of them
pflle^kstik pniedkstit
pille^kstig'ne
pille^kstitne
The negative is formed in the usual manner,
ukfiikste a believer ukftikftritste an unbeliever
Note. — TOmfim nlthlflnrlBti = a guide — of the trail its non-ignorer.
145. The possessive form :
The possessive forms have the tenses and cases as usual.
V
ch&ll!stk& my workman
m^lleg&stklL my companion
k6i k&nrut&tii taumuk ? who told you that }
yinrtltstik^ ch^titdk my informer = the one who told me
is not here
146. This form serves also to supply for the relative pronoun,
which is lacking in Innuit.
V
kauqtor^k^ im!n^ kiihrstiqtkli I hit the dog which bit at me (lit, I club him
that one my wisher to bite me)
Note i. — For the full paradigm of the possessive see 147. For examples in the
possessive modes see XII and XIII.
Note 2. — Words in stft merge into verbs, as, I am a worker y etc. (See Mode XV.)
From these a fresh group arises ending in uchikS. (See 1 53.)
46
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
147. Paradigm of the possessive form :
Sing,
my
thy
=
-stU
-St qk^
-St nk^
-St ft
St qkft
St tn
his
his own
Dual
we both, our
you both, your
they both, their
they both, their
own
our
your
Plur, ^
their
their own
-St e
-stCk
-St i
-St ne
-St gne
-St ne
-St f uk
-St qpuk
-St puk
-St sQk
-St qtCk
-st tuk
-St ek
-st qk^k
-St k$k
-St slik
-St qtuk
-St tCk
-St fut
-St qput
-St put
-St che
-St qche
-St che
-St et
-St qk^t
-St it
-St zQng
-St qtCng
-St tQng
— St mi
— St gmi
— St mi
— St fGt
— St qpQt
—St fCt
— St en
— St qkn
— St in
— St me
— St gme
— St me
— St mug'nuk
— St gmug*nuk
— St mug*nuk
— St ftuk
— St qptuk
— St ftuk
— St eg*nuk
— St qk^nki
— St k^nki
— St mug'nuk
— St gmug'nuk
— St mug'nuk
— St mti
— St gmti
— St mti
— St fche
— St q^he
— St fche
— St eta
—St qkStti
— St ita
— St mung
— St gmung
— St mung
-St tone
-St Igumine
-St imne
-St irpne
-St iguvine
-St Irpne
-St ene
-St qkene
-St ene
-St mene
-St igumene
-St mene
-St mugne
-St gmugne
-St mugne
-St !ftugne
-St qptugne
-St iftugne
-St egne
-St qkugne
-St kugne
-St mugne
-St gmugne
-St mugne
-St imtne
-St gumtne
-St imtne
-St ifsne
-St qpetchne
-St ifsne
-St etne
-St qk^tne
-St itne
-St muqne
-St gmuqne
-St muqne
SUFFIXES
47
148. The verb form, third person, i.e., chUliatkUcX = A€ is my workman.
Sing.
— stkaka
— st ki m&
my
«
Dual
— st ka qka
— st ki gmi
Piur.
*
— st ki nka
— st ka mi
' Sing.
— st k^n
— st ka hpGt
Sing, ^
thy
4
Dual
— st ka qkn
— st ka qpQt
Piur.
— stk&tn
st k^ hpQt
' Sing.
— st ki . . .
— st ka n
his
*
Dual
stk&k
— st ki qkn
b
Piur.
— stkae
st k^ dn
•
p
' Sing.
— st ka hpuk
— st kil mugnuk
we both, our
Dual
— st ka qpuk
— st k& gmugnuk
Piur.
— st k^ puk
— st kil mugnuk
' Sing.
— st ka htOk
— st ka hptOk
Dual *
you both, your <
Dual
— st ka qtttk
— st ka qptQk
Piur.
— st ka tQk
— st kil ptQk
' Sing.
— st ka k
— st ka gnGk
they both, their -
Dual
— st k& qk$k
— st kil qk$nka
h
Piur.
— st kil k$k
— st kil kgnka
w
' Sing.
— st k& hput
— st kil mta
our
4
Dual
— st ka qput
— st kil gmti
Piur.
— st kd put
— st kil mta
' Sing.
— st k^ hche
— st kil hpche
Piur. '
your
*
Dual
— st k^ qche
— st kil qpche
Piur.
— st k^ che
— st kil pche
' Sing.
— st ka t
— stkilta
their
«
Dual
— st ka qkgt
— st kil qketa
te
Piur.
— st kil $t
— st ka gtil
149. uek.
Sing,
Dual.
Piur,
Intrans.
chaokl^k
chaoklek
chaoklet
Tram,
chadklim
Loc,
chaoklir'm
e
chaoklegne
chadklir'ne
eU.
etc.
etc.
etc.
IdnggnoklSk
the back c
>ne
ch&miiklgk
the lower one
Idtkl^k
the front (
>ne
yikl^k
the last one over there
ntimtin y^kllrmiin itr&qt5k
he goes to the last house over there
48
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
150. The usual time forms :
Pres,
chadklSk
the first
Past
chaokllthluk
the once first
Put
chaokl^rk^k
the to be first
151. The possessive forms :
Intrans,
Trans.
Loc.
my
chaokl^kll
ch^okllm^
chadklimne
thy
ch^aklln
cha5kl!rput
chaoklirpne
his
ch^okle^
chadkle^n
chaoklelne
etc.
etc.
etc.
eta
KIngghokieka is used to
express my younger brother.
152.
Pres.
Past.
Put.
Intrans,
yuchSk
yuchethluk
yuch^hk&k
Trans,
yuchim
yuchelthrum
yuch^hk^m
Loc,
yuchimg
yuchethlSr'me
yuchShkame
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
This is derived from yuk, man. TuchSk means the state of being a
man^ manhood.
iyaiich^k
miyuch^k
^trauch^k
illauch^k
a start
an ascent
a descent
companionship
153. The possessive forms are as follows :
Pres,
Past.
Intrans,
yuchak^
Trans.
yuchlmi
Loc,
yucMmne
etc.
etc.
yuchilthka
yuchilthm^
yuchithHmn^
etc.
Put.
yuch^hkakd
yuch^hk^md
yuch^hkamne
etc.
These all follow the same paradigm (154) as yuchAkft, 3nichiii,
yucheft, etc.
The locatives (408) and demonstratives (282) also assume this
form.
SUFFIXES 49
^3 b ?o
uTT nTT uTI 1^
2*K12*2S <5<rt»<^(5< rtirtiS*<^ 5
OQ
p
p
0c
P
^
0i TT ^ Vr B % ^ O
P P cc O
crc p
p
^ P 5 »Q
3 c/)
Cc
P
*o P«
UU AUi i-^-^-^
5«Sfc p-p-p-p- p-p-p-p-
»2 S 25 S. ^^ 5, S og S rt. ^ rt.
p* «' 5.
EP^STsT P'P'p'P' P^p* p" p
S?P**S*t3* S3*s:555*S* ovirt.i^-<»-
I 1 1: 1 I "2- •? I
§.§'?§' sg't^lg: &=&='
Al
ai
•— <
3
P
P
P-
rti
p
PC
P
p
p
a
AAoA oaAo Aortrt >
STp-p-p- pfp-crp* p-p-p-p-g
B ^ % B B i %B i"i3l38
" g* f' g s I
p*
P*
P
P
hirhp
p-
B
p
1
p
C^
3
c<
PC
W
pc
?r
TT
>r
crpfpfp* P'p-p-p' p-p'pfp-^
B^3^3 ^ B S B i'S'gls^
B^p-STp* trp-p-p* p-p-p-p-
e^ fill »^ •■«c ^^< i-^i »-€ »«< /«ti Ai *'^ "^
Ss.g pp<x)p aSxS.P
P* ^ 5" #« i-i '^ #K rt« Sc ^3* C ?**
S flK S. Q'Q S O CFQ X- S^ OQ C< •
pep- OcaqpCc P g«
p c«
p
S-S-S-8- B.g-8-g. S-S-S-S-!^
se^s 3|£:3 e"S!3^3
^gls ^^s<^' li-s^s
SsS-a SS-fa ^'^^'^
^
K
50 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
155.
nauthlQch&k^ my illness
mikkuch&ki my smallness
pekuchakS, my ownership
tuyuchaki my arrival (present) = my being come
tutlhuchak^ my arrival = my having come (past)
hwlngnuchaki myself
hwegn^ iyokuchaki iy5klnrat5k taiitsttin I do not act like that one
= I (my way, my state of sameness) is not the same as that one.
156. There are also the mode variations.
V
ekiimdstgnuchaki my being a sled maker
chdllistgnuchak^ n&thlo^ he does not know that I am a workman
ukfuk&kl Agiyutst^ngkruch€^ I believe in the existence of God
" kithlun t&ktalraimiik Cit^llni ay5k I chakSrchuSluchaki n&spay&qcheu "
"quousque tandem abutere Catilina patientia nostra''
157.
illuthliqkd^ iyauchimntik
I regret the start made by me = that I started
kS,nruchemS,rachimugntik kinggnoiktin
after we both have been told
158.
peyuchimttin as I like
pechlmttin as I do
kepQcWmtiin kepututft ki did you buy just as I ? = as my buying
k^nntiqtutii k^ kinruchimttin did you say like I say ?
k^nruchlmttin iyokok it is just as I said
k&thl^tlauchirptiin ip^niik as you talk of yourself
tanghtichlmttin kiy^gdqch^hkimkln as soon as I see I will shout to you
V
nauthlun^qt5k tkeyuchimetiin he fell sick just as soon as he came
k^nruche^ttinthluh5k t^ngkfg'gelune and as soon as he spoke, light was
k^nruchem^rach!mtiin pelkll I did it at once after being told
kiinnuellucWrptiin through thy generosity
iiqthlenilrai toi m&kttik, m&kyQchimiiqsttin niiPlutuk
dawn coming, both got up; as soon as both got up they both
breakfasted
t&m&tii t^knauqt5k hw&tii AgiyQtiim p!sk(iche^tiin
may it be done according to the will of God
SUFFIXES 5 1
159. A large group of abstract nouns terminate in vUSk, These
are declined as follows :
trading
Agen, Intrans.
keputn5k
Agen. Trans,
keputnSrhiim
Loc.
keputnSr'me
Mod.
keputnSr'muk
etc.
etc.
keputn5k kil chuchukin do you like trading ?
160. These nouns take the characteristics of the modes.
kwegn€n5k smoking kwegn$qplkiin5k too much smoking
meluskiln5k snuffing melusk^qp^kiindk over snuffing
kwegn^p^kin5k atauhwaunrat5k too much smoking is not good
Note. — These may usually be rendered by the infinitive, as, it is not good to smoke
toe much.
161. The negative of these nouns is very frequently used, where
in the English the positive would appear.
tuzh6tiir£tn5k atauhwaug5k unlameness is good
162. klik. Represents something that is ready, easy, fitting, proper
to be done :
— kllguk — kligut
Intrans.
—klik
Trans.
— Idem
Loc.
— klig'me
etc.
etc.
— kligug'ne — klig*ne
etc. etc.
163. The time forms :
Pres. — kl!k Past — klithluk Put. — kligo^qkak
V
mingsSkllk a thing fit to sew tkeuch^kllk a thing fit to be brought
kepuch&kllk a thing fit to buy peikllk a thing fit to do
164. raft. This ending is the third singular of rSftgnft. (See 462.)
It is to be rendered as he or the one wlio is acting.
165. The three tense forms together with their negatives are as
follows : example, iySlrfift, he who goes, the one who is going.
Pres. iyilrai
Past iyilthhtilrai Neg.
Put, iy&qch^hkllrai
' iyinrilra^
iy^nritlrai
lyag'gnitlrai
52
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
166. As usual, each one of these has its full set of cases.
Cases.
Sing.
Intrans,
^ttilrai
Trans.
^ttilraem
Loc.
^tiilra&me
Mod.
^tmra&miik
Term.
^ttilraiimiin
ViaL
^tiilrsULkiin
y£quai.
atiilraattin
Dual,
itiilriak
Plur.
^tiilraet
^ttilraeg'ne
atiilragg'niik
^ttilraeg'ntin
^ttilraeg'n^rghiin
^ttilraeqttin
itiilraine
^tiilraintik
^.tiilraintin
atiilrMthiin
^tiilra^tsttin
167. As there is no gender in Innuit, it is only from the context that
it can be known whether these words are to be taken as masculine
or feminine. Thus, itfilrii may mean he who sings or she who sings.
Many words in raft are also impersonal.
168. As most of the modes possess a form in riftgnft, and as these
may often combine, there is an endless variety of these derivatives
in raft.
169. This form is without the possessive.
170. Ulrftft. The words with this ending are derived from Mode
XVII.
Note. — These words- form a kindred group to those in tlOk. (See 127.)
^wly^lilra^ a place which is bushy mlUilra^ a place which is watery
jrulilrai a place which is populous nul&lilra^ one who is polygamous
171. tUS. This is the termination of a very numerous group of
words, having the force of nouns, but at the same time expressing
some accompanying attribute.
It is by means of these derivatives from the modes that this
language compensates for its lack of adjectives.
172. These words have the usual time forms, as follows :
Pres. pHleyule
a fine worker
Fast pilleyuthltik
a once fine worker
Fut. pilleynaqkik
a coming fine worker
mumyule
a good dancer
k^nytile
a nice speaker
&tuyul6
a fine singer
&t6qstiyule
a good musician
iyiyGle
a good traveller
Iqyiyule
a fine seer (i.e., an owl)
piikchQle
a good walker
kgpuchule
a good trader
These are all derived from Mode CXLVI.
SUFFIXES
S3
a sinner
a voyager
173. From Mode CXLVII a similar group is derived with the
signification of habitual or regular performance.
kol^r&tule a relator of stories ch^qthliiqtule
uqchS,rltule a mourner iy^tule
yug'y&tule a place frequented by people
tiintutule a district frequented by deer
ttintutulem tikkite on this side of the deer hunting ground
174. The declension of these words is as follows :
Cases.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
Intrans,
a^tuyule
atuyulak
^tuyulet
Trans.
a^tuyulem
Loc,
ituyuleme
dtuyuHg'ne
ituyulene
Mod.
&tuyulemtik
ituyulig'ntik
^tuyuleniik
Term.
ituyulemtin
ituyulig'ntin
ituyuleniin
Vial.
^tuyulektin
^tuyuliqkiin
atuyulethiin
jSquai.
atuyulettin
3.tuyuliqtun
ituyuletsttin
175. The declension of the past and future being perfectly regular,
it is not necessary to give them in full.
Intrans. ituyuthltlk ituyulthhriik ituyulthhrtit
Trans. ituyulthhriim
Loc. atuyuthlSr'me ituyulthhrtig'ne ituyulthhrine
etc. etc. etc. etc.
176. The future :
Intrans. ^.tuyu^qk^k
Trans. ^tuyuaqkim
Loc. ^tuyudqklme
etc. etc.*
177. 16. The time forms :
Pres. ailingt^Lr'le
Past
Put.
S,tuyu^qktik
^tuyulqk^t
ailingtar'lethltik
aiUngtir'liqkak
etc.
etc.
ituyoaqktig'ne
etc.
&llingt&r'lek
aillngtar'lelthhrGk
alKngtarUiqkik
etc.
178. They are declined as follows :
Intrans. aiHngt^Lr'le &llingUlr'lek
Trans. aillngt&r'lem
Loc. mngtar'leme aiUngtir'llg'ne
etc. etc. etc.
ituyu^qkdne
etc.
dlllngtar'let
&llingtiirlelthhrtit
aiHngtar'Hqkat
etc.
aiUngt&r'lat
^llingt^r'lene
etc.
54
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
179. The possessive form :
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
aiUngtir'Uka
ailingtar'Kqka
^lUngtlLr'Unk^
180. The personal and case
forms:
my allingt^Lr'lika
thy aiUngtdr'lin
his ^lllngtllr'lea
aillngtarltaia
ailingt&r'HqpIt
aiHngtar'lean
aillngt^Lr'Umne
ail!ngtar1iqpne
aiHngtirleane
ailingtir'le a coward tokon^rle
ch&g'nele a champion wrestler
a murderer
181. Ptt signifies belonging
to^ one's own, real,
true,
etc.
Intrans. — pei
Trans. — pe^m
Loc. — pe^me
•
etc. etc.
—peak
— pe&gng
etc.
— peat
— peine
etc.
ani kattinripeikaka
kdllik klnggnunup^ikiput
Qtriqtdk emumtin mauqholup€imgntin
this one is my own son
heaven is our real home
he went back to his own
grandmother
182. There are many variations, each with a slight difference.
pei nukaithpei
peik nukdlthpeik
peirik nukilthp^irik
peiritik n ukdlt hpeirit&k
p6iqpithliik nukilthpeiqpithltUk
p6ip!k nukilthpeiplk
a man in the prime of life
a youth
a young man
a first-class hunter = a prominent man
a great big fellow
truly the proper person
Note. — NflkUthpC&iftt&k is only used in native stories.
liiqpeik nOniliiqpeik this word can be used to express a
continent
pepeik emiqp6p€ik the high sea
peliipeik emiqpeli&peik the ocean
183. K&ssftt = wAite men, so kissUfipeit means the real, the true
whites. This is the modest term adopted by the few dozen half
and quarter breed descendants of the Russian traders yet existing
along the Yukon delta, to distinguish themselves from Americans
= kftS8&t.
SUFFIXES
55
184. 10k and IBq'lSk. These suffixes are used to express poor^ poor
old, etc., in a compassionate sense.
They are generally added to words expressing kindred and occur
continually in the native stories.
Occasionally these suffixes are added to words for animals and
sometimes even to those for inanimate objects.
The following are the endings of the possessive in the three first
persons, singular :
my grandmother
thy grandmother
his grandmother
Intrans.
Trans.
mauqhuldki
mauqhul5m^
maliqhuld&n
mauqhul5qp{t
mauqhuld^
mauqhulo&n
Intrans.
Trans.
mauqhal5q'lok^
mauqhul5q'lom^
mauqhal5q'ltin
mauqhul5q'lup{t
mauqhtil5q'lo^
mauqhul5q'ldin
my father
my mother
^taug'lak^
^naug'l5ki
my old father
my old mother
185. raii'lBq. This conveys the idea of being poor, destitute, aged.
Note. — This suffix occurs continually in native stories. The endings are : singular,
16q ; dual, Ifik; plural, Iflt ; transitive, lOm.
thlerirauUSq
^fr^m^kk^rau'ldq
an orphan boy
an old woman
186. Combinations with the augmentative are frequent,
^h-^m&kkau'ldqp^k a big old woman
187. Combinations with the diminutive :
a little old man
two little old women
^ghOk^raulQchd^
^fr£m^kldlrauluch5S,r&k
188. Ia6nit. This suffix signifies deceased.
NOTK. — It is used generally in the possessive form, loimtka. (See 75.)
iy&qto^ &tim^ kiy^ktin I go in my father's canoe
This shows that the parent referred to is still living, but when this
suffix is added the meaning changes.
iy&qto^ &tS,lu€rutmi kly^kiin I go in my deceased father's
canoe
56
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
189. IrQtkft means the same and is more commonly used.
^tirutkil my late father ^n^irutki my late mother
^nggnirutkd my late brother ^Ithkirutki my late sister
These are both from Modes VI and VII.
190. kukkft. The time forms are :
Pres. kepuskOkka.
Past keputlhukUkk^
Fut. kepuch^hkkfikki
nokkiikkil
V
umyu6rkktikk^
umyti6rkiinrilthk(ikkS,
n^kkllkktikk^
yOSr'yalckCkka
that which is my thing bought = my purchase
th*at which was my thing bought
that which will be my thing bought
that which is needed by me = a necessity to me
what I mean
what I do not mean
my loved one
my sought for one
191. Examples of combinations with other modes :
kepuch^&ktikk^ taligw&m ^metol
it should be my purchase only I lack skins (i.e., pelts used in pa3rment)
kepuch&kkQkkil ^thUm yum keputhline^
it should be my purchase, but it appears another man bought it
Pimilnen^nimne peyuge&kClkki taugwS,m t^kkiloS,
during my being at Pimute, it was my wished thing to do, but I
changed my mind
&t5q'y&qick!ikki taugw&m thlo^thld^ ^tiinr^to^
it is what I should have sung only I did not sing it well
The following paradigm presents the entire set of the personal
possessive endings.
Note. — In some cases euphony may require kSkldl, klkkX, IdBkkS, etc.
192.
Sing. -
my
thy
his
fSing,
Dual
Plur.
fSing.
Dual
Plur,
' Sing,
Dual
Plur.
— kOkka
— kqki
— knka
— kn
— ^kqkn
— ktn
— ke
— kttk
— ki
— ^kma,
— ^kgm^
— km&
— kfttt
— kqpOt
— kfCt
— ken
— kqkn
— kin
SUFFIXES
57
Dual <
Flur.
we both, i
5ur
' Sing.
Dual
Flur,
kfuk
— kqpuk
— kpuk
— kmug'nuk
— kgmug'nuk
— kmug'nuk
you both,
your -
\ Sing.
Dual
Flur.
ksClk
— kqtuk
—ktuk
kftttk
— kqftOk
kftfik
they both
, their ^
Sing.
Dual
Flur.
kek
kqk^k
kk!lk
— keg'nuk
— kqkSnki
kkdnkd
our
4
' Sing.
Dual
Flur.
kfut
— kqput
— kput
kmt^
— kgmt&
— kmti
your
4
Sing.
Dual
Flur.
kse
— kqche
— kch€
— kfchg
— kqpch€
— kfche
their
4
Dual
Flur.
— ket
kqkSt
—kit
keti
kqk^t^
kit^
193. khgniilrii. These words are derived from Mode LXXXIX.
As they all follow the regular forms, it is only necessary to present
the beginnings.
my purchase kepukngn&ki my purchase kepulcngn^ki
my two purchases kepukngn&qk^ thy purchase kepukngn^n
V V
my purchases k€pukngn&nldL his purchase kepukngn^
194. Case endings :
V V V V
kSpukngn&ki kSpukngn&m^ kepukngn^mn§ kepukngn^mnuk, etc.
V
kinrutlho&ka peyukngn^pnuk
I told him what you want = about your wauted thing
ch!kftrch£hldLgn^ peyukngn^mnuk
he will give me what I want = my wanted thing
195. The time forms with their cases :
Fast
kSpulTngn^lthki
kSpukngn^lthm^
kgpulcngnithlimn6
etc.
' kepukngn^qk^ki
V
Fut. < kepukngnS,qkllmS,
kepukngn^qk^mn6
etc
NOTK. — For paradigm of the past form see 90.
5 8 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
196. ghoik. This suffix signifies a resemblance ^ image, picture,
representation^ etc. (From Mode LXXXIV.)
The transitive, ghoftm ; singular, giiOik ; dual, ^Oik ; plural, ^Oftt
tuntughoS,k picture of a deer
chezsirghd^k picture of a serpent
^ngghing'roik^ my male cousin = my like as a brother
n^rhuy^no^k net float of wood carved like a goose = n&rhuy^k
The mud nests made by the swallows are termed :
kugnm!lgh5^rS,t i.e., like graves
197. ThlinXk signifies entirely^ always^ only, etc. (See Mode
XXXI.)
The transitive is thliniim ; dual, thlinlk ; plural, thHn&t.
£rr^l5k k$llS,qthlinur'me QStalik the moon is in the heavens
tikfeg^qthlln&r^t t^ngvig^nkil I see only the forest
itr^lma pe6k yug'y&g'lune yunkhrithlin&r'nuk
having entered, he sees it (the house) crowded with all young men
6m&qp!gmUt^k^mt^ m5qthlintik t^ngv^g'l^rihput
when we are on the ocean we see only water
th^lthkothllnur'me ntime uetauk
he lives in a house all of stone
198. ThlinXk combines also with hw&tn. (See 358.)
199. Ithkttk. This suffix conveys the idea of dislike, repug-
nance, etc.
Transitive, Ithkttm ; singular, Ithkttk ; dual, Ithkttk ; plural, Ithkat.
Sing,
t&ngauhululthktik
a boy I dislike
Dual
ek^mr^lthkuk
a sled I dislike
Plur,
nun<hkut
a village I dislike
For the use of this suffix with the pronouns see 284.
200. kSrtlih. This implies agreeable, pretty, etc.
Transitive, kirt&rftm ; singular, l£rtah ; dual, Id&tirSk ; plural,
kgrtXrftt.
201. KSrtah is a difficult sound to express. The first syllable is
like cur pronounced quickly and low in the throat, while the second
is soft and prolonged, as tiX. It is from Mode LXXXI.
Sl/FFIXES 59
202. This suffix and the preceding are given together.
kSmuqtikSrtih a fine dog kemuqtiflthktik a bad dog
ekimr&kkSrt^Lr&k a nice sled ek^mr^lthktik a poor sled
^gnutkSrtih a good man ^gnutilthktik a mean man
For the use of this suffix in cha see 315.
For the use of this suffix in verbs see Mode LXXXI.
203. iqkik. This ending comes from Mode XXIX and it signifies
// or him to whom the act should be applied,
^ngthlur^qk^k one who is to be baptized
^ngthlunrat^qkik one not to be baptized
k^ssutiqkdk one who is to be married
kdssutunratiqkiUc one not to be married
pr&r^qk^k a thing which should b^ wiped
pe&qk^k an act which should be done
ly&g&qk^t those who should go
kuvl^rh^ moq'muk ^ngthlur^qkdm uksho&kun
he pours some water on the head of the person who is to be baptized
The possessive form follows the usual endings. (See 78.)
thl6u un& t&nghiim^qk^tne put this where they can see it =
in where it is to be seen by them
The plural is :
t^ghtim^qkitn§ where they can see them
Note. — Tinghflmlqkfttiii is the localis case, third plural, of tAnghOmftqUmiii, from
tAnghttmiqkftkft, my should be seen thing,
204. thltLq. Signifies old^ worn out, etc.
The endings are : transitive, thlSrilm ; singular, thliiq ; dual, thlhrOk;
plural, thlhrtlt.
Note. — Most of the examples are in the possessive.
k^mmiiks<hthltikldL my old shoe
k&mmtiks<hh^qki my old pair of shoes
^tkiilththliikki my old ^tktik (native coat = parka)
205. Examples in combination with the diminutive :
5f'lQvch5&thlhr^ne his little old bow
nQcho^thliiqtuk their (dual) little old hut
k^k6v6ch5^thltiqr^nk^ my little old needle-case (19)
6o
ESSEXTIALS OF INNUIT
206. veUfilththltLq. A variation of the above ; signifies oldy large,
and repulsive,
^^r^rn^qvell(ilththliiq a big old woman
^ntituwe&lulththliiq a big old man
kemiiqtuvve^lulththltiq a big old dog
207. tuweftliik. A variation, meaning bad.
kemiiqtuwe^ltik a bad dog
^n'ggnuttiwelltik a bad man
208. veutik. A variation, meaning bad, worthless, etc.
yuve<ik a bad man, big, clumsy
kiy^ve&liik a poor canoe
209. iietUc, tXm. Dual, Xk ;
aknir'nilet&k
ktimkiletlk
auwS,regiiilet&k
210.
211.
^t^lkswel^t^kd = t&mi
^n&kswel^t^ki
^nikswelet&qput
illlkswelet^kll
piksiiqpllet&ldi
ntittikstiqpilet^ldL
kemtiqttikstipiletS,ldL
plural, &t.
thimble (i.e., a thing to prevent pain)
toothpick
a weight (i.e., a thing to prevent it being
moved)
my dear father
my dear mother
our dear mother
my dear friend
a thing I want by all means
a gun I am most desirous for
a dog I want particularly
212. niiqhXk. This conveys the idea of newness : just made, lately
acquired, etc. (See Mode IV.)
Intrans. — niiqh^k
— ntiqh^k
— niiqhat
Trans. — ntiqhriim
Loc. — niiqhramg
— ni&qhr^gne
— niiqhrane
etc. etc.
etc.
etc.
kem tiqttingni&qh^k
a new dog
^gho&rutungntiqh^k
a new paddle
yuntiqh&k
a young man (i.e.,
manhood)
one just arrived at
SUFFIXES 6 1
213.
the new trail over the mountains which we use now is very hard, but it is
much shorter than (the trail) along the river (Yukon)
tumiii%niiqhrat ingrirqkwir'ya.rat hw^to^ mi it6q'lilthput ningtukn^qkut
taligw^m ukk^kshlnrout kwiqp^qkwir'y^r^me tumume
all right I if it is shorter, I do not care how difficult it is, I will take it
ch^nr^rtokl n^ngtukn^qkiinggniir'm£ ukk^kshlnrukune illingchifk^ne
^t5qchghk^k^
Lit, there is nothing ! although it causes suffering, if it is shorter, I with-
out caring, I will use it
214. jjSk. This suffix implies real^ tnUy etc.
Sing,
Inirans, — ^pik
Tram, — pem
Loc, — pigmg
etc, etc.
yuplk the race
em&qpik the sea
215. Another group, declined in the same way, ends in pCpik.
^m^qpeplk the ocean
216. A third group ends in pCftpik.
nuk^lthpe^pik a strong young man
217. yXrXk. This adds the idea of way^ mode^ meanSj course^ etc.
The endings are : transitive, yftrim ; dual, y&rik ; plural, jixlt.
Dual.
Plur.
— ^pek
—pet
—pegne
etc.
— pIgne
etc.
nun^plk solid ground (i.e.,
peplk real act
, not marsh)
&kkumgiy^r&k
seat
ikkumgauqtoS
, I sit down
iyUg'y&r&k
starting point
iy^qto^
I go
k&lv&qy^r&k
outer entrance to native
house
kilv^qt^k^
I lower it down
ka!lw&qt&r!y^r&k
bed place
kaiiw^qto^
I sleep
Idlw&ntituy^r^k
dream
k&w^nuttiqto^
I dream
k&nniiq'y&r^k
word
k^nntiqto^
I talk
mitst&r!y&r&k
warming place
m&tstlLto^
I warm myself
p€chig'y^r&k
petition
pech^qtoi
I beg = request
ptlg'y^r&k
inner entrance to house
pugwo^
I enter = bob up
piilliy&r&t
trail through bushes
piillaughi
I penetrate
62
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
puyiriy&r&k smoke hole = stove pipe
t^guy^r^k handle
t^ptilriy^r^k pocket knife
puy!rqt5k it smokes
taguy^r^k^ I take hold of it
t^pt^k^ I fold it over
218. litik.
p^l&hwutik
steamer
chiinn&hwutilk
yard of an angiak = skin sailing boat
piikt&kutak
wooden float for fish nets
kech^kut^k
a bone sinker used on nets
Oliig'yarut&k
native wooden maul
t^r^nradrut^k
a mirror
kauqtut^k
short heavy club for killing
salmon
pikketutdk
native axe of jade, etc.
ptiydqtiitak
tobacco pipe
219. n«k. These are
derived from nSqkok. (Mode XXVI.)
^ngl^n^k pleasantness
illlngn^k
fear
t^kur'nik honor
pullug'n^k
mire
tokdn&k death
chiipm^k
difficulty
220. These words are
: declined as follows :
Sing,
Dual.
Plur.
Inirans, ^ngl^nik
&ngl^n^
^ngl^n^t
Trans. ^ngliin^m
Loc, ^ngl^n^me
^ngl^n^g'ne
^ngl^n^ne
etc. etc.
etc.
etc.
221. Ohw&t. This may be termed the collective suffix and corre-
sponds to a second plural or plural of multitude, as in English :
brother
yiit men
ttintat deer
tlngma^t geese
brothers
yugtihw&t
tiinturuhw^t
tlngma^rtlhw^t
yuguhw^t t^kd&tne
brethren
a crowd of men = a multitude
a herd of deer
a flock of geese
in the presence of a crowd
222. The declension follows the usual plural form, as :
yuguhw^t
yugGwir'ne
etc.
A UGMENTA TIVE 63
The Augmentative
223. Largeness^ etc., is denoted by pftk.
Sing. Dual. Plur.
Inirans. — pXk — pek — pet
Trans, — pem
Loc. — p^g'me — pegne — p&g'ne
etc, etc. etc. etc.
k^nniiqp^k a big snowfall ingy^qp^k ship or steamer
n^nv^h^qp^k a great lake thilthkop^k a large rock
ingriqp^k a great mountain unggnungslqp^k a great animal
224. With pftk some words assume a secondary meaning.
kwiq a river kwiqp^k the Yukon
ytik a man yiiqp^k a giant
tiintu a deer tiintuytiqp^k the constellation Ursa
Major
&gglak a star &gg!y^qpik the morning star
ntilarh^ his wife nul^rqp^k the first wife (i.e., in
a polygamous household)
225. Pik influences verbs also. (See Mode LXXVI.)
k&nniqt5k it snows k^nniiqp^qtdk it snows heavily
226. Pik combines with locatives.
n^giik north n^giikf^k the extreme north
227. Euphony will sometimes demand f or v in place of p.
^gnQtf^k a fine buck kemulv^k ^ a large dog
ninggnilv^k intense cold inggnulv^k ^ a large man
228. ChesirpSk signifies the great serpent^ the sea serpent^ from
chSzik, the term for snake. Although this word is known, yet
there are no snakes in Arctic Alaska. That the Innuit possess
some traditional knowledge of these animals is proved by the
frequent representation of the sea serpent on their ivory pipes, etc.
229. rilk. This suffix also implies large,
^nggiirtik a large canoe
kwegiik a large river
n^nv^riik a large lake
kikQqtlLriik a large island
^ These two are rarely used.
64
ESSENTIALS OF INN (/IT
The Diminutive Suffixes
230. The idea of smallness is added by the suffix chtt.
Intrans.
Trans,
Loc,
etc,
Ingrik
ek&mr^k
k^nt&k
Sing.
— choi
— cho^r^m
— chd^rim^
etc.
a house
a mountain
a sled (used in dual)
a wooden bowl
Dual.
-cho&r^k
Plur.
■cho&rat
— cho^rdgne
etc.
ntichod
ingdchoi
^kilmr^choir^k
kilntHcho^
:ho^r^ne
etc.
a little house
a hill
a small sled
a little bowl
231. With chOtt some words assume a secondary meaning.
yuk
chupplu
a man
a tube
232. Ch0ft influences the verbs,
k^nniqtok it snows
yucho^
chupplutcho^r^t
(See SSI.)
kiinnkho^tok
a dwarf
the lungs (i.e., the
little tubes)
it snows a little
233. ChO& also combines with the locatives,
y^kfik yonder y^kfdcho^
yonder a bit
234. ch&gnUc. This suffix signifies small and nice.
Intrans,
Trans,
Loc,
etc.
Sing,
— chugnik
— chugnim
— chugn^rame
etc.
Dual,
-chugn^
Plur.
chugn^t
:hugnigne
etc.
:hugn^ne
etc.
a nice little boy
a little lake
a fine young fellow
Note. — For the use of chflgnlk in the verbs see Mode CXLVI.
t&ngauhuluchugn^
n^n v^h^ch ugn^k
nuk^lthpe^chugn^k
235. The possessive form :
^n^chunik^
p^nnichun^n
ntitchune
chlkme^ chUcme^ ^gg^^chugn^k
my dear little mother
thy dear little daughter
his cozy little house
twinkle, twinkle, little star
DIMINUTIVE SUFFIXES
65
236. tlrichfighXk. This is a variation with about the same meaning.
V
kemiiqtktiktdr^chtigh^ a very nice little dog
237. chOftyik. This is a variation of the diminutive :
Sing,
Dual,
Plur.n^
Intrans,
— choiy^k
— chd^y^g^k
— chodyigiit
Trans,
— chd&y^r^m
Loc,
— cho^y^r^me
— chaiy^g^gne
— choilyarane
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
n^nviichoiy^k
a nice pond
kemtiqt&cha^y^g^t
fine puppies
238.
The following diminutives express the young of animals, etc.
Sing,
Dual,
Piur,
Intrans,
— ^yigik
— y^ilk
— yigat
Trans,
— y^g^m
Loc,
— ySgdme
— yigagne
— y3,g&ne
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
ttintu
a deer
ttintuyigik
a fawn
kemuqtil
a dog
kemiiqtyagS.k
a pup
kiklcqti
an island
kTkkqtyag&k
an islet
^nketiy^g^k
a new-bom
baby
239. These may also have the time forms :
Fast ttintuy^gathliik
Fut, ttintuy^g^qkak
240. A variation of this appears, as follows :
Sing,
Dual,
Plur,
Intrans,
— iy^k
— iyS-g^k
— iyig^t
Trans.
— iyirim
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
k^vwaiy^
a
fox cub
tlngni&Iy^k
a
gosling
241.
Another variation is :
kSmiiqkauy^ = kaiiy^r^m, kemiiqkauy^r^k, kemiiqkauy^r^t
242. k&chigik. This suffix adds the idea of worthlessness.
tutgh^r^lumkach^g^ a good-for-nothing little fellow
kSmiiqtingktich^g&k a worthless dog
yOngktlch^g&k a man (abusive)
66
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
The Partitive Suffixes
243. Such expressions as a little^ some, a morsel, a few, a piece of,
some few, etc., are to be rendered into Innuit by means of the
following suffixes : hXk, kwCnttq, and •knl.
244. Hik is used as follows : t&nSk means the back fat of deer, so
tonlUiXk would signify a little bit of this much-prized delicacy. These
words follov^ the regular form. The singular is the most used.
Intrdns, chiih&k
ch^k^k ch^hdt
Trans, ch^hr&m
Loc, ch^hlLr'inS
ch^hig'ng chahir'ne
etc, etc.
etc. etc.
okoh^k
a bit of blubber
chuy^h&k
a chew of tobacco
nOn^p^h&k
a little area of solid ground
k^fchehr^t yOt JUd^S
call a few men
Note. — This coincides with the augmentative suffix. (See 48.)
tunub^g'miik k^ptlcbiiqt5&
tunuqpig'mtik k€pachtiqt5&
I want to buy a little tunok
I want to buy a lot of tunok
245.
^thULt^h^ anything belonging to another (279)
&thl^t^^r*miik t£gach^k5n&kG another's property ; steal it not
lU^h^ a bit of it = a portion (639)
For the possessive form see 321.
ch^h^nki my little things
246. kwSnliq. There is little or no difference in meaning between
this and hXk. The transitive ends in rhttm.
Intrans,
kwentiq
kwenrik
kwenrit
Loc.
kw^niir'me
kwfeniig'ne
kwenr^ne
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
^taug'15qp6t tiintakwSntiq chikHr^tii
your old father gives you a bit of venison
^taug'lun ttintfikwenr^k chlkar&n
you give your old father two bits of venison
PARTITIVE SUFFIXES^ THE COMPARATIVE 67
&taug'l5^n 2,ts^tkwenr^t chlkarh^
his old father gives him a few berries
It is also used to express time, as :
ch^ kweniir'me uet&ch^hk5& I will stay a little while
ch^ kweniiq petfldduku for the sake of a trifle
247. imi. This can be used alone or in connection with kwCniiq;
the meaning is about the same, and the form is as follows :
Intrans, Im^ hn^r^k hn^r&t
Trans. hn^r^m
Loc. hn^r'mg im^r^g'nS hn^r&nS
etc. etc. etc. etc.
Note. — The dual and plural of these are given, but they are seldom used.
hn^r'mtik nauthliigw5& I am somewhat unwell
hn^ pikke^ give me a little
The Comparative
248. These are derived from the comparative mode in rOtLgnl
(LXXXIV).
The following examples are in the third person possessive
singular :
m!k!nr^ its smaller one
iy^'n!nr& its older one
penlnr^
^gnlngr^
its stronger one
its larger one
249. The possessive form :
Sing. penlnki
Duai p^ninr^qki
Plur. penlnr^nka
* my stronger one
250. The personal and case forms :
my pSnink^ penenlm^
thine p6ninrii penenuqplt
his peninr& peninr^n
etc. etc. etc.
p6n6n!mne
pendnuqpne
p€n!nr^D6
etc.
pdnenine tiski
he called his
stronger one
68
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
The Pronouns
251. The Innuit language presents many interesting features in its
pronouns, which comprise the three following groups : the personal,
the interrogative, the demonstrative.
252. There are no distinct possessive pronouns, neither are there
any indefinite or relative pronouns. These two latter groups are
idiomatically supplied. (See $8 and 7^2^
253. The Innuit pronouns are all inflected, and follow the one
general form of declension.
254. Regarding the use of the personal pronouns in connection
with verbs, Innuit follows the same custom as Latin. Hence, unless
the speaker wishes to be emphatic, it is indifferent whether he says
hw6 iyfiqtOft, I go, or simply iySqtOft.
255. In regard to the reflexive verbs, the Innuit pronouns are
used as in English or German :
hwe n5.kklikko^ hwingntik
hwdnktik n^kkllkkukuk hw^nkug'ntik
hw^nkutH n^kkllkkukut hwdnkutntik
I love myself
we both love ourselves
we love ourselves
256. In addressing one, the second person singular is invariably
made use of.
Note. — Throughout this volume our ordinary form you is always used, as it can
be readily seen from the examples when either thmt ox ye is meant.
Second Pers. Sing.
Second Pers. Plur.
kittuyet
kinkutstche
who are you ? (Le., who art thou ?)
who are you ?
The Personal Pronouns
257.
Sing.
Cases.
/
thou
he
Agen, Inirans,
hwe
ipit
le
Agen, Trans,
hwegn^
ipit '
Hn
Loc.
hw^ng'ne
iplne
lene
Mod.
hwing'niik
iplntik
lenttk
Term.
hwang'niin
iplniin
leniin
Vial.
hw^ngktin
Iplghtin
iekdn
jEqual.
hwingsttin
(p!sttin
iettin
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
69
Dual
Cases.
we both
you both
they both
Agen, Intrans.
hw^nktik
ipetnk
ikink^
Agm. Trans,
hw^nkiik
ipetnk
Iktik
Loc,^
hw^nktig'ne
ipStOg'ne
ikiig'ne
Mod,
hw^nktig'niik
ipSrtlg'niik
ikiig'niik
Term,
hw^nktig'niin
ip^tdg'niin
Iktig'ntin
Vial
hw^nktig'nSrghiin
ip$tQg'n$rghiin
Iktig'n^rghtin
ASquaL
hw&nkiiqstiin
ipStnkstiin
Plur.
Ikiiqstiin
Cases.
we
you
they
Agm, Intrans,
hw2,nk{iti
ip^che
Mt
Agen, Trans,
hw^nkuti
ip^che
ttata
Loc,
hw^nkQtne
ip^tzne
Matne
Mod,
hw^nkutntik
ip^tzntik
tiatntik
Term,
hw&nkutntin
ipStzniin
ttatntin
Vial,
hw^nkuthiin
ip^tzhiin
likiin
jEqual,
hw^nkuchetstiin
ip^tchestiin
Htiin
258.
Sing,
Dual,
Plur,
and I
hwehi
hw^nkuklu
hwankut&Hi
and thou
iplu
^ttikHi
ipSche
IktikHi
hhi
In answer to the salutation ch&nt^thkeiia, be kealtky, tOfttn Iplli is
said, meaning and you likewise.
iplG hwitii p6
hw^gn^thlG hw^ kwdyaumeyugn^
and you ! do like this =
you now do this way !
and I indeed am also glad
This is the answer to such expressions of welcome, etc., as, for
example :
kweyaiigni t2,nghuyuchemug'nuk ch^la I am glad to see you again
259. In response to questions like who is there? the answer in
the first person can be :
hwegn^ peugn^ it is I
280. Another form is :
hw^ngugh^ it is I
70
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
261. (See also 733.)
ip^nutii k^
i€n6k ki
is it you ?
is it he?
262. Tftnum is used with the personal pronouns and has very much
the same sense as *vere' in Latin.
Sing,
Dual.
Plur,
hwet5k t^ndm
hw^nktiktdk tilnQm
\ hw^nktitat5k tdnlim
}p!tt5k tdndm
Knt5k t^ndm
ip^tiktdk t&ndm
lkink^t5k t&nOm
ip^chet5k t^nOm
iiatat6k t&ndm
hwet5k t^nQm
iy^g'ie
indeed, I would like to be going too
hwegn^ ^tldL
my name
263.
hw^ng'n£t5k
iplngt6k
ientok
or
uetauk
uetauk
uetauk
ikugne^tuk
HatneStut
uetauk
uetaut
uni tinggdh^k hw^ng'net5k
un^ ip^nch^hk5k
this boy is in my care
I leave this in your care
264.
Sing,
myself
' hw^nggnuchak^
ip^nuchin
lenuche^
fhw^nkuch&rpuk
ip^nuch&rtuk
ikinuchaik
' hw^nkQch^rput
Flur, \ ip^nuch&rche
li^tnuchait
hw^nggnuchak^ n^thlo^
265.
chauhw^ngn^
chauhw^tii
chsLuhw^
etc.
he does not know me (154)
towards me
towards thee
towards him
etc.
kinkuqchima tilkuk^m chauhw2,ngn^
the bear being very ferocious (* turned ' understood) towards me
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
71
866. The following form is used occasionally and is equivalent to
aht poor me! (See 185.)
Sing,
Dual.
Plur,
hwenau'l5k
ipdr'ldk
ie6r'16k
h w&nk5r'lumn fik
ip6r'16qptuk
&er'mnk&
hwank6r'lumta
ip6r'16qpche
ie6r'lueUt
267.
/ love myself
Sing. -
^hwe
ip5t
1 «n
n^kllkkM
nakl!kkutft
n^kUkok
hwing'ntLk
ipiniik
khlim'niik
Dual -
' hw2,nkuk
ipgtik
Iskink^
n&kliqtukuk
n^kllqtutuk
n^kliqtuk
hw^nktig*niik
ipgdg'niik
ismug'ntik
Plur. *
' hw2,nkutl
ip^che
Mata
n^klfqtukut
n^Uqtuche
ndkliqtut
hw^nkutniik
ip^tzniik
ismtiq'niik
Neg.
hwe n^kllkkinratoi hw^ng'ntik,
etc.
268.
we love each other
Dual ^
kw^nkuk
ipgtik
hkinki
^tunQm
^tunQm
^tuntim
chuchuktOkilk
chuchuktutuk
chuchuktuk
Note. — The reciprocal form is expressed by XtfinlbiL
we love one another
' hw^nkut^
^tunQm
chuchuktukut
Plur <
ip^che
^tundm
chuchuktuchS
^tundm
chuchuktut
269. himself
themselves
themselves
Lac. thllm'ne
ismug'ne
hmtiqne
Mod. thUm'ntik
ismug'niik
hmtiqntik
Term, thllm'niin
ismug'ntin
hmtiqniin
Vud. thlimkiin
hmektin
hmuqtghtin
jEqual
. thltotiin
ismetiin
ismiiqttin
72 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
the man did it himself without any one helping him
Sing, thlfm'niik ytik pllleikkilthho^ ithlUmtik ekiyurqtaundna
Dual ismugntik yuk plllelkkilthho^k ^thlimuk ekiyurqtaundtuk
Plur, hmtiqntik yut pille&kkflthho^t ^thldmuk ekiyurqtaun^tting
thlimntik tokdut5k plks^kufk^n^n^ he killed himself accidentally
kemtiqt^ i!ifch6&t6k thlimntik the dog shakes himself
thlimektin uetauk he is doing nothing
thlimeniik tinggnuvlrqtok he took his life = killed himself
thlimeniik yiik tokoch^konlne plkllle a man may not kill himself
270.
^liiqkor^k ikinkH naunrdt lllet nufruskufk^n^ku
he commanded them both not to eat one (certain) fruit
entiqkutlhd^k }k!nk^ n^thlunretsklune iktigniin dt^nruch^ne
he forbade theip, that they might know he was their master
^t^nro5k hwinkutntin he governs us
V
unii pishtgn5k hw^ng'ne this one works for me = is a worker to me
V
hwdngne umytiortko^ to^tiS I do as I please
kend k^nntiqtH hw^ngttin who is talking like me = who mimics me
271. Sing, Dual. Plur.
slllthk^ne hw^ng'ne slilthkine hwinktig'ne slilthkine hw^nkutne
slilthk^ne Iplne slilthk^ne ip^ttig'ne slilthk^ne (p^tzne
slilthk2,ne iene slilthk^ne iktig'ne slilthkHne Hatne
272. In some districts, as around Cape Vancouver, another form
is used. In the following examples both are presented :
slilthk^ne
or
slip^
how silly I am
or
in me
uzvelthkane
a
uzvepS
how crazy I am
a
in me
^sh^rkiine
ii
ilsh^rqp^
how good I am
ii
in me
^shelk^ne
t(
^shepl
how bad I am
((
in me
kiizhgnuelthkdne
(<
k^zhgnuep^
how shameful I am
(t
in me
These may also appear in various modes :
kazhgniieniqkdk hwSngne, iplne, iene, etc.
it ought to be a shame to me, etc.
There is no change for past or future ;
k^zhgnuep^ thlu ^ine ^kkelgnorqtum^lrailme ^kkeletiksaun^ke
how shameless in you so long in debt without paying (them) (756)
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
87S.
this
Intrans.
Old
QkOk
flkat
Tram.
um
Lot.'
ume
Qkag'ng
' ukunS
Mod.
um&k
aktig'nak
ukuhtik
Term,
umQn
ukOg'nilii
ukunQn
r,a!.
Ok&D
uktlg'nerghiln
ukuthQn
yEgual.
uttin
Qknqtbiiii
ukutstQi)
271.
that
Intrans.
taiin^
taUkflk
ta"ukat
Trans.
taiim
Loe.
talime
taukOg'nS
taukunfi
Med.
taiimOk
taukag'ntkk
ta'ukunfik
Tirm.
ttTumttn
taiikag'nQn
ta-ukuniin
Vial.
taiiktin
taukitg'nSrghtSn
taukuthfln
^pusi.
ta'utfin
tauktiqthiiD
ta-ukutstOn
275.
this one here
Intrans.
m&na
makuk
makflt
Trans.
mitOtn
Lot.
matume
makfigne
makune
Mod.
matumOk
makflgnOk
makunfik
Ttrm.
matflmfin
mikflgiiiln
makunQn
Via!.
matQqk&n
makQqktin
makuthQti
jEqual.
m&tat&n
makaqtfin
iDakutstfin
276.
that one there
Intrans.
tamaia
tamakfik
tatnakm
7>ans.
tamatum
Lot.
tamatume
tamllcQg'ne
tamikune
Mod.
tamitumiik
tamakug'niik
tamakuQtik
Term.
tamatumQn
taraakug'nun
tamakunQn
Via/.
tamatflqkfin
t5milkQqkun
tamakuthfin
j£quai.
tamattjtQn
tamakiiqtan
tamakutsttln
vrt.
the one over there
Intrant.
Ing'na
Ingkiik
Ingkut
Trans.
In^^nOm
Loe.
Inggnume
Ingkflg'nS
Ingkune
Mod.
InggnQmiik
{ngkQg'DOk
ingkonttk
74
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
the one over there
Term,
Inggnumtin
Ingktig'ntin
Ingkundn
Vial
inggnuktin
ingkQg'nSrghun
Ingkuthiin
yEquai.
Inggnuttin
Ingk&qthtin
ingkutstiin
278.
the one passing there
Inirans.
auguni
auqkuk
auqkut
Trans.
augum
Loc,
a"ugume
auqktig*ne
auqkune
Mod,
augumtik
auqkQg'niik
auqkuniik
Term.
aligumiin
auqkQg'nun
auqkuntin
Vial.
augfikiln
auqkug*ngrghiin
auqkuthto
jEqual.
auguttin
auqkdqthttn
aiiqkutsttin
279.
another
Intrans.
^thm
athiak
^thl^t
Trans.
athiam
Loc.
^thl^me
athl&gne
^thline
Mod.
^thldmiik
^thl^gniik
athliniik
Term.
^thldmiin
ithl^gniin
athliiniin
Vial.
athiakiin
athmg'nSrghtin
athiathiin
jEqual.
athiatttn
^thl^qsttin
^thl^tsttin
280.
that one down there
Intrans.
un^
tinkuk
iinkut
Trans.
unum
Loc.
unume
iinktig'ne
iinkune
Mod
unumiik
iinkiig'ntlk
tinkuniik
Term.
unumtin
tinkijg'niin
iinkuniin
Vial.
unuktin
tinktig'n^rghiin
tinkuthtin
yEqual.
unuttin
tinktiqsttin
tinkutsttin
281.
that one
Inirans.
IminS.
imkuk
imkut
Trans.
emuin
Loc,
emume
Imktigne
imkune
Mod
emumiik
Kmkiig'niik
Imkuntik
Term,
emumiin
Imktig'niin
Imkuntin
Vial.
emukiin
Imkiig'nSrghiin
imkuthdn
yEqual.
emutiin
Imktiqsttin
imkutsttin
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
75
282. This group is declined as follows : m&k&ch^ = this kind (152)
\
Intrans.
mdkuch^k
Trans.
m&kuchim
Loc,
mikuchime
Mod.
makuchimuk
Ttrtn.
m^kuchlmtin
Vial.
m^kuchikun
jEqual.
makuchitiin
m^kuchek
mUkuchet
m^kuchegne
m^kucheg'niik
miikucheg*ntin
makuchiqkiin
m3,kuchiqtttn
m^uchine
m^kuchlntik
m^kuchlniin
V
m^kuchlthiin
m^kuchltsttin
The correlative of this is t&mlkQch^ = that kind.
283. These are all derived from the personal demonstratives :
auqkuchSk from
augund
that kind over there
^qkuch^k
a
igina
that kind on the other side
p^qkuch^k
(t
p^ktimln^
that kind up there
IngkuchSk
((
!ng*na.
that kind over there
unkuch^k
((
un^
that kind down there
284.
•
Intrans. Imln<hktik
Imtnaithkuk iminilthkut
Trans. emtilthkum
Loc. emulthkume
emulthkiig'ne emulthkune
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
The above means the one I dislike or that one whom I hate.
All these locatives may assume this-suffix:
chaminalthkiik
pilktimndlthktik
the one down there whom I dislike
the one up there whom I dislike
285.
Intrans.
Trans.
Loc.
etc.
^mthl6k
^mthlerhdm
imthler*me
etc.
dmthlerruk
a.mthlerrug*me
etc.
iimthlerrut
imthler'ne
etc.
This means much^ many. The verb is ftmthlSrtOk.
^mthl^r'muk tlgut5k
^mthl^r'nuk tagtitiiratut
^mthl^rhtim yut tSkoatne
ftiothl^kf^r^nuk
he takes much
they do not take many
in the presence of many people
a little more (from Mode CLXXIX)
7(> ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
286. A peculiar characteristic of Innuit consists in doubling these
demonstratives apparently for the sake of emphasis.
This occurs constantly in the native stories which are related
nearly every evening in the various kazhgas, after the inmates have
settled down for the night.
The following are extracts from native stories, showing a few of
these combinations.
287. Oni-iminX, flkOk-ImkU.
m&tii Ktr^tdk, ch&k ukuk fmkuk af-r^mUk. Td&tlu !mk(ik af-r^mik peiik,
"Ikkivtit akoma'*
as he enters here were these very two women. Then both these women
said, ** Sit down there "
288. taunA indni.
to&tlu h5k taiin^ lm!n& ah'^mik utitmtin ^V5k
then * that there ' woman ran back home
289. These may even be reversed, and this may occur in a sentence
just following : iminX taiiiiA.
to&tlu Kmin^ taun& ah'^m&k Qnnw&me kinggnuntig'mSntin iy^g'lune,
emumiinthlu nQn&menun tkech&ma
then that selfsame woman, going in the morning back again, and having
come to that house
290. taum Cmfim.
to&tlu taum emum af-r^mlim pd&, "keyugtim t&ng ai'r^rn&m ch!gveqk&
tagukuk "
then that there woman said, " See that woman there in the rear ; she
stole my pair of nose beads ''
291. Imin& iminft occurs also, and cbXm Cmdm.
292. taiimiik. Very frequently this is to be rendered into English
by that is why.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
77
The Interrogative Pronouns
293.
•
Who
Cases.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
Agen, Intrans.
ken&
k!nkuk
kinkut
Agen. Trans.
ke^
Loc,
kittume
kinktig'ne
k!nkune
Mod.
klttumtik
Wnktig'niik
klnkuntik
Term.
k!ttumiin
klnktig'ndn
kinkuntin
Vial.
k!ttfiki1n
k!nktig'n^rghtin
V
k!nkuthtin
j^qual.
kittutiin
kfnktiqtiin
kinkutsttin
In asking a question the verb is always to be used in the inter-
rogative aspect (461).
If the verb be used intransitively, it is to be accompanied by kCnA,
but if transitively by kfift.
V
ken& tket^ who is coming ? ke& keputau who buys it ?
ken^ kent^ who is outside ? ke& pe&ghwu who does it ?
294. Ken& used with hwfttkftplk means no one at all, no one soever (726).
k6n& hw^tk^p!k chlnggnekkllhra^miin Kngrimiin miy5rqrauqka~unr^t5k
no one at all is able to ascend to the summit of the mountain
295. K6ft Cmfim = kCnA indnl expresses whoever.
296. The questions whose is this? to whom does it belong? who owns
it ? are expressed by kfift with the object in the interrogative aspect.
ke^ pekau un^
k6^ pek&kuk ukuk
ke^ pekike ukpt
ke^ pek!lthho^ghwu un^
whose is this?
whose are these two?
whose are these?
whose was this?
297. If the owners are two or more, the question is :
k!nkuk pek^nke ukuk who (dual) own these two ?
kinkut pekitke ukut who (plural) own these ?
298. Whatever may be the object concerned, it takes the same
terminations. (See 460 on the interrogative aspect.)
whose canoe is this?
whose sled is this?
k6i kiy^au m^n&
ke^ gk&mr&k^kuk m&kuk
kel kemiiqtikau un&
ke^ dtkukkali un^
whose dog is this?
whose coat is this?
78
ESSENTIALS OF INN (/IT
299. Kik is often added for emphasis or to express surprise.
ke5k!k Ihneiikau un&
ke^kik mtiqt^r&vlkau
ah ! whose baby is this ?
oh I whose water hole is this ?
The verbal forms of all these pronouns naturally assume the
endings of the interrogative aspect.
300.
301.
302.
who am If how many have If
who do you think I amf
Sing, *
' kittuyei
kittuyet Sing, -
kittuhw^
' kafchechei
kUfchechet
kilfchetd
Sing, -
' klttuyuksei
kittuyukchet
kittuyuka
Dual -
' kinkutsniik
kinkutsttik Dual <
kinkugak
' kMchetsntik
kafchetsttik
k&fchetilk
Dual <
' kinkuyuksnuk
kinkuyukstuk
kinkuyukuk
Flur, ^
' kinkutst^
kinkutstche Flur, -
kinkuhwSt
' kafchetsti
kdfchetstche
kilfchetat
Flur, ^
' kinkuyuksta
kinkuyukstche
kinkuyukat
303.
304.
305.
how many am If h
ow many are we T
my whoness
Sing, -
kiyutuche^
kiyutuchet Pres, <
kiyututii
V
kUfcheuchstS
kafcheuchche
k&fchelihwSt
' kittuchaka
Sing, ' klttuchin
kittuchaa
V
Dual -
' kiyututsntik
kiyututstuk Fast .
kiyututak
' k&fche'utltsti
kdfche"utlhtistche
k^fcheutlhoiit
V
Dual ^
' klnkucharpuk
klnkuchartuk
kinkuchaak
Flur, ^
kiyututsti
kiyututstche Eut, ^
kiyutuhw&t
kiifchelichlksti
k&fche"uchikstache
kafche"uchlkit
Flur, *
kinkucharput
kinkucharche
kinkuchaat
klf chin tkSt&t, how many came / = kSf cheuhwXt tketlhrftSt, how many are
they who have come ?
kiyutiin tkgtit, how many came f = kiyttiUiwXt tketlhrftet, how many are
they who have come ?
kittlichin nAthlOftkS, I do not know who you are (i.e., your whoness)
306. Which, interrogative, is expressed by nllUSft.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
79
EXAMPLES
which of my brothers is over there ?
which two do you want ?
which (singular) of my dogs is missing ?
which one of you will go ?
which two of these are alike ?
naileilt ukut pinggniyuit peyiiqcheu which three do you want ?
n^lle^tne n(it uet^ in which house is he ?
niiUeilg'niin iikshiiqchet on which (boat) do you wish to embark ?
n&llimt^ pech^hk^ which one of us will do it ?
307.
n&lle&t ^nglegutm^ ^rn^nt^
n^lHqkQt peytiqchekuk
n^lle&t kemiiq'm^ tiyemaiiw^
nallSrqche iy&qch€kki
n^lle^k kniikstcheii
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
Sing.
n^lllrk^
' Sing.
n^llem^
my
Dual
niilllqki
Dual
nailigmS
Piur.
n^llenkH
Plur.
nailemS
Sing.
nillen
' Sing.
n^llgrqpit
thy .
Dual
n&lllqkn
Dual
nailiqpit
Plur.
n^lletn
Plur.
nSll^rqpit
' Sing.
n^lia
' Sing.
naileiln
his
Dual
n^llek
Dual
V
n^lleqkn
Plur.
n^lle
, Plur.
niillen
' Sing.
niill^rqpuk
' Sing.
n^llimnuk
our* <
Dual
nalllqpuk
Dual
n^llimugnuk
Plur.
n^U^rqpuk
Plur.
n^llimniik
' Sing.
niillgrqtiik
' Sing.
nailiftuk
your* «
Dual
n&lliqttik
Dual
n^llirqiittik
Plur.
n^llgrqttik
Plur.
naillftiik
' Sing.
n&liak
' Sing.
n^lle^gniik
their * ^
Dual
n^lliqkgk
Dual
naiHqk^nka
Plur.
n^llek^k
Plur.
ndllekdnk^
' Sing.
nallSrqput
' Sing.
n^llimta
our
Dual
n&lliqput
Dual
n^llignita
Plur.
nill^rqput
Plur.
nailimta
' Sing.
nillSrqche
' Sing.
nailifche
your -
Dual
n&lltqche
Dual
nSUirq^che
Plur.
niilleche
Plur.
nailifche
' Sing.
naile^t
' Sing.
n^lleltd
their -
Dual
naillqkgt
Dual
n^lllqkgtta
Plur.
n^llet
Plur.
n^lleta
8o
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
308. ChA = what things things somethings anything.
It is used generally with some suffix, as, ch&hw&, etc.
It accompanies all the locatives, as, for example, something behind.
Sing, chi ping'nd Dual chik pingkuk Flur, chit pingkut (380)
chi imind tinghi he sees something over there
309. chime. The localis case is often used to express when.
chime iyiqti
chime yurqdhdi
chimiik peyukch§t
chimtik ki peytiqtutii
chimiik chSla
when did he go ?
when was he born 1
what do you want ?
do you want anything ?
what else 1
310.
Sing.
Dual.
Flur.
Intrans, chi
chik
chit
Trans.
chim
Lac,
chime
chig'ne
chine
Mod.
chimtik
chig'ntik
chinilk
Teftn,
chimtin
chig'r
itin
chiniin
Vial.
chimktin
chig'nSrghtin
chithtin
^qual
chimttin
chiqstiin
chitstiin
311.
Sing. Intrans.
Trans.
Trans, Reflex.
Flur.
r chiki
chimi
chimi
chinki
Sing. ^
chin
chivtit
chiviit
chitft
chi
chin
chimi
chi
chiviik
chimntik
chimug*nt!ik
chipuk
Dual -
chiziik
chifttik
chifptug*niik
chitiik
chakrtk
chimtik
•
chig'ntik
chittik
' chivtit
chimti
chimti
chiput
Flur. <
chiche
chifche
chifche
chiche
chit
chiti
chimting
chit
312.
something
Intram
chikik
chikSk
chikit
Trans.
chikim
Loc.
chikimS
chikigne
chikine
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
8l
Although the following variations are not the next in order in
the general paradigm, yet they are itffeerted here, as they belong
directly to ch&.
313. The diminutive :
a
little thing
Intrans,
ch&cho^
chicho^rik
chachaarat
Trans.
ch&cho^r&m
Loc.
ch^cho^r&me
chicho^ragne
chachaarane
etc.
etc.
my
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
etc.
little thing
ch&ch6rqldl
chichoaraqka
etc.
314.
The augmentat
ive:
a
big thing
Intrans.
ch&qp^k
ch^qpek
chaqpet
Trans.
ch^qpem
Loc.
ch^qp^gme
ch^qpegne
chaqpagne
etc.
^tc.
etc.
etc.
my big thing
Sing.
chaqpakS
Dual
chaqpeqka
Plur.
chaqpenka
Ch&hSk and chihUdL.
(See 320.)
315.
a pretfy or nice thing
Intrans.
chakgrt^h
chak^rtarak .
chakertarat
Trans.
chakertSram
Loc.
chakgrtirame
chak^rtaragne
chakSrtarane
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
my pretty thing
Sing. chakSrtahka
Dual
Plur.
chakdrtahraqka
chak^rtahranka
82
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
316.
an
ugly thing
Intrans.
Trans.
Loc.
etc.
ch<hktik
chdlthkum
chdlthkume
etc.
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
my
chdithkuk
chilUhktigne
etc.
ugly thing
ch^lthkukil
ch^lthktiqkH
cMlthkiinkii
cMlthkut
ch^lthkune
etc.
317.
something nice
Intrans.
Trans.
Loc.
etc.
ch^chugn^k
ch^chugn^m
cMchugnar'me
etc.
•
my
chilchugn^k
chichugnigne
etc.
nice thing
ch^chugnilt
chachugnir'ne
etc.
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
chlchugn^kH
ch^chugndqki
chUchugn^nk^
ch^chugn^n
chdchugritlqkii
chachugndtA
chdchugne
ch&chukik
chichugni
318.
a i
Uttle thing
Intrans.
Trans.
Loc.
etc.
ch^y^g^k
chayig^m
chaydgar'me
etc.
my
chAyig^
chdyigig^ne
etc.
little thing
chay^git
chiyigir'ne
etc.
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
chily^g^k^
chayag&qkH
ch^y^g^nk^
ch&y^g&n
chly^g^qkii
ch^y&g&tii
chiyige
chiy^gdk
chiySgi
319.
Intrans.
Trans.
Loc.
etc.
chaun
chautQm
chautme
etc.
chautuk
chaiitiig'ne
etc.
chautQt
chalitne
etc.
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
chautkS
chauttiqki
chautnki
chautii
chautiiqkii
chautiitfi
chaute
chautuk
chaliti
INTERROGA TIVE PRONOUNS
83
This is used as a suffix to a great number of words (116).
1 . Nearly all remedieSi as :
Ikchaun eye water
kozh^rr^chalin cough mixture
kikifchalin any liniment
2. In some districts, in place of chaiin, chun is said.
ktiqchfin
a wedge of fossil
ivory or bone
chakyftn
native axe of obsidian
•
320.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
•
Intrans,
chahik
chahak
chahat
Trans.
ch&hr&m
Loc,
chahir*me
chahag'ne
chahar'ne
Mod.
ch^h&r'mtik
chahag'niik
chahar'niik
Term.
chihiir'miin
chahag'niin
chahar'nun
Vial.
chilh^qktin
chahag'n^rghtin
chahaqtghiin
^qual.
ch&h&qtiin
chahaktun
chahaqthtin
These are used continually and signify a trifle, a small object,
something, etc.
athianegna chahar'mtik give me some little thing to eat
chahar'mtik kanra nechdgniiqkllraamiik tell something interesting
321.
Sing.
Dual
Plur. <
Sing.
chahaka
chahan
chahra
chahapuk
chahattik
chahakuk
chahaput
chahache
chahrit
Plur.
chahanka
chahatft
chahi
chahapuk
chahatiik
chahatiik
chahaput
chahache
chahit
iiptuk chatuk, chahatiik tamalthkweta takuchlmaraamiik nutan
both packed their things, all their little belongings, after being in
readiness
chen a'uluktnrachekg chahatft why do you not look out for your things .>
84
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
322. Chlpik signifies really something.
Dual.
ch^pek
Sing.
Intrans,
chiplk
Trans.
ch^pem
Loc,
ch^plgme
etc.
etc.
Plur.
ch&pet
chS.pegne
etc.
ch^plgne
etc.
This is used also with hwft.
ch&p!ugw& un^
this is really something
that is really something down there
323.
chikik
ch^lkik^
ch^lqk^
ch^!g'm^
ch^gtim'ne
This is used to express relationship.
^Ithk^^ ch^Ik^
^nagu^k^ ch^kik^
my wife's sister = my sister-in-law
my brother-in-law
The dual, chUdqkft, is used to express the parents of a wife or of a
husband, as, my parents-in-law.
324. To express would it were mine. (See 498.)
if it were mine
if they were my things
ch^l^ut5k, etc.
ch^ut&kl&k^tdk
325.
Sing.
Intrans.
chak^ka
Trans.
chik^m^
Loc.
chakimne
Mod.
ch^k^mntik
Term.
ch^k^mntin
Vial.
chiik^mktin
^qual.
ch&kimtiin
Dual.
ch^kiqk^
Plur.
ch&k^nk^
ch^k^g'ng
ch^k^g'niik
ch^k^g'ntin
ch^k^g'nSrghtin
ch^k^ktiin
chiik&ne
ch^k^niik
ch^klndn
chdkathtin
ch&k^tstiin
This represents the verb / do it (i.e., it is my doing). It follows
the regular form, as in paradigm, 458. The future is ch&chirkSkft;
past, ch£lthhO&k&.
k^nra^r^ ^ttinrllthkumtghwu ch^chirk^kut
if we do not observe his words, what will he do to us ?
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
85
326. The past tense affords also its special forms, as follows
ch<hk^
chaithk^ka
that which I was doing
it is that which I was doing
The cases of chaithka (i.e., chaithmg, chAthlimne, chAthlimnilk, etc.) are
in constant use among all verbs. (See 90.)
327.
ch^kik^k^
ch^lthk^k^
this is the prospective : it is to me for something
= it is a thing I can make use of
is the past : it is something that was to be of use to me
328. Sing,
Intrans, chikuchSk
Trans, chikuchfim
Loc, ch^kuchSme
Mod. ch^kuch^mtik
etc, etc.
Dual,
ch^kuchek
Plur,
ch^kuchet
chikucheg*ne
ch&kucheg'niik
etc.
ch^kuchene
ch^kucheniik
etc.
This means what kind (152).
ch^kuch^mtik peytiqtutn what kind do you want ">
^psskeke chS.kuchentik peyulthhr&tnuk ask them which styles they want
329.
Pres.
Past,
Put.
Sing,
ch&kuchehw^
ch^kucheulthho^
chiikucheuch^hki
Dual
ch^kuchehw^k
ch^kucheulthh5^k
ch&kucheuch^hk^k
Plur,
ch&kuchehwit
ch^kucheulthho^t
ch&kucheuch^hk&t
These mean what kind is it ? what kind was it ? what kind will
it be f
330.
Pres,
Past.
Put,
Sing.
ch^hw^
chaulthho^
chauch^hki
Dual
ch^hw^k
chaulthho^k
chauch^hk^k
Plur,
ch^w&t
chSulthho^t
chauch^hk^t
These mean wliat is it ? wliat was it ? what will it be f
Note. — KIk is often added for emphasis. In the plural present sometimes it is
sounded as cUhwftsklk.
86
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
331.
Intrans,
Trans,
Loc,
Mod.
etc.
Sing.
chiyikllk
chiy&klem
chiyikllgmS
chiyikllg'miik
etc.
Dual.
chiylLkllguk
chiy^kkllgtigng
chlyikkltggiigntik
etc.
Plur.
chiydkligut
chiy&kllgne
chiy^kl!gniik
etc.
This conveys the idea of a thing long in being done.
chiyikUgut ch^nk&
I have done the things which were to be done
332. Examples of this form in other verbs :
p€&kl!gut pe&nldl
inlngs9.kkl{gQt m!ngki
333.
chiy^kkl^r'luke t&k&nki
chiyikkl^r'lune tket5k
chiy^kklSr'lune in5k
I have done the things (i.e., acts) which
were to be done
they sewed whatever was to be sewed
I finish the things so long in being done
he comes, being long in coming
he goes out (being long in going) ; said
of one who stays too long
334. Pres.
ch&weyugw^
ch^wegwoik
chiwew3,t
chiw^yfigwi piglna
Past.
chiw6yulthho&
ch^weyulthhd&k
chUweyiilthho&t
Fut.
chiweyuch^hk^
ch^w€yuch^hkik
ch^weyQch^hkit
what lies up there ?
This expression means what month or moon is it ?
335. Intrans.
chiy^kklfggo^lk^
chiy^kkHggd^n
chly&kkUggo^
chiy^kl!ggd^qpuk
chiy^kkllggo^qttik
chiy&kkllggd^
chiy^kkliggd^qput
chiy^kknggo^qchS
chiy^kkHggd^t
Trans.
chiyikkl!ggdto&
ch !yikkl!ggd&vtit
chiy^Uckllggoin
chiy^kkliggd^mntik
ch!y^Uckl!ggd^fttik
chiy^Ucknggo^mtik
ch !y ikkl!gg5&mt^
ch ly^kkllggo&f che
chiy&kkliggo&t^
INTERROGA TIVE PRONOUNS
87
Intrans,
chiy^kl!ggoto&
chiy^kkliggo^vtit
chiyikkliggo^ma
chiyikkllggo^mugntik
chiy^kkliggdMttik
chiy^kkl!gg5g*niik
chly^Uddlggototi
chiy&kkliggdMche
chiy^kkliggoimting
336.
'ch^LgnilgnOhw^
Pres,* ch^lgn^]gnuw^ Past
ch^ign^lgnuwit
Trans.
chiy^Ucknggo^nk^
chiyikkHggo^tn
chly^kkHggwe
chiy^kkllggo^puk
chiy^kkllggo^tiik
chly^kkliggo^uk
chiy^kkHggo&put
chiy^kkUggo^che
chiy^kkllggwet
what sort?
ch^n^lgnOlthhoi
ch^gn&lgnalthho^k Fut,
ch^lgn&lgnulthhd^t
ch^gn&lgnuchShk^
ch^gn^lgnuch^hk^k
ch&gn^lgnuch^hk^t
Pres,
337.
ch^ign^t^
cMgn^t&k
ch^gn^tut
fch^n^ch^hki
FutA ch^gn&ch^hkik
ch&gn^ch^hk^t
what way is itt
ch^&tllthho^
Past ^ chagn&tiflthhoik
ch&gnatilthhoit
This is the same as kithian iyOkOk.
To an inquiry about a sick person, ch&giiltnr6tfik may be answered,
meaning he is just the same^ no change,
338.
ch^ut^ a container, a holder, that which envelopes
ch^uULk^ I wrap it up = my wrapping
ch^ut^ik^ it is for my wrapping
This occurs in many idiomatic expressions and is much used.
ch^utiki
okum chikute
ithler&m^ ch^uti
339.
ch&ntik, ch^r^tniik
ch^nr£t5k
340.
way of doing
ch&Ueyirik
ch^ll^y^im
ch&lley^&me
my mother
a bag of oil
my bedding (i.e., the fur wraps, etc.)
something, nothing
it is nothing, I do not care, all right, etc.
my way of doing
ch^lley^r^^
ch&lley^r^m^
ch&lley^r&mne
thy way of doing
ch&ll§y&r^n
chailayariqpit
chUlley^r&qpne
his way of doing
ch&lley^^
ch^lley^rin
ch^ll6y^r^ne
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
88
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
it is my way of doing
Intrans. ch^lley^r^^lki
Trans. chilleyarakimi
Loc. chillley^r^^mne
etc. etc.
it is thy way of doing
ch&lley^r^^put
ch&Uey^r^&qj^ne
etc.
// is kis way of doing
ch^lley^r&k^
ch^lley^r^Qe^n
ch^lley^rik^ne
etc.
341. All these primary forms are capable of being varied and
multiplied indefinitely by the addition of modal characteristics. The
following are a few examples :
Mode VI
ch^titniik
chatitok
ch^tilgn5k
ch^tlrutlhrt^
ch^taline
Mode kaugwM.
ch^aiihw^ un^
ch^aunrat5k
chS.ll^w!gkaTigw&
Mode VI
ch^itntik
ch^it5k
ch^ilgn5k
ch^kirutlhrai
ch^kaune
Mode XVIII
ch^sitniik
ch^sitdk
ch^silgn5k
ch^sirutlhra^
ch^ksaune
what is this for } (example of chlhwX)
it cannot do for anything (i.e., no use)
what is it to be for }
Mode I. Ch&ngkfttOft and ch&t&ngkfttOft mean the same thing.
chitingkatdk ch&m!n^
ch^gn^lthklnrat^yi
there is something under there
I do not care ; I do not mind it
342.
ch^niikk^nrat5k
ch^nlll5nrat5k
ch^n tiqpik&nrat5k
ch^n^v^!nrat5k
- these all mean : it is not much
343.
ch^lleniik
chilleak
chaileaka
ch^lle^k^k^
ch^llfst^
ch^mst!k^
chiilHstik^k^
chailSyiirak
chillfiyar&ka
ch&vlzhr^ntik
ch&v!zhrik
chd^vizhr^k^
ch^vlzhr^k^ki
ch&v!zh'rist&
chivizhVastlk^
ch^v!zh'r^tMk^
ch&vlzhriy&r^k
ch&vlzhrfy&r^k^
the act of working
work
my work = what I do
it is my work
worker
my worker
it is my worker
method, way of work
my way of working
INTERROGA TIVE PRONOUNS — LOCA TIVES
89
ch^l^^kste
chiU^^kstkH
ch^U^^kstegnugni
ch^llSgno^
ch^lleugn^
ch&llech^hkoi
ch^lHlthhougn^
ch&lra&gn^
ch&llezhe^
ch&llelo^
ch^lla
ch^lleyuchak^
cMlleytiqtd^
ch^llewiliiqtd&
cMllem^railm^
ch^v!zhr!y^r^k^^
ch^vizh'rikste
ch&vizh'r^stki
cMvlzh'rikstegnugnd,
ch^vlzhr&gnd^
chS.v!zhraugn4
chivlzhrich^hkoi
ch&v!zhr^lthhc5ugni
ch^vizh r^lra^gn^
ch^v!zhr^zhe&
chivIzhr^Uo^
chS.vizhVa
ch^vlzhriyuchaki
ch^vizhriytiqtoi
chilvizhr^wiltiqto^
ch^vizhr^m^ra^m^
it is my style of doing
doer of it
my doer of it
I am the doer of it
I am working
I do = work
future
past
present
interrogative present
I working
imperative
my doing cleverly
I want to do
before I do
after my doing
Note. — The difference between these is that cUUiQgnA means I do a light work,
and cUyixhxftflgnA implies a^evercy laborious work.
The Locatives
344. One of the characteristics of the Innuit language is displayed
in the remarkable care exercised in designating the exact location of
the person addressed, or the precise position of the object spoken of.
The language surpasses many others in the richness and abun-
dance of words descriptive of position. These words possess the
faculty of merging into personal forms, so that they require a
special category for themselves, and for this the term "locatives"
has been selected.
345. As a general rule, the Innuit rarely make use of their names
in conversing ; furthermore, there is no vocative in their language,
nor have they our custom of using any equivalent in addressing
each other, as, " oh " or " my."
346. The universal custom among them is to use the term appro-
priate to the position of the person whom they wish to address, and
to this they suffix the word yOk.
For example : a man's wife may be inside the house, and if he
wishes her to come out he will call : kftmyOk ftnkft I you in there, come
out ! or, again, he may ask : chAllA&t kftmkfit? what are they doing,
those inside there f
\
90 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
347. TOk then may be considered the universal vocative, and can
be suffixed to every term expressing place.
348. The most common form, and which is in continual use, is
dyOk. This is from ftnl, ftkOk, fUc&t, the one lure = this,
349. Among the natives of Nunivak Island and among the villages
situated around Tununa and Eskinok the favorite pronunciation of
this is fix5k.
350. Sometimes, for reproach, for instance, 'l^t dyOk is said. Again,
dyOk Xgnii may occur; this equals you man you! and resembles the
custom in English where the pronoun is reduplicated in token of
excitement, as, you rascal you!
351. The following are a few examples :
ch&myok you down there I Inyok you over there I
kimyok you inside there I p&mydk you back there I
kikiimydk you outside there ! p&kumyok you up above there !
hw& k& nQk^lthpeau'15k uyok ch&lr^yuy§t
well, you young man, what do you mean ?
352. These three locatives are very important, and as they enter into
so many purely idiomatic expressions, they require special mention.
The corresponding verbs are hwftntOk, mIntOk, and tfiintOk (371).
hw^ TcAxA. X.ok
hw^ne m&ne to&ne
hw^vtit mivtit to^vtit
hwiin m&htin to^htin
hw^kiin m^iin to&ktin
hw&tii m&tii to^tii
The impersonal forms are hwi, n^ and tOi.
353. HwX and mAnft both mean here^ and the difference is that hwft
represents here in particular^ and mAnft here in general,
hwSviit thleu put it here (i.e., just where I indicate)
mivut thleu put it here (i.e., anywhere here)
354. HwX-hwi, tO&-t0i, and mi combine with a number of particles, as,
hSk, kft, thlQ, etc., and thus branch off into a group having the force
of interjections. (See 626.)
Hw&tn, m&tn, and tO&tn might be written hwXtun, but in conversation
the last vowel is not heard at all : hwXt'n.
LOCA TIVES
91
355. Hwft as an expletive may follow almost any word, as, indeed.
hw^ Idl
hw^thluthlu
hw^thloki
hw^tdk
hw^ikhwi hw&n€hw&
hw^hdk
hw&niih
p€thl!lrai hw&
hw€gn&thluhw&
ch&kimniik hw&
this is used as an exclamation, like
hellOy etc.
or
or
now
now
why, here it is !
corresponds to * id est '
an abbreviation of hwftn6hwft
it may be
and I, indeed !
for my things, of course !
hw^t5k hw&tft iy5klin^niirathl€
I hope it will not be always this way
hw^t5k ch^nggnaune t^ng^rqchek^mche
if nothing happens, I will see you
hw^kik kem& pech^hkd^
I wonder if I will be alone (do alone)
HwinS means here^ in here^ in particular, (See 353.)
hw^n€ hw^
behold ! see, here it is (this is in con-
stant use)
hw^n£ hw^ hw&
here it is here (used in responses)
»6. T5& also enters into
many combinations :
toSk^
(see 737)
to^thlu
then (this and the two next occur con-
stantly in native stories)
ta^thlohdk
so then
to^thluhdk &m
again, then again
ta^thluhdkhwi
and so then it was
to^lth
an abbreviation of tOftthlQ
td^mthlti
then
td^mt^tthlQ
and (this also takes hwft, hwIhOk, and
hOk after it)
to^thlatoi
so I continue
td^ik& uktit ^tkalutting n^nrunauqtut
td3,lth &ngr^
are these enough for a coat ?
then he said yes
92 ESSEA'TIALS OF INNUIT
357. tOi. This expresses enough^ all rights and so^ etc. It is used
constantly, and is a common ending of a sentence.
toik^ is it all right ?
toiek€k^ I suppose so
toihw^ of course
toiyuhwS. certainly
358. All these may be combined with thlinXk, signifying always.
V
hw^trthlin^ all the time in this manner
to^trthlin^k always in that way
V
tauqkunn^r'niik AgiyutQm ^iyuve^ letnaiir^l^qtdk hw^trthlin^
since that time the church of God teaches always this way
to^vtiqthlin^k thl§u put it in the right place = always in that place
td^niiqthin^k uet^l^qtut they stay always there
td^trthlin&k toi {m!n^ uen^ pech^rr!y^rS.ngk^thlune
and so this was the way her husband had the habit of doing
359.
m^tii k^ klutmtin t^Lkkuy^tdk nuvMqch^ iikn^ kdnt&ntik tagumailune
when he looks back there is a handsome girl coming carrying some
wooden bowls
to^tlu hw^to^ hw^nehwS. ^mS.l{r'nimtne t^llur^ne ^k^qtQm untiqt5k
now then, see here, on the other side of us (the world), in the shade
of the sun, it is night
titi mivtit ; ikoma td^vtit come here ; sit there
mahtin ki iyaqt6k did he go by here } (i.e., by this route)
kr^ t^m^htin cross over by that way
m^ne nun^m kien^ne uetalikut we dwell here on earth
nSJciin tkechet whence comest thou ?
hw^kiin n^thluy^ut^^ from hence I forget (the rest)
m^tii pedk all at once
m^tii h5k pugwdk as he enters
t5^tii iy5kmeut that is the way they are
toiitii thlu ch^la and so on
hw^tii ka. this way, eh ?
hw^tii peu do it this way
hw^tii lyokmeok nun^viit this is how our residence is
kw^tfi iyokme5k ktin^r'nilune he is like this in a rage
hw^tii illegnaumauk thus it is written
t5i to^tii uetaut and so this is the way they lived
LOCA TIVES
93
EXAMPLES
hw^iin nun^nuk iy^dvCt tunuthlut^ n&t!tintin ch^trqt^^ksaun^k
V V
cheunurqj^ghtin ^t^m tunumtthiin tkech^hkutii
if you go from hence, this village, your back being to us, to anywhere, you
without turning off, on your forwardness, again by our backs you
will come
yut niet uevethleneS. nuniyut, st^m^n epeS.tntik uf'ntiqthlune taTiqkiin
kinggnuntir'mentik it^m to^viit, Hn S.ngg!^p&mektin chuk^lra^ktin
a certain man went around it, our world, in eighty days, from thence his
behindness again thither, he by his big canoe, by his quick one (i.e.,
swift steamer)
360.
t^m^tii m^nnaut6k
t^m^tii miliqna'ur^n^
t^m^tii nikkliknaiir^gn^
t^m^tii yut netnaurS.gn^
t^m&tii t^nsLutok utr^pilig'm^
t^m^tii Aglytin n&kkUknaliqkil
t^m^tii AgiyutHm ^zr5kt5r'naur&tii
let it be here
let him accompany me
let him love me
let the people listen to me
let it be ready before my return
may I love God
may God bless you
The first commandment :
hwegna Agiyiin Ipit Aglyutii, ^thl^miik t^miitii petnaututii ^w^timne
hwegn^
36L In addition to the ordinary verb form, all the locatives possess
a distinct form ending in L
EXAMPLES
JLw! from
^w^ntdk
peki
from
pek^ntdk
ch^ml "
ch^m^ntdk
timi
((
timSntSk
mi "
m^nt5k
toi
(i
tointdk
pikmi *'
p^km^nt5k
yi
«
yintSk
etc.
etc.
This form is strictly impersonal.
It is used always in an exclamatory sense.
It is used only when the object referred to is in sight. (See 525.)
94 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
362. This form occurs very often coupled with its own verb.
This pleonastic use of these forms is usually for the sake of
emphasis.
mi m^ntdk here it is here
p^kmi p^km&ntdk there it is up there
These are fresh examples of the remarkable coincidence existing
between many Innuit and English idioms.
k&ni k^n^ Imin^ t&ng2Ltih515k there is that boy below down there
p£k! ^Lggaut they are hanging up up there
to^tlu ^wi pitmdqt5k and then there he was over there going
to the mouth of the river
These latter examples show how this form is used with other verbs.
363. Another variation often occurring in native stories is as
follows :
tdi t&ng pei t&ng chimi t3,ng, etc.
toatlu pea, " nauhwimg ammikMrtfi ? " to&tlu p6&, " pel ting "
then he said, '* And where are your brothers ? " and then she said,
" Look I there they are "
The Simple or Primary Locatives
364. Locatives in their simple or primary form are used mostly
in the terminalis and vialis.
kUmiin chaut^i I turn it to the front
klutmiin chingkiriki I push it back
365. The primary locatives possess the usual time forms.
Pres. y^
Past yathltik
Fut. y&tkak
366. They follow the usual form of declension.
Intrans. y2ln
Trans. yittim
Term. yitmiin
etc. etc.
L
SIMPLE OR PRIMARY LOCATIVES
95
367. The following are a few examples :
kit^
kit&m
kitmiin
front = forward, towards
middle of river, etc.
klu
klutum
klutmiin
back =from middle of
river towards shore
ka^n
kMtum
ka&tmiin
back = up stream
o^n
o^tucn
o^tmiin
down = down stream
kOl^
kulum
kulmiin
up
^che
^chem
&ch6tmiin
down
ch&m^n
ch^m^um
ch^m^tmiin
down
y^n
y^tiim
y^tmiin
yonder
koka
kok^m
kdk^miin
middle
368. The augmentative form signifies way up^ very, etc.
Intrans,
yakfak
Trans,
yakfSm
Loc.
yikfine
etc.
etc.
^ch^kf&k
way below
kiilluf^
above
ch^nn^kfik
near
n^tiikf^k
whereabout
Wilvak
high
uk^kf^k
close
^ch^kf^ne Qet^n^qs^kd^
n^ttikfine t^m^qcheu.^
yakf&qktin iyag'l«
I ought to be below
whereabouts did you lose it }
I '11 go way off
Note. — The verb form is yftkfftntSk, kfilyintSk, etc. (See 371.)
369. The diminutive form is ySkfSchOft. (See 230.)
370. The comparative locative mode fftrftntOft gives a form much ^
resembling the above (418).
Intrans.
yikfar'ntik
Trans.
yikf^rSm
Loc.
y^Lkfirine
etc.
etc.
y^kf^r^niin lyeltht^
let us go a little further off
96
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
List of Locative Verbs
371. The following list comprises the most common of these verbs
in the third singular.
it is under it = underneath it
it is on the other side
it is over there (but there must be a hill or
stream, etc., between)
it is near by
it is over there
it is down there (this applies also to rivers,
as it is down stream)
it is down
it is on the opposite side (i.e., of a house or
room, etc.)
it is on the other side
it is here
it is inside of it
it is outside = out of doors, etc.
it is in it
it is a little way down
it is outside
it is somewhat up
it is in the rear (i.e., of a house, etc.)
it is outside
it is back of it
it is on the side of the house (i.e., on the
kukaklim)
it is on top of it
it is on top (but very high)
it is here
where (used in the interrogative)
it is behind (meaning down stream)
it is in the front part of a house
it is up on top of it = up there
it is on top (but back a little)
it is up (but over somewhat)
it is back there
it is up there
it is there
it is right there
I
^cheSntok
2
^^nt6k
3
^m^nt5k
4
^m^nt5k
S
^w^ntok
6
ch^km^^nt5k
7
ch^m^nt5k
8
ek^nt5k
9
ent6k
ID
hw^ntdk
II
!llont5k
12
k^m^ntdk
13
k^m^nt5k
14
k^n^ntdk
15
kant6k
16
kauw^nt5k
17
ke^nt5k
18
kent6k
19
klllo^ntdk
20
kuk&ntok
21
kuWntdk
22
kulviint6k
23
mSntdk
24
n^nt6k
25
odntok
26
ok^kHmt5k
27
pikmint5k
28
p^m^ntok
29
pauw^ntdk
30
peintdk
31
pekant6k
32
tSmantSk
33
toant6k
LOCA TIVES
34
uk&kf^r^nt5k
it is closer
35
Ok&ntdk
it is there (i.e., coming from behind)
36
iing^ntdk
it is down
37
yakfant6k
it is far off
38
yakf^rant5k.
it is further off
39
yintdk
it is yonder = away beyond
97
Each of these verbs presents its distinct personal demonstrative
form, which is treated in 379.
372. These verbs occur m<jstly in the third person. They follow
the regular endings in 0&, 457, and present all the adjutants and
participial forms, etc. •
Pres, Past, Fut,
pS.km^nt5& pS,km^ntlhough^ pS,km2.nchdhko^
p^km^ntutii p^m^ntihdutii pikm^nch^hkutii
p^kmintdk pS,km&ntlhddk p2.km&nch^hk5k
etc. etc. etc.
p^km^npiUg'm^ (526) p^km^ntilk^m^ (522)
p^km^n!lthkum& (519) p^km^nch^m^ (53^)
p^m&nchem&rakum^ (519)
p^kminchem^ra^m^ (53^)
These show two adjutants of pgkmant(M in Mode XLVI.
373. These verbs assume any compatible mode.
Example: mXnl, here; mXntGft, / am here, combines with the
following :
m&nchiiqtd^ I want to'be here (Mode LXII)
m&nt&qto^ I continue here (Mode XXI II)
minstika I keep him here (Mode XXX IV)
m&ntiifkir&ka I force him to be here (Mode XXXVII)
374. Besides these modes just presented, the locative verbs possess
a number of modes peculiar to themselves, of which mention will be
made later on.
375. Amt& hwX may be used with any of the locative verbs.
&mtll hw& ^m&nt5k maybe he is over there
For the comparative with these verbs see 418.
98
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
376. The following paradigm presents the adverbial form of the
personal locative :
up there
pikm^ne
p^km^viit
pikm^htin
p^km^kiin
pikm^tiin
k^ntUt talikm pikm&vtit thlake
p&km^iin iye
kiy^k ch&km&ktin tket5k
puf^ those bowls up there
go by up there = go along up by there
the canoe is coming from down there
377. These locatives are very frequently doubled.
p^km&n6 knid&n€
chlvoan^ ch6ugn^n£
ch^m^ng chadkhr^e
un^ne ^w&t€n€
up there back of it
long before
down there in front of it
over there beside it
378. To express distance, etc., in a very great degree, such as in
descriptions of the planets, etc., or in speaking of remote regions of
the world, such combinations as follow are used.
y^kf^^ne p^km&nt5k
it IS immensely high up (370)
The Demonstrative Locatives
379. The personal form of this locative is as follows : piikflniTni,
that one above (from pXkmXntfik).
Cases.
Sing,
Dual.
Plur,
Intrans,
p^kiimln^
p^kiimkuk
p&kiimkut
Trans.
p^kmum
Loc,
p^kmume
p^kiimkiig'ne
p^kiimkune
Mod,
p^kmumiik
p^kiimkiig'niik
plktimkuniik
Term.
p^kmumtin
p&kiimktig'ntin
p^kiimkQniin
Vial.
pikmukiin
piktimktig'nfirghtin
p^kiimkuthiin
yEqual.
p^kmuttin
p^kiimktiqtiin
p^ktimkuttin
DEMONSTRA TIVE LOCA TIVES
99
380.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur,
ch^minS,
ch^Unum
ch^mkuk
ch^kiig'n€
chimkut
ch^mkune
that one down there
(straight down)
Umlxi^k
^inkuk
^mkut
^um
► that one over there
^Unumg
^mktig'ng
tokune
4
k^kiimlnS,
k^kOmkuk
k^kumkut ;
■
k&kmum
► that one outside
k^kmume
k^mug'ne
k^mune
t1klcn?(
tlkl^kuk
ilktkut 1
tikum
* that one approaching
tikume
iik&kiig'ne
tik&kune
k^nnll
k&nkfik
k&nkut
kUtQm
► that one down there
k^tum€
k^nkug'n€
k^nkune
4
keyug¥nll
keytiqkOk
keytiqkut
k€ytigum
> that one in the rear
keyugumS
k€ytiqktig'ne
keyiiqktine J
pIknS,
pikikuk
pikkkut ]
plkum
' that one up there
plkumS
pTklkiig'n€
pikl^une
plngn^
pingktik
pingkut
pinggnum
- that one back there
p!nggnum€
plngktig'nS
pingkune
p^n^
p^qkuk
p^qkut
p^Qm
> that one straight up
plgtimg
p&qkiig'ng
p&qkune
unigin^
un^qkuk
un^qkut
angtim
> that one down belo^
ungumS
un^qktigne
un^qkiine
(See also 576 c)
These are frequently combined with chl. (See 308.)
lOO
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
381. The locatives assume a demonstrative form, as follows :
Sing.
I emugwo^
thou emugwutft
he emugw5k, etc.
The above signifies I am the one, (See Mode LXVIII.)
p^kmugwd^ I am that one above ch&mugwo^ I am that one below
382. Another form witfi the same meaning is :
Sing.
I taugniign^
thou taugnQtii
he talign5k, etc. (Mode XV)
I am that one
The Indefinite Locatives
383. The locative verbs possess a second form, ending in n^ttfii,
the sense of which is indefinite : >chgfat(Mi, / am under it — Schfimittfii,
I am below.
^ch€m!ttd^
^w^tmittd^
ch^nnimltto^
cheumlttdS,
killumltta^
I am below
I am around
I am near
I am ahead
I am back
kltmlttaa
klnggnumitto^
klmittd^
kdk^mltto^
kulmittd^
I am in front
I am behind
I am on top
I am in the middle
I am above
Note i. — These verbs all follow the regular form. (See 457.)
Sing, ch^nnlmittd^
Dual channiigntttoi
Plur, chinniatnlttda
I am near = one object
I am near = both objects
I am near = many objects
Note 2. — The tenses, etc., foUow the usual forms.
^chemUlhougn^
ichemlch^kkoi
&ch6m{tlralgn&
^chemllthkiim^
^chemlt^k^m^
S,chem!l^m^
384. These verbs also afford a form in li^Ok (131):
chS^nnimUgndk
y^tlmUgndk
he who is near by s the near one
he who is yonder = the yonder one
* * !
• ••••• • •
RELATIVE LOCATIVES — POSSESSIVE LOCATIVES
lOI
The Relative Locatives
385. Sing.
Intrans, p^m^nl!gn5k
Trans. p^km&nl!gnum
Loc. p&km^nl!gn5r'm€
etc. etc
p^km^nUgndk ktinn{g'n&t5k
p^km^nHgnOm t^ngv^g^ut
Dual.
pS,km^nlIgnuk
Plur.
p&km^Hgnut
p^km^nHgntig'ne
etc.
pikminligndr'ne
etc.
He who is on high is good
He who is on high beholds us
thleu un^
' pik^nllghum kien&ntin put this on the one which is up there
p!k^nl{gnuk klen^'ntin put this on the two which are up there
^ plk&nlignut klen^niin put this on those which are up there
iy^'ytiqtoi plk&nUgndr'mtin
I want to go to the one which is up there
n^nr^k p^km^nlignor'miin Agiyutmiin
gloria in excelsis Deo !
Past pakm&nthltik (58)
Fut, p^km^nt^qk^k (60)
The Personal Possessive Locatives
386. The following paradigm presents the present, past, and future
forms of 3ritiQdl = my beyondness.
All the locatives follow this same model in their tenses and cases.
A full paradigm of the present tense is given in 399.
387. It is unnecessary to add full paradigms of the past and future
tenses, as the various case endings of the former may be seen in 90,
while those belonging to the latter are shown in 98.
Pres.
Sing.
Past
Sing.
Intrans,
Trans.
Loc.
my
thy
his
yStika
y&tft
y&te
y&t!ma
yat!ptit
y&tft
y&timne
yitlvne
yitene
my
thy
his
yitnthka
yatllthhrSn
yitflthhra
yatnthma
y^tllthlrptit
yatilthhrSn
yatthltmne
yatthllrqpne
yatnthhrine
I02
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Fut
Sing,
my
thy
his
Intrans.
y&tk&k^
y^tk^n
yitki
Trans,
y&tk&m^
yatkivtit
y^tk^n
Loc,
y&tk^mne
yitk^pne
y&tktoene
388. It must be remembered that while these forms may be greatly
varied by the modes, still the endings are always the same.
389. These words are simply positional nouns, just as our tieamessy
closeness^ etc. This is another example of the remarkable resem-
blance between English and Innuit idioms, already referred to, only
here Innuit, as usual, carries the practice much farther than English.
Intrans.
Trans,
Loc,
&w&t!k&
^w^tlm^
^wltimn€
iw&tfi
&w&tivtit
^w^tlvne
► around me, etc.
awite
^w^ten
^w^tene
chllm^tYk^
ch^m^tlm^
ch&m^tlmne ^
ch^mltii
ch^m&tivtit
ch^m^tlvne
' below me, etc.
ch^m^t^
ch^m^ten
ch^m^tene
kiilk^
kiilmi
ktil!mn€
ktilii
kiilvHt
ktinvne
> above me, etc.
kiile
ktil€n
kiilene
kltk^
kltm^
kttilmng
kUft
kitfOt
kituvne
* in front of me.
Idte
kltSn
kitene
*
kllluk^
klllum^
klllumne
klllun
kiUuviit
kniuvne
► behind me, etc.
killo^
klllo^n
k!ll6^n€
lichek^
^ch!m&
&ch!mn€
achtn
ach!v«t
achivne
- underneath me,
iichei
^che^n
^che^ne
kika
kim^
kimne
kin
kivlit
kivne
> on me, etc.
kign^
kign^n
kign^ne
k!nggndldl
klnggnumi
klnggnumn€ '
kinggnun
kinggnuvtit
Mnggnuvne
► behind me, etc.
k!nggn5^
kinggnd^n
k!nggn5^ng
PERSONAL POSSESSIVE LOCATIVES
103
391. All these possess their dual and plural forms, as follows :
my
tljy
his
Sing.
kinggndk^
kinggniin
k!nggn5^
Dual,
k!nggniiqk&
kinggniiqkii
kinggnuk
Plur.
kinggnungk^
kinggnutii
kinggnue
392. KinggnOftnS, the localis case of kinggii(U[, is used very much in
expressions of time. (See 619.)
Note. — The following is an example of the entire vialis case : by or in my rear.
Sing,
' mS,l!qk^r^gn^ klnggnunimktin
m^lqk^r&tii klnggnuntiqpghiin
m^liqk^rh^ k!nggnunr^kiin
he follows
behind
' m&l!qk^r3,kuk kinggnunmug'nerghun
Dual* m^llqk&r^tuk klnggnunniiqptiig'n^rghtin
m^Hqk^r^k Idnggnur^'n^rghiin
he follows
behind
Plur,
' m^Hqk^r&kut
m^llqk^r^che
m^Hqk^rit
kinggnunlmthiin
klnggnuniiqp^tcheuhiin
klnggnunr^thiin
1
he follows
behind
me
thee
him
' us both
you both
them both
us
you
them
393. From the future form of kinggnOkS is derived Idnggnulfiiqkftp&t,
used to express our successors = our will be after us ones,
394. Che&nttqktkft, the future form of chfifiniUL, is used to express
my future.
395. The past form of chcanikft gives ch&ueflp&t, meaning our
ancestors.
396.
Sing,
Dual
Plur,
chaokikS,
chaok2.qk^
chaok^nk^
chUgmw, the one before me = my before me one
Inirans,
my chlok&kil
thy ch^ok^n
his chadkhr^
Trans,
chaok^m^
chaok^plt
chaokhr^n
Loc,
chd,okimn6
chaok2.pne
chaokhr^ne
Term,
chaok^mntin
chaok^^niin
chaokhr^nun
I04
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
^0^0 •
Intrans.
Trans.
Loc,
Term.
my
^klkklM
^klkkllm^
^kikkllmne
^klkklimnan
thy
^ktkklln
akikkUrqpit
^kikkllrqpne
&k!kkl!rqpniin
his
&k(kkl(^
^Mkkl!&n
^klkkli^ne
^klkkllintin-
398
. tikOkft, the
one before me.
Intrans,
Trans,
Loc.
Term,
my
t&kOk^
t&kum&
tllkumne
tikumntin
thy
t^kun
tllk6rqp!t
t^k5rqpne
tllk5rqpniin
his
t^ko^
tikd^n
t^kd^n€
t^kd^niin
t&nUft, tQn&ml, t&nftmnS, the one behind me = my rear one,
Nftthiak&, nXthiamI, nXthiamne = my not knowings is used generally
in the sense of my abseme.
399.
Sing.
Cases.
my
thy
his
Intrans,
ch^nntk^
ch^nntn
ch^nne^
Trans.
ch^nnlm^
chinnlvtit
ch^nne^n
Loc,
ch&nn!m'ne
ch^nnivne
ch^nne&ne
Mod,
ch^nnim'niik
ch^nnlvniik
ch&nne^niik
Term.
ch^nntm'ntin
ch^nnivniin
channeXntin
Vial,
ch^nnlmktin
chinnlvghtin
ch^nneliktin
jEquaL
ch^nnimtiin
chinnlfttin
ch^nne^tiin
Cases.
Dual
Intrans,
ch^nnlpuk
ch^nnituk
ch^nne^k
Trans.
ch^nnlmugniik
ch&nnlMk
ch^nne^gniik
Loc,
ch^nnlmug'ne
ch^nnlfttig'ne
chinne^gne
Mod,
ch^nnimOg'niik
chlinniftOg'ntik
ch^nne^g'niik
Term,
ch^nnimtig'niin
ch^nnlftOg'ntin
ch^nne^g'ntin
Vial,
ch^nnlmug'n^rghtiD
ch&nntftug'n^rghtin
chin nelg'nfirghtin
Alqual,
ch^nnlmtiqtiin
ch^nnlftiiqttin
chlnnelqtiin
Cases.
Plur.
Intrans,
ch^nnlput
ch^nneche
chlnnelt
Trans,
ch^nntmt^
chinnlfch^
chlnneltl
Loc,
chinnimtne
ch^nnlfschne
chlnneltne
Mod
ch^nnlmtniik
ch^nnifschniik
chlnneltniik
Term*
ch^nnlmtniin
ch&nnlfschniin
chlnn^ltniin
Vial,
ch^nntmthiin
channlfchguhtin
V
chlnnelthtin
/Equal,
ch^nnlmttin
ch^nn!fstiin
chlnnaitiin
EXAMPLES OF THE POSSESSIVE LOCATIVES 10$
EXAinPLES OF THE POSSESSIVE LOCATIVES
400.
klkktiqt^qpem ch^^tekun uevukut (third singular of vialis of ch&mAtikft)
we went around the large island by its lower side
toatlu ch^t-Illetng yut illet kwiqktin acherutmtiqthtin ^zgulraem tketfirat6k
then one time a certain man having gone up by a slough (at that
village) did not return
kinggndkthlug'lo&n keyOhw^ "Ikkekeki toi uetalifkgnantik Hcherut-
mug'nerghiin sttiluk "
his younger brother answered him, "See here, without us both staying
here (let us not remain here), let us drift down our slough "
Note. — These two examples are given to show the slight difference between forms
derived from the same verb. When it happens that there is a slough just below a village, it
is termed ftchi'riln (io8). This term equals our stream below us ; if there is no village, the
slough will have some other name. The possessive of ftche'riln is flchSratIk&, and resembles
the possessive locative ftchiUL, both being from the same verb, flchSftnto&, / am below it.
X\%ok em&qpem y^tenuk (third singular modalis of yftdkft)
I come from beyond the sea
{m!n^ ^gnuk^rauhdltim ukktshk^ !ll5^nun, tikn^nthluhok kKnggno^
p^tOluku (third singular of IdnggnOkS)
the old man bids him embark in it ; he having embarked, he closed it
behind him
401. The simple augmentative is pSk, as, ch&Oqpftk, kinggnOqpftk.
402. In the possessive, my long beforeness.
Intrans,
Trans,
Loc.
my
cha5qp^k^
cha5qpSjn^
chadqp^mne
thy
chadqpen
chadqp^viit
cha5qp^vne
his
chadqpe
cha5qpen
chaoqpene
V
tketd^ k!nggn5qpekiin
I come
long after him
unet&k^ kinggndqp^mntin
I left him long behind me
403. The simple diminutive is kinggnOftq.
The possessive, a little after me z=fny little aftemess.
Note. — The vialb case is given instead of the usual localis, as it is more used.
Intrans. Trans, Vial,
my kinggno^qldl ktnggno^r^m^ klnggno^Sinktin
thy kinggnd^r^n kinggno^put k!nggnoS,r&qpghiin
his kinggno&re kinggno^r^n k!nggn5^r^k{in
tketoi cheugn^rakiin I come a little before him
k!nggn5^r^mhe O^tauk he is a little behind me
io6
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Locatives in Shiqtdd
404. As these verbs are seldom used in the first person, the
examples are given in the third: yikBhiqtdk, it is far.
Pres,
Past
Fut,
cha5kshiqt6k
Qkk^kshiqt6k
y^ksh!qt5k
y^ks!lthhd5k
y^ksiqchShkdk
it is before
it is close by
y^kshilrai (462)
y^kshikin (514)
yiksiin (530)
kinggn5kshiqt5k it is behind
kill6ksh!qt6k it is away up
405. The augmentative mode is as follows :
chadksh!qpikt6k it is long before y^ksh!qp^kt5k
406. The diminutive mode is as follows :
it is very far
cha5ksh!qt5qt5k
kinggndksh!qt5qtdk
it is a little before
it is a little behind
407. All the locatives present a form in chSk, declined as in 1 54.
^km^nluch^k
^cheinluch^k
^g^nluch^k
ch^kminluch^k
hw^nluch^k
pek^nluch^k
408. The personal possessive and the time forms of locatives
in chfik:
mz. *
Sing,
m^nluchak^
m^nluch!n
m^nluchaiL
Sing,
r m^nluchllthk^
m^nluchilthhCln
m^nluchllthh^
1
Sing,
' m^nluchirk^k^
m^nluchlrk^n
m^nluchlrk^
1
Pres,
m^nlucMmi
m^nlucheviit
m^nlQcha^n
Past
m^nluchilthm^
m^nluchethl^rpat
minluchilthhUn
Put,
m^nluchirkto^
m^nluchlrkiivtit
m^nluchlrk^n
m^nluchlmne
m^nltichirpne
mSjilucha^ne
m^nluchethllmne
m^nluchethlirpne
m^nluchllthhr^ne
m^nlQch!rk^mn€
m^nluchlrk^pne
m^nluchirk^ne
LOCATIVES IN SH/QTOA
107
409. The personal form (154) :
S.
' n&nluchak^ n^thlo^
n^nluchin nilthlo^k^
n^nluchad n^thlo^n
he does not know where I am
I do not know where thou art
thou dost not know where he is
D.
P.
' n^nlucharhpuk n^thloak they both do not know where we both are
n^nlucharhtiik n^thlo^qpuk we both do not know where you both are
n&nlucha^k n^thlo^qtuk you both do not know where they both are
" n&nlucharhput n^thlo&t they do not know where we are
n^nlucharhche n&thlo^qptit we do not know where you are
n&nluchailt n^thloiqche you do not know where they are
Literally, the above is my whereness he igfiores it^ etc.
n^t5kf^nlucha^ n^thluy^gut^k^ I forget its direction
punggh^to^ n^nluchaintik I worry about his whereabouts
410.
pS,ma.lir*niir*mittoi
Smilir'niir^mittod
yalir'niir'nitttoi
These verbs are derived from the simple abstract, as, pftmftUr'niik,
pftmftlir'niirrhiim, yftlir'nilk, yftlir'niirrhiim, etc.
PftsiftUr'niir'mittOft is equal to pftmftlir'niir'me uStaugnA.
The possessive form is the same as in 399.
' pamaiir'nOka
Sing, " pamallr'niiran
[ piinaiir*nuri
Dua/
' p&m^Hr'niiqpuk
p^m^llr'ndqttik
p^malir'niirik
' pamal!r*niiqput
Plur, < pimaUr'nuqchg
pimaiir'ntir^t
p^m^lir'nimi
pamailr'nuqpTt
p^milir'nijr^n
pa,mai!r*nGr*nittgniik
pamiHr'niiqjitugnQk
p^mil!r*niir^g'niik
pimiUr'nlmt^
pamallr'nifche
pamalir'nGrata
p&m&nr*nlmne
p^m^lir'nuqpne
p^m^llr'niir^ne
pa,ma.lir'nur*miigne
piina.Ur*niiqjitugne
pam^lir'niira.gne
pam^lir'nimtne
p^m^lir'niiq
p^m^lir'ntir^tne
m^tfi n^tstdk p^m^lir'niir^nun
as he gazed on the side down there from him
chakirqnen&qtukuk tSthlgrpem tungUr'nOrintin
we both diverge too much towards the right
I08 ESSENTIALS OF INN (/IT
chdrumelir'nimktin ketur^gn^
he passed on along by my left
^m^Hr'nlmtne t&llinr&ne ^kilqttim
on the other side from us in the shade of the sun
= in the opposite hemisphere
411. The locatives assume a great variety of modes.
A few examples are given below.
412. I. ae&tOft. This is the reciprocal.
yikseutol tikkilkseuto^
y^ksetituk ukuk these two are far apart from each other
413. II. GnOftrOOk signifies similar to^ like,
pdmtin'ggn6ilro6k it is like the upper one
ch^mtinggh6drtinrat5k it is not like the lower one
■
414. III. K&rft'ndttSk signifies a slight increase,
nunSt kaik^r^tnet5k it is a little above the village (i.e., up stream)
nundt o&k^r^tnetok it is a little below the village (i.e., down stream)
415. IV. fftkto&qtM. (See Mode LXXXVI.)
416. V. segeangS.
y^ksegeung^ I am getting away from
kuyegeung^ I am getting higher
Note. — These are derived from the simple form. Example : fiknX, the one nearing :
flUksUqtSk. // is near ; flUkadgSfliQ^ft, I am getting near.
The possessive form is as follows :
Intrans, Trans, Loc,
my getting near u1dLkseg!lthk^ QkiksegHthmlL Ok^ksegethlimne
my getting away y^ksegllthki y^ksegilthm^ y^ksegethlimne
These are declined as in 90.
417. From segSnflqtOft :
Pres, ch^nniks€gen^qk&
Past ch^nniksegen^lthki
Fut, ch^nniksegen^qch^hk^ki
my getting aside
NOTES ON THE LOCATIVES -^ VERB 109
418. VI. FSrftntOft is a comparative mode.
Example : yikfSntSk, in this mode, is ySkfibrftntOk. The various
parts are all formed regularly, as :
yikfirinKlthkune
y^kfUr^nthlune
etc.
yikfirint6k it is further off
uk^kf^r^nt5k it is nearer by
kulvirint6k it is higher up (370)
Other variations may be found among the modes.
Miscellaneous Notes on the Locatives
419.
ug'ni the one in front
keyug'ni the one behind
Note. — These words also mean down stream ^ up stream ^ and in boats, forward^ aft.
uet^thltiqk^put AgiyutQm t^ko&ne we are in the presence of God
^mthliirrhtim yut t^ko^tne in the presence of many people
um chYvd^ne mS,ntlho6k it was here before him
420. The form in riA is also used by the locatives. There is,
however, no need of inserting any paradigms, as they all follow the
model given in 166.
iy^qto^ ukk^kshilr^kiin tiimktin I go by the trail which is shorter
The Verb
421. The Innuit verb possesses an extraordinary wealth of forms,
and at first sight the various details of its structure appear to be
complicated beyond measure ; nevertheless, a closer examination will
show that a most remarkable regularity pervades all its manifold
ramifications.
In addition to its vast following of quasi-participials, it possesses
a peculiar means of multiplying and diversifying itself, almost indefi-
nitely, by the assimilation of various particles, each one of which,
when in combination with the original stem, produces an entirely
new and complete verb.
no
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
This feature of the Innuit verb may be said to constitute the chief
difficulty in the acquirement of the language, the mastery of which
consists in the ready manipulation of these modal characteristics.
(See 547.)
422. There are no conjugations, strictly speaking, in Innuit, as all
verbs terminate in the same manner ; however, as these terminations
vary according to the sense in which the verb is used, they admit of
being classified into distinct groups, which are termed aspects.
423. All verbs in the first person singular of their primary form
end in Oft. As a general rule, this ending is preceded by t.
Other consonants may also appear, excepting L (See 438.)
I come
I am rich
I sing
I eat
tigoi
tuktigwd^
munggho^
ntiqrhd^
Note. — The ending 15i is referred to in 470.
mikkoS,
t^t^mo^
^no^
pinvdi
I am small
I am startled
I go out
I make rope
The Tenses
424. The tenses are always readily recognized in whatsoever
aspect or mode they may occur, as they preserve their special
characteristics throughout.
425. The Present
This is the universal tense, being used just as in English, to
express the present, past, and future.
Its characteristics, already alluded to, are : Oft, ftkft, eft, fignft, and
rftftgnft.
Note. — Regarding flgiift see 439.
426. The Past
The characteristic of this tense consists of the insertion of fl
between the stem and the ending.
keputo^
I trade
kepatlhotignft
I traded
keput^ki
I buy it
keputlho^k^
I bought it
iyiqchei
do I go ?
iySlthhuyei
did I go ?
kepuche^
do I buy it ?
keputlhuyei
did I buy it }
iyairaagha
I go
fy^lthhulra^gh^
I went
TENSES 1 1 1
427. The Future
The characteristic of this tense consists of the insertion of chSh
between the stem and the personal ending.
keputoi
I trade
kepuchShkoil
I will trade
keputikil
I buy it
kepuch^hk^k^
I will buy it
kepuche^
do I trade it ?
kepuch^kse^
will I trade it ?
ly^lraighd
I go
iy&qch^hkllra^gli^
I will go
Note. — Very often the future characteristic sounds almost as chlr.
428. The present tense of most active verbs possesses a double
form.
S,kumgauqto^ I sit pe^ko^ I do
SlcumgaugnS, I am sitting peughS, I am doing
Note. — It frequently happens that in certain verbs the form in flgn& is used gener-
ally in preference to that in 5i, and rnce versa.
429. Where the verb admits of a transitive sense, as p^ftkOft, then
the first of these forms is double.
pe^ko^ I do pedk^ I do it
keputo^ I trade keput^k^ I buy it
430. The First Aspect
The ending in 01 is always that of the intransitive sense, while
the ending in Skft is always transitive, and so the union of these two
constitutes what is styled the first aspect of the verb.
431. The Second Aspect
Among the idiomatic features of the Innuit verb is one which con-
sists in the possession of a special form used only in asking questions.
As this form has its own transitive , and intransitive endings, it
ranks as the second or the interrogative aspect.
Note. — As the first person singular is the same in both the transitive and intransi-
tive of this aspect, the example is given in the second person singular.
Intrans. nitmun ly&qchet where are you going ?
Trans, n&nne kepucheu where do you buy it ?
432. The Third Aspect
Another idiomatic feature of an Innuit verb consists in possessing
a special form which is used in replying to questions, or in alluding
1 1 2 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
to a topic already introduced. This form constitutes the third or
responsive aspect, and is of very great importance.
From the third persons of this aspect are derived a vast number
of verbal nouns, of which a paradigm is given in i66.
For the paradigm of this aspect see 462.
The Persons
433. In the transitive forms each of the three persons possesses
its own set of terminations wherewith it expresses its relations to
each of the rest.
Thus, the first person singular has six distinct endings which serve
to show whether I refer to "thee" or to "him," to "you both" or
to "them both," to "you" or to "them."
The second person singular has likewise its special six, while the
third person has nine.
As the same occurs in the dual and in the plural, it gives a total
of sixty-three terminations to each tense.
434. It will be noticed on looking over the paradigm in 467 that
some of the persons end alike. This is probably owing to the fact
that certain forms having been lost, their place is supplied by some
of the remaining ones. In some cases one has to do duty for
several, as :
he loves you both
you both love him
you both love them
are all expressed by n&kklikkftttk
435. As there is no grammatical distinction of gender, the context
shows whether "he," "she," or "it" is meant.
436. Regarding the use of the personal pronouns in connection
with the verb, Innuit follows' the same custom as Latin.
437. The third person singular in some verbs has often a sec-
ondary or distinct meaning of its own, differing somewhat from the
original ; for example :
m^mch^k5k it will heal, it will flatten down (i.e., scabs, ulcers, etc.)
pliiqtok it calms (from // passes)
utum^qtdk it quiets down (said of a stream after a freshet, from
fitfimaqtW, /get better)
let6k he is tame (from letOft, I learn)
PERSONS — VERBS IN UGNA
113
438. The personal endings are always uniform, although the stem
may terminate in a great variety of ways.
%
gn
gw
m
tigoi
munggn5i
tukug'woi
^komo^
(I come)
(I sing)
. (I am rich)
(I sit)
tigo^
munggho^
tukug^woa
akomoi
tigutfi
munggnutii
tukugwutn
^komuth
tigdk
munggh5k
tukug'wdk
^kom5k
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
n
P
r
y
^noi
klppo^
ntiqrhoi
ikvo^
(I go out)
(I curve)
(I eat)
(I run)
^nd&
kippoi
niiqrhoa
akvoi
^nutii
kipputfi
niiqrutft
akvutft
^n5k
kTpp5k
niiqr6k
akvok
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
The Verbs in ligka
439. Verbs ending in fighA may be divided into five groups.
Note. — At first it was thought that each of these groups could be characterized by
some special trait, but a comparison of several hundred failed to afford any grounds for
classification other than what is given below. (See also 543.)
440. I. fignA.
n^skulgnugh^ I have headache
Al^ngrugha I am haunted
441. II. ifighS.
ch^vizhraugh^ I labor
442. III. augnA.
chuksTugh^ I hasten
pOv^laugh^ I cook
443. IV. eaghA.
kiinlmcheugn^ I chat
444. V. OfighA.
Iqkdugh^ I fall
stQgh^
V
agnutgnugna
uetaugh^
oraiigTi^
I drift down
I am a man
^qch^raughi I am getting worse
I am
I whoop
k&zhgeugh^ I enter the kazhga
tokougn^
I die
114 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
The Formation of the Negative
445. The formation of the negative in the majority of languages
presents little or no difficulty, but in this respect Innuit is a con-
spicuous exception.
As the formations are so varied, no general rule can be given;
therefore each will be treated separately.
446. I. In the first aspect^ intransitive^ present tense, negation is
expressed as follows :
keputo^ I buy keputftrStoi I do not buy
Note i . — A great variety of euphonic change in the stem of the verb appears in the
negatives.
tigoil
I come
tinretaa
I do not come
ch&vol
I row
chilvtinr^toa
I do not row
t^t^mo^
I am startled
tatSmtinrctoil
I do not get scared
These suffice to show that although the positive may have any
consonant before Oft, the negative invariably ends in tOft.
Note 2. — Verbs ending in qtdft appear more regular.
mqtaa
I dig
lanrStoi
I do not dig
peyiiqtoJl
I desire
peytinrStoi
I do not desire
iySqtoi
I go
iyanr$to2l
I do not go
447. II. In the first aspect, intransitive, past tense, the negative
is formed just as in the present, but it appears more regular.
keputlhughd I traded keputlhiinr^toil I did not trade
iyalthhdughcl I went iyiilthhiinrStoii I did not go
netlhugni I heard netlhiinr^toi I did not hear
The negative of the future tense will be described later.
448. III. In the transitive of the first aspect Xht negative in the
present and past tenses is the same as in the intransitive, excepting
that it is placed a little differently.
I St
' Pres, Trans. keput^kS, keputftrit^k^
Past Trans, keputlho^k^ keputlhonrat^kd
FORMA TION OF THE NEC A TIVE I 1 5
449. IV. In the entire second aspect the negative of the present
and past is similar to the above.
Note i. — As the first persons singular are alike, the example is given in the second
singular.
2d
Intrans,
Trans.
' Fres, kepuchet keputfirachet
Fast keputlhuyet keputlhtinrachet
' Fres. kepucheyu keputftracheu
Fast keputlhuyeyu keputlh6nracheu
Note 2. — The numerous adjuncts of the verb form their negatives like this.
450. V. The negative of the future tense is by far the most
remarkable, as it amounts to a complete transformation.
It is the same throughout the forms of both aspects and con-
sists in:
{a) a peculiar euphonic change in the stem ;
(b) the insertion of ghx ;
{c) a reversion to the endings of the present.
Note. — The example is given as usual in the second person singular for second
aspect.
I St
2d
' Intrans, kepuchShkoi kepuzglilto^
Trans, kepuch^hkik^ kepuzgnit^k^
' Intrans. kepuchlrkset kepuzghichet
Trans. kepuchirkseu kepuzghicheu
451. Some verbs, to avoid assuming their regular negative form,
transpose themselves into certain modes through which they are
enabled to express negation by affirming the contrary. Thus,
** He is not here " is a rare answer, for either exact informa-
tion will be given, if known, or else the answer will be, ** He is
absent."
This trait is especially noticeable in verbs of possessing, which
generally express their negative by using the privative mode :
ekimr^ngic^td^ I have a sled ek^mrletod I lack a sled
Also, to express it is stilly silent^ quiet = nfipiStOk, // lacks noise,
(See 780.)
Il6 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
452. Certain verbs which with us are generally used in the affirm-
ative sense are asserted negatively in Innuit. (See 781.)
"I know" is always rendered by "I do not ignore"; "I remem-
ber it *' by ** I have not yet forgotten it."
453. Innuit possesses the same faculty as English of turning a
noun into a verb ; as, for example, from the words * room ' and
'winter,* we may say, "I room here," "I will winter there."
Nevertheless, it will be seen that in Innuit this is carried to a far
greater extent than in English.
EXAMPLE
KwigXmiln iyttqtOft means I go to the river ^ but exactly the same idea
may be conveyed by the shorter and more common form, which
consists in adding the verb endings directly to the noun, as:
kwiq river
kwfqtoi I go to the river
454. In order to show how far this may be carried, it may be
said that all the degrees of relationship or proprietorship, etc., may
be thus tersely expressed by the personal endings.
For example : from kfttftnrlkft, my sotiy in the verb form we have :
k^ttinr^k^ki he is my son (lit., I son him)
k^ttinr^kilmkin you are my son (lit, I son thee)
k^ttinr^k^pugh^ I am your son (lit, you son me)
k^ttinr^k^gb^ I am his son (lit, he sons me)
k^ttinr^k^tfi you are his son (lit., he sons thee)
and so on through all the forms of the entire verb, as :
k^ttinrikdmkln if you were my son
k^ttinr^kuvughS. if I were your son, etc
Note. — This is again referred to in Mode XCVII.
455. In the following paradigms of the verb to buy^ the transitives
represent this verb with an object in the third singular, as, / buy
kinij her, or it. These are, therefore, only condensed paradigms
presenting an Innuit verb, according to the traditional arrange-
ment, merely as a preliminary study.
FORMATION OF THE NEGATIVE
117
456. The complete form of the verb in the transitive, containing
its sixty-three objective endings, is given in 468.
457.
Pres.
mz. ^ tl
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
thou
he
we*
you*
^ they *
we
you
[they
/ trade
keputo^
keputfi
keputdk
keputukuk
kepututtik
keputuk
keputukut
keputuche
keputut
/ do not trade
keputfiratoi
keputfiratutii
keputfiratdk
keputiiratukuk
keputi^ratut&k
keputfiratuk
keputnratukut
keputftratuche
keputfiratut
Past
\nz. . tl
Sing.
thou
he
^ we*
Dual *
you*
they *
Plur.
\
we
you
they
kgpatlhugn^
keputlhutfi
keputlh5k
keputlhokuk
keputlhdt&k
^\
kepOtlhuk
keputlh5kut
keputlhoche
keputlhut
keputlhtinrato^
keputlhtinratutii
keputlhtinrat5k
keputl htinratukuk
keputlhiinratuttik
keputlhtinratuk
keputlhiinratukQt
keputlhtinratuche
keputl hiinratut
FUT.
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
f I
thou
he
^we*
you*
they *
we
you
[they
kepOchSko^
kepuch^kutfi
kepuch^kdk
kepuchekukuk
kepuchekutnk
kepuchekuk
kepuchekukut
kepuchekuche
kepuchekut
kepuzghito^
kepuzghitutfi
kepuzghit5k
kgpuzghltukuk
kepuzghituttik
kepuzghituk
kepuzghitukut
kepazghituch€
kepuzgbitut
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
/ buy it
/ do not buy it
Sing.
thou
he
kepQtaki
kepfitSn
kepQta
keputfirataka
keputfiratan
keputftraa
Dual
you'
they'
k£put&puk
keputatDk
keputilk
kepDtfiritap&k
keputfiratatDk
kepQtftritak
Plur.
you
they
keputaput
keputiche
keput&t
Past
kspQtfiratapflt
kepQtfirat&che
keputfiiit&t
Sing.
I
thou
he
kepfltlhoika
kepQtlhoin
kfipuUhoi
k«pflah6nrataka
kftpurihenratan
k£put1hdDrata
Dual
we'
you*
they'
kepufihMpak
k«putlhoatDk
kcpuflhoik
keputlhdnrSt&p&k
kepat\hdnrat&tDk
kepOahSnrStak
Plur.
we
you
they
kfiputihoapOt
keputlheache
kepQtlhoit
FUT.
kepflahSnratapat
kapQtlh6nrit&che
kepofthftoritSt
Sing.
I
thou
he
kepach«hkaka
kepflchSbkiln
kepflch«hkJl
kepuzghltaka
kepuzghit&n
kepuzgfaita
Dual
we'
you'
they*
kepuchehkapflk
keptichehkatOk
kepuchehkak
kcp&z^Itapuk
kepnzgnitatak
kepQzgnltak
Plur.
you
[they
kepuchehkiput
kepuch&hkache
kepuchehk^Lt
kepuzgnitiipat
kepuzg'hitache
kepQzgnitat
SECOND ASPECT (INTRANSITIVE)
Second Aspect (IntranBltive)
499.
PRES.
do I got
dolHotgoT
Sing.
I
thou
iySqchei
iy&qchet
iyaqta
iyinrachea
iyinrachet
iyftnrata
Dual
we'
you-
they-
iyaqsnfik
iy&qstllk
iyiqtak
lyanratsniik
ly&nritstfik
ly&nruilk
Plur.
we
you
they
lyiqsti
iyiq^che
ly&qt&t
lyixaixsa.
ly&nritstche
iyanratftt
Past
_
Sirg.
■ I
thou
he
ly^lthhQyii
iyilthhQya
iy<bhoil
lyilthhUnrlchea
iy<hhiinr3ch«t
iyilthhtinrata
Dual
wc*
you'
they'
iyilthhOsnflk
iy<hhustOk
iyilthhoik
iyaithhflnratsnQk
lydlthhQnratstQk
lyaithhQnratak
Plur.
we
. you
they
iyiithhfista
iy&Ithhtistche
iySlthhoilt
FUT.
iyilthhOtiratsta
lyilthhOnrStstche
iySlthhflnrSt&t
Siug.
I
thou
he
iyiqchehsfiS
iyiqch6hs£t
ly&qchehkA
iyaggnlcba
iyagghichet
lyiggiiita
Dual
■ we'
you'
they*
iyaqchShsnOk
iyaqchehstak
iyrtqchfhkSk
iyagghitsn&k
lyagghftstiik
lyaggnit&k
Plur.
we
you
they
lyaqchfihsta
iyiqchehstche
iyiqchfihtat
iyagghlsta
iyigghische
iyigghitit
ESSEJ\/T/ALS OF INNUIT
Sing.
Second Aspect (Transitive)
Pres.
de I buy at
do I not buy itt
I
thou
he
kSpuch«i
kepucheu
keputiii
kepuifirachea
keptiti^racheu
kcpfltnrata^u
we*
you*
they*
keputsnOk
kepQstghwQ
kepQstlnghwIl
keputi^ratsnfik
keputiiritstghwu
kCpulfiratanghwu
we
you
they
kapQtsta
kepustcheQ
kepflstatghwQ
Past
keputfiratsta
kepQtArttstch£u
kepQtftr&Utghwfi
I
thou
he
keporihayea
keputlhflyeu
keputlhoaghwu
k€puflh6nrichei
keputlh6nr&chea
keputlhdnratau
you'
they*
kepatlhutsn&k
keptnlhiittghwu
keputlhoinghwu
keputlhfinratsnQk
keput"lh6nraltghwa
kepiitlhdurat&n^hwli
we
you
they
kepljilhiitsta
keputlhatstcheo
keputlhoai|;hwQ
FUT.
kapQtlhfinrStsta
kepfltlh6nratstchefl
kepQtihdnratattghwu
r
thou
he
kepucheksei
kepuchekseo
kepuchekkau
kepflzghicha
kiptagTiicheo
kepuzghltau
you"
they*
kepucheksnllk
kcpCicheksIghwQ
kepuchekilnghwfi
kepOzgnitsnQk
kepfiz^ItghwH
kepuzgnltilngghwa
we
you
they
kepocheksta
kepuchekstchSu
kepuchekatghwa
kepoighista
kepozghistchea
kSpdzghltatghwa
INTERROGATIVE ASPECT— THIRD ASPECT
121
Interrogative Aspect
461.
niinche^
klthlun keyuch^hsel
ch^yet
dien ut&kiyet
nilla^k t^nghicheu
n^ne kepucheu
chen peu
kltttiyet
n^tmiin Iy^qch€t
n^lleitnilk peyiikchet
chen peyet k^nruchemifkonik
chdmiik pingk^chet
klnvdk iy^kti
ken^ m^ntS,
fini kwechoS, nauhwiln 3,numi
kei pe^ghwu
ke^ keputau
chen aulukinr^tcheu
kiyutCin uetltauch^kset
nltdtmoqt^
chiyuqchet
chimtik pech^qset
klthlun peS,qkauyikii
ch^lintik em^ngktlL
ke& tauni iyalitau
chimtik ch!kk!skset hw^ngntin
n^tmtin thUskluku k^nrut^tii
ch^le^t ingkut
EXAMPLES
where am I ?
how shall I answer ?
what is the matter with you ?
why do you wait ?
which of the two do you see ?
where did you buy it ?
why do you do it ?
who are you ?
whither do you go ?
which is the one you want ?
why do you act without being told ?
what have you ?
when did he go ?
who is here ?
where does this creek flow ?
who did it ?
who buys it ?
why do you not take care of it ?
how long will you stay ?
where did it go ?
what do you want ?
what thing do you ask for ?
what must I do for you ?
what is in it ?
who took that away ?
what do you want me to give you ?
where did he tell you to put it ?
what are those who are over there doing ?
Endings of the Third Aspect
462. The following are the endings of this aspect, and, as usual,
they are the same for each tense.
Sing,
' I — rainghi
thou — ra^tii Dual
he — ra&
we' —
you'
they'
ra&kuk f we — raikut
radtiik Plur, - you — raHche
rack [ they — riet
122
ESSKXTIALS OF INNUIT
Pres,
Past
Put,
ri
5. <
iydlraangh^
iydlthhulrlL&gii^
iy&qch£hkllrtingn&
lyilr^&ngh^
thou ly&lraltft
he lyillrti
f we*
D,* vou'
' iy&nr!lthra&ngh&
^^. ^ iy^nritlhulralnghi
iySgghitlrainghi
i;
. iyilr^kuk
you ' iyillrMttik
they ' iyilraek
P,
we
you
[they
The declension of the third persons is shown in 164.
iy&lrtikut
iy^lrlL&che
iyilraet
463.
nOllllra^ni
€k&mr!lrailgh^
n^kklikkum^lrailgh^
t&nghumillradghl
tinghumiyCilralLghi
iyinkiqtlra^gh^
tkethlenilrlULghi
EXAKPLBS IN VARIOUS MODES
I who am building a house (Mode LV)
I who am making a sled (Mode LV)
I who am loved (Mode LXXIII)
I who am seen (Mode LXXIII)
I who wish to be seen (Mode LXXIII)
I who am going again (Mode XLI)
I who am coming (Mode LXXII)
464. As the personal endings of the verbs remain always the
same throughout the entire series of tenses, modes, etc., it is suffi-
cient, therefore, to present one paradigm of the intransitive and
one of the transitive.
The reader will readily prefix the proper tense stem together with
whatever mode characteristic necessary for the expression he may
wish to use.
465. The various paradigms which appear under the imperatives,
kQmft, kftm&, pOig'mft, etc., are given merely for the sake of convenient
reference, as the endings are all uniform.
466. The personal endings of the verb are presented under two
distinct arrangements.
For a long time it was a great problem how to present a satis-
factory paradigm of the Innuit transitive verb. After many trials,
I found that the one given in 468 served the purpose very well.
Later on this paradigm was changed into the more compact form
shown in 469. As each paradigm possessed certain advantages,
both are presented.
Only the present is given, as the endings are the same in all the
tenses.
Compare this paradigm of the personal endings with 73.
PERSONAL ENDINGS OF THE TRANSITIVE
123
ar
A
a-
A
a*
A
^
j^
^
f '■»
»■' >
r >
r^ r* ^T
ssg
m
em bot
em
c c H
cr
a*
a-
a-
1
1
Al ^
1 1
SI'S'
o
c
o
c
!g
him
them
them
c c a
«• «. g
him
them
them
8"
a*
1
I
a*
"1:
— qpugni
— qpukuk
— qpukut
CCS
%
45
A
•0
a*
A
•0
A
«-4
O
c
•0
o
c
10
A
A
r* r* ^
A A a
3 3=*
o o ST
c c 8
?
?
r
p<r_
CI p<r
WCc
H
X
mm
o
M
99
UI
O
C C 3
» » A
?
ST (A
r* r* ^'
ci*^ ;;
^Cl CI
Kwr
I !
I 1
r» r» r*
CtficCf
C/3
M
n
o
o
*ia
w
90
UI
O
a:
c c g
?
I
OQ
CD
•2.ui> a*
^ di ci
3 3 3
C< C(C(
»o kO »o
a* c» a*
Al ^
Id
t4
UI
O
2
A
a*
A
«-4
O
e
O
c
I
I
a- a-
A A
3 3
?
a*
^r ^r »tf>
A A a
3 3^
?
c c a
(0 w g
cr
o
1:
cr sr »-. o o sr
c c «
A A a
3 3 '^
r
1:
Ml III III
7^
at
•^ •>♦ a*
Al
?r?e^)
CI CI u<
LL»fi cr
a* o o
Al a* a*
Al Al
I I I
•o^ a-
Ci "O-O
** CI CI
I I I
S 3 3,
Al ^
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
§il MM^ 'Iff ;"^- ill -!^-
MesHi Siucf u, us u &uw eaboMi mi «) u
III III III lis ^^%. Ill
S S S _ S B « b'S S ..f *1 ,
-8" III *JJ Ji*-* HI HS
3)U^ u;a|. |,;a;a. »;a|) «>;a;|
'Ei'So'Si Mi'&'Si 'Ss'Si'a U'&'a m'Si'Si 'Sj'Si'Si 'Sj'S'Si 'Si'&'Si Mu'Q!
ijllas .Jllillll .18. all 111
III W-t\\ '<n lYi III tn \\\ SH
INNUIT VERB
B|g eil
E E E ^ 5= c. ■§=•? oi .
Ill III 1 ill !
>*■ «n,« =E
ill III
IS I 3-S--S S'S^S'.i'W
111 %%•% %%■% •SI?
»-.. «Si sSg
ESS -2 £.£,3-25
126
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
470. The following form corresponds in some degree to our
infinitive and to the participles.
It is conjugated in all the persons and possesses the three tenses.
The characteristic of this form is 1.
471.
Pres. iyig'nelo^
Past iyilthhiineloi
Fut Iy^qch€hneld&
Neg.
' iySnritneloS
iy^lthhiinrltnelo^
iya.g'ghitneloa
S.
472.
fl
thou
he
iy&g'l6&
iyftg'lutft
iya.g'lune
D.
' we both
you both
they both
iyilg'lQnuk
iyag'lutuk
iyag'lut&k
P^
we
you
.they
iyig'luti
iy&g'luche
iy^'lut&ng
In all transitive verbs the form is as follows :
Sing, luku Dual lukuk
Plur, lake
t^nghum^lo^
n&kklikskumilo^
that I am being seen
that I may be loved
The Transitive of Lod
473. I. When the action of the verb refers to the subject of the
proposition ItoS is to be used.
AgiyutQm pille&kilthhoilkut nilkkHksklune God made us to love Him (ipsum)
kinniiqtok tket^qkalinelune he says he (himself) will come
kinnQqt6k dr'luvuramentik nathluy&guchenelune
he says he forgot to bring his (own) bow
kinruflhoagha kanrutsklutft tketlchegitnelune kittinrSne taugwilm tkeche-
m^rakdn
he told me to tell you that he (himself) cannot come until his son comes
home = only when after his son's coming
474. II. When the action of the verb does not refer to the
subject, Iftka is to be used for the singular, and llUc&k, luke for the
dual and plural.
k^nnilqtdk tket^qkauneluku
he says he (another) will come
k^nntiqt5k t^m^lthkwetl nun^ne nalithluneluke
he says that they are all sick in the village
TRANSITIVE OF LOA — EXAMPLES 1 27
k&nntiqt5k ek&mrig'ne tlgunelukuk kittumiin
he says that some one has taken his sled
V
tketdk ^pch&qt5g'luku ekiyuthliiqkllmentik
he comes to ask him for help (see kimnU)
k&nrutlh5imk!n talingnugheluku
I have told you in vain
475.
sl^k^r'luke pechShk^nki I will keep them carefully
hwei6k t&nQm pedr'luku indeed, I am the one to do it
mly5rkeni Ingrlk miy5r'luku go up the mountain
iy^knie ingrlk wevtiluku let him go around the mountain
keputhluku ch^h&k peu buy something = take something, buying it
peluku peu do it
In'grik ttiviiluku = liigrit ttivOluke I cross the mountain (mountains)
hwegn^ t&ngv^g'lakO ket5qto& I see it = I seeing it, turned aside
hwegh^ miiq'luku I drink it
n&thluluku withbut knowing or I do not know
(a common idiomatic expression)
EXAMPLES OP THE USE OP LOA
476.
k^nntiqto^ pene t&nggh!lthhuneluku I say that I saw it up there
k&nniiqtutii pene t^ngghilthhuneluku you say that you saw it up there
k&nniiqtok pene t&ngghnthhuneluku he says that he saw it up there
kinntiqtoi pene t^ngghllthhuneluku ienCin
I say that he saw it up there
kinntiqt5k pene t^ngghllthhuneluku hw^ng'nun
he says that I saw it up there
k^nntiqtutft pene t^nggnllthhuneluku hw&nkug'nun
you say that we both saw it up there
477.
k^nrut^k^ titakiskloi I tell him to wait for me
kanruskeu unwaku iy&k&t&r'neloi tell him that I will go to-morrow
kSnruskeu augume 6rr&lume toivSrqtlhiineloa
tell him that I went there last moon
V
k^nruskeke tketchunnitnel5d tuzhechlm^
tell them that I cannot come because I am lame
128 ESSEA'T/ALS OF INi\UIT
k&nruskeu kemltnelo^ tell him that I am alone
challeukut k6yQrqthlut& we work together, being together
kinruskeke ekdmr^g'ntik tuyursklutd nalithlCilraem utrCilstkiniik
tell them to send us a sled to bring back this sick person = for the
bringing back o£^
AgiyutQm kiivvugi k&nntiqt6k tilutft tingdrqsiqthwu ttingmigeghillthhri
the angel messenger of God said, Come, behold it, the place where
he was laid
V
klnyuelghut lucherd'lutilng k^thl^tUlqtut
the dumb generally converse by signs
toatlu chiydkkler'lune unuqt6k
then at length night came
emum kdtiinr^ chiydkkl^r'lune &ngle5k
the son of that one finally grew up
478. It is very common in native stories for two words in IftnS to
come in succession. Sometimes several will occur.
toi ^trdlune itr'lune nutin so he going down, going in
toi nut^n itr'lune, iipthlune k^mmiiks^g'lune iydg'lune tumikiin yum
m&lliqthluku
so going in, packing up, putting on boots, going, following by the trail of
the man
479.
lydg'lunuk thlu iep5.k^ k^mmutilr'lune, hwegliii k^zhmoh^r'lune
and we both went, my comrade pulling and I pushing (the sled)
toilth dmmilrriqk^ S.kf$lukuk, dmm^rrdg'lol thlu
so I brought them (both), my salmon-skin boots, and put them on
(i.e., I salmon-skin boot me)
umyu6rtkuq'lo& chimiikWk chiUeneAqchcil iiif-'niiqpak
so I (am) wondering at what I should work during the day
kiyit ftnilthhret Skithlit drrolutCng tSmine tupumUlutQng kwegum snSne
old kiyak frames rotting there, drifting on the shore of the river
ndkklikskumdlo^ umuk chikkerdmkin
I give you this in order that I may be loved by you = that you may
love me
kdnrut^mkin Agiyutmiik n^kklikskumdluku
I tell you about God so that you may love Him
\
EXAMPLES OF LOA — lAfPERA TIVE
129
480. As this form is so productive of idiomatic expressions, a few
of the most usual are presented.
chiy^kkr'ldne
pikkr'lune
hw&tii thlu pelune
ikm^cheluku
imittiqthluku
iqchik^r'luku
chaufk^nrStn^luka
chtikkluku
!kk6kkluku
petlkkluka
tumtikluka
limeksklQku
QmekSr'luku
finally, at length
suddenly, all at once
and so in this way
right through
just over it
especially, particularly
amounting to nothing, making void
concerning, in reference to
about
on account of, for the sake of
by way of
directly
immediately upon
The Imperative
481. The imperatives present distinct forms according to the
modes from which they are derived.
In 482 may be seen the complete paradigm of the ordinary simple
form in OlS.
This is arranged so as to show the procession of the transitive
from the intransitive, and also shows the sequences, as, &-kiik-k6,
all dowftf the third persons, n-tttk-chS in the second, and &-kiik-k&t
in the first. For example :
pe
pile
do
let him act
peyu
pHeu
doit
let him do it
This form represents acquiescence, permission, etc. ; tOfttn, ftm, etc.,
generally accompany this form.
In 483 there is a condensed paradigm of the form in Die, showing
also the negatives.
484 shows the form in kfllS. This is the real form for command-
ing; kekS, kettte, and other interjections often accompany it.
485 shows another very common imperative derived from Mode
CLIX.
I30
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
I
5
IS 19
P« Su Cu o< 0« Ou
(
CM «^
{SRC
«« «rf ♦^ s I
iS IS
IV IV
fC IS IS
^^ ♦^ 4i«
IV IV IV
ess
« - «
6 S 3
s
o
aSS
s
V
ESS
V
V
8 0) tf)
s s
s
o
V
s s
V
II
8"
I
IV
u
s a a
itt
S s s
.a o o
N y /
e^ IV
«S-8
.MiV
€5-8
IV IV IV
g*crcr
>a>a>s
6 S 6
ssa
aaa
S iv
Ou o. o<
>6
8
V
M
V
» s s
S o o
V
^.M^n CO
E a 8
X8 H» KV
{S {3 C3
O* O* o«
S"9 9
•sg^g.
IV
>M 09 CO
«rf '*i« ♦rf
IV IV IV
{3 R CS
s
S s s
^ o o
V
■JL'SL'S.
)d IV
ISU4U4
IV IV IV
O. O. Ou
^3 J<
•M ais
s o»a
o« o« p«
a*
IS
JC IS IV
JS P IV
«k •» »
e 6 e
IV IV IV
o« p« o«
IS
iS o' Q«
IS
^ ^ IV
OU O. D«
IV IV IV
KJ iJ ^
IV IV IV
JC IS IV
IV IV IV
c a a
B V V
o
6§|
flS a
B *> *>
•a ,a ^ 'S •£ •£
,Q «« «4 ,Q 4rf 4rf
fl a a
B V V
«
V
V
s
o
cs S S
g 0) V
V
e<
fl a a
B V V
«C 4-1 4-1
s
o
V
U3
ci
9
>v
'8.
■"V
IT
IV
.M
IS
IS
'S.
-V-
I
IV
>C8
IV
JS
u
IV
o.
51
IV
a
IMPERATIVE PRESENT
131
483.
Intrans.
Trans.
Sing.
Pos.
' I pins
2 pe
. 3 P^le
Dual <
1 pHlik
2 patQk
. 3 P^lek
P/ur.
' I pilthta
2 pech^
.3 Pflet
Neg.
p!nr!ll$
pinrftft
p!nr!le
plnraluk
plnratuk
plnril€k
p!nrilthUl
plnriche
plnrilat
Pos.
pll^ku
peyu
plleu
pllauk
p^tghwu
pllenghwa
pllaut
p^cheghwQ
plletghwti
Neg.
plnrilikQ
plnrilghwfl
plnrileu
pinrllauk
plnrittghwu
p!nr!l€nghwi&
plnralaiit
plnrflthcheu
plnHletghwu
Sing.
Dual
' I peklUS
2 pek€ni
3 p€kn€
' I p€k!l(ik
2 p€ketQk
3 pekn€k
p!nrilthkni$
p!nr!lthkeni
plnrilthkHe
plnr!lthk!luk
pinrflthketuk
plnrilthkllek
Plur.
' I pek!ltht& p!nrathk!lt&
2 p€keche p!nrilthkech€
3 peknat plnrllthknet
peklllikQ
pekeyu
pekileyu
pekllauk
peketghwu
pekningghwu
pekHaut
p€kecheyu
p^kiletghwu
plnritkilliku
pinrilthkeya
p!nritk!leyu
plnrilthknauk
plnrilthk€tghwu
pinrflthkinngghwa
p!nr!lthkllaut
pinrilthkecheyu
p!nr!lthkiletghwu
485.
Sing.
' I plkk6r'll6
2 plkkS.
3 plkk^r'le
Dual
plnritk^r'lie
pinritka
pinritker'le
Plur.
' I plkk^r'luk plnritker'luk
2 pikk&httik p!nr!tkahtilk
3 plkker'lek p!nritk6r'lek
' I pikk<hUl plndtkilthta
2 plkkihch€ plnritk^hche
3 p!kk6r'let plnrUker'let
plkk^r'liku
pikkrhwu
pikk^r'leyu
p!nritk6r'iaku
plnritkrhwu
pinritker'leyu
pikk6r'la"uk p!nrUk6r'lauk
pikkatghwu p!nritk&tghwu
pikker'Hngghwu pinritk^r'lingghwu
plkker'laut pinritker*la"ut
pikkrcheyu pinritkihcheQ
plkk^r'letghwu p!nritk6r*letghwu
»32
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
486.
The Future Imperative Negative
Intrans,
Trans,
I
iyag'yikone
I
pe^koneQ
thou
iy^'y&konak
thou
pe&kon&ku
he
iyig'ylkoning
he
^^ikonineu
Sing,
we both iyig'y^koninuk
Dual \ you both iy^'yikonituk
they both iyig'y&koniinQk
we both peikonii%hwu
you both pe^konitghwu
they both pe^kon^nghwu
Plur,
1
we
you
they
!y&g'yikon^tlL
iy^g'yiikdn^che
iy&g'yikon^tiing
we
you
they
pe&kon^nghwu
pe^kon^cheu
peikon^tghwu
These forms exhibit the most emphatic prohibition, as :
iyUg'y^onik
pe^konikQ
thou shalt not go
thou shalt not do it
487. This form implies a lasting prohibition. The command, do
not do ity meaning now or on this occasion, is to be rendered by the
form in 489.
tlngluy^kon&kQ thou shalt not strike him
ikdmy^kon&k thou shalt not sit down
488. The verb, I go^ iyXqtOX, has the following forms :
No. I. 1&.
iy&g'l«
iye
iyig'le
Sing.
Dual <
Plur,
No. 2. knu.
No. 3. k«r»lW(ModeCLIX)
iyiklllg
iyikeni
ly^klle
iyaker'116
iy&ki
iy&k6r'l€
iyiWluk
iyikltQk
iy&kllek
iyik^r'luk
iy^k^qtuk
iy^k^r'lek
iyiWlta
iyakSche
iyiWlet
ly^k<^
iy&k&qch€
iyaker'let
iySLg'lak
iy^qtuk
iyag'lek
iyelthta
iyiqche
iyig'let
it&ke hwinkuk iyikSr'luk cWngghek Wppluku kaliwivtit
here, now, let us both go up stream, around the point
Qet&k€r*I€ unwiktilthhrantin 1 11 stay till to-morrow
FUTURE IMPERATIVE NEGATIVE
133
EXTRA EXAMPLES
489.
490.
491.
492.
kum^qthlikQ
kiimirzhghwu
kum^qthleu
k&thlichem^Ud
k^thl^chemiken^
k&thlichem^lle
taanthlg
to&ntft
to^nthle
kaliqtdhplrkne
kauqtdhplrknik
ka"uqt6hplrknaku
kum^qthlalik
kum^qtghwti
kum^qthlenghwu
kJSthmchemikniOk
k&thlichemikUtuk
k&thlichem^kgUek
t5inthluk
to&ntuk
to^nthluk
kauqt6h plrkniinuk
kauqt6hplrknatuk
kaliqtdhpfrknikuk
kum^qthlaut
kumiqcheu
kum^qthletghwQ
k&thlichem<hta
k^thl^chem^che
k^thUchemilet
toiniltta
toanche
toanthlit
kaliqtdhpirkn^kOt
kauqtdhplrkniche
kauqt5hplrkn^ke
K&mXqthUkQ, kindle it^ make a fire y forms its negative in the regular
way:
kumiqftdthUka, kum^qiirillu, kum&qftrithleu, etc.
do not sit down
do not be alone
itrautiirflgu do not bring it down
tlngltinrilgu do not strike him
ikomlnrillu
kemltfirillu
493.
chOldlv!rkn^
chuklplrknik
k^nniiqp!rknik
kauw^pirknik
kauqt5hp!rkniku
kwegn^rqp!rkn&k •
minp^nlkpe
n&kklikfirkne
pegh itthltiq virkn^k
tkech^r&qplrknik
do not go so fast
do not go so slowly
do not talk so much
do not sleep so much
do not strike him so much
do not smoke so much
do not stay so long
do not love me so much
do not be so weak
do not come so soon
These imperatives from Mode XCIX follow the model in 492.
EXAMPLES OF THE IMPERATIVES
494.
til£ k&?
pllet ch^ghilthkinratS,ldl
it^ke im iyeltht^
keke k^thl^chem^lle
k£thUlch€m^eni t^ktiksaun^k
^t^ke talm^ tingSrqk^r'l^u
hwetdk t&nQm p€5r'i^ku
chQkafkgne tket!ngse6r'l«
I will come, eh ?
let them do ; I do not care
once more off we go !
oh, well ! let him scold away
keep on with your scolding
hello ! let me see that
be sure I am the one to do it
I will come along leisurely
134
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
niikk^k€^
ukut ^ggutk^r'Ulka
lyig^qkUt iipskelet
sTuluktikkeyu uni
m^tnCikh^r'mku
thlo^thluku peu
utiki pivuskumku taugw&m
iUnyuin ilt6qhwu
Agiyun k^nniiqt6k t^ngkiqUlngl6
AgiyutCim il^qkwuti nikeke
n&nvik uthlinr^tcheu
remember me
let me carry these over
those who are to go, let them be
ready (203)
take care of this
warm it first
fix it well
just wait till I get it ready
do as you please
God said, Let there be light
recite the commandments of God
do not go near the lake
^ghMti hwinehwi pinklqchikonikQ now, see here, do not do it again
&thlitaugw5k taguy&kon^ku
pukchikon&k
ket^ke ch^la unwiku niy5rk6a
t&kumchukekut hw^nkutS,
yiik t^ng &m!n^
hw^lth hwe pektllS
iigg^rmeuskeu im!n^ pHlaucMn
sl^miln iniifkir^y^kluku
495.
'mine p!kkldkut5k
S,* thine pikkeut6k D,*
his pikkleutdk
do not take it ; it belongs to some one
keep still (i.e., do not move)
so now, to-morrow you must watch
out for it
have mercy on us 1
see that man over there
you or I '11 do (734)
keep right on as you have been doing
do not let him go outside
ours plkklaust5k
yours p!kkecheut5k
theirs p!kkletghwut6k
ours pikklauqtdk
yours p!kketgut6k P,
theirs pikklingutdk '
This expresses would it were mine! etc.
The complete paradigm is given in 498, as this is an important form.
k^ttinr^kklik!nt5k would that you were my son 1
ifr^rna^kklekiistdk would we were his children 1
496. Whenever time is mentioned in connection with the wish,
t5k follows the word expressing it.
«
hw^todtok pikkliku would it were mine now 1
2,1th thrdg'netdk pikkl^ku would it had been mine last year !
S,lththr^kut5k pikkl^ku may it be mine next year 1
497. Any object may be thus mentioned:
hwit5dt6k kiyikklikO would it were my canoe now I
hwdto2t5k ekimr^kkl^kOq would it were my sled now ! (dual noun)
hwatoit6k kemiiqtukkl&ke would they were now my dogs !
PARADIGM OF PIkKLAkUTOK
I3S
Co
CD
srarp*
AAA
A A a
3 B ^
«-4 »-<»-<
o o o
c c e
A A B
SB**
i» i» i»
A A B
B B ^
cr cr ar
AAA
« « «•
M ta to
3^ ^^ »*•
A A a
B 3 ^
o o o
c c a
« « » ,♦ ^
^ < <
(P ct ct
•• ^* ^«
ft» ta to
5-tr2t
A A a
3 3^
ar S.
- A a
3 3^
A
=ra-sr
AAA
r* r* ^
A A a'
3 3^
a* a* a*
o o o
a c a
«• « ^
3 3
A A "
3 3
?r ?r TT
*T3 "O "O *0 "O *T3
a* a- a* ^ ^ 6
Al Al Al g< g< 2.
•O TS "O
5? 5? 5?
Al Al Al
Al Al CI
^ r* r»
o<o< o<
TTTrvr
CI C(>0
r* r* w*
o<o<?<r
Al <tl Al
AKrti ft,
5*^ CI
Al c< »♦
p< p< p<
Al a< CI
AAA
« « ^
o o ST
< ^ 3i
» i» A
= 1.8
a* a* a*
AAA
« ^ V
M to ft»
JV A A
'•0*10 *»
c a 2
AAA
O O
a a
a*
A
A
O O sf
C C 2
?.
T3T3
P?Ki
^TK-W-
^H«
m^
Al
Al
Al
r»
r*
«i»
(0
Cft
a*
O
3<
2f ^
Al «^
o<
^
EfEE
Al r* 0<
s: o< i?
55 S« »-<
o 2^ a<
a* c< r*
Ai^Si
•OTS TS
*0'0 TS
P?^^
??5???
EEE
EEE
p( p< p<
Al S* Al
Ml
a-a'a<
c< :? c<
?4f '^ *"*
2:o<o<
JO g<U3
SL*£ 3*
OiW^
S|s<
>r
s,^^
>r
•a«o»o
^^^
^^?r
»>« »x p<
§3 5^
&is
Al ?:'0<
t^ r* ^
^^
r* r* r* ^ ^
a* a* a* o o
AAA e d
1
a c 3
* "a
6S§
2*2*2' ^^ o
-lo-^^o « * «
a e g
a*a*a*
AAA
f» 1^ r*
o o o
c ^ c
to (0
B c a
C0 w g
m'* C C g
(A OS
A
•O "O "O
Al Al Al
*♦ r* r»
gca<a^
^.a »»<
o<o<o<
Al Al Al
a* a* a*
»♦ *♦ ^
o< o<
•O "O "O "O *0 *T3
Al Al Al
Al Al Al
O ^'^
=^^£'
Al C<<W^
?<r^ a-*
o» ^
7!"
•O TS "O "O 73 •Q,
J?5?5? Rip???
Al Al TtT
pr pr P<
Al AKAi
pr ?r>»<
If I III
o<o<
^pr
H.
t». ••
136
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
489.
tkethl£t5k
tketfttdk
tk^thletdk
tkethltiqtdk
tkettikt6k
tkethliiqtdk
tketlt&tdk
tkechet6k
tkethlestdk
500.
r —
Sing,
r „
Dual -
r „
Plur,
umyuarqtkleket&k
V
umyuarqtkeket^k
umyuarqtkleket^k
umyuarqtklukketik
umyuarqtketukket&k
umyuarqtklekkeULk
V
umyuarqtkllt&ket&k
umyuarqtkecheket&k
umyuarqtkletket^k
kinntir*l^t5k ytiqstiin
would that I spoke Innuit ! (i.e., as the people)
tim^nthl$t5k t&ngvig'l5i ttolLkunuk
would that I had been there to see them !
501. When kStXk is used before the word, and if the word begins
with a vowel, kStXk sounds as kfitig and merges into one word, as,
V
ketlgiimyQIrqtke, let me think.
502.
Modal Imperatives
Sing.
' ksfuw&ptiknS
kauwipiiknILk
kauwILptiknILnS
Dual
' kauwILpiikn&nuk
kauwILptikn&tuk
kauwILpiiknILnuk
Plur,
' kauw&ptikn^ti
kauw&piikn&che
kauw&piikn^tting
503. All verbs ending in qtOtt have their imperative in pfiknS.
Those ending in other ways have fkenS (505 and 543).
IdLnkipiikn^
kauwILptikn^
iikf5kpiikng
without speaking
without sleeping
without believing
lylLg'yiiqptiknS without wanting to go
kepCislLqptiknS without trading
SJceletst&piiknS freely, without pay
mdq'ndqpiikn^ without fatigue
504.
td&tlu h5k uno^n kizhgelune en^qtdk, eniqniir'inethlu kauwILpiiknILne
then at night, entering the kazhga, he lies down ; having laid down,
he (remains) without sleeping
chahw^ tauna yut peyiinrilthket, chSla ytit peyug'luku t&m^ytikptiknlLku .^
iiksti nuyilghdk
what is it that no man wants and no one wants to lose ? a bald head
icsauk ly^g'yiiqptiknlLne
he being loth to go
MODAL IMPERATIVES
505.
Sing,
plnrSttifkSnS
plnr$tufk€n2lk Dual
pinrSttifk$n&ne
kitttimlifk^n^
kaunkiifkSn^
pifkgng
tuzhetiifkSnS
plts&ktifk€n$ '
pinrSttifkSnfi
kanruchemlLfk^n^
ILkelettifk^ng
aulukiifk^n^
3.giytifk$nS
ill^qtiifk^ng
uege^ktifkSn^
' plnrSttifkSnlLntik
plnr€tiifk€nlltuk Plur,
pinrStiifkSnantik
137
' plnrgtiifkgn^lta
pinr6ttifkSn&che
plnr^tiifk^nlLnting
I w
I w
I w
I w
I w
I w
I w
I w
I w
I w
I w
I w
thout ease
thout caring at all
thout doing
thout lameness
thout intending to do
thout failing to do
thout being told
thout pay
thout minding
thout praying
thout mistaking
thout striving
Some of these may be rendered into English as adjectives, as,
uncaring^ untold^ unpaid^ unmindful^ etc.
506.
chiqthletklLklLmi k^ ptts^kiifk^nS ch^qthllr^l^qta^
do I sin if I do wrong unintentionally ?
iptl^qput Aglyun !rkklumiin iyausktifk^n^t^ tughentin thlen
we ask God that we be not brought to evil
k&nrM5kthl^qtliput ^shelgnuput hwinkut^ dgiyul^rtmiin hw^tk^p!k !11^-
kwefkSn^tS.
we tell our sins to the priest without (our) keeping back any whatsoever
V
pinrettifk^n^ tkechShkolL I will come without fail
tuzhetlhrS^ !m!nlL peyiibrg5k tQzhetiifk^n^ne
that cripple walked without lameness (i.e., unlamely)
kathlitaiL chukafkSn^ nettifkir^luchg
I speak slowly to make you understand
Note. — ChaUfkBnS (le., without speed) \ nStfifUxtkft (Mode XXXVII).
lye kaunkiifk^nS go without minding me = go ahead ; never mind me
kaunkiifkSn^ku lye
go on ; never mind him (or * it ') (from kaunkftkX, / mind it)
kaunkiifk^n^ iy^'y^konlLk
do not go without me (but if < without' is use'd in its strict sense
another form occurs)
138
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
tinrilthk&n iy^qch^hko^ unethluku
if he does not come I '11 go without him
Illingchifk^ne iye
go anyhow (from Ulangchingritlkl)
it&ke cheumi^qtQngnilkiifk^n^ti utriiqtilt^
here ! we without trying any longer to go ahead, let us go back
(Mode XIX)
ikn^rt&pugn^ pits&ktifkSn^
ikn^rtilk^ pltslkOfk^n^ku
ikn^rt^qk^ pitslktifk^n^kuk
ikn^rtdnkil pits^ktifk^ndke
he, without intending, hurts me
' him unintentionally
I hurt \ both without intending to
them accidentally
yut tlm^r'm&ng ^talich^k taugw^m pifkSn^ne
all men excepting one only
iye plfkSne
iye plnrdttifk^nS
Irkklunuk kdthl&tiifkgn&k
pILlUqtufk^ndk tagusken^
go without me
go not without me = by all means take me along
(be thou) without talking nonsense
take as much as ever you can = without taking
little
507. Our English expressions, instead of, in place of etc., may be
translated by this form.
mintufk^nlt^ n^nvilmiin iyelthti
instead of our staying here let us go to the lake
utlk&lglrqptikndti iy^gnauqtokut
in place of waiting let us go on
mauq'loq'lodgnuk entiqkod.lSgne y^kflLniin Iyisktifk$nd,kuk
their grandmother often forbade them both to go far off
to^thl0h6k dk&niin p!fk$n&n$ ^t^m ingk^t5k
then in a few moments he again came out
508.
f piksaun^
Sing, \ ptksaunILk
plksaun^ne
iyilksaunS
kinnuqsaun^
keputtiksaun^
Dual
I not yet doing
ptksaun&niik
plksaiinitiik
piksaun^nuk
Plur.
' pYksaiinS^t^
plksaun^che
p!ksauniltung
I without yet going
I without yet speaking
I without yet trading
V
MODAL IMPERATIVES— EXAMPLES
139
509.
Sing.
ch&taun^
ch&taun&k Dual
chlLtsTun^ne
eklyurqtaun^
netalin^
t^ngg&qnaun^
ekiyurqkalin^
This form ends in various
1. ChfttaunS
2. ChXkaiinS
3. Ch&ngnaunS
4. ChSksattiiS
/ not being
chlLtaun&niik [ ch^taiin^ti
chlLtaunatiik Fiur. - chlLtaunache
chlLtalinlLnuk [ ch^tauniltiing
without help and not wanting any
I without yet hearing
I without yet seeing
without help and wanting it
ways owing to the modes.
= cMtitOk (Mode VI).
= chiUdtOfi.
= ch&ngit$ft.
= cMksitM (Mode XVIII).
510.
EXAMPLES
uetaughIL ch^ksaun^
tket6k chitalmS
hwlLnkuti Vj6l thlo^tuw^qkaiiwikut kemtil ekiyorqkaunlt^ }
can we alone and unaided do good ?
ch^ngghaune t^nggbSrqch^hs&q'nilt^mche
without anything happening to me, I will see you (an expression for
taking leave of one)
I am without anything to do yet
he came in my absence = without my
being (see Mode VI, chfttitOft)
keydlune todtft t&koksaun^ne he weeping unceasingly
ekiyurqsaune hw^tkdpik pinggnito^ without help I can do nothing at all
hw&kiin nun^niik lylkoviit tunuthlutd, n^tQtmun chdklrqtilk^ksa'un^k
V V
cheCiniirqp^gtin ita.m tiintimthun tkech^hkutft
from hence, this village, if you go, your back to us, to nowhere, thee without
turning aside during your forwardness, again by our rear you will come
(if you go straight ahead from here you will return here again)
timlqsaun^ne !qt5k it fell, unlost, yet without being lost
tamiqpiiknane iqtok it fell, unlost
To express that it fell and was lost is rendered by
Iqtdk timar'lune it fell, being lost
hw&tii ithl&mtik thlu yugmtik Hlaun^tuk
and so they both were without any one else with them (i.e., they were
both alone)
I40
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
511.
Sing,
Imperative of Mode VII
ILnyunfi
inyund,k
ILnyQn^ne
Dual <
' ILnyunlLnuk
^nyunitiik
inyunlLnuk
Plur. <
' &nyunlLt&
inyun&che
^nytinitiing
ir'neyunfi
^nyunS
childless
never going out
ik6yun$ chlLlleughi I work unpaid
512. These are used mostly in the third person.
Oen^ne uninhabited
^shen^ne bad
miyuyun&ne inaccessible
pikthllnfyunlLne
ktrsnILne
iepaunine
unfrequented
warm
companionless
513. The term "adjutant" has been adopted to designate the
following forms which are peculiar to the Innuit verb.
I. Adjutant Kuma
514. When this is coupled to a verb it gives the force of the adverb
* when/ used not interrogatively but relatively, as, at that time,
NoTB. — The use of ' when/ interrogative, is explained in 624.
Kami is used as follows :
keputo^
keput&ki
kepuskum^
kepusktimku
I trade
I buy it
In the past tense it appears as follows :
keputlh5ugn^ I traded keputlhokumi
keputlho^ki I bought it kepQtlhoktimku
when I trade
when I buy it
when I traded
when I bought it
515. The negatives are easily recognized :
Pres,
Intrans, keputiirilthkum^
Trans, keputiir!lthkiimkQ
Past
r kgputlhtinrnthkuma
1 kepatihiinrllthkiimku
The following paradigm presents this adjutant in full.
516. Often the characteristic vowel is the only difference, as :
n^kkllkklLmkln I love thee
n^kkUkk5mkin when I love thee
k
INTRANSITIVE ENDINGS -- EXAMPLES
141
517. It must be noted that the distinction between * if ' and
when ' is rather loosely observed in Innuit.
uzvenrilthkune hw^tfi iyok5ch!nks&nratdk
if he were not crazy he would not act so
to&thlu kinrutik &thlinr5kuftuk miy5rqtuk
then he said to them (both), " If you (two) are strangers,
come up"
Paradigm of the Intransitive Endings
518.
Sing.
Dual
Plur,
' when I
— kumi
Sing, ^
when thou
— ^kuvut
when he
— kune
when he
—kin
' when we both
— k6mniik
Dual -
when you both
k6fttik
when they both
— kigniik
when they both
— kunuk
' when we
k5mti
Plur, <
when you
— k6fche
when they
— konung
when they
— k&ta
EXi
LMPLES OP THE DOUBLE THIRBS
he
r tkJshkSn
when
1
t^ng^rqch^hkik^
he
comes I will see him
he himself
tklshkune t^kchShk^
•
when he comes he will fix it
they both
they both themselves
they
they themselves
J tklshkig'nuk ting^rqch^hkiqki
1 when they two come I will see them two
tk!shktinuk t^ch^hkik
when they two come they two will fix it
I
{
f tk!s
tktshkiti tingSrqch^hkinki
when they come I will see them
tk!shkonung tikch^hkit
when they come they will fix it
142
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
SEE
>o>o>o
.fi O iV
•^ *- S'S
I I
E E 8
>o >o >o
I I
19 a
IV Ni Ni
u u u
IV
IV IV
#■ ^i' ^
«c «« .*«
T5 "S 'tS **j «•* »»<
>o>o >o >o >o >o
I I I I I
ill
HI HI Mi
MM
IV
« S ^ 19 3 IV
U3 « « MMM
^s a a «« «« «rf
Hi Hi Hi H| HlHl
III III II
M
I
\M
I
Jl3 IS JC 3 U JC 13 IV
>9^-^ -^ -C ^ <^ ^ tA^ Jl«
o«cro» o'o'o' o'o'o'
>3 >9 >9 >9 >9 >9 >9 >3 O
ccc ccc cec
lO lO lO lO lO lO lO lO lO
1111-111""
S 3 9 S S V
«rf >« >« pC «rf «rf
d 8 8
v** - B V V
%\o
o 8 a
gov
e«
a s 3 -s ^g.s-S'S
is"
8"=. _ « - -
P 4-» >* >% JC ♦- ♦-
a S 6
B V V
^ V-
^ V-
I
%
9
O
9
O
V
U3
V
V
V
us
V
V
1
IV
MA
- '9 w
^ CO «
>9 >9 >9
6 6 6
lO lO lO
MMM
I I
.fi 19 IV
^-^-^
U U Im
>V >V >V
19 19 19
s i §
lO lO lO
MMM
\ I
*.
®^ •«* J3 I§ IV
«4M 1^ Hi* 'Hi«'l4^'Hi«
>o >o >o >o >o >o
MMM MMM
I I II
*<* Jrf 4rf
(£.19 19
Kl Ml Ml
I I I
^ IV •^
•se-s "asa
Hi Ml Ml Ml Ml Ml
I I I I
^i9 19
•efi>9>9
>v c c
ccc
lO lO iO
MMM
I I I
j^iV
19 -'^
>e -M o
o*o*0*
>9>9>9
CCC
ccc
lO IO to
MMM
l1 I
19
>S'l3 I4>
>v o* cr
60>9>9
c c d
•O lO lO
MMM
S'g ^ 6 § §
-c 5 5 -S X X
c S fi
B 9 9 ad 4-* 4-*
V
C«
>« S 9 9 g § i
9 9 «rf>\>«.C4^4^
6
o« 4) 9 9 E o 4>
«co.cOO-»-jbjc
9 9 *i >s>^jC'Z'ti
^ V.
^ V.
J V-
SI
V
9
9
O
V
V
V
V
V
U3
V
c.^ iv
E E 6
>o>o >o
MMM
M
19 i9 IV
MMM
E 6 6
>o>o>o
MMM
I I I
Hi
19
f^M^ ^M
^G0l9 19
^PMM
> > >
JC 19 IV
tl^MM
> > >
19 19 i9 19 19 i9
MMM MMM
III III
i^ M *± jrf IV ^
^ 19 19 >e 3 .d i9 >^ •«>
XlxIXl HlHlXl XlXiMl
111111111
19 19
Hiu«.ai
IV Id Id
ccc
IO lO IO
ir
4>l «rf
— o
Id Id Id
CCC
lO IO lO
MM
I I
M
i9 IV
\9MM
IV Id Id
CCC
lO lO IO
MMM
1 I I
a
01 «
9 9
9
O
c! a a
B V V
*2XX
•C 4^ 4->
9
O
S99 4^>\>«.C4rf^
^ ^
-• V.
V
us
V
us
V
V
us
V
U3
\
PARADIGM OF K UM A -- ADJUTANT AkAmA
143
520.
hweghIL IpiinggnukumIL
hwegn^ thlenukumlL
hwdnkut^ thlitnukumt^
hwegh^ Ipiingghukumi plnrachiqki
hwe ILthlaukum^
if I were you
if I were he
if we were they
if I were you I would not do it
if I were another
521. All the verbs of place derived from the various locatives
mentioned in 371 occur in this form.
y&nllthkum^
timlLtik&n
tolLntlLkin
when I am yonder
when he is there
when he is about there
slikHhokumi nauthluy^nr^to^ hwiltoil
if I had been careful I would not be sick now
nalithluthlenekumi
if I should get sick (Mode LXXII)
II. Adjutant Akama
522. This signifies whenever,
keputlLkim^
Neg, kepatfirat&'kimIL
S,
The intransitive
I — 2lkamlL
thou — ^kivut
he — ik^ma
he — iikin
Z>.
' we both
you both
they both
they both
whenever I trade
whenever I do not trade
-^k^mniik
-ILkifttik
-2lkig'ntik
-ILklLmtik
P.
we
you
they
they
— akamta
— Hkdfche
— ^k^mung
— akata
523.
EXAMPLES OP THE DOUBLE THIRDS
S.
tket^k&n tlLng^rqthliiqk&
tketlLkama 2lrrul!r'mqt6k
I always see him whenever he comes
he always stops whenever he comes
D,
^1 -.VI « I XI .y - X .uiy X 1 y f ^ always see them two whenever they
tket&kig'ntik tingSrqthlir&qka \ ^ ^
P,
tket&kimniik irrulirliiqtttk
f tketakati t&rigerqthiar^lnki
tket^k^mung ^rrulir'llqtut
f they two always stop whenever they
\ two come
I always see them whenever they come
they always stop whenever they come
144
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
'a
I
1:3
I
.C
u
g
.fi O iV
ESS
Mt Mt H«
I I I
ift) irt Ml
.CUS JS
«#• «M «^
H« ><« >«
I I
19 IV
MM
IS IV 'V
«E «« «rf
U •) 09
•4^ Hi* Hi*
k4 xtf xtf
MMM
I I I
H«^ w
•V
I?
IV i9
^ i3 a >c !2 i^ us IS IV
*«*rf7 «'«'«i« «rf«rf«rf
>««>C«H« H«>««>«« >««>««>««
MMM MMM MMM
i I I I
^ IS IS >C IS u X I? IV
o"crcr o"o*o" cro"cr
>s >s >s >s >s >s >s >s >s
6SS 6SE E66
K«HtHt HtMtxtf XtfMCM*
Mil I i I M ! I I I
^ 6 6
.99 6 V V
J3 O O -S U3 ^
S
«^ -. B V V
6 2 2 *2 u= .fi
v*L - « 2 2 E 4> V
gs s
E S
E S 8
ES3:gg.S.:s-S-S
^ V-
J \.
^ Nw.
V
V
s
o
9
o
V
V
A
V •
U3
V
V
V
IV
_ IS o
♦* w en
cr O'er
»s >9 >s
E E E
M* M* Xtf
.fi 19 IV
>v >v >v
e c.c
IS IS 19
BEE
1
a IS
IV IV
%
III III
. X 19 iv
H4 M^ Hi* Hj H« Hi*
M« H« Xtf Xtf Mt Xtf
Jrf -M .M M M M
tt1 I 1I
»2 j< ♦- j< •«
(£,19 19 >C IS X
c^S "S ©"O'er
H« Mt M« H« M* >C«
M
IS IS IV
c crcr
M* K4 >C«
III III III
V
V
E
^ E S
«« ESS
§ § -S J3 X
S 9 X «rf «rf
9
O
9
O
v*! - - E E
v1 ^ *> 2 2 E V V
B99 «rf>«>\«C*rf««
S2Sx00.5^^
B99 ««>«>\.iS«rf««
^ v_
V
V
A
e*
V
A
V
A
V
US
V
U3
C,ai( IV
BEE
^
.?
I I
M
19 i9 IV
MMM
EBB
Xtf Xtf H<
MMM
I I
M«
^19 i9
Ktf Ki Xd
I I I
19
•S,3 IV
bO M ^
MS MS MS
11 I
-**'** - Ts I
Mtt ><< >C< Xtf ><< Mtt
M I- M I
M ^
IS i9
i3 1(4 la
EBB
M« Xtf >«
"11
IS IV
irt ictf let
BEE
>«« Mt >f«
Ml III
M '*i
)C iSX
ICtf l<tt l<tt
BBS
>rt M« xtf
«
V 2 2 B V V
A 9 P -2 X X
10
^ 8 fi
V ** V V
mC* v99fla>a>
M 3j ^ ^ e E E
s
o
X
s
o
A
V
X
V
X
V
X
V
X
V
X
V
X
GENERAL EXAMPLES -- ADJUTANT PILfC'M A 145
GENERAL EXAMPLES
535.
kithlun ytik kKttlLkima peliiqt^ ? m5qr5qtll&qt6k
what does a man do when he falls into the water ? he gets wet
ch&muk peyuglLk^mlL k&chut&qthlin^pugh^
whenever I want anything you always refuse me
kauqtolighwu iy&nrat&kin whenever he does not go, beat him
pulingt^k keputlLkimi as often as ever I buy
iy^g^k^mlL hw&ngniik whenever I go myself
The following example consists of an explanation of the difference
between pOd and pSkftntSk.
hweghi t^ng!ngratd.kilmku kinniiqto^ ** pek^ntok '' to^mthlu t^nghdkilmku
kinntiqto^ " peki "
whenever I do not see it I say pSk&ntok, // is up there; but having it in
sight I say p6ki, // is up there (361)
III. Adjutant Pitt^ma
526. When this adjutant combines with a verb it conveys the
idea of prior to or before the act.
It possesses both the intransitive and transitive forms and like-
wise the double thirds.
While the general form is in p, still euphony causes some variations.
1 keputdd. kepupiUg'md
2 ikomoi akomvilig'mi and verbs in -go&, -gnoi, -noi, -rhoi (543)
3 kippo^ Wpfillg'm^ and verbs in -voi
4 oraiign^ onfuwillg'mi
The transitive ending is limkQ. The full paradigm is given in 528.
The impersonal verbs in this form appear as follows :
tiqpilgan before it dawns uniiqpilgan before it nights
Okshtiqpilgiln before it winters ka&qpilgSn before it summers
NoTR. — Vox the other meanings of before see 736.
527. Care must be taken to distinguish between words in pilig'ml
and those in pniiqtOtt (Mode XLV).
kuk^qpillg'mi m5q'n5qk^tdtod
before being half-way I began to get tired (Mode XXI)
ESSEJVr/ALS OF INNUIT
o.^^ %%^
I I I I If I I I I I I I I I I I M I I fl I I { I I I I
fllill Ssslll Sssllllll SssllUl
sill .. Ill -slis
i tfiWi III is.. SsIssIbIs •lllllllll
S IVIIII fll'fl'i iiJiifJIs I'll III S|J
•g ^tttfrf ffffft ffrfftTfT tftttti'i'f
B ^
III III fSi|S| wussaws ^ssgggsgg
a.'B.'a. St.'a.B. 'S.'S.'E. d-'S-cl 'a.B.'a. 'a.'5.'a a.5.'&. a.'a.'B. 'o.'H,'a, 'a.H.'S.
,111111 I I I I I I M I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I
EXAMPLES — ADJUTANT AM A
147
EXAMPLES OF THE DOUBLE THIRDS
529.
iy&qpiHg'ma ldlnniiqt5k before his going he said
iyd.qpil!g'ma pIlle^Klthho^ before his going he did it
iyiqpillg'ma tikille before his going let him come here
lylLqpillg'mQng k^nniiqtut
iyiqpil!g*mQng tikillet
lydqpilg^n tketok
lylLqpilg&n umuk p!lthh5ILk
iy^qpilgita tketok
tanghupilg^ti ^tuntim
before their going they said
before their going let them come here
before his going he came
before his going he did this
before their going he came
before they saw one another
EXTRA EXAMPLES
t&nghupillmntik ^tOnQm
t&nghupillgug'nuk ^tun&m
before we two saw each other
before they both saw each other
ly&qpilimtig'ntik umuk chlk^rchdhkdpuk
before the going of us both we (both) will give you this
IV. Adjutant Anta
530.
Pos.
Pres, kepuchilm^
Past keputlhoSmi
Fut, kepuch^kn&mlL
Neg,
keputiiralilmd
keputlhtinral^m^
kepuzgnil^mlL
The complete paradigm is given in 532.
531. Euphonic changes and mode forms produce a variety of
endings, but they are all readily distinguished.
inz. <
I kepucho^m^
Sing. \ thou kepuchoavtit
he kepuchoin
iyemd
m^nlUm^
t^ngvem^
iyevdt
miniavtit
t&ngveviit
iyen
m^nl&n
t&ngven
Kepach&mft is from the simple verb kSpatOft, / trade,
Kep&chOftml is from kSpQchaqtSft, / want to trade.
148 ESSEJi/TJALS OF lA'XUIT
Ea= ^ee see
a
1 . f f III! ililll tli'Mrsi liiffflil
Ililll Isslll Is 5 Ililll Is; Ililll
ill III >ga ?aa §31 L.
PARADIGM OF TANGVEMA
ass «J«- ^'1'% S'a,?
U I4t itj IV>U IV IC iv lU IV ll/ lU
Ml u M EsuiEa Gi) M M uumi
■s-sg fill
& bS M bs &Gii
z'ix III
!i Hi
SEE E E e
"I'll 1&&
.■£3 2
111
III I'll ^1^ |EE '^^-l ^,V;-j III ^^^ »;i^
aouui u & u umoHi ne^ec tic u u u ^ u Dctaec uuu oabsGa
EBB eCC EEC '^Ja [^ = B -C= CCC CCB BBC
,isili jii iiiil|?li III ill ill
3 & & HI
I = ■! I
e, e, £
g s. I i
ISO ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
534. This form is constantly used in narratives for reduplication, and
immediately follows its dominant (which it agrees with in number and
person). It follows its dominant without employing a conjunction.
NoTK. — As the present tense is very commonly used instead of the past, in translating
Innuit into English AmA is to be rendered by our perfect participle with * and * inserted.
yuk kugtind mILktok m^kch&mS Qg'mlUln dtr^qt6k
a man who is in the kiln (rear part of house [3ii]) arises; rising
right through he goes out (i.e., a man in the rear arose and
having arisen passed direcdy out)
535. The following extracts from native stories will show the use
of Ami.
tsuim IL^r$rnilk uy^ngt5k uy^ngch&ma kinrut^
that woman looked down, and having looked down she said
to^tluh5k Imini mauqhulolL tiqt6k tiqchlLma kilmmiiks<hhr^gne yuw^k^
then his old grandmother got on the bed platform, and having gotten
•up took off her old boots (812)
iy&g'ytiqt6k iyig'yo&n mauqhul6q*lun€ ^pt^ iyigyug*nelune
he wanted to go, and because he is wanting to go he tells his grand-
mother he is desirous of going
nOn^thliir'miik tketok tkechlLm^ k&zhgemtin !trtdk
he comes to an old deserted village, and having come he enters the kazhga
sniqshtqp^k^ma Tktk^t&t5k
because it is so close to the bank it is about to fall (see 223 and Mode
XXI)
k^nrutuktldriy^kon^ke ch^t-t&m<hkwet^ n&thlunrilthkutft, toiyuhwi n&th-
lunrllthkne yum tilm<hkwet^ Idinrutk^k&meke ill^l^r^l&meke
never tell all that you know, for he that tells all he knows often tells more
than he knows
NftthianrUthkatn = second person of nathlttnrflthkttnka, the plural of
n&thlunrnthkakft.
kdnrutkik^mekS whenever he tells all about them
!ll^l^r^lilmek$ because he always adds to them (plural of the
third singular)
ni^liir^l&meu (from HUUftrftUlrftnkA) = I always add to them (639)
peyu^m^ pelki I do it because I wish to
^ yuwiiki I pull off one boot yuw^qki I pull off both boots
yuwin thou pullest off one boot yuw^qkh thou puUest off both boots
yuw& he pulls off one boot yuwik he pulls off both boots
PARA DIG A\f OF TANGVEMA — ADJUTANT
151
535 a. Impersonal verbs used in this form are to be rendered by
on account ofy because of, etc.
^nokkla^n iy&k^t^nr^to^ I do not start on account of the wind
ningthla^n ly^gy^inreto^ I do not want to go because of the cold
k&nikcha^n tiyughiir'ma ch^prt5k his wanting to come is prevented on
account of the snow
kn&rukpeviik^n because of a big snowdrift
y^kshig'luku t^ngshunitikii t&kfeil^m^
I cannot see that far, being of weak sight
ch^la sl5qnen^ntir'mgne t&raydkf^g'muk tilnghdma chikum illdlne
and during his sliding along having seen a king salmon in the ice
^giyugnl thle petikkluka ch^qthldqtoln
I pray for him on account of his being a sinner
To the question chSnhwS miillfiy&kOqchSt, why did you delay so? the
answer may be t&ngvSmft or t&ngsO&mi or t&ngsilqp&kftmS, because I was
looking at something.
miknlma y&kflHrrtisskaunratdk
plkniyulm^
(See also Mode CLVI.)
he is too small to go so far
I through curiosity = because of
wanting to see
V. Adjutant
536. This expresses alt/tough^ even, nevertluless, etc.
Personal Form,
Time Forms,
Pres, peyugntir'ma.
Past peyulthhoghtir'ml
Fut, peyugw&qkaughtir'mi
^eg, peyunrilgntir'ma
tlyuglitir'mi
tiyunrilghtir'ma.
iyig'yughiir*mi
iy^g'yunrilghtir'mi
iy&ghtir*m&
plngkingghtir'm^
pgyOgntir'm^ pinr^tiki
peyunrilghtir'mi peugh^
ingk^piktingr^n
mz, \ tl
Sing,
peyOghtir'mi
thou peyughiiqp!t
he peyughtir'ma
I although unwilling
although I wish to come
although I do not wish to come
I though desirous of going
I though not desirous of going
although I go
although I have
although willing, I did not do it
I act unwillingly (530)
no matter how big = even being very big
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
.Ss|_l|i^ IIIJIl 2gs«,|||i3« 11-5 '!ll -111
^ 'ill'\~i "?tTt ttttitttt nlnltTT
8 = 3 e S V
I
i? S!
e e E E E E
fss ffs-'li?
^ I '|i||||. Ifllif lllll'lll'l flllfllll
^ "fn^ T"Ttt TTTTTTftT "ttTTlt'i
mill Iflfll lllsllas
'I 'Is EE E e'e S
g° £ £ £ £ S £ S £S SSS S££ SSS £S£ SB 3 £B S 2SS
^TItTTT TTTTTT TiTTTTnT TnT'TnTT
J==sE| .
PARADIGM OF THE TRANSITIVE 1 53
538. Peg^ilr'mA (from pSikGft) can be used to express at least,
itauch^hkdmiik pegntir'nia llthhrdkume at least once a year
yut timar'miing p!ngr!lgh6r'mtik niaunltfing all men, without exception
!m!n^ h5k k!ngg1i5kla^ keyilune utr^qchug'lune plngrln h5k td^tfi
^milklain iya'uthluku
this one, his younger brother, he crying, he wanting to go back, his elder
brother bringing him (the elder brother made the younger go although
he was crying and wanting to go home)
V V
toithluhbk imin^ tutg^rau'loi kSnntiqtdk, " Hweghl iy&niir'ma utr^qtliq-
chehkoi tokongr'let takotinka "
then that one, her grandson, said, "Although I go I will return again, (for)
I have slain the assassins ''
•
n&thloS.k^ k^ntautlngkruchei taugw^m plngkingghtir'ma kepus&guttik-
s^nrStti
I do not know if he has any kantaks, but even if he had he would not sell
any (his state of having kantaks)
539.
I — gheninlm'ne
thou — gneninirpne
he — ghena.nir*mene
he — gheninrine
' we both — ^gnen&nlmmug'ne
you both — gTieniniiqptug'ne
they both — gheninlr'mug'ne
they both — gnendnrag'ne
we — ghen&n!mtne
you — glien^ntiqpchne
they — ghen^nir'mtiqne
they — ghenS.nr&tne
Sing, <
Dual
Plur,
When this is added to a verb stem it conveys the idea of duration,
in the time of, whilst, etc.
tim^nHngghena.nim'ne during my being there
540. This form is of frequent occurrence, and seems to be derived
from some mode expressing coincidetue. While it is evidently a
localis possessive, and agrees with the form in nim& (78), neverthe-
less it seems to be alone, for none of the other cases have yet been
met with.
154 ESSE AT/A LS OF INiXUlT
541.
iy^qt6k, iyag*ghenlnrdne iyokuch^ne n&thluyiguti
he goes away ; during his going he becomes crazy
k&nrusk^ke milthlutnllol * sto&mtik iikkiltm6q*ghen&nim'n6
tell them I saw a dead beluga while I was coming here = during my
hithering
chltilglien&nlm*ne tiy&kon&che do not come during my absence
keyauloqghendnrinfi while he was crying
peghendnr&tne while they were doing
This form is easily distinguished from that in 75.
kdnratgnenAn!m'n£ during my talk = while talking
k&nrutimne in my saying (i.e., in the words)
todtlu hok m!nkghen&niir*mine mlngkuttlm enum thlechel ndthlQyilguti,
yulr'yikii nilt&kinrdtil ndtdkinral&meu tutghdrl'loii IminIL m^nusdqtdk
minus ugheniinr^ne ma'uqhuldq'lod Itrat6k
so then while he was sewing he forgot where he laid the needle ; he looked
for it and could not find it; not finding it, the grandchild grieved;
while he was grieving his grandmother enters
tinvdgS. tingv&g'nendnrlne emum k^nrut^ hw^k^ nuk^lthpeik uyok
chalraiyuyet
he gazed at her and while he was gazing she said, '* Well, young man, what
do you mean ? "
542. In the following section fifty-four groups of verbs are pre-
sented, together with their various adjutants, imperatives, ^tc.
NoTK. — In this list it will be noticed that some verbs are shown with nine forms
and some with less. This does not imply that these latter verbs lack the other forms.
The reader can readily supply them from the models given.
These verbs have been selected from a large collection made
for the purpose of finding some clue towards a classification. To
avoid enlarging this work too much, these few only are presented
here.
The last six verbs in &qtOft and HqtOft have been placed together in
order that the slight difference between them may be made more
apparent.
^ BUthlfitdA = / discover a dead animal.
TRANSITIVE VERBS
•55
543.
I. st&&.
2. fitJUl.
3. ttqtM.
peto&
perutoi
peyiiqtoa
(I lack)
(I have no more)
(I desire)
pelthkumi
peruskumii
peyukumi
petik&m^
perut^kiml
peyug^kimi
pel&m^
peruchimi
peyua.mi
pepilig'm^
periipiUg'ma
peyuqpilig'mi
pettifkgng
peruttifkSnS
peyuqptiknS
pel!ngghtir'm&
perutgntir'mi
peyugniir'mi
4. gw&&.
5. Su^.
6. au^.
tukugwol
k^zhgeugni
uetalighS.
(I am rich)
(I am in the kazhga)
(I am)
tukukumi
k^zhgekum^
uet^kum^
tukuglk&mi
k^zhgeiik^m^
uet^k^m^
tfikfign&ml
k^zhgelm^
uetema
Hlkfivil!g'in&
k&zhgevilig'mi
uetivil!g'm&
tukiifkgne
kazhgifkSng
uetafkSng
tukuglitir'ma
kazhgegTitii'ma
uetigntir'ma
tukuyakon&k
k^zhgeySkonik
uet^y^kon^k
tukalralgli^
k&zhgllralgh^
uetilraigba
7. kAqtfii.
8. mfi&.
9. r5u^.
^tr^chuk^qtoi
^komo^
nauthliinroughi
(I want to go down a bit)
(I sit)
(I am sicker)
^tr^chuk^kOm^
^komkum^
nauthltinroukum^
itrlchukilqk^in&
^kdmdk^ml
naiithltinro^k^m^
^tr^chok^m^
^kom^m^
nauthliinr5^mi
^tr^chuk^qpilig'm^
&k6mviHg'm&
nauthlfinrovilig'mi
&tr&chuk^qpiikn$
^komtifk^n^
nauthliinroufkSnS
&tr&chakdngghtir'm^
akomungg'htir'ma
nauthlanrdugntir'mi
&tr&chiMr'y^k5n^k
^komy&konrlk
nauthltinrouy&kon^k
10. ylrqUUl.
II. chlqt5&.
12. rautfii.
kauw^vlrqtoi
k!nchiqtoi
kinggnurautoa.
(I go up stream)
(I keep myself neat)
(I am late)
kauw^virtiskum^
kinchikumi
kinggnursfuskumi
kauw^virqtikimi
klnchfgakimi
kingghurautlkdml
kaiiw^virqch^ml
klnchiilm^
kinggnurauchlmH
ksiuw&virqtiifkenS
klnchlqpfikn^
kinggnursTuttifkSnS
kauwav!rqtingghtir'mi
kinch!nggn&r'ma
kinggli ursTu tinggntir *ma
kauw^virqch&kon^k
kinchig'yiikonak
kingghurauchikonlk
kauwivirqtftrillu
kinchlnrillu
kinggn uralitfi rillu
156
ESSEATIALS OF INNUIT
13. ig&&.
Akneiigdi
(I suffer)
&kned.kum^
^kneiigilkilmil
iknelnlm^
&kneaghtir'mii
akneafkdnC
&knedyd.k6niik
^knednrlllu
^kneillraiighii
16. tu^nl.
kututOghl
(I snore)
kututukum^
kutug^k^mil
kututudml
kututiinggniir'm&
kututiifk^ng
kututuy^koniik
kututtinrillu
kututi^lraiighi
kututule
19. ItoX.
atauchitoS
(I have one)
iitauchiskuml
Itauchit^klm^
iltauchichiiml
^ tauch itghtir 'mi
atauchitiifkgne
(Itauchitsdkonik
22. egfii.
thluegoi
(I am comfortable)
thluekuma,
thluegikimi
thlueghiiml
thluegiiQr'ma,
thluefkgnS
• 14. tOI.
ikvoi
(I run)
iikvokumd
ikv2Lklmi
ikvugnimi
ikvughtir'mii
ikvtifk^nc^
ikviiyikdn&k
ikv!nr!llu
ikvUralghi
17. tSqt&L
itdqtoi
(I sing, etc.)
it5rkumd
itdrikimi
itoimi
itugntir'mi
&t6qpukne
it5r'yikonik
ittinrillu
Ittilrailghii
ituyule
20. kuqt&L
itkuqtoii
(I dress)
dtkukuma
iltkuwiikiim&
itkuimii
itkughtir'ml
itkiiqptikne
itkug'yik5nilk
23. fnM.
tiregnoi
(I comprehend)
tir^n'gkumii
tiiregndkAmi
tireghdmA
tiirSngglitir'ma,
tdr^niifk^ni^
15. qtfii.
eqtoi
(I am snow blind)
egiskumd
eqtilklmi
eqchlmi
eqtinggliCir'mi
eqtiifkdn^
eqchikonik
eqtinrillu
eqtilrailghA
18. mSuf^.
Omeugni
(I am long away)
umekuml
umedkilmi
umeimd
umeghtir'mA
umlfken^
umeyikon&k
umlnrillu
umilraiighi
umetule
21. mSqtOI.
kulmoqtoi
( I go to the summit)
kulmortiskumil
kulmbqtikiiml
kulmdqchdmi
kulm5qttinggntir'mA
kulni5qttifkdn£
kulm5qchikondk
24. augnl.
pthlaughi
(I go astray)
pthlaukumil
pthlikimi
pthlemi
pthlaugntir'mi
f)thla"ufkgne
/
2$. gW&&.
— kaugwoi
(See Mode LXVIII)
— kaukum^
— kaugwikim^
— ka'ugh^m^
— kaligntir'm^
— kaufk^n^
— kauy^kon&k
— ^kaunrillu
28. raugii&.
^qch^ratighi
(I become worse)
iqchiirakumi
&qch&ra^kS.ml
iqch&rlnggntir'm&
^qch^rlfkSnS
&qch^ray&k5n^k
&qch^r!nrillu
31. alij^.
IcsaTignS,
(I am lazy)
icsaukOmi
V
ks^k^m^
tsaugndr'mi
tsimS,
icsifkSnS
Ics&y^oniik
ksinrillu
34. intdft.
&cheinto^
(I am under)
^cheinntlthkumi
^cheintik^m^
Scheinlim^
^che^nlightir'mi
^che&nttifk^nS
^che^nch^koniik
&cheint!nr!llu «
TRANSITIVE VERBS
26. rntfiS.
^laurtito^
(I appear)
ilauruskum^
^laiirutik^m^
^lauruch^m^
illaurutungghur'm&
ilaurutiifk^n^
illauruch^konik
^laiirudnrillu
29. skfii.
ueksko^
(I propose marriage)
uekslckum^
ueksk^k^m^
uekskghdmi
ueksk!nggntir'mi
ueksktifk^n^
ueksk^kon^k
ueksktnrillu
32. tkfii.
iimyu5rqtko^
(I reflect)
umyu6rqtkuma
umyu6rqlkiikam&
umyu6rqtukghur*mi
umyu6rqtukgnima
umyu6rqtktifkSn5
umyu5rqtuksdkoniik
umyu5rqtiikinr!llu
35- g54.
ikkwegol
(I play)
^kkwekum^
ikkweg^k^m^
^kkwegh^mS.
ikkwegntir'mi
ikkwefk^nS
^kkwey^kon^k
^kkwenrillu
157
27. itfii.
^ngge^to^
(I sail)
^nggelkum^
^ngge^qk^mi
inggeimi
angyanggnur mil
^ngy&qpukn^
ingyar'yakonak
aiigy^nrlllu
30. yM.
uevda,
(I circle around)
uefkumd
uevilk^ml
uevgh&mil
uevgnur'ma.
uevQfkfinS
uevyikondk
uevlnrillu
33. IrqtM.
igglrqtoa
(I arrive)
^ggirtiskumii
Iggirqt^kilmd
dggirqch^m^
&ggirqtti nggntir'mi
iggirqtufkSnS
^gglrqchdkon^
agglrqtinrillu
36. 154
netod
(I hear, I obey)
n!shkum&
net^kim^
nech^m^
netlnggnur'ma
netiifkSnS
nech^kon^k
netlnrillu
1 58
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
37. ^|!M.
38. Bum^.
39. pXqtfiX.
n&sktilgnugh&
ULngh&maugn&
&t6qp&qto&
(I have headache)
(I am seen)
(I sing loud)
n&sktilghukum&
tinghtim^kQm&
&tdqp^umi
n&sktilgh6&kilm&
t&n"ghumiik&m&
&t5qp&glkiLm&
nlsktilgho^m^
tiiighum^mi
&t6qpemil
n^skiilghuv!lig'm&
tin'ghum&ghtir^mi
^tdqp&qpilig'ml
naskttlgh ugh tir'mi
tinghum&fk^nS
at6qp&qptikn$
n^sktilgliufk^ng
tin'ghum&yikdn^
&t6qp^'yilkonik
n^skiilghuy&konilk
t&nghum&nilllu
atoqpingn'gttr'ma
nisktilgniilra^gliS,
t&nghum&lra^gn^
&t6qpinr!llu
40. gfi&.
41. tJUl.
42. gIrqtOI.
tiggoa
sev&qtol
6r'luvvilgIrqtoi
(I come)
(I emerge upon)
(I bring along my bow)
tigkuml
sevSkumi
6r*luvvilgirkuma,
tiggik&iiii
sevlqklml
6r'luvvilgirakami
t^gli&mil
seviLiii^
6r'luvvllgiama
t&gvilig*mii
sevAqpilig'mi
6r'luvvilgirqpilig*m&
taggtifkgng
sefiqpiikn^
6r*luvvilgirqptiknS
tigylkondk
sevangghiir'ma
6r'luw!lgingghiir'ra&
tagghtir'ma
sefir'yakonak
6r'luvvilgir'y&kon^
tigg!nr!llu
sef^nrlllu
6r'luw!lginrillQ
43. ouqtfi&.
44. itdft.
45. cheutfii.
kduqto^
plksito^
kinntiqcheutoH
(I am pigeon toed)
(I have not yet)
(I interpret)
kdugiskum^
p!ksilthkumiL
k^nntiqcheuskum^
kouqtakama
piksit^Lk^m^
kilnntiqcheut^k^mi
kduqch&ml
plksil^m^
kilnntiqcheuch^m^
kouqtlngghiir'm^
piksillnggniir'mil
kanntiqcheutlnggntir'mi
ko'uqttifk^nS
plksittifk^ng
k^nniiqcheutdfkSn^
kouqchdkon^k
p!ksich^konik
k^nntiqcheuchikdn^k
kouqlinrillu
plksittnrillu
k^nntiqcheutlnrHlu
46. \^Vk\Xk,
47. yfl^.
48. IttOI.
ekimrangkatoH
iyiyugnl
okittaa
(I have a sled)
(I go nicely)
(I burn myself)
ekMmr^ngkdkumi
iyiyukumi
oklshkOml
ek&mrangkakam&
lyiyudkimi
okitak^ma
ekXmrJlnkam^
iyiyuilma
okkhilm^
ek&mranglcpukne
iyiyiifkene
okittifkenS
ekamrinkgniir'ma
iyiyughtir'm^
okitlngghtir'mi
TRANSITIVE VERBS — IMPERSONAL VERBS
159
49. iqtOI.
kin^qto^
(I end up at)
kiinlkumi
kilnS.ghtir'm^
52. ilqtOI.
k&'niiqto^
(I speak)
k&nkum^
k&nr&k^mi
kinrim^
k&nghtir'm^
50. iqtdft.
k^nnS.q't5&
(I slumber)
k^nn^qkum^
k&nn3.qk&m^
klnn^rem^
klnn^hghtir'm^
53. ttqtM.
keniiqto^
(I am dry)
kenriiskumS.
kentiqUikim^
keniiqch&m^
kentiqtingghiir'ma
51. iqtd&.
k!ngnilqto&
(I conceive)
kinggh^kum^
kinggn^kimi
kinggnlmi
kinggnightir'mi
54. iiqtO&.
ktinniiqtdS.
(I am angry)
ktinrtiskumi
ktinntiqt^klm&
ktlnniiqch^mS.
ktlnntiqtinggniir'm^
The Impersonal Verbs
544. These verbs assume any
XXI, LXXVI, etc.
suitable mode, particularly Modes
it snows
it rains
// hails
it blows
k&nnlqtdk
siathlirtSk
kafchirt6k
inoklgrtok
k^nniqch^hkdk
slithl!rchghk5k
k&fchirchghk6k
inoklSrch^hkok
kinnilthhok
sl^thlilthhok
kMcWlthhok
^noklllthhok
klnnirkdn
smthllrk^n
kafch!rkan
inokl^rk^n
kiln nirk^ tin
sl&thlirkatin
kafch!rkatin
^nokl^rk^tiln
k^nnlqcha&n
sl^thliin
kafchian
^noklaiin
k&nnir'lune
smthlirlune
kiifchlr'lune
inoklirMune
snow
rain = bad weather
hail
wind
k^nntqch^k
sl^thliik (204)
kaftak
&n6kii
// shines
// thunders
// is warm
// is calm
ak^qchlrtok
kathlirqt6k
ningliatok
k6n$rqt6k
^k&qchlrch^hkok
kathllrqchShkbk
ninglichShkok
k6nSrqchghk6k
^kilqchllthhok
kilthlilthhok
ninglitnthhok
k6nilthh6k
^kilqchlrkln
kathllrkiin
ninglilthkan
k6n!rk^n
^Udlqchlrk^t^n
kithlirk&tan
nlnglilthk^tan
kOnirkatan
^k&qchiiin
kilthlian
nlnglilin
kSnldn
ik^qchlr'lune
kithlir'lune
ninglithlune
konfer'lune
sun
thunder it lacks cold (45 1 , Mode
VI) calm
ik^qt^
klthluk
ningia (cold)
konuk
i6o
ESSENTIALS OF lAAUIT
The Impersonal Verbs
545. Strictly speaking, there are no impersonal verbs in Innuit.
These all have the personal endings. Example : tattqtOk, // is night,
becomes personal, as :
Sing. -
I
thou
he
unuwignl
unuwltii
unuwi
' we both
Dual < you both
they both
unuwikuk
unuwit^
unuwik
Piur. *
we
you
.they
unuwikut
unuwiche
unuwi
meaning // nights me, it nights thee, it nights him, etc.
Fut, unuqchdhkighl, etc. Past unulthhdighi, etc.
and also through all the adjutants :
kumi = unukig^ni
kimi = unugikdghS.
pilig'ma = unuqpTlgHghS.
&ml = unoiglia
gntir'mi = uniingragni
mira = unumirak^ghi
546.
iydkllld uniiqpilgighJl
unuina tketnrat5k
if it nights me = if I am benighted
whenever it nights me
before it nights me
because it nights me
although it nights me
after it nights me
I '11 go before I am benighted
because he is benighted he does not come
V
unulthhodglii tketnimktin
I arrived just at night = it nigh ted me just at my coming
unOqchShkAghi tkepilig'm^i
it will be night before I come = it will night me
The Modes
547. The Innuit language does not make use of adverbs as a
distinct part of speech, to vary or qualify the sense of a verb. All
diversities in the manner of action and being are expressed by
incorporating certain characteristics with the verb.
MODES l6l
In a word, it may be said that the adverb is combined with the
verb. For example : iy&qtOS, / go, and iySnkiqtOft, / go again, or
iyS3r&etGfty I never go. Each of these new forms of iy&qtOft is a com-
plete verb in itself, having all the tenses, aspects, adjutant forms,
verbal nouns, etc., of the original.
These modal characteristics are inserted immediately after the
stem of the verb, generally with some slight euphonic change, as,
tinglfiwftkft, / ///■/ him {Jier or //). This verb always implies to hit
with t lie fist, being derived from tinglfikft, my fist.
If it should be desired to express that a severe blow was dealt,
then the characteristic pftk is to be inserted, as, tinglilqpSgftkft, / hit
him violently. Furthermore, if the blow was repeated, kiq is to be
added : tinglfikiqpftgftkft, / ///'/ him again violently.
Several characteristics may be added at once to the same verb
stem. Numerous examples are given of these combinations.
Innuit, moreover, does not admit of coupling a verb to an infini-
tive, as, / want to go. These combinations are expressed by
inserting particles, just as described above : iy&qtoft, I go; iyftg'3r&qtOft,
/ want to go.
The order, therefore, is :
1 The stem.
2 Characteristic of mode (one or more).
3 Characteristic of adjutant (if needed).
4 Characteristic of negation (if needed).
5 Characteristic of object and number.
6 Characteristic of tense.
7 Characteristic of person.
In the following series of modes the characteristics are given
in both the intransitive and transitive forms as well as in their
negatives.
Frequently examples are also given of the tenses and other parts
of the verb, which may assist the reader in translating the native
stories.
The study of the modes will render clearer the chapter on
suffixes. (See loi.)
This series is not to be considered complete, for the number of
Innuit modes and their combinations is apparently unlimited.
l62
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Index of Modes
548. This presents the characteristics of the various modes and
also the intransitive and transitive forms.
Intrans,
I
&nto&
2
Iqtoi
3
ch^kol
4
chakd^
5
ch^p&kiqto^
6
ch^qplqto^
7
ch^qtd^
8
ch^rdl^qta^
9
chiraqthlini'iaqtaa
lO
ch^radqto^
II
chir^qtoi
12
chir^wok^qtd^
13
ch^kgh^ttoS,
14
chlmdkdl
»5
chugh^
i6
chtig'n^qkol
17
chtig'nirutda.
18
chukiqtol
19
etoi
20
f^k^nSrqtoi
21
fSk.><qt6a
22
f^llrqchiiqtoi
23
faiirqtiikiqtoa
24
fai!rqt5&
25
filrSntoi
26
fkato^
27
gnilqtoi
28
ghoi
29
gnolqto^
30
ghoilr^qtdi
31
g6r'16qtoi
3«
gwoi
3J
!lthhougn&
34
!ngn&ks^ko&
35
36
it5&
Trans,
^qt^kii
ch^qplqtiikil
ch^qk^
ch&rll5qkl
ch^kgh^ttlkd
chim&k^k^
chug'n^hk^i
chtig'nirutikil
chuk^qkil
fk^r^ki
gh^qt^ki
fngn&ks^^Lki
Ir&k^
Mode,
CLXXX
LIII
CXIX
XC
CXXVIII
XXX
XXIX
cxxxv
CXXXIV
CXXXI
cxxx
CXXXII
LI
LXX
CXLVI
CXIII
CIX
CXVIII
VII
LXXXVI
CLVI
CI
CII
c
CLXXIX
XXXV
CLVIII
II
CX
CXI
CLVI I
LXVIII
LXXXV
XXVIII
CVII
VI
INDEX OF MODES
163
Intrans,
37
38
kikko5rqt6i
39
k^pikto^
40
41
kar&mittaa
42
k&riytiqtaa
43
k&t&to&
44
kaugwoi
45
kSrqtoii
46
kSrt5k
47
48
49
k!qchgkgh^tto&
50
klqchtiqt5&
51
k!qn^qkoi
52
klqniruto^
53
kiqto^
54
55
kllnir'liqto^
56
kKrqto^
57
knghd&
58
ko&
59
kdqtd^
60
ks!td&
61
62
kiinly&kd^
63
kwlrqto^
64
rnqto^
65
66
l&riyiko^
67
Igirqtol
68
Ighugh^
69
Ighdqtoi
70
llfk&toa
71
llqtol
72
Hr'ntir'mittaa
73
Ueingk^tiqta^
74
Ueughi
75
m&l^qtoi
76
m^r^Qghil
77
m^tOydkod
Trans.
k^k^kd
kikko&ki
k&piktiki
k&r&k& «
k^t^r^^
kaugw&k^
ket^Udl
knghut^i
klqchgkgn&ttaka
klqn^qk^ki
kiqtiki
kfqttikt&r^qk^
klin&rUlqki
kllrika
k^kl
k5qk^
ksitilk^
kumUki
ktinly^kiki
mqk^
l&r^ki
l&riy&klk^
Ignu&kl
lle&k&
m^l^rdk^
mdraiikil
Mode,
CLXII
LXXI
LXXX
CXXXVI
CXLIV
CLXV
XXI
LXVII
CLIX
LXXXI
CVI
CLV
LI I
XLI
XLII
XLIV
XLI
XLII I
XLIX
LXI
LXXXIX
CLIII
CXLIX
XVIII
LXVI
CVIII
XCVIII
CLIV
LX
XL
CIV
XCIII
XCIV
LVIII
XVII
cm
LIX
LV
LXIX
XLVI
CLXI
164
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Intrans.
78
maugha
79
meugnd
80
81
mUtoi
82
mdqto^
^l
nadrangghoi
84
nairilqtoi
85
n^chadpdkiiqtoil
86
ndchaiiqtdii
87
n&ksikoi
88
ninriqtoi
89
nilqkol
90
n^raksito^
91
nSraughl
92
n^renadrlqtoS.
93
nilrinklqkshitoi
94
nauqtdi
95
n€ughii
96
ngkfito^
97
ngnuqhrdgndl
98
ngnGqhrig'ytiqtoi
99
ngntiqhr^ngkito^
100
lOI
nirqtoS
102
nratssndqto^
103
6rqtOil
104
pdkdqto^
105
p^qtod
106
piktaa
107
piltiqtoa
108
raliqtoi
109
rek&nSrqtdi
1 10
roiliqtoi
III
roughs
112
riitna^riqt5&
1^3
rutoa
114
sdqto^
"5
s^to^
116
segekilqtoi
117
segev^thl^qto^
118
segeugn^
Trans,
melk^
meuw^kl
nailr&ka
nUchalrlkii
nlks^kilk^
nlnrdriikd
n&qk^kl
nilraksit&k^
n^ralk^
nlnnk!qkshitik&
naur^ki
nelk&
nille&k^
niraka
nratssn^qka
orqtilka
pikar^ki
pdgaka
piktaka
pilugwika
roaka
s^qkl
siir^riika
Mode.
LXXIII
CLII
CV
CLXXVI
XCVI
CXXIII
CXXXVIII
CXXIX
CXXXIII
XXVII
XXXIX
XXVI
CXXXIX
CXXXVII
CXXVI
CXL
XL VI I
CLI
I
III
V
IV
LVI
cxx
cxv
CXVI
CXXVII
LXXVI
LXXIX
XLV
LXXXIII
LXXXVII
CXLV
LXXXIV
XVI
IX
XXIX
XCI
CXLI
CXLIII
CXLIl
INDEX OF MODES
I6S
Intrans,
119
segew^k^qtoi
120
sedrqtdi
121
seuto^
122
shlqto^
123
shtqtdqto^
124
s!pik&qto&
125
126
skoi
127
skOmaugh^
128
129
130
stitoi
131
stkito^
132
stungghugh^
133
stiingk&td^
134
stungytiqtd^
135
t^qtoi
136
tir&qt5&
137
thatoi
138
thleneugh^
'39
thlin^qtoi
140
thltirqt6k
141
tifnggno^
142
tlngn^ko^
143
144
H5
tdi
146
t5g'n&rqtd&
147
t6qto^
148
t6qto&
149
tdrin^kk^t&qtd^
150
torin^qtoi
'51
tugn^
152
tuy^koS.
»53
uethllkkoi
»54
ug^ikoi
155
iim6t5i
156
unitoi
157
iinrftch^di
158
tinrapiik&td^
159
iiqtoi
Trans,
seor&k&
sk&ki
skoriki
stilleik^
th^rika
thlin^qk^
tlngn^ki
tingn^kkik^
tittaaka
tktifk^rlUqk^
t6g*narqt&ka
uethlikk^ki
uge^kilki
umet^kii
unitik^
tinraplk^rik^
ug^kii
Mode.
CXXXVIII
CXVII
XCV
CLXXVII
CLXXVIII
CLXIV
XXXIII
XXXVI
LXXIV
XXXIV
LVII
XII
XIV
XV
XII
XIII
XXIII
XXIV
CXLVIII
LXXII
XXXI
LXXXII
XXII
XIX
XLVIII
XXXVIII
XCVII
LIV
CL
CLXIII
CXXII
CXXI
CXLVII
CLX
LXXVIII
LXIII
LXV
XXXII
LXIV
XCII
LXII
i66
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Jntrans,
1 60
161
162
vathieqtod
163
vetod
164
vingkdtdd
165
virqtod
166
ylko^
167
ydqpadqto^
168
yaqtoa
169
y&raOktoi
170
yiraoyiiqtoi
^71
yitoqtod
172
yuetod
173
yugha
»74
yug'n^qko^
175
yukoi
176
zhe&qtod
Trans,
utiikii
titstafk&riik&
v&thUg^kd
vetdkii
yikiik^
yiqpa&r&k^
y&t6qki
yuetilkd
yug'ndqk&k^
yukilkd
zhe&r&kii
Mode.
LXXV
XXXVII
LXXVII
XI
X
XCIX
CXIX
L
XXIX
CXXIV
cxxv
XX
VIII
CXLVI
CXII
CXIV
XXV
Mode I
This mode denotes possession. Its characteristic is :
— iig^t5X
plngk&to^
chlLmuk pingkdchet
ch^muk pingkllthhuyet what
ch^muk ptngk^ch^kset
have you ?
had you ?
will you have ?
I have = possess
' ek^mrdngk^to^
I have a sled
' ek^mr^ngkilthhdugn^
I had a sled
ekdmrdngkich^kd^
I will have a sled
With a dual or plural object the following forms may be used :
Sinj;. mingkutingkatoi
Dual mingkutug'nuk pYngk&to^L
Plur, mlngkutntik pingkiltoil
I have a needle
I have two needles
I have needles
]l81r0g*ntik n^gkadngldLtOft may also be used to express / Jiazfe two
needles (581).
To express I have oncy I have two, etc., see 589.
MODE I 167
I have y in the sense of to keep, etc., see 846.
This mode employs for its negative Mode II. (See 451 also.)
The sound of i in tingkfttOft is sometimes like a very short u.
Some is expressed by the modalis case.
chtomuk kdnnYmchek^ngk^chet
have you something to tell t = what news have you ?
kinra&r&qt^ngk^td^ ip^ntin I have a word to say to you
549. This mode has also the force of the substantive verb.
nalithluha^t^ngk&tdk k& m^ne is there a sick person here ?
nauthlugwo^ I am sick, I am an invalid (Mode LXVIII)
nauthlulri^ one who is sick (166); k& (interrogative) (718)
icn^rukt^gk^tdk there is a snowdrift
killuput !ngr!ktS.'6gk^t5k there is a mountain back of us (i.e., our house)
killo^k ninvihdcho^qtdngk^t6k there is a small lake back of them
kittet kwlqt^ngk&t5k there is a river in front of them
These examples show also the use of the possessive locatives (390).
AgiyQn k^nniiqt5k t^ngkiqt^ngle God said. Let there be light
This is an example of the imperative (494).
550. Particular attention is drawn to combinations with other
modes, which convey distinct difference in the meaning.
kemuqtit^ngkKlthhuy&kdk m&ne
there was a dog here (but he is not here now)
kemiiqt!t&ngks^k6k m^ne
there was a dog here (and he is here yet)
&kkd t&m^ne yukt^ngkllthhuy^kYlra^ m^ne
in the old times there were inhabitants here (but there are
none now) (for ikkft t&m&n6 see 623)
yukt&ngks&kok m&ne
there was a man here (and he is here yet)
551. Combinations with the augmentative and diminutive :
kw!q char6van!ngkat6k the river has a current = there is a
current in the river
Oni kw!q char6vantiqpangkat6k this river has a strong current = great
1 68 ESSEATTIALS OF JNNUIT
taun& kwiq ch&rovinchodr^ngk&tdk that river has a slow current = little
kinIkch2Lp^ngk&t5k there is much snow
kinikch&chd&ringk&t5k there is little snow
552.
i€p& ^tkuchodringk^thlune ill^k hw^tii ULkt&lutuk, mine ch^la kokine
gnllthkithluku ikdqtat&lOne
the other one having a little coat with sleeves short as this, and its length
reaching to his middle here
Note i. — In this description the narrator touches his arm above the wrist when
sajring hwAtfi, to show how short the sleeves were, and at mAnS chill he shows how far
the coat reached.
yuk !m{ni kizhgemQk &ni!inS,ne, itkwel&ma, kimmCiksil&mathlu kwu-
tlingkithlunehdk ch!skii^'ne gnllthkithlukuk, 5k5qsiin^thlunethlu
kikkdm^ktin, ill6mit!ngkithlunethlu un^tme nugethtin
this man never goes outside of the kazhga, having no coat and no boots ;
he has breeches reaching to his knees, and he has an old cap just
covering the crown of his head, and worn-out mittens (i.e., his
fingers protrude)
Note 2. — This last expression is a peculiar idiom ; nfigA = the tip^ and ** hand ** is
expressed by fingers (749).
1st 2Lllemit!ngkitd& un&tmi nugethtin
2d illemitingkitutfi unitvtit nugethtin
J// illemitlngkitdk un^tme nugethtin
yiik ink&t5k plkin6 cheutiig'ne gnllthkithlukuk kinningkithlung
a man came out up there (i.e., on the bank) having a mouth reaching
to his ears
553. The various modifications concerning possession constitute
distinct modes.
I have muchy many^ is expressed by using plngkfttOft with the modalis
of ftmthltlq, ftmthlilniik, ftmthliirrilt.
^mthltir'mtik p!ngkit5^ I have much
^mthltir'ntik p!ngk^t5^ I have many
/ have a part (244).
ill&hrentik p!ngk^t5& I have a part
To have plenty^ none, etc. (See following modes.)
To have^ in sense of keepings etc., see 846.
MODES II, III, IV, AND V 1 69
Mode II
Signifies to tuzve^ to get, to acquire^ to become possessed of.
This differs from Mode I, which means to liave (i.e., to possess),
— ^6ft
kiyighd^ kiy&ngnlngghtir'in^
kiyingkum^ kly^ngkr^m^
kiy&gh^lkim^
mlngkutghod I get a needle ekimr&nggho^ I get a sled
itkugho^L I get a coat kiy^gho^ I get a canoe
554.
keto^ne h5k !mln& ^m^Lkkl^ k!y^ghdk, niit^n &gno^ro5kklutuk unine
kitmiiqne
then that one, his elder brother, got a kiyak, so they both would paddle
about down there in front of their home
KiyingnSrUne, when /le got a kiyak. This conveys the idea of
becoming old enough to be able to manage a kiyak. Among the
Eskimo this corresponds to the assumption of the * toga virilis '
among the Roman youth.
Mode III
Signifies to acquire a newy fresh object,
— if^iiqhr&^Oft
^ggho^rutttngntiqhr^gho^ I get a new paddle
kemtiqti&ngniiqhr^lid& I get a fresh dog
Mode IV
This is a compound and signifies possessing a ftew object,
iQ;niiq]ir&ii^tO&
kemiiqttin'gntiqhr&i{^k&to& I have a new dog
Mode V
A compound signifying the desire to obtain a new object,
il^iiq]ir&g'yttqtO&
^nggho2biittii%niiqhr^'ytiqto& I wish to get a new paddle
I/O
ESSENTIALS OF JNNUIT
Mode VI
Denotes not havings deprived of.
nuyitoil
ndchito^
siito^
illitoa
ntippitok
chatitdk
yuqtit6k
peitiqklto^
ek^mrito^
-ltd*
I am bald = I have no hair
I am bareheaded = I have no cap
I am crazy
I am alone
it is still
there is nothing
= I have no sense
= I have no others
= it has no sound
it is deserted
I have no boots
I have no sled
= it has no man
The various forms are easily recognized.
6k&mrltd^
ek^mrithlo^
ek^mrilthkum^
k&nntiqtok ilt^ne ilngyltnelukQ
k^nntlmchekito^ ^qch^k^lra^miik
ek^mril^m^
eklmritilthrailgn&
ekimraune
he says his father has no canoe
I have nothing to tell of interest
From the verbs in ^Oft, in this mode, come such derivatives as :
slillgliok
one with no sense = an idiot
Also signifies not having.
Mode VII
— et6ft
nechueto^
I do not hear
petaa
I have not = I lack
pelugwetdi
I have no boots
yuet6k
there is nobody
uzvetol
I have no sense
^shetok
it lacks goodness
= it is bad
555. HwS hwfttkftpik p6t0ft is a stronger expression than p6t0ft, / liave
nothing at all (726).
556. PetOk is commonly used to express he is not here^ when a
person calls another.
grr.ll5k t&ngketok, t^ngk!ngkthl&t5k ^kdqtCim ^k!nk^lthhr&ntik
the moon has no light ; it reflects light from the sun
MODES VII, VIII, AND IX 171
iy5kochet5k he lacks judgment
akulthketdk it is very frequent (i.e., has no intervals)
From verbs in ^Oft :
ch^qthuelgh5k a virtuous person = one without sin
It'neyuelgnok a childless person
From this mode are derived the forms given in 133.
Mode VIII
This closely resembles the preceding and signifies never.
— yuetsa, — yuStaka
miyuyuetoi I never go up iyiyuetoi I never go
^nyueto^ I never go out
Other forms : ftnyaithktimi, ftnyuSl&mi, ftny^nS.
Mode IX
Denotes no more, no longer any,
— -uto4
This mode is closely identified with the preceding one, as :
petoi I have not perutod I have no more
peluguerutod I have no more boots
ilkkelgnuerutod I have no more debt
iyutol I go no more, I am impeded
perdskum^ when I have no more
Ingr!rut5k there are no more mountains
yuerut6k there are no more people
chdtirut5k there is nothing more
tumirutok there is no more trail
peurutka mine which are no more (i.e., my deceased parents) (796)
naenlrututn you have no longer any voice (said when one is hoarse)
557. P6ratQtn k£, have yon no moref This is an idiom which
corresponds to the English question, liave you any vtoref
iepirute an idiomatic term for a deceased wife
peruthlo^ peruskum^
perutlhra&gnii perutiiksaune
1/2 ESSENTIALS OF INNUJT
Mode X
Signifies having a place to act in.
This is composed of yQc and iriUigk£t(ML
iydg'vlngk^to^ I have a place to go to
dn^g'vlngkiltod I have a shelter to go tc
5kizhvlngk&t5& I have a refuge to go to
MopE XI
The privative mode is most common, as :
iyigVetd^ I have no place to go to
^6mveto& I have no place to sit
thlevet^^ I have no place to put it
mlnkf6t5^ I have no place to sew in
t&ngfetikIL I have no place to look at it
Mode XII
— ttitSil, — atilngktO&
eklydrqstitoll I have no one to aid me
n^svitstitd^ I have no one to show me
kQnntikstito^ I have no one to love me
The negative, being the most used, is presented first. The posi-
tive examples are:
ekiy5rqsttingk^to3, I have a helper
k!lnniikstiingldlt5k he has one to love him
Mode XIII
A combination meaning t/ie desire to have some one,
— stilngTiiqtM
ekiy5rqsttingytiqt5& I wish to have an assistant
ekiydrqsttingyunrSto^ I do not want any helper
MODES XIV, XV, XVI, AND XVII 1/3
Mode XIV
This is a stronger expression than the preceding.
— 8tkitS&
ekiy5rqstkltd& I have absolutely no one to help me
Mode XV
— Btilng^anft, — stniinrttM
tghukumS, tghulod
tghd^m^
^giyul^rtdngghun^ I am a priest
n&rklstiinggnun^L I am a teacher
kSpQtstiingghunS, I am a trader
pllle^kstiingghun^ I am a worker
plll6llkstnulthh5ugni I was a worker
pIlle^Lkstting^un^ I am the maker of it
pHIe^stk^g'n^ I am the maker of both
V
pllleikstk^tn^ I am the maker of them
From this mode are derived the forms given in 144.
p!ll€^ste the maker
ch&lllstghuch3k& my being a workman
ek&mristghuchakii my being a sled maker
Mode XVI
Signifies ftearfy no more,
-rfit]iUr&qtO&
yu€rutn£ir^qt5k there are nearly no more people
ntiy!rutna^r^qt5k he has nearly no hair
ytierutnair^in when there are nearly no more people
ytierutna^r&ngr3,n although there are nearly no more people
Mode XVII
Signifies to aboundy have plenty, etc.
— Uqt(Ul, — UnrttM
peUqto^ I have plenty
p^Ulthhough^ I had plenty
p€lSrqch$hkd& I will have plenty
174 ESSENTIALS OF IXNUIT
peUr'lo^ pel!1radgh&
pele&md pele^
pellrkumd
yilne KngilHqtdk k& is it very mountainous there ?
ilwdne kwellqtdk the country over there abounds
in rivers
yuliqtok it is populous
kdnnuqtok {ssor!Hr*neluku kwfgum pignd
he says that there are plenty of seals at the mouth of the river
From this mode are derived the forms given in 130.
Mode XVIII
Denotes that the act is not yet petfomied,
— kshitSi, — kshitlkl
Very often the characteristic is not aspirated, as :
chilnrlksYtod ndskulgnu thlimntik I have not yet recovered from my
headache
netukksiiafcheu have you not heard it yet ?
As a general rule, the kahi is very strongly emphasized.
kuk^shitdk he is not yet half-way
iyikshitok ki has he not gone yet ?
tketukshitdk he has not come yet
stukshlt5k k^ has it not yet passed down ?
(i.e., a boat)
This verb is applied only to vessels, either steamers or sail-
boats.
K&nntlqsitOft, / do not talk yet. From this is derived a term
used to express baby; kftnntiqsilgiiOk, one ivho does not yet talk, as,
* infans.*
Awauksit&kS expresses / remember it (i.e., / have not yet forgotten
it) (780).
plkshitoi I have not yet
Examples of other forms :
plksilthkuml pYkslthl5^
piksiUm^ p!ksa~un$
MODES XIX AND XX 1 75
Mode XIX
Denotes an effort or attempt to act,
— Ingn&kkdi, — Ingn&klnritdl
— Ingn&kkSki, — IngniklnrSUkft
iy^ngn^kko^ I endeavor to go
k^thlitifngn&kkd^ « I try to speak
cheumiiqtingn^kkd& I try to go ahead
keput{ngn&kinr6t^& I do not try to buy it
pingnikk^k^ I attempt to do it
letifngn^kk^lki I strive to learn it
&shingn&kkd& I try to be good
p!ngn^kkilra& (from pingnftkkftk&, one 7vho
tries)
^hYngn&kk!lraet yut men who try to be good
There is another mode resembling this, which conveys the idea of
attempting the act in a delicate manner (Mode XCI).
tup^qtingnilkk&kil I try to wake him
tup^qshigilk^ I try gently to wake him
Other forms : — ingnftkklOft, — Ingn&ktLfkenS, — IngnAkkilm&, etc.
This mode combines with Mode XIV and forms a new one, as :
— ]dqtlngxi&kk0&, — Idqtlngn&kk&kft
lyingnakko^ I try to go
iy^ngklqtingn^ko^ I try again to go
Mode XX
Denotes setting out to put the act into execution,
— yat5qt6ft, — yitdqka
agiyuyitdqtoa I go to pray
t^ng*nSrs&qt6qka I go to see it
^kizhgerhau'luk nuHqklutuk uet&lraek. Atsfuchimehok ^fr^rnug'me uen^
sl6qt&rriy^t6qt6k
there were two old ptarmigan who were married. Then one day her
husband (i.e., the husband) went out to slide on the ice.
td&thlu ch^t!lletne Imin^ uenil em^qp!lle5y^qt5g'lune
so, then, one time her husband went out to hunt on the sea
\
176 ESSENTIALS OF INNUJT
Mode XXI
Shows the act is about to begin,
k€patlk&Ut5&. k^putk&tfttiiraM
kepufik&tlriki, keputkXUtiiraak&
This mode is frequently combined with others.
558. AtiXt& is the expression for by and by^ presently^ etc.
^ndkkla&n iy&kdtiltfir$t5& I will not start to go because of the wind
{rkukkletkdtilqto^ I am about to die
irkukkletk^tithlimtn^ (76) just as we are at the point of death
V
m&tii h5k tkek^tiqtuk nun&m&g*niin
when they both were just coming to their house
iy^k^t^lthhoungh^ iy^kdt&mil
iy^k&t^chghkd^ iy&k&t^k^md
iy^kilt^kum^ ly&k^tiir'ldd
Ninglirqk£t&yiig'nXk0k, it looks as if the cold weather is about to
moderate. This is an example of a combination of this mode with
CXII and XVII. The root is ningUl, cold weather.
Mode XXII
Signifies the start to do,
k6put{nggho& I start in to trade keputingr^td^ I do not start in to trade
keputingrilmi keputfngkumil
keputingnlmkiin keputfnggnlnggntir'm^
k^thl&tlngghoS, I start to speak
pinggno^ I start to do
ly^g'nKngglidd I have something to start with
Note. — iy&g'ntrqtiUl, lyftgnlrUcft also means to begin.
Mode XXIII
Denotes duration of the action..
Note. — This mode is generally used in the verbs of place.
m&ntd^ I am here m&nt&qto^ I continue to stay here
numitta^ I am in the house nOmttt^qto^ I continue in the house
n^llahdqto^ I am doubtful n&llah6qt^qto^ I remain undecided
559. 'J'y suis j'y reste' is exactly rendered by hwtotoft hwSntiqtOI.
MODES XXIV, XXV, AND XXVI 1 77
Mode XXIV
Signifies petforp^iing the action at inter-oals, with weakness^ etc.
-tItUrftrqtO&, — tilr&nr«t5&
— tittlrlr&kft, — tlr&nrlUUdi
kinniiqt^r&rqtdi I speak in a weak voice, mutter
iy^Lqt&r^qto^ I go slowly, weakly
iyikt^r&r&lra^ one who takes his time
Mode XXV
Denotes the completion^ ending up, finishing the act,
— zhSllqtM, — zhe&r&ki
chill^vizhzhe^qtdd I accomplish (my) work
m!ngkuvzhe&riki I finish my sewing
560. This may be expressed also by
mingkik^ pivzh6&r&k& my sewing, I finish doing it
Mode XXVI
Denotes a moral freedom or ability to perforin the act.
p€iUiqkO&, penftqkliiritdi
penftqk&k&i pCniqklnrltlkl
pen&qk!nr&t&ki I cannot do it (i.e., I am not allowed, it is illicit)
pen^qlckum^
when I am able (sometimes pSy^nftqkktim& is said, with same meaning,
or, when it is convenient for me)
iyag'niqkoa I can go (i.e., I am free to go)
Many combinations may be made.
plnkiqn^qldLk^ I am able to do it again
pen^qknksltfirataki I am not yet able to do it
561.
pen^qkdk it is possible
tokondqkdk it is deadly = fatal
tokonek^n third singular of kfim&
^ngl^n^qkdk it is pleasant = agreeable
^llingndqk6k it is fearful
n^thluniqkdk it is unknown ^
chdpm^qkdk it is difficult
These and many others in this mode are used impersonally as
adjectives.
178
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Mode XXVII
pCniksikiU, pCnikstiiritikA
pendksiiko^ I ought
pen^ks^kiiki I ought to do it
p6n^ks^Ickuin& p^nlks^ndmi
pendks^k^^m^ pendksdk&ngghtir'm&
netniksilk&kii I ought to hear (obey) him
tilringn&ks^k^ki I ought to understand it
iy^g'niks&kod I ought to go
ydvut iy^g'n^ks&kutfi you ought to go there
Note. — Frequently shlkU is said in place of sIk5A.
Mode XXVIII
Signifies to endeavor to perform the action,
plngiiik8lkO&, plngn&ksinritM
plngnAksIkUdl, plngniksinritikA
/ try to do
netlngn^ksdk^k^
tilreghlngn^ksilk^kii
^ngingn^ks^koS,
I endeavor to obey him
I try to understand it
I attempt to get out
Mode XXIX
kepucliXqtO&,
kepuchXqki,
kepuch<hhougnd
kepuch<hho^kl
kepuch^qche^
kepuchillthhuyed
kepuchlq'loi
kepuch^lradgnd
nSthliinrilthkuraku tiyiqtdi
n^thlundlthkumku tlnrach^qtod
kepuchukumku kepuch^qk^
iyag'yiqtod ekararinglckuma
ekiyuryiqkd taugw^m utlkiyikigha
kithlun pe^qsntik
pelqto^
kepucliXiiritO&
kepuchinritiki
Neg.
kepuch^lthhiinrStd^
kepuch^lthhonrat^kS,
kepuchdnr^che^
kepuch^Ithhiinr^ched
kepuchilq'nelo^
if I had known it I would have come
if I had known it I would not have come
if I wanted to buy it I would buy it
I would go if I had a sled
I would have helped him, but he did
not wait for me
how would we both act ?
I would do
MODES XXIX, XXX, AND XXXI 1/9
nsfuthluthlenekumil numecMqtod
if I should get sick I would stay in the house
n&thld&ki kemiiqtlngkruche^ taugwim pingkingghtir'ina kepusilgutlik-
s^nrStti
I do not know whether he has dogs, but even if he has he would not sell them
kithlun mumlqch&qcheu Qn2L how would you translate this ?
A second group in this mode takes y before the characteristic.
— y&qtO&, — y&iir«tO&
iyig'yiqtoi I would go tly^qto^ I would come
kithlun iya,g*y2.qchet ? how would you go ?
A third group takes 8.
— aHqtM, — 8lnr«tdl
— slqki, — sinratiki
kithlun k&nrutiiksiqcheu ? how would you tell it ?
Mode XXX
Signifies that without doubt or question the act will occur, A
variation of the preceding mode.
— chiqplqt5&, — cliXqpIqtik&
Iqch^qpKqto^ I would certainly fall
kepuchiqpiqt^ki I would surely buy it
taguydqpiqt&k^ I would surely take it
iy6mch^qp!qt^ki I would surely break it
Mode XXXI
p€rthlinSqt5&, pirthliiiinrMd&
pirthliniqki, pirthlinSnraUUdI
ilnokl^rthlin^tdk it always blows = continually
kauw^qthlin&to^ I always sleep
p^rthlinatoa, — thliniki I do always
Note i. — This mode combines with many others.
Ikkitstdthlin^qkd I always keep it clean
ikldr&kX, / clean it This in Mode IX is ikkitst&kft, I cause it to
be clean.
Note 2. — This mode gives the group of nouns in thlinfik. (See 197.)
nunaki ka^kklinSraligwdk ray country, it is continual summer
nalithluthlin^qto^ I am always sick
l8o ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Mode XXXII
Declares the actor unable to perfonn the act,
— finnitOft, — anniOki
This generally implies physical inability. For example, if one
is told to do something which he considers beyond his strength to
accomplish, he will answer as follows :
m!kk!li!gnugndin^ p^Onit^ki I cannot do it because I am small
peunitdi I am unable
peunit^Lki I cannot do it
peunilthkum^ if I could not
MTkfikima ikfXkkOyQiiItfik, he is too small to rtm {because of his
smallness he is unable to run).
Mode XXXIII
Signifies to command the act,
-4kUc&. -^Idnritlki
keputsk^kH I tell him to buy it lyilskeke tell them to go
pisk&ki I tell him to do it iydskik^ I tell him to go
tisk&k^ I tell him to come akf&tsk&ki I tell him to bring it
iy&skeu tell him to go away uet^shk6u tell him to stay
kinruzhghwu y&ne ut&k^kld^ tell him to wait for me over there
562. Many verbs in this mode may be translated simply as
/ want it so ; as, minskSkft, / want it here.
k^trusk&k^ I want it white tunuskiikil I want it black
ingghlsk&k^ I want it big mikkiskik^ I want it small
Mode XXXIV
Expresses the authority to enforce the performance of the act,
— stlkH, — stnritlki
keputst^k^ I make him buy it ghKU^qst^kd I cause him to laugh
pltst&k^ I make him do it iy^qst^ki I make him go
nlnglKm utr^qst^kut the cold made us return
^ngle^n thlem5qtor^ki emum &ten nuHqtuskluku
having grown up, his father used to urge him to marry
MODES XXXV AND XXXVI l8l
Mode
XXXV
— fkitU,
— fk&nrMU
— fkirUdl,
fk&nrat&k&
plfk^r^k^
I make him do it
iy&fkilrak^
I make him go
n^ngttifk^r^k^
I make him suffer (i.e., endure) it
•
mples of other forms in this mode :
pifk&kumi
pits^ki^fkikum^
pifk&m^
pitsikiifk&k&ma
pifkSne
pitsakiifkSne
tuktifk&raka
I enrich him
chSg'nWkaraka
I strengthen him
nauthltifk^r&ki
I make him ill
tirlniifklLta^
I inform, explain (i.e., make to
understand)
Combinations are frequent.
krlst5k thle^kimthwu kimtntin ch^muk umyu&tktifk^r^l^qtikut
when we make the sign of the cross, what does it always remind us of t
V
umyuS.tktifk^r^l^r^k^ I always make him remember
V
umyu^tkiifk^r^l^qt&gni it always reminds me
Mode XXXVI
This mode has about the same meaning as the preceding one,
but it is stronger.
— skM, — 8k5r&k&
iy^kor&ki I force him to go ly^skiinrat^k^ I do not force him to go
keputskor^k^ I force him to buy it
umyu&kskdr^k^ I make him remember it
ly^skokumku when I force him to go
The transitive is more difficult to render, as naklTkBkWJ signifies
/ demattd love or / must be loved^ I want to be loved,
Agiy&n hwXnlr&tniln nikUkskPk, God demands our love^ God wants to
be loved by us.
The passive is nUdikskQmaugiiX (Mode LXXIII).
1 82 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Mode XXXVII
Signifies to oblige some one to perform the act.
-atttttfUrikft
Mode XXXVIII
Signifies to always oblige one to act,
— &ctt£kii«Uqki
Mode XXXIX
Denotes a cessation of the act for a time,
— nlnrlqtSlit — nlnririki
k^putn&nilqto^ I cease trading for a while
n&kkllkn^nrarigh^ he loves me no longer .
Note. — Generally Imthltr'mftk, etc^ is used with this mode.
^mthlSr'miik nQn&tninriqtdi
I cease (desist) visiting the village so much
Mode XL
Signifies that the effort was in vain^ proved abortive^ unsuccessful^
etc., although attempted often,
— UriylkU, — UriyUcUcft
iy^'l^riy&kd^ I frequently go in vain
keputl&riy^kiki I often am unsuccessful in trade
tiingriliriyikllraigha I frequently practise sorcery ineffectually
Mode XLI
Denotes a repetition of the act,
— Uqt&&, — Idqtiir^tU
— Uqtikft, — ]dqtftrit&k&
keput&ki I buy it k6putiikiqt&k^ I buy it again
pinkiqt&ki I do it again
p!nk!qthlo^ p!nk!giskum&
plnklqch^m^ pinkigsghwti
MODES XLI, XLII, XLIJI, XLIV, AND XLV 1 83
k&nniiqt5k tketiikiqnitnelune up'n&qklLk&n taugw^m
he says that he will not come again till spring = only when it is spring (604)
iy^nkiglskumi when I go again
Again is also expressed by ftm with the simple verb.
Several examples of this may be seen in the stories (799).
This mode combines with several others.
iyinkiqchiiqtd& I want to go again
pinkiqchunrSt^ki I do not want to do it again
Mode XLII
Denotes ability to repeat the act,
— klqnlqkM, — klqnlqklnritU
— klqnlqkUci, — klqiilqklnrat&k&
This is a compound of Modes XLI and XXVI.
plnkiqn&qkUki I am able to do it again
Mode XLIII
— klqtttktirSqki
p!nklqttikt^r&ghwu do it over and over
Mode XLIV
Signifies never again,
— klqniratM
iy^nkiqnirutd^ I never go again
Mode XLV
Signifies performing the act for the first time,
— pDiiqtU, — pDugwUdi
ly&piltiqto^ I go for the first time
^nlqplliiqtoi I retire for the first time
m^plluqtd^ I arise for the first time
kepupllugw&ldl I buy it for the first time
kiinrupllugw^Udi I say it for the first time
tisktiffiliigw^^ I call him for the first time
Examples of the various forms of this mode :
kepupiltig'ld^ kepupiluthl^rkiki
kepupiltiqchei kepupiluntik
1 84 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
563. The form in pmg'ml closely resembles this (526); however,
the difference will be seen by comparing :
kepupilig*md before I buy
kepupiluqpilig'mil before I buy for the first time
Imin^ kilzhge t&ngSrqpillg'm^u before he sees that kazhga
imin^ k^zhge tilngSrqpiliig'liiku he seeing that kazhga for the first time
iyiqpiliiqpiHg'mi before I go for the first time
Mode XLVI
«
Expresses after,
— mliifilfiil, — mlrilkft
As this is one of the most frequently used, and as it enters into
so many combinations of the verb, various examples of it are g^ven.
kepuchemlLraugh^ after I trade kepuchem^raiki after I buy it
kepuchem^rilo^ kepuchem^rakum^
k^puchem^ra^mi kepuch&n&rilthki
iy^g'yS.kon^k lya'um&rakumi taugwS.m
do not go until after I have gone = go not only when after I go
V
tkechShkok iy&m^rakdmug'niik he will come after we both go
tinghum^rachimi after my seeing
t&nghum^rachilthm& after my having seen
Mode XLVII
This expresses being in constant use, habitual.
— ^naliqtSli, — ^naniXkl
t^m^tn AgiyutCUn n^kkliknaur^ighi may God love me
6mum maliqhi^ldg'lo&n kinrutnauri yugeilthhiiniluti&ng
his old grandmother was accustomed to relate that many people lived
there
tin^nehok kitmuqne ikkwenaiiqtiik, y&kf&ntin ly^saun&tOk
so down there in front (of their abode) they both used to play, without
ever going far away
keputnauqtdi I am in the habit of trading
k6putnauqche&
k6putnilr&JLgh&
MODES XLVIII, XLIX, Z, AND LI 185
Mode XLVIII
Signifies to Itave the habit of perfomting the act, to be accustomed to,
f keputlttoika I buy it
* \ kinrutlttoika. I say it
Past kSurutlttuySLklLki I used to tell him
Mode XLIX
This is very similar to the preceding.
— klinni'UqtU, — klinnlL'Ulqki
nikkllkklinn^'l&qk^ I love him constantly
l€tnauqthlinn&'liqtd& I study continually
Mode L
Signifies being on the point of acting,
— ySqpaAqtM. — ySqpa&nr^tU
— y&qpallrUdU — ^y&qpaAiirat&k&
iy^'y^qpailh^r'lo^ t^keugn^
I was about to go and changed my mind
tSguy^qpalh^rluku tiiket^^
I was just about to take it and drew back
keputk^tly^qkluku t^etilkii
I was starting to trade and gave it up
Note. — TftkSfl^iii means / change my mind; chSn tAkkiySt, why do you change your
mind?
^qt5r'y^qpailr^k^ I almost touch it
taguy^qpa^nrat&k^ I did not quite grab it
iyig'yiq'pailqtoi I am almost going
Mode LI
This expresses that the act may in all likelifiood be perfortnedf but
it will be at some indefinite time,
kepuch^^ttU, kSp&ch^^tXk&
p!ll6ch$qgh^t^kil probably I will make it
iyaqchgqghittoi I reckon that I will go
Note. — This is a futare, defective mode.
1 86 ESSE ATI A LS OF INNUIT
Mode LI I
This is a combination of the preceding and Mode XLI.
— Uqcliftq^ttM
iy^nklqchSqgh^tto^ perhaps I will go again
pillingklqch^gn^tik^ maybe I will make it again
Mode LIII
Signifies to act promptly,
— &qtU, -nftqt&rltM
-^qUkft, — ftqthrit&k&
iy^^qto^ I go immediately
kepuchlmtiin kemiiqt^ iy^^qt5k the dog as soon as bought went
off at once
564. When a block of wood, etc., splits at a blow of the axe, they
say XvgSqtOk, it halves at oftce.
Mode LIV
Signifies performing the act with energy and speed,
— tOg'narqtU, — t0g'iiiirqt&k&
iy^qt5g'n^rqto^ I go fast
pet5g'n^rqt&k^ I do it rapidly
kemtiqt5g'n^rqt5k he is a good strong puller
(i.e., dog)
Mode LV
Signifies to make.
-
— USu^, — lleXkX
pilleugha
pHle^m^
pilleika
plllilthhough^
plllea
ptlllchghkaa
pillekum^
pllle
The object made is
combined with this ending.
ek&mr^lleugh^
I make a sled
ek^mdlthhougn^
I made a sled
ek&mdch^hko^
I '11 make a sled
MODES LV, LVI, AND LVII 1 8/
t&nglull6ugn^ I make snowshoes
nllleugh^ I make a house
chUll^ugn^ I make something
This mode combines with many others.
pllleyug^&kd^ I would like to make
p!innklqt5& I make again
p!lletugn& I know how to do
plUelo&qto^ I make it well
565. There are many other ways of expressing to make^ to do^ etc.
PeagiiX (686) is frequently used, as :
ek&mr^qpeughi I make a large sled
gklLmraughlL I make a sled
n^nne t^kk!lth5i where was it made t
pniechghkutii ki lydkeniik will you make one like it ?
ipit k^ pllle&k&n ' did you make it ?
pllle^k^nrat5k k6ni iyokeniik nobody can make one like it
566. The place where work is done is expressed by the suffix vik
in composition with the characteristic of this mode. (See 117.)
p!lle6r'vik work place (term for workshop, etc.)
Mode LVI
The following are a few examples of the many variations of the
mode of making.
— nnie&kft
S.kngr'nill€^ki I make something to prevent hurt
hence ikn^r'nillet^k a thimble
Another variation is
kltschilthkuchar^k^ I make a preventer from drowning
hence kltschilthktin a life preserver
Mode LVII
— stiUSUci, — stninrat&ki
^knSrqstille^ldl I make something to hurt him
tokdstille^ldl I make something to kill him
1 88 ESSENTIALS OF IXNUJT
Mode LVIII
Signifies having an object made for oneself.
— llfUtSi
ekiLmrilifkitoi I am having a sled made
nillifk^to^ I am hav-ing a house built
tILnglulifkdtoS. I am ha\4ng snowshoes made
^tkulifkitod I am having a coat made
Past ekimr^llfkilthhoughi
Ftit, ek^mr^lifkdch^kko^
EWmrJlHflriirhMriimlrfn, / 7/ have a sled made for you. Combined
with Mode LXIII, miiiiTiHfW3rflgC<lriHL, / want to have a sled made.
Mode LIX
Signifies to start to have an object made, a combination with Mode
XXI.
— UangkftUqtM
ek^mr^lle^ngkit^qtoi I am on the point of having a sled made
Mode LX
Signifies habitual action, and generally refers to some instrument.
— Urikft
peutukllr&k^ I used to do with it
i^n^ the house I used to live in
uetlvikl&r^ki \ yiik I used to live with the man
Hn I used to live with him
Mode LXI
— kllrqtM, — klirftU
pe^kklirqto^ pe&kkllrr^k^ I do like
kepuch^klirqtol, kepuchlklirr^ki I buy like
kepuch^klinratiLki I do not buy like (example of negative)
This mode governs the aequalis case, as :
ch^Ueydkklirr^i ^Ststtin I work it just as you = like you
MODE LXH 189
Mode LXII
Denoting a desire to act,
— tiqtM, — QnratM
~ug&k&, — unratiUcX
This is one of the important modes, and it combines with several
others ; ilq is the characteristic.
peyiiqtoi I want m6qshiiqto^ I want water
lyig'ytiqtoi I want to go &pchiig'yakanik!n I want to ask you
m^nchiiqto^ I want to be here m&Uqchuw&mkin I want to go with you
iy^*yunral!ngram^ I although unwilling to go
talim hok tugneghun pey(inrilghiir'ma ikf&kortok
towards that (he), although unwilling, he runs = nolens volens
unly^ldlldl ^nthliir'chiigyug'luttik
I call him, wanting him to go with me to get roots
kissuchtig'y^ukuk we two wish to marry
hw^ne utikiyunratd^ I do not want to wait here
uetilthrine uetlytiqto^ I want to be where he is
n^vrachunrat^mkln I do not want to lend you
In combination with Mode CLII :
m6qstiq'meyughi I also want to drink
In combination with Mode XLI :
k^putiiktqchiiqtd^ I want to buy again
In combination with Mode XIII :
ekiy6rqstungyiiqtoa I want to have a helper
In combination with Mode XCII:
chen kdnntiqyunrapS.k^chet why are you not inclined to talk ?
The various expressions of location frequently assume this mode :
amdnchtiqtoi I want to be over there
ch^m&nchdqtoi I wish to be down there
kannfiqtok m^nchunrStnelune he says he does not want to remain here
^psghwu ly^'yukin ask him if he wants to go
igO ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
kAnn&qtdk kikifchautryOg'nalune itine p^tikklQkQ
he says he wants some liniment for his father
niklflcskOmaligh^ I want to be loved by him
p€3rukumi when I want
p6yuim^ for I want
kn&rfhn p&ttfiy!iqcli£hk& the drift will cover it = will want to cover it
NoTK. — Most verbs in this mode have o in the foarth adjutant forms (531).
kepuch(iqt6& kepucho&m^
Mode LXIII
Signifies the wish to do or the wish to /tave. It expresses will
under a condition or supposition.
ly^'yuge^koi I would like to go
peyOge&ko^ I would like
kepuchtige^k^kii I would like to buy it
/ would like to go may also be expressed by iyig'nIlOft pCy fl gMriHL
HwSgnl pSyfig*mttkI is an emphatic way of expressing / would like
it myself.
k&nntiqt6k mlLllIqchuge^kneluti^
he says that he would like to accompany you
The following is generally used as the negative for this mode.
Mode LXIV
— unrichlkM, — ftnridULk&ki
Mode LXV
Signifies fiot inclined to act.
— umet&ft, — umStXki
iy^ig'yumetoa I do not care to go
kepuchumet^k^ I do not care about buying it
klinr^umetoi I am not inclined to talk
This mode affords a more gentle way of saying no.
MODES LXVI AND LXVII 191
Mode LXVJ
Signifies the wish or desire that the act be fetfomied,
— kumiki
ptskiimik^ I want him to do it
p!sktim&kumku if I want him to do it
k&truskum^k^ I want it white
t6k6skumaka I want him to die
nullqtuskum^iki I desire him to marry
plskumalthho^iki I wanted him to do it
plskum&k^mku when 1 want him to do it
Mode LXVII
— kaiigwM, — kaiinritM
— kaugw&k&, — kaiinratikft
ly^kaunr^to^ I cannot go
tikfiikk^qkaunrat^ki I cannot believe it
ughuvaqkaunratdk he cannot live
iyS.g^qkaugw6^ I am to go
kemugh^r^kaugwkk^ I can injure him
itr^r^qkaulthhougn^ I had to go down
itr^r^qkauchShko^ I will have to go down
hw&nehwd taugw^im hwitft pe^raugw6k
here ! it must be done this way only
ke^ kltst^qkauw^ke ^ggy^t who can count the stars ?
un^ ch^kaunrat5k this cannot do for anything (i.e., is of no use)
Agiyut&m kdyQrqtlhrak yum aftakaunrgtik
whom God hath joined man cannot put asunder
ukut n^thlunrataqk^wit ingthlumilraet tilm^r'mtlng
all who are baptized must know these things
ttingrS.gniyem k& Ikklutmiin kemughar^kauw^kut
can the devil injure us ?
aieghaqkaunratakut ttingragniyag'muk
we must not be afraid of the devil
tket^qkalikune hw^td^ tkech^qtok
he would be here now if he had started
192
ESSENTIALS OF lAAUIT
k^nrut&qkauw&qpugn^ k& chen mllthklLr^dmtii, &t^m th<hkam tutlau-
chel nunlLmiin, chenme ug'ma&nQn miydksitll^qtd
can you tell me why whenever we throw a stone up in the air it falls back
to the ground ? why does it not keep right on up ?
Mode LXVIII
— gwM r — giUrikk
Sifig, < — gwutii Dual \ — gut&k
[ — gw5k [ — gwiik
yugwoi I am a man Neg,
yuch^hkoA
yulthhdugh^
yulra^gh^
Plur,
— gukut
— gucM
— gwnt
yunr^toi
yuloi
yukumi
yughim^
I am not a man
Note. — It will be noticed that in the tenses and various parts gw5X disappears, and
it is the same in the various modes which these verbs assume, as, tfikflgwoA = tukwetoft
(Mode VII), takflqchagS&kU (Mode LXIII), tflkflfULriLkft (Mode CXXXVI).
kem^ yugwoi
peugwoi
tukugwoS.
ituleyugwoi
ndza'uhulugwoS.
n^skwaugwo^
^Udc^lththlaugwo^
mikkilligh ug woi
yukkSrtiraugwo^
naiuthlugwd^
t^milthkugw6k
t&ngalihulugwo^
thlerdrauqhulugwoi
thlSriraugwoi
chirrila'ugwoi
mlkkiUlgho^raligwoi
y uch oiraligwo^L
yfiqpsfugwoi
!qpa~ugw6i
iqpaydgaugA^'od
kalkklinira~ugw5k
tikshtikklindraugh^n m^ne
nut^raligwdk
I am alone
I am
I am rich
I am a singer
I am a girl
I am a young girl
I am old
I am a child
I am a good man (200)
I am sick
it is complete = all
I am a boy
I am an orphan boy
I am poor
I am feeble
I am a baby
I am a dwarf (230)
I am a giant (223)
I am a big-eyed (monster)
I am a large-eyed little fellow
it is always summer
because it is always winter here
it is fresh (said of fish or game)
MODES LXIX, LXX, LXXI, AND LXXII 1 93
Mode LXIX
Signifies being always long engaged at it; this differs very little
from Mode LXX.
tkechemil^qto^ tkechemil^kumi
V V
tkechem^lo^ tkechem^lim^
tkechemil^qchet tkechem^l^kend
uetim^lS.qtd& I always stay long
kepuchemdl^r^k^ I am always long at buying it
piikchem^l^qtd^ I am always long at moving
kaliw^m^ULqto^ I always sleep long
Mode LXX
Signifies long in performing the act,
— chlmftkM, — chImXiirit&&
— chlmIMM, — €hIiiiixiratXk&
kepuchim^l5^ kepuchlm^kum^
kepuchlm^lr^nghi kepuchlmemi
Mode LXXI
Signifies performing the act little by little (620).
— UkkdOrqtM, — kXkkWdl
ch^ngldLkkd5rqtd^ I gradually get = I get little by little
Mode LXXII
This mode expresses that the act is performed in a manner
unnoticed or unknown. It conveys the idea of a judgment or a
realization of the occurrence of any event.
— ^thlenSu^hi
tkethleneut
they have come (by this the speaker shows that the arrival took place
without his knowing it just at the time)
kcho^thl€n6iigh&
I am frozen (here the speaker implies that he is only just now aware
of it, as, I find out I am frozen)
194
ESSENTIALS OF llTNUIT
^shethlenedk it is bad (i.e., after it has been seen and examined, etc.)
p^l^qthleneutn you are sunburned (i.e., I have just observed it)
&mch6 k!nn!r*nauqtukut dthl&nruk kithleuk
come ahead, let us cook ; the strangers (two) must be hungry
The passive :
/ am lavid
' n^kllkkamaughi
Sing, \ n^klikkumautii
n^kklikkumauk
n&kkHkkumaukuk
Dual \ n^kkllkkumauttik
n&kkllkkumaukiik
ndkklikkumaukut
Piur, \ n&kkltkkumauche
n^ikkllkkumaut
Mode LXXIII
I
A
Past n&kkllkkum^lthhaagh^
Fiit. n^kkHkkumich^kko^
tiinghwumaugn^
kllhuch^umaugn^
^^^.
/ am not loved
n^]TkkumS.nr£t6^
nikllkkum^nratutii
n^kl!kkum^nrat5k
n^klikkQm&nr^tukuk
n^likkuminratuttik
n^kllkkum^nrattik
n^kllkkum^nr^tukut
n&klikkum^nratuche
n^kllkkum^nratut
r n^klikkum<hhiinrllto^
I n^kkllkkum^ngghito^
I am seen
I am tied
567. It must be remembered that many expressions are rendered
in Innuit by the active which in English would require the use of the
passive, and vice versa. The passive uses all the adjutants, as follows :
k^nruchem&railm^
kinruchem^viUg'mi
kS.nruchem^rS,ch!mttin
k^nruchem^rakum^
k^nruchem^yunral^m^
k^nruchemem^
k^n r uchem^y u^m^
IdLnruchemifk^nS
n^kllkkum^n^l 5S.
n^Lkklikkum&kum^
nikkllkkum^kim^
tinghumUloS
after being told
before being told
as soon as told
when told
unwilling to be told
because I am told
because I want to be told
untold = without being told
n^kklikkumem^
niikklikkum^fkSng
n^kklikkumal] willg'm^
t^nghum£glitir*m^
MODES LXXJII, LXXIV, LXXV, AND LXXVl
195
568. The following six words all mean // is broken.
iemumauk from
iemt^ka
generally implies intention, etc
nivvroumauk "
n^vvror^ki
breaking (in general)
chlkumumauk *'
chiktimt^k^
breaking up a thing entirely
nullugumauk "
ntilg&k^
for tools nicked, etc.
iistch^malik *'
iist&k^
cracked, split, etc.
ch^kchlmmalik '*
ch^ktik^
a little broken off, chipped
Mode LXXIV
Signifies wishing to be,
n^klikskumaugh^
n^klikskum&chShkdi
n^ikskum<hh oughS.
Agiyum n^ikskumauk hw^nkutnim
I want to be loved
nikllkskum^l5&
n^klikskum&kum^
God wishes to be loved by us
Mode LXXV
lyautiik^
— uUkft
I take it away
lyautlho^lki
iyausktimkQ
iyauch^mku
iyaushwu
iyauch^hk^k^
iyalit^^mku
iyalithluku
iyafucheu
^trautlLk^ I take it down ^nnQt^i I take it out (of a house)
miyut^k^ I take it up
Itrutaki I take it in
tkefitaka I bring it
^nllrautiikii I take it down stream (sled or boat)
iyautste
iyautstk^thliik
iyautstldlk
the taker away of it
he who took it away - (144)
he who will take it away
iyautst^kii
lyalitstiifk^rlLk^
I get him to take it away (with Mode XXXIV)
I force him to take it away (with Mode XXXVII)
Mode LXXVI
Signifies much force used in the action.
The augmentative mode :
— pftqtM, — pftg&ki
^llenthl^qt5& I am greatly alarmed kdnni!iqplqt5k it snows hard
kiy£qp^qt5k he calls very loud tlngltiqp^g^k^ I hit him violently
at6rpangkuma when I sing loud kozhSrqpSqtdk he coughs very hard
196 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Mode LXXVII
Signifies an overdoing^ an excess,
chinndvithidg^k^ I cut it too much
emevdthliigcln you fill it too full
k^chuv^thi^qtol I am disappointed
plnvSvvathligaka I do it too much
chikkdv^thl^^k^ I give him abundantly
m^ne nunlm kien&ne k&chuv&thldgillilqtokot
here on earth we are often disappointed
Mode LXXVIII
Signifies a misadventure or failure,
— flSthllkkU — ðlIkliirMdft
— ttgthHkkiJM, — uSthlUdnr&tikft
peyOethllkko^ I fail in doing
kepuchuethlikk^^ I missed buying it
Mode LXXIX
Signifies to act tnilyy really^ indeed.
—piktai, — piktikft
pepikto^ . I do indeed
pepikt&ldL I really do it
iy&qpncchShkd^ I will truly go
yupiktdk he is truly man
Note. — Often nfimfin, indeed^ is added to this, as, Uflmfin pipIktSA, indeed^ I really do.
Mode LXXX
This mode expresses a much greater emphasis than the preceding
one. (See 726.)
— UpIktOI, — Uplkt&kft
t^LngvipIktoi I see perfectly well
nauthluk&pikto^ I am very sick indeed
t^retkipikt&k^ I mind it most carefully
sl&k^kiplkt^k^ I am very careful of it
p!nritkip!kt&k& I do not do it at all
MODES LXXX, LXXXI AND LXXXII 1 97
sl^Lk^kipigiskeu be very careful of it
lyok^kiplktdk it is absolutely the same
niir'n&k£p!kt5k hw&ng'ne it is essentially necessary for me
This combines with other modes ; for example, with the negative
of Mode LXII.
iy&g'yanr$tkllpiktd& I do not want to go at all
Modes LXXXI and LXXXII
These signify good and bad.
— kBrtOk, — thlfirqtOk
sl&kSrt5k the weather is good
sl&thliirqt5k the weather is bad = it rains
Fut sl&kSrch$hk5k smthlirchShkdk
Past sl^lthodk slithlilthhodk
sl&kSrk^n when the weather is good
sl&thliirqk^n when it rains
1 tumkSrt5k the trail is good
tuvylr&kSrt5k the portage is good
pet<hkSrt5k it is just right
kn&kSrt5k he is good on the scent (a dog)
tumthliirqt5k the trail is bad
ttipkSrt5k it smells nicely
tketo^ chtikilld^ tumkSrqchiln
I came fast because the trail is good
tk6td^ chQkaime tumthliirqn^n
I came slowly because the trail is bad
ttimkSrch^hklln iyilchShkd^
I will go when the trail will be good
tuvy&rilthltirqt5k k&nikcha^me
the portage is bad on account of deep snow
^ngtilthkSrtdk it is just the bigness = big enough
mlkt<hkSrtdk it is just the smallness = small enough
uchet<hkSrtdk it is just the load = loaded enough
td&k& ^ngt<hkSmaliqtdk tin& ^ngno^rutghuktine
is this big enough to make a paddle ? (is it that this may be just the
bigness when it is a paddle ?)
' — roiighd
' — roukiik
' — roukut .
— routft
Dual <
— routuk
Plur. <
— rouche
— ro5k
— rouk
— r5ut
198 ESSENTIALS OF lANUIT
Mode LXXXIII
Signifies to become,
— rauqtftft
yukkSrt&rsfuqto^ I become a good man
nQkkSrtiira'uqt6k it becomes a good house
netok cheva~unllra^mtik k^to&n^ &ttKlr2irauqtdk
he heard a humming sound ; afterwards it proved to be singing
t^nghdk^ dmir'lu ^mlnl ukdksheg!lthne miliiqthluku tingmalrauqthlutiing
I saw a cloud over there ; on its coming closer, it turned out to be geese
Mode LXXXIV
Comparison is expressed by means of this mode.
--rOuglii, — rdftkft
The characteristic is rO inserted before the usual endings.
Sing,
569. The localis case is always to be used with this mode.
hwe mikWnrougha lp6ne I am smaller than you
nalithlunroughl I am sicker kQnklinro^k^ I like it better
^mtlilinrougli^ I have more luchingningro^k^ I understand it
chukinrougni I go faster better
570. The third person is the one most frequently used.
ningthllngro6k it is colder t^k!nro5k it is longer
yikshinrook it is further pen!ngro5k it is stronger
571. The third person of a&ghfl is equally common.
ningthlingriilraii akkw^-wimme it is colder than yesterday
ukk^kshilradrook tuml it is the shorter trail
pilraiiroug'ha KiiskofSg'mtik
I am from (i.e., a resident of) the Kuskokwim region
572. Sing,
ume t^kinrodk it is longer than this
ume tSkinrouk it is longer than these two
ume tikinrout it is longer than these
MODES LXXXIV AND LXXXV 1 99
Dual
unil t^k{nro6k uktig'ne this is longer than these two
ukuk t^klnrouk ukiig'ne these two are longer than these two
ukut t&kinrout uktig'ne these are longer than these two
Plur.
un& tikinrodk ukune this is longer than these
ukuk t&klnrouk ukune these two are longer than these
ukut tllklnrout ukune these are longer than these
Note. — Um t&Unkli is equivalent to fimfi t&klnrd5k, etc., as it means this is the longer,
573. In questions the interrogative aspect is always to be used.
kithlun t^kt^ kiy^n how long is your kiyak ?
um IdL t^klnkil is it longer than this ?
um ki tdklnkilk is it longer than these two ?
um k^ tilklnkl is it longer than these ?
574. Comparison is expressed also idiomatically by the use of the
verb Xn&qt&k& = / exceed^ surpass, etc
EXAMPLES
ukune nunilne nauthlulraet mlkkiUigliut iin^qthluke ill&che ch^nrllgnut
in this village there are more sick children than healthy ones (the
children who are sick ones exceed, etc.)
^Ithr^ko&k^n miln& nun^m kienine yurqtlhraet mlkklllignut ^n^qthluke
tokdul^rtut
here every year more children die than are born
tuktiqchugedkd^ }p!t ilniqthlutii
I would like to be richer than you
tukiiqchugeilkoS yut tim^lthkweti ^n^qthluke
I would like to be the richest of all
Mode LXXXV
This implies a somewhat lower degree than the preceding.
— nthhOu^
un^ n&nnilthh55k ume this is smaller than that
ukut nQn^t tingn^rqnetlhriit Ingkune this village is not as pretty as
that one
Note. — UmS, etc., must always be expressed.
200
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Pres. mlkkllthhough^
I am smaller
Past mlkkllthhulthhough^
I was smaller
Fut m!kk!lthhuch$hko&
I shall be smaller
Pres. n&nnllth houghs
I am shorter
Past nlnnllthhulthhoQgh^
I was shorter
Fut, n^nnllthhuchehkoi
I shall be shorter
&ngn!ithhoughi I am larger
chtikilthhougn^ I go slower
— f^kaner'loa
— f^Lkin^rpiikne
tikkikf^k&n^rqtdk
^chekfdk^n^rqtdk
kUltikf^k^n$rqt5k
y^kf&k^nSrqtd^
Mode LXXXVI
— fi]ciii«rqtM
— f&klln£rkum&
— f^k^n^r&k&mi
it comes nearer
it is further under
he nears the shore
I go further
Mode LXXXVII
Signifies in a higher degree tfian before.
• f;
—rSkftnftrqtOk
&sherekiln£rqt6k
^nglerek^n^rqtdk
it is better than before
it is larger than it was
Mode LXXXVIII
The locatives generally use this mode, implying too much.
— 8€gSwUdlqt5&
ukk^ksegewikiqto^
kusegew^kdqto^
yilksegew^kilqto^
as I am too near
as I am too high
as I am too far off
Note i . — These are not used alone ; they require such expressions as : yikfiqkttii
iy&g'16 akkAksSgfiwikXqtSI, let me get off some, for I am too near ; akkAkfiqkfin tili,
come closer, as I am too far off.
Note 2. — In some districts the wi is sounded vi, as« sigeyikXqtoi.
MODES LXXXIX, XC, XCI, XCII, AND XCIIl 201
Mode LXXXIX
To express / buy from him takes the modalis and means just now^
a moment ago, etc.
V
Pres. kepukngno^
Past kepuknilth houghs
Put. kepulcnch^kko^
chnckekngno^ I give
V
kepuknk<ht^ leniik let us buy from him
Mode XC
To express / buy for.
taliktintik taugw&m kepuyuch^rk&mkln these are all I will buy for you
ip!t kluch^kimkin I will look out for you
tuktifchakoil hw^ngntik I enrich myself
k6puyuch!mktin tukugwo^ I am rich through my trading
Mode XCI
Implies an easy manner of acting,
ly&ngs&to^ I go along easily = I stroll
ch^ling9&td& I work gently
Mode XCII
Implies that one is loth to act,
— anripUc&tO&, — finripJJMrXkX
chen k&nniiqyunr^p&kichet why do you not feel like talking ?
!yig'yunrap&k&td& I do not care much to go
Mode XCIII
ly&lghOghil iy^ghulraigh&
iy&lgh5&mll ly&lghukum^
Q6t&lghugh& I am tired waiting
t&ngv&lghMkH I am tired seeing it
n6tlghti&mk!n I am tired hearing you
202 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
finh. Another way to express / am tired of is by mOq'nSqtdft.
MOq*nOqtOft chUlfin€r*iniik, / am tired of worky or ctaXlieghftghi mOq'nOqtOX
MtiniiSr*in1ik, / am tired waitings or tietilgn&^il.
Note. — I am tired of is also expressed by Mode XCIV.
5kshtilghugh& I have headache (i.e., I am head tired)
5kshtilghtilld& 5kshtilghukum&
5kshtllgho^Lm& 5kshtilghuvil!g'in&
Mode XCIV
Note. — There is no difference in meaning between this mode and the preceding.
However, this one is used much more than the other.
— I^qt5&
ptiktngh5kto& I am tired walking
&nggho&ghulgh5kto& I tire of paddling
ch&v!zhr!lgli5kto& I am fatigued with work
Mode XCV
This is the reciprocal. (See 412.)
— 8€dt5&
Mode XCVI
Signifies proceeding to the object specified in the stem.
-~m0qtO&
— m5qtlhdugh& — mortiskum^
— ^m5qch$hkd& — mdqchim^
ktilmdqto^ I go to the top
k^nggnemoqtaa I go to the summit
achetmoqtoa I go to the bottom
pitmoqto^ I go to the river mouth = pi
Example in the interrogative aspect :
natCltmoqtlL where did he go ?
Mode XCVII
Signifies ^^/«^ to the place named in the stem.
— tM
kwiq = river kwlqtoi I go to the river = I river
The full form would be kwig'imiln iySqtGS (453).
MODES XCVII, XCVIII, XCIX, AND C
203
nun&toii
nun&thlo^
nun&skum^
igiyuvlqtoa
okizhvlqtol
tum&qtol
Tachgqtoi
I go to the village
nunilt&kiml
I go to the church (117)
I go to a shelter
I follow the track (i.e., of some animal)
I go to St. Michael (103)
Mode XCVIII
This signifies to travel ox journey aA?«^ whatever is indicated by
the stem.
— ^kwlrqt5il
— kwlrqchShkoi — kwlr^mi
— kwilthhough^ — kw!ghtir'm^
— kwirkum^ — kwirqpiikn^
— kwlrikimil — kwllrai
kw!q p^qkwirqto^
Ingrekwlrqtoi
pull iylriqkwTrqtoi
I travel along the Yukon
I go along the mountains
I travel on the path
The nouns belonging to this mode end in yftrflk (217) :
kwiqpiiqkw!r'yiriik the Yukon trail
Mode XCIX
kaliw^virqlo^
kau wil vIriiskumS.
kauw&vlrqt^kim^ (522)
unga,virqtoa,
to&v!rqto3l
hwivlrqtoi
p^km^vlrqto^
— vlrqtM
I ascend the stream
if I ascend the stream
whenever I ascend the stream
I go down stream
I go thither = I thither
I come hither = I hither
I go upwards
Note. — There is also llrqtoi, as, tfintfltflUrqtSfl, I go to the dttr-hunting district^ or,
rather, the deer-abounding district (124).
Mode C
This is a slight variation from the preceding mode.
— £&llrqt5ft
yakfaUrqtoi I go very far ukakfaiirqtoi I go much closer
n^gtikf^lYrqtol I go far north ugn^ldllrqto^ I go far south
204 ESSENTIA/^ OF INNUIT
Mode CI
This is a compound with Mode LXII.
— fftllrqchttqtdft
y^kf^lirqchunrSto^ I do not want to go a great distance
y^kf^i!rqchtiqto& I wish to go to a great distance
Mode CII
This is a compound with Mode XLI.
— flUrqt&klqtdft
nSgtikf&Krqtiiklqto^ I go away up north again
Mode CIII
— llr'iittr'mtttM
This is treated in 410.
Mode CIV
Signifies to bring along the object mentioned in the stem.
— IglrqtU
kemtiqt^ a dog kemiiqtihirqt5& I bring a dog along
&nggn6^rutigirqt5i I bring along a paddle
dr'luvvHglrqtoa I bring a bow with me
6r1uvv!lgir' loi drltivvllgiama
5r'ltivvllg!kumi 5r'ltivv!lg!lra&gna
dr'ltivvllgeil . 5r'ltivv!lgirptikne
kea em urn m^ll!qchQktine& k^miiqtlhlr'lune miUl6g!skTl€&
if any one wants to go with me, he will have to bring his own dogs
nithluy^guchlkdn&ku kemtiqtlgir&qk^n
do not forget to bring a dog with you
kemtlqtilglr^kik& it is my brought dog (it is the dog which I brought)
Mode CV
Signifies placing or depositing anything in the place named in the
stem.
— mSfiwWl, Neg. — me&iitftt&k&
anggyam€Qwaidl I put it into the anggiak (i.e., native open skin boat)
kiyimeuwaka I put it into the kiyak
MODES CVI, CVII, CVIII, AND CIX 205
Mode CVI
Signifies giving the object,
— kStiUcft, — ket&riUUdi
ekilmr^kketilki I give him a sled
ekllinr&kketlho^ki I gave him a sled
ekilmr&kkech$hk^k& I will give him a sled
ek&mr&kklshkumku when I give him a sled
k$miiqtket^k& I give him a dog (kSmiiqUl, dog ; i.e., puller)
5Fluviiqket&k^ I give him a bow (ttf'lflvttk, bout)
piket&ki I make him a present (pikyUn, gift^ (115)
p!k!shkumku when I make him a present
pTkech^mku because I make him a present
Mode CVI I
Signifies taking the object named,
— irtki
nunir&ki I take his place
nunirr^nrat&ki I do not take his place
nunirqch^hkiki I shall take his place
nunilthho&kl I did not take his place
ek&mrlr&ki I take his sled
ek^mny^kon^ku don't take his sled
Note. — Willing^ etc., can be added (538).
Mode CVIII
Signifies being desirous^ attracted by, inclined to, disposed to.
— kuniyUcU, — kani7Udlk&
ekimr^'niik k^putkuniy^kld^ Ikkeyaiigut^k^
I am not suited with the sled I was attracted to buy
iy&ktiniy&k5& I am inclined to go
Mode CIX
— €]ifig'iiirQt&&, — chfig'iiir&t&k&
nUt&kdchiig'niriitdil it seems like I never find
tk€chtig*nirutoa it seems like I never will come
tkechtig'nlrtisktim& when it seems as if I never come
2o6 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Mode CX
Signifies fcigtiing to perform the act,
(See 196.)
Mode CXI
Compound, — feigning to petfonn the act in general,
— ghfi&rftqt&a or — |()i5i7ftqtM
kauwilro&r&qtd^ I feign sleep
2ikn£rqgno^v^'ldi I making out that I am hurt
Mode CXII
This means it resembles^ it is like,
— yug'nUqkSi, — yug'nUqkftkft
t^kukaliyug'ndqkok it resembles a bear
yuyug'Hilqkok it is like a man
hwdngghiiyug'n^qkdd it seems it is I
sl^kSrhekilt^'yug'n^qkok it begins to look like being good weather
nlnglirqkatilqyug'nilqkok it begins to look like moderating
tuntuyug'n^qkdk it seems to be a deer
hw^toil tirSnyug'ghdqkikd now I seem to understand it
t^r$nyuechug'n^qk6k k&nrutlngrdmne
he never seems to understand when I tell him (although I tell him)
Mode CXIII
This is an associate mode, meaning likely to do^ but at a definite
time. It is a defective mode, possessing only the future sense.
— ch&g'n&hkU, — chilg'ii&hk2k&
iySqchShchug'nakoi 'rtinrtim kdk&ne I will likely go at midday
pech^hchug'niko^ I will likely act
pingghichug'nikoi I will not be likely to act
Mode CXIV
Signifies / think I am, I consider myself to be, etc.
— yukO&, — 3ruk&ld[
tukuyuko^ I think I am rich tukuyukum^ when I think I am rich
tukuyuklo^ tukuyulrHghi
MODE CXIV 207
576. (d) To express / thought it was you. In this and all similar
sentences there is a peculiar idiom, as follows :
1 . The use of klngt^thlfi or klng^thlOhwi.
2. The combination yflk with the pronouns.
tingnllthhougn^ tingali'ldrdmtik ch^m^na k^ngghilthlu Ip^nuyukklutfi
I saw a boy down there I thought was you
{b) The personal pronouns in this form are as follows :
■
I
hwilnggnuyukkluku
Sing, '
thou
^^nuyiikklutft
he
thlegnuyOkkluku
we'
hw&nkuyukklunuk
Dual -
you*
ip^nuyukklut&k
they«
hk^nuyukklukuk
we
hw^nkuyukklut^
Piur, <
you
ip€tchegnuyukkluche
they
thlltgnuyukkluke
) All the locative pronouns
(380) may also assume this
Inkuyukkltike
those
aukuyukkluke
those over there
ch^kmlnchtikklQke
those below
p^kmlnchiikkluke
those above
p&mlnchiikkluke
those on top
y^kf^nchiikkluke
those far off
In the following expressions the usual form is employed :
k^nggh&thluhw^ mdqrhtim kien&kiin !lrauyukklo<l
I thought I was walking on the water
k^nggniithluhwi chlkk^k^tiyukklo^ chdh&g'miik
I thought you were about to give me some little thing
chlkka'ytikklune hwdngntin pe6k he thinks I gave it to him
ghlll^ra'utttiksuklune hwingntin pe6k he thinks I ridicule him
gnllldrsfuttfiksukldd thlenun peughi I think he mocks me
m^lHqghiytikldd thleniin
I thought he would accompany me (I to be a comrade to him)
^pt^mkln kepus&guttikniytikkluku
I ask you if you think he would sell it
208 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Mode CXV
— hiitBsnUqtftft, — hiitssnilqlcA
k&nn^rr^nr&tssnUqtdi I cannot sleep at ail
lyautAratssn^qk^ I cannot take it away at all
pinratssn^qk^ I cannot do it at all
Idlnnlngr^tsn^n ^n5k having said nothing at all, he went out
Mode CXVI
Signifies turning into, becoming.
—^XJOi^ — OrqtUcft
ungghungse6rqt5k it became an animal pe6rqt&k^ I make it become
yurqt6k it became man yurqthlo^ I became a man
yuruskum^ when becoming man yurqch^m^ I becoming man
t&rily^kfauqtdk it became a salmon tunttirqtdk it became a deer
tuntuva1iqt6k it became a moose aliwuqtdk it became blood
Hnk& thlu h5k kinggho&ne ifr^rniilmtik u6t^yunral&miik iydg*lutuk ting-
ghungsedrqthlutuk ; trslldlnna^rauqthlutuk hok toi taukuk iy^g'luttik
nula^qkllr^ek
and they both, after their child was gone, not wanting to remain, went
off, becoming animals ; so then these parents went off, becoming
wolverines.
Mode CXVII
Signifies surely, without fail, certainly, etc.
Note. — This occurs most frequently in the imperative.
— ««rqt(Ml, — ««rUdl
tketingse6r'l£ tintim I '11 be back sure
p1ngse6r^k^ I surely do it
Mode CXVIII
Signifies performing the act for a brief period.
— chaUqt&a, — chfik&qk2
^k5m5ch{ik&qtd^ I sit down for a few moments
5iltmiiqchuk^qtd& I go down the shore for a little way
MODES CXVIII, CXIX, CXX, CXXI, AND CXXII 209
miyuchiik^qto^ I go up just for a minute
^tr&chuk&qtd^ I just go down a little
pechuk^qk^ I do it a little
Note. — Sometimes kftxftkX can be used as well as kXqkX.
tUngchukir^klL I examine it = look at it a moment
Combination :
pechukir^l&qki unw&kd&k^n I always do a little every day
Mode CXIX
Signifies petfonning the act in vain, without effect, etc.
— yIkU, — y&kikft
iy^'y&ko^ I go in vain
pey^k&k^ I do it in vain
wegey^ko^ I try in vain
577. Sometimes euphony requires ch in place of y.
k&thl^ch^ko^ I talk in vain
k&thl^ch^kHmktn I tell you in vain
k^qch^kd^ I look in vain
Mode CXX
Signifies to cofntnenee.
— nlrqt&a, — nlrUcK
ly&g'nirqto^ I begin
Mode CXXI
Signifies that the act is to be performed at last.
— ^t6riiU[qt5&
sl&kt5rinilqt5k it is good weather at last
sl^thltikkit5r!n&qt5k the weather at last gets bad
Mode CXXII
Showing tliat the act is on the point of being performed at last,
— tSrinlkitiqt&a
Iy&qt5rin^k^t^qto& at length I am about to start
pilledrin^k^t&qt5& I am about to act at last
2IO
ESSENTIALS OF L\\\l/IT
MODK CXXIII
Signifies to act soon.
— DiirilngghSi
V
tketnadr&nggno^ I am coming soon
iyitg'nailringghoa I am going soon
Note. — This is only used in the present tense.
iy^g'y&ra6ktod
Mode CXXIV
I go in good time (i.e., early enough)
iy.lg'yara6ytiqt6&
pe&ra6yug^ki
iy^g'narenairiqtoa
keputn^ renadr^r^ki
Mode CXXV
— yftradyfiqt&S
I want to go early
I want to do it early
Mode CXXVI
— nUfgna&rilqtdi
it is nearly time for me to go
it is about time for me to buy it
peiqp.^k6qtutft
&kfakk6hpakaqtoi
kojarqpika'yilkonak
ylkshiqpdkbqtok
ilmthl$qp^k^qt6k
n5kt^qplk^rdk&
utr^chuqpdk&qto^
tketch dqp^kdqt utii
Mode CXXVII
-p&k&qt&a, — p&k&rUcK
you are too quick (soon)
I run too hard
do not cough so violently
it is too far olT
it is too much
I pull it too hard
I want very much to go back
Mode CXXVIII
— chSqp&kiqt52
you come much too early
Mode CXXIX
— n&chalplUdlqtfiS
V
tketn^cha^qpdk5qtutf^ you come too late
MODES CXXX-CXXXVI 211
Mode CXXX
— ch&r&qtOH
tkech&riqtdi I arrive early
w&mv&k&m^ tkech&r&rinr£t5& because I delayed I do not arrive early
Mode CXXXI
— ch&ridqtOH, — ch&radqkft
V
tkech&radqt5& I come rather early
nechdradqk^ I heard it rather early
Mode CXXXII
— c]iXr&wOk&qtO&
V
tkech^r^woklqtoi 1 arrive too soon
V
tkechdr&wok^qp^ oh, I am too soon !
V
chen tkech&rdwok^chet why do you come too soon ?
Mode CXXXIII
— iiichii[qtG&, — nicha&r&kft
tketn&cha^qto^ I come late
plnn^chailr^ki I do it late
plnn^ch^^qtutii you are late !
Mode CXXXIV
— ch&r&qthliniraiqtOi
tkech^riqthlin&r'ldqtoi I always come too soon
Mode CXXXV
— €hXr&Ulqtd&
tkech&r&l^qto^ I generally come soon
Mode CXXXVI
Signifies just at the time,
—k&r&kX
Idlnrutkilrdld. I just tell him
keputkir^k^ I just buy it
keputk^kum^ just when I buy
keputkilntmktin just as soon as my buying
212
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Mode CXXXVII
Shows that the time to act has arrived.
— DixUkft,
nXrlnrttU
— nirlnrfttXkX
iyigniraugn^
kiw&n&radk
it is time for me to go
it is time to go to sleep
&giytin&r&5k
penirinrat5k
penirinratdk
ttip&g'n&ra5k
hwitoi
pechilthhii
it is time for prayers
it is not time to act
it is not the time now for what you ask
it is time to get up
iy^lgniUlriqtd&
kepUtnailr^k^
Mode CXXXVIII
— iiiIrftqt2UL, — n&ar&kX
I am pretty near going
I am just about buying it
Note. — NUiftqtU is equivalent to nlAiftng^Sft, / am going soon, USkft Ikft
king^finltiiJUlrilqtSk, my husband by now is near reaching home.
Mode CXXXIX
Signifies that it is not time yet to act.
This is a compound of Modes XVIII and CXXXVII.
— nlrikshitU, — narftkshitlkX
iy&g'n&rakshit5k it is not yet time to go
pgn&r!kshiat5k hw&to^ pech<hhr^ it is not the time yet for what he wants
Mode CXL
Signifies that it is not yet time to act again*
— n&rlnklqkshitOft, — nirinkiqkshitlkX
!y&g'n&rlnk!qkshit5k it is not yet time to go again
Signifies too much.
ch^nniksegeyugni
Mode CXLI
— «SgSkOqtO&
Mode CXLII
— 8egS3ru^b&
I am getting nearer (416)
MODES CXLIII, CXUV, CXLV, CXLVI, AND CXLVII 213
Mode CXLIII
Signifies entirely too much.
Mode CXLIV
— k&r&iiiittG&
Signifies a little more, (See 414.)
chuk&nro^l&qtoi
Mode CXLV
— r5U&qtQll
Mode CXLVI
I usually go faster
This presents the diminutive characteristic and implies a little^ etc.
This is a coaxing, flattering way of asserting or asking.
kepuchugh^
kepuchulthhdik^
chlkkechugli^kut
ngt^chugh^kut
ekiyuchugh&kut
inglechdchugiillkut
ktitrauchugli^k ^ghettchugn&kut
ktitrauk a crane
Some verbs take :
kepuchtiqch^hk^k^
kepuch ulralgli^
give us a little
hear us awhile
help us some
guard us a bit
pretty little crane, do please untie us
^glieskut untie us (234)
pllleyOghi
chikkeyugh^
iylyughi I go nicely
k&nyugh^ I talk pleasingly
'(See 171.)
Mode CXLVII
I do delicately
I give in a nice way
Signifies knowing how to do the act^ being used to it.
— tfl|fii«
iyitugha
ch^Uetugh^
ch^lletulthhoughi
pStugh^
pllletughii
pllletuchShkoJl
I know how to go
I know how to work
I was used to work
I know how to do
I know how to make
1 11 be used to make
214
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
pilletok pilleu
iyStiinroughi ^n$
pfllerunroughi i$ne
let him do it ; he is used to it
I am more used to going than you are
I am more accustomed to doing it than he is
Mode CXLVIII
Signifies I first,
— thltOH. — tli&r&k&
keputhitoi first I trade
V
uy&ngthdto^ I first look down
This is used principally in the imperative.
m^tntikhi'luku warm it first
keputh^'luku buy it first
n&sp^h^'luku &t5qch^hkiki trying it first, I will use it
I think slowly (i.e., ponder)
I speak slowly
Mode CXLIX
— kdqtG&, — kOqkX
V
umyu5rtk5qto&
kinniiqtoqto^ chukaunS
Note. — ChflkatmS may be used or not.
Mode CL
This signifies eating the object named in the stem.
— tdqtOll, — tfiiir«tG&
tiraydkf^qt6qto^
I eat salmon (this means king salmon = tftr&ydkfSk ; each variety of
this fish has its distinct name)
tir§y5kf^qt5qt5& I eat salmon t^r2y5kf^qti!inrgto^ I do not eat salmon
t^rayokf^qtokum^ t&ray5kfdqti!inr!lthkum&
taray6kfiqt6g*loa tirayokfaqtulraiglii
578. Children generally express themselves in very simple style.
In place of using the condensed form a child will say tSrftyOkfftg'mtik
ntiqrhOft, / eat salmon,
I want to eat salmon (combined with Mode LXII)
tiiray6kfaqt6riyiiqtoi
chinggirqt6qt6&
&k!zhget5qto^
ik6&t6qto&
em^qpln riqt 5qt5i
&kutat6qt6&
I eat blackfish
I eat ptarmigan
I eat herring roe
I eat grayling
I eat akutak (852)
MODES CLI AND CLII 21$
Mode CLI
Expresses / say tfiat /, etc.
nauthluna5k he says he is sick
kuy&nntnadk he says he is not satisfied
peyunitnadk he says he is not able
This is a condensed form of the longer style, as :
k&nntiqto^ na'uthluneloll I say I am sick
k^nntiqtutii nauthlunelutii you say you are sick
k^nntiqtdk nauthlunelune he says he is sick
k^nniiqtok nauthlulthhunelune he says he was sick
k^nntiqt5k naiithluchSknelune he says he will be sick
pecheune^ki I say it is true
^sh^me&kil I say it is good
^shetne^ki I say it is bad
In ordinary negation kftnntiqtdft &8hetnritiieiQka = / say it is not bad.
Mode CLII
Signifies also,
kweyaumeugn^ I am also glad
moq'ndq'meughd I am tired too
iy^qch^kmeugn^ I will go also
579. These when used in the first person singular always take
hweghfi thlfi.
hwegha thlu peyug'me&k& I want it too
hwegha thlu iyiig'mechShk53. I will go too
hwegh^ thlu iy&g'mtlra&gni I am also going
Examples in the imperatives :
iya.g'mekele
iy&g'melle
iy&g'mekSr'le
From this mode are derived the forms in mDcki.
nikllkmiing^ Hlilngchifk^ne he loves me too
nikllkme^mkln Hl^ngchifk^n^k I love thee too
2l6
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
The addition of Ullngchifkene is 'ad libitum'; it adds the sense of
anyhow^ anyway, at all events^ etc.
m6qstiqmeughi I want to drink too
^rruliryug'meughH I also want to stop
Note. — The last two are compounded with Mode LXII.
Mode CLIII
The only difference between this and the ordinary form of the
verb (438) is that in this the k, which is the modal characteristic, is
preserved throughout.
The following will serve as an example.
Intrans.
Trans,
I pe^ko^
kinrutk^ka
r it to some one
thou pe^kutii
k^nrutklqk^
them two to some one
he pe^5k
we peikukQt
k^nrutk&nldL
k^nrlitk^mk!n
>\ tell about ^
them to some one
you to some one
you pe&kuche
k^nrutk^mttik
you two to some one
they pe&kut
kilnrutkimche
. you to some one
k^nriitkkumku
k^nrQtkik^mktl
k&nriittikn^mkQ
•
pe&ko^ ntittdm
it is my way
k^nrutk^mkln yuganQn
I tell folks about you
Example in the interrogative aspect :
chen klnruttiksai thleniin why do you talk about me to him ?
k^nv&k kinrutkilthhuyekin when did I talk about you (thee) ?
k^nv^k k^nrutk!lthhi2y6mch6 when did I talk about you t
Mode CLIV
Denotes regularity in the action,
tiliqche ^yuvig'miin Gnwiko^k^n come regularly to church every day
tilllqt5k unukdik^n he comes every night
chmiel^qto^ I work regularly
t5kthl5r^l^qk^ I honor regularly
NoTB. — The forms in kSftkIa require this mode. (See 616.)
n^lnne en&qtllllthhQy6t where have you been sleeping ?
MODES CLK CLVI, CLVII, CLVIII, AND CLIX
217
Mode CLV
y «
kepukghutik^
— kgii&tik&, — ksfnuriUkX
I buy for him
Note. — Kipflk^flt&mldii, /^^/tt you^ can be expressed also as follows: kSpfltftkl
chihAr'mfik Iplt ptttkklfitn.
Mode CLVI
— fiktqtOll
n&kklig'n^kf^k^qtd^
m5qsiiqp^kdqto^
kauw^g'new&k^qto^
IllutGkf&kaqtoa
I am so poor
I am so thirsty
I am so sleepy
I am so sorry
I want so much
peytiqp&kiqto^
One of the most common forms in this mode is that in which it
is used to express because or on account of. This is done by the
adjutant ftmX. (See 535.)
Mode CLVII
Expresses commiseration^ pity^ etc.
— gdr'WqtM
tkett6ql6qtoa
iyag6r'I6qtoi
iyig6rMulrallgha.
iyigorMulthhoughi
iy&g6r'16qlo&
poor me 1 I come
iyigor'loimi
!y&g5r'15kum^
ly^g5r'15qptikn£
iyagdr'Iuthltik
Signifies beginning.
Mode CLVIII
— ^qt&S, — ^qtiir«tO&
— ^qtlkX, — ^qtiiratUki
ch^llegh^qtdi
n&thlunragli^qt&k^
I begin work
I begin to know it
Mode CLIX
Signifies doing the act this time and hurriedly,
— kj^rqt0&
Note. — This mode is used chiefly in ISft and in the imperative.
iyakSrqtoi (imperative)
iyak$r'le (488)
^ngkSrqto^
I rush out
2l8 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Mode CLX
Expresses duration.
— tuy&k&&
uetituyakda I used to be
Mode CLXI
The same in a greater degree,
— iiiitQyftkd&
ueULmdtuy&kod I used to be for a long time
Mode CLXII
Signifies comtantly.
— kiUkft
plskdk^ I order him plsk^kilk^ I always order him
nSkklikkdkd I love him nilkklikkdk^kd I always love him
In verbs which end in kXkft, the introduction of the third kft gives
an overloaded appearance. This is not so noticeable in the others,
as, for example :
net^k^ I obey him nec&kdk^ I always obey him
Mode CLXIII
Signifies somewhat^ a little^ etc.
— tttqta*
Mode CLXIV
— 8ip&kftqt5X
kauw^ksip^k^qtoH I do not sleep for ever so long
Mode CLXV
Denotes planning^ scheming^ designings etc.
— k&ra3rtiqtG&
iydkdrayuqt(3^ unuku I am thinking of running off in the night
ly^k^rayug'lune uet^lththltir'meniik
he concluded to run away from his home
The five following modes have already been treated in the section
on locatives.
Mode CLXVI
— mlttSi
MODES CLXVII-CLXX — NUMERALS 219
580.
Mode CLXVII
— ahlqtoi
Mode CLXVIII
— shlqtOqtQH
Mode CLXIX
— fiLrftntM
Mode CLXX
— IntU
The Numerals
I
italichSk
2
milruk
3
ping^iyun
4
st&mSn
5
t^tlemSn
6
&hV!nl!ggin
7
m^lrunllggtn
8
pingghiyunUggtn
9
kdlnnunrat&r^
10
k51n
II
k51n ^taiuchemtik chippluku
12
k51n mlllrontik chippluku
13
k51n pingghiyunuk chippluku
14
^k^me^runrat^
'5
^keme^k
16
^emedk &ta~uchemuk chippluku
17
^keme^k mlllroniik chlpplQku
18
^kemelk plngghlyuniik chippluku
19
yueninrati
20
yuen6k
21
yuen5k &ta~uchemiik chippluku
25
yu€n6k tatlemSnuk chippluku
26
yuen5k ih'vlnllgniik chippluku
27
yuen5k mlllrunligntik chippluku
28
yuen6k pingghiyunllgniik chippluku
29
yuen5k k51ngnunrat^'miik chippluku
30
yuenok koli^n&k chippluku
220
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
31 yuenok k51iiniik chlppluku ch^lS. ^tsfuchemtik chlppluku
40 m^lruk epe^k
50 m^lruk epe^k k51iintik chlpploku
60 pingghiyun epeit
70 pingghiyun epedt k61fintik chlppluku
80 st&m^n epe^t
90 st^m^n epeit k61iintik chippluku
100 t^tlemSn epe^t
1 01 t^tlemSn epelt ^tsuich^miik chlppluku
109 t^tlemSn epe^t kdlngnunrat&'mtik chlppluku
114 tdtlemSn epe&t ^k^me^runrat^r'mtik cMppluka
119 Ultlem^n epe&t yuen&nrat&r'miik chlppluku
200 k61n epedt
300 ^keme^k epe^t
400 yuenuk epe&t
500 yuenum t&tlem&ntik chlppluku epeit
1000 t&tlem^n epe^t kol5qkontik
581. The numerals are declined according to the usual form.
one
two
three
four
Intrans,
^tauch^k
m^lrdk
pingghiyun
st&m^n
Trans,
^taucMm
Loc,
atauchlme
m&lr6g*ne
plnggTiiyune st^mine
Mod.
dtauchlmtik
malr6g'niik
pinggniyuni
:ik st^m&ntik
Term.
^tauchimtin
m&lr6g*ntin
pingghiyunQn stiminan
Vial.
dtauchtkiin
malr5g'ngrghtin
pfngg'hiyuthiin st&mithiin
j^qual.
^tauchitiin
m&lr5qttin
pinggniyutiin st&m^ttin
582.
583.
584.
firsty second^ etc.
once^ twice^ etc.
one pair ^ etc.
chaokl^k
^talich^qk^mtik
^tauchek
lep^
milr6qkiig*ntik
milruen
plnggliiyuik
pinggh iy 6qk6ntik
plnggh^jwen
st&mek
st^m&k5niik
stIUnin
t^tlemek
t&tlem^kontik
t^tlemin
ahMnrik
ah*v!nl6qkoniik
&h*v!nlin
inilrQnrllk
9
b
m^lH!inl5qkoniik
m&lriinlin
p!nggh i3ri!inl!g&k
pingghiytnl5qkont&k
p!ngghi)ri!inlin
k51ngn unrat^r^k
k51nghunr£t&ntik
k51ngnunrat^rin
k51nghurutek
kdldqkontik
k51nnin
: • : ! •»•
• •
• •
• • •
NUMERALS 221
585. The ordinals are declined as usual. The localis case is given
here, as it is the one most used. In or on the firsts etc.
cha5kl$r'me (149) &hVinr&tne
lepane m^lrunllg^tne
pingghiyu&tne ptngghiyunllgStne
st&metne kdlnghunrat^rdtne
titlSmetne k51ngnurutetne
586. Epttt, which is used to express the twenties^ means members,
that is to say, the ten fingers and the ten* toes. It comes from
Cplnkft, my members, 6piqtn, CpS. The third singular possessive is
epe&, epeftk, speftt.
587. Sometimes in place of expressing one thausand by t&tlSmSn
epeftt kOlOqkOnilk, or ten times five twenties, the word tSsitsSq may
occur, which is a corruption of THCflHA, the Russian word for
thousand,
588. / have one, etc., is expressed by hwG pingkfttdft fttaiichimilk, etc.
589. Another way to express / fiave one, two, three, etc., is as
follows :
hwe ^taucheugw6k peki
hwe milrugwuk ptqk^
hwe pingghiyugwut pink^
590. // is in one, both fonn one, they are one, is expressed by :
Sing, ita~uch!mt5k
Dual ^tauchimtuk
Plur, atalicMmtQt
591. Place them one by one, two by two, three by three, is expressed :
^talicheghollkkluke
m^lruengho^kkluke
p!nggh&zhwegliodkkluke
(See 196 and Mode CX.)
592. One by one, etc., varies according to the sense in which
it is used.
iy^lqtut ataucheuk2lkklQt!ng they go one by one
iy&qtut m^lrokikkluting they go two by two
iyiqtut pingghiyukakkluting they go three by three
222 ESSENTIALS OF INN (/IT
593. With a verb in the imperative, one by one, etc., appears as
follows :
iy&qche ^taucheukikklQch€ go one by one
iy^che m^lroldlkkluche go two by two
iy&qche pingghlyuluche go three by three
594. / have one, two, etc., is expressed also as follows :
itauche6qtaka ^hMnligSqUlnka
inilr5qtiqk& m^lrunl!g5qt&nk^
pinggh!y5rqt&nk^ pingghiyunllgdqt^nki
stimaliqt^nk^ k51ngnunraUr^qt&nldl
t&tlemauqt^nk^ kolnghttrqtink^
On 583. These are easily understood. For example :
m&lr5qkug'niik mlllr5k st&m&wdk twice two is four
titlemSn epe^t k5l5qkontik ten times five twenties
On 582. The ordinals are used as follows :
iy&qchSkko& chaokleul5& I will go first
iy&qchSkkoutfi kfnggnokleulutii thou wilt go second
iy&qch£kk5k pingghiyulune he will go third
ken^ iy&qti chaokleulune who goes first ?
On 584. The following examples show the use of these :
^m&rrh^leke^ ^taucheg'niik make me one pair of salmon skin boots
^lltim&chekei m&lrueniik make me two pairs of mittens
izgheleke^ p!ngghijweniik make me three pairs of gloves
tingluleke^ st^mintik make me four pairs of snowshoes
IdLmiiksh&leke^ titleminiik make me five pairs of boots
!wrhucheleke& ^h'vinliniik make me six pairs of sealskin water-
proof boots
595. (400) fien&k epe&t. In ordinary conversation an elision is
made, so that it sounds as fienXrepttt; (3CX)) Skgmeftrepeftt.
596.
&t2LUcheugw5k it is one = there is one
m&lrugwuk there are two
pjngghiyugwtit there are three
stimaligwut there are four
t&tlemziugwut there are five
NUMERALS
223
ah'vinligut
m&lr5nllgut
pingghiyunligut
kdlftnunrat&rsLugut
k51nghut
there are six
there are seven
there are eight
there are nine
there are ten
597.
^ttalichitto^
m^lruto^
pingghiyuto^
stimdto^
t&tlQnatod
Imktit chaoklet
I got one
I got two
I got three
I got four
I got five
plngghlyun
^ttauchiintod
m^lriig'nittod
plngghiyuntdi
st^m^ntod
tdtlem^nto^
I am in one place
I am in two places
I am in three places
I am in four places
I am in five places
those three first
598. The numerals appear in the following forms also.
dtauchelit^kil
un& ^talicheut&k^k^
^talicheugwo^
&tauch!tto&
^taugnd
dtaucMmt5k
I one him = I match myself to him in wrestling
this is my one
I am one
I get one = I kill or catch it
I make it one ; I join = I unite
it is one place
tikftik&kd ^taucheuluku AgiyutQm Atte ch&mt&m^lthko&n tagumeikste
I believe in one God, the Father Almighty
599.
ilvviik
a half
^vguttingkito&
I have half
Sv'gum iv'gi
a quarter = half of a half
600.
ata'uchehdk
one = just one
st^mdh^n four
mSlroqhak
two
tatlemahdn five
ptngghiyohin
three
These five are used generally as emphatic (244). The first follows
the model in 320.
tltsTucheh&r'miik chikek^r^gh^ he gave me just one
601.
keni cheumtik ^ghutnuqtlhod
hwinkuta it^qpaktldraput chaoklegnGk yumtniik
we call them our first parents
who was the first man ?
224
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
taugwim ^talicheugwut
t^tlim^n epeit epeiltntik ^Ithhrikone
they are only one
two thousand years ago
Okfukilk^ ^ta~uch£uchSil Agiyutum, emum ^tt&m ch^prilgnum k^ilet chdl^
nunilm, t^nghum^lrHem ch^la tinghum^nrllghum tim&riima t^Qcsten
credo in unum Deum Patrem Omnipotentem factorem coeli et terrae visi-
bilium omnium et invisibilium
^taucheucha^
his state of oneness (153)
602. A few is expressed by kifchiriirftt. The verb form is :
kMchirhaliqtut
k^fchirhauqtlhut
kifchtrhaliqch^hkut
k&fchirhalirtiskon&ng
k^fchirhalittingglitir'mting
they become few
they became few "
they will become few "
if or when they are few
although they are few
or are few
" were few
" will be few
603. The Innuit distinguish the four seasons of the year by the
following
terms
•
•
Intrans,
Trans.
Loc.
spring
summer
autumn
winter
ap'niqk^k
ka^
iikshoik
iikshiik
up*n^qk^m
kaigtim
tiksho&m
tikshtim
Qp'n&qk^me, etc
kaigme, etc.
tiksho&me, etc.
iikshume, etc.
604. The principal verb forms in which these words occur are the
following :
spring
summer
it is
up'n^qkaliqtdk
kaiqtdk
when it is
up'n&qk&k^n
ka^k^n
before
up'n&qk^qpilg&n
kaiiqpilg&n
after
up'n^qkaum&rak^n
k^&giun&rakin
about
up'n^qkali'na^r&kin
kaig'na&r&k^n
every
up'n&qk&qkoik^n
kailko^kln
during
ap'n&qk^qpik
ka^qp^k
next
Op'n^qk^ku
kalku
autumn
winter
it IS
iiksho&qtdk
likshtiqtdk
when it is
tiksho^kiln
tikshuk^n
before
tikshaaqpilgin
tikshtiqpilg&n
after
iiksho^rum&rak^n
iikshiim^r§k^n
about
tiksho^nl^r^k^n
iikshiinadr^k^n
SEA SONS — MONTHS 22$
autumn winter
every iiksho&qk5S.k^n tikshukoik^n
during iiksho&p&k tikshiipik
next iiksho^ku tikshiiku
Note. — These verbs are used just as in English : mini fikshechShkSft, / will winter
here.
605. The Innuit names of the months, or moons, are as follows :
Intrans, Loc,
Jan. Srriluthldq SrrilQthltir'me, etc. the great moon
Feb. kupnQqch^k kQpnQqcheme, etc. cutting doors
March tinginarqthl6r6vflc tingmarqthl6rV!g'me, etc. coming of the hawks
April tingmlrVlk tJngmir'vig'me, etc. coming of the geese
May m^n€t ingutet m&net ingutetne, etc. eggs are laid
June t&ray&kfevfk tiray&kfeg'me, etc. salmon season
July tingma^t ingnQtet tlngma^t ingnutetne, etc. geese moult
Aug. tlngm^t tingnutet tingma^t tingnutetne, etc. geese fly
Sept. chtipfik iikshd^k chtipfik tikshd^me, etc. autumnal drift ice
Oct. kirat&r'vfk k&ratllvlg'me, etc. masquerading time
Nov. chsfuyir'vik chauy&rivlg'me, etc. drum-dance season
Dec. uev!k uevlg'me, etc. making the round
606. Along the seacoast, above the mouth of the Yukon, deer
are abundant and geese are less numerous. Hence May has another
name there : tantQt lr'n6vttt = deer breed ox fawn season.
607. The difference between the names of July and August is
very slight. These two names are rarely used. During this time
the daylight is almost continuous.
608. The question wfiat month is it? is rendered by a peculiar
idiom :
chUveyughw^ p&glni = what is it doing straight up there ?
When asking this question the speaker always points up to the sky.
609. The verb forms expressing it is such a moon are gfiven in full.
it is January Srr<ilthhaugw5k
it is February ktipnQqch6flgw6k
it is March t!ngm§lrqthl5rVeugw5k
it is April t!ngm!r*veQgw5k
it is May m^net ^ngutiikk&t i
it is June t^lrayikfirveOgwdk
it is July tingma^t Ingnutiikkdt
226
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
it is August
it is September
it is October
it is November
it is December
tingmailt tlngnutiikk^t
chtipfeugwok iikshd^r'me
kiratar'veugw6k
chauyArdveugwdk
ueveugwok
It is not necessary to repeat all the forms, as they are easily
recognized, as :
uevlkiln when it is December
uev!qpilgjin before December (604)
610. The Innuit seem to have had no special names for the days
of the week. Those, however, who have come in contact with the
whites readily adopted the following terms, which were settled upon
by the early Russian traders.
These terms all follow the regular declension. The localis case
is given, as it is the most used. Example : ftgiyilniir*m6, on Sunday,
Intrans.
Loc,
Sunday
^iyun5k
^giyundr'me
prayer day
Monday
piikyun
piikyutme
work day
Tuesday
iper!n
iperetme
second work day
Wednesday p!ngghiyur!n
plngghiySratme third work day
Thursday
st^m^rtn
stiimiretme
fourth work day
Friday
tatlemSrIn
t&tlemSretme
fifth work day
Saturday
m^kaen5k
m^aeniir'me
bath day
611. The verb form :
is Sunday
Sgiyunrodk
IS Monday
piikyutgnodk
is Tuesday
ipSritgho6k
IS Wednesday
plngghiy!ritgho6k
is Thursday
st^m^rltghook
is Friday
t&tlemgritgnook
IS Saturday
Year
maWnro6k
612.
Sing,
Dual.
Plur,
Intrans,
aithhrakdk
aithhrakuk
aithhrikut
Trans,
^Ithhr^kum
Loc,
Ulthhr^kume
aithhrikiigne aithhrSkune
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
NUMERALS — EXAMPLES
227
613.
Sing.
Intrans,
Srraidk
Trans,
grrilum
Loc
Srraiume
etc.
etc.
614.
Sing,
Intratis,
ttr'niik
Trans,
tirriinrhtim
Loc,
iirrGnniir'me
etc.
etc.
Month
Dual.
^rr^luk
iirrtinriig'ne
etc.
Plur.
Srraiut
Srriliigne
Srr^lune
etc.
etc.
Day
Dual. •
Plur.
iirrOnrQk
iirriinrtit
tirriinniir'ne
etc.
EXAMPLES
615. On the use of UthhiIkOk :
When this is used in the possessive it follows the regular
declension (31).
^Ithhr^ktink^ ^mthlSrtut m&ne I have been here many years
^Ithhrdkiitii dmthldrtut m^ne thou hast been here many years
^Ithhr^kwe ^mthldrtut m^ne he has been here many years
This, literally, is my years lure are many. The negative is :
illthhr^kiink^ ^mthllnratut m^ne
cheugh^tne t^mdr'mung ^Ithhr&kut
my years here are not many
ante omnia saecula
616. Time when is expressed by the localis case.
^Ithhrlgne last year
y^la^gne year before last
illthhrilgnem &m^tegn6 three years ago (387)
ukug'ne althhrdgne year after next (273) (dual)
When pftk is added to time expressions it conveys the idea of duration,
illthhr^kdqp&k the whole year, all the year, during the year
KO&kftn, which appears to be the third singular of k&mA (514)1 when
added to time expressions, conveys the idea of succession or consecution,
dlthhr^ko^kiln every year
Kfi is the characteristic of when in the future (624).
^Ithhr^ku next year
228
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
EXAMPLES
617. On the use of SrrilSk, tpioon or month:
suigumg ^rrilum^
Srr^lOg'ne aiiqktig'ne
ukOme ^rrillume
ukum ^rr&lum chS5kla^ne
ukum ^rr^lum kingghukla&ng
^rr^lunilk^n
£rril5k k^shiikluku
m^n& ^rr^ldk n^ngkin
m^n^ drr^l5k ndngvilg^n
uk&gne ^rr^ltigne
618. Day, night, etc. :
iir'ntiqp^k
^kw^w&k
y^la^gne
y^lSilku
taiikut lirrtinrtit ktnggho^thtin
unw^u
unw^ku ^t^kome
drrtinrhiim kokilne
linw^ko^kin
uno^k = uno^m = Ond^me
uno^y^k
uniik = unum, uniiktdk, uniik^n
unum kok&ne
unuqp^k
n^ththl5kfiqt5k ^kilqti
last month
two months ago
next month
before next month
after next month
every month
the whole month through
when this month ends
before this month ends
two months from now
during the day, the whole day
yesterday
day before yesterday
day after to-morrow
after these days
to-morrow
to-morrow night
at midday
every morning
early morning
very early morning
night, it is night, when it is night
at midnight
all night
it is about noon (i.e., the sun
nears the zenith)
619.
Promiscuous Time Expressions
emume
emumg unugumS
emOm chdugh^ne
emum k!nggn5^ne
emukiinndr'ntik
cheQgn^raktin
taum cheugh^ne
taum kinggnoSne
at that time
during that night
some time before
some time after
from that time
a little while before
before that time
after that time
PROMISCUOUS TIME EXPRESSIONS
229
m^tume
at this time
m^tume
unugume
during this
» night
m^ttim cheugn^ne
before this time
m^tiim kinggnoine
after this time
hw^kiinn^r'niik
from now
klnggno&rakiin
a little while after
ketodne
then after
620. The following are idiomatic expressions derived from modes,
etc. The use
of these is shown
in the various examples throughout
the grammar.
^t&^t^
by and by
lllene
another time
^t^tiko^k^n
every minute
niltne
sometimes
^t^^t^ku
in a moment
illekun
sometimes
^kk^ t^m^n^
in old times
pikshiat6k
not yet
^kkine tilm^ne
in the remote past
t^mm^
at once
^kulaunilku
frequently
t^m^ktinn^r'niik
since long ago
ch^me
when }
t^miitum n^thlene
in olden times
ch^m niene
one time, once
taum kiegh^gne
during this time
chM lUetne
sometime
toiine
then
ch^t illitne
sometimes
uk^kfalihtin
pretty soon
echevaku
later on
ukiiniku
in the future.
hwSnekodrqku
presently
umeku
next time
hwin^rp^k
now meanwhile
umifk^niku
after a while
hw^tod p!nrat5k
: it is not the time now &taatako6rqku
by and by
621.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
Intrans, ^kkw^w&thl^k
^kkw^w^thlak
^kkwjiwathlat
Trans, . ikkwiw^thl^m
Loc, ^Udcw^wdthl^me
^kkw^w^thl^ne
^kkw^w^thl^ne
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
hw^tolthliik the now thing
unnwilthldk the morning thing
Cr'nur'mathlak the to-day thing
^Ithhr^g'nathl^k the last year thing
tuluk^ruk ^kw^wdthl^k
the crow which was killed yesterday (i.e., the yesterday was crow,
" killed " being understood)
ttintu unnw^thl&k the deer killed this morning
Some words expressing time end in t&k, as, Sltlihrftnet&k Uthhr&net&t
chAngat, last year's grass. Fresh ox green grass is expressed by niit&rftt
ch&ngat.
230
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
622.
tim^tft uet^nauqtutA unw^kulthhrilntin
un w^kulthhr^ntin
unulthhr^ndn
^tikulthhr^niin
^Ithhr^kulthhr^niin
623.
^kk^t^m^n^
^kk^tilm^ne
^kk^t^m^n^n^r'ntik
^kk^t^m^nen^qsttin
may you live till to-morrow !
until to-morrow
until to-night
until evening
until next year
olden times
in olden times
from olden times
as in olden times
624. Whetiy meaning "at what future time?" is to be rendered
by kftkQ.
625. When, meaning "at what past time?'* is rendered by kinvSk.
Note i. — M6 is frequently added for emphasis, and also tinOm.
Note 2. — Both these words invariably require the interrogative aspect.
k^ku tkecherkset
kanvik tkechet
kingvir^me t^nQm pllthhuyed!
when will you come ?
when did you come ?
when in the world did I do it !
All expressions relating to future time terminate in fi.
All expressions signifying duration terminate in pftk.
There appears to be no word to express time.
The Interjections
626. The usual interjections or exclamatory words used in Innuit
are very numerous. The following list comprises many words, some
of which, strictly speaking, are not interjections, but as they are
often used in an exclamatory sense they are included here for the
sake of convenient reference.
^gnu
ang
ch^ll
chiyet
igliMta
iqcha
ch^lacho^
elthli
ah
ataata
ch^la k&
hwi
aka
at^m
chgl^kv^
hwiki
akik^ka
at^m Ikeka
chen
hwikik
^k^keka
authlu hwi
chenhw^
hwiklkhwi hwin6hwi
ikiyumean
authlu thlQ
chen me
hwih5k
^klcka
chimi
chen me h wine hwi
hwine
INTERJECTIONS
231
hw^nehw^
k^nn&
nut^n
ta^thlohdk ^m
hw^nu
kipik k^
nut^nthluhdk
taithluhak hwi
hwik
kgke
nauhw^
ta^tfi
hw^thlu
keta
nalihwime
tai
hw^thluthlu
ket^ke
nauhw^naii
tai ikek^
hwitfi
ket&keme
p^t^g^muk
taihwi
Tkkeke
kithlun
ting
taihak
ikkekeki
kithlun me
toika
taika
iyume^n
kiyuhwi
taaith
taikwi
lyumein h5k
kiyume
to^thle
taime
k^
k5k^h
to^thletaa
taiyuhwi
k^ng
kokok^
ta^thlu
taiyunratak
k^ngn^thlu hw^
ml (and the rest in
361) toithluhdk
tikkukuki
627. Mm. This is a very common expletive, and is used as an
enclitic after such words as are intended to be emphatic : ftmhiim,
hwfttnhiim, etc.
umhtim k^nrutl^r^kut
how he often told us
628. The following expressions are also exclamatory, and are
mostly in the augmentative form. Thus they correspond to the
superlative degree.
Note. — TftnVm, indeed^ can be added to these.
629.
^Il!ngn6kfa
oh, how terrible !
drr^nka^lpcl
oh my 1 (irritation, impatience, etc.)
^qch^k^qp^
now that is too much !
ics^n^kf^
what a pity !
IdizhgTiuep^
how shameless !
kemiiqttkiiqchevi
what a fine dog !
nundnlrqp^ m^tume
oh, how nice it is here I
^thiantiksiqpa
an unexpected guest !
mlklenevi
well, so small !
^sh^rqp^
how fine !
^shep^
how bad !
&ll!ngn6kpetle
it is most dreadful I
tathmr'ndkpetle
it is most welcome !
kweyin6kpetl6
it is most gratifying !
hw^tlekek^petld
many thanks !
232
ESSEA'TIALS OF INNUIT
630. Such words as one of a pair, one of a sety a matey a fellow y etc.,
arc expressed in Innuit by inglfi. As there is no one distinctive
word in English which corresponds exactly to this, the translation is
often somewhat awkward in appearance.
unSttifche ingluet thleydrinki, Ingluetil at6q'yug'nilthketniin
I place one of your hands where the other cannot touch it (lit, your
fingers their set I put them, their mates to where they cannot
touch) •
The word "hand" is expressed hy fingers (749), hence the verb
is plural. Ingiaet is the third plural intransitive, and ingiaetl the
w
third plural transitive of the possessive. At0q*yfig*niltliketniin is the
third plural terminalis of fttflq'yflg'nnthkOmnto, from fttdq'yllg'iutUcI,
I cannot reach it {77),
631.
Irrumi Inglo^ dkk^nimkiin
just as I had one foot in the canoe
Irruvut inglod (ikk^nOqpghiin
just as thou hadst one foot in the canoe
Irrume Ingloii dkkilnr^kdn
just as he had one foot in the canoe
Lit., of my leg its matCy my legs mate just embarked (canoe under-
stood); ukkOft, I embark y enter a boaty etc. =ukkftkft.
632. Ingliipe&nkfltdk is used to express a person who is one-eyed.
This is in the possessive. Mode I. Lit., he has one of a pair.
633. InglOftqtiikQt kft? are we more tlian halfway? = are we in its
other (half part)? etc. (For halfway y see 638.)
634. inglu$lghdk (133). In native stories this word expresses
a certain monster resembling a many but divided at the median line;
a half man (636).
635.
Sing.
Dual.
Plur.
Intrans.
inglu
!ngluk
inglut
Trans.
inglum
Loc.
inglume
Inglug'ne
inglune
Mod.
inglumQk
!nglug*nuk
Ingluntik
lerm.
ingliimtin
inglugntin
• ingluniin
Vial.
inglukun
inglug'ndrghtin
ingluthtin
j^qual.
inglutiin
' ingluqtun
tnglutstQn
VARIA 233
636. The possessive form :
Intrans, Trans,
Sing. ingluldi inglumd
Dual ingluqk^ ingltigmd
Piur, inglunk^ Inglum^
637. Each set is conjugated through all the persons, and each
person has its full set of cases, as usual.
Intrans, Trans. Loc,
my mate Yngluk^ tnglum^ Inglumne, etc.
thy mate Inglun ingluvOt Ingluvne, etc.
his mate ingloi Inglo^n Inglo^ne, etc.
638. The third persons are most frequently used.
Sing, Dual, Plur,
Intrans, inglo^ ingluk Ingluet
Trans, ingl5^n ingluet^
Loc, Ingloine Ingltig'ne ingluetne
639. The word ill&kft means my friend, associate^ relative, etc.
The full paradigm is given in 644. To each person belongs, as
usual, a full set of cases, as :
my
thy
his
Intrans.
iimka
man
!lle
Trans,
mama
mavut
iHen
Loc.
llldmne
mavne
illenc
Mod,
Iliamniik
illavnOk
illentik
dc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
640. The verbal form is illftkSkl
makumku ka una pecherkan?
if I add this (i.e., to what I have offered or paid you), will you do it ?
641. The partitive form is niihSk (320).
mahrentik pingkatoa I have a bit or portion of it
642. Examples of Olftkftkft in various modes ; OlXngkfltOft, the pos-
sessive. Mode I :
klttumiik Illangkachet
whom have you with you.? (this is an example in the interrogative
aspect of the possessive mode)
illakleutaka I join with him Iliaiaranka I often add to them
234
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
643. illlr'lOki, flUr'ian, Olir'Uyft = my poor friend. This form occurs
occasionally, and is declined as in 184.
hw^tk&pfk ^shllriimiik Illithldunaut
there is not a good one in the whole lot
644.
Sing,
Dual <
Plur,
my
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
nuik^
Timqki
ill^nk^
► thy
Sing,
Dual
Plur.
iimn
lllaqkft
niitft
his
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
k.
nie
lll^k
nil
we both, our
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
lllihpuk
ni&qpuk
illapuk
you both, your -
' Sing.
Dual
Plur.
ni^zdk
ill^qtuk
nmtuk
they both, their «
' Sing.
Dual
Plur.
niek
limqk^k
ill^^k
our
' Sing.
Dual
Plur.
*
tll^hput
ni^qput
niiput
your
' Sing,
Dual
Plur.
nmze
nmqche
ill^che
their
Sing.
Dual
Plur.
lllet
nmqk^t
tllit
Ill^Lgm^
Iimml
nUviit
ill^qpYt
illiviit
nien
nUqkft
lllin
ni^miigntik
tlligmiigniik
lU^mtigntik
niaftiik
Ill^qptfik
ill^fttik
lUegntik
ni^qk^nklL
ni^k^nk^
niiimt^
ni^gmta
!ll^mta
nmfche
{Mqpche
lllifche
llleti
iirnqk^tti
Yllit^
645. To express certain. Certain, a certain person, a certain time,
etc., are expressed idiomatically by OlAkft. The peculiarity of the
idiom consists in the use of the plural according to the following
examples :
VARIA 235
a certain man two certain men certain men
Intrans, yut illet yut IlliqkSt yut !Uit
Trans. yut illeta yut lUaqk^tti yut tllita
yut Illet tketok a certain man came yut illet^ pe^ a certain man did it
yut niiti ukfQkk&ksitl^rit iin^ certain men do not believe this
tifiinr^t niitne on certain days na'ut illetniik from a certain fruit
646. Ofie time, on a certain occasion, sometime, etc., are expressed
by a combination of this form and chi, as :
Sing, chat llletne Plur, ch^t lllitne
chat niitne pirqchirriUqtdk m^na sometimes it is stormy here
Note. — Chim UlSnS, another time.
647. This means my other one, my comrade, etc.
Sing, iepaka Dual iepaqka Plur, iepanka
648. The personal form, declined as in 73 :
Intrans. Trans. Loc.
my iepaka lepama lepamne
thy iepan iepavtit iepavne
his iepa iepan iepane
649. Examples of some of the usual verb forms :
ieplngkatoa (Mode I) I have another
iepitoa (Mode VI) I have no other (no comrade)
iepaunand (511) alone, without another
iepakaka it is my other
650. All is expressed as follows :
Sing, Dual. Plur,
Intrans. tamaithkdk tamalthkuk tamaithkut
Trans. tamaithkum
Loc. tamalthkume tamaithkQg'ne tamalthkune
etc, etc. etc. etc.
651. Various forms of t&m<hkOk :
tamalthktinratok tamaithkugw5k
tamaithkiinrllgndk tamalthkugn5k
tamaithktilraa
236
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
652.
653.
Sing,
Dual
Plur,
I
thou
he
he
we both
you both
they both
they both
t^m^lthk5r'm&
I
t^m&r^m^
t^m^lthk5rpTt
Sing. "
thou
t^m^qpit
t^m^lthko^n
he
t^men
tim^lthk6r'ma
he
t^m^r^ma
tdm^lthkdinniik
t^m^lthkdrqpttik
t^m^lthko^gniik
t^maithkdr'mttk
tim^lthkomt^
tamahhk6fche
t^m^lthkwet^
t^milthk5r'm{ing
Dual -
/%/r. <
we both
you both
they both
they both
we
you
they
they
t^m^mntik
tam^qptfik
t^miqk^nk^
t^m^r&mtik
t^m^mt^
t^m^^he
t^mit^
t^mirimiing
MISCELLAlfSOUS
654.
t^milthkdk timirika
t^m^lthko^n peyug^ki
ukut t^mit or ukut tilm^r'mting
nauthlulraet tim^r'mting m^vut tikllet
ipske tdmiti
taukuk aPn^k t^m^r'mtik tokok
chdr5t dche^tniin thl6luku t^m^lthko^n
ch^-tam^r'ma mdnt5k
ch^t-t^miir'mting m^ntut
t^m^lthkunratut !llit petut
t^m^lthkunrilgndk peyunr^t^klL
t^mimtS iy^qtukut
chil-t^men t^ngh^
chat-t&mat peyug'iari
t^in^lthk5r'md iy^qchShkdi
timat atsat
nun^ t&men
tamaithkweta tifk^ke
I lost the whole of it = it all
I want it all
all these
let all the sick come here
ask them all
those two women, both dead
he, putting the whole of it under
the bed-mat
everything is here
all things are here
some parts are wanting
I do not want one which is not
complete
we all go
he sees ever3rthing
he wants all things
I '11 go, having all my things
all kinds of berries
the whole world
make them all come
655. // is a/most all is expressed by tSm&klaugwOk ; the negative is
tftm&klaunrfttdk. This has all the usual forms.
VARIA
237
my
The possessive :
r S, timiikiaka
t^m^kllqkd
D, timakliqka thy
r. timaklinka
S, t^mdkltn
D, tamakUrqkn
T'. timaklitn
656. The case forms
Intrans,
my t^m^klik^
thy tilm^klin
his tilm^kle
657. The transitive:
Trans,
my t^m^kllmi
thy tam&klirp!t
his tdmdklen
my
thy
his
658.
t^m^klen peughw^
t&m^kllqk^nk^ peughwik
t^mikliti peughwi
t^m^kliig'ma hw^ntdk
t^m^kl^g'mtik hw^ntuk
t^m^kl^'mting hw^ntut
A few of the adjutant forms:
t^m^klauk^n
t^m^klauwSMn
t^m^kl^g'm^
tdm^klirpit
t^milkl^gma
etc.
S, t^m^kle
his \ D, t^m^klek
Loc.
in my t&m^kllmne
in thy t^m^klirfne
in his tim^klene
he wants almost all of it
he wants almost all of both
he wants almost all of them
it is almost all here
both are almost all here
all are almost all here
tdm^klaugndn
t^m^klaur^n
659.
Sing,
Dual
Plur,
Intrans,
tugnilthk6k
tughllthkuk
tugnilthkut
Trans.
tugnilthkum
Loc.
tugnilthkume, etc.
tughilthkug'ne, etc.
tugnilthkune, etc.
The Possessive Intransitive (Singular)
660. Sing. Dual. . Plur.
my tughllthkoka we both, our tugnilthkorpuk our tugnilthkorput
thy tugTiilthkoSn you both, your tugnilthkdrtiik your tug'h!lthk6rche
his tugnllthkocl theyboth, their tugnilthkaSk their tugnflthkoiit
238 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
The Possessive Transitive
Sing. DuaL Plur.
my tughilthkom^ we both, our tughilthkdmniik our tughilthk5mt&
thy tugnilthk6r*p!t you both, your tugntlthk6rqpttik your tughtlthkdrpche
his tughilthkoan they both, their tughilthk5r'mtik their tughilthkoeti
The Verb Form
tughilthkdk&k^ tughllthkokimkin, etc.
662.
n^kkllkk^nki tOghTlthkOnk^ I love my relatives
k^ssuchikonik tugnilthkdr'pit Illetniik do not marry any near relative
tauni tugnllthkok^k^ this person is my relative
tughllthkok^mkln you are my relative
The Possessive Intransitive
663.
Sing,
DuaL
Plur.
my ttingki
we both, our t&ngvuk
our
tiingviit
thy tiingft
you both, your ttingztik
your
tiingze
his ttinge
they both, their tiingek
The Possessive Transitive
their
tiinget
Sing,
Dual.
Plur.
my tiingm^
we both, our tungntimntik
our
tungiimt^
thy ttingvtit
you both, your tungmtiftiik
your
tungiifche
his ttingen
they both, their tungmiik
their
tunget^
EXAMPLES
664.
tttngghutft chuchukeke love your relatives
hwinehwi tungmi itri this is the name of my next (brother or sister)
ttn tunge tketdk his next to him comes (i.e., a brother or sister)
ch^gTiugn^ chirumgrn tunghentin I turn off towards the left
ivvuskut hwinkuta frkklum tungTientik deliver us from evil
plnggTiiyun ka"uw^ngkit6k tGngghe
there are three sleeps to it (i.e., four days distant)
VARIA
239
665. The possessive :
Sing.
Dual,
my ttingHldi
thy tunglen
his tungle^
we bothy our tungllqk^
you both, your tungliqkfi
they both, their tunglek
Plur.
our tunglinkl
your tungletfi
their tungle
This also means adjoining or next to mcy and expresses a brother
or sister next in age.
The verb form is :
ttinglelir^k^
^komo^ tiinglelir'lutfi
tiingle^ nQm y^kshlqtdk
tiingle^t nun^t yikshlqtut
ttingletntin nun^ntin !yiqt5k
I am next to him
I sit next to you
the next house is far off
the next village is far off
he went to the next village
666. Tttngenlign5k, tilngSnlignU, tilng6nUgniit.
tungenliglidk tket5k the next one comes
667. TiinglS&nlighOk, tiingenlighfik, tOngenligniit, the one next to the
second.
tung]e^nl!gh5k peyug^k^
I want the third one from it
668. KfimA signifies alone. It has the usual series of forms, the
use of which will be understood by the references.
Sing,
r I kema
thou kevtit Dual
he keme
we both kemntik
you both kifttik Flur,
they both kemtik
'' we kimti
you kifche
they kemting
KfimA may go with any suitable verb.
kem^ m^ntod
chen kevtit m^nchet
kem& iyiqchShkoi
kemd iy^g'lo^
I am here alone
why do you stay here alone ?
I will go alone
I am going alone
nun^vtit keme nundnrat5k, chdla !ll^ngkS.t5k m^lronllg'ndk
our earth is not an earth alone, for it has seven comrades
K6mA takes also the ending mittO& (383).
yine kemltt6k
he is off there alone
240 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
669. KSmft may assume any compatible mode.
kem^chCiqto^ I wish to be alone (Mode LXII)
kem^chCinkuqtoi I like to be alone
kemthlirqtaa I am left alone (Mode XCIX;
670. Each of the nine persons has its full set of cases, as, kemft,
kemnS, kemniik, etc.; kevttt, keynS, kfiynuk, etc.
671. For kem&liich&kft see paradigm (153).
672. KfimA is also used to express only. The good only enter
heaven = the good alone. Only, in the sense of simply y merely y is
rendered by taligw&m.
673.
una keghin pek^ki this one alone I have = I have only this one
ukuk keqkinki pek&qka these two alone I have = I have only these two
ukut kegheti pek^nk^ these alone I have = I have only these
674.
' kah^r'm^
Sing, \ kah^qput Dual
kah^r'ma
f y —
f kahdmta
kahdfche
kah^r'miing
kah^rm^ unetitgli^ they deserted me = left me alone
kah^mntik
kah^fttik Plur, \
kah^r'mtik
675. Kflharma appears to differ very little from kemft (668).
The following examples present a few of the verb forms.
kahannechtiqto& I want to be alone
kahir'mechunrStoi I do not want to be alone
kahar'mittoii m&ne I am here alone (383)
chen kahar'mechet m^ne ? why do you stay alone here ?
V
kahar'mllgnen^nimne yum tket^ng^
in my being alone a man came to me
nulaa.kilraek uet^lraek ' kwegum snene kahir'miik toi
a married couple were living alone on the bank of a river
hw^t^ athldmtik thlu yug'miik illaun^tuk
they two being without any other person with them (510)
676.
Intrans, my pek^ pekika pek^^k^
Trans, my pemi pek^m^ pek^k^m^
Loc, in my pifmne pek^mne pekakdmne
pekAka
241
Pekft = myy and is declined according to the paradigm {^J^).
pek& mlntdk
chlker^mkin pem^ !llitniik
chiker^mkfn pem^ illetniik
hwe peki peyug^ki
pek^ n^nt^
chiker^mkin p!mntik
plmniin thleu
petfi yintut
n&zvlg!zgfa^ pYvnCik
kegh&n pek&puk
mine is here
I give you some of mine
I give you any of mine
I want mine
where is mine ?
I give you mine
put it in mine
yours are yonder
show me yours
it is the only one we (both) have
p!mktin iye
go by mine (when it is mutually understood what the speaker refers to,
as, my sled^ my canoe, etc.)
And in like manner may be said:
kea peine
hwe pimne
pfmtiin lyoklaraluku
in whose is it ?
it is in mine
make it like mine
677. PSkSkft = // is mine. This is the verb form. (See paradigm,
683.)
ukut pekinki, md,kut Ithlim pekit these are mine ; those belong to another
um peka this one owns it
hwe pekiika it is mine = I own it
kea. pika"u uni whose is this? = who owns this?
nilUeiik piksei which one is mine ?
Examples of pCkSmft :
pllleiki hwc^nkuti pek^mtnCik
kiyeyug'h*1 hwe pekimntik
chlmuk chikk^rch^hsei pek&mniik
taguche pekdp^tsniik
Gqkaoqtok pimnuk
Gqkaoqtok pekSmnuk
uqka6qt6k pekimeniik
kdthl&chunitoil peyukum'ntik
kathlatnr^tod peyukumnuk
peyukumnuk from peyuqtod
he made them for us
I make a canoe for myself
what will you give me for mine ?
take for yourselves
he cuts my wood
he cuts wood for me
he cuts wood for himself
I cannot say what I want
I do not say what I want
my wanted thing (Mode LXII)
/
242
ESSENTIALS OF INNl/IT
c
E S)8
U^ C op B
e
o« o« o«
MB
>3 c >3 - *-
.Sg
0« M
c2
e
>3
fi &E C cr«S >«; o"^
tM>««>M ia>M>M IOJ>«mIU
0« O, 0« Cl»Ci*Gu
ad.
eUe ^'gi^
a o« o« o« a o«
e
>§ S-s
*i j< CO
•U >= 'Si
aaou
3
C
C>3 S
>3 J< >3
B g)E
c
O. D. a D. D. CU
Ou 0« Ou
c
e>;3 c
>3 jC >3
M box
*V G*V
c -bo c
60>;3 60
>9 a >9
e
^>«; bo
k" e ^
>4; ,= K>
C 60C
•boS Sf
>S »M >M
aao.
u c ^
e
>9 jC >9
»2>E*S
E bcE
c
c >? c
>3 jC >3
>a
•r* ♦*
e
** M JS
0« D. D, 0« Qu a O. O. CL
•
e
c:>:3 c
!
>3 C>3
G a G
B S)S
>p« |«« tr^
e;
ao.a
e
e >3 c
C3>0. C
> o* >
>S >»• »!*
aaa
^ c
>? c c
i«» »^ ly
aa.fi*
e
c •«) c
60>3 bO
8 S)E
c
c:>2 c
>3 .C >3
c bo c
•bc'2'J«
a o* o.
c
>3 C
e c >3
C >^b0
bO Jj K>
i«» >^ lU
aa a
G
e>3 c
E^a
t«« >«« »>M
a a a
e
= S c
•5 *R »S
aa a
S G
c
C >** >3
o. aa
I
>3 c >3
E 1)1
a*aa
>3 c >3
> o'>
»mm tmm >m
aaa
^3
i«» iH to
aaa
>3 B >3
C M) c
b0>3 60
>3 B >3
E^S
*a*aa
>3 .C ,3
,C to B
to>2'w)
>3 jS,>3
*!? »^ »tJ
aaa
^ C >3
B >«> 60
bC M >1»
lO >^ IV
a afi.
J«>3.M
>3 B >3
*< >fl w
eUe
*a*H.U
>3
•^ E<^
>3 «>3
»»; »5» >S
aaa
E H* >3
*tJ4 B
lU tH iv
aaa
.^ E &E
G
B
^.
aaa
iv
B
E
it> B IV
B>a B
> O" >
»M »M »M
aaa
10)
IV
B
IV
E
IV
%»« c
IV
IV >X IV
aaa
CO-*-
bo>3 bo
>3 E >3
E &E
aaa
IV
IV JP IV
B tO,C
*bc'2 ^
>3 >a»5
>M >«• tM
aaa
IV
'bOB
IV
B
IV
B >v' CO
tCj^ >V
IV )^ IV
aaa
IV
IV B IV
e|dS
»P« >M >«M
aaa
IV
c
IV S 'V
B-g E
IM >7 >M
aaa
IV
B
IV *^
B H) IV
♦--ii{ E
ly iH ly
fi.afi.
^
£ g,E
IV >S'iv
aaa
>3 a>3
> o" >
*tm tm* *^
aaa
IV >5 IV
aaa
•3 E >3
CjC B
E SdE
aaa
>M >M >^
aaa
^ Jl( ><«
>3 E-^
B>v C
IV >^ IV
aaa.
e boE
*^* >•" >»■
aaa
IV
IV -g IV
>S >M >.i«
aaa
IV t^ ly
aaa
I
■5
>** ><^ **5
■V >M >M
aaa
>B
>M >«M ly
aaa
J4
IV ly
ao.
'S,'
•3 cl"3
> o^a
ly >^ ly
Ou aa
>2 »2^iv
aaa
■v >^ *y
aaa
>3 g.>3
> cr a.
IV w; IV
aaa
IV
>M >«« IV
aaa
»v
IV >^ IV
aaa
^ Q b
Xs »
>1i
io^^ c;5c^«s;
1:50^$; c^q5; c;5^^
N:
?
^|i ^ji ^1i
4^5; 4'55; Bi^a;
E
00
CO
^
x
.a
3
O
V
3
O
3
O
a
^
V
V
3
o
3
O
>%
"V-
w
pekAkA
'^Atl
679. Peklkftkft is the prospective form = // is for mine. As the
endings are always the same, there is no need of a paradigm.
ukuk pek^klqkll
ukut pek^k^nki
Neg,
un^ peklklnrat^k^
ukuk pek^klnrat^qki
ukut pek^kinrat^nkd
The §ibove means thisy both tkescy these are for me^ to be mine, and
the negatives.
The interrogative would be as follows :
un^ k^ pek^ldlk^
nun^k^kik^
chorok&klk^
is this for me.'* is this to be mine.^ etc.
it is for my residence
it is for my bed
680. In the same manner, the past and future forms are to be
used (90).
Intrans.
pilthka
pilthk&ka
pethlGk
pethltiqk^k
pethltiqk^kii
Trans,
pllthm^
pilthkima
pethltirm
pethliiqk^m
pethliiqkiim&
Loc.
pSthlimne, etc.
pilthk^mne, etc.
pethlttrme, etc.
pethliiqkame, etc.
pethltiqk^mne, etc.
681. The transitive of pSugh& (686) gives a corresponding set.
Two examples are shown, meaning my doing and // is my doing.
Intrans.
pe^kl
pedk^^
• Trans.
pe^m^
pelk^m^
Loc.
peimne, etc.
pe^k^mne, etc.
682.
MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES
1 pik, pem, plgme (214)
2 pepik, pepem, peplg'me (215)
3 penok, pinrhiim and the negative pinrStnok (159)
the doing
4 pech€k, pechem deed (152)
pechak^, pechm3, my deed
5 pechSrriy^r^k, pechSrriyirim way of doing (2 1 7)
pechSrr!yarakl, pechgrriyirami my way
244 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
6 p6wik, pewem, pewig'me place of doing (117)
pewek^ my place of doing
pewekakil it is my place of doing
7 pech^lthk^, pechllthm^ my game
8 peiqk^k what ought to be done, duty (203)
9 peiklik, pe^klem one big enough, fit to do (162)
pe^kl!g6k, peikligfim, pedklTg'me big enough to work
peakhgoika I am fit, etc., to work
10 peyfln, peyut&m (108)
peyun6k, peyunrhttm and its negative peyunrStn6k (161)
this is used to express action, as, to walk, etc.
11 pekalin, pekalittim a thing intended for something (116)
pekauthliik, etc. a thing which was intended for something
pekautkak, etc. . a thing to be intended for something
V
pekalitka a thing which is to be mine
V
pekalitn a thing which is to be thine
pekalite a thing which is to be his (and so on, through
all the persons and cases) (148)
Note. — This ending can be added to any noun, as, nfilfiqklkll, it is my cord;
nfllfiqkaiitki, cord intended for me^ which is to be mine when made. (See Mode LXXIII.)
P6n5k (No. 3) ; p6chSk (No. 4).
One of the most interestyjg. philosophical attributes of the Innuit
language is displayed in these two endings. They merit particular
attention from the fact that the suffix n5k expresses the substantive
when viewed objectively, while that in chSk shows it as considered
subjectively.
Objective Subjective
kemlutn6k kemluch^k loneliness
keputndk kepuch^k purchase
PSagnA, / do^ and its various inflections, afford a great number of
idioms, many of which exactly resemble our own use of this verb, as,
did you go ? I did.
pilralrougha kiiskof^g^mtik I am from the Kuskokwim
keycl pilra&tn now you have done it
peok he is dead (a curious idiom)
peok he saw, he said
yut thlu peluke and he told the people
Peugh&, in Mode LXVIII, becomes pSugwOft, I anty exist, etc., and
from this form is derived pS&skiin, pSuskCttum, existence.
PARADIGM OF PEKAkA
245
5t
S'
I'
— J^^^
^j^_^
r ■»
r •\
he is
they * are
they are
thou art
you * are
you are
peki
pekik
peki
(it ni (tt
VrTTTT
P< PM P<
p- C( 3<
«i?r
3!
5'
3
3
t
<
H^
n
(V
P
P
kS
3
S
P
3
sr3*5
rt » 1:
(t
M
a
fti r»i fti
^I'Si'g.
m ni (ti
•O'O'O
rti rti rti
m m oi
w >r 7<r
TTtTTT
TT^T"
?r >r jr
^TTTT
px P< P<
PM P( p<
PM pxpc
P( Pt pK
PM PK pK
CI CI 3^
^ 7<r px
U3 >0 »Q
3>0 ^
?r X- P<
3 3 3
S-55
•* ?rP*
PM3
CI CI CI
P< PM
3
*♦ >r p<
Si ?r3
s
CO
3*
3*
A
n
►*•
3
3
M
k»
A
j^^
'^ N
3* 3* «
O ST
is
ey * are
ey are
c c 2
p »^
3 p p
n> c; -1
•0*0 "O
•o-o^o
rti rti rti
rti m rti
TTTTTT
?r ?r ?r
^p< Pf
px px px
JOtXi^
pr
n r* r*
Cf
3-C< 3<
rti K
r*
v<
3*
o
C
3
3
M
M
A
X
' \
' "»
i%^
r» r» JJ*
3- 3-rt
(fi (fi p
n» rt **
p '*3
^^ 5'
S p
p »»
a
fti rti rti
ni fti <ti
>r7r ?r
?r TT >r
;:;' ;;• p*
P( Pi px
>r jr 3.
s-e?
C CI TO.
'^gigi
px
o
c
■1
Wfti rtl
TT^T-
p< p< p<
»o^,o
•0<"0''0<
r* f* r*
C< C< C(
pOjD(n
TTTT^
Ci CI S<
C
e
3
3
u
M
. -^^
A
t \
^ 2: 3*
^ *< c
^^n
cr
(t n
P •*
2 g o
p »a *-
3 P (^
» Si 2.
•o-o -o
•0*0 "O
ni m <Ti
ftl fti rtl
jr ?r TT
?r pr >r
p( P< pM
PX PM p<
ci-o-o
muqt
muqt
muqc
sr c( 3<
rti ?<r
»0
e:
3*
7".
3*
3*
a
■1
(/3
o
c
0>
v;
o
c
09
•o-o -3
(ti ni fti
?r ?<r TT
p;' pxpx
•s
I
!C
(0
r*
3*
Ai
•0*0
—x pc
ST "^
S!l 3-
C( 3'
•O'C'O
?<r ?r ^
» S! P«
CI CI 3)
'^ ?>f g«
•0*0*0
(ti fti m
7r TT TT
px px px
O ^ 3*
3*0 O
rti sr 3*
m Ai
•O "0*0
rti n\ fti
?r >r w
px P( px
•is .o lis
3- 3* 3*
rti rti rti
?r ?r px
Ci c
c
c
3
3
^^^^^
A
»" ■»
2. C 3*
•^ *< 2i
5^2^»
2^
p •*
c c
*i p P
3 ^
a s; 1
S '*
•S.'S.'S, .
<tl rtl fti
?r >r ?<r
?r >r?r
px px px
P( px P<
*OU3 3*
ci-o-o
3 3 3^
'^ CI CI
r* r^
<^ :i 3<
3* c* "^
rti ?r
246
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
ill sis.
iiiiii ASA
o« p« o, c^ o« o«
i3 a
19 a
IV IV IV
AAA
u u o
0« D« 0«
IV IV
>«i« JQ U3
D« 0« 0«
Mi 3 19
2P>v >v
ci2^
C)9 U
crcrcr
Mt M« Hi
>«t Mt it^
ese^es ese^es e^eses
O. O. 0« D. D. CU D, Qu 0«
8§g
e 6 6
B V V
V
6(0 CO
9 9
25a 63§ 5g.§. -255
^
V
V
9
o
9
o
V
U3
V
V
^
IS '^
e«
I
CO
<
I
o
I
25
I
e 5*0
09 (O Mtf
'a 's *R
D« O* 0«
CO
9 §
ic S j3
>9 >9 >9
s E a
%.I9 19
O. 0« O. p, D. 0«
»2 J« ♦* JK
rRl9 19 >C i9
J« IV
>C 19 43
O* O* O*
IV >V >V x« Mt x« .. . __
^.M.a< ,:a^M JAi^t^
>2?3>»^ ^>MfS WaSStg
O. Oi« D. O. 0« D. O, O. 0«
i9
I
*>*9 - C fi fi
V 5 S E V V
«i« >\ >\ J3 4>> '*'
V
H
« 1 •- s » §
ess :c:S:S
«"« « ^ S S S V §
a SS 5 §.§. 25:5
9 9
e« e« e«
V V V
AAA
** ■^ ■^
IV IV i9
ai-S 33
>a >fi >a >i« 'S'>G
p, p, o. p. p. p.
Mi 19 19
^19 t3 >c:>c
^ ^ ^ ^ o*^
p« p« p« p« p« p«
.C>9 19
IV IV IV
J4 IV
4>« '*' U
IV IV IV
19
HtH* *^
^^^ ^^^ ^^^
P« P« P« P« P« 0. P. P, P«
Si
CO
r thee
you*
.you
rhim
them*
^ them
v"*
ass
r him
them*
^ them
«}0« S'9 9 6 § 1
B99 «j>t>% A ** ■t^
Y
V
V
9
A
Y
9
A
V V V
^ .a ^
PARADIGM OF PEAkA
247
a a a
xo XV xtf
13 13 **
o. 0.0
.C 0*0.
Xtf Mt M«
IV iV IV
0« 0« D«
13 13
Ml Ji^.a<
iV IV IV
^ J3 43
A 0«0"
>C«>C« Mg
IV IV IV
aaa
IV IV
.2 JS IV
JS o* u
Xtf M4 K«
IV IV IV
^« *« «j
Xtf >v >v
IV IV IV
0« D« O*
■C *« ««
>♦* Vi en
4^ ♦rf ««
>et >v >v
IV IV IV
aa.o.
>ctf >V IV
'S.'S.'S.
' peukiit
peGche
[pcfit
c 6 B
B V V
•g JC J3
a S S
3
c a a
a V V
•2 jc ja
J3 •*« «i«
v"
« tf)
833
' thee
you*
^you
fiB «i« «4
v:
I
?
r
3
Y
V
Y
V
V
I
^
13 13 t3
€5-8
0*0*0*
13 13 13
a a a
Mtf Xtf Xtf
•S.'g.'S.
%
«
3 3
JC O O
•J: pn>*
>gaS
bco*o*
«M .^4
)30P
.:tf Jii(
>3 >3 J4
aio.>3
«>• *« ♦i*
O'O'O'
)3|3Uit
«^ ♦rf ja
JC 0*2
^ 0*0.
X« >C« M«
X» XB XO
xtf x« x«
IV IV IV
aaou
IV IV >v
0.0. 0.
IV IV IV
aao.
«
B B a
g V V
•- JC JC
e«
M en
3 3
c B a
g V V
•3 jC JC
**• J< ♦*
XS >v >v
lu IV >V
0.0.0.
IV
X« >V >V _,
IV IV IV IV IV IV
o« o« o. o« o« o«
M o*»
x« IV J4
6(0 tf)
3 3
8^3 3
c a a
a V V
JS «i« «i«
I
V
I
c«
3
3
O
V
91
V
V
.B
x«
13 13 >0
B*^ 'V
>-« B J3
a a a
X« Ml X«
IV IV IV
o.aa
x<x«
M 0*B
x4 X« X«
'S.'S.'S.
x« Ji^ «^
1.33
IS IS o
0.0.0.
O'O'O"
xt x« >rt
•V I
S.'8.
^
>^'^ t:
^ IV
B'g*>S
/B >3 13
x«>Sm«
€6-5
^
M» >C» ^Cw
X«M«X«
M« Xg IV
'S.'S.'S.
'SL'JL'S.
'S.'S.'S.
IV IV IV
ao.o«
>
«» 2 2 «,«>•'
00
CO
a S S
3
o
«
'him
them
^ them
a 3 s
thee
you*
.you
him
them
them
Y
3
A
Y
V
V
Y
V
248 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
688. In Innuit, as in the majority of languages, the article is
lacking.
yum kemuqtA tAngha the man sees the dog
kemuqt&m yuk t^nghl the dog sees the man
Nevertheless, it may be expressed as follows.
For the definite article :
kemuqtl keput^l I buy the dog
For the indefinite article :
kemuqtimtik keputo^ I buy a dog
689. The rule may be expressed thus :
A verb in &kft, used with the agentialis intransitive, represents the
definite article.
kemuqta keputdki I buy the dog
tdkuk^m iqte tlngh^k^ I see the bear's den
A verb in Oft, used with the modalis case, represents the indefinite
article.
kemuqtimiik keputol I buy a dog
t^kukilm Iqtenuk t^nghito^ I see a bear's den
690.
ka^qtdd m^lllmniik unw^koikftn '
ka^qtol ill^mniik Qnw^kolkin
kaiiqtoil lep^mniik unw^ko^kin
I am expecting a companion of
mine daily
kaiqto^ ekilmr^nttk Slr^rniiqpik I expect a sled to-day
kalqch^hko^ pdl^hwut^miik unwlku I expect a steamer to-morrow
ka^qtlhougn^ ^ngfy^mtik ^kkwlwlk I expected an angiak yesterday
kaiqt&ka milleka Sfrgrntiqpik I expect my comrade during the day
ka^qt^k.1 ek^mr^k hwiitd^ I expect the sled right away
kalqch^hk^kil ekiimr^k ^ti ^t^ I expect the sled after a little while
Qnwlko^k&n tketniyukkluku iimyu5rt5kk5^ I think he may come any day
^f-r^rntiqp^k t5kiiyukkluku iimyii5rt5kko^ I think he may die to-day
691. As the adjective does not appear as a distinct part of speech
in Innuit, its place is supplied by various forms of the verb.
As a general rule the following may ser\'e :
yAn/A 249
692. I. W/ien the adjective is used as a predicate^ it is to be
rendered by a verb in the first aspect intransitive.
^ Yngrik kiiqtdk the mountain is high
kwlq Tt6k the river is deep
Ikdqt^ tvirtdk the sun sets
693. II. When the adjective is used as an attribute^ express it by
the appropriate third person of the verb in rd&gii£.
ktiqtulra^ Yngrik a high mountain
Ttulrai kwlq a deep river
V
tvethlenllra^ ^5qti the setting sun
694. III. When the adjective occurs as a questiony the interrogative
aspect of the verb must be used.
kithlOn t&kt^ how long is it ?
kithlOn lngt& how big is it ?
kithlun Ttut^ how deep is it ?
kithlun y^kshYqt^ how far is it ?
695. IV. When the adjective is qualified in any way^ then the
form maiighX (Mode LXXIII) is to be used.
hwltft t^talik it is so long = it is this long
hw^tJi ^ngtalik it is so big
hwd,tji Ttutaiik . it is this deep
Note. — These may be made interrogative by adding kX : hwAtli kX tftktaak, is it
this long? •
696. The coordinate and is expressed by thlfi, which is always
placed as a suffix.
Ilnthlu and he ken^thlu and who
Hnthluh5k and he to^mt^thlu and then
697. And may also be expressed by chSl&.
698. In interrogative sentences chfiUi is usually placed at the
opening.
699. And is expressed also by using both thlfi and ch£U, either
separated or combined, as :
kiy^qp^ktdk moqrh^g^miik ch^lathlu nimmtiqkSmtik ^kfltsklune
he called out to bring him a splint and a bandage
2 so ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
700. Tttmtithlli may be used for and so,
tiskilgha toamt&thlu iyiglda he calls me, and so I am going
701. And is expressed in a variety of other ways, such as by
tauqkiin, tO&nS, tOXtlfi.
702. As a general rule, and is not to be used with the frequency
with which it is employed in English, etc. Innuit possesses the
power of joining words and clauses by means of its numerous verb
forms, which constitutes one of the distinctive features of this
language.
hw^nkutl k^ thloiltuw^qkauw^kut kimtl ekiyorqkaunlt^
can we alone, (and) without aid, do good ? (Mode LXVII and 668)
yuk Sthlimiik tagut&qkaunrStdk Idlssuchem^vene iy&qtshSr'luku
a man may not send away his wife (and) take another (Mode LXVII)
703. Andf or chSU, sometimes can be rendered as still.
m^nch^hkdk ch^la kingghumug'ne
it will be here still after we are gone = dead
704. On how to express why:
1. The simple direct question is expressed by cMn, with the verb
in the interrogative aspect.
chen ^pchel why do you ask me ?
chen tinrSchet t&mi why did you not come at once 1
chen peyet k^nruchem^fkon^k why do you act without being told .^
chen tiikkayet why do you change your mind ?
2. In complex sentences the form is chSnmS.
705. 3. A person answering a question will say chenmC hw&nS hw4
or ch6n hw&nC hw4. This corresponds to for this reason, because y this
is whyy etc.
706. 4. The expletive h5k is very often added : ch6n hOk and
chSnmS hOk.
707. Very frequently m6 is added for the sake of emphasis. This
only occurs in continued narration
chenme and why !
kithlunme yes ; how else could it be !
hwinkut^Hime and we 1
kakume and when ! (in the future)
kingvir^me and when ! (in the past)
yAJ^/A 251
708. The addition of this syllable, me, often causes some euphonic
change, as :
kittuyet becoffus klttuy^zme and who are you !
ukkut *' ukkuzhme and these !
709. These are followed by various expletives, as, hwi t&num.
kingvSr'me tAntim pilthhuyei and when in the world did I do it !
710. Where, interrogative, is expressed.
By nauhwft :
nauhw^ nlngt^kilrai where is the sick person?
nalihwl nin where is your house ?
711. MS is often added for emphasis, and also hiim.
nauhw^me Agiyun where is God ?
712. When an active verb follows, nftnnS is to be used.
ninne kepucheu where did you buy it ?
nlnne ch^lHlthhuyet where have you been working ?
n^nne yiirqtlhoS. where was he born ?
Note. — The appropriate cases must be used.
n^tmtin iylkchet where = whither are you going ?
n^htin tiyet by where did you come.?
n^kiin klulthhdl from whence did he ascend ?
713. Where is also expressed by the interrogative verb.
Viska n^nt^ where is Basil t = Basil, where is he }
nintit ch5.ngerit where are the blackfish ?
n^ntlho^ knorhlk neplnr&ne where was he when the lamp went out.?
nlnchet where are you t
714. Ntot&zmg, where are they? (708).
Note. — NAtSkfAnS (368) is often used for nAnnS.
715. NfttutmOqti, tvhitlur does he go? (i.e., whithers he?). This
is a brief way of expressing :
n^tmtin iyiqti where is he going?
nSttit mdqtlho^ where has he gone ?
n^ttit mdqch^hki where will he go }
252
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
716. The possessive form is :
my nltldL
thy nStft
his nlte
This form is used as follows :
n^tml p!nr!lthk&ghl chlll6yiqtd&
n&tji pel <7xr^/ nltlekutJi k&
717. For nXnlfich&kl see 408.
nltml, etc.
nitfiit, etc.
nlten, etc.
if I were not sick I would work
are you sick ?
K& Interrogatiye
718. All unqualified interrogation is to be expressed by ki.
klplk kd, is it so ?
ilumiin kl is it really ?
taligwlm kl only that ?
mlhiin kl iyiqtok
Italichekun kd, iylqttjlk
luchenlng kl
iylreklnratln kl unl
unl kl peyunratln
hwltft kl ? this way, eh ?
unl kl ? this one, eh ?
tpSnghutfi ka ? is it you ?
was it this way he went ?
did they both go together ? (i.e., as one)
do you understand t
does this not suit you?
this don't do, eh ?
719. All qualified interrogation, and all questions in which any
interrogative particle is introduced, must be expressed in the
interrogative aspect. (See 461.)
720. The interrogative particles are :
ke^ and kenl who
kithlun how
n^lle^k which
and many others.
721. r kithlun
Sing, < kithlutft
kithlQne
kS,ku and k^nv^k
chen
ninnS
when
why
where
peyea
peyet
pei
kithluniik petsniik
Dual \ kithluttik petstOk
kithlutuk pe^k
f kithluta petsta
Plur, \ kithluche petsche
[ kithluturig peilt
yA/^/A 253
This equals wAai is the matter with me f with thee f etc.
kithlutfi hwlnehw^ peyet here, now, what have you done ?
722. Eithlltn . . . Idthlftn is used in the sense of as ., ,as or as ., .so,
etc.
kithlun peyukCifche^ tol kithlun pechM
as you wish to do to me, so do to me
EXAMPLES
723. On the use of Idthlfin :
kithlun tum^ !y5ki how is the trail ? = how is of the trail its condition ?
kithlun iy5kset how are you ? = what condition are you in ?
kithlun chSla what next ?
kithlunthlu pechaene n^thluluku how it happened I do not know
kithlun t^klklma talimiik pel^qtl having done that, what does he do ?
talim kinggho^kiin kithlun peUqti after that how will he do ?
kithlutuk pel&qt^k what happens to them both ?
kithlmung pellqt^t t^m^kut Ingthlulthhriit
what do those who are baptized become ?
kithluku ch^-k&mlni tkecheu
how did you bring that thing which is by the entrance ?
kithlume ch^qthluelgnut ungghwerch^hkit
how will the good (sinless) arise ?
kithlume un& iyoka what does this mean ?
talim klngg^olkiin kithlune pech^hk^ after that how will he do ?
taukut Hinr^t klngglio^thtin kithlune pe^
after that time (those days) how did he do ?
kithlukume pechSkse^ how shall I act ?
724. In certain districts, as around St. Michael's Island, IdyOhwft
is more frequent.
kiyuhwlme pech^kse^ how shall I do?
725. KiyfimS, which is equivalent to / do fiot know, is a very
common expression around St. Michael.
726. hwfttkftpik. The following examples will show the use of this term.
Used alone:
k&ptk ka is it, really ?
2 54 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
727. Used with verbs :
hweghl hwltk&pYk peto&
hweghi hw&tk^pik ULngingr^to^
hw^tk&pik keputAr^to^
hwltklpikthlu ch^titdk
I have absolutely nothing
I do not see anything at all
I am not buying anything
and there is nothing whatsoever
there
This is a much stronger expression than :
hwiitplk ch^titdk there is nothing of it there
728. Used with tumtMu:
nauthlu hw^tk&plk kuvyuet&t
nauthlu hw^tk^ptk t&ng'ghitlt
729. Used with nouns:
m6qk^pik
yuk^pYk
yuptk, (plural) yupet
nun^pik
nun^plgme nungrleyug'ya,koi
730. Verbal form:
mdqk^piktok
mYkk^piktdk
there was no one at all who could
lift it
no one will see it at all
real water
true man
the race
solid ground (not tundra)
I want to build on solid ground
it is water indeed
it is indeed small
731. Hwfttnkercli& = hwfttkftplk, as, nothing whatsoever,
hwegha. hwiitftkSrch^ pet5^ I have nothing whatsoever
732. To express or:
V&nka hw^thloka Visk^ pech6hk6k
taathlu pea hw^thlaka kazhgfllS*
John or Basil will do it
then he said, " All right ; I Ml go to
the kazhga "
733. This is often abbreviated to hwftthlOk.
ipit hw&thlok hwe pekilauk
ipit hw&thldk Hn m^lleglskllea
either you or I must do it
either you or he will accompany me
734. This is again abbreviated to hwftlth.
hwSlthhwe peklUS or I '11 do it {^you is understood)
VARIA 255
735. tOXtn. Very often, in narratives, a sentence will terminate
in tOXtn. In this case it corresponds to away in English, as, and so
there he sat singing away,
toi to^tft uetaut and so they lived along this way
736. To express before: «
I. Before me^ etc., with motion, is expressed by cheamitt5k and its
derivatives.
cheumlne or cheum!kiin !lrauqt5k he walks before = ahead of me
II. Before me (i.e., in front ofme)y etc., is expressed by chifik&m'nS, etc.
III. Before me, etc., meaning "in my presence," is expressed by
t&kiimnS.
IV. Before, in the sense of "prior to an act," is expressed by
pnig'mA.
737. To express likely and unlikely :
I. By tOft kS.
td^ k^ thloilrenltdk it is not likely that he will get well
tod kd iylg'ndtbk it is not likely that he goes
tod kX tketnauqtut hwdtod it is not likely that they will come now
738. 2. By means of Mode CXII.
iydqchikshug'ndkoa I am likely to go
tdmdnchikshug'ndkok he is likely to be there
Note. — This mode expresses unlikely by its negative, without using toA kX.
mdnchlkshug'ndkok he is likely to be here
mdnlghishugndkok he is not likely to be here
pech^kchug'ndkok he is likely to do it
pinggliichug'ndkok he is not likely to do it
thl6drechikchug*ndk6k he is likely to recover
thlodrregnichug'n^kok he is not likely to recover
739. TOftqpe&k, just as, like, as if
toaqpeAk hok taTigwlm k^fchlrkontik ^mthllr'lune
just as he had made a few steps
Note. — KXnkfin has the same signification.
740. TOftthlunS, therefore, tliat is why.
todthlune unl iw^kshiUvglie ghilthkeuchunrat6k
because you do not take off this, that is why it does not fit
256 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
741. From IdUigintSk, it is out of place. This expresses in vain.
uetfuk killlg&ne it is in its nothingness = it is there out of place
miydrqt&ki kllHglntik I picked it up from where it was
unet^ki killlgintin I left it as useless
tilm&tii klUtgiktin ^poralkoniku itr& Agiyutfutlplt
thou shalt not take the name of the Lord in vain
742. Chnthkftk, chilthkim, chilthklme, etc., has about the same force
as the above chilthkiiinKHI.
743. nXkmen. This expresses own. The use of this term presents
no difficulty, as the following examples will show.
n^kmethl^lklin k& is it your own ?
n^kmethl^nktin pHthhaiki I did it with my own
NXkmSn coalesces with a number of forms, as follows (676) :
n^kmethl^ki my own
n^kmethl&kik^ it is my own
n^kmethl&nr^t&ki it is not my own
n^kmen pekik^ it is my own
n&kmen illlk^ldl it is of my own
744. Nilttam has about the same sense as n&kmen.
ntittdm ntikk^ his own house
745. How to express on account of :
' pettkkloA
Sing. * petikklutft Dual *
petikkluku
' petlkklunuk
petlkklutiik Plur.
' petikkluti
petlkkluche
petlkkluke
pelikklukuk
PetikklOA, used in connection with the forms explained in 75,
expresses on account of by reason of etc.
^rruliytiqtol m6qsulthkl petikkluku
I want to stop on account of my thirst (Mode LXII)
^giyOgh^ hwlngniik pet!kklo& ch&qthliiqtd^m^
I pray for myself on account of my sins = on my account I having
sinned (257, 439, and 530)
hw^nkutl yugne petlkklutS, chdla hwlnkut^ in^rqtultiqk^put petikkluku
propter nos homines et nostram salutem
746. There are various other ways of expressing on account of
such as by tOihOk tauni iyflgnOkklQkQ, also by tauni ^QthlilkklukQ, or by
peilikQ. (See also 748.)
VARIA 257
747. To express for instance, etc. :
k€pOtthl€nekum^ for instance, I buy
k^nthlenekuml for instance, I say
toitn pethlen6kum^ I do that way, for instance
This may be abbreviated into tOfttn&thienekfiin&.
748. To express throughy in the sense of **by means of" or "on
account of," as 'propter' in LatiOj use Qgwftne with the transitive.
^leghtim ugw^ne pHthhdiki I did it through fear
n^kkllkktim ugw^ne pllthho^k^ I did it through love
ningllm ugwine ulg^r&qtdi on account of the cold I shiver
Skk&thlaliqttim ugwine uluqto^ I tremble from old age
^IHngn^qktim ugw&ne ijluqstchekitii it will make you quake with terror
749. Hand, This is expressed by "fingers."
Finger
Sing, unin, un&tllm Dual unStuk Plur, unitit
un^tldi my finger
unititfi thy finger
unit! his finger
unlttik^ my hands = my fingers
uniltm^ {ngluSt my one hand = my fingers half
un&tmii iepit my other hand = my fingers their others
un^tMche Kngluet thleyir^nki inglueti ^qtoqyugnilthketniin
I put one of your hands where the other cannot touch it
750. The following is an idiomatic way of expressing day and
night,
k^nntiqtok piiknelune iir'niiqp^k untiqtumiin
he says he travelled day and night
tir'n5k thlu uniiqtumin ptiktlilqtoil
I travel day and night
^rr^lume piiktl^qto^ unuqtum^n
I travelled the whole month day and night
^t^tum^r&mi tigo^ I come, having my father with me
atatumiqpit tikeni come with your father
at&tumlrilma tikille let him come with his father
ochSr'ndqtumirima tilune he coming with majesty
258
ESSENTIALS OF JNNUIT
751. On the use of pOlingtlk:
puHngtc^k keputdk^mi
pullngt^k pew^koqtutii
pullngt^k peyuetutA
pullngt^k kii iy^lthhoutii
as often as I bought
you do too often
you do not do often enough
did you go often ?
Note. — TflvYwtalk has the same meaning and takes the verb in lAqtSI.
pullngt^k or tuvvwen&k m!ngkl^qto&
pullngtar'laa
752. On the use of hOria :
un^ hdr^t^ tuntugwok
ukuk hor^t^ tuntOgwuk
ukut horiti tuntugut
I sew often
over and over
suppose this is a deer
suppose these are two deer
suppose these are three deer
753. On the use of chXknSk, very :
mauqhuloq'lo^ taiin^ ^fr^rn^qkdq'loqthlune ch&knok
that grandmother was a very old woman
ch^knokk^nratdk it is not very much
p^tssn^rtdk ch^knok it is excessively cold
miln^ chilkn5k chilleuglil ie ta'uqkiin k^chdqlune
here I am working very hard and he resting
754. t&mft. This is used sometimes in the sense of at ofue.
chen tinrachet tlLm^
k&nruzhkiitfi t^m& keuk^n^
755. To express payment:
Sing, ikkei
why do you not come at once ?
when he addresses you answer at once
his or its pay
Dual
Plur,
^kkeik
^kke^t
These must agree in number with the object paid for.
hwc^nehw^ ^kke^k kemtiqttik
hw^nehw^ ^kkedt kemtiqt&t
Examples of the verb :
uni ^ket5k
uni dket5vdkinrat5k
here is the payment for the two dogs
here is the payment for the three dogs
this has no value, this is worthless, etc.
(Mode VII)
this is not worth so much
VARIA 259
756. Various expressions concerning debt:
^kk€letik& ^kkelghoki I pay my debt
^kkelet^nk^ ^kSlghunkA I pay my debts
EXAMPLES OP THE VERB
ikkelgh5qtumaligh& I am still in debt (Mode LXXIII)
^kkelghu6rut5& I am out of debt (Mode IX)
akkeln!r'yunr$t5a I do not want any debt (Mode LXII)
&kkel!th^ke ^kkelgh6rtft first pay your debt
illit ^kelghum^ ^kkel€t^nk& I pay some of my debt
un^ ^kkelgh5qpntin ^kkekiifk&chek^Lk^
I take this for your debt
k&zhghuep^thlu iplnne &kkelgh5rqtiimilr£Uime ^kintin ^kkelet&ksaun^ke
(628)
it is shameless in you, not to pay a debt you owe for so long
757. Nikling hw6, nlkUng ipit, nXkling tf, etc. This expresses poor
mff etc.
nikling ipit n^kHng is also said
A still more sympathetic expression is :
n^kling ipit naklig'niqkutfi poor fellow ! you are poor
n&klig'n^kltir'mi n^thlene in the time of my poverty
758. Akling has the same meaning.
^klingnikfi ip^ne how poor you are !
759. On the use of tiyCmA :
kemuqtiml Hlet tiyem^ one of my dogs is missing
yut tiyemi the folks are away
nau tiyemi = nauhwime where is it ?
tiyemdtQn k&nri say it by memory
Nun^t uetiilraet, uetillutting ^k^ntin. Atauchime ^t^kome ni€t tiyem^
k^zhgemuk. Unw^ko&k^n Kllit tiyemglidqtilkklutCing nukilthpe^rit&k
h5k klltht^kklune yuerutnailr^n, etc.
There was a village which had been (inhabited) for a long time. One
evening one of them was missing from the kazhga. Every day some
disappeared ; thp chief was watching, for there was going to be no
more p>eople left
26o
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
i
!
yut imkut tiyemitut
nillet kemtiq*ma tlyemauwit
tiyemintok
tiyemirdskan
tiyem^nligh5k
tiyeingh6qt6k
tiyemintlhok
tiy€m^ntlhtinr&ne
tiyemSqtdk
760.
n^methien
nimethliat^
nim!thp!t
n^methlen
n&methliat^
n&milthptuk
n^thlo^Lgh&
n^thlo&tgh^
n&thlo^mkin
nithiaaka
ndthluettkuk
nithlo^mtiik
nimilthikinkii nathloiqka
nimethliat^ nithluetkut
nimilthip^che n^thlo^mche
n&methlit n^thloilnk^
those folks disappeared
which (ones) of my dogs are missing ?
it is away
when it is away
invisible away
he is still absent
it was away
during its being away
it is absent
he knows nothing whatever of me
they know nothing whatever of me
I know nothing whatever of thee
he knows nothing whatever of it
they know nothing whatever of us both
I know nothing whatever of you both
I know nothing whatever of them both
they know nothing whatever of us
I know nothing whatever of you
I know nothing whatever of them
761. Nftmilth is the abbreviation ; it is used very much like ' jqui^n
sabe ? ' in Spanish.
perhaps I '11 do
n^milth pech£kkleugn&
n^mllth sl^ngthliiqch£kkle5k
NAmilth ipit is a common expression equal to do as yoti like, I don't
perhaps I '11 go
perhaps it will rain
know,
762. Anybody or any one^ any person:
tiingrStoi klttumtik
yuktitok ki
chikkarkeu yuguntin
pen&qkllraii hw^
763. Everybody:
yut tSmarSmung iyiqtut
yut tilm^lthkwet^ k^thlauchuw^nki
764. Nobody:
yum nithld^ or ke^ nithl5^
yum pinrSti
I do not see anybody
is anybody there ?
give it to anybody
anybody can do it
everybody has gone
I want to address everybody
nobody knows
nobody did it
VARIA
261
yum peyunrSti
pilleilk^nratdk ken^ lyokentik
yuktitdk
765. Somebody:
yut nietil pe^
yuk t&ng imin^
yut lUetntin ttinneu
yiiqtiingk&tdk
nauthlulraitingk&t5k ntim illo^
766. Anything:
chimtik tingghlngratdk
ch^mtin thlu ^ttifk^n&ne
ch^mtik ki peyuqtutii
hw&tkilplk keputiir$td&
767. Everything:
ch^ t^jn^r^ma m&nt6k
ch^t t^m^r^mting y^ntut
768. Nothing:
chatit6k chgla
kithlun pKnr^toi
n^kiin pifk^n^k^
hweghi hwitkiplk pet5&
769. Something:
chih^r'mtik kinr^
chat lllit miktiaqtut
chit^ngk&tok ch^mln^
770. A few (602) :
kifchlrhrat yut ikfike
nobody wants it
nobody can make one like it
there is nobody
somebody did it
somebody is over there
hand it to somebody
there is somebody
there is somebody sick in the house
he does not see anything
without being fastened to anything
do you want anything ?
I do not buy anything whatever
everything is here
everything is yonder = all things
are yonder
there is nothing yet
nothing is wrong with me
from nothing
I have nothing whatever
say something
some things are small
there is something under there
bring a few men
771. One of these, met fUcQt ; some of these, illit tikat.
772. Anywhere :
pechedtiin thlekeu put it anywhere
(See also 353.)
773. Noivhere:
nikiin pikkrlune from nowhere
262 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
774. El 'cryivlicrc (352):
tament6k it is everywhere
775. Sometime (646), any time:
t^mitne tketl^qtok he comes any time
776. Now and then :
peliirlkl Illekum taugw^m I do it now and then
ch^klm^ Illekum peliqto^ I do it very seldom
777. Here and there is expressed by nXnne m&nS.
778.
^giyuskut hw^nkutd ch^qthluqtulene pray for us sinners
a.giyutfi ^pSniik chilqthluqtuleme pray for yourself, a sinner
igiyutod hwingniik ch^qthluqtuleme I pray for myself, a sinner
Qqcha.ratulene agiyukelet let the sorrowful ones pray
toine letnaliri yugune hw&nkuti then he taught us men
enuqkutlhocik isklnkd n^thlunretsklune hkiigniim it^nruchene
he forbade them two that they might know he was their master
hwankutd nunilm kienSnghnglior'ne we on earth, we mortals
ekiyurskut hw^nkutd t^kfeiUgTior'ne help us blind ones
pdkmum ochor'nd kiinrutiik kwetok hw^nkutne
the glory of heaven is indescribable
779.
tamSntiiksilgnut hwingne I who have not yet been there
tingniiksilgnut i^plne you who have not yet beheld
netuksilgnut iene he who has not yet heard
niirruksilgnut ^pStsne you who have not yet eaten
780. The negative is employed very extensively in Innuit, as is
shown in 451. Furthermore, it is used in many cases where in
English the positive would be employed.
781. Again, Innuit will use a positive where English ordinarily
uses a negative.
nithlo^kii I ignore it = I do not know
n^thlunrat^kil I do not ignore it = I know
kiiss^tsttin ki k^thliltniik n^thlunrat^n
do you know English ? (lit., like white men, eh 1 their speaking, thou
dost not ignore it?) (452)
VARIA 263
782. Many examples are derived from the privative Modes VI
and VII.
^shetdk it is bad (i.e., it lacks goodness)
ningllatdk it is warm (i.e., it lacks cold)
ktinnuelghdk a generous person (i.e., one without stinginess)
avvaliksit^ki I remember it (i.e., I have not yet forgotten it)
(Mode XVIII)
a'uqtikinrat^mkin I trust you (i.e., I do not distrust you)
783. The negatives of nOk (159) are often used idiomatically.
tuzhetiirStnok ^tauhwaug6k un lameness is good .
784. The negative occurs in many idiomatic expressions.
The common term for good by^ farewell^ is tOigiilinrftttfk, au revoir
(it is not the end), from tOighOk.
785. Such expressions as // does not Jit me, it is too small, etc.,
are to be rendered by t&stOrftkft, / exceed it, and mfkflthkakH.
iitkuk^ t&stor^i my coat is too small
dllemdtiqkd tdstdr^qkii my mittens are too small
unit dtkuk atim iinavntin a'ugiizghwii, kinruthlukuthlu tast6r'neluku
take this parki back to your mother, and tell her I say it is too small
for me
chdla tistoqtorarakjl it is still too small
un^ iitkuk mlkilthkiikl this parki is too small for me
786. Too large:
xmk ^tkuk nokkoutuk^k^ this parki is too big for me
ukuk k^mmCikshek ^ngkdqk^ these boots are too large for me
ting tangltiqkfi ghilthkakinratiqkfi
hello ! your snowshoes are not large enough for you
nokkletnrStod
nothing is wanting to me = I do not need anything
nokkletstnrat^gnilHn he saves me from wanting anything
787. TOkOrftet signifies the whole family, and Ol&kilrftet, the entire
gens ; however, this distinction is seldom observed in conversation.
Illikilraine kifcheuche how many are you in your family ?
niakilradne ir'vlnlirukut we are six
kifcheuhwit ill^kilraetukane nunine how many families in this village?
264
ESSEXTIALS OF IXXUlT
788. There is also tfighiltlikSldlriet, those who arc near to one
another, which is often used to express family or relatives (660).
789.
yunk^
arigleghutftk^
lllankil and tugnilthktinki
my parents
my relatives
my kindred
All these words are given in the possessive, as above.
^ppa~uh6lukd grandfather mauqholuki grandmother
^tikd father ^nlk^ mother
^t^kswelet^k^ dear father ^n^ksweletilkli dear mother
U^neikiigh^ father chikoutk^ mother
This is, literally, my begettor^ from if'nttk, child. The term chi-
kOQtkft, my mother, signifies my container. Almost any receptacle can
be expressed by chAkO&te. A bag of blubber is termed OkQm chlkoatS.
^t&'t^k^ uncle ^n^n'nik^ aunt
inglitn'giro^k^ cousin (male) niy^gilro&k^ cousin (female)
This is, literally, as or like a brother, as a sister. (See Mode
LXXXIV.)
^m5kkl!rk^ brother (eldest) ilthk^lgk sister (eldest)
kukakl^k brother (younger) niyigSkukiklSk sister (younger)
klnggnokl^k brother (youngest) niyigaklSk sister (youngest)
k^tiinr^k^
p^nneki
if'neika
k^tiinrdngldlto^
p^nn!ngk^to&
if'niiretoa
im5kkl!ngkito^
S-nggliUdd
kingghoklingkitoi tangauhol6r'mtik
klnggnoklingk^to^ n&zzaul5r'miik
kuk^kllngk^tdi
niySgangkiitoa.
^Ithk^ng^^to^
aithi^itoi
my son
my daughter
my child
I have a son
I have a daughter
I have no children, I am childless
(Mode VII)
I have an elder brother
I have no brother, I am brother-
less (Mode VI)
I have a youngest brother
I have a youngest sister
I have a younger brother
I have a younger sister
I have an elder sister
I have no sister, I am sisterless
(Mode VI)
' yA/^/A 265
790.
ueki my husband
ueltki my former husband
uethliiq one who discards a wife
nuledt5k he is a widower
nulaiki my wife
In cases where a man is a polygamist, the first wife is called
naiSrqpftk, and the second is termed nOkftrftk.
uelgik a widow
uenetok she is a widow (Mode VII)
nullqklikin I marry you (man speaking)
nuliqtdqtoi I am married (man speaking)
uekkl^!n I marry you (woman speaking)
ueghdi I am married (woman speaking)
nullqtumautii k& are you married ? (asking a man)
uenkitutii ki are you married ? (asking a woman)
nuUailqkllraek a married couple
ueksko^ said by a man proposing marriage
iyiikitule a runaway wife
791. Among the Innuit who are Christians the term for marriage
is kftssilchlrftk, a derivative of kftssilt&kft. The word for my wife is
kftss&chSmAwSkft, kftsslichSmAwen, kftssQchSmAwSft.
kassuchiig'ya.kukuk we two wish to marry (Mode LXII)
792. From the verb AtSlirftkft, / act as a father (i.e., support and
protect him), is derived the possessive, flt&liqtkft, flt&Hqt&n, At&liqtS,
signifying my quasi father, which serves to express godfather,
793. Ch&Mqkft expresses my parents-in4aw ,
althldika ch&kiki my sister-in-law
794.
^vvdchiki and also !11^^ my friend
795. Aged is expressed by a suffix. (See 184.)
^taug'l5k& my old father
796. Deceased is also signified by a suffix. (See 188.)
atirutka or dtllluerutkil my deceased father
ilngnirutkil my deceased brother
^Ithklrutk^ my deceased sister
266
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
^n^rutkil
uegnutk^
nulahutk^
peiirutka and Gnestki
my deceased mother
my deceased husband
my deceased wife
my deceased parents
Pefir&tkft signifies my no longer ones; it is from pSrIitOft (Mode IX).
UnSstkA from linetlki, / leave him.
797.
' I iigiiaa
Sing, \ thou ligTiutft
he lighdk
m!kk!lligho^
mikkllralgh^
mikkllthhouglii
mKkkilhulraighi
mlkklech^hkoi
' we both llgliukuk f we Hghukut
Dual < you both Hghuttik Plur. < you llghuche
[they both Ifgnuk [ they llghut
JVeg, — nrilghoi
mikkilligntighim&
mikk!lltgniiwikAm&
mikki 1 ligli tingghiir'm&
m!kk!lhiin!lra&gn^
mikk!ll!ghukum&
Note. — The third persons only are used. For the others, various forms, such as
mlkkoA, etc., are employed. However, in the locative verbs the first person is used, as,
pikftnU^M, etc.
m!kk!ll!gli6k
p!k^nligh5k
tuktinrilgh5k
t^maithkiinrilghdk
peyunrilghoi
baby, he who is small
he who is up
he who is not rich
that which is incomplete
I being unwilling
Idioms
798.
2
3
hw^nkut^ nunim klen^nghll-
gh6r'ne
nithlun^kchar'loi ptiktoi
ch^muk pel^qtilthft
4 ch^mnie iy^kt^
5 ma.tft plkkrSlunS
6 kwtqtod
7 unestkS, unestmi
we mortals, we on the earth
I go secretly
what is your name ? (what do they
al)vays do to you ?) (one of the
many idioms of the verb fo do)
when did he go? (idiomatic use
of chA for when)
suddenly
I go to the river = I river
my dead parents (from QnSt&kft,
/ have him)
IDIOMS
267
8 m^mch6k5k
9 peurutk^
10 td&tft pingrallngr&n
1 1 i^r$^neakagni
12 itg&tii sl&kkluke yukutlLmiin
13 ^mt^thlu k^ uetau'luche
14 t5i k^
15 hw^nehw^ taugw&m
16 kithlun tum^ iyok^
»7
kithlutft pet
18
nauhw^ n!n
19
kithlun p!nr€toi
20
kithlun iydk&
21
kithlun ch^la
22
chimuk ch^la
23
un^ iketok
24 lll^kumku k^ pfnggliitin
25 pinrStoa.
it will heal up (lit., it will flatten)
my departed ones (from per&StOA)
it is of no use to do that
he is my father (lit., he begot me)
keep your feet dry (your feet, keep
them carefully from dampness)
is everything all right with you ? (the
answer is, QStaukiikfit ch&fkSnitft,
we are all rt'g/it)
is it all right? (this is one of the
many examples of the use of tOi)
is this all } (i.e., is this all you are
going to give or pay ?)
how is the trail ? (i.e., how is the
road, its state })
what is the matter with you ?
where is your place ? (lit., where is
thy house .^ but used to ask,
where do you bunk }
there is nothing the matter with me
how is he ?
what next }
what next ?
this is worth nothing (lit., this is
without payment) (Mode VII)
if I add this, will you accept } (639);
ill&kumkin ki can be said also
no (also, I did not)
26 k^nktim^nr^to^
I am busy (an example where the Innuit uses the negative when
in English the positive is used; this means, I am not thinking
of anything but my own affairs)
27 kithlunthlu pechene nilthluluku
28 millUqgliiyiikloii thleniin
29 fintiqkeor'rdka
30 nuttiq emingkatok
31 sl^mpdgum akklue
how it happened I do not know
I thought he would go with me, 1
thought to be a comrade to him
I make a frame (i.e., for canoe, etc. ;
lit., I make bones)
the gun is loaded (lit., it has filling;
the negative is, it has no filling)
the sun, moon, stars, etc. (the belong-
ings of the universe)
268 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
32 nun^m ikklue all the things of earth
II ^kdqt^ n&Ua'uk eclipse = the sun dies
34 thllmekiin uetaTuk
he is dying, he is by himself (this also means doing nothing).
Nauhwfl Ylskl? kimlntSk thlimOdin actalik, where is Vaska i
he is inside there doing nothing
35 yuchsUi k^mm5k he is dead, his life is extinguished
36 p65k he is dead (third singular of peOghA) (686)
37 k^n&ngkatut
they have one face (this is from kSiiikkl&, one face, i.e., one
person ; for example, the above could be said of a number
of posts in a straight line)
38 hw^nehwi ^mark^k tagulththl!m&ch!m£&
here is a skin in exchange for the one I got from you = here it is,
the skin, my taken one, its exchange
39 toithle ta'un^ let it be as it is
40 keke k&thl^ichemllle let him scold ahead (490)
41 ch^kydrchet what are you making for yourself ?
42 n^ktin kinggliunSrlutfi tkechet where do you come from ? = from
whence behind you comest thou ?
43 n&thla5k^ n^nlucha^
I do not know where he is (lit., I ignore his whereness). This is
another example, as in No. 26. (For the full form see 408.)
There are many other similar expressions, as, I ignore your
whoness = I don't know who you are, etc.
44 Sriltim kemiiqte the star close to the moon = the
moon's dog
45 nitn ped where do you suffer .^ (7^6)
46 y^kulgut tim^rimCing iyok!nrilgh6r'miik chuhwtink^tut
every bird has a different beak = all birds are beaked with
dissimilarity
47 niiktin plkkr^lune from nowhere
48 nikdn pifk^n^k^ from nothing
49 nundyut kerne niin&nrat6k, illingkat6k milrSnlig'ntik inggntir'mentik
our world is not a world alone ; it has companions, seven bigger
than it
50 letna"uk&t&rimche kithlun thlethliiqkanijk kristok kimtnttn
I am going to teach you how to make the sign of the cross
= putting the cross on your body
IDIOMS 269
51 tingmaim tievyi the source of the geese = where
they come from
52 irruml !ngl5& tikk&nlmktin just as I had one leg in (i.e., canoe)
53 un& ch^kaunrlltdk ' this is no use
54 ch&miik unlfkali has he news ?
55 ^t^e cheumuttingnlktifk^n^t^ utr^qtlt^
well, let 's go back = without our trying any mor^ to go ahead,
we will go back
56 k&thl&tlngn^plit ch&tiikni6t&mkin I do not mind what you say
57 n^p^chaoqttt sailors = mastmen
58 k^nnllthhr^ pecheunrat5k what he says is not true = his say-
ing it is not -<rue
59 kemeluchin nithloilki
I did not know that you were alone (this belongs to the same
group as 43) = I ignore your loneness
60 tuluk^ruk ^ikkwiwiithltik
the crow which was killed yesterday (this is, the yesterday killed
crow) (59)
61 pet^chah^mttin pe&koi I did all that I could do
62 milruk ^Ithrikuk plug^^g'ntik
sl^thllrqthlinir'l^qtdk every second summer is wet
63 tikshtim p^tr^ brain = of the head its marrow ;
pStOk, marrow
64 ^qch^ toi pllglio^imche I have done enough for you
65 ch^kutk^, ch&kutft, ch&kute-
my mother, thy mother, his mother (this is from the vialis of ch4,
i.e., ch&kttn, that which holds, envelopes, etc.) ; a bag made of
the skin of a seal, and filled with oil or blubber, is called
Okiim chAkate.
4-
66 niikk&ngk^t5k k^ un^ is there room for this ? nilkki, his
house
67 ^k6m5k ^megtim kuleniin
he sits above the door (i.e., he is poor) ; above the door, or
entrance hole of the kazhga, is the least desirable part, as
it is colder and darker; hence the place is allotted to the
poorer members
68 let6k it is tame, etc. (from IStOft, / learn)
69 ema.qpem k^ppoil foam of the sea (term for pumice)
70 sl&m n&ngnilthhrintim till the end of the world
71 nettiksitild. k^ntiqsluku I never heard him say = I have not
yet heard him saying
270
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
72
73
74
75
76
iyllraem ^m tiyem^ tk6tftrllt5k
the man who went away did not come back ag^in = the went
person, having gone, comes not again
ilngr^k^
kinggli^rik^
^Iththr^ktink^ imthl^rtOt m&ng
pinrat^qtukut
tingluw^k^
77 ^tilne ktipk&p!kt&
7S chlkmaomauk
79 ^ggy^k ch¥kumy&qt6k
80 klkkt^m n&sko^, p&myuS.
I say yes to him = I yes him
I say no to him = I no him
I have been here many years = my
years here are many
we are pretty near there
I hit him with the fist = I fist him ;
tingiak, fist
he is the very image of his father
= he splits his father
he is blind = he is shut
the star twinkles = it winks
the head of the island, the tail of
the island
NATIVE STORIES
799. The Western Innuit, both old and young, are exceedingly
fond of listening to stories. When all the inmates of a kazhga have
settled themselves down for the night, usually some one will say,
"Tell us a story." This request is immediately seconded by some
one else, and some volunteer will begin a long narration, which
is always listened to with great attention. Every village has some
popular story-teller, whose thrilling tales serve to beguile the long
winter evenings.
As a rule, the Innuit have very soft, melodious voices, and while
relating a story the speaker always talks in a very low tone. At
the close of a sentence the narrator takes a deep breath and adds
t6i, with a long-drawn falling inflection on the last vowel. The
audience have a peculiar habit of frequently interrupting the
speaker by repeating his last sentence in an interrogative form.
This never appears to disturb the speaker in the least, who simply
reaffirms his statement with an additional tOi, and keeps on with
his subject. Generally the audience have all dropped off to sleep
before the end of the story. As this seems to be the chief object
the story-teller has in view, these interruptions are simply intended
to encourage him to keep on, by letting him know that there
is some one upon whom the desired soporific effect has not yet
been produced. In many stories songs are introduced (see 841).
These verses are without rhymes and, moreover, they often contain
archaic words the meaning of which has been lost. Very seldom
does a story contain any description of natural scenery. A rare
example of this may be seen in the Story of an Old Village.
It is also very unusual to find any reference to distant regions or
to historical events. Many stories contain accounts of sorcerers,
ogres, giants, dwarfs, and mermaids. There is frequent mention
made of the sea serpent, and of a mysterious monster like a
half man, a man divided down the median line. References to
cannibalism are continually mentioned, and also the ghoulish trait
271
272 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
of eating dead bodies. In one story there is an account of how the
fox became red through shame at being overmatched in strategy by
a ptarmigan.
Some story-tellers make great use of abbreviations and are fond
of expressing themselves in a very condensed style. The Story
of the Invisible Daughter-in-Law is a good example of this class.
Others, on the contrary, prefer the more expansive (see, for example,
TGfttluhOkfawi, etc., in the Stickleback Story).
In nearly all stories the orphan boy is the hero, who surmounts
all obstacles and triumphs in the end.
Generally all stories close with the word etaugweok. This is
evidently an archaic term, the meaning of which I have never found
any one who could explain. Many at the close of the story use
n&ngnOk, meaning it is the end.
The Story of an Old Village
Tutghirauh5l6qk!l'raek uet&l'raek kwechu'gliam pi'ghane emiq'pig'miin
^num^lu'ne. Tinga"uholu'ne tau'ni tutgha,ra"u'holol, enuqkunali'rhil eViit
a.kka'emug'niin odtmiiqskiifk^n^'ku. Tod'thlu chlt-lllet'ne enuqkung'rina
unwiTcorae ksTuwin'ne mauhul6q"lume Sn'ghdma iyag"lune emu'mtin
eniiqku'tlhrAniin d^t'mOqtok 6r'luvchoi'thliiq*menuk tagumaii'lune o&t-
V V
mQq'stchiikSr'lune nuni'thliir'mGk tke't6k. Toi'thlu tke'chima kitte'ne
th<hkopJig"miik hwi'tfi ktutilu'ne tuzh'gha glillthkil'thlukO. Tau'n^
thilthk6'pa,k Uliingklene'lune. Taii'ni i'trauthluku ma'uqhulume'niin tke-
chima araig^mtin piitu'luku ta'u'mtik I'trStok. Md'tfi chi-u'ni maliq-
holod mdktlksa'u'nane kinniiksali'nane ueta~uq't5k kdnruchiiqpiik'kgn&ku
iting'ran. Tod'thlu t6kklo'rh^ "maliq'hulu chen kSnniiqyunrap&ki'chet " .?
V
Toi'thlu mauqhulo'a,n ke'yughwil " tutghi'rauhulu nau'hwihtim eniiqku-
la'ramkin ki'thluku chil-kamlna tke'cheu killo'intik ka chi'mfik tSnging-
ratu'tfi"? Tutghirau'huloSn e'mum ke'yughwi "toi'yOhwd nuni'thliir'miik
killo'dne tdngtlthra^'gha, mauq'hulu chaith'hoi ? " Toi'yuhwa kemltlhttn-
rachilkilraa'kuk nuna'u'nur'miiqne yut peniqtdrutiiksii'kaklit nifu'thlu
hwat'kipik kuvyue'tHt. Hwe'ghS tali'gw^ni ue'thlima nukalthpe^'lthhati
V
nunau'niir'muqne ke'me kuvchuka,q'ka tutgharau'hulii penethlineu'tft
Sghud'td hwane'hwi entiqko'rimWn nuni'lthlrum tamd'hun killo'a,kiin
snSqchiko'ndk." Ang'ri pegliitnelune ueta~uq'tuk taum-Wnggho'ilne.
To&'thlu chiim-!lle'ne eniiqkiingr&'na im akdm' snSq'tok e'mum nunS'lth-
thlriim ktllo'Sktin emu'htin entiqku'tlhraktin snSqtuk'kgrMune kdkd'ne
piilliyaraqpag^'ntik tke'tSk at6q'1uke ti'gok suvaq'tok nan'vahag'mtin
STORY OF AN OLD VILLAGE 273
mlkkilra^'mun kintkch^cho^r^ng'kit5k, unuq'pik kiinlkchuk^thHnnel'me.
Mii'tn imln^ n^nv^h^chughHk t^ng'hH miiqt^'r^vlk kok^'ne, ytig^'mtikthlu
mauqhu'loin e'mum k&nruchu'naku, ke'ikik mtiqtHrivI'kaii ! uthli'gi
mitn tke't6k, yuk ii'noik hw^ne'hwi cheu'gnine miiqtSthlenn'rai; tauq-
kiin mi'thlu t^'thlenelune ing'rik uthlzig'luku iyu'mean milHq'thluku
tumi'ktin ti'gok tuvV6k tau'hfin. M&'tfi nit'stok pamalir'ngr^'niin ch&-ka'na
ftni puy!r"lune kenethlenei'me, krichughaqtSng'kathlunethlu. A'triqt6k
uthUg'*luku, mitft tkg'ta cha6kTcakiin tikfe'git na'uthlenelu'tfing yiikpfik-
tQksa"u'nanne !m1n^ thlu miiq't^thliik tumirhuthlu'ne faiVaniin miy6q't6k,
mitft uying'ta, cha.'-k&nS. ma.lr6g"nuk morhag"nak kenethling'kithlune
chingghaTimil'thlutuk ghikso'^y^q k&thltir'vag"lune unat'niik y!nrhig*'nuk
iiqtfi'kathlune. KMq'tdk iHoa tima'na kadqchikn'raii chi'miik t^nglng'-
ratok. Mi'tft iiqko'ine afTSrnikka"u'hol6qpik miti'rama paltig*naurailra&
ka~uwa,g"lune, emu'miik miiqUl'thliir'muk ka^qchd'kdk tau'na, ka"uwal'rai
miiqt&q'ghi'l^n. To&'thlu tSqklo'rhil "mauq'hulu kauw^qpirk'nak tke'to^
ithia'negha," tupa,n'rat6k kiyigiluTcu wegyi'ka, keto'ine morhag"ntik
tima.'ktin iemklllu'ne kini'viit milqpilqtir'ya'ka tup^g'yunra'pik^n keto-
ine atrig"lune it'rit6k it'r&ma uthlig^luku cheuti'kun taguluku niyi-
gha't& tupilqts&g"luku. To&'thlu niydgha'ch^ne iche'^nuk chami'kiin
iifrSrn^kkirali'holum uma't6k une'iqtA allenthlig'^lune to^m'tSthlu nupi'-
rin uthl&g"luku chSla' tupiqttingni'ka nii'tin tupiq'tdk tupe'ma mik'tok
V V
**hwil'ka, tutghiraii'hulu ! tke'tutft ki?" Keyu'ghw^ e'mum t^ngalj'-
holum " kaliw^qplrk'nik maliq'hulu ketS'ke dthUl'neghi." Td&'thlu Imlni
&fTSrnakkira"u'h5luk k^n'ntiqtbk " tithlur'n^pe'tle ntirruksirgnut hwing"ne
ntir'loqk^taq'pa " toqklo'rh& " mauq'hulu niik'mtik tkeutftra't&mkin " ke'yu-
ghwi aJ-rdrnakkarauliolum "ip^niik' tangau'holuk ntikkiti'toa." "A'kli-
ka'ka IpSne' arrgmakk&rali'hdluk toi'hum niir*gnitiq'pugha." " King !
niirchSh'kamkin." Kinghe'rimiin ifrSrnakkarau'hdluk ImlnS nlng'glidk
ningghdk'chdqtok ^tr^h't^ tiloiq'p&k sle'lukuthlu. "Toi'me ke'nii sle'cheu
ipSnGk'hwd toi' sle'utfi." Td&'thlu e'mum &frSrnakkara"u'holum imlnil
tinga'u'holuk og'neu'ti emu'miik iilo'^muk, 6g'neu'cha,na ueta'uq'tok og'neu'-
tkgr'luku ptikchtlth'thlen ISfkatdk m^'katok itiim' imtni ma"uq'huloa
kin'nuqtok "ikkeke'ka nau'hiin pearaithhing'kita ? '* Toim'tithlu athia'-
miik uloi'muk tagu'thlune ^kim' milthki'gha iafka't5k ilm nu'tin uthlil-
g^q'ta imlnd afrSrnakklrau'l6qpa,k tagu'luku mStil'nen thlu tlnglu'w^
tikso'akun mauq'huloi imlnd toko'kdtok, Ittim'td imlni niiq*yug'ne,
itum'ta fa'16qkun toi'tfi tiqkSk'kluku. Kinggno'dne uetSk'kltok, &'n5k
t&ma'kGn num'miik imln^ ^rrSrnAkk&'ra'uloqp&k tokochemiirai'meu u'trSq-
tok emu'mtin maliq'hulupei'meniin a'ki ktnggniin'ra nuptii'gnok tutghS-
rali'huluthliiqka ungghuvalththiaqchSh'kutuk ma~uq'hulun thlu entiqkting-
niksitii'tn kS mauq'hul6qpU. Ma'tn kingy^'ri ch^-Qklc'nii k$'n6k
allsTuru'tlhrail imlni toku'tlhrS. Etaugweuk.
274
ESSENTIALS OF INiXUIT
NOTES ON THE STORY OP AN OLD VILLAOE
tUtghirauholdqUlriSk, a grandmother and
grandchild. The two together are
expressed by this word, just as nfll-
lilqkllriSk means a man and wife.
Agentialis dual. (i66.) TQtghArXk,
tutghirAm = grandchild.
aSULlriek. Third dual of fleairii^, were
both livings from Q^taaghi.
kwSchiigiiim, of a little stream. Agentialis
transitive of kwSchfl^bik, diminutive
of kwiq, rixter.
plQiinS, at the mouth. Ix>calis of pigiil,
its mouth, the possessive form of pi.
Smilqpig'mfiii, to or into the sea. Terminalis
of SmAqpIk, SmAqpSm. (29.)
AnQmAlune, (//) flowing. Third singular of
IdX. (473.) AnoA, / go out ; Antimatik
(Mode LXXIII).
tlngauhdlune, {he) being a boy. Third sin-
gular 151, from tAngaahdlflgwdl, f am
a boy {Mode LXVIII).
taunfl, that one. Agentialis intransitive
singular. (274.)
tfitghArauholoA, (her) grandson. Third sin-
gular possessive. (184.)
SnfiqkunaurhA, {she) often warned him.
Third singular of SnflqkfinauqkA (Mode
XLVII).
§yflt, to the other side. EnS, on the other
side. (353.)
ikk&dmiig'nQn, along their opposite shore.
Third dual terminalis possessive.
Akkdfl = Akk&Ak, bank; ikklmnun,
Akklvniin, AkkemSndn, etc. (386.)
dAtmiiqskfifkfinikfi, {she) telling him not to
walk down the bank. Third singular
of d&tmfiqsldifkSii£ (505), through oflt-
mfiqskQnr&t&kft. Transitive of Mode
XXXIII. The simple is dfttmfiqtSi
= (future) 5AtmflqchShk5A, (past)
5Atmfiqtlhdii^hfl, / walk down the
bank.
tdftthlu, sOf so then^ and so ^ etc. (701.)
ch&t-Ill£tnS, one time. (646.)
SnfiqkflngrXnA, although she forbid him,
(538.)
finwIkdmS, /// the morning. (618.)
kabwinnS, in her sleeping. KaawiqtiUU /
sleep; kauw&m*iii, kabwlq]^ii§, kali-
wlnnS. (678.)
mabhiil5qMiim{, of his grandmother^ from
mabhaldq'luldi. (184.)
InghAm&f he having gone out. Third sin-
gular, from InJUL (534.)
iylgMQiii, he going. Third singular IdJL,
from lyAqtoA. (473-)
Smfimfin, to that. Terminalis singular of
ImlnA. (281.)
SnfiqkiitUirSiifiii, {to the place to) him for-
bidden. Third singular terminalis pos-
sessive. Enfiqkuthlimnftii. (90.)
oXtmfiqtSk. Third singular of ofltmflq-
toA.
5r*iavchdAthlfiq*m§iiak, his little old bow.
Third singular modalis possessive,
dr'lfivuk, a borv ; 5r'lfifch5A, a little
bow. (230.) dr'iafch5ItlUak. (204.)
tigiimiAlune, he taking. Third singular
15A. T&gum&AkA.
dAtmfiqstchukSr'IunS, he just war/ting to go
a little down the bank. Third singu-
lar I0&, of oAtmflqstchGkAqtdl (Mode
CXVIII; see also 485).
nunAthlfir'mfik, an old deserted village.
Modalis singular of nunltlU&q. (204.)
tkStSk, he comes. Third singular of tkStdA.
(See also 842.)
tkSch&mA, he having come. Third singular
of ImA. (534) From tkStoA. (535.)
kIttSnS, /;/ front of him = in his frontness.
Locative third singular possessive.
(390)
thAIthkopAg'miik, a big stone. Modalis sin-
gular of thAIthkdpAk, the augmentative
of thAlthkSk, a stone. (223.) Use of
modalis to express a. (689.)
hwAtli, so or thus. (359.)
V
ktutAIiiii^, (/'/) being high. Third singular
I5A, of ktataiik. (695.)
tfizhghA, his shoulder. Third singular pos-
sessive. TGzhkA, tQzhgan, ttizhghA.
(66.)
^thkAtlUakO, reaching {if) = to the end.
Third singular 15A. (474) GnUlA =
endi ghUIilk = the two ends rf a thing.
NOTES ON THE STORY OF AN OLD VILLAGE
275
nifingkltaSlfliiS, // proves to be Jtollow. Third
singular lofl, from Ul&ngUqtdA (Mode
I) in the mode lUfingklSnSSk (Mode
l.XXII).
ItrautlUokd, he bringing it in. Third
singular 15A, from Itrabt&ki (Mode
LXXV).
maaqhalumSnfin, to his grandmother. Third
singular terminalis possessive.
Imlg'mfin, to = over the entrance. Termi-
nalis singular. Amek, ImSgflm, en-
trance ^ doorway. (819.)
piitulaku, he covering it. Third singular
loA, from p&t5Akft, / caver it.
tabmflk, that. Modalis singular tatml.
(274.)
ItrAtSk, he enters. Third singular Itrfltdft.
miltn chi-Qnfl. (See 308 and 359.)
milktlksatiiifliii, (she) not yet up. Third
singular mlktlksaunS. (508.) Mflk-
tiksltol (Mode XVIII); miktdl, /
rise.
k&nnfiksaiinflnS, (she) not speaking yet.
Third singular kftnnfiksaan&nS. K&n-
nfiksitdl, kAnnfiqtofl, / speak.
oStaiiqtSk, she stayed. Third singular of
ii§tauqtd&, same as uitaughil.
kinruchfiqpfikenflkG, she without wanting to
speak to him. Third singular pfiknfi.
(503.) KSnruchannlt&k&(ModeLXII),
from k&nruULk&, / talk to him.
ItLngrfin, although he being in. Third sin-
gular etingghfir'mi. (536.) ItriltdA,
/ enter.
tSkklSrhi, he called her. Third singular.
T6kkl5rftkA, / call^ address him.
chSn, why. (704.)
k&nndqyiiiiiftpSk&chStf why dost thou not
7uant to talk ? Second singular inter-
rogative aspect (Mode XCII) of
k&mifiqtdX.
kSyfighwl. Third singular transitive.
K§3rfigiki, / answer him.
nauhwlhfim, where is it now ? (an expres-
sion of scolding).
SnfiqkQlIrftmklii, I have often forbidden you.
EnfiqkO'UlrftUi (Mode LX).
Idthiakfl, how. (721.)
chA-kimlnlf the thing at the entrance.
(308)
tk«ch€a, did you bring it ? Interrogative
aspect. Tk9t5X, tkitXki, present used
for past.
ch&mak t&nglngrfttfitii, did you not see any-
thing ? Negative of t&ngSiqtdfl, / see
= tlnglngiStoI.
Smtim. Agentialis transitive of imlnl.
(281.)
tdiytihwA, of course^ certainly. (357.)
tftngUthr&A^ = tftngghllthhda^. Past,
I saw.
chAlthhoA, what was it? Third singular
past of ch&hwfl. (330.)
kSmitlhunnlchAldlr&Ikuk. First person dual
of kSmitlhfinrAchlkilrSI^hi, we two
were not alone. KSmSchikoA. (668.)
nunaaiifir'mfiqiid, /// the time of its being a
village. Third singular. (78.)
pSnlqt&rfitaksAkftkftt. Third plural of p€-
niqt&rutiik8AkAk&, they were tucustomed
to play often with it. P§iiIqtiirfitkAk&,
I play with it^ testing my strength at
lifting.
nauthlfihwStkApik, alas^ not at all. (726.)
kiivyuStAt, none ever lifted it. Third plural
kuvyuStaka (Mode VII).
GSthlimil. Agentialis transitive of iiSlthk&,
my then husband. U§k2, my husband.
(9'.)
iiakftlthpeAlthhrllt&. liak<hpSfllthhrAt,
their chief past of niikAlthp^i.
kSme, he alone. (668.)
kuvchGkAqkft or kfifchukAqk&, / //// it just
a little.
pSnSthlSnSutfa. Second person singular of
p€n§thlSn§agiifly I am strong.
Ighiilt&, again. (626.) Term used in
scolding,
hwlnehwl, here now. (355.)
tImilhQn, by down there. Vialis of tXmi.
8ii€qchlk5nflk, go thou not by the shore
= imperative negative of 8n(qt5I.
(486.)
Ingrl. Third singular of Ingrftkft = / say
yes to him — I yes him. KAng^h&rXkA,
I no him.
pS^itnSlflnS. Third singular of ISA =
plng^tdA.
tabm Idng^SinS, after that time. (619.)
chAm IllSnS, one time. (646.)
Snfiqkflngrilni fim. (See same word above.)
Am = again.
276
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
ikini, reduplication — forbidden again ^
again he goes along the shore.
Snfiqkfltlhrftkfin. Third singular vialis of
SnflqkdthUmkflii (95), by the way for-
bidden him.
■ii(qtfikkSr'ltiii§. Third singular 151, of
snSqtflkk&qtdA, I go a little along the
bank.
kdUnS, in its middle. Third singular localis
of kdldikft, kok&mA. (396.) KOULmnS,
kdk&qM* k5ULiiS.
pfllliyirflqptgmfik, a large wood path.
Augmentative pfllliylrXqpdt. (19 and
223.)
itfiq'lQW, following them = it. Third sin-
gular 151, of &t6qt5A. (845.)
tigOk. Third singular tig5i, / conte.
(842.)
•flyiqtSk, he emerges from. Third singular
of sflv&qtdft (often pronounced soft, as
8iif&qt5&).
nXnvfihlg'inaii, to a lake. Terminalis of
ninvflk, n&nyfih&m.
mlkkUrilmfln, little (agrees with preced-
ing). (166.) From mlkk5k, // is
small.
kftiilkchlch5&riliigkit5k, // has a little snow
on it. (230 and Mode I.)
taAq;pkk, during the night. (618.)
kinlkchQk&thUnSImS, k&nlkchuk&thllnaOk,//
snowed a little (Mode LXXII).
nlnvfih&chughlk, little lake. (234.) Nin-
▼2k, a lake.
mfiqtirftvik, water hole. Mfiq, water ; yik.
(ri7.)
kftnrfichiiiiflku, and that one, his grand-
mother^ had never spoken about people
there. KInriichiletlldl, / never speak of
it (Mode VII and 511). KInrfichQnS.
kSIldk mfiqtXr&Tikaii, whose water hole is
this ? (299.)
flthl&gS, he drew near it. Third singular
athUgSkA.
yQk, ano&k, a man^ early that morning.
chSfighflnS, before him. Third singular
chSGdmS. (399)
mttqtXthl5iiehr&I, who evidently came for
water. Third singular. Mfiqt&thl5ii5<i-
giiA, mfiqt&qt5&.
taaqkfin, mithlQ, and by from here. (274,
361, and 696.)
tIg'thl5ii51Qii5, he has been going up. Third
singular tftg*tlU5]i515X of ag'thlSnSfl-
^. tlgg5«. (861.)
ijrfimS&n, and so.
mAllqtlUiikii, he follows him. Third singu-
lar 15&. MflUqt&ki.
tfimikaii. Vialis of tfimi, by the trail.
tfiyydk. Third singular tfiyy5A, / make the
crossings i.e., go up one side and down
the other.
nfttstfik. Third singular iiAt8t5I, / view^
meaning to look from a high position.
p&miUr'nSrr&nfiii, to down that side of him.
Third singular possessive terminalis
p&mlUr'n&kA. (410.) •
iini, nQm, house (this is always a winter
house). (810.)
payirUunS, smoking. Third singular lofl.
Pil3r5k, smoke ; pii3rfiiqt5k, it smokes.
k5n5thl5ii5ftm5, cooking. K5nethlliiii55k, he
cooks.
kztchQ^h&qtliigkfttliianS, having a little
storehouse. Third singular 151. Kii-
ch5X and kxtchfl^hak. (23a) KiichSftq-
tXngkitok or kztchflgiiXqtXiigkitok
(Mode I).
mitfi tk5t&, as he comes to it. Tk5t5X.
cliA5kkllkflii, by the front of it. Third sin-
gular vialis of ch&5k&mkfiii, from ch&5-
k&ldl, ch&5k&mi, ch&5kkftmii5. (399
and 736.)
fikfSglt, trees. Plural of fikfSglk.
nautlilSnelliitflng, growing. Third plural
15i. NautlUSiigat.
3rfikpfiktiik8auii&ii5, no one moving about.
Third singular jnikpfiktiiksaanS. (508.)
TakpfiktaksitSk (Mode XVIII), from
yfikpfiktSk.
mfiqtXthluk, water carrier. Past form.
(58.) Mfiqair&ft. (164.) Wl^, water.
(26.)
tflmirhfithliiiiS, there were no more tracks
of the water carrier. Third singular
15&, from tfimirutSk (Mode IX and
19).
IhAlSk, the smoke hole or ventilator. (See
811.)
mit& Qyflngtil, as he looks down. Third
singular of ayiiigt5&, Qyftngt&ldl.
mSrh&gnGk, two logs. Modalis dual of
mSrhig&k.
NOTES ON THE STORY OF AN OLD VILLAGE
277
kSnSthllngkithianS, in the cooking place (i.e.,
fireplace). KSnSthllngldltSk (Mode I).
chlngghaiinULthliituk, embracing each other^
kissing. Figurative. Third dual loX,
from chlnggf^aiimAthlSX.
ghlkaUylq, a little pot. GhAkaU and
ghAksdlylq are diminutive forms of
ghftn, ghltSm, ghltmS, etc. (230.)
kithlflr'vIg'ltlnS, boiling fiercely. Third
singular 151, of k&thlfir>v&qt5k (Mode
LXXVI).
Qn&tnfik, some human hands. Un&tQt jrlnxfttf
singular. (749-)
ttqtiikftthKinS, having in it. Third singular
15ft, of fiqtiikitSk.
kUqt5k, he looks about. Third singular
kUqtoX.
11151, inside. (391-)
kUqchAldli&I, he looks in vain. EJUlqchA-
k5X (Mode CXIX), of kAftqtSX.
chimttk tXnglngTitSk, he does not see any-
thing. (766.)
fiqkdftnS, in the back of the house. NSm
fiqk5I. (41 and 3S6.) UqkOmtSk, it
is in the rear. (37 1 .)
IfiSniXkkaiih5I5qp&k, a big old woman. (2 23.)
mitIrXm&, undressed. Third singular of
Ami. (530.) Mfltftqtdfi, I undress.
pftlfig'naurillrAfi, stretched out on the floor.
Third singular pftiag*naiirUglifi, from
pftlfig'nauqtol.
kaawAg'lGnS, sleeping. Third singular I0&.
Kaiiwftqtdfl, I sleep.
mfiqtlq'^lftn. Third singular negative of
mfiqt&q'^lftmft, because I would not
be water carrier. He sought for that
water carrier^ as that sleeper could not
have been the one. (531.)
tSqkldrhi, he hailed her^ called her. Third
singular of t6kkl5rftk&.
kauwftqplrknik. Imperative negative, do
not sleep so much^ grandmother. (492.)
&thU[n§^&, entertain me^ treat me to food.
Athlft = another ; IthUnetSk, there is
a guest, an arrival; ftthUnefikft, /
entertain him. (Food is always offered
when one arrives at a house.)
tfipftnifttSk, she did not rise. Third singular
negative of tiipftqt5fi.
klylgfilfikfl, yelling at her. Kiy&gatiw&ldl,
I yell at him.
wSgylkl, he tries.
ketoInS, then.
iSmkUlflnS, breaking (a bit of wood).
iSmkSafnfl.
tXmikfin, by where he was. (276.)
klniyfit, to down there. (352.)
mllqpftqtXr'y&kS, he threw it hard torvards
her. Third singular mllqpftqtXrXkl,
augmentative of mllthkftiftkl, / throw
at him.
tfipftg'yfinripftkftn, as she did not seem
inclined to get up. Third singular
k4m«. (525.)
chSutik&n, by the ear. Third singular pos-
sessive vialis of chSGtikA, my ear;
cheGn, ear.
niyl^hflt&, he shook it. Third singular of
niyaghfltAkft.
tfip&qtsflgluku, trying to wake her. Third
singular Idft. TupftqshAg&kft (Mode
XXVIII).
niy&ghftch&nS. Third singular ftmft. (534*)
Niy&^hftch&mne, from nly&gn&t&kft.
ftch5ftn&k, from down below, beneath her.
(390)
ilmAtSk, there is a groan. Umit5I, /
grotjn.
uneftqtft. Third singular, he darts back.
Une2qtftk&, / move off quickly from it
(Mode MIX of iineakA).
ftll5nthlflg*ian5, greatly frightened. AllSn-
thlftqtoft, I am much alarmed.
nGpirftn, and then after she was quiet.
Third singular Imi. NflpUtSk, it is
still.
tflp&qtfingnAkA, he tries gently to wake her.
TupftqtfingnAklkl.
nutUn, all right.
tfip5mft. Third singular Ami, of tfipftqtSi
= when she woke she got up: She
said, *• Hello, little grandson ! you have
come, eh ? "
emum t&ngauholiim, that boy. Transitive
form of Imln& tXiigauh515k. He an-
swered, •' Do not sleep so much, grand-
mother. Hurry up ! give me something
to eat." Then that old woman said.
tXthlfir'nflpStlS, same as kw5yaagiillp5tl5 =
this is fine. (629.)
nfirrfiksDghiit, / who have not yet eaten
(Mode XVIII).
278
ESSEXTIALS OF INNUIT
nfir'15qk&ULqp&, at last I am going to have
something to eat. (628.)
nQkmQk, any food. Modalis of nttU, nfi-
k&m, nQkme. Ih cried to her^ " Grand-
mother^ I have not brought you any
foodr
nfikULtAtdA, / am going to begin to eat (Mode
XXI). lite old woman answered^
*' /»\>j', / am going to eat you.*^
AkAk&kft. Exclamation. There is a variety
of these, as, Ikkekikft, 5kftk5k5, flkft-
ktikS, etc. (See 626.) Ohy you old
woman ! indeed^ you will not eat me.
kAng, no (used interrogatively). Yes^ I
will eat you. (780.)
kAngherftmQii, up in the corner. Terminalis
of k^ngherftk, corner.
iilnggh5k, she reaches up in the corner^ she
reaches right up and brings down.
(ildAqpiik. a big knife. Augmentative of
filudk = the semilune-shaped knife^used
generally by the women. (865.)
slSluktithlu, and she whets it. Third sin-
gular ids, of sl^gdl, I whet ; slln, whet-
stone.
t5im§ k§n&, for whom now. (357.) Tah-
hwfl kenil can be also said. (293.)
8lSch§u, are you whetting it? Second per-
son singular interrogative aspect tran-
sitive of sl^goA. (461.)
ipSnfikhwA, // is for yourself you are whet-
ting. (257 and 359.)
dg'nSutd, she threatens him. Third sin-
gular of 5g'n§at&ki, he stood being
threatened.
5g'nSutk$r'Iukii, she making a rapid thrust,
6gn5utchflkftr&kA.
pakchilththl§n, from pfikchSthl&qtSI, I move
quickly.
U[fkat5k, he dodged down. Third singular
12fk&t5&.
mflkiltdk, he rose up. Third singular
m&k&qtofl.
naiihiin = how did he avoid the danger =
in what way ? (710.)
pe ArSlthhfingkAtdk, pe&rfilthhAngk&tdX, same
as pSfirflngk&tdA. And then taking
another knife ^ she threw it at him
again ; he dodged again all right. He
apprihjched that big old woman t grabbed
her.
mitXnSn, being naked. MXtlqnaiighly / am
naked ; m&tlqtol, / strip.
tinglfiwi, he hit her with his fist. Third
singular tlnglGwikA. (468.)
fiksdikfin, on the head. Vialis of fiksoS, by
the head. (55.)
t5k5kit5k, she dies at once. Third singular
tokdk&t5A.
itfimtii, he cut her up. Third singular of
ItfimakA.
nttq'yflgnS, his one wanting to eat him =
idiom, the one who wants to eat him.
(See Mrxle LXII and 146.)
HUdqkfin, by the smoke hole. Vialis of
fftl5k.
fiqkftkkKikfi, pitching out. Third singular
15&, of &qk&k&k&, / throw it.
fl§tlkklt5k, he remained for a little while.
USakklltdA.
An5k, he goes out. Third singular InSA, by
dozon there.
tdkdchSmfirUmSttf after his having killed
her (Mode XL VI). Third singular
transitive of ftmi. (534.) TSkfiUkA,
tSkdchSmir&ftmi.
fitrftqtSk, he returns to. Utrflqtd&.
mauhfilQpSImSnfin. Possessive third sin-
gular localis = to his own grandmother.
(181.)
Iki, already.
klngghfinrft, behind him. Third singular
possessive plural of Idngghdldi, king-
[Jnttnka. (391.)
nflptfl^dk. Third singular, sounds. Ntippft,
a noise^ sound.
tfitghirauhfilfitlUaqkft, my bad grandson.
(204.)
ang^fiY<hthiaqchShkfitak, you both will
have a bad end. Second person dual
future of ang^avllththlfiqtdl.
maiiqhiiltin, thy grandmother.
SnfiqkfingnflksitXtii, did she not warn
you ?
klngy&ri. Third singular, he looks behind.
KIngy&r&k&, / look back.
chl-Qkknil, there behind. (3S0 and 308.)
kSndk, fire. KSnSk, kSnihOm.
&llaariitlhr&fi, appearing. Third singular
rfifignfl, of ftllaurutd&.
tokOtlhrft, his murdered one. Third singu-
lar possessive of tdkfitlkfi. (T46 )
THE PTARMIGAN STORY — NOTES
279
The Ptarmigan Story
Alcizhgerhau'luk nuliq'klutiik uetai'raek. Atau'ch!meh6k ti^'*nliFme
ue'nii sloqt&riyi'toqtok, iik'Snun sloqt^rllune, k^kmi' kiyiiq'pikt6k m6q-
rha'g&miik ch^la'thlu nimmiiq'kamiik &kfat'sklu'ne. M^'tnhok nula'h^
a'nok cha'hik u'ni ir'ghod azm^thlenU'raa. To^'tluhok ta"u'na nula'h&
itkAn'rikiin, k&'kiim'nil Sm kiyiiq'paktok moqrha'g&miik ch^la'thlu nim-
muqlcamuk &kfat'sklu'ne. M&'tiihok nula'hii in 'ok chd'hik u'ni tH'thlei
azmathlenil'rad. Toi'tluhokim i'trilune, imlni nula'hi tamdn't&qtdk
nii'me, ue'nethlu umyiiilkuksau'na.ku i'ka.ntin. Tod'tliihok punggh&q'
thlune &n'tlraem, m&'tfth6k ue'ne tdn'gha, chaMk u'nd iikstiiqthlenil'rad.
Toi'tluhok i'trilune, keyilunethlu, keyAkin'rilkiin se'yuk irha'liiqkun
uy&ng'thlune ueksklu'ne, tod'tluhok talim' ^^'rhin^m pe'd " uekinritne -
lukiL" ToS'thluhok ch^la' tiin'tu fhaliqktin tiying'thlune Ceksklu'ne,
kin'riln ta~uni' ^'kizhgim pe'a. " kSnnighiltuviki'vtit peyunra'tdmkin."
Toii'tluhok pa,16k'tak J-hmqkiin uydng'thlune chela' ueksklu'ne peyi-
kil'raii chSla' peyuqkgn^'ku mdqrha'giniik kdngkthlii'ne'luku Talim'ti-
tluhok kin'niiq klik uyang'ch^ma pe'ok ueksklu'ne, chSla' toil'tluhok
tsTum' a.'kizhgim pe'& peyundtnelu'ku tupegaka'nuk niif'l3,gne'luku.
Toi'tluhok iqhi'yule uying'thlune pe'6k chda' ueksklu'ne to^'tluhdk
talim' a,'kizhg!m pe'i peyunritnelu'ku illdm'nuk tokocheliiq'nelu'ku
Toa'tluhok a'klzhzhigik hhi'laqkiln uyang'chima kiln'nQqtok " Hwe
ue'kapug'nl king'kiig'nuk nukkin'ka.tod." Toi'tluhok tau'nS i'kizhglm
nula'hi rhi'l^qkiin tlngvithlaglutuk toi' nuliqkumzi'lutuk.
NOTES ON THE PTARMIGAN STORY
Ikldzhzhlglk, a ptarmigan, (See suffix, 1 84,
dual.)
nullqkldfi. (See 470.)
itauchlmS. (See 581 and 619.)
hSk. (354.)
&f*iifir'm§. (618.)
fi§ii&, her husband. (790.)
8l5qaqt5fl, I sHdt. (See Mode XX.)
Ik&nfin, for a long time. (620.)
kftkmi. (361.)
kiy&gauqtoS, klyfiglkft, / shout, (See
Mode LXXVI.)
mdrhilg&infik. Modalis of mdrhAg&k, wood
splints.
chSUlu, and. (701.)
nlmmfiqkAk, bandage.
IkffitaklGnS. (473.) Akfitak^kft (Mode
XXXIII), asked her to bring to him,
mftt&hdk. (359.)
ii6IAh&, his wife, (66.)
&n5k, finofl, I go out. (457.)
ch&h&k unfl, what is this ? (320.)
Iifhdfl, his leg. (66.)
ftzn&qtftk&, / break it. (458.)
tSItluhok, and so then, (356.)
taun&, that. (274.)
Itrtdl, I go in. (See Itk&nlmkfin, 78 and 83.)
k&kflm'ni. (379.)
ftm, again.
t&thierk&, t&thlln, t&thiei. (66.)
Imlnfi. (281.)
tAmAnULqt5k (Mode XXIII), of tftmXntdA.
(371.)
28o
ESSExVTIALS OF INNC/IT
ntimme. I^ocative tini, nfim. (45.)
flmyfidrkflktit&Ul (Mode XVIII), she re-
mained in the house and thought no
more of him.
pflngg&qtdA, / iim anxious.
iii5&, / f^o out. (457.)
tXnghik&t t&nghin, ULnghl, / see it. (469.)
fik8tiIqto&, I am headless (Mode VII).
kSy&lun§. (473-) KSyau^hX, / mourn.
(543-)
kSyAk&nr&kaii.y»j/w^//^ she was mourning.
(525.)
88yi!k, sSyQn, a small bird.
ihilSqkQn, fhA15q, smoke hole. (810.)
flylngthlGnS. (473.) \5yka%^ok^/ look down.
aSkskiane. (473.) Uekimklii and fiSldnri-
t&mldn, to propose marriage.
IFrtm&k, woman.
p«&, said. PeOghl. (6S6.)
tfintfl, deer.
kftniftn, UlnrftmA. (532.)
kftnnighAqtfiv&k&viit. (514) KJLnnftglk,
long legs (Mode I), because you have
long legs.
pSyfinrAt&mkln, / do not want you (Mode
LXII).
pilSqtlk, a beaver.
p«y&knrU. (166.) PSylkM.
pSjniqpfikkSn&kfi, without wanting it. ( 502 . )
kingkthUlt5k, to gnaw. (474.)
t5Xmt&tia. (356.)
kinnfikkULk, k&nnfikklSm, muskrat.
tfipSgAhklk, mat straw.
nfiqrh5&, I eat (Mode CL).
IqhiyfilS, owl. (174.)
lilgmnfik. (639.)
t5kiit&ki[, / kill. TdkQchSUqtdX, I usually
kill.
k&nkuk, willow catkins. (The ptarmigan
feed on them.)
nfikkingktd& (Mode I), I feed on.
tlngyftthUtSk, it flies away.
niillqkfimilk&. Third dual, they were long
married (Mode LXVI).
The Lost Needle
Tutghar2ui*16kkil'raek uetilVaek. Tutgh^rau'liingTdlthlune t^nggaii'ho-
lor'miik, mingkuting'k^thlutukh5k. Taliq'kiin itau'chlmiik mlngkutifngTci-
thlutuk tamaka"ufkgni'kiL To&'thluh6k ch&Mllet'ne ma"uqhul6q"l6a
slimka'che6k, t5&'thluh6k slimkachen&n'rina tutghirali'loi itkiilth-
hrine althh6h'p&kin, ma"uqhul6q"lume kitke'we tagu'luke, atkiilthlirane
ming'ka. Toa'thluh6k mlnknenil'niir'mne ming'kutHin e'mum thle'cheS
n^thluy^gu'ta, yud^aTca nitakinrg't^ nitaklnrarn'meu tutghir^'^aa imlnH
mSnusiiq'tok, m^nustig'nen^nV^na mauqhul5q"loa. Ttritdk toa.'thIu tut-
gh&r2iu"lune pe'i m^nustiqp^k^'chet? Toil'thlu keyu'ghwS, "Tdiyu'hwi
allineokp^ka'mi minustiqtlrai'gni." T5i'thluh6k uq't6k, uq'chUma
kiimmiiksilth'hr^gne yu'w^, kSn'niiq'lune kimmtikslllth'thliiqk& ki'na
aithh6hpa'kat6k mingktikkiir'y^'kak&. To&'thla kikeVene tig'goe,
to^'thlu tiggo2,'meke ^ngglie'ti ingghekdr'yS'ki mIngkuttiiq"loa. !m1nS.
tiye'ma! To^'thlu kin'ntiqtdk : " Tutghira^thluga mlngkutttiq'Uopuk
imlnd na~uhwa? S-'ghu ! chilgmaqy3ic5'na,ku naii'hwi? keke' tizh'ghwul"
To^'thlu keyu'ghwi ^tkulth'thliiqkil ^Ithhdh'p^in mtngTc^ka mink-
V
nena,'nim*ne thle'chea ndthluyigu't^ka. Tutghara'lihnkQti'gak I i'gnu
ch&gm&ch$hkln'rat5k ke'gliin minkut'k^puk, niit'miin chigmSq'cheu?
chigmaith'pne UckekeTdi yO^'ghwu ! To&'thlu yuil'r&k yoariyaklik'kek
THE LOST NEEDLE — NOTES
281
niltikin'rat&k uegyi'kuk t5il hwa'nSrpak nat^kutin'ratuk. Tti^harali'-
loqlune lining keto'^ne nunu'gni keke ! p^t^g'^miik ! n^t^ksklu'ku,
uegy^^uk keto'^ne imln^ t^nggauhol5q"lune tlngla'rh^ n^t^ochii-
gnird'chamtik. Tiitgharaidq'loi niM'yutdk keai6g"lune a'n6k. MH'tft
^'n5k ^t^kulu'ng, mi'tii n6chiig'ne5k ^^Ictin k^zhge'mtik ^ttilra^'mtik
ne't6k. Uthl&'gi mil'tft kazhge'mtin uying'tdk chat-kilmTcut atul'raet
imKni mingkuttiiqioik ipp&thltiq'thluku. (Song.) M&'tfi uying'tok
kizhgem' ni'trine yuchoi'yig&t iinTcut po&thli'raet, mingTcutniik
iyi'rdlutting, iknir'nile'Ulniik n&ch&ngk&thlu'tiing am'thluqthlutting.
To^'thluhSk rtrat6k &qpa"utiikTduku yucho^y^'gat im'kut klut'miin
chukchsTu'tut imTcut iy^'rdtiing mlngTcutOt une^'thluke. Ming'kQtniik
auq'tdk kne'ne mwer'thluku tim<hkwe'ti toi' ningimeTce i'ndk,
ma"uqhol6q"lune uthli'g^ Mi'tft ftr^t6k chSla' u'n^ mauqhol6q'*loi
emu'miik mingTcutintik timilth'thliir'miik yua.l'rai. Toi'thlu pugu-
chea.'tiin pe'^: tutgha,rauluchethliir'Vah ! mlngTcutpuk Im^nlL p2iti-
g^mtik niti'kau ke^gli^n pek^'puk. Toi'thlu tutgh&r&'*loi ke&va,q't6k
mauqhul5q'lo^'inethl(i kitte'niin ming'kutiit im'kut k^t^liiq'thluke.
Mauqhul6q"l6^ imln^ irrgnka'ilthkille kweyi'lune im'kuntik ming'-
kutnimak toi'. MinksiTclugiit mingTci tamaraiki'miik ^thl^'niik
chimerakTcluke toi' mingkut'gnimiik to^ntSkTcleuk. Etali'gweuk.
NOTES ON THE LOST NEEDLE STORY
tfitghiraa'ldkkUriSk, tA^re lived a couple.
Third dual. (166.)
tXnggau'hdlSr'mfik. Modalis singular of
t&ngauhdldk, boy. (184.)
Itaiichlmfik, one. Modalis. (581.)
mlngkfitlngUthlfltflk, they both had one
needle. Third dual (Mode I).
t&mftkaufkSn&kfi, without letting it get lost
(i.e., carefully). Third singular. (505.)
From tXmflrlldl, / lose it.
chAt-niStnS, so then one day. (646.)
inauqhuI5qM5&, his grandmother. Third
singular. (184.)
slftmUchSOk, she went out of doors. Pres-
ent third singular. SU, the weather.
(439)
8UmkAch§iUlnrft]ii,z&^27^j^^waj<7f//. Third
singular. (539.)
tfitghiraii'15A, her grandson. Third sin-
gular. (184.)
}^t\A\\.\^}bArA, his old fur coat. Fromltkfik.
(204.)
Ilthhdhp&kin, because it was torn. (535.)
kikSwS, her needle-case. (117.) Used in
the plural. (19.)
tigfiliikS, taking it^ he sewed his old coat.
Plural of Ifikfi. (474.)
mlnknSn&nfir'&nS, while he was sewing it.
(537.)
Smflm. From ImlnA. (281.)
thlSchS&. Third singular of thlSchUcft.
(153.) From tlUSIki, I put it.
n&thlQy&gutl. Third singular nithlflylgu-
ak&, / forget it (458.) He forgot
where he put the needle = of that needle ^
its putting placet its position, he for-
gets it.
yQ&'y&k&y he seeks it.
nAtXldnrStft, he does not find it. From nitX-
k&ki. (780.)
nlt&k!nril&m§fl, because he does not find it.
(532.)
mftnGsfiqtSk, he grieves. That one, her
grandson, he grieves.
282
ESSE XT/ A LS OF INNUIT
mAniisfig'nSii&nriiiA, while he is sad his
grandmother enters.
pSA, she says. (687.) Then she says to her
grandchildy **Why are you so sadV^
kSyilghwA, he answers her. (468.) Because
of my being so lonesome I was grieving.
(462.)
fiqt5k. (812.) Then she sat down^ and
having seated herself.
yQwIk, she drew off both her boots. (535.)
kiimfiqluiiS, {she) saying. (480.)
kimm&kslilththlfiqU, that old boot of mine
down there. (58 and 204.)
kini, down there. (362.) It is so torn that
I must sew it up.
kftkSyinS . (117.) Then she took her needle-
case^ and having taken it {them, 19), she
untied it.
tiySml. (759.) She untied it slowly and that
old needle of hers was not there. (184.)
tatghlr&tlUagl. (710.) Then she said,
^* Grandchild, that needle of ours, where
is it ? "
Ignfi. (626.) An exclamation used in scolding.
chlgm&qy&k5nlkfi. (486.)
k£kS. (626.) Hurry up! hand it over.
(483.) Then he answered, ^''Because
my old coat was torn I sewed it;
while I was sewing I forgot where I
put itr
tfitghftr&'mmkutftg&k. (242.) You good-
for-nothing fellow ! it will not be lost =
/■/ must not be lost.
kSghin. (673.) // is the only needle we
have. Where did you lose it?
chAgmAlth^ne. I/ere, quick now ! look for
it in the place you lost it. (90.)
hw&nSrpftk. (616.) They both looked and
they looked carefully. They did not
find it, so they both tried all day and
they could not find it.
kSt5&nS. (619.) Then she scolded the grand-
son. '^ Hurry! make haste (626), find
it! "
tinglfirhl. (468.) Then she beat him because
it seemed as if they never would find
(that needle) again. (535.) (See Modes
XLI and CXIII.)
BfikijrfitSk, her grandchild got sulky and
went out crying. (478.)
mfttfi. (359-) As he went out night was
coming on.
imftkfiiL (352.) As he listened he heard
music from the kazhga over there.
fiyftngtSk. As he drew near to the kazhga
he looked down (i.e., through the smoke
hole).
chAt-kimkfit (308 and 380.) Their ras-
cally old needle was leading the chorus.
nAtrflnS, on the floor of the kazhga. (238.)
iyftrSlfltfing, they were using needles for
canes (they caned with needles). lylrSk.
a cane, walking-stick.
mlngkfitnflk iyAr6qtJUl, / use a needle as a
walking-stick = / cane with a needle,
and they had thimbles for caps. (209.)
Aknlr'nilStXnfik nicliAiigkAtdi, / cap
with a thimble.
ftmthlfiqthlfit&ng, they being very numerous.
(285.)
Iqpaiitfikkiaki, &qpftqt5I. / yell (Mode
LXX VI). He went in yelling loudly.
klfitmQn, they rushed to a corner dropping
their needle canes.
auqtSk. (652.) He gathers the needles, fill-
ing his apron. When he had gotten the
whole of them he went out. (It is a
custom for the natives to gather up
the front of the fur coat or blouse aAd
use it to carry things in just as a
woman uses an apron ; this is expressed
by knSnS).
chSU, as he enters again this, his grand-
mother, was looking still for the lost
needle.
pflgflchS&t&n, pfigwdl, just at his entrance
she said. (84.)
kSIvIqtOk, he went around behind her.
kIttSnfin, and scattered those needles out in
front of her. (390.)
td&ntXkklSak = t5&nt5&. (371.) And prob-
ably they are both living there still.
STORY OF THE KWAHUK — NOTES
283
The Story of the Kw&hiik
Toa'thluh5khwi u'kuk ilf'naqkarauholSqkn'raek uet^chghka'alraek,
toi'thlu uetingnenin'r^g'ne chak'maktin ching'ghem amate'ne uet^l-
raek. To&'thlQh6k ne'tuk atulra^'mtik. {Song:) To&'thlu chlng'gnem
^m^te'ne illingneolutuk, up'tuk chil'tiik, iikku'r^uk ^nggl^V^thltiq-
miig'ntin toi' ch&t in&'hituk tiimyar&'hituk moriqch&ra'tuk m5qt^'-
y^riha'tuk emtiqt5g'auke. Chiha'tiik t^m<hkwe'ta takuchem^rai'miik
nu'tiln, ^nggi^'thluqtuk ptiq'UlqUlk, ptiq't&qtiik nu't&n, tikku'r^kuk
^kklulth'hr^tuk to^'tii ch^kiiWn^ uk&kse'gentir'lune ^rr^nka&'nituk
alling'lutuk toi'; iy&'nlnran OkTcdk, OkTclune iepit'ne ugls'k^, toi'thlu
irru'me in'glo& Okkit^'rh^, toi'thlu likk^tan&n'rana kan'niiqt6k : "Ah
k^kevecho^thliir'^nk^ n^thluy^guthlene^nlc^ ^t^'ke ^^'n^qkifuholu'thlug^
akfigM&'kgr'luke ut^kaTce^ p^t^gachekTcoa, miillughi'to& I " Tak't5k
ikf^okt&lu'ne af'nikkauh5l6q'chimathlu chlr'laliq'chima nQtchoi-
thliiqtuk et'lct& itr^yakirrai ch&'mGk t^nglng'rStok, t^nglngraU'ma
at^m' &tr&q't6k, to^'thla a!-'nakka"uholuthlo'ane kinru't^: "Ting'Qq-
thluku kakevtlth'h&nka chatil'gTiut." Tod'thlu ugis'ka irrti'me im
inglo^ Qkkat^k'ne, mil'tii muk u'n^ t^ng'h^ kwH'huk u'n^ ^zukt^r^-
ral'ral toi a,t6r"lune. Pa-ugulthlirain chunau'hwii a,llingchirrira,lthhke-
kuk, to^'thlu ighoilrut'menuk tiiqki'rha, u'thlurim chunaTu'hwi ^llings-
st&keTcuk nuq'thluku &sepe'yuthluku chaketir^'r&rik ltumniiqchir'*luku
nu'tin itumchem^radmug'g^nnlghwu mur^mtin dq't&k nu't^n pem^-
raii'muk ^Utm' nunicho&'thluqtuk ime'gik, nQtcho^'thltir'mug'niin
I'tr^tuk nu't^n, itr^m^ra^'muk toantiralcleOk.
NOTES ON THE STORY OP THE KWAHUK
kw&hflk, ' pygosteus pungitius/ stickleback,
(The run of this fish occurs in March,
and it ranks as one of the important
food fishes of the coast region between
the Yukon and Kuskokwim.)
&r'n&q]dlrauhdl5qldlriLSk, these two poor old
wonten.
uSt&ngnSninr&g'nS. Localis third dual.
(541.) While they were both living
there.
chlkmlkGii, by down there. Localis vialis.
chlnggbem. Transitive of chlng^Sk, a
sharp bend in a river.
ImfitSnS, beyond. Localis. (41.)
nStilk. Third dual of nStdft, / hear.
Atfilriftinttk. Modalis singular AtfllxftA.
(166.) They both heard some one
singing.
ftlUngn^diatflk. Third dual. Mode form
of IllSng^iidfi, I fear. They were both
terrified.
uptuk. Third dual of Cptlkft, they both
packed up.
ch&tfik, their little effects. (See cM, 31 1.)
fikkur&kiik, Qkk$&, / embark.
&nggUr&thlfiqmfig*nfin, into their poor old
w
boat. Terminalis dual. (204.) Ang-
gi&k is the open boat made of walrus
skin over a frame. (The anggiak
carries a small mast. In some works
284
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
on Alaska it is always described as
the woman's boat to distinguish it
from the kiyak.)
•mttqtSg'lQkS, emfiqtdriki, I efface it. They
obliterated their tracks on the path
lecuiing to the water hole and the path
which they used in going for wood,
chfthAtak, their household effects. Chlhlkft.
tXmllthkwSa, all. (650.)
tXkflchSmirftAmfik, after (their things) they
were all ready. T&kkSX. (Mode
XL VI.)
nfltXn, all right.
pfiqt&qtftk, they launched ; their old bocU^
they launched it all right and loaded it,
Ikkiaithhrfttak, with their old clothes. Ak-
kiaithh&nkli clothings beddings etc.
chAkfimlni, the thing down below there.
(308.)
fiUUoiSgenar'lflnS, it was approaching nearer
all this time. Ukftk8<gS3rfignll, / draw
nearer. (3 1 6.)
ftzTSnkiftnXtfik. Third dual ftirSiikUtSI,
they were in a panic^ they were alarmed.
lylnlnrftn, the elder one.
SkkSk, Qkkiane. Third singular OkkSI, /
embark i enter a boat. She embarked^
she embarking. (Note the omission of
" and.")
iSpInS. Possessive third singular of i§p&kS,
her friendf i.e., her other one. (648.)
ilglsU, she told her to embark. Ukkdl in
the mode of commanding (Mode
XXXIII).
Irrfimi Ingldl llkkftt&rhl,y2^j/ as she had one
leg in {the boat). LrflU = Irrfiqkfl,
''^y ^^S* ^y ^^S^' (^O
kftnnfiqtdk, she said. *
kftkiTSchdIthlttr&nk&, my little old needle-
case = k&k§y§nkl, my needle-case.
(This word is used in the plural.
Here it is combined with the suffix
chd&, small (230), and thlfiq, old
(204).
]iitlUfiyfigiithl§nSfink&, / have forgotten
where I put it. N&thlflylgatXki, /
forget. Thiefikft, / place it.
&tXkS. Exclamation, ^<^/</ i^/i .' wait! here!
etc. Wait a minute^ old woman! let
me run and get it (them).
Ikffig*lftkSrl<ike, let me run and get them.
(488, 3.) Imperative UdAkdrtSA, /
run.
fit&kikS&, wait for me. Imperative fitA-
kftki, / wait for him.
pItXgIchShk5&, / will hurry. Future of
p&tAgaugn&, / hasten,
mfilltigiiit5&, / will not delay. Future neg-
ative of miilKigiil, / delay.
chIr*lauqclUlm&, because she was weak^ on
account of her weakness. (530.) From
chlxUaugwSi, / am weak. (Mode
LXVIII.) She wentt trying to run
fcut, (but could not) because she was a
very old woman and because she was
weak.
nStchdAthiaqtak, their little old house. Nn&,
housCf combined with ch5& and thlfiq.
chimfik tftnglngrCtdk, she did not see any-
thing. She entered their little old
house. Going in slowly^ she could
not see it^ and because of not seeing it
again she went down. Atriqt5k. (861.)
chAtnghfit. Third plural chltilg1i5k, ex-
presses a lost thing. Then she said to
her old woman^ " See here ! my needle-
case (past), the needle-case which I had^
is lost." (Mode VI.)
kikSyUthh&nkl. Past form of kftkiy€nU.
(85)
Xm, once more^ again. So then she told
her to embark, and just as she put
her leg in the boat again she looked
down at the water and saw a stickle-
back.
IxfiktftrftrUr&A, which was swimming along
up and singing,
paugfilthhrlm, ah^ you good-for-nothing one
down there ! so it is you then who has
been causing us terror,
tfiqk&rhl, she jabbed at it with her oar, the
thing which was scaring them.
nflqthliikii, she got it up.
IsSpSyiithlttku, from l8Sp£3rfitXki, meaning
to place an object on some flat surface
so that it can be readily chopped,
chlkSUrlr&rfik. A mode of chikStXkft, 1
chop. They two chopped it up,
Itamnfiqcliflr'iaka nOtXn. Mode of Itfim-
t«k4, / cut it. They cut it up fine.
Itfimchemir&&miigg)(iuiighwfi, their two,
after having been all chopped up
CHlGVlG^'NUK KOLARA = THE NOSE-BEAD STORY 285
things they threw it into the water. hnSglk, they both resumed. They both re-
NutAn is used continually in these turned to their Itttle old house^ and they
stories. entered their little old house all right,
pSmAr&Imak, expresses and after that was and after their entrance they both re-
done, (Mode XLVI.) mained there.
Chlgvig^nOk KOiar& = The Nose-bead Story
T5&'tluh5k nulle6qk!l'raek uet&l'raek. Nula'hi chlgving'kathlune.
Kil'loik n^nv&hichdiUtng'kithlune, koTci n^nnilroaqpingTcathlune, toi'-
vtithSk miikt&rinau'tuk chinni'iniik. KIttek' kwiqting'k&thlune toi',
kuvyStttira.'klune niikTclune. Atau 'chime Sf-'rSrniir'me itlhrM'mtik
ne'tuk, m&'tft h6k pu'g6k, chi-hok ug"nJi af'rSrnik ki'niiqtdk, k^m-
mtikseg"nuk taguma&lune, kepuchtig"lukuk Im'kuk chlg'vek. Toa,'tlu
e'mQm nulaTi&n pe'i : " Hwe'ghi ttinglii't^qki uTcuk chKgveq'ki,"
toi'tlu tau'nS. &r'rSm&k kinkipiik'nine in'nok. Toi'tlu taum'
ilFrSmSm chigveq'ne chifcha.'kkuk, tiye'md ! toi'tlu kinggho&'kiin
manqk&'ghi t&m&'htin kwiq'kiin kip'tik^in thUn'thlu kipt^Tclune,
toi'tlu WpTcgr'lutGk nu'nat Ivgh^rh^'kuk, tau'na h6k chadklclei
Ikkukkleat'niin i'trahdn niim'miin, thlhi'thlu i'tralune. Mi'tft h6k
pu'g6k, cha'hok keiinklenil'raa kedt'me mi'-hok mi'kut aFrSrn^t
mi'ne uetai'raet, umhok o^'klim ikumis'ka. chinnrmenun, toi'tluhdk
chinni'&niin &ko'm6k. Toi'tluhdk ta"um' e'mum if'rSmam pe'i, "keyu'-
giim ting a,f'r6rniin chlgveqlci taguTcuk/* " toi'yuhwil/' ta'u'ni
a.r'rSrniin ke'yughwi, " hwa,n'kutniin pela,q't6k." Toi'hok tau'nd
iPrSrna.k timin'tiqt6k, unwilcoan yuk J-iil'dktin uya.ng'cha,miik
kan'niirqtuk "unwdTcuhSk nukitlthpea'rat&m akutJiq'ski." Taa'tluhdk
tsTuni imlni if'rSrnak utit'mtin ak'vok, tke'chSnia thlu emu'miin
nan'vihig*miin, tdk'kthlune Imlni nilnnilroiq'pik chiyuwHq'thluku,
ma'tft h6k pe'6k imek', u'nil toa'tluhok i'tritdk, m&'tft hok pu'gok,
chakh6k kiiq'kuk y6r'*luk, tdi'hok tau'ni aPrgrnak kSn'niirqtSk :
" Ting'^thluku nukSlthpeaWtam unw^'ku akut^k'sski." To^'tluhSk
ta~um' at2rug"loin tunu'mtik chikka'rhii. Toi'tluh6k ingithlune, imfna.
nannilroa,q'pak ftne'ntin thleh^g"luku, kr^'niin miyok'kthlune St'sinuk
tagutil£ig'*lune, emu'htin kwiqlciin ikkuv'lune nuni'ntin thlu tke'chdma,
emu'mtin i'trilune nurn'mtin, emu'mGn thlu hok num'mentin ^k5inlune,
t6i'h6k unwilcoan iku'tiit. Toil'tluh6k iku'tkgr'lutGng kizhget'stit,
toi'tluhSk ata'ucheukilk'klutting kizhget'stit. ToS'tluhSk thlin tau'ni
kanta' nukaithpea'ratim kweya'tOkkluku ik6qto'rh&. Toi'tluhok unw^'-
koin nukaithpea'ratSm churisTci. Mi'tn ka'uwi'thliin'ntik tupe'ma,
286
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
mi'tft iwa'tne kaAq'ti, ch&t'-hdk im'kut ikTci iyathlinnll'raet. TOa'-
tluh6k thlin mikTclune, nin'vihig'mtin nu'nit knio'^tntin tig^lune
kiyKkfiyik'tok. TM'tluhdk kethltiqt&q'chim^ u'tr^thlune chugn^'thun
itrih't5k, emu'mum thlu num'miin i'trig'lune, tupegg'lune, il1ithltih6k
imicut tke'chlinting ch^la' tupeg"lutting, t&ku'chimfing thlu ^t&lcoin
ch^Ia' kdzhge'sluke, toi'tluhdk e'mum talim' Sf-'rSrnim nukdlthpei'-
r^ULm tig'gue. To^'tluhok mum'mtig*ntin I'trSg'lutiing Stil'koan chdla'
fil6'ktin yuk uyang'thlutuk kdn'ntirqtuk, " Nukilthpei'ratak at'klsk6k,
^hllrail'miik ^f-'r^rn&k pelc&n nulliqnaune'Iuku/'
Toi'tlu Im'ini ta"u'na af'rfirnSk unwi'me kingghu'ntig'inentin iydg"lune
V
€mu'mun thlu nun^'mentin tke'ch&ma tilqkd'thlune to^Viit ninV&hig'mtin,
im1n& thla h6k n&nnKlro^q'p&k ^m chiyQw^q'thluku. To&'tluh6k tali 'h tin
emu'hiin Sme'kiin i'trig^lQne, mi'tft h6k pu'gok, chak'h6k ImTcuk kiiqTcuk
uetarraek. To^'tlu h5k kin'niirqtok, " Nukaithpe^'ritak atkiskll'rail
unwi^ku." Toii'tlu h6k taiim' atalig'loan chigin'ramuk chikka'rhii
tikum^Iral'muk.
Tdd'tlu h6k ang'ghima, imKn^ thlehig^luku im'kuntin nuni'ntin
I'trStok, tke'chdma thlu im'ina itTcuk itruthluTcu.
Toi'h6k tau'kut af'rgrnat itkethlenllVaet, tiku'chamting thlu kizhge'-
sluke.
Toi'tlu h6k imKna chilg!n'ril taguthlfnei nakalthpea'r&tim. To^'-
tlGh6k nukalthpea'ratam tau'nS iFr^rnak nulUqthleu'thluku. N&nn6k.
NOTES ON THE NOSE-BEAD STORY
chlgylngkXthlunS, his wife has a set of
nose beads. (864.) (Mode I.)
kI115Ak, in the rear of their house. Third
dual possessive. (390 and 391.)
nlnyXhXchdfltAngkXthlunS, there is a small
pond. JXAnvAkt lahe. (230.) (Mode I.)
k5k&, /// the centre (of this pond). (391.)
iiIiiiiIlr5flqpflngkXthlfln5, there is a great
lamp stick. (223.) (Mode I.) nAnnll-
roflk, a support or block upon which
the stone lamp rests.
tMvtlt, thither. (352.)
mflktftrflnautuk, they two were wont to go for
water. Mflk, water. (See mfiktAri-
vik.) (117.) (ModeXLVII.)
chlnnl&nftk, nearby. (399.)
IdttSk, before them. Third dual possessive.
(39I-)
kwiqt&ngkXthlunS, there was a river
where he used to set nets and caught
fish.
itaiichime SirSinflr'mS, one day. (581.)
Itlhr&Amftk nStfik, they two heard some one
coming in.
mltfi h5k pflgSk, then as (the person) entered.
(820.)
chA-hSk fig'nl. (308 and 419.)
kSpfichfig'lukuk. Daal 15A. (474.) K6pu-
tsa, Itradcy in Mode LXII.
Imkfik chlgrSk. Dual. The pair of nose
beads. She wanted to trade a pair of
boots she had in her hand for the nose
beads.
p^i. Third singular. (686.) Used idio-
matically for saying. Then that one^
his wifcy said.
hw5^U, /. (254.) Used for emphasis.
/ do not sell these two my nose beads.
NOTES — HOW A VILLAGE WAS DEPOPULATED
287
Unklpftkn&ne = (she) without speaking
went out. (502.)
tijr^mA, then that woman felt for her nose
beads {and) they were gone, (759.)
Idnggndflkfin. Vialis third singular. (391
and 392.) She followed behind her^
after her^ by down there along the river ;
when the river curved she followed
around the curve. Having rounded the
curve^ they two were in sight of the
village. That woman (the thief) went
into the first house at the edge of the
village and she also entered.
flkumlskX, bade her sit down. Ak5m5i, in
Mode XXXIII.
chinnlmtoftn, near her. (399-) And so she
sat near her. Then that woman said.
taum 6mflm. (290.)
pSUlqtdk, ^* Certainly t^* answered the woman;
''^ she often does the same way to us.**
(Mode CLIV.)
timintAqtdk, she stayed there. (Mode
XXIII.)
unwflkii, to-morrow the chief orders them to
make akutak. (625 and 852.)
utitmfln, then that woman ran back (i.e.,
home).
chiyflwflqthlflkii = she went to that lake
and pulled up that big lamp sticky
and when she did it there was a door.
(819.)
kfiqkuk. Dual, kSyug'nA. (419 and 811.)
There were her old parents back there^
and that woman saidy **See / to-morrow
they are ordered to make akutak.**
&taug'loin, then her old father gave her
some back fat. (184.)
iinenftn, going out and putting that big lamp
stick back in its place. (821.)
fitsHnftk. Modalis plural. Some berries y
taking them hurriedly.
XtauchSQkXkklut&ng. (592.) So they passed
them into the kazhga one by one. (809.)
chiirlski, they were ordered to weave bed mats.
flwfltnS, when she rose from sleep and looked
around her the other (women) had
already gone. (390.)
kiylkfiyXktSk, going to the lake behind the
village^ she gathered grass.
kfitliluqt&qcliftiiiil, having made it into
shecevesy she brought it back. She got
back first and entered that house and
set to weaving bed mats. When it was
evening and they 7vere finished and
sent into the kazhga ^ the chief took
(selected) the one of that woman.
fltldskSk, orders to make him a pi atkuk
(i.e., the native fur blouse) and the
chief will marry the woman who makes
the best one.
flmfikftn. Vialis of flmSk, going in by that
entrance,
chflginrftmflk, a summer deerskin already
dressed.
flnggh&nUL. Third singular of flndi, / go
out, (530.)
itifithlflldi, she brought in that atkuk —
blouse (Mode LXX V). Then the chief
selected that deerskin atkuk^ and the
chief married that woman. (182.)
How a Village was Depopulated by a Dwarf
Tod'thlu-hok-hwi u'kut nu'nlt uetill'raet, tutgdraliholoqtjing'kilthlutiing
dme'gum kule'ne uetaurau'ldqkU'rail ; nukalthpeiratiing'kiithlutling chSla',
nukalthpeil'rilk ta"u'nS tuku'lune tiin'tunttk angnaqtakil'rad. Tod'thlii
chit-illet'ne yut-illet' kwiq'kttn iicherut'muqtghiin iizgul'raem tketft'ratok.
To^'thlu chda' ille'ta. kingghtinr^t6r"luku iyiU'raem a.m tiye'ma.
Ceg^yaTcut hwdtTc^pik tkettingratdkTclutung tiye'md.
Ketoa'ne yue'rutdk tiingriryakirraet thlu chd'muk tdnghutiiksi'tut.
Ketai'ne nu'ridt Im^kut yuerutkapik'tut, tungrailkTclutiing ata'ati'kaa'kin.
Unwd'kome ketoa.'ne kafchlrhauq'tut kazhgem' illoi ne tdmi'ne ketoi'ne
288 ESSEuVr/ALS OF INNUIT
nukdlthpel'r&tlk kem'thllrqtok thlerdrali'halok nlkllkkilctikke taum
piyiiqtakatne' thlu ch][kkeJcthlinir"luku.
Nukftllhpea'rat&k iyakatiq'tdk, thlerSrali'holdk iyil'katan ninnekoi'gok
ketod'ne toi' iyaqtorinilq'tok thlerarali'holdk ninnekoaiaq'tdk iy^rraem
V V
ilm tiye'ma tketfi'ratok thlerirau'holdk umyoarq'tkok "hwe'tSk ta'nQm
kingghu'muk pingke6g"loi tketingse5r"le tket!ng'ral&n Thler^rau'hdlok
iySq'tdk ippaulue'riitme kiyaictin azgoq'tok, mi'tft azg6r"lune pe'ok
kiy^lth'hr^t mdlcut tupumlklcluke. Ketol'ne cMnnfksegen^lth'hr^
millqluku nutarsTugheniq'tut. Mil'tft Szg6r"lune pe'6k pulliyirapillth-
hrit pingTcut kiinnimilu'tiing kwlg'miin, nukilthpeii 'retain kiyi' m^'n^
raan'thlune, toi' yu'gwok, 5r*luvch6&'tlhrane tagu'k^r'luku yu'gw6k, piilli-
V
yirap^q'tghGn tdgg6q't6k, mi'tft killdksege'kSr'lune nukaithpe^'rat^m
at'kol u'ni igong'kiliine, ket6g"luku kKllo^'nun t^g'gdk kwe'goik, mi'tn
kwe'goara Ikkol'ktin kin'nltok, i'kinun-pifkc^ni'ne mi'tii k^nd'ma
kit'miin snik tin'ghi yin'rit uTcut fir5t. NangingkSkiln'ratok toi'thlu
kin'nd n^n'v^m kold, kil'gh5k, kilingkin'rakiin pugyethliiq'tok chd-
kan'ni mi'tn pu'g6k yuchoa"yak kin'rii pu'gok iqplydgali'lune kdnntiq-
pilySgali'lune uklt'mtin chaulune, chali'ttikkluku kin'nuqtok *kati'ke
pingyu'rhil I ^ tutgSra~u'h6l6k ilt5q'kuma yudru'tki thloi'thluku nechtig'-
ni'keii " — atoq'tok. {Song:)
Taa'thloka thlaa'thluku neting'ratin, toi'thlu keyu'ghwi tutgira'u'holok.
Ketalceme atoq'ghwu I Atoq'y^'kGkke thldi'thluku atiinrg'tl ATci !
letnritthlinne'kin. Atim' ket&'ke akkakfakdn^r^lutn ato'ki yuchoiVk
klUuvikaner'tok keti'ke toa'ne tikkak'filrine i'taqhlutn iikit'mun cha'ulutft
V
itoq'pe ! Tutgdrau'holum piskuchei'tun i't^q'lune itoq'tok chikumpi-
galu'ne, atoqgliendn'rine kStgiTcun pltpil'gh^ cheneluchoi'thlir'raentik,
k^tgi'nun n&p^tsMqtok, imlni yuchoi^yik chiikchinna't6k Sngthloq'-
'lune tiye'ma, pik'krlune pQgyethiaq'tok, ma'tft tin'ghi morh^'hik
Innu'gwodk, pik'krlune ukit'mtin ntiqcheu hrd m^'tft t^q'ti Innugwoi'chdd
V V
u'na atra"u'thluku tagu'luku ^tr^q'tok kiylme'riun tke'tdk, tke'chlma
stok ma~uqhul6q'lume'nun tiig'g6k ike'chima toi'thlu mauqhuloq*-
lume'ntin ndzvii'gha " tutg^thltiq'wa innugwd'ilthkii niskwaululoA
ting'uqthluku am'thlilthhQyakilraa'kut nuniqpauyilkirraet u'kut, toi'tfi
nSn'gilraet kauw^'vut iy^gak^'miing uttiqtuksali'natiing. Ketl'ke k^zh-
geme'uniin n&zv^'ghwu tokon$r"lik h5k tau'nll tke'utin." Kazhge'miin
aq'katok it'krthlunethlu itkrchlme'ttin kin'ntiqtak : " utraqgnil'nok
hw^ne'hw^ ! utriqgnilnok'chima uetaurali^loqkn'raek " — hw&kGn nSth-
luyiguta.ka.
NOTES ON THE DWARF STORY
289
NOTES ON THE DWARF STORY
t5«thia-h5k-hwi, well, then, or so then. (The
usual preface to all stories.)
akfit nunlt. (20.)
aStAlrifit Third plural of flStUrUghi,
from flfitaugni, I am.
tatgftraiihdlOqtftngkfttliliitflng, there u an
orphan boy. Third plural (472) from
Mode I. tfitgftrauh516q. (184.) Is
about the same as thleitxauq'lSk, from
thlerlUraugwdfl, / am destitute (Mode
LXVIII). (In all native stories the
orphan is the hero.)
&m6gflm. Transitive of ftmSk, doorway,
governed by kfiUSne, above. (810.)
kttlenS, from kftlmlttdfl, / am above. (383.)
Above the door means one is poor. The
poor sit there, as it is the least desirable
part of the kazhga.
aStaiixaii'lOqkllrAft. (462.) From flfitiiirmu'-
15qko&, I am {in a destitute condition).
nflkUthp^I, a man of full strength, prime of
life. (182.) (Such as these only are
capable of enduring the hardships and
risks which attend sealing and the
procuring of food in the Arctic.) Yiik
is man in general ; i^fln is man or
male.
tfikfilflnS, he being rich. TukfigwdA (Mode
LXVIII).
ftngnlqtAkllrAI, who surpasses the rest in
skill in hunting deer. (574.)
3^t4118t, a certain one. (645.)
izgfilrAfim. (166.) From izg5qt5X, / go
up stream. A certain man who had
gone up the river below the village did
not return. (400.)
U16t&, and then one of them. (644.)
IdngghfinrSqtSr'lflldi. From IdngghfinrSqtSr-
flkX, I go after one who is missing.
!y81r&5m. (166.) lylqtdA, / go (of the
went person, of the one who had gone).
uegyAkat, they try. U6g6Akoi.
tkStftnr&tdkklQtftng, never succeeding in get-
ting back.
kStdftnfi, after a while there are no more
men left in that village.
y1i6rOt5k (Mode IX), there are no more
men (i.e., able-bodied).
tfingill'yflkllrAfit. From tfingzUUiIyAkoft
(Mode XL), they practise sorcery, but
they never discover anything. (308.)
yu6rutk«plktflt (Mode LXXX), after a
while the village is completely depopu-
lated and they use incantations (sorcery)
every little while. (616.)
k&fchlrhauqtfit, one evening there were just
a few there in the kazhgi. (602.)
k6mthllrqt5k, the chief was left alofie. (668.)
nlkllkkflklikkS, he always loved the orphan.
(192.)
piyflqt&kfttnS, whenever they brought him
his meals. (867.)
chlkkekthlin&r'iakO (Mode XXXI), he
always gave him some bits.
nlnnSkdftgSk, the chief was about to start ;
the orphan grieved at his going.
flmyli&iqtkSk, the orphan thinks to himself,
"/ am the last one to go and I* II
return.'' (486.)
ippaulu6rutm6, the orphan goes in his late
grandfather's canoe. ( 1 88.)
kiyllthhrflt, old canoes.
- tupiimlkkliikfi, drifted ashore.
chUimlksSgdnllltlihrfl, his nearing on his
approach. (416.)
nQt&raughSnAqtut, they kept getting fresher.
The higher he went up the stream the
neiver the wrecked canoes appeared.
k&nnAmAlQtftng, the old trail led to the river,
or ended up at the edge of a stream,
and here was the canoe of the chief
(858.)
5r'lfiych5fltlhrfln6, his little old bow. He
landed and taking his little old bow
he went up the trail. (204.)
klllSksigekSr'lunS, after he had gone up
some little distance. (417.)
igSngkflliinS, there was the coat of the chief
hanging.
kwegdflk, a slough (i.e., like a river).
ikftnftn-pIfkSnlnS, soon; having emerged,
there on the shore were human bones.
n&ngliigkXk&nrAtdk, he had hardly stood a
moment gazing at the bones, when down
there in the centre of the lake it grew
rough.
290
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
IdllngkSnr&kfin, just as it grew rough some-
thing down there came up.
yQchd&'yflk, a dwarf. (237.) Bobbed up
down there.
IqpIyflgauliinS, he has immense eyes. Iqpi-
yagaugwSa. (223.) (Mode LXVIII.)
kftnnaqpAyAgiuilunSf he has an immense
mouth.
iikXtmfin chauliinS, facing hint. (265.)
plngyurhft, you fellow up there !
fltdqkiimil, when I sing my song, you listen
to it well. (518.)
it5qt6k, he sings. (S45.) Then follows
the dwarf's song,
tdflthlokfl, well^ now ! Did you hear it well f
The boy said, " Yes.'*
kSt&kSme, well, then, sing it. He sang, but
he did not sing it well.
ftkX. (626.) An exclamation of disgust
and impatience.
fikkflkfflkXnSr'lfltfi, here, draw nearer and
sing again. (Mode LXXXVI.)
IdlliiylkflnSrtdk, the dwarf came nearer to
the shore.
ftkkflkfflrftnfi. (370.) When near by, *'Open
your mouth wide, face me, sing loud.**
piskuchS&tfin. ( 1 58.) He did as the orphan
told him : opening his mouth wide, he
sang with his eyes shut tight.
&t5qgiienflnTftnd, ze/^/7^ he was singing. (541.)
k&tgikfiDt through the breast. (55.)
pltpHghX, he shot him with his cute little arrow.
chfikchlnnltSk, that dwarf splashed ; diving
doivn, he was gone.
pikkrlunS. (480.) Suddenly something bodbed
up ; as he looked it was a wooden doll.
nfiqchifihrfl, he drew it towards him. To
draw a thing in the water by working
a paddle or stick.
InniigwdAchdft, doll. (196, 230, Mode
LXVIII.) I/e got the little doll and
picked it up ; taking it along, he went
back and came to his canoe.
Itdk, to drift, go down stream. Having
come, he went down stream and came to
his grandmother, and then he showed
it to his grandmother.
V
tfitgflthlftqwftt grandson, little grandchild !
Innflgwdilthkft, my former doll, when I wcu
a young girl. (89.)
kXzhgfimeunfiiif hert\ show it to the ka%hga
people. (102.)
tdkdnSr'IIkf the thing having the power of
death, the deadly thing. (124.)
ftqkfttdk, he runs to the kazhga, enteri$ig
quick.
Itkrchlmfitfin. (84 and 532.) fust as soon
as he rushed in he cries out^ "^Here is.**
fltr&q^lndk, that which prevents a return
= the thing which prevented our people
from returning. (133)
fltrflq^hilnSkchflmil, having captured the re-
turn preventer.
a6taurau'15qknr&Sk, they both lived along
poorly.
hwSkftn, from hence. (352.)
nlthlQyXgiitAkft, I forget it (i.e., I have for-
gotten the rest of it).
The Stolen Wife
Nulaiqkfl'raek uetil'ra€k kwe'gum sne'ne kah^q^muk toi', hwi'tft
athlil'mtik thlu yug'mtik lUau'natuk. Em&qp!g''miin tsTuqlctin &num^-
lu'ne tiima'n& kwiq toi. ImKnil ue'ni emiqplllaoraq'klune uni'viit,
ungglittngse'ntik pesh6g"lune. Tket&ka'ma ta"uq'kiin 11111(111 p!t^'ne
pika'htin tha'lokkiin kilvitaq'kluke, nula'hSn tauqlciin cheugn$r"luke
chami'kfin nlim 1115'antik, nOra illd'ane thlu amardk'kluke. Toitrthlin'^
toi' imlnS ue'ni pechSr'yaringTdlthlune. Toim'tdthlu emdqplUeun-
rat^'k^ma, pauw^Tctin thlu ungghungse'ntik tQn'tuntik petikTclune.
Keto'ine h6k IraTcuk nflla^qkirraek iPna'intik. ImKna ue'ni
am'thl$r*mtik piss6gnanr$r1une chi'mtik t5i', imini ntikkletsstttf-
THE STOLEN WIFE 29 1
kgnalcu anglecha'rak thloi'thluku. Toi' tdi'tft Qe'taut. Toi'thlu
chit-illet'ne imlnil ue'ni emaqpilleoyaqt6g"lune iyiq't6k. Toi' chilm^'ne
emiq'pig'me kiyi'ne ucheg'g'heghin u'tr^thlune toi' nuni'menun
tketkiitir"lune, kiyu'hwihok im'ina nula'hi nQm'thlu chadkhr^'ne
chatau'nine, t5i' chul6q'chilma nu'tdn yu'lune piti'meniik t5i'
kug'lune tag"lune, thaadkktin thlu imlnS kaitif'thluku pit^'ne kiliif-
cha'kQkke kiyu'hwi ki'mum taguyunrS't^. Toi' in'thluku, mi'tn h6k
uy2ing't6k, nula'h^ chita'u'nine, iPnaa.'r3. ke'me imlnd toi'ne uetilu'ne.
Toi' atr^lune It'rlune nO'tan. Mi'tft h6k U'rtok i'mini ake'te mo'rhak
iemchemalune. Yum toi' hw&'nu eningk^lth'hrane chiyuthlene'ke
dngliuthlenelukii thlumi'. Mi'tft h5k a'n6k mi iyauthlene'ke ekim-
rig^ntin iik'thluku. Toi' nu't^n it'rliine, tkp'thlune kammukshag'*lune
iyag"lunethlii tOmi'ktin yOm milHq'thluku, chisku'ne thlu dgh&k'thluke.
Keto'ine h6k nralinena'ghfir'mne ukshd'^qtSk, m^'ni ptik'tlhra kaSg"me
iyig'yi'klune h6k ^m^'kiin nuni'menuk. • Ingriqpa,'thliig'inun thlu hok
mi miyuthlene'luku siiqtiilrai'miin. Mi'tfi h6k kdske't6k ing'ilmtin
emiq'plk u'ni ch61a' i'thli. Nu'ri^thwi h6k k^n'kut emiq'pSm sne'ne.
Mi im'kuk itrithlenelutuk. M&'tii hok toi'viit nun^'niin im'kuntin
tke't6k aghuklrau'halok u'ni chiket'lhrai sli'me. Toi' Sp'thluku
emu'muk nulai'meatik n2.t'miin iyauche'^niik. Ak'm^viit emdq'pem
inglo'anun iyaii't^ h6k nu'tin, im'in& Sgliukarau'holok taray6kf2ig"mtik
pille'lune ch^ke'thlukii, illoi thlu k&m'in^ krm^lune nu'tILn t^k'gh^n
m6q"mtin atrSq'thluku nu't^n imlni igTiukirali'holum iikkish'ki
Illo'^niin, ak'nin thlu h6k king'gTiod p&tu'lukii, nu'tin iyig"lune
chdmi'hiin m6q"rhtim illo'ikiin, tu'chima taliqlctin nu'tin ptig"lune
^k'm&hto. Nu'n&t kittet'hiin nu'tiin yu'gnima ^shlq'ne im'!n^ kit'miin
chalithir'nuku tSg^lune. Mi'tft hok ti'gok yurai'raet k^m'kut
kazhge'mtik. Nula'hi h6k taliq'ktin i'thli kahir"ma nu'me uetdlu'ne
umgum^lu'ne &me'g^. Am'ek toi' nivgh6r"luku itr"lune nula'ane thlu
V
imlni tagu'Iuku, itrau'thluku emu'mtin thlu ^shiq'tmiig'ntin uk'kluku
iya'u'thluku. Emu'mtin toi' ik'm^vtit tu'thlutuk ch^la' nu'tin yulutuk,
yu'gnamtik thlu Kmlni ishiq'sek kU'miin ching'kreMuku toi' t^rayok-
fa'u'klune iySg^lune. U'tr^qthlutuk thlu tumu'mektin. Mi'tii hok
tkekatiq'tuk nuni'mug'niin ungg'hung'set chit-timit' inoral'raet
ftne'ntik. Chunali'hwi h5k to'Ini iPna'Srak ungghung'set Snglechithle-
ne'ket Wngghd'&ghe. Ungghungse6rqthlene'lune t5i' im'ini if'na'&r&k
kinggnd'ighe. tWn'ki thlu h6k Wngghd'Sne iFna'^muk ue'tiyunra-
Id'muk iyig'^lutuk ungghungseorq'thlutuk trakannairauq'thlGtiik h6k toi
ta'u'kuk iydglutuk nulaiqkn'raek. Etaugweuk.
;ii»
292
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
NOTES ON THE 8T0RT OP THE STOLEN WIFE
kAhftq'muk, a married couple were living
alone on a river bank. (674.)
Illaunfltiik, so this way {it was) another per-
son not with them both. (5 10 and 639.)
SmilqpnildrflqklQnfi, he works on the sea
down there hunting animals. (214;
combined with the verb " to work.")
tkfitAkflmil, whenever he comes from thence.
(5=5)
ImkQt pltAnSf M<7X^ ^/> ^am^. (281.)
kftlvfltAqkliikS, lowering them down by the
smoke hole up there. (810.)
ch6ii^Sr*liike, his wife from thence receiving
them by down there in the house.
ftmarlkkliikS, and in the house she skins them.
tdfltrthlinlq, thus that oncy her husband^ had
the habit of doing. (197 and 358.)
flch6ggh6gh&n, so down there on the sea^ his
canoe being loaded. ($41.)
kijrflhwfl. (724.) Hew is it this time his
wife was not in front of the house ?=
she was not watching out for his return t
(736.)
chfllOqchflmil. (532 and 848.)
kftlfifchflkSkkS. (190.)
kftmfim. (281.) K&mlnl, how is it that one
inside {the wife) did not appear to take
his lowered things ^ the game he lowered
down into the house f
ftnthlukfl, so taking it outy when he looked
down his wife was absent and his child
was in there alone. (510 and 668.)
ftkfitS, the head-board was broken. (811.)
iyaiithlenSke, here he seems to have taken
her awayy putting her in his sled.
ItrlunS, so going in^ getting ready, putting
on his bootSy he followed the man's trail,
carrying his weapons with him. (478.)
IlraunSnS^Sr'mnfi, he travelled along till
winter ; it wcu summer when he set
out from his home back there. (539.)
sftqtftlri&mfln, here he had taken her to a
high mountaiuy a steep one. (691.)
k&sk5t5k, when he scaled the mountain there
was another sea down there.
k&nkOt, and there was another village down
there on the seashore. (19.) Those
two had evidently passed this way.
chlkStlhrU, there was an old man whit-
tling (chopping) outside. chM!ky^JLy na-
tii'e axe.
ipthlflkii, so he inquired of him about
thaty his wifcy whither she had been
taken.
IkmAvfit. (352.) AkmAnl, to over there,
on the other shore of the sea, he took
her.
tIrftySkflg'mflk, a king salmon. Its inside
was hollow ; when done he brought it
down to the water.
flkklshkX (Mode XXXIII), that old mam
bid him enter into ity and having entered
he shut it after him.
ch&m&hftn, he going by below by in the water^
he landed from thence by the other side,
having landed all right in front of a
village. (380.)
ishlqnS, his contaifter. He turned the
wooden salmon around with its heeul
to the sea after he landed.
kAhflr'mft, his wtfe^ was in a house doton
there by herself aloncy the door being
fastened. (674.)
im6k, he breaking ity the doory going in and
taking his wife, bringing her down
(seawards) y putting her into that, their
container (vessel). (27.)
Smflmfln, to that (place) over there they
two reached again all right. They
landedy and they having landed they
turned their vessely and pushing it
forwardy it went offy becoming a
salmon. (281.)
tfimfimSkfin, they both returned by his trail.
When they began to get near their
home all kinds of animals were com-
ing out of their house. (54.)
chunauhwX, and so it was the animals
were rearing their child while they
were away ; during their absence their
child had become an animal.
ildnkft, and they both in the absence of their
child not wishing to remain there y they
both go awayy becoming animals. Those
two married ones go away, becoming
wolverifies. (257.)
STORY OF THE INVISIBLE DAUGHTER-IN-LAW 293
The Story of the Invisible Daughter-in-law
a, Nu'n&t ueUirraet, em&q'pem sne'ne, nukilthpe^riit^ngldlthlune thle-
r&rauholiinglc^thluttingthlu, mauhdlungldlthlune thler^'rauhol5k, imln^
nuk^lthpei'r^tik k&ttknr^ng'kithlune t^ngauhol5r'muk. Klzhgemlc^thlu-
tttng emiq'pem tughe'ktin. Yite'ne hwi k^zhge'ttin ingtai'ra^ ktiim'riyuk.
b, Toi'thlu nukaithpe^'ratam imKni kUttinH chiyakier'^une ing'-
le6k, inglein thlem6qt6r'yi'k& e'mum iten' nuHqtiisklu'ku, tau'gw^m
peyun'rat6k. T5i'.
c, UnuV^Lkin kaiiw^yue'ruthlune nuk<hpe^'r&t^m k^ttin'r^ nClt ch&n-
n$r"luke, Hia'ne kauwiq'kit^, inlune nlit channerq'thluke.
d, Taa'thlu cham-llle'ne thler^'rauholura k^ru't^ t6kkl5r"luku : " !ll5'ra-
chung unuq'p^ inTcdvut, yiklet' nlit plngghi'yun ch&nner'keke, plng-
gni'yua.tntik inTcovut, nechiig'nake'ni util'k<hhrin t&nggrqstchgh'kSk,"
Toi'thlu keyu'ghwi : "Hwe'gna utiTtathltaniik nukkakgni'toi." Toi'thlu
pe'^ thlerlValiholum : " King ! illd'rdchugli ^t&meke'ka uti'k^lthrh&n
nithluniiq'pghwu, t^ng^rqktiv'ghwu till5qg'hi't^n, ket^'ke niikk&k'ka^
tingSrqkuv'ghwu." Toilth' ing'ri.
e, Toilth' en^q'tut, enilq'chat^ nukllthpe^'ritim kitun'ri kauwir'ne'tSk,
to^'thlu kauwi't^ ^'n5k, imini thlu thler^'rauh5l5k kali'w&n tali'gw^m.
Uk'shume $rrillr"luku, toi'thlu ig'g6k im'kuniin nUn'niin pingglii'yu3.t-
niin, It'riqtSk to3.'thlu ^ng'nima tauq^ktin nechtignedriya-Tcok, ch^'muk
net'ftrat6k. Toa.m'tathlu lepi'ntin chfila' it'ra'lune, toira'tiithlu ing'nima
nechtig*neor!yak!l'rai ch&'muk net'ftrat6k. To^'thlu chSla' pingghi'yuig*-
niin itVitdk it'rima charinSr'ri nu'tin, tauqlcun ang'nima nechug*neoq'-
t6k, nechiig'nek^n'r^ktin p^m^lciin killo'lntik lllaurai'mtik ne't5k.
/ Ma'tft ka klut'mtin takku'y^ltok, nuva^q'chi Qk'ni, k^n'tintik tagu-
ma^^une ttintuyigig"ntik at6r''lune. ToS'thlu uthl^'gi unilitln, nu'nSt
kittet'hun pitm6q'thlune k^n't^t im^kut taguma^'kluke. Toi'thlu tke'chimeu
pe'i t^ng'h^ ch&viq'ti u'ni nuvaiiq'cha tingv^'ga tiingvig'nenan'rine
e'mum kdnru'ta. " hwiTci nuk^lthpeil'rauholok u'yok ch^lrai'yuyet ? "
Toi'thlu keyunrS't^ e'mum nukiilthpeil'rira. Toil 'thlu i'wi pitm6q't6k
nu'tdn. Keto'ine umark^r'sluku kingglittn'rikiin pitmdq'tok, yMyi'kiikke
tiye'mS, k^zhge'methlu yui'yi'kluku tiye'md, umyu6rk!n1uku keto'ine
fine'thlu yu5r'ya'k& iw^!nra't&, iw^kinral^'meu ttqna'ar^n, kizh'ge6k
kSzh'ge&n thler^'rauholum mdk'kor'lune t6kkl5'rd " nic'richting ke'yi im
kSnrucha'kktimkln toi' uti'kilthhr&n tdng'hr&n n&thluyiguzhg'hi't^n."
g, To^'thlu keyu'ghwi " ill5'rachting hwd'tfi tang^rqpiltiq'tai ni'tCt-
m6qta tiye'mS?" Td^'thlu thler^'rauhalum keyu'ghwi *4p$ntik' Sw^ki-
\
294 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
chehlciln n-ithlinrachalcaka it'lhr^ keUllce chSla' unwiUcu niydrlceu
ighii'dtd kdnruzh'katfi tirn'ma keyGlceni."
//. Toa'thlu an'gri, toi' enaqlclung, mil'tft tupiq'tSk iklc^ tupiithllnil'-
raet $t"niiqpik uinyu6rna6q't6k emu'muk. Toi'thlu chiyikkl$r"lune
uniiq'tok, u'noiln nukaithpe^'raliholok nu'tiln ka'uwir'ne'tok, emu'muk
umyu6rnao"rilma, toil'thlu elgdq'chdtii kaliwi'td taii'gwam, a'nok ing'-
ndma channSrqpiik'nilne niyo'rhi emu'me dmd'ne ting'thliir'mene nDm
chaokhrd'ne.
/. Toa'thlu akTcaniin uetan'ratdk. Toaith' ne'ta. Mi'tfi Im tikku'-
yaqt6k cha-Qk'na kan'taniik am taguma'alune. Toa'thlu uthldgaq'ta,
toaith' tke'chameu tig'goi tathlea'ktin. Toa'thlu pe'a t6kklo'ra tiggoi'meu
"nula'ats likkiizh'me kan'tat na'tatmorotiaq'chlke ? ^' Toa'thlu keyunr6'ta
e'mum nuvaaq'cha'ram kathla~u'chaka keyuksi't6k. Imlna nuva&q-
chara1j'hol6k chiyakkl^r'lune toaith' keyu'ghwa *' nukaithpea'h5l6k
u'yok akkwa'wak kathla~uting'ramkin keyuksilgliu'tfi, athlalilcuma
keyunracharam'kin, tagumaakijf'k^ne puh'guzh'glia/*
j, Toaith' nukaithpea'holum keyu'ghwa, *• tafijumaq'raolutn ptihgiizh-
V V
glii'tamkin." ** Ikke'ka ptihtaqkanra'lingnaqpugha u'kut aggu'tkSr'lake
amak'klinka niiqriiksi'tut." Toa'thlu kazh'gem kttte'ntin thilrq'tuk.
Toa'thlu pe'a "nau'hwame amak'klirthft ? " Toa'thlu pe'a "pel'
tang ! "
k, Nukalthpea'hol6k klut'mun takku'yaqt6k, ma'tn takku'yaqtok !m'!na
kttim'riyuk, kazhgem' yaten'l!g'h6k tankig'^une. Ma'tii ta'guk kazhgeu-
thlenil'raa, nuvaaqcharau'holok it'katan, nukaithpea'holum piiq'thluku
cheughane it'ratok. Ma'tfi ka it'rama pe'ok yug'yag"lune yunkhra-
thli'nur'nuk. Keyug'ina hwa uq'koma nukalth'peak uetal'raa, iig'main
kaavaq'tok channe'anOn thlu iiq'thlune liqtkan'rakiin imlna nuva'aqcha
pu'gok kan'tat iin'kut tagumaa'kluke, toa'thlu kaavag"lune kana'vut thle
thlea'meke arrOkiit'ki im'kunun kazhgeme'unun.
/. Toa'thlu nang'ghok kan'tak iikkatmoro'ta u'mum thlu chann^k-
klea'nun tiinkata'ghwu nukaithpea'holum e'mum taguthiag'luku imlna
nukaithpeaqpa'thluq cheuthliig"luku cheuthlu'gane at'kut6k atko'ama k&t-
kker"lune a'nok tiye'ma. Toa'thlu kinggno'ane a'glian nukalthpea-
FiUi'holok niiqroq'tok nanggliu'chama thlu, Im'kut thlu kazhge'meut
nanggiiu'chata kin'tat im'kut koyurq'thlOke an'lune im'ina nuvaaqchara~u'-
holok an'gnan, niikalthpeara-u'holum mailiq'ta.
w. Toa'thlu tQg'gOa, tQggoa'meu pe'a " ptiqgtizhgni'tamkln, kan'tat
tali'kut tama'vut thle'ke, itrnauq'tukuk ta'u'gwam kak'maviit ftntim'-
tnun." Toa'thlu nuvalqcharau'holum pe'a " nukaithpea'hol6k u'yok
STORY OF THE INVISIBLE DAUGHTER-IN-LAW 295
tielca au'g!na iy^q'stan ^'k& kingghunitnaaVaqtSk." "Toi' iyag'le"
k€yu'ghw& nukaithpea'holum, " irkTcluntik k^thiatiif 'kSnilk, itrnauq'-
tukiik tau'gwira irr^nki'ata. *' imln^ itru'Ul nuva^qcharau'h5l6k !tru-
thar'luku i'ndk, hwine'hwi unu'gume, Sn'gliima kri'nun tiq'ch&ma
athleraqka'ntik Itru't6k atkuki'nukthlu.
n, Taa'thlu at'sti atstri'^uku pe'& "itaTce ik'kkuk tupdq'thlakuk
yuor'luq'ka." T5i'thlu e'mum pe'i nuva^qchirau'hdlum "tup^qtiing-
n^q'pakuk to^Iki tingSrqnauri'n^g'h& tdng^rqghita'negha ni^ngchif'kSne
V
t^ng^rqna^ra'negha tagum&raaq'puglia k^thla'utkiifk^n^'kuk, kizhge'
taug'wam." To&'thlu pe'i "hwa'thlokd kazbgil'ld," tdilth' a'n6k
^ng'niima k^zh'geok, toi'thlu kizhgei'ma e'niqtdk. tjqnaa.rau"lune
thlu hw^ne'hwi entiq'chima kaliwSthlln'neok. M^'tfi tupSq'tok iklc^
tupiq'thleut, mlk'tok tupe'me uetiiyil'kok to^' it^'nethlu I'mlnil kizh'gein
cM'muk thlu k3,nnur'ghiyuk'kluku im'ina nula'clne umyuoghi'meu
kinningrgts'niln chi'miik &'n5k.
0, Ma'tft it'rdqtok nulaM imlnS uetal'ra^. To^'thlu channe'dnGn
ako'mdk, ak6m'nama chikut'ne pe'i "chen'me u'ni thlem6qt6g'lihar"loa
niaiaoyunrgt'cheu.** ToS'thlu e'mum ^'nen pe'd " hwd'kd ! nau'hwime ? "
" Hwdne'hwa. cha,nim"ne ue'tauk." Toi'thldm pe'^ " na'u'hwiime ? chen'me
tiinglngriin'rSta ! " ** Tdngingrulu'rie hwdne'hw^ chSnim"ne ue'talik'*
kaiiqchi'kok ImKn^ S'ne tdngnuqksi't^ ukko'Sne. To^'thlu e'mum
kdtun'rin pe'd : " t6kklor''luku i'ti^ tangksillngntiqpghwu kSthlautli'-
kSu." Toa'thlu pe'a a'nen " nettiaghithleke'gni na'u'hw^," "nettliq-
chShk>l'tn toi'."
/. U^e'ta"ut uet^lu'tiing, im'kuniin dmikkle'niin kiizhge^'klune Hn, im'kut
tauq'kiin nu'nat tingtiqsau'niku ; Km'ina kizh'ge e'mum ta'u'gwSm thle-
rarau'holum tinghilk'kluku ke'me. Tod 'thlu imlnd nukdlthped'rdtdm
katttn'ra chdm-ille'ne pe'a thlerdra'u'holum, "!ll5'rachung utd'kdlthhan
im'ind kiizhgesi'ldn, tdnguqksi'tdki tdnguqsit'neluku chake'Snun netliq'-
tod, k^ta'ke hwdne'hwd klngglidkdtdq'tok ir'ne'kdn dche'me tingguq-
stlraS'me ir^nifkik'keu nu'tdn In 'kin ir'^nadn d'ndvnun tagufkak'keu
che'umiik, ipit che'umuk tagukuv'ghwu ipit ke'vut tdngvdqch^h'ka.n
nula'dn/' Thlerd'raljholum kdnru'tji tod'tn.
q, Tod'thlutod uetdlu'tttng toi'. Chdm-ille'ne nukdlthpea'riltiim kdtiin'-
rdn a'nlne pe'd "nular'kd u'nd if'nekkatdriyug'nd'kok, ketd'ke uthla'ghwu."
Tod'thlu a'nen uthld'gd, dche'mtin iltris'kil kattin'rin, taa'thlu utraq'tok
dche'mun. Md'tn It'rdqtdk dk'kd u'nd an'thle6k tdngauholu'ne.
Xuvadq'chiik u'nd kdttin'rdn e'mum nula'hd tanggiiqpilQg"luku ten.
Nuvadqchaq'kertdh u'nii nu'tdn toi' tang'hdmeu iliaie'orha. Tod'thlu
296 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
ra^'tft i'n6k chit-inglcut e'mum k&zh'gem yikle'ine ktiiinriyu'gune
mikkilllg'ha'lrat Skiizhrilq'tlraet.
r. Im'in^ kizh'ge t^nggtiqpiliig''luku nu't&n lll&kkleulutiing Im'kut
thlu nukilthpe&'r^Ulin nulaMn ^m^lcle t^m^ku'meunuk nul^rqt6g'-
'lutting nu'tin toi' uetiUclthleut imlna thlerirau'holSk yiklet' imTcut
niklik'kluka.
Literal Translationi showing the Various Idioms
a. There was a village on the seashore, having a chief and an orphan
boy, he having a grandmother. That chief having a son, a boy (the
village) having a kazhga facing the sea. Beyond was a hillock as large
as a kazhga.
b. So then that chief's son finally grew up ; having g^own up, his father
used to urge him to marry, but he did not wish to.
c. Whenever it was night, the son of the chief being sleepless, he
cleaned the houses (his folks when they sleep, he going out, the houses he
cleaning them).
d. So one time the orphan said to him, addressing him : " Friend, when
you go out to-night, the endmost three houses, clean them ; when you
come out from the third one, you listen ; you will see your waited for
one." Then he replied, " I do not know of any one I am waiting for."
Then the orphan said : " No ? my friend, indeed (you will see) the one
you await, even if you do not know of her ; when you see her you will not
turn away. Here, now, you must think of me when you see her." So he
assented.
e. Then they went to bed; they having gone to bed, the son of the
chief was sleepless. Then they having gone to sleep, he goes out, but
only after that orphan was asleep. (It was) in winter, it being moonlight ;
then he went to those three houses. He went in (the first) ; then having
come out from that one, he listened carefully ; he heard nothing. Then
again, he entering the second, then coming out, the careful listener heard
nothing. Then he entered the third ; having entered, he cleaned it well ;
having come out from there, he listened ; as soon as he listened from down
there behind he heard walking.
/. Then as he turned back (to look), a handsome girl (was) coming
towards him, carrying some kantaks, she wearing a fawn skin (dress).
Then he approached her, by down there, by the front of the village, she
going to the pi (i.e., the mouth of the river), having in her hands those
kantaks. Then having come to her, he thought, " See how fair this one
is ! " He gazed at the beautiful girl ; during his looking this one said.
LITERAL TRANSLATION 297
** Well, you young man, what are you doing ? " Then that youth answered
not. So over there she went to the mouth of the river. Then he, after a
while, by behind her, went to the mouth ; he searched for one was not ;
in the kazhga, too, he sought her — she was not ; and in the houses after
that he searched he found her not. Not finding her, he goes to the
kazhga, because it was dawn ; having entered the kazhga, the orphan,
slowly getting up, addressed him : " Friend, you see now what I told you ;
you saw the one you await ; you will not forget her."
g. Then he answered : " Friend, I see for the first time (a person) like
this. Whither has she gone? She is not." Then the orphan answers
him : " You will find her yourself. Even I know her going to place ; here
now again to-morrow you watch for her here again ; when she speaks to
you, you answer her at once."
h. Then he yessed him (said yes). So he went to bed. When he
awoke, already the others were awake ; during the whole day he was
thinking about that one. Then finally it nighted (night came); being
night to him, the youth was not at all sleepy, because thinking about
that one. Then, they having gone to bed, only when they were asleep,
he goes out ; he having gone out, without cleaning (the houses), he
watched for her over there, in his Ijjiving seen her place, in front of the
house.
/. And so he was not there long ; then he heard her. When he turned
around to look, there she was coming towards him, again carrying kantaks.
Then he approached her, and having come to her took her by the arm.
Then he said, addressing her, having taken hold of her, " Young girl and
these kantaks, whither are you always carrying them ? " Then that hand-
some girl did not reply, although he addressed her (that handsome girl
never answered). Finally, then, she answered : " You youth, although I
spoke to you yesterday, you never answered ; if I was another I would
not answer you, without holding me. Let me go ! "
y. Then the youth answered, "After having taken hold of you I will
not release you." "Well, even if you are not going to release me, let me
carry over (these kantaks) ; these my brothers have not eaten yet." Then
they both reached the front of the kazhga. Then he said, " And where
are your brothers ? " Then she said, " There they are."
k. The young man looked behind ; when he looked that hillock beyond
the kazhga is shining. When they both went to it, it was a kazhga.
When the girl was about to enter the youth released her ; he entered
before her. Then he having entered, he beholds it crowded with young
men. There was one tall young man upon the bench in the comer.
He (the chief's son) passed right through and got up on the bench near
him ; as soon as he had gotten up, that handsome girl entered carrying
298 ESSEJVT/ALS OF INNUIT
those bowls ; then she going up, she laid them down ; having laid them
down, she distributed them around to those kazhga folks.
/. Then the last dish, she brought it over, she about to pass it to that
one near him. That youth grabbed it, taking it before the big fellow ;
having taken it before him, he (the big one) put on his parka ; having put
on his parka, jumping down he goes out. Then after that, his going
out, the youth began to eat ; he having finished, and those folks having
finished, (she) collecting those dishes, that handsome girl she went out ;
that youth followed her.
m. Then he took hold of her ; having taken hold of her, he said : " I
will not release you ; put those dishes down there ; let us enter only the
house out there." Then that handsome girl said : " You young man, my
husband, the one going, whom you sent away by now, he is almost home."
" All right ! let him go," answered the youth ; " you without talking non-
sense, let us go in." Although she did not wish it, he brought that girl
in ; having brought her in, he goes out ; here in the night, having gone
out, having climbed up to the cache, he brings in some bedding and some
clothes.
n. Then he put them on her. Having put them on her, he said,
"Well, those two opposite, my paren^, I will wake them up." Then the
girl said : '* Even if you should wake them, it is not likely that they will see
me. They will not see me — they will see me finally. You have taken
me without consulting them ; however, go you to the kazhga." Then he
said,- "Or I will go to the kazhga." So he went out, and having gone out
he entered the kazhga ; having entered the kazhga, he went to sleep. It
being now near dawn, having laid down, he went to sleep. When he
awoke they were already awake ; he got up, having awaked. However, he
remained awhile, for his father having come into the kazhga, he expected
that he would likely allude to his wife, but he went out without referring
to her.
0, When he entered (his home) that his wife was there. Then he sat
down near her ; having seated himself, he said to his mother, " Why is it,
I being urged, you do not welcome this one?" (having urged me to marry,
why is it you do not welcome my wife.^) Then that his mother said,
" Well, where is she ? " " Here she is here near me I " Then she said :
" Where is she ? W'hy is it I do not see her ? " " Here she is, visible
here, near me." That one, his mother, peered around ; she could not see
her daughter-in-law. Then her son said, addressing her, " Mother, even if
you do not see her, speak to her." Then his mother said, "Maybe she
will not hear me." " She will hear you all right ! "
/. So things went on thus, he visiting the kazhga of those brothers
without the villagers ever seeing it, the orphan boy alone ever seeing
LITERAL TRANSLATION— NOTES 299
it, that kaahga. Then some time after that orphan said to the chiefs
son : " Friend, that your waited for one, I never see her, as she never
comes to the kazhga. I hear her father-in-law has never yet seen her.
Now, she is about to. become a mother. When she is about to bring
forth, make her bring forth on the floor in the dark ; when the child is
born let your mother touch it first ; if you touch it first, you alone will
ever see your wife." Thus spoke the orphan boy.
q. So it went on. Some time after the chief's son said to his mother,
"That one, my wife, looks as if she is to be confined, so go to her."
Then his mother went to her. The son said, ** Place her down on the
floor"; so she placed her down on the floor. When he cam^ in already
this one was delivered of a boy. (The old mother) she sees this girl, the
wife of her son, for the first time. This one is a pretty girl. Having
seen her all right, she is friendly to her.
r. Then when she (the old mother) went out (she sees) those down
there children of that yonder hillock kazhga playing. That kazhga
she beholds for the first time ; then they associated together, and those
brothers of the chief's wife they married with the people of there, and
so things went on, the last ones, those over there, loving that orphan.
800. The Eskimo are naturally the most energetic traders, and as
furs constitute their most valuable property, the custom arose among
them of using some particular skin as a common unit of value.
In the district around the mouth of the Yukon the skin which
served as the unit of value was that of the red fox (kftvwgak), which
was estimated at one dollar by the white traders. The skin of a
mink (emilr'mutik) was valued at twenty-five cents.
All business transactions were estimated by foxes and minks until
the coming of the vast number of gold seekers, from whom the
natives learned the use of coined money.
The introduction of bank notes among the Innuit was accomplished
with much more difficulty. Even those who lived around trading
ports, and who were therefore more familiar with the customs of
white men, were not easily convinced that these particular pieces of
paper possessed value.
Their greatest difficulty was in learning to distinguish the various
bills.
300 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
m
Points of the Compass
801. The Innuit recognize the four cardinal points, to which
they give the following names : nSgfik, north; OcrnXUk, south; kuqkn^
east; kftimiikniik, west. In addition to these, they have names for
two of the secondary set of points, viz.: nilqldk, northeast ; ySkn^
southwest.
802. The following examples show how these words are declined :
Loc, n^gtir'me n&t^kiki I found it in the north
Mod, n^gtkr'mtkk tigo^ I come from the north
Term. nSgtitmtin iy&qtoi I go to the north
For the other points substitute as follows :
south ughll^me Ugh^l^miik ughil^miin
V V V
east ki!iqkne kiiqkntik kiiqkntkn
west k^nniikndg'me k&nniikniig'mtik k^nniikntkg'mtin
803. For the north and south there are extra forms meaning the
far or extreme.
nSgtikfak the far north nSgtikfine in the far north
ugnil^kfdk the far south ugn^l^kfilne in the far south
ugTidllf^r^ne in the extreme south
For the north and south there are also the following :
nSgtiksKnrit the most northerly
ugTilI&kslnrM the most southerly
804. As west means " out to sea," and east, ** inlandwards," they
have not extra terms, as the Innuit never venture any distance in
these directions.
805. The various winds receive their names from the quarter
whence they blow.
nSgiikfatok the wind is from the north
ugh3.16rt6k the wind is from the south
kiiqIcnSrqt6k the wind is from the east
kannttkngrt6k the wind is from the west
yiknSrtok the wind is from the southwest
n§gukf&t5k kadkkUr^mtik northeast wind
nSgiikfatok hw5kthlemuk northwest wind
DESCRIPTION OF KAZHGA 301
806. The inquiry, ** Which direction is the north ? " is expressed
by the following idiom, which means, from whence does t/ie north
wind come ? NSkun nSgiikfXUiqtl.
Note. — NSgflkfUIqti is in the third singular of the interrogative aspect (459) and
in the mode signifying the habitual performance (CLIV). The answer to the above is
hwik&n nSgflkftUqtSk.
807. Many variations will be encountered, which will be readily
understood. Kaqknem tftgnCniik tigOS, / come from around the east
(see 663 on t&gne).
808. The accompanying diagram will assist in affording a clearer
idea of the meaning of the many locative terms connected with the
native dwellings.
809. In every Innuit village there is a communal house, termed
kizhgft, around which are grouped the private residences.
In the olden times, when the population was numerous, there
were many villages containing from five hundred to a thousand
inhabitants, and even more. There are traditions of great settle-
ments, one of which possessed thirty kazhgas. At present it is very
rare to find a village in which the population is large enough to
require two.
On account of the intense cold, which does not permit of any
outdoor work or assemblies, the kazhga serves as the workshop,
meeting place, bath house, theatre, and general club house for the
residents of the village. It may be described simply as a cellar
with a roof over it. It consists of an excavation from twelve to
twenty feet square, covered with a pyramidal roof of rough drift
logs. The interstices are caulked with moss and the whole roof
is then overlaid with a thick coating of sods and earth. In the
centre of the roof a small square opening is left for light and
ventilation. This is covered with a curtain made of the intes-
tines of seal or walrus. These intestines are slit lengthwise and
dried. When these thin strips of membrane are sewed together
they form a covering which is translucent and impervious to cold.
This opening is termed HillSk. The frost has a tendency to form
thickly on the inside of the membrane, and thus dims the light ;
hence frequently during the day the command i-h&lOk pfttigSlUa
will be given. Thereupon one of the younger inmates will go out
and knock the frost down by patting gently upon the membrane
302 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
covering. If the family happen to have no membrane wherewith
to make a rhalok curtain, then a large block of the clearest ice is
selected and set into the opening. Large objects which cannot be
taken in through the usual entrance of the kazhga are lowered
down through the rhalok.
In the centre of the floor there is a deeper excavation, generally
six or eight feet square, which serves as the fire pit ; when not in use
this is covered with hewn logs. The fire pit is only used when the
inmates of a kazhga are able to indulge in the luxury of a sweat
bath. Owing to the extreme scarcity of wood throughout the
greater portion of the Eskimo country, fires are never used to
heat their residences. The presence of a number of people shut up
in these air-tight abodes suflRces of itself to keep the temperature
just above the freezing point, which is considered to be comfortable
enough in a region where fuel is so precious. When it is desired to
convert the kazhga into a bath house the logs covering the fire pit
are rolled aside.
The wood is most carefully split up into long slips, which are as
thin as possible. This is done in order that it may produce much
flame, and also that it may all consume without leaving any coals to
smoulder and poison the air.
From the level of the fire pit a narrow ditch is dug, extending
sometimes twelve or fifteen feet. This ditch slants upwards to
the surface of the ground, and is covered over so as to form a
perfect tunnel. This is the ftgveftk. The outer opening of the
agveak is enclosed in a small shelter, called l&tarftk, from l&n-lit&m,
out of doors. Occasionally a laturak is constructed of slabs of hard
snow.
Between the fire pit and front wall of the kazhga there is a
circular shaft through the floor connecting with the tunnel ; this
opening is known as the pilg'ySrftk.
To enter a kazhga, a person having passed into the outer vesti-
bule, or laturak, creeps along through the dark little tunnel till he
reaches the pugyarak; here he is able to stand erect, and by press-
ing his hands on the sides of the hole can spring up to the floor.
This act of emerging from the pugyarak is expressed by p&gOk (820),
and it is a most abrupt and ungraceful mode of entrance. The
exit is fully as ludicrous. The soft boots and fur clothing of the
natives make no rustling, and one beholds the inmates of a kazhga
NOTES 303
disappear instantly and silently through the floor after the fashion
of imps in a pantomime.
Around the sides of the kazhga extends a broad shelf constructed
of split logs, laid with the flat sides upwards. This shelf, which is
about three feet high, forms the usual sleeping place. The interior
of a kazhga is always dark and gloomy, the sides and roof are
blackened with smoke and soot, and the floor is covered with grease
and dirt.
810. The term for a private house is nni, which always means a
winter house ; the various styles of summer residences have each its
distinct name.
The well-known term iglfi refers only to a hut built entirely of
blocks of hard snow, which are cut from the weather side of drifts.
These are only erected for temporary shelters.
The nna differs from the kazhga in the following respects. It is
much smaller, and is erected upon the surface of the ground ; occar
sionally some are to be found which are slightly excavated.
Around three sides of the interior extends the bed platform, which
is about five feet wide, and generally twelve inches above the level
of the floor. This platform is called inglOk, and is covered with mats
woven from dried grass. That portion of the inglok which extends
along the rear wall is termed kSftn, and is considered to be the most
comfortable and honorable part of the residence. If a married son
resides with his father, the parents occupy the kaan, and the son's
family occupy the kfi&klim. The other members and guests are
allotted places in the kOkSkliln and Oftkltln. There is no fire pit in a
nna, so the central space or floor, termed n&tiik, consists of the bare
ground. This is usually occupied by the young puppies.
Fires are never used except for cooking, and when a fire is needed
it is kindled in the middle of the floor, the rhalok being removed to
afford an exit for the smoke. The place where the fire is built is
termed kSnethliik.
The natives who reside near the various trading posts have made
much progress in improving their residences, but as a general rule
these Arctic abodes are cold, gloomy, and indescribably filthy. The
air within them is utterly foul, as the ventilator is never opened
except when there is a fire. The dirty habits of the natives, and
the stench arising from stale blubber, semi-putrid fish, etc., render a
sojourn in a native house almost insupportable to a stranger.
304
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Interior Arrangement of Eskimo Houses
8U.
L
A
L
B
E
B
I
C
G J G
C
F
D
H
D
L
K M K
L
•
N
A kaXn, the rear portion of the InglSk, the best part of the house.
B k&Aklim, on the right and left sides, the second best portions.
C kuk&kllm, the middle portion.
D d&kllm, the forward portion and least desirable.
E kabg'nX, term for the whole rear portion of the house.
F ug'nft, term for the whole front portion of the house.
G nAldrk&tSk, the whole side, right or left.
V
H ksh&rk&t&k, the space around the inner entrance.
/ nXtfik, the floor.
J kenSthlfik, the fireplace; just above this in the roof is the fAldk (smoke hole).
K chAnnlrk&k, the space on either side of the entrance.
L kInnSrXt, the comers where the house spirits are supposed to be.
M pfig'yflFftk, shaft or hole connecting with the tunnel.
N ftgrSXk, tunnel.
O lAtdrXk, the outer vestibule covering entrance to tunnel.
NOTES 30s
812. The following extracts from native stories show the manner
of using the various terms mentioned in the preceding diagram.
to^tlu iiqtdk tiqchima k^mmtiksilthhr^gne yugw^k
then she got up on the bed platform, and, having gotten up, took off
her old boots
UqtO& is used to express the act of placing oneself upon the inglok^
or bed platform ; it is also used in the sense to embark.
813.
umh5k o^kHm ^umKsk^ ch^nnementin td^tluhok chinnlintin ikom5k
a person in the oaklim said to her to sit by her side, and so she sat
down by her
814.
V
vcAXh. ftriqtuk ksh^rk^t^mtin n^nntiktuk
when they two entered they two stood near the door
This is the usual custom till the chief of the house designates a
place to sit.
815.
toitlu !min^ emum ^ghuk^raliUum k^nntiqtdk " hw^ki ! ithl^nukslqp^
ket^ke ninktifk^n^tuk ^givut ^ktimk^rllutuk ''
then this same old man said, ^* Hello, unexpected guests ! well, well, do
not remain standing. Let them sit there " (i.e., let them both sit
there without standing)
816.
ydk kugun^ m&ktok, mikch^ma ugma^n itr^t5k ^
a man in the kaan rose up, and having risen, passed directly out
817.
yiik rh&lokun uyingt6k
a man looked down through the rhalok (i.e., the smoke hole in
the roof)
This is a very common way of doing, particularly in summer, as it
is much easier than entering the house.
During the short Arctic summer these underground residences
frequently become uninhabitable on account of dampness.
Sometimes it happens that June freshets of the Yukon flood all
the houses in the various villages along its banks ; hence the natives
are careful to leave their winter abodes early and betake them-
selves to their fishing camps, where they spend the summer.
306 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
818.
T6dthluh6k im uen^ n&ng*iiqthlune o^vlqtok ^megum thlQ snene
V
chlUor'y^qp^k tagulukQ &mek !m!nd p^tuluku, pith^r'luku kinok
kum^qthlukii, ghin thlu h6k milneluku, m&neh^r^lOku thlu ullo^q-
pILg'muk slelune, slehdr'lune thlu tikuch^ma nulaine pei, na,llea.g-
nuk pech^ksta ?
Then that one, her husband, rising up, crossed over, and taking from the
edge of the entrance a big, round, flat stone, he covered the entrance.
Having first covered it, he lit a fire, and produced a kettle ; having
produced it, he sharpens a big knife, and having finished sharpening
it, he said to his wife, " Which of the two shall we kill ? "
Im, abbreviation of iminft.
Amegam 8n6n6, of tfie entratice by its edge. This word is used to
express bank or shore,
Chill5r'y&qpftk, a large y flat stone y generally round. ChillCr^yik = a
flat stone.
BfllnSluku, m&neftkft, / bring it out, I produce ^ etc.
UllMqpig'miik, augment of illlOftk, the semi-lune-sfiaped knife (865).
Psa, he did, for he said.
PSchSkstft, first person plural of interrogative aspect. The verb to
do used to express to kill.
819. &mSk. This word is generally rendered door. Strictly speak-
ing, it means enti-ance. In the original native house a little tunnel
leads to the interior, and the residents enter or go out by means of a
hole in the floor connecting with this tunnel. This hole is ftmSk.
In the story from which the above extract is taken, two brothers are
beguiled into the house of an ogre. When the monster lays the
heavy stone over the hole, the house is effectually closed, and the
boys cannot escape.
820. pug5k. This expresses to enter a dwelling. The sense
appears to be to bob up or emerge from. When a fish leaps out of
the water it is described by ptigOk. The entrance to a native house
is by a small, sloping tunnel, which ends at a circular shaft extending
up to the floor. This opening, which is generally about three feet
deep, is termed the piig*y&rftk.
821. The word nni, house, has also a secondary meaning, which
renders exactly such English expressions as the place one occupies,
room for somethiftg, space for, mark of etc.
In the kazhga it is customary for the inmates to retain the same
NOTES 307
places during their sojourn. Hence, to inquire of one where his
location is the expression used is naiihwft nin, wlure is your place f
Note. — The direct question, Where do you sleep ? is naahwft SnftqySn, where is it^
your sleeping place ?
itgimi nne my footprint
Itgdnka nnitut my feet, they have no room = I have no
space for my feet
In speaking of the marks of the crucifixion of Our Redeemer, the
expression print of the nail is to be rendered by iisilkchftm nnilthrft.
This is the past form, nnllthkA, my house (85).
822. The Innuit equivalent for such expressions as remember me
to, give my love to, etc., is niyiniik.
niyinSmuk kinruskeu inik^ give my love to mother
823. The Innuit are very gentle and affectionate, and always show
great consideration for the feelings of others. If any one happens
to pass where a party are eating he is always invited to share the
meal. Even if it is known that the other is not hungry, some little
morsel is always offered in order that the person may not feel
slighted. The regular formula in presenting such a morsel is
kftnniUdpiiqt&qt&k, taste it,
824. When a man's wife dies his neighbors refrain from using the
usual term, niilahrutg, his wife, and express it by iSpirutS. (Sec irutM,
Mode IX and 647.)
825. uqt2t. This is the term for the various articles belonging to
a deceased person, which are strewn over and around the grave.
826. When a person dies it is customary to express it by pCCk,
which is equivalent to he is done,
827. Among other euphemistic terms for the dead is t&nggninriln-
rilrdet, those who are not to be seen any more,
uetdvikliilthh^nkd yut tdnggninrunr^rqlut
the folks I used to live with are not to be seen any more
828. When speaking of a person who is dead the Innuit make
use of the word peunrllrdA, he who exists not, is not. This is
added after the name of the person, and is used as the word * feu *
in French.
308 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
MumyuleiSnrllrai the late Mumyulee
Ktilk&riinrilrai the late Nicholas
Mumyuleunrllraem nulah^ the wife of the late Mumyulee
829. UnifkAnOk, death tidings, UnCtlkA, / abandon^ leave^ withdraw
frofHi etc.
ch&miik unifkali or unlfk^tke has he {or they) tidings of any one's death ?
chimQk unifk&chet who is dead ? (direct question)
unifk^nr^to^ chimiik I have no death tidings
unifklto^ illetntik I have news of some one's death
830. The tonsure : Among the men very frequently all the hair is
cut from the crown of the head, leaving only a circle of hair around.
This in certain works is alluded to as the Tartar tonsure. The
Innuit style this mode of hair cutting as ktiikniik.
V
kttikntig'lo^ ^zhmdqtoi hwe I cut my hair
icttiknug'lune ^zhm(iqt5k he cuts his hair
V
izhmugishkenil kttiknGg'lutft cut your hair
izhmugfshkllle ktiikntig'lune let his hair be cut
831. The game of checkers, or draughts, is well known through-
out all the Yukon district. The Innuit play it with great interest ;
the moves are always made very rapidly. Pey&skSqtoa, I play checkers;
peyftsk&'vik, checkerboard ; pGyftskSk, checker.
The Innuit received the game from the Russian traders, and so
one or two French idioms came also. When a player takes a piece
he says nilqrftkft, I eat it (*je le mange*). When a piece has become
a king it is called d&mSk, dame ; d&mftqpntlk niiq*rea, eat it, take it with
yoiir king,
832. The circular hatch of the native canoe, or kiyak, is termed pi.
Sing, Dual. Plur.
Intrans, pi pik pit
Trans, pim
Loc, pime plgne pine
etc, etc. etc. etc.
A modification of the kiyak, attributed to the Russians, is often
seen around Unalaska and other islands. This consists in making
the canoe large enough to accommodate three persons. A kiyak
having two or three hatches is termed pitiHk (127).
NOTES 309
833. The word pi means also the mouth of a river or stream,
kwegiim pign^ of the river, its mouth
pitmdqtoi I go to the mouth of the river
Pime&t is the name of several villages situated at the junctions of
rivers.
834. ChDdcftdede and ddkkftpepir are used by children to designate
little birds,
835. There is a widespread belief among the Innuit regarding
an immense marine monster which devours whales. A little Innuit
lad gave the following description of this animal, which is termed
Aqhlu ingghXngrooqtok t^milthkwetne emaqpig'meutir'ne. Aqhluthwi
The aqhlu is the largest of all sea dwellers. Aqhlus
niiqtiilraet stointik iirhovdr'nukthlu. Imkut iqhlut emaqpigmeutaugwut,
devour belugas and whales. These aqhlus live in the ocean,
ch^la ^qhlut ^lllngn^qkut. Yum kinrutlhd^gli^ ^qhlug'muk t^ngnllth-
and we are afraid of them. A man told me about an aqhlu he had
hunelune sto^miik kQqmadlune, taum ^qhlum ktiqma^ri !kkouk taligwim
seen holding in its mouth a beluga. Only the two extremities of that beluga
itllaunituk kQqma&ra ta~un3. pQkklunc. Aw^ne ta~ugwim ya.l!r*n!mtne
could be seen struggling. They only come ashore way off
snimiin tkettlSqtut. Tunumtiqthun ptGngkithlutting.
on the other side from us. They have a row of spines on their back.
836. The robin is sometimes termed ivgftt IdllOftt. This refers
to a popular story (which is told also among the Tinneh Indians)
concerning a man who deserted his home and went off and married
two women. His wife searched for him in vain, until one day when
a robin flew by and told her where her miscreant husband was living.
The song of the robin is imitated :
iv'giit kil'loat
mi'lukchlg'^niik
nii'liqtdq'tdk
p&'mak chir"liik
Here the word chir*liik has no meaning and is used to represent the
chirp of the robin.
3IO ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
837. In Provencal there is a similar example. In the springtime
a certain little bird frequents the vineyards and sings to the vine-
dressers as follows :
* akou'cceti, akou'cceti !
che lai boua son achi/
meaning make haste y make /taste ! the buds are coming forth,
838. There is a common superstition, regarding certain malignant
spirits who are supposed to frequent the mountains, and who will
capture any one who invades their region.
If a hunter ventures to camp for the night on the lofty peaks,
he will be carried off by the irsninhrftt, or mountain spirits, to their
abode. There are supposed to be three doors to the habitation of
these spirits. The first affords an exit back to earth, the second
leads to heaven, and the last to hell.
The next morning the departing guest must make his own choice
as to which door he will pass out by. Should he select the one
which leads out to the world, he finds on his return home that
he has been long counted among the dead, for a single night spent
as a captive of the irsninhrat is supposed to equal a full year of
time.
839. There is frequent mention made in the native stories of a
superstitious mode of drawing a person onwards against his will.
The one possessed of this occult power can force another to come
towards him by beckoning to him with both the little fingers, which
have been moistened with saliva.
This action of placing the tips of the little fingers in the mouth
and wetting them with saliva is expressed by ikkflthkOflki n(Migigtftqkft.
The following extract will serve as an example :
ta~um fivingkroilhulum pel ; " tichughi," toithlu !kkilthkough€ noig&q-
klukuk chiyugw^rh^, kshinilir'ma tughenun ikilthkotdk tunthiin
iyalita.
that ugly girl said, " Come along/' and wetting her little fingers (and
beckoning), she drew him, he gliding towards her against his will,
being taken backwards
840. In another story there is a variation, as follows, describing
two persons who were brought up a steep icy slope into the
residence of an ogre :
NOTES 311
toi miyungn^ks&kuk w^sket^tuk to^tluhdk plktim emum k^nrutuk :
V
'^Ktg^kuk no^qthluke" pisklukuk t5i nutin noiqth^r'lukuk
miyorqtuk
so they both tried to go up, but slipped back ; then the one up there said
to them to wet their feet ; so having first wet them as they were told
to do, they went up all right
In this instance the saliva was applied to the heels.
841. Sorcery has a great hold upon the Eskimo, and in every
village of any size there will always be found one or more sorcerers.
These men are called in to perform incantations over the sick, and
frequently there are solemn public seances held in the kazhga.
Usually the sorcerers objected to the presence of a priest at their
performances, and it was difficult to obtain any details about the
various ceremonies. On one occasion I succeeded in procuring the
following verse of one of their songs :
tfingra^'hiyem yu&rute
the devil's song
tiingr^Hgum at6q'iara
the sorcerer always sings it
klk^ t&m^r'md egliulrai :
t^nghikeu ! ^Uentifk^n^k !
kair^gliii. Ka^r&gha. Ka^rigni
my whole body is covered with eyes :
behold it ! be without fear !
I see all around (ter)
842. Ttgoa and tketOft. Both these verbs mean to come. The
difference between them is that tketO& implies coming from a greater
distance.
The imperative of tigOft, ti ti or tikSnft, is the proper equivalent of
come here ! and tnskft, am I to come ? shall I come f is said when one
has been called. The following are a few of the forms of each,
although there is little danger of confounding them :
tigoi tketoi
tilaa tkethlaa
tikum^ tklshkum^
tindm^ tkech^mi
tiwilig'mi tkepilig'mIL
312
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
843. Nftklikkftkft, kunnDdUci, and chflchfUcXkft. These three verbs are
all used to express / love. The first is the strongest term. Chflchfi-
ULkft expresses to like, and can be used just as 'like' in English.
keputnok ki chuchukin do you like trading ?
Where greater emphasis is desired the other words are to be used.
n^klfkkHkalihw^ yum t^m^r'ma pet^chimetiin
every man must love him as much as he can
844. kftnn&rftt. The time spent in travelling is measured by the
number of camps or sleeps. Distance is generally expressed in this
manner. Thus in answer to the question, '* How far is it to such a
place ? *' the reply will be, *' It is so many sleeps.*'
Two sleeps represent a journey of three days, and so on.
845. On fttOqtO& . . . fttO'iUdL.
This verb is made use of idiomatically in a great variety of senses.
1. Meaning /(? jm^.'
When used in this sense ftt&lrS&miik means singing or music.
At&y&ie = a singer, and fttSqst&k serves to express any musical instru-
ment..
2. Meaning to dress, to wear, etc. :
itkuki itorik^
tiintuyigag'nuk iitor'lune
3. Meaning to use, to employ, etc.:
umyuine itorh^
I put on my coat
wearing a fawn-skin coat
ingglin ^tor^k^
atdq'yuraka
4. Meaning to follow :
iyiqtok tumiit it5q'luke
tumy^rit ^tor^nk^
5. Other meanings :
atdr'yakonSku
kithlun dtoqpdkilist^ un^
kaithk^pok akkwiw^ ^Ltulthki
6. Meaning to obey :
maiiq'loqloin k^nra^yirha 2Lt6r'luku
he uses his mind (i.e., he does
as he pleases)
I use your canoe
I want to use it
he follows the trail
I go along the road
do not meddle with it
how do we term this ?
the axe I used yesterday
he obeying his grandmother's
word
NOTES
313
846. To have^ in the sense of to own or to possess^ is expressed in
composition with kfttOft, as, i^kfttOft (Mode I).
Mode II, in the sense of to keep, care for, etc., is expressed by
auiatkSkft.
kemiiqtfi aulutk^k^
Hn k^maunki aulutki
alilutkeu uni utriiskum^ tlgunair^k^
I have your dog
he has my sled
keep this for me till I come
Mode III, in the sense of some attribute, etc., is expressed by
particular verbs.
kunnunet nuy^qpaul^qttit
raenve6k
mermaids always have long hair
he has a loud voice
7!:? want, in the sense of desiring one's presence :
ativiit yMritft your father wants you
k^nrutimne in my saying (i.e., in the words of)
k&nrutghegh^nlm'ne in my saying (i.e., during the time pf)
Aino Kamtchatka = Ainu Kurile Islands
847.
aino
amu
upasch
upass
api
apeh
pi
peh
kotan
kudan
pet
peth
stapu
stahpu
Numerals
I
sinep
4
inep
2
tuup
S
assik
3
rep
6
ivan
Yakut
(Siberia) Numerals
I
bir
7
setta
2
ikke
8
agus
3
us
9
taggu
4
tschort
10
onn
5
bes
II
onorc
man
snow
fire
water
earth
river
dog
alta 12 onordo ikke, etc*
ETHNOGRAPHICAL REMARKS AND DEFINITIONS
OF CERTAIN INNUIT TERMS
•
848. As there are many Innuit words which have no exact
English equivalent, some special explanation is required in order
that their full significance may appear.
In the following list a few of these words taken from the stories
just given are more fully explained.
849. chfUdqtOft. The well-known Eskimo kiyak is a shuttle-shaped,
skin-covered canoe, about twenty feet in length. As the occupant
of this light and frail craft cannot move from his place amidship, it
is impossible, therefore, to land bow on ; so, in order to effect a
landing the kiyak must first be brought around broadside to the
shore. Then by resting the paddle upon the edge of the bank and
the edge of the hatch, sufficient stability is afforded to allow the
occupant to draw his legs out and step ashore. This act of bringing
the kiyak broadside to the shore preparatory to landing is expressed
by the word chai5qt0ft.
850. chikiUaOghiLn. This consists of a staff or pole shod with an
iron or ivory spike, having a sharp cutting edge like a chisel. It is
always carried by an Eskimo when he is out on the ice. It is used
for many purposes, such as for cutting around the fish traps, also for
trying whether the ice is safe to walk on, when the winter is about
over. It is also used to drill through the ice to obtain drinking
water when travelling.
851. ftkeveg&kft. The Innuit make long journeys by sea in their
anggiaks, or sailboats. These wonderful little vessels consist of a
light framework held together by lashings solely, and covered
with sealskins. An ordinary anggiak will accommodate fully thirty
persons, together with their baggage and provisions for the trip.
They always sail along close to the shore, and whenever the party
wish to camp, they land, and having first unloaded their boat, they
carry it up on the shore ; then they use it as a tent, by tilting it over
on one gunwale, and support it in this position by a few props.
3H
ETHNOGRAPHICAL REMARKS 31$
The act of placing an anggiak in this position is expressed by
852. ftk&t&k. This, meaning mixture^ is the name given to the
most highly esteemed native dish, which is thus prepared. A quan-
tity of seal blubber and a broad slice of tQnOk, the back fat of deer^
are boiled together until the whole has dissolved. A quantity of
salmon berries is also added. When it has cooled a lot of hard dry
snow is stirred in, and the whole is beaten up into a stiff cream.
Along certain stretches of coast where deer are scarce, akutak is
only made on rare occasions, such as a village feast, for it is an
expensive luxury on account of the high price demanded for deer
tallow.
853. akklflMt. This word expresses ammunition^ literally, // is its
belongings, gnn understood.
854. ftiiegll3r8k. The primary meaning is a little hut or shelter ,
built of blocks of hard snow. As a secondary meaning, this word
expresses a ptarmigans burrow. These birds are exceedingly
abundant throughout Alaska, and during the winter season they
make for themselves little burrows in the snow.
855. ftgyftk, ftn&tfik. This is the usual expression for a meteor ox a
falling star, but it is too coarse to be given literally. (See ftn&tOft in
Vocabulary.)
856. ftssut&tQt. The Innuit are fond of wrestling, leaping, and
other athletic sports. Frequently they will indulge in tossing one
of their companions in a walrus skin. A dozen strong fellows will
hold the skin, which is very large and oval shaped ; then they start
a song, and while keeping time with the music will toss their
comrade high in the air.
857. &vveiikftqke. This signifies the /// memoriam offerings for the
dead. At every feast minute portions of food are taken from each
dish and cast upon the ground, in remembrance of the departed.
858. kftii&qtO&. This word signifies to end up at, emerge upon, etc.
For example, as a long range of hills may end abruptly at the edge
of the sea; again, just as a trail over the tundra may terminate at a
lake. If a person is passing through a dense growth of the stunted
willow, so common in the Yukon delta, and comes suddenly out upon
the river, it is expressed by kftn&qtOft.
m^ut ingrit emiqpig'mtin kinalimalit
these mountains terminate at the sea
3l6 ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
859. tQtOft. This expresses reaching tlu opposite side by crossing
directly over^ not by going around.
860. tatfit (third plural of tfltM). This is the name given to the
great isolated blocks of ice which get lost from the pack and are
stranded along the shore.
861. tXggOft. This means I go up^ but always in the sense of going
up from water = inlandwards. A man leaving his canoe and going
w
up the shore is described as tIggOk. Atriqtfift is its opposite, meaning
I go down (i.e., towards water).
862. AkmftchWcft, I pierce it completely. Strictly, it is I other side it^
from ftkm&nS, the other side. If an arrow or a bullet pierces anything,
it is expressed by ftk]nlU:heiakQ.
863. ch&ngut. Before winter sets in it is customary to lay up an
abundant supply of dried grass for household use. The Eskimo
women display remarkable skill in weaving this into a variety of
useful objects. Many of these, especially the baskets and mats,
which are woven from carefully selected grasses, are beautiful
specimens of handiwork. The main use of changut, or the common
dried grass, is for the native foot gear. Every morning a fresh wisp
of it is neatly folded and inserted into the sealskin boot. Experience
has proved that a pad of straw in the sole of the boot is the very best
protection against the cold.
864. chigy^. A favorite adornment among the Innuit women
consists of two very large dark blue beads, which are worn suspended
from the nose. The nasal septum is pierced while the girl is young,
and until she reaches womanhood she wears a pair of very small
beads.
865. fillOAk. This is the term given a certain variety of native
knife. It is made of flint obsidian jade or any other hard stone
which will afford a cutting edge. At present metal is coming into
general use. The uUoak is made in a semicircular form ; the straight
edge is fitted into an ivory handle. This form of knife is used
exclusively by women. The semicircular knife used by saddlers is
an exact counterpart of an Eskimo ulloak.
866. k5chech6rughft. This expresses one of the common modes of
obtaining water when travelling. Sometimes it will happen that ice
cannot be conveniently obtained ; then a block of snow is cut and
impaled on a long stick, stuck up close to the camp fire. As the snow
melts the water drips from the bottom of the block. K0ch6k = a drop.
ETHNOGRAPHICAL REMARKS 317
867. piyuqtikS. In the native villages the evening meal is eaten
by all the men in the kazhga directly after their sweat bath. The
women prepare the food in their various houses, and each one's
portion is put into a wooden dish called a kantak. At mealtime
the women enter the kazhga bringing these kantaks, which they
distribute to their husbands and sons. If any stranger or visitor
happens to be present he is always presented with a kantak of food.
This act of bringing food into the kazhga and presenting it to one
is expressed by piyaqtikS.
868. tiqhrSfignl. In every village where driftwood is easily
obtained the custom prevails of having a sweat bath every evening
in the kazhga. During the time of the bath those who may wish
to excite a more profuse perspiration flagellate themselves lightly
with a bunch of willow switches. These little bunches of willow
are termed t&qhrStuty and the act of using them is expressed by
tiqhrSfigiil.
869. iipnftt. From iippOft, / suffocate, term given to the lofty
mountain peaks where respiration is difficult. This corresponds to
the South American * veta.'
870. Un&tliiUl, one who is poisoned by the bite of a salmon^ from
an&ttOft. Frequently while engaged in catching salmon the fingers
(fin&tnkft) become sore and inflamed from handling the fish.
871. taunXk. Term for whiskey, a corruption of the English word
' tonic ' ; taiini'vik, a place where whiskey is to be had, saloon,
872. UchSkftgnfl means he has me as a load. The little Eskimo
kiyak will carry a surprising amount. When two men go in one
kiyak, the second one sits facing the stern, and this is expressed
by GchSkftghft.
873. t&tk&ik&. Everything made of sealskin, etc., has to be always
kept out of reach of the native dogs. When a kiyak is not in use
it is placed upon a simple support formed by four poles or oars.
Each pair are tied together so as to form an X, and upon these the
kiyak rests, hatch downwards. These cross-supports are termed tfttkik,
and the act of placing a kiyak upon them is expressed by t&tk8Sk&.
874. kimmegautit. Is the name of the small flat sled used in
connection with the kiyak while seal hunting out on the sea ice. In
crossing any open water this sled is lashed on the kiyak ; when the
sealer reaches the ice again the kiyak is loaded on the sled. No
dogs are used for the kimmegautit. From kimOr&kft, / drag it.
\
VOCABULARY
Note. — Tununa, Kuskokwim, St. Michael, etc. : when one of these names appears
after a word it shows it to be restricted to that district.
Frequently an Eskimo word will be rendered as " term for " or " expresses." Example :
nunSlQqpSSk term for continent
chSprll^dk expresses omnipotent
These are applied significations. The Eskimo having learned new ideas from associa-
tion with the whites, those words of their language which were formerly general in their
meaning are now recognized as limited to a particular signification.
The words are presented here in their simple or radical form only, as it would be a most
arduous undertaking to attempt to display all the various forms of each Eskimo word.
About seventy forms of kfipiitol are given, which may serve as a model for composing
these forms for other verbs.
& In^ Ih, yes
& chfi^ I chfim^ below, straight down
ft ch§' & ni, under it
& chfi In' td I, I am below
ft ch§^ kft, ft chln^ ft chfi^ ft, my belowness
ft chSk fftr^ 'nfik, somewhat lower, a little
more down
ftche'mft, ftchlm'ne, etc, transitive of
ftchSkft
ft chS mit' td ft, I am under
ft chSm' U ^5k, the one who is beneath
ft chS' rfin, ft chS' ru tum, a slough
ft ch£ rut' i kft, my slough
ft chlltb' kd ft, its end, bottom
ft chiltb' kSk, the under part
ft chlm" ne, ft chlr' ne, etc., under me (see
ftchSmft)
ft e tftq" t5 ft, I open my mouth
ftf ch§ ftm' chS, I distribute among you
ftf kou' tft kft, I separate it
ftf kdut' stft, term for one who separates
two fighters
ftf schi nftk, field mouse
ftf tft kft, I divide it in two equal parts
ft' gft 16k, a beam, long log used in building
ft' gft 15 rft ftk, rainbow
A gftng kft lu' nS, hanging up
& gftng' kalik, it is suspended
ft gftng rii y€t', a variety of native berry
ft' gftn tOk, it is on the other side
ft gftq' tft kft, I hang it
ft gau' ch§ tftk, a hanging lamp
ft' gh nft, the other side, rear of a house
Ig gaii' tftt, a variety of berry
ftg gS Irq' tlkft, my approach
ftg ge Iiq' t5 ft, I draw near, come in view
ftg glQ mft' kft, I desire eagerly, I covet
ftg glQ mft' nftk, covetousness
ftg gu' tft kft, I carry it over
ftg' gyftk, star
ftg' gyftk ft nft' tOk, a shooting star
ftg' gyftk chl kum yftq' tOk, the star twinkles
(i.e., winks)
ftg' gyftk Iq' tOk, the star falls = meteor
ftg gyftq' pftk, big star (i.e., the morning star)
ft' gho ft, I proceed
ft gf , there it is on the other side
ft gi' yii chSk, prayer
ft gi yu' ^hft, I pray
ft gi yu' ISr tft, ft gi yu' ISr t3m, priest
ft gi 3ni mftr rft ft, church member
ft gi yti mftl' rft §t chft ti rati hrft et, the faith-
ful departed
A' gi yun,- A gi' yu t(im, God
319
320
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
I gi yQ lUl rft' 5k (third singular of Mode
CXXXVII) it is prayer time
I gi 3ni nii rft fl' ^I, it is time for me to
pray
A gi^ yd ndk, Sunday (i.e., prayer day)
& g! 3nin' rd 5k, it is Sunday
ft gi yfi' nfiq pftk, church festival (i.e., great
prayer day)
ftgi'srflshfin, ft gi ya' 8ha tfim, any devo-
tional object (rosary, medal, etc.)
ftglyOts'tskia^ ftpt'hwfl, ask him to
pray for you
ftgl'yatiim ftliata'ch5ft, God's provi-
dence
A gl' yO tttm A'n5, ' Mater Dei *
Agl'jrfltiim ftt'tauk, one joined to God
(priests, sisters, etc.)
Agi'yfitSm lPii5'ftkit5, * Mater Salva-
toris *
ft gl' yfi t&m kftn rft ft rft' nflk, preaching,
sermon
ft gT yfi vik, ft gi' yfl ▼•m, church
ft gl 3rfl vlq' pfit, our church
ft gl yfi Ylq' thUk, hymn
ft gi yii Ylq' t5 ft, I go to church
ftgiyO-yft kftaq'tSft, I am about to go to
church
ft gl yfl yft' rftk, divine service
ft gl yfi yfi sr ^5k, one who does not pray
ft ^ftk, pitch (exudation from wood)
ft ^ k5r' t5 ft, I betake myself
ft ghfi k5 rft^ rft kft, I slowly unwrap it
ft gh5t^ «tS, the untyer of it
ft' ^I ra ft, great
ft ^ y5' t5 ft 5 mftq' pig* mfi, I am seasick
ft ^ yd kft' ch5 ft, little chief
ft ^'ydkftk, chief
ft gni yd kau' g5k, he rules
ft gii5' ft hun, paddle of canoe
ft ghd ftr' td ft, I paddle
ft ^5 ft' rut kft, ft fn5 ft' nit mft, my paddle
ft gnu', stop ! do not !
ft gnO' ft tft, here now I
ft ^u' chft 15k, man, any male animal
ft gnu chft lu' yftk, a little male, a pup dog
ft ghfl kft rail' hii 15k, old man
ft ^fl kft rau hii lu' ch5 ft, a little old man
ft' ^iin, ft ^Q' tfim, man = male
ft ghii' sftk, do not (baby-talk, used by
mothers)
ft ^Qf f ftk, stag, a big buck
ft ghat ^nSxq' td ft, I grow old
ft ^Q t ghd' gnft, I am a man «^
ft ^df tchd ft, a small man
ft g5ng' kauk, it is hung up
ft g5q' a kft, I hang it
ftgfl'mftk, a round basket woven from
grass
ftg' 'yd ftk, the tunnel entrance to kazhga
ftg' Td ft mit td ft, I am in the agveak
ftg 3rfl d' td ft, I never go over
ftg 3rfim' chft ftq, ftg 3rfim' chft ftm, a secret
ftg 3rfim chd u' ^hft, I whisper
ftg 3rfim md fir' td ft, I address in a low tone
ftg yOm md fir yfiq rftm' kin, I want to whis-
per to you
fth' Yin' lig gin, six
fth' Tin li g5q' tftn left, I make six
fth' Tin' lin, six pairs
fth* vin' 15q kd nftk, sixfold
fth' Tin rftt' nd, on the sixth
fth* Tin' rhftk, sixth
ft kft kd' kft, oh !
ft' Icftq chdr tdk, the sun shines
ft' Icftq tft, ft' kftq tSm, the sun
ft' kftq tft nftl' lauk, eclipse
ft' kftq tft pu' g5k, the sun rises
ft' kftq tft tirlr' t5k, the sun sets
ft' Icftq t&m tvir thlfiq kft' nfin, to the going
down of the sun
ft' kd ft, ft' kd ftk, ft' kdt, payment
ft kd chftq' td ft, I come trading
ft kd chftq ta' ^hft, I am trading
ft' kd left, my pay
ft kd kfif kftq chd kft' kft, I wUl take it for
your debt
A kd Idch' tim tft A' nd, * Mater Redemptoris '
ft kd' Id nftk, gambling
ft kd Id tft' kft, I pay him
ft kd Id' td ft, I pay
ft kdl' gild kft, my debt
ft kdl ghdrq tii mftl' rft ft, who is still in debt
ft kdl ghdxq td mau' ghft, I am still in debt
ft kd' lir' nftq kfin, by that side
ft kd nt hftq' kd, ft kdl ^5r tii, pay first your
debt
A kd' ntst fflt. Our Redeemer
ft kdl nir' yGn rd' td ft, I do not want to have
any debt
ft kd' md ftk, fifteen
ftkd'mdftk fttaii'chdmfik chlp'plflkfi,
sixteen
VOCABULARY
321
X W m« Xk mSX rOf' 'nflk chip' plfl kfl, sev-
enteen
XkrmiXk ping^'yfinftk chlp'plfikfl,
eighteen
I kS mS I rhom S' p6 It, three hundred
& ke mS ft run ra' tft, fourteen
ftk§n^ IkS'tOm, the head rest in native
house
AkSnaiiq^tdl, AkSnaa'rftk&, I pay him
back, I take revenge
I kS' td ft, I have no money
ftkiVSgft'kft, I turn it over (viz., the
anggiak)
ft kS' wik, ft kS' wim, the anggiak inverted
and propped up
ft kS' yu oS, unpaid
ftk fft' kSr> 1ft kS, let me run and get them !
ftkfft'kSktftqtOk, he runs (with much
effort), said of the old
ftkfft'kSrtdft, I run
ftk fft k5 yun ni' td ft, I can run no longer
ftk fftta' kft kft, I order him to bring it
ftk fft yu' gftm kin, I want to carry you ofif
ftk fi kft tftq' to ft, I begin to bring
ftk fi yu ge yft' kft kft, I am inclined to carry
it off
ft Idk' kle kftn kft, I put them by twos
ft klk" kl§ kut, two by two
ft Idk^ kllm' nS, in front of me
ft' kllth ka to ft, I glide
ft kin' kft' 1ft tOk, it reflects
ft kin' kftlth hft nfik, reflection
ft Idn' kft thlSk, reflection
ft Id yfi' mfi ftn, over again
ftk' kft, then
ftk' kft a' 'mft nS, at that time
ftk' kft ftk, the opposite shore
ftk kft' chfth to ft, ftk kft' chft gft kft, I injure
him
ftk' kft kftk, exclamation of annoyance
ftk' kft kft kft, oh!
ftk kftk nS ftn' kft t5 ft, I owe
ftk kftlth thlau' gw5 ft, I am old, decrepit
ftk kftlth thlauq' t5k, it is old, stale
ftk'kftm, again
ftk' kftm kin, I promise you
ftk' kft nfik, from long ago
ftk kftq ch! tft' kft, I roU it
ftk kftq' t5k, it rolls down
ftk'kftthlftk,o1d age
ftk kft thlft' rft miik, about old Umes
ftk kftf hdh tOk, he is drowned
ftk' kft t5q to ft, I am full-gorged
ftk kail' t5k kft, is it long ago ?
ftk' kft yOk, echo
ftk k§ ft wif ang' kft tOk, a circular island
ftk Idzh gS t5q' td ft, I eat pUrmigan
ftk' Idzh zhi gik, ptarmigan
ftk klftn' kfin, ermine
ftk' klu, ftk' klQk, ftk' kiat, a thing, a belong-
ing
ftk' klu kftt, term for ammunition
ftk klulth hftn' kft, my old clothes
ftk klfi yftq tdq' kft, I go to dress him
ftk' krfit, ladder
ftk kum ka' mfi Q tftk, expresses any foreign
object brought up by the ships
ftk kam ka me Q tab' gw5k, it is something
from away off over there
ftk' kun, ftk' ka tQm, a promise
ftk ka' 3rfln, native mortar for snuff-making
ftk kwft' wftk, yesterday
ftk kwft' wft thlftk, a thing of yesterday
ftk kwe' go ft, I play
ftk kwfi naiiq' to ft, I usually play
ftk' kw5 ft, ftk kwa' tft kft, I promise
ftk ling', poor ! (expletive)
ftk mftl' Ifi ftq, term for raven = the other
side one
ftk mftn 11' ^k, the one over there
ftk mftn' tSk, it is across there
ftk mft tef , on their other side
ftk mft' yflt, to over there
ftk ne ft' go ft, I suffer
ftk' nfi ftk, pain
ftk' nfik, pain (lasting, chronic)
ftk nfir' ni' 1ft ak, thimble
ftk nfir' nil Ifi ft' kft, I make something to
prevent him from injury-
ftk nfirq ^5 ft yftg' '15 ft, I am feigning pain
ftk nfirq stir Ifi ft kft, I save him from being
hurt
ftknfir'akft, I hurt him
ft kd' mis kft kft, I bid him to sit
ft kd' mo ft, I sit
ft k5m yfi' to ft, I have no place to sit
ft k5q t5q' kft, I accept it, receive it
ft kSr' tft kft, I moisten it
ft k5r td' rft kft, I receive it
ft kStl' hrft ft, steersman
ft ko' to ft, I steer
ftk schnai' td ft, I sneeze
322
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Ik' 8h& k&, my belly
&k shft u' ghl, I am gorged
Ik td rl' kl, I prop it
I kii chi skim' kin, I bid you make akutak
I kd' U, Arctic moorlands, tundra
I ka laii' nl kd, frequently
I kfi l§n^ t6k, it is between
Iku'l§t, interstices
I kd MM nS, in between
ft kil np' kl, my middle finger
I ku' 11 pOk, middle finger
A ka' n rik, bridge of the nose
ft kQ li' rl kl, I pass between
I kulth' k5 tSk, it is frequent = has no
intervals
I kulth' ku chfik, space between things, as
between logs in a house
I kfi' lu rdk, a stream connecting two lakes
I kfim gll rl^ I gnl, I am sitting down
I kfim gaii' ghl, I do sit
I kfim gatiq' td I, I sit
I kfim kft z\A' ak, I kfim' thUk, a seat
V
I kfim' k nik, a stepchild
ft ku' tik, native dish (seal oil, deer tallow,
berries, and snow)
ft kfi a' U§ fi ^, I make akutak
ft ku tftq' ko I, I distribute akutak
A kfi aq t5q' t5 1, I eat akutak
I ku' to ft, I mix up (hence akutak =
mixture)
ft kfi' yfin, rudder
ft ku' yfi tuk, mortar for mixing snuff
ft kfizh rhftq' t5 ft, I romp
ft kfizh rhau' g5 ft, I am full of fun
ftk' Yo ft, I run, scamper
ftlftn'j^thu, phantom, ghost
ft Iftn^' fhu u ^ift, I am haunted
ft Iftq koh' t9 ft, ft Iftq koh' rft kft, I command
ft Iftq' kfin, ft Iftq k5' tOt, commandment
ft Iftq' tlhre tOk, accurate, without error
ft lau ru' tlhrfi ft, one coming
ft lau rfi' td ft, I approach
ft' IS ghftk, mark, sign (term for letter)
ft IS gnftq' shfin, a thing to mark with (term
for pencil, pen, etc.)
ft le ghft' to ft, I mark (term to express I
write)
ft IS giiau' matik, it is marked, it is written
I IS^h' gno ft, ft IS' kft kl, I dread, I fear it
ft IS^ thlftg' 'Ifi nS, I greatly scared
I IS^ thlfiq' t5 I, I am much alarmed
I IS' ghfim Q gwft' nS, through fear
ftlSk'sftt, native socks, woven from dried
grass
ft ISk sft yfiq'td ft, I want some grass socks
ft ISk SI chS' kftm Idn, I will make you some
grass socks
I IS ml chS' kS ft, make some mittens for
me
ft IS' mft kft, glove
I IS ml ting yfiq' t5 1, I want gloves
I Ung nlq pSt' IS, how dreadful 1
I ling' sti kft, I scare him
I Ung tftq' to ft, I am timid
I Ung' tft rft IS, coward
ftl Iftq kd' ft gft kft, I leave instructions with
him
ftl Uq' an kft tu' mfit. I miss the trail
ftl Iftq' td ft, I miss, I err
ftl IS', sleeve
ir IS ^hft rftk, ornament
II IS glift' rft kft, I adorn it
ftl IS' ghd ft, I have sleeves
II IS mft kft' rftt, gloves
IllS'mfttfik, mittens
II Uk kft' rft kft, I tickle him
II liltb ku chS' rftn ka tu' mfit, I mark out,
stake, blaze a trail
II li' lun, II li' m tit, marks (posts, etc.)
ftl li nft' 5q t5 ft, I am lonesome
II ling', alas !
II Ung' nftk, fear, terror
II Ung nlq' kSk, it is frightful
II Ung' n5k fft, how terrible 1
ftl Un' kin rut, floats on fish-nets
Illirq'tOk, it appears, in sight
U ISq'pftk, the placenta
ftl Ifi' ghdk, he laps (i.e., a dog or animal)
ftl Ifi' Iftr tft, steersman
ftUfiUr'tdft, I steer
ftl Ifi laii' tftk, steering paddle
ftl Ifing kSs' sfin, feed-trough for dogs
ftl Ifing' vlk, place where the dogs are fed
ftl lu to kft' kft, I take charge of it
ftl Ifi' tfiq tft, a provider
ft 15' kftt kftk, beaver gland (used as a charm)
ftlraiiq'toft, I walk
nth' kft, an elder sister
ftlth' kl kft, my elder sister
ftltb' kl kft, I tear it
ftlth' kftk Idlth hrl St, who were sisters (i.e.,
one of the constellations)
VOCABULARY
323
Ilth' kl klSk, eldest sister
Alth k& tA' kA, I am going to tear it
Iltb ko ni^ kr to I, I suddenly
nth rl k5' I kin, every year, yearly
ir thr& k5k, year
Ilth^ thrl ku, next year
IltbthrftnS^t&k, a thing of last year, last
year's
I lu' go mauk, she has her menses
X luf , feet
ft lu' y&k, swing
ft lu yftq^ td ft, I swing
ftm, again
ftm ft gQ su ft' mfik k nft' VSkj Roman nose
ft mft Id' yftk, humpback salmon
ft mftk' klSk, ft mftk klS' 5q' Ifi, eldest brother
ft mftk' kle kft, my eldest brother
ft mft' Ur' nim nfi, on this side of me
ft mft' Ur' nimt nS, in the other hemisphere
= on the other side of us
ft mft' nft, over here
ft mft' nftk, milk
ft mftn' t5k, it is over here
ft mftq' kwft yft grftk, back-strap of dog
harness
ft mftq' tft kft, I bend it
ft mftq' tdk, it is crooked, bent
ft ma' rft k&, I skin it
ft ma' rft 15k, cloud
ft mft' rek, boots made of salmon skin
ft mftr' kftk, peltry, skin
ft mft te' nS, beyond
ft mft tSn' t5 ft, I am beyond
ft mft tS' nftk, from beyond
ft mauq' kft, my great grandfather
ftm' ch§, hurry up ! .
ft m§k', ft m§' gfim, entrance, doorway
ft mgk', ft mSm', skin
ft mkf 16k, air
ft mi', it is over here
ftm'Inft, ftm'kuk, ftm'kfit, the one over
there
ftm ku'm§ (it, the dwellers over there
ftm mft kail' tft kft, I throw it down
ftm mft klq' tft kft, I twist it
ftm'rftk, sleeve
ftm' tft, maybe
ftm thlSk' yfth, a little more 1
ftm this rS' kft t5 ft, I have too many
ftm' this ii ko nfik, many times
ftm thlSr pft kftq' tft, it is too much !
ftm' thlSr tut, they are many
ftm thlin' rS tOt, they are few (i.e., not
many)
ftm thlir' to ft, I step
ftm' thllr v§ kft kft, I step on it
ft nft chu' ^ftq pfit, our dear mother
ft nftg' 'vlk, a refuge, a shelter
ft nftk', excrement
ft' nft kft, my mother
ft' nft kft ghft, I am his mother
ft nft' kft nfik, nakedness
ft nftk 8ti' n gn5k, as large as possible
ft nftk 8wS le' tft kft, my dear mother
ft nftlth' kOk, sorcerer
ft nftn' nft kft, aunt
ft nftq' stft mfik, term for any purgative
medicine
ft nftq'tft kft, I exceed him, surpass
ft nftq' td ft, ft nft' gft kft, I save
ft nft' t5 ft, I go to the privy
ftn chS Q' ghft, I take out from
ft n€ ch6' sun, term for screw-driver
ft' n$ chS a giift, I use a screw-driver
ft nS' gQ yftk, snow house ; also a ptarmi-
gan's burrow
ft nSk' klft gft kft, I curse him
ft nSk' klftk, a curse
ft ne' pft, ft nS' pftm, white owl
ft nSrq t5 rft' kft, I rescue
A nSrq td rish' tft, Saviour
ftng' gl ftk, native skin sailboat
ftng' gl ft kft, my sailboat, anggiak
tn^ gl ft mg u' kft kft, I put it into the
anggiak
ftng gl ft pis' tft, boat-builder
ftng gl ftq' pftk, big boat (term for ship)
ftng' gl ft riik, a large anggiak
ftng gl ft' to ft, I go in an anggiak
ftng gl yft' lik, owner of an anggiak
ftng ghftq' kft kft, I bring it along
ftng ghftq tft Idl' rft ft, a successful person
ftng ghftq' t5 ft, I surpass, I obtain (i.e., bring
home much game, etc.)
ftng i^e chQn ni' tft kft, I cannot untie it
ftng gliSq'td ft, I am glad
ftng gnh' a kft, I untie it
ftng ghlng ft rd' ft kft, my cousin (male)
ftng glii hi' tl kft, my uncle
ftng ghi' yd kftk, chief
ftng gni y5 kaii' chSk, dominion
ftng gn5' ft hQn, paddle (single blade)
324
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
ftng ghS' & rfl tflng nSq hik, a newly made
paddle
ftnggnd&'tdX, I paddle
ing ghtir y&k, a big man
«ng g'hfi' y«k, «ngfnry6k, ftng^kryit,
inggnu'y&qUU term for soldier
Xng' kAk, ball
Ang'klqtdft, I play ball
Ang'UL nflk, pleasantness
Ang \k nflq' kSk, it is agreeable
ing le chA chii' ghA kat, do guard us
Ang IS chAq^ tA, guardian
Ang IS chAq' tl kA, my guardian
Ang IS chA^rA kA, I make him big (l.e., raise
him, adopt him)
Ang IS gQt^ & kA, my brothers or my sisters
Ang IS rA A' kA, I enlarge it
Ang IS re kA nSr^ k t5k, larger than before
Ang IS re^ nA tOk, it enlarges
Ang lie Q' ghA, I grow large
Ang pA' tA kA, I open it
Ang' rA kA, I say yes to him = I yes him
Ang tAltb' kSr t5k, it is exactly big enough
Ang tAltb Idn' rA tOk, it is not big enough
Ang' tAt kuk, both are the same size
Ang thl5q stir gn6k, one without any one to
baptize him
Ang thl5q' t5 A, I baptize
Ang thl5q' tut stS, baptist
Ang thlu' chSk, baptism
Ang thlu mAk shl' thlfik, one not yet baptized
Ang thlQ mAr rA A, one who is baptized
Ang thlu mAn' rA tdk, he b not baptized
Ang thlu mAn' ril ghdk, one unbaptized
Ang thlu' mauk, he is baptized
Ang' thlQ nAk, baptism
Ang thlu rAq' kAk, a candidate for baptism
Ang thlu rAq kail' ghA, I am to be baptized
Ang thlu this' nS 5k, he is baptizing
Ang thlu yu' thlfik, one desiring baptism
Ang'vA, too big
Ang yA kAq' tA, it is too big !
Ang' yA nfik, breast-bone
Ang yA' nfiq' mfin, native measure, equal to
thirty-six inches
Ang yes' tA, an anggiak builder
A liil rAq' t5 A, I go down stream
A'ning A, brother
A ning' gh5 Ak, boil
A ning gho Am' kA t5 A, I have a boil
An kA S' yA gAk, baby
An kS tA' jA gAk, a new-bom baby
An' 15 Ak, hole cut in the ice to lift out fish-
trap
An naug' '15 kA, my old mother
An nau gfif & r5k, still worse
An nail' gQ t5k, worse
An ni' rSt, house-flies
An' n5 A, I go out
An' *iirhA nA kA, my soul
An nfl' tA kA, I carry it out = I out it
A n5' kA, wind
A n5 Idlth' h5 5k, it is not so windy
A n5 kilth' hrA nftn, to a place sheltered from
the wind
A n5 kilth hfil' rA A, not as windy as
A n5k' klA An, because of, on account of the
wind
A n5 klAr thli' nAq t5k, it always blows
A n5' klAr t5k, it blows (i.e., a gale)
A n5k pS Q' g5k, a man (used in the stories)
A nok' sAq, breeze, light wind
An5k'8hun, AnSk'shatfim, little weather-
vane on sailboat, flag
An' rfl tAk, abdomen
An'tA, born
An' tA kA, I take it out from
An tAt ti' II gn5k, big as possible
An thlSr ch5q' td A, I collect anthlerrut
An' thlSr' me nfik, from his birth
An thlSr' riit, small round roots, eaten by
the natives
An' thlfik, the one bom
An'tUqkA, I blurt out
An tdk' kA rAk, fresh, newly laid (applied to
eg^)
An Q' mauk, it flows (i.e., river)
A' nliq' \ rA TAn kU' rA A, the Holy Ghost
A nfiq taf kA' t5 A, I breathe
A n&q tfif kA yfi ni' t5 A, I cannot breathe
A n(i rail' giiA, I go out
AnyA'thiat,raft
An 3ni S' t5 A, I never go out
Ap chfig' yA' kA kA, I want to ask him
Ap' kaiiq, confession (i.e., being interrogated)
Ap kiHiq chl cha gS A' ko A, I would like to
confess
Ap kfi chS' gn5k, he starts to have a hemor-
rhage
Ap kfi ching' kA t5k, he has a hemorrhage
Ap ktit chA Aq' td A, I complain of pain
A p5r' vlk k5r' t5 A, I grumble
VOCABULARY
325
Ap pA' m&k, the two long side poles, or gun-
wale, of anggiak
&p pA nftq' p&k, the great sire
ftp pi thlQ k&' kl, I sing, compose a song
&p pau' hQ IG kl, my grandfather
ftp p€ I tftq' td ft, I dine
ftp^ prft kft, I pronounce it
ftp' prfin, question
ft' prfl kft, ft' pra kft rftm, little trail
ft'prfln, ft'prfltQm, main trail, regular
passage
ftp' tft kft, I ask him
ft pfing nft kft' kft, I try to guess it
ft pftn' tft kft, I turn down the little finger
ft pfif snfik, adultery
ftq chft', keep still I
ftq chft kftl rft ft' mfik, something special
ftq chft' kftq pft, oh, that is too much 1
ftq chftk' kr6 10 n$, especially
ftq chft rft Q' gnft, I get worse
ftq' hlfl, ftq' hiam, a marine monster, an Orca
ftq pftq' td ft, I yell
ftq' t5 ft, ftq' tft kft, mode characteristic
ftq tOg ytig nilth kSf nan, to where they can-
not reach it
ftq ta rft' kft, I touch it (le., handle, meddle
with, etc.)
ftq td rS yftk p6 ft' rft kft, I nearly touch it
ftq ta' mft kfi, a syphilitic (i.e., one touched)
ftq tfin rft tft' rftq kft, I did not quite touch it
ft'rftk, ft' rftt, ashes
ft rft ni' tdk, it is not dangerous
ft rail' '15k, suffix meaning old
ft rft' fiq td ft, I am in danger
ft rh5' 5k, it rots
ft rha' yftk, smoke
ft rha v51 rft ft' r5q t5k, it proves to be smoke
ft rha' vSr t5k, it is smoky
ftrh' viq' to ft, ftrh* viq' tft kft, I cross over to,
I move it over to
ftri'dtoft, I have no ashes (for use with
snuff)
ft tit nfik, quarrel
ft ilf tft kft, I quarrel with him
ar kttog' kft t5k, it means
ft ro' k5 ft, I pass a thing along
ftr rSn kft' ft pft, well, now I
ftr riSn kft' ft t5 ft, I am at the impossible
ftr rSn Idl' gn5 ft hwft, I am utterly unable
ftr riSr nft ftq' t5k, he is in danger
ftK rSr nftk, woman
ft^ rSr nftk' ghftn, because it is dangerous
ftf rSr nft 5' ho' nftk, adultery, fornication
ft^ rSr nftq chft' 15k, female
ftf rSr nftq kft' rau' 15k, old woman
SI rSr nftq kft rati la' cho ft, little old woman
SI rSr nftq kau ho 15q' pftk, big old woman
iA rSr nftq' k5k, it is dangerous
ftl rSr nft' rft 5k, it is getting dangerous
ftl rSr nail' ghftn, on account of being a
woman
ftr'rhoyak, sperm-whale
ftr rhfim kft lln' rftt, rotten wood
ftr ilv' & lit, knuckles
ftr r5 kftt I^n' kft, I distribute them
ftr rO li kftq' td ft, I am stopping
ftrraiirq'tdft, I stop
ftr ra lir 3niq' td ft, I want to stop
ftr rO' li yan, pestle (used for making snuff)
ft ra 1ft a' kft, I stir it up, I wave it
ft 8d' pft, worst
ft 8d p6 ft' rft kft, I think well of him
ft 86 pd a' tft kft, I put it on a block (to
chop)
ft 8d' pftk, ft 8d' prfim, a block, rest, support,
base, etc.
ft 8d yftq' t5k, it is pretty
ft 8har chft rft' kft, I improve it
ft shftr gh5q' td ft, I become the best
ft shftr re kft' nSq tdk, it is better than ever
ft shftr' t5k, it is good
ftshd'kftkft, I have a good opinion of
him
ft shel gh5q' ta Idt, the wicked
S shSl nir' 'yft rftk, way of sinning
ft shSr n5k, badness
S she thUn' ne 5k, ft shd' t5k, it is bad
ft 8hU' rft ft, ft shir rft dk, ft shil' rft dt, who is
good
ft shin' kft kft, it is nicer than
ft shin rd 5q' td ft, I am better than
ft shin rd' a goft, I feel better
ft shiq' tl kft, my container
fts sa' tft tat, native game (tossing one up
in a sealskin)
ft'tft, ft'tftm, father
fttftfkftnft'nS, without attachment, not
fastened to
fttftfkftrft'kft, I fasten it
ft'tftk, name
ft a' kft, ft tft' mft, my father
ft' tft kft ftm, well, now I
326
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
ft M: kg, oh !
I tA' kd klSk, evening service
1 12' kd m8, in the evening
& ULk 8w§ 1$ a' k&, my dear father
I tft Uq' tl k&, my benefactor = as a father
& a Ur r&' kft, I act as a father to him
& tA lu S' rut k&, my deceased father
I tAm^ again
& tAm' § k§' kfl, see here ! here, now 1
& XH nftk, ruler, head man
I tft' nA kft, my Lord
A tAn' k& kA, I await him
A tAn^ nfik p€ Ak, the chief ruler
A tAn' ro ii chCk, government ^
A tAn rd u' gnA, I govern
A tAq pAq' tA kA, I term it
AtA'tA, by and by
A tA' tA chd' 5rq ka, presently, in a moment
A tA' tA kA, uncle
A tA' tA kd A kAn, every now and then
A tA' tAq ku, later on
A tail' che hAk, unity, one (emphatic)
A tab' chSk. A tali' chim, one
A tail' che kfin, as one = all together
A tail chSq' kA mfik, once
A tau che u' gw5k, it is one
A tab ch§ u' tA kA, my one
A tab chS u' tA kA kA, it is my one
A tab chg u' thlfi ku, by myself, I alone
acting
A tab chg u' wAk klu k§, one by one
A tab' chIm tdk, it is all one, they are all one
A tab chir kAk' ktu tQng, one after another
A tab chit' to A, I have one
A tabg' '15 kA, A tabg' *ian, A taug' Mo An, my
old father
A tab' gnA, I unite, join, make one
A tab hwab' gSk, it is good, beneficial
A'thlA, A' thlA Am, another
A thlA kA hAr' 'mA, my lone self
A thlA kA rA mit' to A, I am alone, separated
from others
A thlA' m§ ku, next year
A thlA nAq' rA 5k, it changes
A thlA nS' gnA, treat me as a guest
A thlA' ne t5k, a stranger comes, there is an
arrival
A thlA' n5k, a guest, a stranger
A thlAn r5 u' gnA, I am a guest
A thlA nfik kll' lA fit, those who are guests
A thlA'ta hAk, anything belonging to another
thlA' tAk, another's property
thlA tab' gw5k, it is another's
thlfi' rAk, bedding (i.e., the fur robes, etc)
this' rA kA, my bedding
thir yug' nAq kA nfi, how strange it is !
thli' yOk, something strange, a cariosity
thl5q'akA, I match it
thia' vfi thlfik, a weeper
thlu'vlk, tear
thlfl vllth' yti ^, I weep
thlfi vin' kA, my tears
ti riif kA, my late father
V kA, Af lAn, At' rA, my name
t klulth hAn' kA, my clothing
f k t5k, it sweeps off (i.e., the current)
t ku cho A' thlfiq kA, my little old coat
f kuk, native fur coat, parka
t kulth' thlfiq kA, my old coat
Af ku t5 A, I put on my coat
t kwe' to A, I have no coat
t mA gA' kA, I carry it on my back, I
pack it
t' mAq kAk, a pack ready to be put on one's
back
t me 5rq' td A, I am arranging my pack,
getting it ready
t5q chIr kill rA A' ^iiA, I may sing, etc.
t5q' stAk, term for any musical instrument
t5q stAl' rA A, one who b playing an
instrument
t5q' 8 tAq tA, a musician
t5q' to A, A t5 zA' kA, I sing, use, wear, etc.
t5q' yii gfi A kA' kA, I am inclined to, would
like to use it
t5r' gnfi thl hul' rA A, not as serviceable as
t5r' kAn' rAr t5k, it cannot be used any
more
t5r' kaun' rA t5k, it can be used
t5r' lAlth' kA, the thing I do
t5r' *yA rAk, song
t5r' ya' gA kA, I want to use it
trAq pAq t lAq' kA, I term it, call, designate
trAq r5q kau' gw5 A, I have to go down
trAqstA'kA, I turn it adrift, I let it go
down
trAq' t5 A, I come down
' trA tAk, driftwood, flotsam, etc. = what
is brought down •
trA' t5 A, I go down slowly
trab' chSk, a descent
traU' tA kA, I bring it down
VOCABULARY
327
I trg tt* kl, I take away the name
A' trS t5k, it has no name, nameless
If sA kwen rftt, a quantity of berries
tt sftm mlt' sd I, term for wine, berry juice
At sA' p6 ftt, blueberry
&t sAq^ to &, I go berrying
&t sA^ ills kfi m&, when I go for berries
It'sAt, it'sftm, berry, also term for all
imported fruit
It sit ch5q' td I, I hunt for berries
It^ sti kl, I dress him
Its' stOrrhan, the comer of a kazhga or
house
If td I, If tl kl, I dress, I put on
It tril' ndk, ring-finger
It tiir ii5k kl, my ring-finger
I ta 11$ Q' ghl, I make a song
I tfir rl I, singer
I tul rfti' ^hl, I am singing
I tul rl^ r6q tdk, it proves to be music
I ta'nSm, between, mutual
I tfl yfi' gnl, I sing well
I tii' yQ IS, a good musician
I tfl yfi le yfi* gw5 1, I am a fine singer
ail' gi nl, ail' gum, that one going off there
ail' hin kl, I pick them up
ail kir rl St, all varieties of
ail kii chim' maut, they are mixed, various
ail kQl hwu' tin kl, I mix, tumble them
together
ail ku' to I, ail ku' tin kl, I mingle, mix
au kwlq' pik, forever
aiilth' kdk, cooked meat
ail lii kl' kl, I mind it, take care of it
ail lii' kfif kB nS, unmindful
ail mail' glk, charred embers
aim' rl t5k, it bleeds
auq, ail' gOm, blood
auq tl Idn rl tl' kl, I confide in him, I trust
auq' t5 1, I creep up (in hunting)
auf 'n5k, steam
ati'tl kl, I jumble, mix
au' thia hwi, look out I
au' thlQ thia, it is too bad !
all wl' IS kl kl, I have it just at hand
au wl rS ghi IS' tl kl, anythmg used as a
weight
au wS' Iq t5 1, I dodge
ail wS' to I, I move aside
I ying' tOk, a knot in wood
Iy ghlq' tOk, it splits readily, it halves at once
ly'gum ly'gl, a quarter (le., half of a
half)
Iy gfi tfing' kl td I, I have half
I Yi' ^5k, it brightens, gets brilliant
Iy' nil IQk, Cottonwood tree
I Yfiq t(ik 8U' SI ^5k, shiftless
Iy yI' chl kl, my friend, my intimate
Iy vail ksi' tl kl, I remember it = have not
yet forgotten it
Iy Yaliq til' ghSk, he has good memory
Iy Yau' rl kl, I forget it, overlook it
Iy yS u' klq kS, offering for the dead
Iy yu' gl kl, my half
Iy' Yfig ving kl td I, I can spare, divide,
share
Iy Yii' gw6k, it is half
Iy' Yfik, Iy' yu gl, half
IwI'klQ, oh!
I wl' nS, over there somewhere
I win' tdk, it is somewhere over there
IwI'rIkI, I remove
I wl rS' sfin, eraser (term for India rubber)
I wl rS' tl kl, I erase, take ofE from,
absolve
I wl tSn' t5k, it is just around here
Iwltl'kl, around me, my vicinity
I wl tim' nS, in my vicinity
I wl' Yiit, over there
I wl zl' klu kS, being closely related
(Tun una)
I we' t5 1, I make room, move aside
I wl yl lir rl I, a place grown up in bushes
I wi yl' a Uk, a thicket
Iz g&q chu' tfit, summer fish-traps
Iz gSf td I, I ascend stream
Izh rl ii' gha, ' peccare contra VI *
I zim mlq' tl kl, I bend it
Iz mfim'maiik, he is stubborn
Iz mfiq' td I, I cut my hair
Iz ra'chl rik, adultery
IzrI'nIk, lust
Iz rl' rl I rIk, fornication
Iz rS uk tOk & nl' kl ^nl, he annoys me
Iz Yil' I ^dk, the strong one
Iz Yif ft rl tdk, it is not strong
Iz' Ydk, Iz' Yd rflk, Iz' Yd rflt, walrus
Iz zhS df td I, I go up stream, pole up
328
ESSENTIALS OF INN (/IT
chA^ chim, ch&k', chit, what thing ?
ch&' ch5 ft, a little thing
chft chSrq' kft, my little thing
chft chQ^ ^iiftk, something nice
chft chu' ghft kft, something nice of mine
chftf kftq ch§ kftm' Idn, I will do something
to you (used as a threat)
chftf aq' to ft, chftf tft' kft, I feel around for
chft gin' rftk, summer deerskin (the best
variety)
chftg mftlth' thlim nfi, where I lost it
chftg mft' zft kft, I lose it
chftg mft rfi u' ghft, I lose in gambling
chft fnft' gh5k, what kind
chftg' 'nftk, strength
chft ^1 ^fi' hwft, what sort is it ?
chft ^Ith Idn rft tft' kft, I do not care
chft ^hft' tft, what way
chftg' 'nfi IS, a champion wrestler
chftg' nS ii' ^hft, I am muscular, strong
chftg' nif kft zft' kft, I strengthen him
chft' hftk, chft' hftm, a bit of something
chft hft' kft, my bit
chft' hwft, what is it ?
chft' hwft Idk, oh, what is it ?
chft' kft, doing
chft'kftk, what for?
chft kft' kft, it is my doing, I do it
chft kft' kft kft, it is something for me
chft kftk' klu kO, why ?
chftk chim' mauk, it is broken (i.e., a piece
off)
chft kSrk' sit, style of labret worn by women
chft kSr nlq' td ft, I am quick tempered
chft' k!fr tftk, something nice
chft' k&r tft kft, something nice of mine
chft' ktfr t5 ft, I fly into a passion
chft k§' tft kft, I chop it up, hash it
chft kg tft rft' rft kft, I mince it
chft ke' f ft, I chop, use hatchet, axe, etc.
chftk' tir tut, said of one whose toes turn
out too much
chft' kik, relationship
chft' Idk, what, indeed!
chft Idl nftq' to ft, I hop
chft kilth nft' tftt, butterflies (the small yel-
low variety)
chft klq' to ft, chft kiq' tft kft, I turn it
chft kJ rftq' kft, my parents-in-law
chft klr" kft, chft' kin, chft' kS ft, my father-in-
law or my mother-in-law
chft kirq tft kftk sab' nftk, without turning
aside = go straight on
chftk kau' ghwft, what is it for ?
chftkkiim'a kft, I neglect it
chftk ka'mftk, neglect
chftk kii mfi mftn' rft tdk, it is not neglected
chft klft kii' tdk, would it were mine I
chftk' mft nft, down there
chftk mftn chftk' klfi kS (in composition), as,
I thought those down there were you
chftk mftn' II ^5k, he who is down there
chftk mftn' td ft, I am down there
chftk nft' thllmt n$, in our hard times
chftk nft yft Idn' rft tOk, it is not very heavy
chftk' nSk, very
chftk n5k kin' rft tOk, there is not much the
matter with him
chftk nfiq' td ft, I groan
chft k5' ft kft, I wrap it
chft ko' hftk, the small-sized native pouch
chftk' tft kft, I break it
chft ku chg' hwft, what kind is it ?
chft kft' chSk, what sort ?
chft kii' mft, chft kft' yftt, chft'kftn, when-
ever I
chft kft' tftk, a container, holder, etc.
chft kft' tft kft, my wrapper
chft kft tft' kft kft, it is for my container
chft kft a klft k6' tdk, if it were my thing
chftk yS dr yhn' k thlS, industrious
chftk' y ftn, chftk' yft tOm, native stone axe
chftl'ldftk, work
chftlld'ftkft, I work it
chftl IS ft' kft kft, it is my work
chftl IS ftk ne' thlftq tft kft, I do it badly,
carelessly
chftl IS ftk' stS, its maker, the maker of it
chftl IS ftk stS ^ft' ^hft, I am the maker of it
chftl IS ftk' st kft, my workman
chftl IS' gild ft, I act
chftl IS Iftq' td ft, I do habitually
chftl IS mft rft ft' mft, after my doing
chftl IS' nfik, the act of doing, working
chftl IS tft' ghft, I know how to work
chftl IS ft' ghft, I work
chftl IS vft thlSq' td ft, I overwork
chftl IS'vlk, workshop, place for working
VOCABULARY
329
chil IS vlzh zh(' Aq td &, I end up work
chll \h wi^ Ug' xaiky before my working, my
doing
chfll \h wi Ifiq'td I, I do for the first time
ch&l !§' yl rftk, way to do, mode or method
of doing
chiil \h yfl' rft k&, chU 1$ y&' rft ml, my way
of doing
ch&l 1§ y& rft'kl k&, chil IS y& rr k& mi, it is
my custom, my way of doing
ch&l IS 3rfl' ch& kl, my doing cleverly
chAl IS yiiq' td I, I want to do
chil ling n&k' kd fl, I endeavor to do, I try
to work
ch&I ling sA' t5 &, I do light work
ch&l Us' t&, worker
ch&l Ha' ti kl, my workman
chll Ha tl kfi' k&, it is my workman
chil Hat t ^Q' cli& k&, my state of being a
workman
chAl rSt' nftk, peace
ch<h'kA, ch<h'm&, ch&th'HmnS, that
which I was doing = my was work
ch<h' k& kfi, it is what I was doing
ch<h' kfik, an ugly thing
chAlth' kfi k&, my ugly thing
chAlth' thlfir hr& nfik, about another*s doings
ch<h' tblfir' mS niik, about his own doings
cli& m&n', chl mft" tilm, down
ch& mi' ni, down here
Chi mftn' U ^dk, the one who is down here
cli& m&n' to ft, I am down here
chft' mS, used to express when (localis case)
chft me' kfin, used to express through what
(vialis case)
chft mi', down there
chftm il IS' nS, one time, once
chftm' i nft, the one straight down there
chftm' i nftlth kfik, the one down there whom
I dislike
chft' muk chS' ift, what next, what else
chft mjing ^5 ft' rd 5k, like the one below
chftm' yok, you down there I
chft nft krS' IS tftk, the lacing around the
sides of a sled
chft nft' afin, native knife with curved blade
chft nft thlft gft' kft, I cut it (with a chanasun)
chft nft' thl5k, chft nft' thlrhfit, shavings,
chips, etc.
chft nft vft thlft' gft kft, I cut it too much
chft nS' rft kft, I clean it up, put in nice order
chftn gft chftq' tft kft, I displease him
chftn gft' 'Iftk, contagious disease
chftng girq tdq' td ft, I eat changgimit =
blackfish
chftng gir' rfft, blackfish (i.e., grassfish)
chftng gho' ft r5 ft u' nft, what is this like ? =
what is this a representation of ?
chftng' 'nftq kSk, it is displeasing
chftng Or' 'Ifik, sickness
chftn' gfit, dried grass (used in native foot-
gear)
chft nirq'nftk, expresses crossways
chftn' kft, chfttfi, chl, my things
chftn nft hwu' tftk, the yard of the native
skin sailboat
chftn nS' nS, near him
chftn nS' rft kft, I go close by him
chftnniftgniftdft, chftn nit h rS' td ft, I am
near them both
chftn nl ftt nif to ft, I am near them
chftn ni' kft, my nearness, vicinity
chftn ni mi chiiq' t5 ft, I want to be near
chftn ni mi tftq' t5 ft, I stay near
chftn nim' li gn6k, the near one
chftn nim' 'nS, near me = in my nearness
chftn nim' nfin, to near me, close to me
chftn nir' kftk, portion of native house
around the entrance hole
chftn no' rft 5k, it becomes thick
chftn nfik klS liq' td ft, I have many things
near me
chftn nfik aklu' tfi, I tell you to get some
dried grass
chftn nun' rft t5k, it is not thick
chftn' 5k, a thing ; chftn rSt' n5k, nothing
chftn rft rft nftq' td ft, I am getting better
chftn' rft t5k, expresses all right = it is
nothing
chftn rSlth'ke nft, chftn rSlth'kS chS, be
healthy 1 (salutation)
chftn Ilk kai' td ft, I am not yet well
chftn III' gh5k, a thing of no value
chftn riq' td ft, I am well, cured, all right
chft d kftl' gut, native boots which reach to
the hips
chft dk' kftm' nS, in my presence
chft' d klSk, chft' d kllm, the first, foremost
chft dk kr mit' td ft, I am before (i.e., in pres-
ence of)
chft d klS' G ghft, chft d klQ' gwd ft, I am first
chft dk' pftm' nS, long before me **
1
330
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
dUi' pik, chft' p£m, really something = an
actual thing
chA plng^ r& tSk, it is not an actual thing, it
is nothing
ch& pi Q' gw6k, it is really something
dUi pr chft 5q' td ftt expresses I am impeded,
something is hindering
ch& prir gndk, expresses omnipotent = he
to whom nothing is difficult
dUi prlt^ td i, I am all-powerful
di&'^rn&k, difficulty
chi^ ^r tk kSk, it is impossible
chijlrsAgoft chS'fignl, I am without
power
chX pQ' tit, the wings of a fish-trap
chiq kA Idn rA tA^ kA, I do not care, I have
nothing to do with it
diAq kd rAr rA St, one of the constellations
chAq^ pAk, a big thing
chAq' pA kA, my big thing
diAq thlfl t\' ^hdk, a sinless one
diAqthlQ'SnAnS kS ghaii' hlhrA, the Im-
maculate Conception
chAq thlfiq' tu 18t, sinners
chAq' y(r rAn' kA, I throw things around
diA rA' i ySk, he gnaws (i.e., of a dog)
diA' lA vA nSk, current
chA ri^ yAk, chA ii' ySm, devil
diA ri yA' tA Uk, place of devils = hell
ChA ra' mfi kA, my left arm
diA rfl m§ Ur' 'nim nS, on my left side
diA rfl' mem lir' nSr rA nS, down my left side
ChA' sAk, clock, watch (corrupt Russian)
chAs'kAk, native cup / ^ n )
diAs'ku, weapon
ChA tA mSn', everything
ChA tAng' kA tdk, there is something (used
in connection with a locative)
ChA tAng' kA tOk chlm' In A, as there is some-
thing down there
ChA tail' n§, I absent
chAt ch§ Q' ghAt n§, some time before
chAthlA'ndk, hole
ChA thlAq kll' hra St, which have holes, as
ChA thlAq Idl' hrA St It gAn' kA, my boots
have holes
ChA thlAq' t5k, it has a hole
chA'thlQk, mote, dirt, sin
chA thlfiq' to A, I contend with, fight (along
the Kuskokwim River this word im-
plies, " I fight with my wife **)
ChA tu ghS ghA' nlm nS, in my absence = I
being absent
chAt U ISt' nS, some time after
ChA ti tik ksl' t5 A, I am not here yet
chA ti' t5 A, I am absent
chAfkAkA, I mind it; chAt kin rA tA' kA,
I do not mind it
chAt ping' kat, the things above
ChAt 8td ka chlr' krSl lOk, let us (both) take
refuge
chAt' 8t5 kfin, refuge, place of safety
ChAt 8td kfif f fit, Our Refuge (used in prayer)
ChAt tA mAlth kwS' tA, all things
chAt tA' mAt, everything
ChA tfik gni' tA kA, I make no account of
chau ghd A kS u' gnA, I waste
chaii hwA' ghA, towards me
chau' lAq tA, what does it mean ?
chaii' 15 A, towards me
chaiilth' h5 A, what was it ?
chaiin, thing (a suffix)
Chan' 'n5k, direction, course, aim
chaun rA thlAq' td A, I am disappointed
chaim' 111 ghSk, a worthless thing (local
variation of chAnrIl^h5k)
chaiit ^Ong ghi' tdk, it is useless
chahf kA, possessive form of chaiu
chaix' wA kA, I face it
chaii' yAk, native style of drum
dULu' yA rAk, rib of a canoe or boat
chau yA' td A, I drum
chau yA' *vik, November
ChA vAq' tA, how beautiful I
chA yAq' tOk, it is deanly
chAy' hfin, oar
chA vlzh rA' G ^hA, I work, labor
chA'yo'A, I row
chA yd yAng' nA, he divorces me
ChA y&' chu tAk, native oarlocks
ChA' yfik, native harpoon (large size)
ChA yfi' t3t, oars
ChA' wlk, term for iron in general ; also knife
ChA wil IS' drq tA, an iron worker, blacksmith
chA wil IS' 5r' ylk, blacksmith's shop
chA wiq' pAk, large knife, sword, etc.
ChA yA' gAk, a little thing
ChA yA' gA kA, the possessive form of chAyi-
gAk
ChA yfl' gA kA, I draw it out
ChA' zhi gftt, partitions, fence
chS' gdk, the dried-up skin over frost bites
VOCABULARY
331
chS U', and
ch8' U chS'' U thlfl, again and again
ChS la' cho &, and still = a little more
ch8 Ifik^vih, a little more, eh? still more?
ch6 liq'' la ng, slanting
chSUq'akft, I slant it
chSn, why
chS ne lit chd' i thlQq, a little old arrow
chS ne Ifiq tiz^ U, I extract the arrow (i.e.,
from the wound)
chSn'hw&, why, now !
chS' nik, tip, point of any weapon
ChS nil' gX, head of harpoon
chS re' nflk, overeating, gluttony
ChS rS' ni mfin, expresses to a place where
food is plentiful
chS rS n&q kil r& i' mfin, to a place which
abounds in food
chSrSfi'ghfl, I am abundantly supplied
with food
chS rfin' Ilk, a stag
chS ru' nSk, antler
chS' 8lk, snake
chS' sir p&k, great snake, sea serpent
chS a, front ; also bow of a boat
chS a chSk" ko i, I have earache
chS u' Idr' mX, I headlong, head foremost
chS Q kllm' tA, our ancestors
chS u ku' cho X, an ugly, badly formed bow
(of canoe)
chS &' Un tip rSk, the forestay on a native
sailboat
chS fi Hs' tA, foremost (term given to the
leading dog in a team)
chS Q Us' tl k2, my leading dog
chS u' mi nS, before me (in time)
chS am'ni tSk, it is before, prior to
chS urn tfing nik ghi' t5 &, I do not try any
more to go ahead
Che fim tOng nft kflf kS nS, I without trying
more to go ahead
che a nS Orq' td X, I receive
chS u'nfiq kft kft, my future
chS Q thlu g&' k&, I do before he does
chS u' tl kfl, my ear
chS vail mAl r& i' muk, buzzing sound
ChS' w&k, blowfly
ChS' zlk, snake (local ; same as chSalk)
chSz sS' rS Xk, representation of a snake
(local)
chi, tea (Russian)
cUf tA kX, I reset it (speaking of traps)
chig vSq' k2, my pair of nose beads
chig vSt', beads worn in the nose by women
chig vlng' k2 to i, I have nose beads (native
ornament)
chl ^Ith kail' tAk, native boots (the low
variety)
chlkkA'dSdS, little bird (child's word)
chikkA pS plr^, little bird (local variation)
chik kAv' ve Ak, owl
chik ke' k& gho A, I just now give him
chIk kS' rA kA, I give it to him
chik kS rau' tl kA, a little gift of mine
chik kS rS yA' kA kA, I offer to give it to him
chik kSrq'ste, donor of a trifle
chik ke' a ti kA, a little gift to me
chik mA' nuiuk, he is blind (le., closed)
chik me' rA kA, I close my eye
chik miq' td A, I have my eyes closed
chik nA kA' ghA, he envies me
chik' nA nAk, envy
chiknAa'nfik, ill will
chlknA'tA tOk, he is envious
chik tAq' to A, I bow down (habitual)
chik' t5 A, I bow down
chi'ku, chl'kut, ice; the plural expresses
large masses broken up, but not* in
motion
chi kO e' rA kA, I clear away ice
chi kfl IA'5 ghfln, bone or iron pointed staff
used in travelling over ice
chi ku' lirq tSk, there is much ice, drift ice
chi kfil rS' go A, I slide on the ice (used by
children at play)
chi kum yAq' t3 A, I wink my eye
chi kum' tA kA, I break it
chi kwelth' kSk, air hole or open place in
the ice
chill5r"yAk, a flat stone
chilth' kAk, chilth' kAm, nothing, no account,
vain
chilth kAm' t5 A, I am useless, in vain, naught
chi mA' kA, my exchange
chi' mik, liver
chlm mS' rA kA, I change it
chi'nSk, teakettle (Russian)
chlng ^q' kA, I kiss him
ching ^haii mA' thl5 A, I being embraced
ching gnaiiq' kA, I combine it
ching' ^Sk, a sharp bend in a stream
ching ghSk^, latchets on native boots
332
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
ching ^Sr' t5 X, I have a latchet off my boot
chlng kft rft' kfl, I shove it down
chlng'kdk, it crackles, makes a cracking
sound
ching^ krii p&k, short, sharp sound, as a
stone hitting another
chlng kiu thU'' gaiik, it is cracking (i.e., a
beam, etc)
chlng killth'' Uk tAt, a variety of berries
chlng ku' thllq tdk, it snaps (Le., as a gun
cap)
chlng^ ni k2, I tuck it in
chin' kflk, land otter
chin 9k* glit, the spirits of lost things
chin thia h5q' t5 i, I grieve
chl nQg' *1Q nS, bruised
chlnQk", bruise
chin'' y&k, sled sheet
chip' plfl kfl, plus (used in enumeration)
chip' t& kX, I add it
chip' tdk, it exceeds
chlr' lali' gw5 &, I am weak
chls' ko k&, my knee
chls kO mig' gaiik, he is on his knees
chls ku mlq' to A, I kneel
chl'v§t, blowflies
chl vo' Aq kA, my two upper front teeth
chlv vo' A ne, before
chl yAk kllr' *lu nS, finally
chl yA' kllk, a thing long being done
chl yAk' kia g&t chAn' kA, I do whatever is
to be done
chl yA rail' gwA, what does it mean ?
chl'ygt, what is the matter with you ?
chl'ydk, tea
chiydq'tut, they represent by gesture
(pantomime) = native dance
chi yu' wA kA, I pull it up
chl yu wAq' tA kA, I jerk it up
cho'A, small (in composition)
chdlt" t5 A = chdk' tA kA, I measure
chd rA' ^hA Uk, a gray dog
ch5 r5' kA tut, special variety of native feast
chSr' thlut, a variety of berry
chd ru' kAt, invited guests (to a feast)
chd rAn' kA, my bedding
chrGm' rSk, the small snipe
chu chu' kA kA, I like it, am fond of, love
chQ chfi yA' kA kA, I envy him
chu §g' nl II ghOk, land otter
chu ghAq' stOk, green
chfl ^8r kn' ri A, one with the dysentery
chfl' hwlk, beak of a bird
chflk, genitalia (feminine)
chfl kAf kfi nAk, do not hasten
chQ' kA ISt, sea biscuit, crackers (Russian)
chfl kAl'ld A, I hastening
chfl kAn rAq' td A, I am quick, speedy
chfl kAn rd A lAq' td A, I am generally quicker
chfl kAn rd fl' ^hA, I go faster
chfl kir" tdk, it bends
chfl kail' ghA, I speed
chfl kA yirk' nAk, do not go too fast
chfl kA yflq' td A, I w^ant to go fast
chflk chaii' td A, I rush
chflk chl nAq stA' kA, I make it splash
chfl'kdk, native socks
chfl kdq' tA kA, I direct it, guide it
chfl m' ^dk, one who is slow
chfl mth chAq' td A, I go carefully, slowly
chflmthchA'rAlQtfi pekd'nA, be careful
and go slowly
chfl kilth hd u' ghA, I go slower
chfl' kdq k§, one afflicted with ulcers
chfl kflt kd dq' td A, I make kindling, to start
a fire
chflk' yfln, model, pattern
chfl Idq' td A, I come broadside on (native
mode of landing)
chfl lA gw§ yfl' fnA, I snuffle
chfl Iflq chd u' ghA, I snivel, run at the nose
chfll'yAt, ancestors
chfl mlq' td A, I am intent
chfl nA'pdt, labrcts (style worn by men)
chfl nau' hwA, how is this, now ! (exclama-
tion in scolding)
chfing ek sflq' td A, I whimper
chflng gd' td A, I sob
chflng ^hd' kd A, 1 have diarrhoea
chflng' ghdk, forehead
chflng ^fl d le tA' ghwfl, muzzle him (i.e., a
dog)
chflng ghfl d' Id tAk, dog muzzle (native)
chfl' pA (the plural, chfl' pflt, is most used)
drifting ice, ice in motion
chu pAq' td A, I am homesick
chflp'plfi, tube
chflq hfl chd' rA kA, I muzzle him
chflq'hfln, muzzle
chfl'rAt, blueberries
chu tA rA rail' ghA, my ears are cold
chu' yA, leaf (term for tobacco)
VOCABl/LARy
333
S Chi'' hwftk, formerly
5 ch6 vik k5' i Un, every now and then
6 chS'' y&k kfi, presently (future)
h ch§'' wiq pik, during a little while
Mkflii'kfl, I let it drop
S gXq' chfin, pen, pencil, etc.
5 gXq' t5 X, I write, etc.
6' gauk, shade to protect the eyes
S gau wS' t5 fl, I have no goggles
6' gg Uk, throat
h' gwo X, I swallow
S k2^ dirt, ordure
i' Idl, my eye
S kXm' rft ch5 &, little sled
h k&m^ rXk pSk, a big, clumsy sled
h kftm r&l W ^hfl, make me a sled
S kXm ril le^ Q ^hft, I make a sled
S kftm rftl llf k&' to X, I am having a sled made
g kftm r&ng' kft td i, I have a sled
g k&m' r&q kfl, g k&m' rftg* ml, my sled
g kftm rXq kg tA^ k&, I give him a sled
g kim rXq pg ^' ^I, g k&m r& fi'' ^hft, I make
a sled
g k&m rX y&'' chi kfl, I being a good sled
maker
g k&m ti' rX kft, I take his sled
g k&m rist ^&^ chi kft, my being a sled
maker
e k2m iV to &, I have no sled
g kfl' nH, on that side
g kftn' t5 X, I am on that side
Bk fXq' to i, I gather berries
g Idiq' tA k&, I open it
g Id ygrq stg kA'' kfl, my helper
g Id ygrq sti' to X, I have no hel]>er
V
g Id ygrq at ^SV gndk, he who has no one to
help him
g Id ygrq at Id' t5 i, I have not one to
help me
g Id ygrq stfing' kA t5 X, I have a helper
g Id ydrq stQng yflq' td X, I want some one
to help me
g Id yfing chlq' to X, I call for aid
g Id yu rhl kaii'' wi kA, I have to help him
gidya'tdi, laid
gk k chaun^ term for all remedies for sore
eyes
ek k chg u' ghfl, I have good eyesight
Sk' k5 tdk, it is narrow, small
gk mg A' kX k2, I hold it in my mouth
gk' mik, a chew (said of tobacco)
gk mlq' t5 A, I chew
g lAq' kA kfl, I tangle it
g l&q ki'ri kfl, I untangle it
g Uq' k6k, tangled
81 ggq' to «, I retire to rest, sleep
glth' thUl, exclamation of surprise
glth thUl jriiq' td &, I am astonished
glth thlA yd 8tA' kft, I amaze him
g' mA Am mi X, eyelid
g mA' A tdk, it is empty
g'mAk, pus
g mA' kA, my fulness
g mAng' kA tdk, it contains
g mA' ndk, blackfish
g mAq pg' chd A, gulf = little sea
g mAq' pgk, sea
gmAq'pgm kA'pdA, sea foam (term for
pumice stone)
e mAq pg' pg Ak, g mAq pe Ifi' pg Ak, ocean
g mAq' pg pik, the high sea
g mAq pig' mg' Q tAk, sea dweller, any marine
animal
g mAq pig' mg ii tau' gwdk, it lives in the sea
g mAq pig' mg u tail lAl' rA gt, the whole
group of marine animals
g mAq pU Ig 5rq' td A, I labor on the sea (i.e.,
fish, hunt seals, etc.)
g mAq pin rAq tdq' td A, I eat grayling
g mAq tii mAl' rA A, he who is full
gmA'rAkA, I fill it
g mAr''ngt tSik, native waterproof shirt
g mAr' 'yAq tdk, it is flooded
g mg' 6 td A, I aim (any weapon)
g mg vA thlA' gA kA, I overfill it
g mil' ghdk, which is not full
g mQ' gwd A, I am that one
g mu' kfin nflr' nflk, since that time
g' mfim chg Q' ghA ng, before then
g mQ' mg, at that time
g mfiq td rA' rA kA, I roll it up, obliterate it
g mflr' mji' tAk, mink
g mfir' md tab ti lu' chA kA, my state of being
in want of mink skins
g mfir' mu tali t&ng krii' chA kA, having mink
skins in my possession
g nAq' td A, I lie down
enA'rhiin, rib
334
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
fo' rfl, a talisman, charm (i.e., help)
ftn rfing^ kA to X, I have a charm
Sn' td &, I am outside
h nfing kail' ghA, I am lying down
h nfiq ch6' g&l gh&t, the damned, the lost
souls
h nfiq ch§' gX t5 i, I am wicked
6 nfiq chftr ri yir ri §t, the blessed
h' nfiq kXk, frame
h nfiq k5q' t5 i, I scold
h nfiq kro' X kft, I warn him
h nfiq krut^ kft, my warning
S nfiq kfi Ul'' ri kft, I often warn him
h* nfiq kfin, warning
h nfiq ku' t gn5k, it is forbidden
S nfiq kfl t kft'' kft, it is forbidden to me
5 nfiq kfi yi' kft kt, I warn him
ip'pSXt, members = twenties used in
counting
6p'p€t, legs
^ kX, kQ[ Idn, Sk, my ejres
6q' t5 i, I am snow blind
6 rft Uq' tdk, it is moonlight
S rft' 15k, moon
V ri Ifim k$ mfiq' ti, name for star close to
moon
8 ri' Ifim yfi^ i, moon spirit
8 ri Ifi ni' kin, every month
9 ri'lfi thl5q, January
Sr" Chi k5k, heart
9r kfing^ ki tdk, it means
h ti' 15k, porcupine
h' shfin, medicine for the eyes
^•'k$, goggles (Russian)
i'tit, an edible plant
h tahq' gwi fik, an unintelligible word used
at the end of stories
rthU, oh!
r thU hik r mi, that is strange
h thlfig' ni' ri 16, who inflicts sore eyes =
sorcery
St^hVk, the up curve (in sled runners and
at the toe of boots)
If't5k, is, it is deep
5 tfl ch5 6' ghi, I form a catamaran, lash
two canoes together
6'tfik, serum
%* tfl vi, very deep
(Tflkchi'tdi, I wade
eyfirqtf'giii, I am stiff
e yflrq' td i, I stiffen
V ihSt, yolk of egg
g5'tlil5k, summer village
ghin, ghi'' tttm, native bucket
gle giq' ki, I scrape or scarf a skin
gig' ghaiin, native tool for. scarfing skins
^dH. g§' lik, neck loop of dog harness
ghll'li, end, mark, tip
^11 li raut ki^ ki, I mock him
^b!B! 16, a beaver's house or nest
^hll' Ifik, the two extremities
^ lulth' thlfl Ir, ghn IQlth' thlfir lit, swal-
low (Hiruudo erythrogastra)
^Ith ki Un'ri t5k, it does not fit
^hnth ki' thlQ kfi, reaching to the end or mark
gfim' ti ki, I rip it
hik, a little of (suffix)
ho' ri ti, suppose (in composition)
hfim, an expletive suffix like " eh I *'
hwi, truly, indeed
hwi' kik kwl, hwin fih', indeed
hwi' kfin, from here
hwilth, hwi' thl5k, abbreviated form of <' or"
hwi'ne, here
hwi ne' hwi, here !
hwi ne' hwi tail' gwim, only this
hwi' ng ko' 5rq kfi, by and by
hwi nBr' pik, meanwhile
hwing, I
hwing ghu Chi' ki, my existence, mjrself
hwing gnu' ghi, it is I, I am
hwing ghu yuk' klfi ku, you thought it was
I (in composition)
hwi nir' 'nfik, from now on
hwin' kflk, we both
hwan' kfi ti, we
hwi' thlo ki, hwi' thlQ, or
hwi'thlfithlQ, orelse
VOCABULARY
335
hw&f U pik, truly
hwatiek^kft, thanks
hwit IS kg' kft pg' tie, thanks very much
hwi'tfi, thus, this way, so
hw&' to X, now
hw&''t5 & ml thlfi, so here now
hwS, I
hw§n ail' 'Idk, poor me !
hwSn tAq' to i, I continue here
hwSn tA rS yiin xii' t5 &, I do not want to be
here
hwSn' to &, I am here
hwr t5k U: nCUn, I indeed
1 §m chfl piq' tA k&, I nearly broke it
i gm k§ fi' ghA, I am breaking it
1 Sm stchg gi tA' kA, I have difficulty in
breaking it
i h mfi' malik, it is broken
V e pA, the second, the other, the mate
i g pA' kA, r e pAn, V h pA, my mate
i g pA kA' kA, I join him, I am his comrade
i g paV nA nB, I without a comrade, alone,
unmarried
i g pi rG' tg, his deceased wife
TgAtttt, hand
Ig vAq' td A, I round a bend or point (in a
boat)
Ig'yArA' Ilk, clam
ihaVtfit, ice scratcher (an instrument to
attract seals)
i Im' a kA, I break it
V kAk, dirt
I kA' ng, I kA' vlit, etc., over there
I kau' gnA, I am filthy
Ik^ chaun, medicine for the eyes
IkkA'thluk, dogfish (a variety of salmon
dried for dog food)
Ik kg kg' kA, exclamation of surprise and
pleasure
Ik kg yau gii tA' kA, I am not suited with it
Ik' Idlth kSk, the little finger
Ik Ulth ko' kA, IkkUth'kftn, Ik Idlth' k5 A,
my little finger
Ik Idlth kfln' kA n5 A gAq' tf kA, I wet with
saliva my little fingers (sorcery)
Ik Idlth rhd u' i(^A, I have less than you
IkUq'tdA, I stoop
Ik Id ting rgr gh&t, numerous
Ik" Id tdk, it is little, not enough
Ik kid' rA kA, I cheat him
Ik kl5r' t5 A, I tell a lie
Ik klfi' (^ I deceive
Ik klfl klg ng Aq' pfi ghA, I find out that you
cheat me
Ik klu riif kA kA, I lie about him
Ik'kgAqhan, native tool, like an awl but
wider
US' kSk, end, point
Ik kd' tA kA, I unship it (the mast, in native
sailboat)
Ik kftg Uq' kA td A, I have too little
Ik kfl' g5k, it is dirt = it is an abomination
Ik ka'kA, Ik'kfln, Ik'kS A, my end
Ik ka'kftn, chisel
Ik ka kfiq' t5 A, I chisel
Ik kil' rA kA, I raise it with a lever, I pry
Ik kfl yAg' 'niik, a measure (eighteen inches)
Ik kdzh' kA, my elbow
Ik W Ilk, elbow
Ik kftz ziing kauq' to A, I lean on my elbow
\kf nA, that one coming = directly in front
of me
n' kg At, sea grass loaded with herring roe
(used for food)
IV lA, neighbor
II lA chfi'kA kA, I dislike him, do not chum
with him
UlA'kA, UlAq'kA, UlAn'kA, my own, com-
rade, friend
II lA' kAt, one of them, belonging to that set
or group
II lA kU' r& gt, the whole gens, neighbor-
hood
n lAklg fi'tA kA, I join in with him, I unite
with him
n lA' k6 Ak, scrap, fragment
IllA'kfimA, has the sense of if I add
this, etc.
UUUd'rAkA, I am friendly with him,
intimate
IllAlIq'tdA, I go in company, plenty of
companions
U lAlk' kA kA = kg fl giiA, I persecute him
II lAlk' ktts t kA, my persecutor
U lA nAq chg G' gliA, I take some
\
336
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
U Ulng Chi fi raut' nfik, joke
II ling chi & rau' t5 &. I joke
II Ung chlf kA ni' nH, expresses anyhow
U Ung ching il! t& k&, I disregard it (i.e., I
make it not of mine)
n Ung kftn r& tii' th kft, have you any one
with you?
U Un'' k&, my folks, family
II Un^ nd k&, my kindred
U Uq stA' cho fi, basket woven of grass
(small variety)
U Uq' stAkf same but large size
UirrflUl, I patch it
nUr^'ldUl, nUr^'lfin, nUr^'ldt. my
neighbor
II U to' maiik, it is patched
U U tOg' 'yi rik, cannibalism
II U t5q' to fi» I am a cannibal = I eat my
own
U lab' ch5k, companionship, union
U laii' tAk, native pickaxe ; also one of the
constellations
niau'ak&, I bury it
n U' zhik, the cross fox
II W kfin, expresses sometimes
n 16' ng, expresses some other time
U llq' tut, expresses some persons are missing
U li' to &, I have no companion
II 11 yfi e' ru tut, no more of them were ever
missing
U 1! yiiq' t5 fi, I want a companion
U 15' X ng, inside of it
II Id' Idl, my entrails
U Idn' t5k, it i^^side of it
U Id rS chu' ^Ak, friend, lover
U 15 rfi chu' ghS ki, my friend, dear
n 15 rS chu gxU' ki kfl, I have him for a
friend
U la e chu'gn&, I am sick (St. Michael's)
II 16 kil Chi u' gbfi, I am satisfied
II lu Kk' k5 S, I have colic, pain in bowels
U lu' l(r rSk, skin bag for holding tools
II IG' ml n5, I within
II lu mTt' t5 &, I am within
U mng' kfl t5k, it is hollow
II lu' piiq k&k, lining
U IQ pQq k&' k&, I line it
U Ifi' rX chu nail' 'lu, my dear friend
II lu' rX chfing, friend
Iimthllk'k5&, I am sorry
II IQ thll kfl t kfi' kfl, I grieve over it
II Ifl tfl ku' clU kft, my sadness
n IQ w& thlln 5 u' giU, I approach them
II raiiq' t5 i, I walk among
II rau ri &q' tA mfik, sound of walking
Il'rfin, birch bark canoe
I Ifi' mfln hwfi, yes, truly
Im, abbreviation for Im' I ni
Im' ghfl k2, I roll it up
Im' I lU, that one
Im I nfllth' kfik, the one I do not like
Im'laut, fish roe
Im' nU, white of egg
Im' r5 tAk, netting shuttle
I mflq t5 rX' rXn kft, I cover up my tracks.
efface my trail
log ^filth' hr&m, an abusive term
Ing k5' gft kA, I cut it into strips
Ing'Uk, the bed platform in native houses
Ing' 15 1, Ing' lak, Ing' la it, its other
Ing 15 Xq' t5 X, I am over half-way
Ing' IQ, half
Ing IQ sr II gn5k, a monster (i.e., half man,
in native stories)
Ing' Ifl kA, Ing' Ifin, Ing' 15 i, my half body,
my side
Ing Ifi p5' & Ilk, a one-eyed person
Ing lu pe in' ki t5k, he has one eye
Ing'ni, Im'kuk, Im'kut, the one there
Ing ni rail' ghi, I moan
Ing'xik, mountain
Ing rik ting' ki t5k, there is a mountain, it
is a mountain
Ing'tdk, it moults
In' ki ki, I pet him
ln'k§t, the gums
In Idk, In' Idt, nits
In nfl' gw5 i ch5 i, a small doll
In nu' gw5 ik, doll
In'y5k, you over there !
I'pgrln, u.'ied to express Tuesday
Ip p5 i' t5k, it is dull, not sharp
Ip' pSt, feet
Ip pu ki chS' tik, a seesaw
Ip'pun, native spoon or ladle
Ippflq'tdi, I ladle out
Ip pu' tik, native ladle, large size
Ip pu' tlq ch5 i, little ladle
I pfiq' t5k, it is sharp
Iq' chi 5k, it burrows
Iq chi 5rq' t5 i, I work at a bear's den (i.e.,
to capture the animal)
VOCABULARY
337
Iq cUq pS iq' t5 i, I nearly fall
Iq fik kft tft rail' ^hfl, it is about to fall on
me
Iqgi'yfllS, owl
Iq' kft, my eye
Iq Idl ttJk pXq' k&, I cover my eyes
Iq ko fl'' ^h&, I fall (where I happen to be)
Iq pau' gwo &, I am big eyed
Iq pfi y& gXng' k& t5k, it has enormous eyes
(monster in native stories)
Iq pfi yi gaii'' gw5 &, I am a big-eyed dwarf
Iq 8t&' U, 1 let it fall
Iq'tfl, his den
V
Iq t ch§ fi' ghi, I discover a den (generally
meaning a bear's den)
Iq t Idl' tfl t5k, it is about to fall
Iq' to &, I fall (but from a height)
ir' hflk, game played with a string
ir hiq' to &, !r hrSr' to X, I play cat's cradle
Ir' hrfin nfik, finger play = cat's cradle
Irk' klG, evil
Irk klflf kS nfl nS, I, faultless
IrkkirtQn U thUTi ti U' kX, I speak evil
of him
Irk klu tfi yulth' k&, my propensity to evil
Ir kfik kl6t kX tflq' td X, I am about to expire
Irq' chi kd kX» my heart
\i rSr n& X' gho X, I have a child
\\ rSr nS fig' 'lu kX, my dear child
If rSr D§ fi' kft, my child
If rfir D§ & k&' gn&, he is my father
If rSr ne X kfi' t&q k&n, she, when about to
bring forth a child
If rSr ne X rfi' t5 i, I have no child = I lack
a child
If rSr ne yQ $1' ghdk, childless person
If rSr ne' yO n§, I childless
Ir rug' 'mX k& gnS' kilk, my hip, head of my
leg
Irru Irq'tdk, he has a broken leg
Ir ru' ka, Ir' run, Ir' rho fl, my leg
Ir ruq' kX, my legs
Ir shnin' hrfit, mountain spirits
Ir'toa, Ihide
is'hr&n, fish baskets woven from dried
grass
is' 8& rft, a mother's word to soothe her
baby
Is sd' xlk, the spotted seal
Is'zrXS, bridge of native style of violin
i tX'toft, I yawn
V gi ml &!§, my footprint
tgXt' finit, footprints
t'krii to i, I rush in, burst in hurriedly
tl' k&, Itl' hrftn, Itl' hrX, my going in place,
my entrance, where I enter
trail' tfi kX, I bring it in with me
V
1 1 gi ml yti' ri, toes = fingers of the feet
t' t gin ki, my feet
1 1 gfit' stu' It, toe-nails
V
1 1 gl rXh' rail' gnA, I am cold footed = my
feet are cold
V
1 1 gi' tdk, he is footless, he has no feet
ttlgmSg&'kS, I kick it
t' tr5k, a deerskin (taken in the autumn)
t tu ch5 u' ghA, I put them alongside
t tu' ghX, I am alongside
t tu' kQk, alongside
t'tu kOt, side by side
tiim ch$ Qk chft g&' kfi, I mince it
tfim'tX kX, I cut it up
' vl ghfin, native wooden wedge
v'gXk, a bend in a river
v' gX t5 I, I am in sight of
y rhu' chek, water boots, native waterproof
boots
y rhfi ch6 W kg X, make me some water
boots
y zarh' tdk, it rains (Tununa)
v'zhQk, rain
yi gl ru' tfi kX, I run off with it
yXg' gfin ret, sources
yXg' nar' td X, I begin
yXg' nS' rX kX, I begin it
yXg' nllth hrX, its beginning
yXg' ndk' klQ kti tab' nX, on account of this
yX kfl tX' rXk, profile, side of face
yX Id' X go X, I stagger
yX 15q t)i rX tX' t5k, it leans almost to falling
yX Id jrilth' kO tuk, stays of mast (i.e., pre-
venters of leaning)
yX nX u' ghX, I endure
yX nelth' hXn, the younger one
yX nin' rX, the older one
yX' ndk, the going
yX r5 kX' kX tail' nX, I am suited with that
yX re kXn' kX u' nX, does this suit you }
yX rd kin ra' tXn kX G' nX, does this not
suit you ?
yX'rdk, staff, cane, walking stick
yX rdrXq'tdX, I use, or walk, with a cane
(i.e., I cane)
338
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
i y& ru' ^f I grasp
i yis' ku mAm Idn^ I want you to go
! yi'thUlk, a woman's cutting board
1 y& thlfiq' Idl kA, my (future) going
i yl! to IS, a goer
i yau^ chSk, a start
1 yauq' t5 i, I pole along (a boat, etc.)
iyaii'so &k, a child's sled (for play)
i yaa thlln n§ X' kfl, I am bringing it
i jri' yu 1S» a nice goer = good traveller
i yd' k& gnA I am the same
i yd kfl' pik tdk, it is exactly the same
i yd kail" nA nS, strange
i yo Idlth che' g&k, model
i yd Idlth che' gfi kA, I imitate it
i yd kin^ ri tdk, it is unlike
i ydk me u' ghfl hwX^ tii, I am like that
am that way
= I
1 yd kd chd' kA chi dk, he is intelligent
i yd kd chd' tdk, he is a fool, he lacks sense
i yd kd chlg' ni kfl, I comprehend it
i yd kd ching k tin rd' to i hwi' tfi, I would
not act in this way
i yd kd chin' ghd &, I understand
i yd'kdk, it is like, it is the same
i ydka che' r& kl, I duplicate it
i ydk shu kA' kA, I suppose it
i ydka ku mAn ri M! kft hwl' tli, I do not
want it like this = this way
i yd ku Chi' ki, my state, condition
i yd' ku chSk, state, condition
i yd ku chd rut' ghdk, it represents
i yd' kQt ndk, shape, model, pattern
i yu' md in, then
Ty^t, Labrador or Hudson Bay tea
ki, what (interrogative)
ki ig' ni i' pi, would it were summer !
ki ig* nilth' kin, if it is foggy
ki ig' ni' tdk, it is foggy, there is a fog
ki ik', summer
ki i ki ri mit' td i I am a little above (i.e.,
up stream)
kii ki ri'ne, a little above (stream under-
stood)
ki i ki rin' td i, I am higher up (stream
understood)
ki ik ko'i kin, every summer
ki'in, implies up and back = up stream
ki iq chi' kd i, I am looking around (i.e.,
watching out for)
ki iq' td i, I look around
ki iq' tdk, it is summer
ki arq' stdk, it is warm
ki chiq' ti ki, I slap him
ki chd giq thllm' ne, while losing my time
ki che giq' to i, I waste time
ki chlg» ni' kdk, it is easy
kichlq'thldi, I rest
ki chlq' thlu n§, doing nothing, idle
ki chu tiq' pfi gni, you refuse me
ki chu thli niq' pQ giii, you always refuse
me
ki chQ vi thli gi liq' td kut, we are fre-
quently disappointed
ki ch& vi thlirq'td i, I am disappointed
kif chd chdt, kif chu' chdt, how many have
you "i
kif chd' chd ik, marten or sable
kif chd' ghd it, how many pairs t
kirchertdk,-it haUs
kif che' Q ch sti, how many are we t
kif che u tl hu' chd, how many were you ?
kif'chik, wolverine
kif chin, how many.^
kif chlq' kd nGk, how many times.'
kif chlf hrit, expresses a few
kif chlrq haiiq'tut, they are few
kif chu'hwit, how many are they?
kifak, hail
kif tik^ kd it, snowflakes
kif tdt, hailstones
ki gin', ki gi' tOm, source
kig ge' tit, broom
kig gd u' ghi, I sweep
kigh, no
ki ghi' nfik, squirrel
kigh' ni ti' hu, no, indeed
ki' ghik, corner, cove in a river, recess in
side of hill, etc.
kigh I rim' td i, I am in a corner
kighlr'*imfin thld'u, put it in the
corner
ki ghi ring' ki tdk, it is square
ki ghlf *ndm II Id' i nd, in a corner
-ki hif 'mi, I being alone
VOCABULARY
339
k&^ hXr' mlt to &, I am alone (i.e., entirely
remote from any one)
k2k, suffix (203)
k2 kS U chfl gfiq' tflt If gAn kft, I have chil-
blains, my feet
k2 k§ li chfl' tdk, my foot is asleep
ki kg^tfl kft, 1 am done with it
kAkgySchdithlQqr&n'kl, my little old
needle-case
k& ke yen' kA, my needle-case
kAk fi ri' kl, I win it (i.e., a game)
V
kA Idf chaa tr yiiq' to A, I want some liniment
kA kif kA chauf muk, term for liniment,
m
rheumatism healer
kAUf kAk, muscular pain, rheumatism
kA kif kA thlfik, one with rheumatism
kA Idf kA'' to A, I am rheumatic
kAk kA Aq' tA kA, I stick the point in
kAlf kA kA, crown of my head
kAlf kdk, native term for bread
kAk kr thli le' yA rAk, the valley on upper lip
just beneath the nose
kAIf k td A, I run at the nose = also nose-
bleed
kAk'mA na, out, in the open air
kAk mAn' to A, I am out
kAk' mi, out there
kA kOq' nAk, a snow flurry
kA kdq nA' tdk, expresses a heavy snowfall
of short duration
kA'krlOk, throat
kAk' thluk, mucus of the nose
kA'ku, when (only for future)
kA' ku mi nA, the outside, a term for
weather
kA kflm' y5k, you outside there !
kAl chAg' 'nAk, hill (Yukon Delta)
kAle'kAk, term to express paper, book, etc.
kAl 15 ra u' ghA, kAl lOf to A, I dip up
kAl lu' ge yAk, harpoon used for white
whale (beluga)
kAr lu tAk, shinny stick
kAl lu' ve Ak, native bowl of wood (the deep'
variety)
kAl mA' nAk, pocket (Russian)
kAlmArA'kA, I call him (refers to dogs
only)
kAl'ndk, native bags of woven grass for
holding fish
kAl rA A' gdk, it warbles (of birds)
kAl ring tAq' to A, I blubber, cry noisily
kAlth'kA, raven (Kuskokwim)
kAlth' kA' mS fit, raven village (a settlement
on the Kuskokwim River)
kAlth'kAp5k,axe
kAlth'tAk, native bucket
kAlth thlaii' to A, I drum
kAlu'kAk, halo around the sun or moon
kAl vAg' yA rAk, the outer approach or
entrance to a native house
kAl vAq' tA kA, I lower it down
kAl vAq' t5 A, expresses I enter a house
kA mA' mOk, a native dish composed of fish
roe, oil, etc.
kA mA' nA, within
kA mAn' kA, my sled (St. Michael)
kA mAn' II ghdk, the one who is within there
kAmAn'tdA, I am within there
kA'malit, sled (St. Michael)
kA me' kOk head
kAm gwe' to A, I am without boots, bare-
foot
kAm'I nA, he within there
kAm m§' gAk, seal hunter = one who goes
out on the ice for seals
kAm me gAm' kin, I make a sled for you,
I sled you (St. Michael)
kAm me gau' tit, small sled to fit on kiyak,
used by seal hunters
kAm m§ lAn kau' ^hA, I am barefooted
kAm'mOk, extinguished, used as follows:
yu' chA A kAm' mdk, he is dead = his
manhood is extinct
kAm muk ksAng' kA to A, I have boots
kAm muk' sAk, a boot made of sealskin
kAm miik sAlth' hAq kA, my pair of old boots
kAm mQk sAlth' thlfiq kA, my old boot
kAm muk seq' kA, my boots
kA mo' rhA kA, I drag it
kA mfiq' to A, I drag
kA mu rAl' ra A, one who drags
kAm' yok, you in there !
kA' nA, kA' tfim, the one down there
kA nA' gAk; the entire leg
kA nA gAq p€ u' ^hA, I am long legged
kA nA gAq' tQ 1§, term for a deer (i.e., long
legs)
kAnAIfklAq, muskrat
kA nAlf nAk, west
kA nAn' II gh5k, he who is off down there
kA nA' 5 ghfin, small coarse sieve with long
handle used at fish traps
340
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
kl niq'td I, I emerge from (Le., the woods,
etc.)
kl nA' riik pS vX kJLn, because of a big snow-
drift
kX nA' rflk ting kfl tdk, there is a great drift
kl ni' rflt, a snowdrift
kX n6 cha kA' t5k, it snows a little
kA lak' kfin, spell, incantation
kAng gnA' rA kA, I refuse him, I say no to
him (i.e., I no him)
kAng^ ^iiA this, I thought I was, etc. (in
composition)
kAng' ghe, its head (i.e., source of a river)
kAng gh8' Uk, having sources
kAng' kA, my mouth
kAng' ktik, willow catkins
kAng kO' rhA, he bites
kAng' tOk, it is broad
kAng vAg' 'nfik, how long since ? since when t
kA ni chd' A tdk, it snows lightly
kA nl chG kA kA tA' t5k, it is going to snow
a little
kA nik chA' An, on account of the snow
kAnIkchAch5ArAng'kAt5k, it has a little
snow on it
kA nils' chAk, snow
kA nIk chAq pAng' kA t5k, it has much snow
on it
kA nIk che vA thlA gA' kA, I put too much
snow (i.e., in the dog food, etc.)
kA' nil rA A mfik, talking, the sound of
talking
kA nim che u' ghA, I relate about
kA nim chiz' ghA, tell me the news, what is
going on
kA niq chi Or' to A, I work the snow, clear
away a place to camp
kA niq' tOk, it snows
kA nir' kAn, if it snows
kA nil kA tA yug' nA' kOk, it looks as if it was
about to snow
kAn'kAk, imported skates (Russian)
kAn kA pfik' ne, I without saying a word
kAn kA tAq' td A, I begin to speak
kAn kir' to A, I skate
kAn' kiin, like as
kAn' llrq t6k, it is very frosty
kAn nA' kAq to A, I fall headlong
kAn nA rAq ro Aq' td A, I feign sleep
kAn nA' rAt, sleeps, mode of counting time
while travelling
kAn nft' k5 A, I utter incantations
kAn nim ChA ki' to A Aq chA kAl rl A' mOk, I
have no news to tell of interest
kAn nim ch6 6' ^, I tell news = I chat
kAn ning rSti snAq' t5 A, I do not allude to it
kAn nip' plfik, a charred piece of wood
kAn nfiq ch8' gAl ^ut, the cursed, lost souls,
condemned
kAn nfiq chSr x1 yAl' rA fit, kAn rii chO nAl'-
rASt, the blessed
kAn niiq' chSt chA' muk, what do you say .^
kAn niiq chS' fi t5 A, I interpret
kAn nfiq chir chS' kAm kin, I will interpret
for you
kAn nfiq 'ny firk' to A, I excuse
kAn' nfiq pirk nAk, do not talk so much
kAn nfiq sab' nA nS, he without speaking
kAn nflq sll' ghOk, expresses baby = a non-
speaker
kAn nflq stA' kA, I judge him
kAn' nflq tA, speaker
kAn nfiq tArq' to A, I talk to myself
kAn nfiq' t kA, my interpreter
kAn' nfiq t5 A, I talk
kAn nfiq' *yA rAk, language
kAn nfiq yun rA pA kA' t5 A, I do not wish to
speak at all
kA' nOk, kAn' rh&m, frost
kAnrAArA'kA hwAnS'hwA, here is my
word, my order, my decision
kAn r A A r A' kAn kA = kAn rl A r A' kA tfi, kAn-
rA A rA' ki, they are my words
kAn rA A rA' nfik, conversation
kAn rA yA kil' rA A, one who stutters
kAn rfi ch§ mAf kS nS, I without being told
kAn rfi ch§ mA rA A' mA, I after being told
kAn rfi ch§ mA ra chim' tfin, just as soon as I
was told
kAn rfi che mA rA kfi' mA, when I am told
kAn rfi chfi mA vi' lig' mA, before I am told
kAn rfi chS mA yfi A' mA, because I want to
be told
kAn rfi che mA yun rA lA' mA, because I do
not want to be told
kAn rfi ch8 me' mA, because I am told
kAn rfi chfi' 8 tA kA, I never speak of it
kAn rfi chfi ^il' ^fit, the damned
kAn rfi tA' kA, I say to him
kAn rut' kA kA, I speak about him
kAn ruti ho' Am kin tali ^fi ^S' IQ kfi, I
have told you in vain
•■ •
VOCABULARY
341
ULn rfit nail'' r&, he is accustomed to say
Un rfit' iti kft, my informer
ULn rfi tttk kwft' tSk, unspeakable
Un rfi tut ttt ya' kfl U, I have the habit of
telling it
Un' t&k, native wooden bowl
Un tA k5' Ul, my corpse
Un' tA thlQq, an old kantak
Un thlln'' nA 5k, he said
kX'' nfik, mouth
kft niiq' pAk tOk, it snows heavily
kX nfiq pfl yX^aii' gwd H, I am a big-mouthed
person
kAn' y&k, when (in the past)
kAn'^vAqpSk, during, when
kAn yfi hV gb5k, a dumb person
kAny&'etSk, he is dumb, he cannot speak
kA 5' rA y§t, Aurora Borealis
kA 0' yArq' t5k, there is an aurora
kA pS"' lAt, mussels (Tununa)
kA'^pIk, an expletive suffix, really, truly,
etc.
kA'pIk kA? is it, indeed?
kAp'' k tSk, it is narrow
kAp^ pA kA, I pierce it
kAp p§ lA sfiq' to A, I hunt or gather mussels
(Tununa)
kAp p6 a' ^hA, I pierce it well
kAp pl§n n§' A kA, I bore it
kAp pu' gnA, I lick
kAp' piin, native awl
kA pQk', foam
kA pu' kA rAt, an edible plant (grows in
swamps)
kA pilq cho A' go A, I grieve
kA pfiq'tdk, it foams
kA pu' tA kA, I perforate it
kA pu' t5k, native instrument for boring
kA rA' Ilk, mark of any kind, also color
kA rA ling' kA t5k, it has a mark
kA rA tAr' 'vik, October
kAxI'tAkA. I hinder it
kA rii tA' rA kA, I console him
kA 8h§' gS luk, forks of a river
kA 8h§' yu ii5k, a native feast
kAsh'prfik, native waterproof shirt made
of intestines
kAsh pru' kA, my waterproof shirt
kAsh tu' ^A, I talk out loud and clearly
kAsh iXW klu kfi, whole, entire (in composi-
tion)
kAsh fik" klQ nS, entirely
kAs Ut' to A, I scale (i.e., a hill or mountain),
go to the top
kAs' kflk, the outside of a log
kAs pnig yfi' S t5 A, I have no waterproof
over shirt
kAs'sAk, term for all white men
kAs sA Ifiq' pS At, the true whites (the few
remaining Russian half-breeds desig-
nate themselves by this term)
kAs sAq' t5 A (neg., kAs sAn rfi' to A), I eat
raw food
kAs sail' g5k, it is raw
kAs s§ yur ra St, term for those natives who
work for white men
kAs 8u' chA rAk, matrimony
kAs sQ ch8 mAl' rA A, a married person
kAs su che mA' we kA, my married one, my
spouse
kAs su' chg nAk, kAs sfi' yfi chSk, marriage
kAs sfi chug* yA' kfi kuk, we two wish to be
married
kA sfik chAm me' k§, he having gone all
around them made the circuit of
kA sfiq chim' maiik, it is round
kAssu'tAkA, I unite
kAs sti tAq kaii' gwd A, I am to be married
kA tA Ifiq tAn' kA, I scatter them
kAfchadk, wrinkled
kAt chu' ghA, I am wrinkled
kAf gftn kA, my breast
kAf ghAt, herd (i.e., of deer)
kAt g&k' ko A, I have pain in the chest
kA thlA chAq' to A, I would speak
kA thlA'chSk, unbilical cord
kA thlA ch§ mAl' IS» let him scold away !
kA thlA Chun 1' to A, I cannot say
kA thlA Chun nilth' kA kA« I mbpronounce it
kA thlAg^ *vAq t5k, it boils fast
kA thlA' kti tAk, term to express a bell
kA thlA mAl' rA A, boiling
kA thlA' mauk, it is boiled
kA thlAm chSf kA fnA, tell (ye) me about it
kA thlAt' nAk, speech, talk
kAthlA'toA, I talk
kA thlaii' chA rAk, address, speech, sermon
kA thUTu' tA kA, I talk to him
kA thlaii t kA tA' rA kA, I start to tell him, I
am going to begin to tell him
kAthllrq'tdk, it thunders
kA'thluk, thunder
342
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
kA ting v& gfl' kfl, I fillip him (to insult by
the fingers)
kflt kd p&k" U, white of egg
kfl'Urii, white
U tdq' td fi = Idl t5q' tin k&, I gather
kfltrus'kAU, kfl trQs kO mr U, I want it
white
kit tl' gu tfik, small sieve used in making
snuff
kft tiin li cha' ^k, little son
kft tfln rftg' 'IQ kX, my dear son
kft tfin' rftk, son
kft tfin rft kft' kft, he is my son
kft tfln'' rft kft, kft tfin' rft mft, my son
kft tfln rft kft' kfim Idn, if you were my son
kft' tflq pftk, a white dog
kau' chfik, a sore on the head accompanied
with loss of hair
kau chQk^kg, one having a scalp sore
kau' gi nft, rear (i.e., up stream)
kaim' kft kft, I take care of him
kalin kin r6' to ft hwft' td ft, I cannot attend
now
kaun kflf ki nft' ku, without him
kaun kfif k nS, without me, do not mind
me
kaun kfl mftn rS' t5 ft, I do not care for it, I
do not mind it
kaun rS' td ft, I do not mind = I am busy
kaiiq to ft pirk' nft kfl, do not beat him too
much
kaiiq' tdk, it clucks = the noise the ptarmi-
gan makes
kauq tu rft' kft, I beat him (with a club, etc.,
understood)
kauqtfi'tftk, short heavy club for killing
salmon
kail wft gho ft rftq' td ft, I make out I am
asleep
kau wft' gn5k, dream
kau wft gh5q tdq' t5k, he talks in his sleep
kau'wftk, tallow
kaii'wSk, a sleep (i.e., a day's journey)
kaii^ wft ne, a little distance up
kaa wft nu tfiq' to ft, I dream
kail wft pft kdq'' to ft, I sleep too much
kau wft' piik nS, I not sleeping
kaiiwftqseyftqpft kSq'toft, I sleep for a
very long time
kail wftr' chitl rft ft, red
kau wftr' ng' to ft, I am not sleepy
kail wft tft thltr kft w3b' nfik, for his sleeping
place
kail wft tft thlSr kftq ch5 ft' gd ft, I look around
for a place to camp (i.e., to sleep)
kail wft' td ft (neg., kaii wft yfi ni' to ft), I sleep
kail wft Tirq' to ft, I ascend (river understood)
kail wft' yfit, up stream
kail w6gn ftq' t5 ft, I redden, blush
kail wg' rhfin, red clay (used as a paint)
kail' wg yftk, gravel, pebbles
kail wg yft yft' gftk, sand
kail wirq' Ig, a brown dog
kfty^ liin kft, my eyebrows
kfty Ifin nft' rftt, eyebrows
kftv'lQt, brow
kfty yft' ft rftt, Ursa Minor (constellation)
kfty' ywg ftk, red fox
kftzh'gft, the native communal house of
each village
kftzh gg chti' ghftk, a nice little kazhga
kftzh gg kftl' tft, let us enter the kazhga
kftzh gg mg u ghuf & kft, are you unmarried ?
= are you of the kazhga }
kftzh gg' mg Gt, the kazhga folks (i.e., the
young unmarried men)
kftzh gg' mit to ft, I am in the kazhga
kftzh gg' 8tft kft, I have it taken into the
kazhga
kftzh gg u' gnft, I am going to the kazhga
kftzh' ghwu, birch bark
kftzh gir tft, let us go into the kazhga
kftzh gnQ glth' kft ng, what a shame I (in
composition)
kftzh gnu g' pft hwftng' 'ng, it b a shame for
me
kftzh ^6 nftq' k6k hwftng^ 'ng, I ought to be
ashamed
kftzh ghu yfiq' td ft, I am ashamed
kftzh' mft kft, I push it
kftzh md hail' tiik, the handle bars on a sled
kftzh zhftrq' stftk, the bell on the dog harness
kftzhzhgft'tdft, I pull
kftz zd' ft rdn, wolverine trimming on native
dress
kftz zQ ydq' thlG kii, seated around the four
sides of the house
k char^ kfi tit, floats used on fish-nets
k chSr^ td ft, I spit
k chfig mg gft' kft, I seize it
k chfig miq' td ft, I snatch at
kg' ft, who (interrogative)
VOCABULARY
343
Wi. 6' mum, whosoever
keridk,oh, who?
\ih' An, the rear portion of native house
kg in'' to X, I am in the kean
kSXq'p&t5k, he cries, laments (said of
adults)
kS &t mflq^ t5 &, I walk up stream
kg chfik^, anchor
kg Chi' kfl t&k, sinkers on fish-net (generally
pieces of fossil ivory)
kg chi' rl kft, I anchor
kgf chg u' gnfl, a term used during sorcery
kg kg', hurry
kg' ka, clay
kg IXg' 'mg Q t&k, term for white mice (sup-
posed to fall from the sky)
kg'Uk, heaven
kgl&q'thlinfik, the sky
kg' Igk, kgr gfim, term for a wounded animal
kg Ig rl' kfl, I wound him
kg 111' r& X, one who is gray headed
kgllq't5&, I cut
kgl Ifig' 'vdk, term for the mammoth (around
Ikogmute)
kglth thlgr' t&t, grass put up in sheaves or
bundles for winter
kelth thlgr t5q' to X, I collect sheaves
kg IQq" kUk, term for sewing thread (im-
ported)
kg Ifiq' tSk, he barks (dog)
kg'mA, I alone
kg mllq' to i, I run from (when chased)
kg mA viq Id' t5 X, I have no way of escape
kg mA' yfl gQt, expresses domestic animals
(e.g., cows at trading posts)
kg mg Chun r& chU' ko X, I do not like to be
alone
kg mg chfiq'tS X, I want to be alone
kg mg tiq' t5 &, I withdraw
kg'mltndk, loneliness
kg' mit t5 &, I am by myself
kgm' U ghgk, the one who is alone
kgm' IQ chgk, the state of being alone
(subjective)
kgm luf nOk (neg., kgm IQt & rgf n5k), lone-
ness (objective)
kgm thllrq' td i, I am left alone
ke mu ghH r&' k2, I entice him
kg mu ghH rft kau' gwl kft, I am able to
entice him
kg mJir vik, a fine full-grown dog
kg miiq' hlQ pftk, a big ugly dog
kg mflq k£u' yi, a pup
kg miiq Id y&' rftk, a pup when very young
kg mfiq' tA, a dog (i.e., puller)
kg miiq tAq' to X, I pull (from kgmiiqtg&,
which is not used)
kg mflq tik chg' y&, what a fine dog !
kg miiq' tilth kdk, an ill-natured or savage
dog
kg mflq ti yi' g&k, a pup
kg mflq r Uk, the owner of a dog
kg mfiq t mg' thlg mik f&, what a little dog
it is!
kg miiq t mg thlg mik klg ng' va, it is too
small a dog
kg miiq tii kfl chfl' g&k, a worthless little dog
kg mflq' t p&k, a large dog
kg miiq tiik 86 p! Ig' tA kX, a dog I want
particularly
kg mflq tflk tfl r& chii' gnik, a handsome
young dog
kg miiq tiing' ghfl ggk, a worthless dog, one
unsatisfactory in harness
kg mtlqtuv vg &'15k, an old dog, no longer
useful
kg miiq tuv yg i Ifilth' thlgq, a large old dog
kg'nA, who
kg' nA Im' i nl, whoever
kg nfl' kA, my nose
kg' ni kSk, wooden mask used at feasts
kg nAng' kA tiit, they are in a line (i.e., they
have one face)
kg nAq' tii maiik, she is with child
kg nA' thliik, sea parrot (i.e., ugly nose)
kg' ng, out of doors
kgng'UkA, I soak it
kg ng' thliik, cooking place
kg nir' rA kA, I cook it
kgn' t5 A, I am outside
kg nfiq chg' rg yik, place for smoking dried
fish
kg nfiq' td A, I am dry
kg pii' chA mA, I having bought
kg pu chA piq' tA kA, I would certainly buy
it (Mode XXX)
kg pfi chAq' to A, I would buy (Mode XXIX)
kg pu' ChA rAk, sale
kg pu chSk' nA mA, future of chAmA (530)
kg pfi chg mA rA A' mA, I after buying
kgpuchgmAr&'chlmA, I after having
bought
344
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
ki pa chS mA xH ka ml, when after buy-
ing
ki pQ chg m& rft u' goi, after I buy
k$ pti chS mA ri vll^ gin, before it has been
bought
k$ pQ ch§ mA tu yl! k5 i, I used to trade for
a while
k§ pu chSq ghit' td &, I will probably trade
(Mode LI)
k6 pQ chug S A' ko A, I would like to trade
(Mode LXIII)
k$ pu' chQ 1§, a good trader
k$ pii chQ TDk' t5 A, I do not care to trade
(Mode LXV)
ki pu chti ni' to S, I cannot trade (Mode
XXXII)
k$ pQ Chun r& p& kA' td X, I am not in the
humor to trade (Mode XCII)
k$ pfl chQq' to X, k§ pG chii' gX k2, I want to
trade (Mode LXII)
k$ pu' ghflk, a purchase
kSpakgnu'tAkA, I buy for him (Mode
CLV)
k§ pQk' nik, trading
k$ puk nflq' k&k, a thing for sale
k$ pfik xO! thlfik, past form of kSpQkn&k
kS puk' h ghd &, I buy from him (Mode
LXXXIX)
k§ puk" & nfl kfl, my purchase (objective)
k$pfipnig*mA, kSpQprnmkG, I before
buying
ki pfi pi Ifiq' to fl, ke pfi pi la' gwi k&, I buy
for the first time
kg pfi sfi' ghtin, an object offered for sale
kg pfi 8i gfit' k&n ki, I sell whatever is to
be sold
kg pfi sfiq' to &, I come to trade
kg pfis' kuk kfl, my purchase (subjective)
kg pfis' kfi mi, kg pfis' kfim kfl, when I buy
ke pfi' sfin, scales, weights, measures, etc.
kg pfi' t& kSk, sale
k§ pfi tl kl' mA, kg pfi tA kflm' kfi, whenever
I buy
kg pfi t h&' to &, ke pfi t hl'ri kA, first I buy
(Mode CXLVIII)
kg pfi tl kl' ti t5 &, I am going to start
trading (Mode XXI)
kgpfitlkshl'tofi, kgpfitikshl'akft, I do
not trade yet (Mode XVIII)
kg pfi ting' ghd S, kg pfi ting' nl k2, I com-
mence to trade (Mode XXII)
kg pfi ting' ghfir' ml = kg pfl ting' rim kfi, al-
though I trade
kg pfl ting' nAk k6 &, I attempt to trade
(Mode XIX)
kgpfltittArlq'toi = kgpfltittf ri'r&ki,
I buy at times (Mode XXIV)
kgpfitrt'tdikft, I buy it generally (Mode
XLVIII)
kg pfi tlAq' td A, I buy regularly (Mode C LI V)
kg pfitl ho' A kA mA, whenever I bought
kg pfitl hd'A mA, I having bought
kg pfitl hd' kfi mA, when I bought
kg pfit' nAk, buying
kg pfit nAn xlq' t5 A, I cease buying for a while
(Mode XXXIX)
kg pfit h Idq' chfiq to A, I want to buy again
kg pfit ii klq' td A, I buy again (Mode XLI)
kg pfit n rlq' to A, I stop trading
kg pfi' to A, kg pfi' tA kA, I trade, I buy it
kg pfit' 8kA kA, I order him to buy it (Mode
XXXIII)
kg pfit 8k5' rA kA, I force him to buy (Mode
XXXVI)
kgpfltstA'kA, I induce, make him buy
(Mode XXXIV)
kg pflt stflng' gnfi nA, I am a trader (Mode
XV)
kg pfi yfi chA' kd A, I buy for him
kg pfi' yun, a thing to buy with, money
kg pfiz ghg nA' nim' ng, in my trading, during
the time of
kgr chfi A' g5k, it is frost-bitten
kSr'nA, weather
kSr' tAh, nice, good (suffix)
kgsh' tSk, he has rabies, he is mad (dog)
kg tA', kg tA' kg, here !
kg' tAk, sod cut for roofing
kg tA' kg mg, go on 1
kg tAq' to A, I cut sods
kg'thlgr*nflk,knot
kg thlBrq' to A, I tie up into bundles, I make
sheaves
kg thlfiq' tAk, a sheaf of grass
kg'tSk, it sinks
kg t5q't5 A, kg tfl rA' kA, I avoid, I go around
from it
kg yA', why ? for what ?
kg yA' pll rA A' tfi, I told you so
kg yAf kAq' kA, I make him cry
kg yA kfln' rl Ifi, do not cry (mother's word,
baby-talk)
VOCABULARY
345
kg y&n' xl IQ, do not cry
kg yt* nfik, always
kg yi^ pUth hGl rft & gnfl, now I have done
it, my fault
kg yit' kft kX, it is what I cry for = my cried
for thing
kg yi tdk" klfi kQ, crying
kg yaii' goi, I weep, cry
kg yau' 15q' stA kX, I make him cry
kg y4' ygt» chgn, why do you cry?
kg'' ylk, snowbird
kg yl yl' gaiiq t5 X, I am all wet, I am a
snowbird (idiom)
kg yfi' g5 i = kg yfl'' w& k2, 1 reply, I answer
him
kg yu"^ gii ni, that one there
kg ya U lif kft, I argue with him
kg yii' rftk, blue clay
kg yu tft'' gu tiik, they contend with each
other
kgz' yu tfik, bone sinkers for fish-nets
(Tun una)
V
k ^liq^ tA rXk, one of the constellations
V
k £bMi' rflk, a deep and large drift
k hior r& A, a waterfall (Kuskokwim)
khu chgk^ kg A, I have toothache
Id, body
Id g'' ghfl ng, on top
kig'ghflng, taiun Idg'fning, at that
time
Id g ghln' II gii5k, expresses mortal, one
on earth
Id g ghflt^ nit td i, I am on top of them
Id' gl gn5k, it is rough (said of the
sea)
Id gall' ^hl, I beg
Idg'gllOndk, wolf
idg gwg chOq' t5 &, I hunt squirrels
Idg' gwgrk, ground squirrel
Id' kA, my body
kir gA kA, I invoke him
ur Ig gA n5k, in vain
kU Ig gAn' td A, I am useless, of no worth
m )g gA' td A = Idl Ig gA'rA kA, I scrape
Idl Ig kail' chA rAt, term for matches
Idl Ig' Dglth thlfik, old scar
Idl IIG' tSk, native tool of horn for working
pelts
m 15 An' to fl, I am behind
kn lu' kA, kn'lfin, kU'lo A, behind me, thee,
him, or it
Idl IQ' mA, Idl Ifi' ml ng, etc., my rear, in my
rear, etc.
kU liiq pA kAq' tAt, they howl much (dogs)
Idliaq'tttt, the cry the dogs utter when
the sled is ready to start
kath' h& rA t5k, it is not tight
kilth hfi Che mau' ^hA, I am tied
IdlthhutA'kA, I tie it
mth hQ tAng' kA thia tOk, both tied together
Ulth pA gAn' kA, I tie them tight
mth'akA, I tighten it
Idlth ting gnu' thlfik, bark (of tree)
Idlth'tit, bark (in strips)
mth' to A, I watch closely
knth'tdk, it is tight
Idlth'tit, fish scales
Id' IQk, imported thread
Id liiq' kAk, native thread of sinew prepared
for use
Id'mA, kin, Id' ^hA, my top
Id' mit t5 A, I am on top
Idn Che Al'ghdk, one negligent of his clothing
Idn chg A' to A, I am careless about my
dress
kinchlg"lg, one careful of his clothes,
dandy
kin chlq' to A, I am careful of my dress
Idng'gfndA (third singular of the above),
after part of anything, stem of a boat
Idng' ghd kA, my rear
king' ghd klgk, the last one, the hind one
king ^5' kll kA, my younger brother
king ghd kllng kA' td A, I have a younger
Idng ^fik klfi' gwd A, I am last to go
king ghfi Ig Aq' kA pfit, our successors
Idng ghfi mif td A, I am behind
king ghfi' mfin thlg' Ifi kfi, put it aft (i.e., to
the rear)
Idng ^fi nin raiiq' td A, I g^eve for
Idng ghfi nif td A, I reach home
Idng ghfin nfip pg A' kA kA, it is my true home
(i.e., heaven)
Idng ^fin rAq td lAn' kA, I go in search of
those behind (i.e., lost ones)
Idng ghfin rlq td rA' kA, I go after him
king ghfi pg Aq' td A, I go backwards
Idng ^fi rali'td A, I am late, behind time
Idng ^Q' tA kfik, the two rear cross braces
of a sled
king ^fi' td A, I dislike to look back (Yukon
Delta)
346
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
king' vJk t6k, native cap
king ylq' t5 1, I look back
king yl'rl UL, I look behind it
kin kflq' t5 1, I am inflamed, enraged
kin vAx( td I, I am dry
kln^ nS rftt, term for matches
kln^'nSrULk, fungus (the ash of which is
used in snuff)
kin' nirq tX, term for a cook
kin nflq' pA thl&k, lightning
kin njiq' to I, I am angry
kin' nflr* muk I gnl' k5r thlflk, old term for
steamer, thing moved about by fire
kl'ndk, fire
Id' 5 kllk, the large Arctic hare
kip UL' t5k, it curves sharply
kip' ni yAk, curve
kl' pdk, it curves
Up' pfl UL, I chop it
kip pflq' tX UL, I cleave it at one blow
kip' shAk, term for a screw
Idq' m& rhA, he gnaws
Idq'td A, I hunger
Id'rSt, waves
kir ri yflq' to A, I am warm
kIs'tAk, tassel
kIs'tSk, a fit
kl'tA, the front (i.e., towards the middle of
river, etc.)
kit fail rau' ghA, I gamble
kit' giiSk, it capsizes
klf ^0 rSk, native knife with small straight
blade
Idt gnu yA pg A' t5k, it almost capsizes
ki thlu ko 5rq' to A, I try all in my power
ki' thia mg, how now ?
ki'thlun, how?
Id' thlun i yo' kA, how is its condition?
ki' thlu th um y5r' t5q chit, what is your
opinion ?
kif kA,ki't&, kit'tS; kit'mA, klf im n«, etc.,
my front (390)
kit mif to A, I am in front of it
kit m5q' to A, I am carried down
kit' nSr* yfiq to A, I am dazzled
kits' chet chA' muk, what have you in your
fist?
kits chS u' ghA, I count
kits' gh5 A, I jump
kits kA' t5 A, I leap
kits sti \l A' kA, I save him from drowning
kit tAn' kA, I close my hand
kif t6 A, I fall in the water
kit ta' hwA, kit tfl' hwAk, kit ta' hwAt, who
is he?
kit tfl' mS, with whom
kIttfimUfkenS chAllSa'ghA, I work
slowly
klttfimUl'ldA chAllSa'gliA, I work rapidly
kit tflm laii' gnA, I am lively
kittfl'mtik, whom
Utta'ySt = klttut'stchS, who art thou?
who are you ?
kit tfl' yhz mS, well, who are you ? (Tununa)
Id yAq' tSk, it is rough (the sea)
U yA galiq' t6 A = ki yA' gA kA, I shout
kiyA'ghS A, I get a kiyak = fit for, right
age
ki yA' ghSk, egg (Tununa)
Id' yAk, kiyak, Eskimo shuttle-shaped canoe
Id yA' Id yAk, a badly shaped = poor canoe
ki yA lis Am' kin, I make a kiyak for you
Id yA mS fi' kA kA, I place it in the kiyak
ki yAng' ^hA rdk, a bad kiyak
IdyApAq'tdA, I yell
ki yAq' stAk, term for buckle, button (i.e., a
fastener)
U ySm kA thlS nS A' kA, I push it a little
Id ylk fi yAq' t5 A, I gather straw
ki ylk' fi ySt, a variety of straight rush used
to weave baskets, etc.
ki yik' t5k, it is well grown = long (said of
straw)
IdySq'kAk, blood
U y6q' kA mflk An' chA 5k, he has a hemor-
rhage
ki yu' gn5k, it is stormy (the sea)
ki yii' hwA, how is it ?
Idyfl'mS, I do not know (idiom) (St.
Michael)
Id' yu tA chA hA \ tfin, as hard as you can
Id yfl t5q' ko nflk, how many times
ki yfi tQ' chit, how many have you ?
IdzhyA'nfik, always (Tununa)
klzh yun', sinkers for fish-net
klS gA lA' kA, I scrape it
kl6r' *vlk, a round basket (native)
kllm'myAt, eyelashes
kling' thlAk, scar
Idlrq' n6 rA' nS. in front of
kllrq' nS lAn' t5k, it is in front of
kl5q' to A, I ascend
VOCABULARY
347
Uu, klu"^ tfim, shorewards, back
kia chS a' g^, I am on the lookout
klun, klu''t&, bowstring
klfiq'' kit, variety of straw used in weaving
socks
kiat&'chd&, little creek
kia't&k, stream, creek
klQ thlfiq'' t2 UL, I watch, observe it
kldt^mfin, to the shore
kU^t5 &, I watch, look out
k m&' k& k&, I cherish him, take the great-
est care of
k mA* kfls ti kS, my cherisher
k mS tXq'' to i, I am in haste
V
kn&k', nose
k rA' kA, my nose
V
k lAf kSr tdk, he is keen scented (Le., dog)
V
k n2' mi nfl to'' I, tip of my nose
V
k nS chir' k& k&, I will soak it
k^ nSk, apron
k nSk' ^ nfin, in your apron
V
k nd"* rOk, lamp (also term for candle)
k nflk^ ti rik, one of the constellations
k5 i' gH Ilk, term for glover's needle
kd'ikin, every (in composition) (6i6)
k5 Che chSr' Q^ ^i, I put snow to drip (866)
kd'chSk, drop
kd'^uk, native coffin
kd"^ gil ydk, swan
ko'ki, middle
ko ki' ki, kd ki' mi, my middle
ko ki mit ii ri' tdk, it is not in the middle
ko ki^ mIt to i, I am in the middle
ko ko^ ki, exclamation for surprise
k5'U, k51n, ten
kd U ri tu' IS, a relator of stories
k5 IS r§ ki ti^ rim kin, I am going to tell
you a story
ko ISr' ri giii, tell me a story
k51n i tall' ch§ mflk chip' pia kQ, eleven
k5ln e' pS ik, two hundred
k5ln ghfirq tin' ki, I make it ten
k51n gha ru' tSk, tenth
k5ln gnu rfi tSf ne, in or on the tenth
k51n' ghut, there are ten
k51n'nln, ten pairs
k5ln mir r5 nuk chip' plii kd, twelve
k51n nfln ri tiq' kd nflk, ninefold, nine times
k51n nfln ri ti' ri, nine
k5in n(in ri ti riq' tin ki, I make them nine,
I have nine
kOlB nfin ri ti' rhik, ninth
k5lB nfin ri ti' rin, nine pairs
k5lB ping ^' yu nflk chip' pin kfi, thirteen
k5 16q' kd ntik, tenfold, ten times
kd mi' rfi tit, a variety of moss dried and
used as lampwick
kd mi rfi' td i, I gather lampwick moss
kdm id ki' ki, I mock him
kdm'mfik, flesh
kd mfiq' yit, eyelash
kd' ni kin, when it is calm
kd niq kll' ri i, sour
kd' ndr tdk, it is calm
kd' nflk, calm
kd drq ting' gndk, kwi' thlfiq, disease of the
eye, cataract
kd dr' ti, pupil, apple of the eye
kdrthldr'tdk, it flows
kd Qh' tdk, he is pigeon-toed
kd yfir' 'mi, my being together
kd yfir' nd fi' ^hi, I smile
kd yfirq' td i, I join
kd yurq' tfi kfit, we assemble
kdyfir'tin ki, I gather them, assemble
kd zhdr rSq chaun', cough medicine
kd zhdr' td i, I cough
kdzhflr'chltlrii, blue
V V
k pii chim k tdk, term for dog that gnaws
his harness and gets free
k pfik 8d i, little adze
V
kpfin', adze (Russian)
k pfi' tl ki, my adze
kri'hfln, sail (Kuskokwim)
krik, krim, native storehouse (i.e., elevated)
kri' kfi tit, tall racks for drying fish
kriq' td i, I cross over
kriq' ye' tdk, there is no means of cross-
ing
kri tiq chfi ti' ti ki, I elevate it
kii tiq' ti ki, I put it up high
krit' ki, my upper extremities
kri yfiq' td i, I want to cross over
krhd'i, I urinate
kr hd' i rfin, splinter
kr ho i' td i, I have a splinter
kris'tik, crucifix
kr sfiq' tl ki, a dog trying to bite me
kr'thlflk, lip
krflm i Im nd' ri, a constellation (i.e., broken
arrow)
kru td' i, I am cold
348
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
kan&k'fil, what a pity!
ki& yu thlAq^ t5 H, I am exhausted, tired
out
k shir' kA tXk, space around entrance in
native houses (8ii)
k shaii^ ^ii2, I am loth to act, also lazy
V
k shau' n2k, sloth
V
k 8hi yA rfi' tX UL, I abandon my husband
k' 8tl IS, term for a dog that bites
V
k tau'' gw5k, he is liberal
Ic thldk", a brook
V
k tfik' nfik, native mode of cutting hair
V
k tfim'' ri yuk, hillock, any little moui\d
k tu nir ri X, one having diarrhoea
kta'tSk, it isbnttle
kfi chS k& t&q' tSk, it is about to drop, it is
going to drop
kfi chSq' tdk, it drips
kji chir hik, crane
ku'' ch5k, pitch exuding from a pine tree
kii ch5q'' vik, the valley of the upper lip =
trickling place
kfi chfik' nfik, icicle
kfif Yi! tSk, it parts or breaks (said of ropes
and lines)
kii giq' pik, a great monster under the
earth
kfl g&q pin' rXt, term for fossil remains
kugn mil ^5' A rit, swallows = like graves
(i.e., the mud nests)
ku' gn6k, grave
kShl'ki, it bites
klHi' thl5k, term for a saw
kiHi thl5q' t5 1, I saw, use a saw
kflh' yS &, genitalia
kfi ki' ki, the small of my back
kfi' ki klSk, part of the interior of native
houses (8i i) ; younger brother, second
of three
kfi kfl klSr' mif t5 fi, I am in the kukaklek
kfi kiq' t5 X, I am midway
kfi kiq tSr'ti k&, I hit it in the middle
kfi k& t&' t5 1, I shoulder it, balance it on
my shoulder
kfik fiq' td &, I go straight out to sea
kfik'hl, arrowhead of ivory
kfik' hfin, the point on the fire drill
kfikkrghflqtdk, it creaks
kfik'ktik, island
k&k k t&' pftk, a large island (Yukon Delta)
kSkkt&'rfik, a large island (St. Michael)
kOk k ti yl' glk, a small island
kfi' k p«t, fleas
kfikshfiq'tSk, it is cranky (a canoe that
overturns easily)
kfik sfi §' t5k, gonorrhcea
kfi kfim yl rlq' to i, I whistle
kfi' U, kfi' Iflm, straight up above
kfi IS' nS, up
kfilSn'tSk, it is up
kfiirtdi, I wet my head
kfi Ur' r5 it, the upper tier in a kazhga
kfil' ki, my being up
kfil li' Ilk, a grade of sorcerer
kfil 15^ i ki, I string it (i.e., my bow)
kfil' 15k, it is cramped; Irifi'ki kfil' 15k,
my leg is cramped = I have a cramp
in my leg
kfil' Ifik, the two upper side strips of sled
kfil Ifi' tl ki, my finger ring
kfil' mi, my elevation
kfil mit' td i, I am up
kfil rfi' t5 i, I miss the mark
kfilth' kr ySt, the shelves in native houses
kfil' Yi nS, high up
kfil vi ri' ki, I put it up high
kfi' mi, when = at that time (in composition)
kfi mig' ni ki, I keep it, preserve it
kfi mi kir' t5 i, I search for lice
kfi mi kSr ri' ki, I take the lice o£F of him,
I comb him
kfi mi kS yfi' tit, comb = louse remover
kfi mi kS yfitn' ki, my comb
kfi miq'ti ki, I light a fire
kfi mi' rhfin, wick
kfi mS ^r ri i, one with a tumor
kfim' g§ t5k, he is thin, lacks flesh
kfim g5q' shfln, a round chisel, gouge
kfim g5q' td i, I gouge
kfim' ki, my flesh
kfim ki' le tik, toothpick
kfim Id 1§ ti' ki, I use a toothpick
kfim' li t5k, it is frozen
kfim IS niq' k5k, it is silly
kfim' 15k, thumb
kfim' Ifi ki, my thumb
kfim miq piq' t5k, it bums fiercely
kfim' mauk, it is lit, kindled
kfim mi yfin' ri t5k, it bums badly (i.e^ it
does not want to bum)
kfim mlq' sti ki, I insert
kfi ni' gi ki, I draw it back
VOCABULARY
349
kflng Y&q Chi I rftq'U, I tickle him
kQn' U U, I love him
kSn kiq^ t5 1, I get angry
kfin^ k5 1, I love
k&n krfi'tflk, they both start a fight
kun kSn ro' I ki, I like it better
kfln nSr rft i, one who is with child
kSn nu hV gli5k, he is generous
kSn nSg' vJk' t5k, it is the best
kflnnii'nSt, mermaids
kfln nfl tfig' n&q^ t5k, he is stingy
kfin' riit, beads (native ornaments)
kii nu' t&q t5k, he is miserly
kii nu ti' t6k, he is liberal
kflp'nfiqchSk, February
kfip nflq chS d' gw5k, it is February
kflp' p& ki, I slit it, cut it down the
middle
kflp pr rl kl, I untwist it
kfl pQ ri a' ghX, I split
kflq"* chOta, native wedge made of ivory
kfiq' knilk, east
kfiq'ianflk, wolf
kflq'mi&k, a mouthful not bitten off, but
held by the teeth
kflq m& if ki, my mouthful
kflq mi iq'' to i, I have in my mouth, hold
it by the teeth
kflq t&q' t5 i, I go for wood (St. Michael)
kfiq' t5k, it is high
kfis' kfi tit, hailstones
ku' ti, a drop
kii tiq' td i, I am proud
kttt ghiq^ td X, I spring to seize
kfit' hfit, coal
kfif hQt, small, round, edible roots collected
by field mice
kflt ki thliq' t5 i, I fall on my back
kfit rir' t5k, hard snow, crust on the snow
kSf tiki, I grasp it
kfit'tim kin, I clasp your hand
kflt trail chd' ^hik, nice little crane
kfit' trauk, crane
kfi tfiq' to i, ka ta ta' gni, I snore
ku' yi ki, I pour it
kfiy' gi ki, I lift it
kuT' gS n5k, a native feast
kfiy kii ri' ki, I spUl it
kav' *lir 8t6k, it glitters
kti' vu gik, messenger, envoy
kfiy vS i kwS' nfiq, a variety of native skin
rope
kuy' yi ch5 i, small-sized net
kfly' yi ki, my fish-net
kfiyyiisrghi, kfiyyaV^hi, I make a
net
kfiy yiq pir' 'vlk, place suitable for setting
large nets
kfly yi tOq' t5 i, I go to set nets
kfiy yi to ri' kl5 i, I set nets
ka yi thliq' to i, I am glad
kfi yi tflk kin ri tim' kin, I am not pleased
i^Hth you
kfi yin' ri t5k, it is not high enough
kfiyiq'tdk, it is high
kfi yfir nh* ti ki, I smile at him
kfiz g5hq chiq' td i, I beg
kfiz gfi niq' k5k, he is wretched
kfiz gu niq kflr ri i, wretched
kfizh'^it, mountain goats
kwS' ch5 i, rivulet
kwS' chfi ghik, stream
kwS' ghe nik, smoking (i.e., tobacco)
kwS ghSq pi ki' nik, excessive smoking
kwS' g5 ik, a slough (196)
kwS' gfik, a large river
kwSr gik, a crooked stream
kwe liq' tdk, abounding in rivers
kwS' 15k, a winding creek
kwe mi' t5 i, I swim
kwS nS mit' tS i, I am in the channel
kwSn' lit, few (suffix) (246)
kwe'nfik, channel
kwS' nfiq, a bit (suffix) (246)
kwS'riki, I calk it
kwS yau gS 15q' t5 i, I am gratified
kwS yaii' ^hi, I am pleased = thank you
kwS yau ki pik' t5 i, I am indeed glad,
pleased
kwlq, kwS' gfim, river
kwlq' pik, great river (i.e., the Yukon)
kwlq'thloi, stream just navigable for a
kiyak
kwlq'thlfiq, old stream, one obstructed by
sandbars and drift logs
kwlq' td i, I go to the river
kwfi' gfit, they encircle
kwfln, tooth
kwfi' this it, they surround him
kwfi'tlSk, trousers
350
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
tt, Hn, he
tt'ia, and he
W nS, in him
H' ft t«, they
Un'tdk tft' nSm, he indeed
Ik&q chS mail' gnft, I rest
iko ft t5q' t5 ft, I partake of herring roe
fanft, bit of it (suffix)
imS gft' kft, I resume, take back
Jp* chg", ye
ipi tuk', you both
}plt, thee
Ipit t5k^ tft' nfim, you indeed
l^s^ mft, and you (Yukon Delta)
Ipia, and you too
Ipii gS^ tut, they are numb
Ipfik kfif kftq' td ft, I inform you
Ipang' ^ho ft, I revive
}pfing gnu'' kfi mft, if I were you
Ipfiq chl 1ft' rft kft, I reveal it
Ipfiq chl' IS On, revelation
Ipa tftq' t5 ft, I feel
iskln'kft, they both
Itmug' 'nflk, both themselves
Hh' kfik, bad, poor, mean (suffix) (284)
ifi, and
Uf kftq'td ft, I dodge down
1ft' kftk, water hole cut in the ice
1ft Urq' td ft, expresses I come to see a person
Iftn, Ift'tflm, outside
Iftq'tdft, Ift'gftkft, Iftl rft ft' gTift, I dig
1ft rft' u ghft, I am dissatisfied
1ft tS' n§, off outside
Iftt mlt'to ft, I am outside
Ift'turftk, the outer entrance to native
houses (811)
1ft' y5 ft, I crouch down so as not to be
seen
1ft yflf kft rft' kft, I make him crouch down
1§' ch§ mftl rft ft, tame, taught
\h ch$ mftn' iht ndk, it is wild
1§ gflf kft rft' kft, I bum it
le tftkft' kft, I recognize it
IS tft kftq' pu ^ft kft ? do you recognize me ?
IS ting nftk' ko ft, I try to study
1st nail thlim' t hfln, by our learning
IS' td ft, I learn
IS'tSk, it is tame (437)
IS zdn' chft rft kft, I teach him
U gfl sftq' td ft, I gather lampwick moss
U gfl' tit, moss used for lampwick
Ug yftn kflt kft 6iq' td ft, I make shavings for
kindling
Uk, possessor (suffix) (124)
ur rft ft, where a thing abounds (suffix) (170)
Ur^ 'nfik, suffix of locatives (410)
Ur' nflr' mlt' td ft, suffix in locative verbs
Ur' nfir' rftk, suffix of locatives
llv' rilk, grave
15q''ldqrftt, a derisive term for the few
Chinese in North Alaska
IQ' chSk, signal
Id chS' nftm kin, I understand you
lil chS' nft nS, without form
IQ chS rft' rft kft, I signal him
IQ chS rft' td ft, I sign, signal
IQ ching ning rd' ft kft, I understand it better
IQ' S rfit, the late, deceased (suffix)
M
mft' hfln, hence, by this way
mft kft' rd ftk, the common hare
mft kft rd ftq' td ft, I hunt hares
mftk kft' S ndk, term for Saturday = bath
day
mftk kft' vlk, bathing place, bath house
mftk'kS, bath
mftk kS u' glift, I bathe
mftk kin' rftt Agl yfl ndq' pSm, expresses a
vigil in church calendar
mftk' Idq, a large variety of seal
mftk Idq chdq' td ft, I hunt makloks
mft'kdk, urine
mft kdr' rS yftt, mosquitoes
mft kdr yftq ta IS' yft rftt, midges
mft ku' chSk, this sort
VOCABULARY
351
in& kfi' mS ut, dwellers at this place, resi-
dents here
mi kfi y& t&q' t5 ft, I breakfast
mAl W gH k&, I follow him
mAl 16 gfts'' tl k&, my follower
mil le guz fni kill ri r ^, maybe I will
not accompany you
mil IS' ki, my comrade
mil IS k5^ r5 Id nak, we both go regularly
together
mil IS k5r thli nfir* Uq' tak, they two always
go together
mil 16r kri' td i, I chase
mil ISrq k6 yi' gik, a little duck, duckling
(Kuskokwim)
mil IS"* t5 i, I have no comrade
mil Ilk' klfi nuk, let us go together
mil ling' ki t6k, mil' ri 6k, she has twins
mil Ilq ch5 i' ri ki, I follow him closely
mil Uq chd' 5rq tl ki, my immediate follower,
intimate
mil Uq chtig yi' kim kin, I would like to
accompany you
mil Uq chfl' wim kin, I desire to accompany
you
mil Uq ki rim' kin, I follow you
mil Uq' ti ki, I accompany him
mil Uq ti kO' liq ki, I always follow, or imi-
tate, him
mil Uq ti kii' st ki, my imitator
mil' r5 nflk, an inch and a half
mil r5q' kug' nflk, twice
mil rOq' ti ki, I have two
mil' ru Sn, two pairs
mil ril' gwfit, there are two
mil'nik, two
mil' ruk S' pS ik, forty (i.e., two twenties)
mil rfln' 11 git nS, on the seventh
mil rtin' Ug gin, seven
mil rtin U g5q' tin ki, I have seven
mil din' lin, seven pairs
mil rfln 15q' kd nuk, sevenfold
mil rfln' rhik, seventh
mil rii' to i, I get two (i.e., kill or capture)
milth gnS ni ri' ki, I am getting near it
milth hS'i ki, I get near it
mim Chi' k ti ki, I smash it
mim' chS k5k, it will heal (437)
mim' m5k, it heals (i.e., it flattens)
mim'trik, a summer house used in the
fishing season
mi ni' gi ki, I pinch him
min chS mi yi kdq' td i, I stay here too
long
min chS yi pSk' nik pS, do not stay too long
min chik shtig' niq' kfik, he is likely to be
here
mi'nS, here
mi ne' i ki, I set it out, produce it
mi' nSt in gd" tSt, May, eggs hatch
mi n§' to i, mi nS' ti ki, I show
min ghali' tuk, term for scissors
mi nig nSr ri ik, codfish
mi' nik, egg
mi nlq' stdk, smooth, level
min ni kiln' ghd i, I fish (with hook and
line)
min nSiq' shfin, term for a frying-pan
min' n5k, fish-hook
min' ny ik, term for slapjack
min pSk' nIk pS, do not stay long
min 8ti' ki, I let him stay here
min' tl kd mi, if I were here
mi chik nail' t5 i, I peer around
mi chik ti riq' to i, I warm myself
mi Chung chi k5' nik, do not get wet
mi Chung' td i, I get wet
min' t5k, it is here
min tdf ki ri' ki, I make him stay here
min u' ki, my anterior, my front
mi nd sflq pi kiq' to i, I worry much
mi nd sfiq' t5 i, I fret
miq'ti ki, I turn it back
miq' to i, I squeeze
mi rS yiq ti' S to i, I have no runner
mi rl' yik, mud
mi' rSk, a plain, a level stretch
mi tin kil' ri i, one who is naked
mi tin kail' gni, I am naked
mi tiq' to i, I undress
mi tir' 'mit t5 i, I am undressed
mi thliq' ti ki, I am near it
mi thUq' tdk, it is too near
mi' thld, dead (applied only to animals)
mi thld' to i, said on discovering any dead
animal
mif nflk k5 i, I dry myself
mit stir'i yi rik, a drying place
mi' td mS, at this time
maiiq'hu Id ki, grandmother
mauq' Id UU' ri Sk, a grandmother and
grandchild
352
ESSENTIALS OF LXNUIT
mJL'yflt, hither
mi I nlk" klfi kO, be careful
mk I nlk'd ft, m« & nl kft' U, I am careful
mi A' nl k5 U, be gentle
mi & nl k5r tULm' Un, I tell you to be gentle,
careful
mSAnlkdryii'itdA, I am never gentle
mi I nl kflg' Uq' t5 A, I am gentle
mi chlq llk^ k2 tttk, snow falling in large
wet flakes
mi chlq^ tflk, pond
mi chAq' thlflk, mud puddle
mi kOr^ tfit, they are plentiful
mi li Q' ^ I grind
mi Id kd &^ U, I throw a stone
mi Iflf ULk, small bell on dog harness
mi Iflg' yfiq^ td &, I want to smoke
mi Ifik' td I, I smoke
mi Iflr^ 'rhfin, snuff tube, bone from wing
of swan
milfisUL'tai, I snuff
mi Ifis kail' tflk, snuff-box
mi Ifls UL yOq' ti I, I want to take snuff
mi thlfig' 'Tlk, a basket
mi thlQq chi Q' ^)ii, I lay it away (i.e., in a
basket)
mi' tik, it alights (viz., bird)
mi a' UL kft, to place it in the object named
(sufiix of mode)
mi' fit, residents of (sufiix) (102)
mi ylq' t5k, it perches (viz., bird)
mlk^fft, very small
mik fl kft' m&, because of my smallness
mik fft kiq' t&, too small
mIk' ghl m&, I being small
mIk'UL, also (in composition)
mik kir hauk, it is small
mik Idl U ^5 ft rail' nlm ni, in the time of
my babyhood
mik kll 11' gliSk, small, baby, child
mik kll II gnfi' gwd ft, I am a child
mik kis' kft kft, I want it small
mIk kli ni' yft, oh, how small !
mik kli rft' ft kft, I make it small
mik kli rft fi' ghft, I become small
mlkkfi'chft kft, my smallness
ml k5q' tfit, said of mosquitoes, gnats, etc.,
= they are thick
mik' a kft, mik tau' giift, mik' kd ft, mik kU'-
II gnd ft. I am small
mik tftlth' ktr t5k, it is just small enough
mil Id koii yo' li, name of a certain ghost
=: good thrower
mil Id' kfta, missile, anything thrown
mUth kft rft' kft, I throw it towards
mllth kin' klq tttk, he sheds his coat, hair
(of dogs)
mllth' k5k, native knife with a short carled
blade
mllth' kiligfim ft'Tiigft, fifty cents (i.e^
half a skin)
mllth' kilfik, a skin (unit of value, one
dollar)
milth'kfit, feathers
mllth pan' tft kft, I throw him (term in
nvTestling)
mllfigft'tift, I kiss
mi Ifl kft rft' kft, I embrace him
ming' ^5 ft, color
mlng ^fi' gi nik nab thlfil rft' ft mfio. Ex-
treme Unction = anointing the sick
mlng ^fl' rft kft, I color it, paint it = I
anoint him
mlng' k5 ft, I sew
mlng' krfi pftk, noise, as when one stone hits
another
mlng kfik kftr' yft' kft kft, I want to sew it
mink sftk' kllk, what is to be sewed
mink' sfia, expresses a sewing machine
min kfi chi' vlk, needle-case
mln' kfin, needle
mln nft yfi i' tft kft, I never leave any scraps
for him
mln nfik sfiq' td ft, I want to sew
mlq' pftk, any great sudden noise
mir' yft thlftq' td ft, I vomit
mir' jrfiq^ td ft, I feel like vomiting, nausea
mis'tdk, praise
mis tdk klft rft' kft, I always praise him
mis td rft' kft, I praise him
ml thlftq' tdk, it gets stopped up
mlt'su, juice
mit zing ^hft tftng' kft tdk, shallow place
where fish sun themselves
mi ydr' hraim, native ladder or notched pole
mi ydrq chfi tfing kft' td ft, I have a balloon,
kite, etc.
miydrq'stftk, term for balloon, kite, and
yeast powder
ml ydrq' sfin, ml yfig' *yft rftt, ladder
mi ydrq sfl tftng kft'td ft, I have a ladder or
anything for ascending
yOCABULARV
353
mi y5iq^ td I, I go up, ascend
nu yu^ chSk, an ascent
mi yu' t& k2, I bring it up, raise it
nu yfi' yu n& nS, inaccessible (as certain
peaks)
m5q^ k& pik, real water
m5q' n5q' td I, I am tired
m5q' nu e ghSq chSq'' to I, I rest a little
m5q'pflk t5k, a freshet (Kuskokwim)
m5q^rhGn, native drinking cup, triangular
in shape
m5q sflq' t5r' 1ft, may I drink ? The answer
is p$ = do so
m5q shfin ro &' giift, I am more thirsty
m5q shflq' td X, I want water, I am thirsty
m5q^ sQg' nftk, thirst
m5q siilth^ kft, my thirst
m5q' tft, bring water
m5q tftg' yft' rftk, path to the water hole in
the ice
m5q tftg' yft rftn^ kft, my water path
m5q tft' Ilk, a place where there is water
m5q tftng krftq kaim' ill ghSk, a place where
there can be no water
mdq'tft rft vlk, water hole cut in the ice
m5q tft'' tft, water carrier
mSqtil^ghSk, a place where there is no
water
m5q tilth' k6k, arid, without water
m5q' td ft, I drink
m5 r&q' chft rftk, a wood path
m5 rftq chft rftn' kft, my wood path
m6 rftq' to ft, I bring wood (i.e., for fire)
m5 rail' ti kft, wood belonging to me
m5 rhftg' nfik, an old log
m5 tilth k til' gnSk, a careless person
m5 tilth kflk k ch«h' kd ft, I ^ill be careful
mS riq' tSk, said when the river bank,under-
mined by the current, crumbles in
m5 fdq' td ft, I am damp
mfi cha' gw5k, it is wet, damp (said of per-
sons or things)
mtik, mo' th&m, water
mak, mu' gam, milk
mfik'kdk, he has the mange (dog)
mfi lia' ghft, I delay, tarry
mfi llfi yft g5q' t5 ft, I tarry long
mfi mlq' tft kft, I turn it end for end
mfi mlq' thlfi kfi, reversed (used to express
translated)
mfim' mfik, drum wand (often of ivory)
mfim'tft, slender wooden wand used with
native drum
mfi mfiq' to ft, I drum
mfim yfi' ^ft, I dance, a special variety of
dance
mfim' yfi 16, an expert dancer
mfim yfi 16 yfi' gw5 ft, I am an expert dancer
mfi nftn i5 fi' ghft, I am more skilled
mfing ghll yftq' tft kft, I move it out of the
way
mfing' ghd ft, I lead, or start, a song
mfln' r6rq t5k, he is weaned
mwSr'Ukft, I fill it
N
nft chft' e td ft, I am hatless, bareheaded
nft chft' kft, my hat
nft chd' tit, planks laid over fire hole in kazhga
nft ^fiq' tdk, it chafes
nft'hfin, whither, which way
nft kft chS fi' ghft, I urinate
nftkft'chfik, bladder
nft kin kiq' tft kft, I redte
nft Idt' kft tftk, the sides of native house
nft kir' 'nfik, a long straight reach in a river
nftk klig' nftq kll' rft ft, poor (said in a com-
passionate sense)
nftk klig' nftq' kd ft, I am poor
nftk kllk' kft kft, I love him
nftk kllk' kfik kft, my beloved
nftk kfi chdl' ^fit, innumerable
nftkUng' hwe, nftk ling' Ipit, nftk ling' 1«,
poor me, you, etc.
nftk mdn', own (in composition)
nftk md' thlft kft, my own
nftk md thlft kft' kft, it is my own
nftk md thlftn rft' tft kft, it is not mine
nft' krfi tdt, feathers on the heads of arrows
nft kfi chd' tfit, they are innumerable
nft kfi' ghfin, deer teeth
nft kfi' gu tit, woman's belt composed of
deer teeth
nft kfi gfi tttng kft' td ft, I have a nakugutit
nft kfiq' td ft, I belt myself
nft 1ft' kft kft, I find it
354
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
vA\' lA ftk p$ yiin ik' t&q k£, I do not want
either one
n&l lA ft' tft, which one of them
nftl U h5q tftq' 15 ft, I am undecided
nftlUhdq'tdft, I doubt
nftl U hfig' nftq' k6k, it is doubtful
nftl 1ft' maiik, he is paralytic
nftl laiif kfif kt nft' kQ, without finding it
nftr laiik, it is dead (said of animals)
nftlia&t'nak piytik'chSt, which one of
the two do you want ?
nftlth klq chft r&' kft, I straighten it
nftlth'kiq tdk, it is straight
nft mh kS' kft, I do not know (St. Michael)
nft' me thlSn nft' thlft 5 kft, I do not know
him
nftmSthU'fttft nft'thlftSnkft, I do not
know them
nft mllth p$ chSk klS W ^)ift, perhaps I may
go, do, etc.
nft mfi' tftk, pattern
nftn' ghftr t5 ft, I stand
nftng'ghdftt, toys
nftng ghd ft' t5 ft, I play (i.e., with toys)
nftng' gii5k, that is all, the end
nftng ^u' htln, a whetstone
nftng gnu' tftk, term for a file (i.e., a wearer
down)
nftng ^u' t5 ft, I end up
nftng gnu' vik, place where whetstones are
to be found
nftng gnu yilth' kfln, native oarlock = pre-
venter from wearing the gunwale
nftng nSr' kut, expresses they are blistered
nftng' nuk thlSk, the last one
nftng tuk Ul' rft §t, sufferer
nftng' tuk k5 ft, I suffer
nftng ta kaf kft rft' kft, I make him suffer
nftng y& kS' t5 ft, I become alarmed (said
when at some dizzy height)
nftng yft nftq' k5k, it is agonizing
nftn lu chft' kft, my whereabouts, my where-
ness
nftn' nft kftn, every time it ends up, when it
ends
nftn'n§, where
nftn'nSk, native Innuit stone lamp
nftn ne ko' ft go ft, I am in danger
nftn nh k5 1 yftq' to ft, I am bewildered
nftn nh le chftq' kft, I shorten it
nftn nSr^ yftk, native trap
nan nh' to ft, I am short
nftn nil' rftk, the wooden support of a native
lamp, lamp stick
nftn nil r5 ftq' pftk, a large lamp stick
nftn' nd ftk, the white or polar bear
nftn' nfiq pftk, a special harpoon
nftn' rftk, glory
nftn rft mftl' rft ft, glorious
nftn rft mft' nftq kfik, worthy of praise
nftn rft mft naiiq' tSk, may He be ever praised I
nftn rft rftm' kin, we glorify thee
nftn' sntik, where are we both ?
nftn' tft, where is he }
nftn' tftz mft, where are they "i (Tununa)
nftn'takk5ft, I suffer
nftn yft ch5' ft yftk, a very small lake
nftn yft hftq tftng' kft tdk, there is a lake
nftn' yftk, lake
nftn' yftq pftk, a great lake
nftn yft rft' ch5 ft, a little lake
nftn' yft rfik, a large lake (St. Michael)
nft'pft, tree
nft pft chft 6q' tft, sailor (i.e., mastman)
nft pftg' nfik, six inches
nft pft kfi tft' rftt, the uprights of a sled
nft pftq' chXr' yik, the brace of the mast of
native sailboat
nftpftq'tftkft, I erect the mast, set np a
post, etc.
nft pftr' yft che' thlfik, an old stump
nft pftr' yftl k5k, post
nft pa' tftk, mast
nft pftts' kftq tdk, it lodges (said of an arrow
or harpoon when thrown)
nftpSl'kftk, file (Russian)
nft p«l kftq' to ft, I file
nft'pflt, the cross pieces of a sled
nftq' chftl k5k, sled toggle, to which the tow-
line is fastened
nftq' to ft, I am hindered
nft' rft kft, I point at it
nft' rh5 ft, I smell
nftr' kg yik, term for school, teaching place
nft r5q chft rftl' rft ft, a contradicter
nft r5q ch§ mft yO' e to ft, I am obstinate
nft r6q' st kft, my contradicter
nft r5q' tft kft, I contradict him
nft riilth kftq' to ft, I harpoon
nfts' k5 nSt, roots
nft 8 kul gnu' ghft, I have headache
nfts kwau' gwo ft, I am a little girl
VOCABl/LARV
355
nils pfl' go I, I1&8 pA^ gA k&, I endeavor
nil tA' kA k2, I find it (far off, understood)
nA tA ko chug ghi ru^ to A, I cannot find it
at all
iiAtAk'stA, finder
nAtAku'tSA, I find out
nA' this, in the time of
hA this mis' kA kA, I order it to be covered
hA thlo' A kA, I ignore it =r I do not know
hA thlSk' f Ak, straight above
hA thldk' f Aq tdk A kAq' tA, it is midday, noon
nAthlu'e, nA'thlSn, he does not know
about it
nA thlfif kA' pflk nS, I unknowing
nA thlu' k tOk, he is insensible
nA thla IS 5' rA kA, I backbite him
nA thia nAq' k5k, it is unknown
nA thlu nAf mfin, unexpectedly, u n k n o w-
ingly
nA thlil nn' kii tAk, sign, indicator = that
which makes known
nA thlil n! ni' t5 A, I am in sight of
nA thltin rA chu^ yA' kA kA, I would like to
know it
nA thlun rA rA kaun rA' tA kA, I am unable to
know it fully
nA thian rA XMf kA, I know it
nA thlun rA tii r5' A kA, I know it better than
he does
nA thlun rS Ilk tAq' kA, I know something
about it
nA thlun ris' tS, one who knows, its knower
nA thlds' t kA, my one who does not know me
nA thia yA ga' U kA, I forget it
nAtkdIk'tdk, blizzard
nA tdk' f Ak, direction
nA tdk'fA nS, in what direction
nA t5k fAn Id' chS A, his, or its, direction
nA tri ril' t5 A, I have a hole in my boot sole
nA' tr5k, boot sole
nAt'stdA, I look down (from a height,
hill, etc.)
nA tflg' mit' t6 A, I am on the floor
nA'tfik, floor
nA' t&t mdq tA, where did he, or it, go ?
nA tfit' mfin, to which direction
nau, fruit of any description
nail' gw5k, it grows
nau' hwA, where
naii' hwA mS, where is it ?
nail' hwA naii, exclamation used in scolding
naii'hwi, where
nau' hwOn, whither
naiin, fruit
naiin' rAk, naii' stAt, seeds
nail' thlu, don't (exclamation)
nail thlu' gwo A, I am an invalid
nail' thlQ hwAng' nS, alas for me !
nail thlulth' kA, my sickness
nail thlu nS u' gnA, I say that I am sick
nail thlun ro u' ghA, I am more sick = I am
worse
nail thlu thlS nS' ku mA, if I should be sick
nail thlu' thlfik, a sick person, invalid
naut' stAk, plant
nant stAr^ *vlk, term for garden
naut stAr' Ml Uk, a place having a garden
nAvrStA'kA, I lend it
nAv ihAq' kA kA, I borrow it, I have it
borrowed
nAv rhAq' t5 A, I borrow
nAy 10 tA' kA, I exchange it
nA zaii' hu 15k, girl (Tununa)
nA zau hil lu' gw5 A, I am a girl (Tununa)
nAz vA gA' kA, I exhibit it
nAz vAq' tA, exhibitor, one who shows
nAz vlt sti' td A, I have no instructor
nS chS fi' gnA, I hear well, good hearing
nS chQ sr ghdk, a deaf person, one who
does not hear well
nS chfl S' t5 A, I am deaf (i.e., I never hear)
nS chdg' nAq' kOk, it is interesting, it is worth
hearing
nS chiig' nS A' kA, I listen to him
nS chug' nS kSr' td A, I listen for an instant
nS chfl lAn rS' t5 A, I do not want to hear
nS chd yQ' S td A, I never want to hear
nS gS' II kA, my collar
ne gS til kA rail' gnA, I have hiccough
nS gfik', north
nS gfik'fAk, the far north
nS gfik f A Urq' td A, I go north (Le., to travel
in that direction)
nS gflk' sin lAt, most northerly
nS pA gA' kA, I point at him (i.e., to ridicule)
ne pi' llg' mA, I before hearing
nS rhAq' td A, I cross over
nS rhA yfl' S td A, I never go across
nSsh' kfik, head
nS' tilth kA, the thing I heard = my heard
thing
nSt nfik shA' kA kA, I ought to obey him
3S6
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
vA' td I, I obey (i.e., I hear)
n§t8 Chi &q' Uk, term for an ear trumpet,
what will make it heard
nSt tUq ^ thl« &' kfl, perhaps I will not
understand it
ne yu^ chSk, the thing heard
& gnA' IQq t5k, it growls
h ghl rail' ghfl, I groan
nl gftk^, snare (native)
nigft'mfln i g&qH5k, caught in a snare
(i.e., it gets hung to the snare)
nl giq tOq' td I, I set snares
nl gftq' tu 1§, mesh
nl g&' rftt, a long series of loops forming a
snare for wild geese
nig'' gik, spider
nig' gi rim kuv'yi, a spider web, of the
spider his net
nir U ik, womb
nil lis' ti, a house builder
nilth' ki, my former house
nllth'thi^k, old house
nllth thlflq t5q' to i, I suffer much
nim' ri ki, I bind it
nimflq'kik, binding material, string, rope,
etc.
nim urh' 'yik, a species of eel which abounds
in the Yukon
ning chu ni' to i, I cannot attain
ning'ghiq kik, term for anything that will
stretch
ning gnir yik, periods of intense cold
niug ^r yiq tdk, it is intensely cold
ning' gno i, I stretch out or reach for
nlug' gn5k, it stretches
ning gh5k chiq' to i, I stretch to reach
ning kle 5rq' td i, I am cold
ning'li, cold weather
ning li' i tdk, it is warm weather
ning li' lin, being warm = lacking cold
ning lilth' h5k, it is warmer
ning lilth hul^ ri i, warmer
ning'lln, warmth
ning ling ghe' ni t5k, it grows colder
ning' ling ghSk, it becomes cold
ning ling ki ti' t5k, it commences to get cold
ning li' ro t5k, it moderates (the weather)
ning Urq ki tiq ytig' ni' k5k, it begins to look
as if it will grow warmer
ning nfiq kaii' ri ki, I stretch it out
ning' thli in, on account of the cold
ning thli chlq' td i, I cool off (after a vapor
bath)
ning thling' id 5k, it is colder weather
ning thUng rfil' li i, colder
ning' thllrq pi, oh, how cold I
ning' thllr tdk, it is cold
ning' td i, I yawn = stretch
nl' pi ki, I extinguish it
nip chd a' ghi, I extinguish
nlq' ti, a weight of any sort
nirq' td i, I point out
nit' chd i, a little house
nl'yi, maid
nl yi' gi ki, my younger sister
ni yi' gi klSk, youngest sbter
nl yi gi id' i ki, my cousin (female)
nl yi gd ku' ki kldk, a younger sister
ni yi' ghik, respects, salutation, a bow
ni yi'^q ki, I bow to him, salute him
nl yi ghi' rim kin, I send my love to you
nl yi ghif ti, he wags his tail = he salutes
(of dogs)
nl' yik, the small seal, harbor seal
n! ying ni' ti ki, I shake it
ni yi' 'd 15k, giri (Kuskokwim)
ni yiq chdq' td i, I hunt niyaks, I seal
n! ye' pi, name given to a certain star
nl ydrq sti' td i, I have none to care for me
nl yuq' ti ki, my protector, guardian
ni yH' ri ki, I guard, aid him
ft' ni, nllm, house (i.e., a winter dwelling)
(8ii and 821)
&' nfik, bone ; also framework
nd i giq' ti ki, I wet it in my mouth
ndk, nd' gfim, end, tip
nd ki' gni, he needs me
nd' ki ki, I need it
ndk kle tli r5' td i, I do not need anything
ndk' kfik ki, a necessity to me, my needed
thing
ndkti'ki, I jerk it
ndl lu' ri ki, I make a sign to him
n5q chd ki' ki, I fail to attain it
ndq' ni ki pik' tdk, it is very necessary
ndq' nil' ri i, necessary
ndq' 'ni tdk, it is necessary
ndq' ti ki, I haul
& ri nd' td i, I await
i ri ni niq' kdk, exclamation of impatience
& rdt' n5k, negative suffix
& rfis' chir t5k, he is lousy
VOCABULARY
3S7
& rils' tl, loose
h tSk', ebb tide
ntif kaiin, native tool, a tip of deer horn
set in a handle
nu ^u^ t2 ki, I fasten it
nd ghii^ yun, term for a button (Le., fastener)
nfi k& k&^ ki, I remember it
nil U' r&k, second idfe of a polygamist
na U rr kl, I just recaU it
na k2 rail' gwd ft, I am the second of his
wives, I am a nukarak
nu kft yar ri I, sulky
na k& yaq' t5 ft, I sulk
nfl kim' chfik, ligature
nfik' kft, my house, home
n&k kft^ it is his house
nOk kftk ^ rfi' td ft, I am out of debt
nflk kft Urq' tOk, it abounds in fish
nflk kftlth' pi ft, a young man who is a good
hunter
nflk kftlth' p$ ftk, chief man of a village,
best hunter
nfik kftlth p$ ft' pft thlfik, a big strapping
fellow
nflk kftlth pS ft' pik, a fine young fellow
nfik kftlth pi ft' rft tftk, the most prominent
man of a village
nfik kftlth pi ft rft tail' gwo ft, I am chief
man
nfik kftlth pi ft rou' ghft, I am a successful
hunter, food provider
nfik kftng chftq' td ft, I deliberate
nQk kft' to ft, I get food (i.e., fish)
nfik kail' '15k, a shiftless fellow
nfik kail' thlflk, a large bag of woven grass
for holding frozen fish
nfik Id' ft t5k, it lacks fish (said of certain
rivers, etc.), no fish there
nfik'kllg' nftk, pitiful state
nfik kfing' kft to ft, I have a supply of food
nfik'kQt kft tfi tfit kshi' tfit, have the
salmon come yet?
nfik' kSt king gndii' tfit, the fish have gone
by, it is the end of the run
nfik kfit tu' tut, the fish (i.e., salmon) have
come (the annual run)
nfik nirq' t5k, it is sweet to the taste
nfik nil' rft ft, sweet
nfik' nfik, food
nu kfiy ghft' t5k, it is a spruce tree
nfik yfi' tit, term for pins
nfi'lftftts, cousin, young woman (mode of
address)
nfi 1ft 111' rft ft, polygamous
nfi li 5q kll' rft ik, a couple, man and wife
nfi lir hre' t5 ft, I have no wife
nfi lirq' kft, my wife
nfi lirq' pftk, first wife of a polygamist
na lirq tOq' t5 ft, I take a wife
nfi 16rq t5 rft' kaun ri td ft, I am not per-
mitted to marry
nfil' gft kft, I break it slightly
nfi ling kft' t5 ft, I have a wife
nfi Uq' klft Idn, I marry you (man speaking)
nfi Uq' kfi kuk, we are married
nfi Uq kfi mft' kft, expresses I keep my wife a
long time = no change of wife
nfi Uq sfi mft' kft, I desire her to still remain
my wife
nu Uq sfi' wftm kin, I want you to be my wife
nfi Uq' tdk, the half moon
nu Uq tfi mall' tii kft, have you a wife ? = are
you married ?
nfi Uq tfis' kftm Un, I bid you to marry
nu Ifiq' kft kft, my cord
nfi Ifiq kail' ti kft, cord belonging to me
nfi Ifiq' to ft, I cord
nfi lu' rft kft, I cord it, lace it up, etc.
nfi mi chftq' td ft, I would remain at home
nfi mlt' t5 ft, I am in the house
num' rft kft, I braid or plait it
nfi' nft, the earth
nfi' nft pfik' tOk, earthquake
nfi nft ch5' ft thlfiq tfik, their (dual) little old
house
nfi nftk shfin rft tft' kft, I am dissatisfied to be
here
nfi nft U gfi chir' 'lu tft, residing amongst us
nfi nft U gfit' kft kft, one from my village =
my fellow-citizen
nfi nft U gfi tfik' klfi ki fi i' tauk, he stays in
their midst
nfi nft' Uk, resident
nfi nft U§ u' ghft, I build
nfi nftlth' hrfit, a deserted village
nfi nft Ifiq' pi ftk, term for a continent
nfi nftm Id i' nftn ^1 gh5r 'n§, we on earth
dwellers = we mortals
nfi nfi mi' thle, how nice a place !
nfi nft mi u tail' gwfit, they live on land (i.e.,
terrestrial)
nfi nftm yfi' tftt, a variety of Alaskan berry
3SS
dB nl'idk, joy, delight, glory
DSnlnik'kBkkl, my happineu
oil ii« Diq kU' il hBd kEI' Itm t ylq' Uk, be
has gone (o the happiness of heaven
bQ nl nBiq' pi, it is a place of glory
na nl' Qtrq tBk, il U delightful
na al nJir' il i, used to express 'ave' and
■ Uelare '
nil ol nee tl yUq' tS 1, I rejoice
Bfliiani'ylirf kll'ltm, in the glory of
heaven
nd Di' pi Uk, a small area of solid ground
lit to build on
nani'plk, sut id ground (not low or swampy)
dB Dl pi thlu' elk, a stretch of high solid
bQ' nit, a village
na ai' tbiak, an old village
nQ nit' a i. 1 go Co (he village
nOng naV ^li, I am hia son-in-latr
Bllnguu'kl, my son-in-law
nOng' luiiin, son-in law
nfl'iilk, hedgehog
oi nl' il kl, I take his place
nQ nQ' liq. a present, gift, also pay
dQ nQ III rlq' kik, the one to be paid
na nQ 111 rSq kail' g:w9 1, I am the one Co b«
nS Du' rt ks, 1 scold him
DQp'chi kSk, it is sticky
nap' pi. sound, noise
oBp pail' nik, be still
nUp pi i' kl pat. our true home
nap^'atSk, it is quiet, il lacks noise
ndp plTtiSr'til, pi.-j.i.u maker, consoler
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
'uSk. ..
ntlp pi te ri' kt. I quiet him
DflppliU'rait mourners
n&p' pliiq tfik, it is noisy
nflp'stlk, native mask (large uze)
nflqchigS'kfl. 1 ))al1 it (i.e., a trap)
ntlq'kik, northeast
nliq'ilkl. I eac it
nllq' rim Un, in the game of checkers I eat
you (i.e., take your man)
oQq'rhfi 1, I eat
nllq'atik, bait
nBq' aU U, I get him to eat, I tempt him
to eat
nflq' atiq ki, I poison him
nBq'U ki, I putt it up from or out from
nflq tiq' t6 i, I move from one to another
nHqti'ii kl, I press on it
nSqti'ilylTit, ridges on the handle of
sflq' U) 1, I grin
Dflq'yil'^ti, I eat well (i.e., have plenty
food)
ntiq'yilq'titi, I wane to eat
nfiri llJt. adoeirilh herfawn
ii(li'yuniii'6rq'tcl&, lexpect
Titi'»ek,lmife Russian)
na U' rik, fresh Rsh
aa ti rail' gwJSk, it is fresh
nSf cha ^k, a small house
Dflt Ik gbti' U kL I kill something for him
(i.e., 1 gun something)
v& tIq*Uq'tii na ni'mflk, expresses 1
blast (rocks, etc.)
natTki, mygun
naf tin, expresses all right
naf Un la hSk, it Chen being all right
nOf tflm, own, very, etc
nQ Ti S chil'thlak, an ugly girl
nQ vS iq' etii, a pielty girl
nQ vi iq chi' klr ti. a very h andsome girt
nQ Ti iq cbi ri' chQ ^k, a nice little girl
nQ Ting kit i' hi lik, a great ugly girl
na Ting silth' tlUtik, an old ugly girl
nQ tQ', mire
na Tlisg kill' ghl, I sprawl out on my back
aaT* Tit. dried fish o( a certain Taiiety
nGTyQn'^ I thread it
na jtl eUng uiii' gSk, he has short hair
nQ ylq' pik, one «ith a great Chick head of
hair
nQ yiqpaVgwIi, Dfl ylq p( fl' ^il, I am
nflyiq pail liq' til, I generally keep my
hair long
dG ylq pall wl ktq' td i, my hail 1( too long
nS'ytt. hair (used in plural)
nQyfrq'tSi, I comb
na yfr* ri ki. I comb him
na ylr' rfl at, a comb
nBylratnililq'tSI, I am nearly bald
(i.e., I have almost no more hairs)
nByt'til, I am bald
nQ (hitq' pit, a trident spear for capturing
geese
liTlq'tak, a very low tide
VOCABC/LARY
3S9
5 Iki rft' n8, a Uttle below
5 ft kS rftn' td ft» I am a little below (Le.,
down stream)
5 ftk'fftk, 5 ftk^fft nS, away down
5 ftk' Urn, part of native house
5 Ik II mlt^ to ft, I am in the oaklim
&m kft katin ih' t5 ft, I am busy
5 ftm"* nftq kSk, it is time lost
ftm'' tft kft, I lose time with him
5 ftm'' td ft, I trifle time away
5 ftm yfln rS' t5 ft, I do not want to be
bothered, lose time
5 ftn^ down front, down stream
5 ft' nS, forward
5 ftn' t5k, he is forward
5 t\f kft, my front lower half of body
5 ftt mfiq 8t chfi kft' to ft, I just go a little
way down the bank
5 ftt mfiq" t5 ft, I walk down the bank
oft'vflt, forwards
ch5r' 'n5k, glory
5g' nSrq' t5 ft, I threaten
5g* n« a' tft kft, I threaten him
5h'rfit, moss
5 kS Um^ nft, I run swiftly
5 k6 li' to ft, I do not run fast
5 kS' maiik, it leaks (Le., it is perforated)
5 kS' nftk, hole, a leak, etc.
5 kS nftng' kft tOk, it is hollow, it has a hole
m It
k§' tft kft, 1 make a hole
5 kirq' kft, I put in oil (into a lamp)
kit' to ft, I burn myself
5 klzh' vlk, shelter
5 klzh vlq' t5 ft, I seek shelter
hlsf k§ ftk, firewood
Sk' nftq k6k, it is hot
d'k5k, blubber of seal walrus, etc. ; also oil
5' k5r sflk, cap
5' k5r ad kft, my cap ^
5 k5r sfln' kft t5 ft, I have a cap
rau' giift, I whoop, yell
6 riin kin ri^t' 5 ft, I have no time
6 rSn' k5 ft, I have time
5 r6n ku' kQ mft, when I have time
5rh' lu viik, native bow
5rh' lil vttq' td ft, I carry (arm myself with) a
bow
pft ch«' = pft chSf , gills
pft ch§' g5 ftk, nostril
pft ch$ g5 ftq' kft, my nostrils
pft gft'n§, up there (St. Michael)
pft'gi, up (St. Michael)
pftk, large (in composition)
pftk' mft nft, up there
pftk mftn' U ghdk, the one who is up
pftk mftn' to ft, I am up
pftk' td ft, I go to see
pftk' fi ml nft, the one above
pftk u ml nftlth' kfik, the one up there whom
I dislike
pft kjim' ydk, you aloft there 1
pft 1ft hwa chai' rft St, term for those who
work on the river steamers
pftlfthwu'tftk, steamboat (Russian)
pft Iftq' td ft, I take sparingly
pft Iftt' kftk, tent (Russian)
pft Iftf kd ft, I tent, pitch a tent
pftlSq'tOk, sunburn; also the pain from
wind and cold
pftl' lat, they starve
pft 15k' tftk, beaver
pftldrftq'tdft, I dodge
pft Ifig' naiiq' td ft, I spread out, lie spread
out on the floor
pft Ifiq' tft kft, I turn it over
pft la' a kft, I shut it
pft mft Ur' nOr' mit' td ft, I am down that side
pft mft' llr' nOr rftk, down that side
pft mft' nft, up
pft mftn' 11 ^5k, the one who is down there
pft mftn' td ft, I am up
pft' ml nft, he back there
pftm' kdk, hi, you two down there !
pftm mflq' td ft, I scratch (i.e.,to ease itching)
pft mfing ghd ft' rd 5k, like the upper one
pftm' ydk, you back there !
pftm' yti, tail of any animal
pftm jrfiq' pft Ilk, comet = thing having a
long tail
pft' nftk, a variety of spear having a large
blade
36o
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
pAng gn<h k& chS^ flq tSk, he lopes along
easily (a dog)
p&ng gn& Ifiq' t5k, he gallops
ping'hfln, double-bladed paddle; also fin
of a fish
ping' ntr t5 1, I paddle
pfl ning kA^ t5 i, I have a daughter
pin ng' kS, my daughter
p&q til'' ghQt, native fish-trap, single trap
p& t& gis' kfl kA, I make him hurry
pX tl gau' ^hl, I am in a hurry
pX tXq t5q^ to i, I act hurriedly
p& tlq to^ rft UL, I hurry him
pXt' gl kX, I press on it
pX thU^ tXk, heavy skin hung over entrance
of kazhga, curtain
pit' nflk, native measure, four inches
p&' t5k, marrow of bones
pflt^ snXk, the extreme polar cold
pits' snaitdk, it is excessively cold
pXt' stSk, a damp cold
pflf tlg&kX, I pat it
pit to'' X kX, I put the cover on it
pXt tQ h' rX kX, I uncover it, take the lid o£f
pX tfik'tXk, compressed ; also term for plug
tobacco
pau gulth' hrXm, you scoundrel up there 1
(abusive)
pail' gfi nX, part of river, from its centre to
the shore
paV IXt, a spark of fire
pau wX' n$, somewhere up there
pail wXn'lI gnSk, the one somewhere up there
pail wXn' to X, I am somewhere up there
pe, do
p§ X', own, real, true (suffix)
pe X' gX lik, a bear with her cubs
p^^Xk (suffix) (1S2)
pe X^ kX, I do it, it is my doing
pe X' kX kX, it is my act
p§ X' kX mX, whenever I do
peXkauq'tdX, I resolve
pe Xk kllg go X' kX, I am able to do
pe Xk klig' 5 Xn, that which can be done
by me
pe Xk kllg' 5k, one able to work
ps X kllg u' giiX, I am fit to do
pe X' klik, one competent, able (suffix)
pe X' k5 X, I do
pe X' mX, because I do
pe Xn rX chXq' kX, I would not do it
p8 Xq' kXk, what has to be done
pi Xq kail' gwX kX, I must, I have to do it
pS X rX Xq tfl' txi, you are too early (idiom)
p« chXg' y« kX' kX, I ask him for it
pi chXg' yX rXk, petition
pi chX' kX, my doing
pi chXq' td X, I request
pi chX il X' rX thlfiq, mode of doing
pi'chik, true
pi' chi kXk, berry basket
pichiknXf t5X = pichiknX'tXkX, I am
the one to do it
pi chik shag' nX' k5k, he is likely to do it
pi chiq tXn rfi' kX ni, how funny I
pichiqarachIrkX'ti,Ill play a trick on
you
pi chir' il yX rXk, way of doing, mode,
custom
pi chir ri yX rX' kX, my custom, habit
pi chir ri yX rXm' kfin, according to my way
pi chir il yX rXng' kX t5 X, I have the custom
pi chir ri yX rXq' thlfi kX, my bad habit
pi chi' li gwik, it is truth
pi chi' fi tOk, it is true
pi i', up there
pi'kX, pi'mX, mine
pi kX' kX, it is mine
pi kX' kX kX, it is for me, it is to be mine
pi kX kin rX tX' kX, it is not for me
pi kXn' II gnik, the one above
pi kXn' thlflk, one who was above
pi kXn' t5 X, I am above
pi kX tX rXq' pQ ^hX, you are to treat me
pi' kail, it is owned by, it belongs to
pi kail' tl kX, it is to be mine
pi kail t kin rX tX' kX, it is not to be mine
pi ki' ghX, it impedes, prevents me
pi kin rX tX' kX, it is not mine
pi kil chX' kX, my ownership
pe ku' mX, when I do
pe kfi tX rail' ghX, I breakfast
pe IXq' t5 X, I often do
pi llq'to X, I abound in
pi lu' gwuk, boots
pe Ifiq' to X, I put on boots
pi' mX II lit' nflk, any of mine
pi' mX II lit' nflk, some of mine
pi nX charq til' tii, you are too late (idiom)
pe nXn k hi u' ghX, I am clumsy
pi nXq k ku' mX, when I am able
pi nXq thlfiq' n5k, bad luck
VOCABl/LAJiY
361
pe n^iq thlfiq' t5 ft, I am unlucky
pe nft rft kft pik' tl hrft nS, just in the right
time
p6 nS thl6^ a ^, I am strong
V
p6 nh' t k5k, he is vain
p6 ning' ro dk, it is the stronger
p6 nin'' rft, the stronger
pe nlq tft' rdt kft kft, I play at trying to
lift it
pS nlr^ *lfi kuk, put some straw in my boots
pin^rfik, socks woven from grass, foot
covering
penfiq'kftk, grass dried and prepared for
use in native boots
p6 nfiq shft^ k5 ft = pi nfiq shft' kft kft, I ought,
I ought to do it
p6 nfiq thlfiq'' t5 ft, I do badly (on purpose,
understood)
pi Ok', he is dead (i.e., done) (idiom)
pi' 6q rft, * au revoir * (idiom)
pi' 5q toft (neg., piOqtiiri'tift), Ido
pi 5rq' tft kft, I make it
pi pi yu' gwik, it is true
pi pi y^n' rft tik, it is not true
pi' pik, pi' pim, true doing (suffix)
pir thli nft' kft, I always do it
pir thli nftr' 1&' to ft, I always do much, or
many things
pir thli nft' t5 ft, I always do
pi ru' tft kft, I exhaust it
pi rfi' t5 ft, I have no more
pi tft chft hft' kft, all I can, my utmost
pi tft chft hftm'tfin, according to my ability
pi tft cha' kft kft, it b my utmost endeavor
pi tft' chim tfin, with all my might
pi tftlth' kSr tdk, it is just enough, just right
pi tftlth kfin ri' td ft, I had not enough
pi tft nftq' kft ghft, it suffices me
V
pi tftng k 8ft' kik, there was onef (and it is
yet, understood)
pi tftng k 8fi' klo ft, I think I have it
pi tft ti' II gnOk, big as possible
pi tft' t kuk, they are both equal
pi tau' ^ft, I have enough
pi thiil' rft ft hwft, it may be I
pi thlU rft ft' ^, maybe I did
pithlfik', pithlfi'rfim, the having done,
which is done
pi' thifir kftk, which is to be done
pi'thlfirkftkft, pi' thifir kft mft, it is my
deed to do
pi' tik klfi kfl, expresses on account of, by
reason of, for
pit naoq'ti ft, I may not = * non licet mihi'
pit n xUth' ku mft, when I do not
pi tfi' ^iift, I am an adept, accustomed
pi tfiq chft rft yauq' td ft, I am an adept,
skilled in using the bow
pi fi' ^ft, I am doing
pi fi' gwd ft, I am, exist
pi fi' nik, the doing
pi fin ill' rft ft, the late, deceased (idiom)
pi fi rfif kft, my departed ones (idiom)
pi yft thifiq'td ft, I overdo
pi yi' kft, pi' win, pi' wi ft, my place to do
pi yi' td ft, I have no place to do
pi ying' kft tik, it can serve yet, can be used
yet (idiom)
pi ylq Id' to ft, I haye no place (i.e., no
special)
pi'wik, pi'wim, work place
piyfts'kftk, name given to the game of
checkers or draughts
pi yfts kftq' to ft, I play checkers
pi yfts kftr' Mk, checker-board
pi yfts Id' to ft, I have no men (i.e., checkers)
pi' yi ft, do I make ?
piyfiithllq'kift = piyfiithllq'kftkft, I
fail
piyfi'gftkft = piyfin'rfttftkft, I want it
pi yfi gi ft' kd ft, I would like
pi yfi'ghft = pi'ft kft, I do, I make it
pi yfilth' hftn kft, my selections = my wanted
things
pi yfi' nOk, the desire to do
pi 3rfin rirq' kft, I destroy it
pi yfin rSr ris' tft, destroyer
pi 3rfiq' td ft (neg., pi yfin ri' to ft), I want
pi yfi' tii, that will do now (idiom)
pi, pim, hatch of a kiyak, mouth of a
river
pif kftq' kft, I let him do it
pif kin nS, without me
pif tft kft, I produce it, unpack or untie
pi' ghft, its mouth (i.e., of a stream)
pIk, pim, real (suffix)
pi kftn' II ^Ok, the one who is above
pi kirq t5 rft' kft, I strike him with something
pi kirq tfi' tftk, native axe (Kuskokwim)
pi ki' tft kft, I give it
pIk' kft, it is his
pIk kft' i^ft, he owns me, he supports me
362
plk ke'9 1( kl, 1 make it for him
taU'aaU, my g^l, a. little trifle given
me gratis
plkT kt yan, pik' U yd tflm, a trifling gift
pik kU ku' t9k, wauld i< vere mine I
plk'krtldni, pIk bi m nl' kBn, from no-
where
pIk krl yi' ko 1. I try hard (i^., for >
moment only)
pik'nl, pi'kam. the top one
^uii'iit, 1 without doing
pIk ihl' ) tSk, it is not yet
pi' ilK'ma, befotu (in composition)
pi 111 la A ghS. I am making
pU U r kl kl, I make it
pule lie flm toi, fail to make
^ li « Un' li t* Ul, 1 do not make it
^ l« Ik ni thiaq' U U, I do it wrong, badlj
(but without intending)
pn It ik ikDn liiS-a, I do not allow him
pD » tk' ate, pll H or aUn, maker
pU If 16 1' bit tS I, 1 do well, do good work
^ij'iUlk, the making
pnii til' 'Tfk, workshop, working place
pn W ti ki. I do to him, or for him
pU le ta' gU, I am accustomed to do
pn»r^l, r make
pnityS'gnA, pniiTflld'gwii, I am a
good worker
pnili'U, a doer
pn 15 a' kit te I, I do it well
^TJd'gnj, I am doing
pOthhS'ikl, I did it
^th h6 &' gaS. I did
pUth'kl, my having done, my deed in the
pnth' kt k«. it is my deed
plnggiiaun'ktMi, intelligent
ping gD>' jwin, three pairs
plng^gnflq'toA, 1 am getting worse
ping giiEqU' tut, they play hop, skip, and
jump
[dng ^ yCq' ki nQk, threefold
ping pu ySiq' tin kl, I have three
ping ^i' yu ilk, third
ping fill yu' It Bi. on the third
ping ^i yflg" 'nOk. a native
and a quarter inches
ping pil yfl' gfit, there are t
ping ghi' yQ lin, eight pairs
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
ping S^' yllD, three
plng^'yfln I'pilt, linty (i.e., three
twenties)
plnggbl'yaD klo'nlrii Idkiteimtoexpress
a triangle
ping ^ yOn' U gSk, eighth
plnggMyunHEit'nt, inoron the ughth
plnggUyun'IIsglii, eight
plug ghl yfln U gtq' tin ki, I have eight
ping glJ ySn ISq' kS ndk, eightfold
plug gill' yO iia, tenn for Wednesday
plDggolyQ'tSI, I got three
ping' ki til, 1 have
plng'klng'nQr'ml, expresses even though,
although
ping' k nSk. the having
ping'nl, the one back there
pIngDik'kil, I try
ping nik" n£k. energy
plng'yok. jiJii up there 1
pin kiga' ghwQ, do it again
pin kiq Chi Ut' oik, you most not do it again
pin Uq' tiki, 1 do it again, I repeat it
pio Uq tf q kaUf ki nl, I resolved not to do
plnklq ti'itbvO, do it over and over
pin Uq ti' rl U, I do it over and over
pin nik ai'ki U, I ought to do it
plnnlqtirfif kika. I piny with i1
pin rl cbiq'kt, I would not do it
plD ti U li' ki, I almost do it
pio tita' iniq ki, I cannot do it at all
pin t>' ta I, I cannot (often used to express
no)
pin iB tar k« n«, I without fail
plndf chii. do I not make?
I>lD'rItIi,do not)
pin' vS i, I make rope (native way of cutting
a hide into strips)
jdq kOn' ^li i, I encounter
piq' ti UU I meet him
plq tU ol yii' I tSk, it is unfrequented
pIq til nl ya' ni nC, unfrequented
[d rfii kCm' Idi, If I meet him
pli hi tbll fl' gid, I make straw rope = plait
pllbl'tUiik, cord made from straw
plik' aik ^imperative suffix) (493)
plr* ni fcek, a head wind
^rq chi' kim klo, I will meet you
VOCABl/LARV
363
pirq^ chSr tSk, the blizzard rages
pirq t W r& St, the large double fish-trap
pish tS ^fi' ^hft, I work for him = I am his
workman
pish t }sMf k&, my workman
pis' k& k&, I order him to do
pis' Idl hrX nfik, that which I am ordered
to do
pis kll hrftf nfiiit to the place I am ordered
pis Idl hfin r& chi' rft k&, I do not order him
to do it
pis'" kfin, a duty
pis kQn r& ti'k&, I tell him not to do it
pis kfi' t U, my duty, what I am ordered
to do
pIssSq'tdft, I hunt
piszdrq'tdfl, I hunt (Nunivak = Tununa)
pi tft' Uk, a kiyak with three hatches
pltin^kft, my game, the amount brought
back from a hunt
pit gft rftn' kl, I shot it (i.e., with an arrow)
pi thlSq' k& kl, my end, what I have to do
pi thUl ri r gnA, perhaps I did
pi thlln' n& dk, quoth he
pit kll' t5 X, I shoot with the bow
pit' mik, a dead-fall trap
pit m5q' t5 ft, I go to the mouth of the river
pit sft'kld kfl, intending
pit sft' ko ft, I feign
pit sft kfif kS nft' ku, without intending
pit'sft kfin, intention of doing
plt'stftkft, I allow him
pit stft rO ch§' yft r&k, an accusation
pit tlq chft' td ft, I discharge an arrow
pit tlq' chaun, arrow; also name of the
constellation Orion
pit tu' gft kft. Hasten or tie (dog, understood)
pit tfiq' chft rftk, native lance or javelin
pi tfl' ^hft, I am accustomed
ply zhe ft rft' kft, I finish it (Tununa)
piyQq'tft kft, I present him food
piz zft kir ra St, name given to the Innuit
of the Yukon Delta by those on the
Kuskokwim
plz zft' kiiq to ft, I speak as the Delta Innuit
plA' g§ nftt, term for imported rope
pl5k, plfim, ashes (Tununa)
plulth'kft, my passage
pIQm' ghun, tool for scraping skins
pifiq ksi' t5k, it has not yet calmed down
pliiq' to ft, plu' gft kft, I pass
plQq'tdk, it calms down (i.e., it passes)
(idiom)
po ft thlah' ghft, I dance
p5 ch6 kftq' t5 ft, I fall face downwards
po kftq' t5 ft, I bump my head
p5 k6' chftk, term for a button
po kS chft' kft kft, expresses I button it
po Ug ^h5q' t5 ft, I improve more
p5 klq' t5 ft, I improve
po klft' nSrq tdk, it is hot
p5 klft nil' rft ft, hot
prft'rftkft, I wipe it
i thlft' gd ft, I stray, get lost
^ tUft' tft kft, lied him astray
i thlau' ghft, I am lost
^ thlo' ftn, having passed, elapsed
^ thlfiq' t5k, it elapses
^ tfing' tft, dorsal fin, spines along the back
of a fish
pflg gS 5rq' t5 ft, I imagine
pfi' gd ft, I enter a house
pfig wS yS' thlftq tdk, it rises to the surface,
it bobs up
pQg' yft rftk, entrance hole in the floor of
native house
pd kft' § ^ftk, wisdom
puk chft ko' nftk, do not move = keep still
puk chl thlSq'td ft, I move quickly, dodge
puk' kor* wit, back of the hand
pfik' sdk = pfik' sat, egg
pak' sum T' zhe ft, yolk of egg
pjik' sum kll' tS, eggshell
pjik sii' td ft, I gather eggs
pfik tft kO' tftk, the float used on fish-nets
piik til gh6q' to ft, I am tired walking
pfik tilth' kft, my walking
piik t Iftq' t5 ft, I can walk, am able to
piik' t5 ft, I move
pQ 1ft rftq' td ft, I hunt in the woods
pQ' ling tftk, expresses often
pu ling' tft kft, I frequently do it
pQl Ift' g5 ft, I stray (in the woods)
pul lau' gnft, I go through the woods,
traverse
ptil 1! yft rftq kwlrq' t5 ft, I go along the wood
path
pul U yft rftq' pdt, path made by going for
wood
pfil lug' 'nftk, mud, mire
pfil Ifig' nftq k5k, it makes muddy (said of
wet weather)
364
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
pfil Ifiq'' thld n§, he smears himself
pfil Ifiq' td ft, I am dirty, muddy, smeared
pdlq^ kSk, the midrib of a leaf
pfilth'kflt5&, I go through
pfin g& lis kaim r6^ td ft, I need feel no anxiety
pfin gft'' tft kft, I am anxious about him
pfingft^tdft, I worry
pflng gftq' thlfiq, anxiety, concern, worry
pttng gild kfi chu' chd ft, the same as pttng-
^Sqpftk, but very small
pfing gnd ku chQ^ hwdk, the same, large
enough for a few steps
pfing gh6q^ pftk, small hillocks scattered
over the tundra
pfl^nSk, the having
pfi pS^ k§, one with smallpox
pfip^ sG Uk, crab
pfip sfi Uk sfiq^ t5 ft, I go crabbing, hunt crabs
pfip sfiq' td ft, I use scissors, I cut with
pHq chft ^' gnft, I curve it
pQq chl^ sfin, mould for curving the front of
the runners of a sled
p8q hreu' chS tilt, native tool for carding
pfiq' tft kft, I let him go, free him
pfiq' tank, it floats
pfiq' taiin, lung (Tununa)
pfiq tin' rft tdk, it is not strong
pfiq' t inth hftn kft, what I use no more
pfif t5 ft, I bend my head
pfi tfis' kftk, pillow
pfi yft lau' ^ift, I cook
pfi yi' i9 tdk, the swelling subsides
pfi' y5kf it swells, inflames
pfi 3rll' rft ft, smoking
pfi ylrq' tSk, it smokes
pfi ylr' 'yft rftk, chimney, smoke pipe
pfi'ydkf smoke
pfi ydk' nfik, soot
pfi y5q' chft vik, place to smoke dried fish
pfi y5q' kftk, term for gunpowder (Le., what
will be smoke)
pfi yoq' kft thlfik, powder grime
pfi y5q tfi' tftk, pipe for tobacco
rft' S nft kft, my voice
rft h nftk' k chS fi ghft, I have a good voice
rft S ni' rfi t5 ft, I am hoarse, I have no voice
rft' thlfik, an old or stale fish roe
rS, xlk, rit, fish roe
rSt'ttSk, without (suffix)
ffa mlq' chfin, washbowl
f h mlq' to ft, I wash my face
sft gS ghi y^ wftn' kft, I want them in a row
or line
aft' gS naut, they are in a row
sft' kft sSk, a grade in sorcery next to that
of a tuyuk
sft li' yftk, a summer storehouse for fish
sftq chim' numk, it is spread out
sftq ko ftr rft et, which are nearly in a line,
name of a constellation
sftq'tft kft, I open, unfold it, spread it
se yft' td ft, I emerge from woods, etc.
%h yuk', sparrow
sTq' t5 ft, I cut up salmon for drying
skftf tftn kft, I scatter them
8ku' tftk, the sheet rope in native sailboat
sift, slftm, weather, sky, out of doors
sift' ghft to ft, I realize
sift \}k! ko 5k, it changes suddenly to warmer
weather
sift' kft, my senses
sift kft chS' Q ^hft, I am out (Le., of doors)
sift kft k6' nft, you must be careful
sift' kft kS G, be careful of it
sift' klr tSk, it is fine weather
sift Idl ho' kfi mft, if I had been careful
sift k td ri nftq' t5k, it clears up at last (the
weather)
sift Uk' k ^hft, advise me
sift Ur' rft kft, I advise him
slftm kU le g5q' tft, observer of the universe,
old term for God
slftm nftn ^Ith' hift nfin, untU the end of
the world
slftm pe 5q' tl hrft ft, creation of the world
slftng chftq' kft, term for I punish him
slftng chftq' t5 ft, I reflect
slftng kSr thlftq' t5 ft, I have good sense
slftng kin' rft t5k, he is a fool = has no sense
VOCABULAJiy
365
sUlng^ thlfiq tdk, it is bad weather
%W Bhfin, term for thermometers, etc.
sU' thlfik, rain
bU thlfiq k& t& yfig' nl' kdk, it looks as if it
was about to rain
%VSi' thlfirq t5k, it rains
sirgdX, I whet
si!'" U gndk, an idiot, one without intelligence
alln, whetstone
all' t5 ft, I am idiotic, I lack intellect
Bl5q tftr rl yft t5q' t5 ft, I go sliding (amuse-
ment)
8l5q' t5 ft, I slide on the ice for fun
Bldr tftq' to ft, I slide (chUd's word)
snft'' ft kft, I go by its shore (definite)
snftk, the banks (dual)
Bnft]< 'mS fit, coast dwellers
snft Bfiq'' t5 ft, I hunt along the shore
snS, its bank or edge
snSk'tftk, another term for bear (Le., that
feeds along the bank)
snSq k5]< to ft, I go along the bank = walk
snSq^ shlq tdk, it is too close to the bank or
edge
sn6q't5 ft, I go along the shore
spitch' kftt, matches (Russian)
Btft, doer (suffix)
Btft mft'' ko nS, in four
8tft mft'' k5 nfik, four times, fourfold
Btft mft"* to ft, I get four
Btft mauq'' tftn kft, I have four
Btft mft^ w5k, it is four
Btft mSk', fourth
Btft^mSn, four
Btft^ mSn %' piftt, eighty
Btft' m6 xln, term for Thursday
Btft'' mS lit n6, on Thursday
Btft' min, four pairs
BtS, its maker (suffix)
Bto' ftk, the white whale or beluga
Bto kft' t5 ft, I drift down with the current
Btd' gnft, I am drifting
Btiik, finger-nail
Btu kft' t5 ft, I knock, tap with my nails
Btu mS ft' to ft, I scratch, to hurt
Btfim' kft rhft, it clutches it (bird of prey)
Bfik, sweat
Bfik'ktdft, I sweat
Bfin' nftk, sailboat (Russian, Kuskokwim)
Bfiq'tdk, he is tall
tft' chSk, bay, native name of St. Michael
tftft&k,clam
tftg'gd ft, I come = up from shore (861)
tftg g5q' td ft, I go inland
tft' ghfin, harpoon (large size)
a g5' ft kft, I hold it
tft ga mft ft' kft kft, I have hold of it
tftgamftftkBfiqyft'kftkft, I offer to take
hold of it
tft gu' m§ ftt, expresses weapons in general
tft gang nft kft' kft, I try to take it
tft gtis' t kftk, expresses soldier, etc., one
who will take captive
a gfi thlft gft' kft, I grab it
a ga' tit ch5 ftq chSk k5 ft, I will take a little
agatlftk'tdft, I snatch
tft gaf n5k, taking
tft ga yftq p6 ftq' kft, I start to take it but
do not
tft ga' yft rftk, handle, thing to take by
a ga' yft rft kft, I would take- it
tft ga' y^n, native basket
tft ga' yttq pft ft' rft kft, I start to touch him
but withdraw
tft' httn, in that direction
tft' kftk, vein
tft kft' kft kft, I honor him
tft' kft nfik, stick to hold a kettle over the
fire
tft k§' tft kft, I change my mind
tft ket nft rft' kft, I kill it (at one blow)
tft k5 a' ^iift, I reconsider ; also means I cut
a vein
tftk'fft, oh, how long I
tftk f ft k5q' tft, it is too long
tftk fg ft 1ft' mft, because I do not see far
tftkfe ft'U ^dk, one with weak sight
tftkfS ft'td ft, I have poor sight
tft Un' ro dk a' mS, it is longer than thb
tftk kft yft k5' nftk, do not change your mind
tftk Idk kaim liq' t5 ft, I am determined
tftk k! yft' lu n£, oblong
tftkklftq't5ft« I lie down
ak'koft, I finish
366
ESSENTIALS OF INTUIT
tAk' k5 Ue, provision for a journey
tAk kil' kA, the brown bear
t&k kO^ kAm ft' mb ft, a brown bear's skin
tftk ka' kftm Iq' ti, a bear's den
tftk kfi' kftt t5 ft, I kill a brown bear
tftk kw§' g5 ft, I look after the fish-trap
tftk mftr hrftt, old clothes, etc.
tftk nft thliiq' tft kft, I do it carelessly (Le., I
end it badly)
tftk dk klarq' t5 ft, I reverence
tft k5 mau'' ghft, I am in readiness
tftkd'tdft, I finish
tft k5 tfik Shi' t5 ft, I have not ended yet
tftk" skft kft, I Stop him
tftk sfi kftq'' t5 ft, I am weary
tftk sQ koV tft kft, I am tired of it
tftk'tft. Id 3rfi'tQm, how long
tftk' tatik, hwft' tfi, it is so long, it is this long
tftk this ftq' t5 ft, I do good work (i.e., I end
it well)
tft kfif kft rft' kft, I make him stop
tft kfi mftn' lil ^5k, it is not ready
tft kfim chfi kft' kft, I have mercy on him
tft kflm chfi tftr rft et, the merciful ones
tft kfi' mS fit, the people there, the residents
there
tft kfl mXf t5 ft, I am in presence of
tft kflm' nS, before me, in my presence
tft' kfir'nftk, honor
tft kfir' nftq' kSk, it is honorable
akuyftq'tdft, I reflect
tft kfi yft' rft kft, I look back at it
tft kfi yft rft yS kft' kft, I turn and look at him
tft kfl yft' to ft, I turn away
tft' Ilk, place where (suffix)
tftl IS' nfik, shadow
tftl Ifi' glift, I use a bodkin
tftl' Ifin, native bodkin of ivory
tftl Id yftn' kft, my fish-trap
tftl Ifi yft' nfik, native measure, fifty-four
inches
tftl IQ yftq' pSt, large fish-trap (used for white-
fish)
tftl Ifi yftq pir' *yik, place for setting one of
the large fish-traps
tftl Ifi y§t', the small variety of fish-trap
tft'mft, at once
tft mft' Un kft, all my lost things
tft mft klau' gw5k, it is almost all
tft mftlth' kSk, aU
tft mftlth kfi' gw5k, it is entire
tft mftlth kfin zH' ^k, what is not entire
tft mftn' U ^bttk, the one who is over there
tft mftn tl ^hSq' k t5 ft, I tire of staying there
tft mftn' tSk, it is there
tft mftq' Un kft, all of both
tft mft' rft kft, I lose it
tft mS' nS, everywhere
tft mSn' t5k, it is everywhere
tft mi', there it is
tft mit' nS, expresses any time
tftm IQ rfi tin' kft, I tattoo him
tftm Ifi' rfi tit, tattoo marks on chin, etc.
tftm md ft' gft kft, I chew it
tft'mfllfi, chin
tftng, see I behold ! there I
tftn' gftk, darkness
tftn' gftq pSt, a variety of native berry
tftn' gftq stSk, tftng' gfiq stSk, it is dark
tftng' Srq stSk, it is visible, it lets itself be
seen
tftng gau hftng £bJSi' rSk, a bad boy
tftng gaii' hd 15k, boy
tftng gaii hfi Ifl chfi' ghftk, a nice boy
tftng ghin rfin' r6rq tSk, it is no longer to be
seen
tftng ^fiq aft' kft, I look for in vain
tftng ^fiq thlft rft' kft, I usually see it
tftng hfi mftq' kftk, that which is to be seen
tftng hfi mail' ghft, I am seen
tftng hfi tfik 81' t5 ft, I see no effect
tftng kS' tdk, it is dark (without light)
tftng' kig tit ti h5k, there was no light
tftng' kik, light (used also for glory)
tftng kil' rft ft, shining (used also for holy)
tftng klq' pft, most brilliant = how j^orious
tftng klq' std ft, I become holy
tftng kiq tail' nft nS, without light
tftng kiq' tdk, it shines
tftng IS dq' t5 ft, I repair my snowshoes
tftng 15 ftq't5 ft, I walk on snowshoes
tftng 15 rftng r5't5 ft, I do not t&e snowshoes
tftng Ifi' 5 15 ft, I have no snowshoes
tftng' IQk, a snowshoe
tftng Ifink' t5 ft, I have snowshoes
tftng Ifi rft' thlfit, the Via Lactea (Le., snow-
shoe track)
tftng yft gft' kft, I see him
tftng y<h' kft, what I saw = my seen thing
tftng vau' rft kft, I gaze at it
tftng yS ft' Ifiq t5 ft, I scowl
tftng vuk si' tft kft, I never see it
VOCABl/LARV
367
tftp^ rflk, native rope
tftp^ tft kft, I fold it over, double it
tftpt&rr&gk, expresses a pocket knife,
which folds over twice
tftp tft' rl yX rflk, another term for a pen-
knife
tiq ch6 a' ^hl, I win (Le., in gambling)
tftq chir rX' k&, I summon him
t&qhrd'tit, bunch of twigs used in the
vapor bath
tftq hr§ Q' ^hH, I use the taqhretit to pro-
mote perspiration
tiq' tA k&, I take it up from (Le., the water)
tft ift' y5k, salt
tft r& yOk' fftk, a king salmon
ti r& y5k f&k tSq'" to ft, I eat king salmon
tftrftySkfftktdrlyfiq'toft, I want to eat
some king salmon
tft rft ySk'fS ylk, June (salmon season)
tftr6^k2kft, I am on the lookout for him
(i.e., to defend myself)
tft r§' nft kft, I notice it
tft r^n^ gho ft, I understand
tft rin^ nft kft, I understand him
tft' rSn rftk, picture
tft r$n rft d]< rfl tftk, term for a mirror, look-
ing glass
tft rSn rft shftq' tSk, he evokes the ^ott
tft rSn rft fiq' to ft, I look in a mirror
tft rSn r§ fi' hfin, term for a mirror
tft ling nftk sft'' kft kft, I ought to notice
tft zlq saiiq'' tftn kft, I protect my property
tft zlq sauq' t5 ft, I look out for myself
tft rfi^ man
tft rfl yftq' rft rfin, ornament held in the hands
during a dance
tfts sG kft' kft, I lead him by the hand
tfts' t5q t5k, expresses it does not fit
tfts to' rft kft, expresses it does not fit me
(i.e., I exceed it)
tft tft' m5 ft, I get startled
tft tftm' tft kft, I startle him
tft' this kft, my arm
tft thlSr' mS xln, term for Friday
tft thlSr' pi kft, my right arm
tft thllk Ir' rfik, his foreleg
tft thllrq'tSkf he has a broken arm
tft thlfir nft pSt' IS, I am very glad of it
tft thlfir yak' td ft, I am bashful
tftt kft ft' kft, I put it up on supports
tftt kS IS' kS a, put it up on supports
tftt kS mftl' rft ft, which is on supports
tftf Idk, supports (i.e., four poles or oars
tied in pairs and extended)
tftt Idm' mauk, it is on supports
tftt IS mft' k5 nfik, five times, fivefold
tftt IS mau' gtit, there are five
tftt IS mauq'tftn kft, I kUl five, get five
tftt IS' mSk, fifth
tftt IS' mSn, five
tftt IS' mSn S' pS ftt, one hundred
tftt IS mSf nS, on the fifth
tftt IS' min, five pairs
tftt' stakfin, hope
tftt 8tfi kfi ti kft'kft, I hope
tftt tlS' ft hiftt, bracelet
tft' tflk, forehead
ta'u' ghSk, he is the one
tail ^5q chft ft' kft, I know he is the one
tau ^Q chS' tft kft, I cannot say that he is
the one
tail ^fi' fnft, I am that one
tau ^fiq chin rft tft' kft, I did not find out
that he is the one
tao' gwftm, but, only
tail' mfik, expresses that is why
tail' nft, taiim, that, that one
tail' nftk, term for whiskey (corruption of
English tonic)
taiinftr''vlk, term for saloon (place where
whiskey may be had)
tail' ghS nftk, for no reason
tail ghfi ^S' Ifi kfl, in vain
tft' zhSk, bay (St Michael's trading post)
tchflp&q'tdft, I blow
tchfip' pfit, drifting ice floes = blown about
t hftlth' kSk, rock or large stone
t hftlth' ko pftk, a large rock
this' ft kft, I place it
this' ghS nftk, for no reason
this hfti'ft kft, first I replace it
this m6q to' rft kft, I urge him
this mu rft' kft, I notify him
this' rftk, an orphan
this rft rail' gw5 ft, I am an orphan
this rft rail' bd 10k, a poor boy, an orphan
boy
this rft ratiq' hd Ifi gw5 ft, I am an orphan
boy
this thlfiq' kft nttk, the placmg or putting
this yS kft' kft, I put it, place it
this yS' tft kft, I have no place to put it
368
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
thr gnUq tSk, it leaks
thllm'' mS kfln, in vain, by oneself
tbllng^ \ gnSk, in vain
thlmlU a bit (suffix)
thld^'ftk, holiness
thlo & tfin^ r& tSk, it is worn out, no good
thld'kSU, my bolas
thl5' kuk, bolas, weapon for capturing geese
thl6q^ til kl, I arrange it
thld §' g5 ft, I am well, happy
thliiq, old (suffix)
ti &' tft kft t& kr ghwfl, when he is about to
bring it
ia! chSr t5k, it is foggy, there is a fog
tich kft' td ft, I approach
ti' Sm gndk, the absent one
ti^ § tft kft, I hand it over, bring it .
tif kftlth kfin rft tft' kft, I prevent his coming,
hinder him
tif^kfttdk, it storms
^' gftk, a comer
tiggliagft'kft, I steal it
tig gl Ifiq' to ft, I am a thief, I steal
tig gw6^ go ft, I reclaim, take back
tlg^Unfik, theft
tig rthlfik, thief
tik kftq^ kft, I conceal, bury it
tilth'' kft, my coming
tim' mak, the two strips of the sled on which
the runners are put
ting ail 18 u' ghft, I shoot on the wing
ting ghaiir rft ft, something flying
ting ^hn^ rft nft kdk, aft wind (i.e., good for
sailing)
t^g ghn rail' tftk, a sail
ting' la kft, my fist
ting 10 wft' kft, I strike him with my fist =
I fist him
ting mft ft' chfi ^hftk, a nice little bird
ting mft Sng^ chS kSk, it will soon be the
goose season
ting mft ft' ndk, the annual coming of the
geese, ducks, swans, etc.
ting mft ftr' 'vik, arrival of the geese
ting mft ft 85q' to ft, I hunt geese
ting' mft ftt ing ^a' tSt, July
ting' mft ftt ting ^fi' tet, August
ting mS i' yftk, bird
ting nail' t5k, it flies, soars
ting' n5k, it flies
tin klq'to ft, I come again, return
tis' kft kft, I call him, make him come
ti Bfi S ti' t5 ft, I have nothing to come in,
no conveyance, boat or sled
ti' sftn, a conveyance of any sort
ti' tiik, haze, fog
ti' wik, source, origin
ti yftr^ 'nfl kft, my wrist
ti yft' mft, away
ti yh mftn' tSk, he is away
ti yft mftf mfin, expresses accidentally with
verbs of finding, etc.
ti yftm' ^dk, absent
ti jrfi'ndk, the desire to come
t k6f kft rft yfiq t5 ft, expresses I am home-
sick, wishing to return
t k5' t5 ft, t kS' tft kft, I come, I bring it (842)
t kS r tft kft, I come with it
t Idk', t kSm^, the wax in the ear
t kSk', the index finger
t mft', torso, body deprived of head and
limbs
t mft' kft, my body
tmft'thlfik, dried fish
t nfik' thlfir tdk, it aches
t5 ftlth', so (abbreviated form)
t5 ftm' tftt Ifi, and so
t6 ft' n€, over there
t5 ftn tft rft thlft n§' a ^hft, I am over there
yet
td ftn' td ft, I am over there
tdft'piftk, just like
t5 ft' thlftm, t5'i ftm, again
tSft'thlft, and then
t5 ft' this tau' nft, so be it
to ft this' to ft, and so then
to ft' thlfl, td ftm' thlfl, then
td ft' thlfl hdk, and so then
to ft' thlfi h5k ftm, and so then again
to ft' thlfl h5k hw!, and so it is then
t5 ft thlu' n8, therefore, that is why
to ft' tii, thus, this way, so
to ft tii n&f kft rft' kft, I determine it thus
td ft' ^ thlu, and thus
to ft tft thlfi chfi 1ft', and so on
td ft virq' td ft, I go thither
td ft yflq thli' nfik, just the right place
td ft' vfit, yonder (motion towards)
tdh' hlfik, Adam*s apple
td'i, all right = enough, yes, just so, etc.
. to' i d kd kft, I suppose, take it for granted
td' I ghdk, it is all, it is the end
VOCABULARY
369
t5 1 QifLn' rft t5k, neg. of tdignfik, expresses
• au revoir,* farewell
tdl^fin'r&tdk t5 i ya' hwft, good by
td''ihdk, just so
to' i U, is it all right ?
to' i y^ hwft, of course
t5k klo' rfl U, I designate it, call it
tOk'mlk, bucket (Russian)
to k5 chAq tSk' tS ti, who come to slay
tSkdche'thlfik, t5k5ch$tri6, tokfitiri^-
yQle, murderer
t5 W chin nfik, murder
t5ko'^, I die
to k5 m&l' rfl &, t5 k5 mflr rft St, the deceased,
the dead
t5 k5 mil rfl &q' tftk, thing belonging to the
dead
td ko mil ri r t& Hk, graveyard
td k5' mauk, he is dead
t5 k5' nik, death
t5 ko nlq' kSk, deadly
t5' ko nfir> 16, a kUler
to' kd nSr' Ilk, one having power to kill
t5 ko nl It' tdk, that he may die
t5 kd sti 1§ I' kl, I save him from death
t5 ko' thlfiq, the deceased person
td ko y^ §r U ^nfik, immortal, one who is
deathless
t5 kfl chlq td rl' kl, I went to kill it
tdkfi'tftkl, I kill him
t5 ku' tl kl, my murdered one, whom I killed
tdq'tuUk, lynx
tq' hi, the bottom
tq'hinfin, Smiq'pdm, to the bottom of
the sea
tq hd fi' ^I, I am stiff in my joints
tr6 kin' ny Ik, wolverine
tfi Im' 85k, native bead ornament
tfi chllth' hiik, hole pierced in lower lip to
hold labret
tfidglq'tol, I dodge
tfif chlq pe Iq' to I, I almost choke
tfif thlfik, a choked person
tfif to I, I choke
tfi ghllth' kSk, near to, a relative
tfi ^Ith' ko kl, my relative
tfig'nfik, spot in a river curve where the
current hits the bank
tfig' rl kl, I ram it, I beat against it
t&k kl Iq' tl kl, I come on it suddenly,
unexpectedly
tfik' nIk, power
tfik' nl kl, my power
tfik ning kl' t5 1, I possess power
tfik'nfik, native measure, three-quarters of
an inch
ta kSq'tfit, they hatch (eggs)
tfik' 8fi kik, bird's tail
tfi kfi'gwd I, I am rich
tfi kfi' td I, I get rich
tfi kfi tfi' kd I, owl
tfi Ifi'klk, tfi Ifi'kl rfik, tfi Ifi kaii' gdk, raven
(this bird has several names)
tfi Ifi' kl rfim ting Ifi rl rllth' hid, the Milky
Way (i.e., the raven's snowshoe track)
tfi' ml (plur., tfi'mfit), track, trail (used
for road)
tfi' mik, hollow of the hand
tfi ml' kl, my palm
tfi ml' Idt, one of the many varieties of
Alaskan berries
tfi mlq' tl kl, I repair it
tfi mlq' td I, I follow its trail
tfim' chl nIk, fun
tttm chl nlq' kdk, funny
tfi mllth' hrlt, an old trail, hard to discern
tfi mi' rfi tdk, there is no trail any more, the
trail is lost
tfim' kl, my trail
tfim kl chin r6' td I, I have not a good trail
or road
tfim ke d' rl kl, I make the road (i.e., beat
down the snow), I guide
tfim kd drq' tl, a road shower = guide, pilot
tfim k 8fi d rfi' tit, unt ravelled
tfim' Id dk, a somnambulist
tfim mil' td I, I make a noise
tfim mil gnfi' ^2il, I am voraciously hungry
tfim' nIk, native bowl for food (large size)
tfim thlfiq thldq' td I, I have a bad road,
hard travel
tfim ti' I tdk, there is no trail
tfi mfik' klfi kfi, expresses through
tfimfing'knfik, opp>ort unity
tfim' yl rit, a long trail
tfing ghfin kd pik' tl, pupil of the eye
tfing'kl, tfing' Ukl, my next brother,
sister
tfing' Id I, next
tfing Id In' 11 ^dk, the third (i.e., the one
next to the second)
tfing II U' rl kl, I put myself next to him
370
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
tdng m&q chS fi' 'j^iiX, I prepare a body for
burial
tang m&q' tft kfl, I lay him in a coffin
tfing nl' k& td ft, I crouch down
tfing rft ^i! zftk, devil (Tununa)
tang rft ghryftk, devil (Yukon)
tfing rft ghr yim &^ ne, hell (abode of the
devil)
tflng^ rft Ilk, sorcerer (i.e., one having a
devil)
tang rft d' gnft, I practise sorcery
tun' nft kft, I give it
tfln nd' ft nS, in behind
tiin no' ftn to ft, I am just behind
tun nu' chfl kft, back of my head
tiinnu'grfln, a slough (a branch which
leaves the river and re-enters it)
ttin nfi' kft, my back
til' ndk, back fat of deer
tttn' stft, the giver
tfin'td, deer
tfin'tum k5' md gft, venison
tfin td' rd ftk, picture of a deer
tdn tu ro ft lie d' ghft, I draw a deer
tdn td sg' gdt, jack-snipe
tdn tu sir'' t5 ft, I hunt deer
tdn' tut Ir* ni' yg ftt, a name for May =
fai^Ti time
tdn td'td le, deer hunter
tdn td tu' Ilk, deer hunting ground
tdn tu' vftk, a moose
tdn tu vftq' chdn, a dog trained to hunt
deer
tdn td yft' gftk, fawn
tdn td ydq' pftk, Ursa Major (i.e., the great
stag)
tu nu' hftk, a bit of deer tallow
td nul' rft ft, black
td ndq' pftk, a black dog
td pftq shft gft' kft, I try to wake him
td pftq' td ft, I rise (i.e., from sleep)
td pail mail' ^hft, I am awake
tu pail tftq' to ft, I breakfast
td p§' gftk, native mat made of grass
td pg' gft kftt, straw suitable for mats, mat
straw
tu p€ gft lis d' ghft, I am making a mat
td piq' to ft, I weave mats
tdp' ker chatin, term for perfume
tdp'p5k, it drifts ashore
tdp psft' k5k, it stinks
tdp pd' mft kftn, when it drifts ashore
tdp pd mft' kid kd, bemg cast ashore
tdp pd'maiik, it is jetsam
tfiq chftr r6 d' glift, I temper it
tuq' hSk, it b hard
t&q' hd tftk, a splint
tdq' kft rftt, fossils
tdq' xh ftk, ermine
td rd'tdk, the two side strips of a sled
td' tft kft, I cross over it
td tft' ro ftt, roseberries
td' t ghft rftk, a grandchild
td t ghft rail* Idq kll' rft Sk, a grandmother and
grandchild
td t ghft rail' 15q' '15 kft, my poor grandchild
td t ghft rail' *lu kft, my friend
td t ghft rail' Id thldq' kft, my false friend
V
tu t ghft thld' gwft, my child (to address)
td tl hu chft' kft, my arrival (past)
tdt mft rft' kft, I step on it
td'^toft, I cross over (859)
td'' tdt, isolated stranded blocks of ice (860)
td yds' kg, constipated
td yd tft' ^hft, I am constipated
tdy y§ ft' Idk, bad, clumsy (suffix)
tdy'yo ft, I go across, portage a canoe from
one creek to another
tdy ywS' nftk, over and over
tdy' yft rftk, portage place
td yd chft' kft, my arrival on the other side
(present)
td y^' gwd ft, I am a ruler
td'ydk, a ruler
td yd' rft kft, I send it over
td y^ ydq'' to ft, I want to send
td zhe' tl rft ft, a cripple
td zhgf nSk, lameness
td zh§t fi rSt' n6k, not being lame
td zhg' td ft, I am lame
td zhg tdf kg nft' nS, I without being lame
tdzh' kft, my shoulder
t yft' tdy yftk, the large snipe
t yg thlg nil' rft ft ft' kftq tft, the setting sun
t yir' t5k, it sets (i.e., the sun)
t ydq' stft kft, I get him to go behind
VOCABULARY
371
U
fi' chS, load
fi ch6 k&^ fhl, he has me as a load, in the
same kiyak
u chS llrq' t5 ft, I load up
a chS^ rft kll, I unload it
d ch6' t5 &, I have no load
d ching^ kfl t5 fl, I have a load
d chd^ ft tSk, vain
d^ chdk, genitalia
d §^ husband
d 6f tftng^ kft tdk, it is round
dSgSft'kdft, I strive
d h' ^5 ft, I marry (woman speaking)
d e^ kft, my husband
d e^ klft kfi, marry me (woman speaking)
d W sko ft, I propose marriage
d §1^ g&k, widow
d e^ 15k, small native spoon
d elth^ kft, d h' thll mft, my quondam husband
d h' ng tSk, she b a widow
d Sn^ kft td tii, have you a husband ?
d g tft chS kft^ ftq td ft, I am going to remain
d 6 tft kft' t5 ft, I stop for a little while
d S tft Iftq' t5 ft, I continue
d 6 tftl ghatiq'' to ft, I am going to abide
d S tftl ^6q' k t5 ft, I tire of staying
d h tftlth' kft, where I am, my place of being
d h tftr thldq kft kft, my life = the time I
will live
d 6 tft nftq' aft k5 ft, I ought to be
d 6 tft tail' ^nft, I am, I stay
d h taiiq kaii' gw5 ft, I must, I have to be
d h taiiq' td ft, I am
d S tft vft kdq' t5 ft, I stay too long
d S' tft vik, waiting place
d S tft vi' kft, my stopping place
dStftyl'kftkft, the place where I am to
stay
d S tft yl' kftnkkln, I am with thee
d 6 tft yi Idl kft' kft, the place where I once
was
d S tft ylk Iftlth' kft, the place where I used
to be
d S tft ylk U rft' kft, I used to live with him
d S tft yin' kft, my comrades
detftyft'kSft, I waited
d §' thldq, a husband who deserts his wife
d S' t5 ft, I open my eyes
d h t5q' tdk, we are married
d Sts', cousin (mode of address)
d S' yftq to ft, I encircle, I go around
d 6' yS 1ft tSk, it revolves
dS'vik, December
d 6' yd ft, I go around
d h' vdt mdn, around (with verb of motion)
ftf chd'ftrftkft, I shake it (to get the dust,
snow, etc., off)
ttg^ghft, moss
d ghft' r&n kft, my toes
d ghwdq' tSk, it liquefies
d' gi nft, front, forward part
dgish'kdk dkftm'rftk, put the sled upon
its rack
dg' mft ftn, he passing right through
dg' mft d che d' gnft, I keep on without
stopping
dg' m§ u' tft kft, I go through it without
stopping
d ^iift chS' rftq kft, I coax him
d ghft' gd ftt, beard-like = a moss which re-
sembles hair
d' gliftk, u' glidt, beard
d ghft' Iftk, south
d ghft' Iftk f ftk, the far south
d ghft' Iftk fft ndn, away to the far south
d ghft Iftk fft' rft ndn, to the extreme south
d ^iift Iftk sin' rftt, the most southerly
d ^& U llrq' to ft, I go south
d ghft' Uk, a bearded man
d^Slftq'tdft, I itch
d ghdn' kft, my beard
d fnir' t5 ft, I shave
d gh5 ft' ghft, night coming on me
d ^d^ yftm tich' stS, the Giver of Life
dg'hdWftm yd' ft, the Master of Life
(heathen term)
d ghd yftq katm' r&r tdk, he cannot possibly
live
d gwft' nS, by, on account of, through
d hrfts'kftk, white clay, kaolin
dkftk'fftk, little nearer
d kftk fft kft nSrq' t5 ft, I draw nearer
d kftk fft Urq' t5 ft, I go a little distance
d kftk fail' hdn, soon
d kft' kUk, next one
d kftk 86 gg' nftq t5 ft, I am getting closer
d kftk fk gg y^' ghft, I draw nearer
d kftk' se gllth kft, my approach
372
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
fiUkssrtdfl, I get near
a Uk BbU' ri ft, short, near
Q Uk shlq' t5 ft, I am near
Q kft ml^ tSk, it is heavy
a kft mSq' t5 ft, I tow
fi kft^ ni kil, in the next life
fi kftt mSq' td ft, I approach towards
ii \3b' \l rft kft, I wound him
ii k6 thlfiq^ tft, his wound inflames
fik'ft gftk, ak'fS gftt, willow bashes
fik f6q' t5 ft, I believe
fik fu kft' kft, I believe it
fik ffik kftq kaan rft' tft kft, I cannot possibly
believe it
fik ffik & rXf 8ti, an unbeliever
fik'ffikstft, a believer
fikls'kSrftkft, I aid him
fik kir' kft, my wound
Sk' k5 ft, I embark, enter a boat, canoe, etc.
Qkkdft'gdk, it burns
ftk k5 ftn' rft tdk, it does not kindle
fik ko' hft kft, my son's wife
fik'kSk, it shrivels up
Ilk kdq' pftq tdk, it burns fiercely
fik' k5r sfik, the hood on the native blouse
fik kdr sfiq' td ft, I draw the hood on
fik k5r 8w§' td ft, I throw the hood back
fik' kru nftk, rage
fik kfit k§ uq' td ft, I make kindling
fik kfizh' me, and these I what about them ?
fik' 8hd vik, a winter \'illage
fik' shd ftk, autumn (le., winter-like)
fik' 8h5 ft kftn, when it is autumn
fik shd ft' nft ft rft kftn, when it is about
autumn
fik' shd ftq tdk, it is autumn
fik'shfik, winter
fik shul gbu' ghft, I have headache
fik' shu pftk, all wnter, during the winter
fik shfiq pil' gftn, before winter
fik' shfiq tdk, it is winter
fik'su, head
fik' sfi kft, my head
u' ktik, wound
u' kum chft dk klfl ft' nS, prior to this period
u' kum king gndk klft ft' nft, after this period
u kwft rft' d td ft, I am content
u Id' gft kft, I spread a blanket over him, I
cover him
fi' Idk, native covering of furs, etc. ; also
used for blanket
fi Id kfl tft'rft kft, I cover him up, wrap the
blanket around him
fildq'tdft, I cover myself, I roll up in the
blanket
fi' U fin, mass of sinew (i.e., covering) = to
be dried and used for thread
fi 111 kir' tdk, there is a great rise (i.e., in a
«
river)
fil' Idk, it is flood, incoming tide
fil' Ifi dk, a woman's knife, semilune-shaped,
for cutting furs
fil Ifi dq' td ft, I use an ulluok, I cut with
fil' Ifiq pftk, a great overflow ; used for deluge
fi Idg' yft rfi' tftk, a native maul
fi Idg' yft rfi' tftq pftk, a large maul for driving
wedges
filth' tft kft, I turn it inside out
fi Ifi' hfig' nftk, a marine monster (supposed
to devour whales)
fi IQ' kft, my tongue
Q Ifi' kftk, stone suitable for making uUuoks
Q Iftq kd drq' tdk, he gives an expiring shudder
fi'lfiqtdft, I quiver with pain, convulsive
shudder
Q md kft' kft, I hate him
Q' md kfi, the next time
Q md nftk' fft, an expletive of anger
fi' md nftq kdk, it is hateful
d md u' ^hft, I am long absent
fim' gft kft, I close it
fi mXf kd nft'nd, I without delaying
fim mft' td ft, I groan
fim' md, sharp point of stone
fim' md ft, chft' vfim, harpoon point
fim yfi ft' kft kft, I think
fim yu ft k chd' kft kft, I will consider it
fimyfiftkinrllth'kft, that which I do not
mean
fim y^ ftk 8kd rft' kft, I make him think
fim yfi ftm' kfin fik ffi kft' kft, expresses I be-
lieve in my heart (Le., by my mind)
fim yd ftng' ghd ft, I design
fim yu ftng gfi' tft kft, I plan it
fim y^ gf td ft, expresses I am nervous,
excited, I do not think
fim yu dr' k kfik kft, my meaning
fim yfi dr kd rftq' kft, I am wondering
um yu dr nft dq' td ft, expresses my mind is
troubled
um yfi drq' t kd ft, I ponder over
fim yu dr' t Ulth kft, the thing I think «f
VOCABULARY
373
fim yfi 5r t k5q' td ft, I deliberate
flm yfi Or t kfif kft rft Iftq' kft, I always make
him think of it
flm yfl 6r tfir r& ft, sensible, clear-headed
fi'nft, fi^kflk, Q^kflt, this, these two, these
fi nft^ jin'kflk, fin'kfit, the one down
Q nft'' kft kft, I catch (i.e., fish, game, etc.)
a nftk sftq p6 ft' rft kft, I nearly got it
ii nftng kfl tft' gftk, worthless
ii nftn' U gii5k, the one who is down
fi nftq'' chft ftk, a piece of straight-grain
wood
a nftq chft ftq' t5 ft, I hunt for straight-grain
wood
fi nft thlfiq p6 Q' ghft, I have big hands
fi nft ti rft rft'' ^hft, my hands are cold
Q nfttl' rft ft, one suffering from salmon
poisoning
Q nft' tfi kft, my hands (i.e., my fingers)
Q nftf 'td ft, I am poisoned by salmon bite
(i.e., the fingers are sore)
fi nft' tftk k6, one with a boil or ulcer on his
hand
fi nS ftq' tft kft, I move off, move away
from
a n6 chfln' rft tft kft, I do not want to aban-
don him
a nS 5q' tft kft, I miss it
Q n§st' kft, my deceased father
a n6' tft kft, 1 leave him
Q ne t kft tft' rft lu tft, I am getting ready to
leave you
a nS tlft' rft kft, I used to leave it
fin' gft n§, down there
fin gftn' to ft, I am down there
fin gftq' to ft, I am remaining
fin gft vftq' t5k, it is sunset
fin gft virq' t5 ft, I go down there
fing ^ung se Id' ftk, any large, fierce brute
fing gnung' shftr tftk, animal (contradistinc-
tion to human)
fing gniing' sik, an animal
fing gnu' vft, life
fing gnu vftlth thlfiq' chSk k5 ft, I will have
misfortune
fing ^Q Tail' ghft, I live
fing ghfi vll' rft ft, a suicide
fing ^d w§' thlftq kftt, the resurrection
fing' Idt, nest of a bird
finghoft'^bft, I am benighted, it nights
me
fi nif kft nfik, death tidings
Q nif kft nfiq thlfiq' t5 ft, I have bad news
Q nif kft' td ft, I have news of a death
fi nig' 'nft, the one down there
fi ni yft kft' kft, I call him to accompany me
fin' kft, armpit
fi' n5 ftk, early this morning
fi nd r ftk, very early this morning
fi nfi gft' ghft, it is night to me
Q'nfik, last night
fi nfi kft rft' ^hft, I am benighted, overtaken
by night
fi nfi ko' ft kftn, every night
fi' nfim k5 kft' nS, midnight
Q nfin'rft kfin, just at nightfall
fi nfiq pil' gftn, before it is night
fi nuq'td ft, I stay over night
fi nfiq't5k, it is night
fin wft' klSk, term for morning service
fin wft kd' ft kftn, every day, daily
fin wft' kd ftn, when it was morning
fin wft kd' mS, in the morning
fin wft' ku, to-morrow
fin wft ku chS fi' ghft, I breakfast
fin wft kfi tft t5q' t5 ft, I eat the morning
meal
fin wft kfit' td ft, I depart to-morrow
fin wft yft rft' md, at dawn, in early morn-
ing
Q pftq' to ft, I set out for the spring village
Qp' *nftq kftk, springtime
fip' nftq' kft kfi, next spring
up' nftq' kftq pftk, during the spring
Qp' nftq katiq' tdk, it is spring
fip' nftq ke Tig' mXf to ft, I ahi at a spring
village
fip' nftq kd' ylk, a spring village
fip' nftt, lofty peaks
fip'pdft, I suffocate (i.e., unable to breathe
at high altitudes)
fip'tdft, I pack
fi pfi' tft kft, I malign him
fiq'chftn, the dawn
fiq chft rft kftl' rft dt, sorrowful ones
fiq chft rft ndk' tfi Id, a most distressed person
fiq chft rX' yft rftk, distress, sorrow
fiq fd ft' rfit, bushes
fiq kft 5q' tdk, he cuts firewood
fiq kd ftn' tdk, it is in the back of the house
fiq'kdk, a part of a native house (in the
back)
374
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
&q' kSk, the rear portion of a native house
ftq kfim^ td ft, I am in the rear
dq nS rft' kfln, exactly at dawn
fiq pn^ gftn, before it dawns
fiq' tft kft, I place it up
ftq^ tft kft, I throw it away = I cast it on
the grave
fiq'' tft kftn, daily, every dawn
fiq tftn^ ^ft, the dawn coming on me
fiq'tftt, marine animals
Sq' tftt, the things thrown on a grave
fiqtnkft'tSk, it holds, it contains (said of
pots, kettles, etc.)
fiq' t5 ft, I get up
firk nftk', a hot spring
fir' 'nfiq pftk, all day long, the whole day
fir'rfit, tundra moss
fis k5q t5q' tft kft, I hold him with a cord
(dog, etc.)
fis ku hftq' t5k, he is out of his harness
(dog)
fis kfi rft' kft, I harness him
fis' kti rftt, dog harness
fis ku ri' gft kft, I unharness him
fissu'kfttftk, native tool for getting fire,
fire stick
fis 8U kft tftq' t5 ft, I make fire (i.e., by means
of the fire-stick drill)
Gs' tft kft, I break it
fis' t5k, uz' zSrq kSk, it caves in (river bank,
etc.)
fi sfik chau' tut, term for they crucify (i.e.,
they nail him up)
Q suk chauz' nft nfik, the crucifixion
rtftk (suffix) (218)
G tft kft' kft, I wait for him
G tft kftr g§ nfik, weariness (from waiting)
G tft kftlth' kft, the one I waited for, my
expected one
G tftng' gnft, it burns me
&t chu' e t5k, it is clear, limpid, transparent
Gt' ghfik, a wart
Gthlft'gftkft, I go up to him, draw near
him
fi thlft gftq chft' kft kft, I spring at it (and
miss it)
G thlft gftq' tft kft, I spring at it (and get it)
u thlG veq' kft, my cheeks
fi thlfi' wSk, the cheeks
fi tlt^mfin, to go back home, homewards
fit'kftqtS ft, I go back at once
fit' k kfin, an oar
fit rfi chfiq pft kftq' t5 ft, I am most desirous
to go back
fit rfi chfiq' t5 ft, I want to go back
fit rfi tft'kft, I bring it back
fit rfit' 8t kftk, the bringing back
fits' thlG yftk, whirlwind
fits thlG yftq' t5k, it is a whirlwind
fi tfi mftq' t5 ft, I change for the better, am
better
fi tfi' mftq tSk, it quiets, etc. (said of storms)
fi tG' mft rft, it moderates, changes, etc. (said
' of the weather)
fi tfi mft rft chd ftq' t5 ft, I am getting a little
better
fi tfi mail' ^hft, I recover, get better
fi yft 1ft rft' kft, I always rock it
Gvft'r&kft, I rock it
Q' yaiik, it hatches (birds)
fiy yftq'td ft, I hum, buzz, etc.
fi wft' rftt, fingers
fi wS' h5k, he fights (i.e., dog)
G yft kre IS tftq' t5 ft, I wrap up my neck
G yft' kfik, neck
G yft' kfin kft, my neck
fi yft kw$' \h tftk, dog collar
fi yft' mXk, a talisman, charm worn around
the neck
G yft ming kft' t5 ft, I have a talisman
G yft mXq' to ft, I wear a charm
G yft mXq tG'mft ndk, the wearing of a charm
G yftng' to ft, I look down from a height
G' y5k, you there !
G y^ rft yft' gftt, down (from swans, ducks,
etc.)
Gz ghftn' hrSt, knuckle
Gz' ghwG ndk, a joint
G'z5k, same as Gydk (Tununa)
Gz yftr' to ft, I am crazy
Gz yel' gnSk, a crazy person
Gz ve' to ft, I am absent minded
Gz' vit tSk, alert, smart
Gz wftr xh yG gG nftq' k5 ft, I think I must be
crazy
Gz wS tGl' rft ft, sly
VOCABULARY
375
vS r Ifik, bad (suffix) (208)
vS ft lulth'thlfiq, bad old (suffix)
vik, place where (suffix) (117)
yd'' rhfin, mote, speck
yOrhfi'tdX, I go up
yfiq' tftk, humble-bee = buzzer
Tttq tft' td ft, I gather grass
wftm^ nftq k5k, it is lost time
wfts ke tftq' t5 ft, I keep slipping
wfts knft^ kSk, slippery
wfts ska &q' td ft, I slip
w
wSr tft kft, I twirl it
wi yft' rft kft, I rob him
wi yft rftf ^hft, they despoil me (gambler's
expression)
yft gh' vS kft kft, I extend my arm
yftg^ *lu tfing, they fast = are in mourning
yftg' *iiiik, native measure, arms extended,
seventy-two inches
yftk fft' chd ft, a little way off
yftk' f ik, a slight distance
yftk f ft kft nSrq' to ft, I move off a little
distance .
yftk fft llrq' td ft, I go far off yonder
yftk fftn' II ^5k, the one who is off yonder
yftk fftn^ to ft, I am far off
yftk fft' rft nflk, a little further off
yftk fft' rftn to ft, I am a little further off
yft' kl6k, the last one over yonder
yft' kll kft, my last one over there
yftk' nSr t5k, it blows from the southwest
yftk'nfik, southwest
yft' kdk, a wing
yftk se ge' kft to ft, I withdraw a little
yftk se gg' wft kdq td ft, I am too far off
yftk s8 ge' y^q to ft, I want to go off a little
yftk sS gilth' kft, my withdrawing
yftk s8' ii td ft, I am far apart from him
yftk she kft' pik tdk, it is very far away
yftk shik tftl lu' kd hwft' tft, as far as that
yftk shIk' tatik kft, it is as far as
yftk shin' kft, farther
yftk shin rfin' rft tdk, it is not as far
yftk shiq' pft, oh, how far I
yftk shIq pft kft dq' tdk, it is rather too far off
yftk shIq to' rftl rft ft, the further one
yft'ku Ilk, bird (i.e., winged one)
yft kti' Uq pftk, eagle (i.e., great bird)
yft 1& ftg' nd, on the day before yesterday
3rft lA ft' kfi, the day after to-morrow
yft Ur' nfir' mit' td ft, I am on that side
yft lir' 'nfir r&k, on that side
yftn, yft' tfim, yonder
yft'ne, over there
yftn' U ^dk, the one who is over yonder
yftn' td ft, I am yonder
yftq' td ft, I stretch = extend, I am fasting
yft' rftk (suffix) (217)
yft' ti kft, beside me
yft tim' II ghdk, the one over there
yft tIm' n§ tdk, it is beside me
yft' vut, to over there
yi, there it is over there
yin' rail gwdk, it is a corpse
3rdk, suffix to words of place; a general
vocative
yfi* ft lu, thread made of sinew
y^ ft Id kftng' kft td ft, I have sinew thread
y^ ft lu lid &' ^nft, I make sinew thread
yd ft' rft kft, I search for it
yd ft rdf kft, my song
yd' ftt, spirits
yd' chft kft, my life (my manhood)
yd' chdk, being (manhood)
yd' chd ft, dwarf
yd chd ft rati' gwd ft, I am a small man
yd dl'rik, ghost
yd d' nft nd, uninhabited
yd' d nftn rft tft, nine
yd d nati' gwdt, there are twenty
yd' e ndk, twenty
yd'dndk kdln'ndk chip' pld kd, thirty
yd' e ndk e' pd ftt, four hundred
376
ESSENTIALS OF JNNUIT
jrfl'itSk, there is no one
3rfl gi' rin U, my fingers
jrfl gfl' hwit, a crowd, multitude
jrfl gfl' wlq ting kl tSk, there is a crowd
j^' gw5 i, I land (i.e., from a boat), I am
a man
l^i 'yiq tOk, it is crowded
3rfig'yi tfl' li, a populous place
3rfik, yflt, a man
3^'ki, my man
3rfi' U pik, a true man
yfl ker t& rau' gw5 i, I am a good man
yfl kVr t& rauq^ t5 i, I become a good man
3riikirr&«t, a family
3rfi tilth hfln' ki, my former family
jrfik' siq p&t unexpected arrivals
yflk tfi yu' 18, term for lion (i.e., man eater)
3rfi kfi t& chfig' \k' ri, a place always damp
3rfl kfi' t&k, dampness
3rfi kfi t&q chfi nir nik, a place that does not
get damp
y^ kfi tXq^ tl hr& St, damp things
3rfi kfi tXq' tdk, it is damp
yfl' Uq tdk, populous
3rfil Ifiq'' 've fik, a variety of jay bird
3rfilth'kfik, an abusive term applied to a
man
3rfim' ch&q tX, yfim chi ris' tl, healer, a phy-
sician
yfim' thlfim chik, one of the figures in the
game of cat's cradle
jrfing kfi chA' g&k, an abusive term for a man
yun hrfl' chfi gn&k, a nice young man
yfln hrfl chfi gnfllth' kfik, an unworthy youth
3rfin hrft r<h' kfik, an ugly young man
3rfin hrfl rauq' td &, I am becoming a young
man, reaching the age of
jrfin' ki, my folks
yfln nilq hri rail' gw5k, he is a bachelor, a
young man
yfln' ri tSk, it is not a man
yfln^rSrq tSk, he is dead (i.e., he is no more
man)
yfln'illth hfit, the dead = the ceased to be
folks
j^' pik, the human race
3rfiq pft chig^ yftk, a giant
3rfiq^ pUc, a very tall man« also giant
3rfiq pUth^thlfiq, giant
3rfiq pao' gw5 i, I am a great tall man, a
giant
yfiq' t&k, anything pertaining to man
yfiq'ti Uk, a place where people are
yfiq' t&ng kl t6k, there is a man
yfiq' t&ng kB& kdk, there was a man (who is
yet)
3rfiq ti &' tSk, there is no man
yfiq tfi' t& ki, I fight for him, espouse his
cause
3rfiq tfif sti kX, my champion
jrfi xiq' t5 i, I dance
jrfiriyitSq'tfit, they dance (Le., a native
feast)
yfirq Ifiq' ki, my old parents
yfirq' tSk, she conceives
yfis' ki ki, I bid him to get off
jrfit 11'' 1st, somebody
ylit ti mi ri' mfing, everybody
3rfi ▼< i Ifi' gw5 i, I am a great clumsy man
yfiySi^lfik, a large, careless, awkward
fellow
jrfiy rSrq'" ki, I admire it
yfi' wi ki, I pull off my boot
yfi'wiqki, I pull of! both boots
itfq ki yi' git, goslings = little hissers
z&q' tSk, it hisses
INDEX
[Figures refer to sections.]
Absent, expressed by chlitSLune, 510
Absent, expressed by tiyemli, 759
Account of, on : pettkkluku, 745
Account of, on : ugwline, 748
Adjectives, how expressed, 691
Adjutants, 513
Adjutants, synopsis of, 543
Again, expressed by lim, 356
Again, expressed by Mode XLI
Agentialis, 36
Agentialis, transitive, 41
Aino language, Kamtchatka, specimen of,
847
Ainu language, Kurile Islands, specimen
of, 847
Aklimi, doable thirds, 523
Aklim^, examples, 525
Ak^mS, paradigm intransitive, 522
Akam^, paradigm transitive, 524
Akevegika, 851
Akki tamanS, old times, 623
Akklukllt, 853
Akllng, 758
Akm&chaaki, 862
Akutik, 852
All, 650
All, examples, 654
Alone, kahirma, 674
Alone, kema, 668
Am, again, 356
Ami, 530
Ami, examples, 534
Ami, paradigm, 532
Amti hwi, 375
Amthl6k, much, many, 285
And I, to express, 258
And, omission of, supplied by lune, 478
And, on the use of, 6%
And, various ways to express, 701
Aneguyik, 854
Anybody, 762
Any one, 762
Anything, 766
Any time, 775
Anywhere, 772
Aqhlii, the thrasher shark, 835
Aqkik, suffix, 203
Article, 688
Article, examples, 690
Article, how represented, 689
As ... as, as ... so, 722
Aspect, first, 430
Aspect, second, 431
Aspect, third, 432
Aspects of the verb, 422
Assiititut, 856
Ataiichehik, 600
Atauch^k, declension, 581
Athli, another, 279
At least, to express, 538
At once, timi, 754
At6qtoi, itoriki, idioms, 845
Augmentative, in possessive locatives, 401
Augmentative, suffix pik, 223
Auguni, 278
Aun, suffix, 116
Aune, examples : chitsume, etc., 510
Avveukiqke, 857
Because : imi, 535
Because : petikkluku, 745
Behind me, 392
Blacksmith shop, term for, 119
Care, in my, 263
Certain, 645
Certain time, 646
Chi, 308
Chi, modes, 341
Chi, paradigm, 310
Chi, verb forms, 343
Chichoi, 313
Chichughik, 317
Chi^ilgTiuhwi, 336
377
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
ChiBhlii, 337
Chihik, 320
Chlhiki, 321
Chihni. 330
Chiki, 311
Chiki, examplw, IS5
ChikiLk. 3 2
Chikiki. 325
Chikikllki.i27
ChihCnib, 315
CMkTk, 323
Chiklikut6k. 324
ChlknAk. very, 753
ChikOchetioa. 329
Cbikuchtk, 326
CMkutik, 338
ChikwenQq, 24ti
Chillcfirik, 340
Chaiihkak, ilA
Cbiral, 532
Chime, whan, 309
Chim niene, 646
Chingnt. 863
Chinnlki. paradigm, 399
Chinuk, 339
Chipfk. 322
CUqpik, 314
Chit nietne. 646
Chaiihwipii. 265
Cha-un, 319
Chiweyugwi, 334
Chi)inak,il8
Checkers, game of, 831
Ch«k, 152
Chik, paradigm, 154
Chik, possessive, 153
Chfla. slill, 703
Chin, why, 704
Chenmc h5k, 706
Chlgvek, nose beads, 864
Ch!kkad<:-de.83+
ChIk[ili5gh'iin,S50
Chillhkik, 742
CMmniik, 157
Chlmliln, I5S
ChfyikkllggMki, 335
Chlyikllk, 331
Choi, 230
Choi and pik, in verbs. SSI
Choi, secondary meaning, 231
Cheiyik, suffix, 237
ChO^ik, suflix, 234
ChOlAqtOi, 848
CoUective*, 22
Comparative suffix, 248
Comparison, S79
Comparison, by iniqtiki, 574
Compass, points of the, 801
Consonants, 2
Day, 614
Day and night, idiom, 750
Day, examples, 618
Days of the week, 610
Days of the week, verb form*, 611
Debt, idioms, 756
Deceased, lo ejipcesa, 796
Declension, 2S
Demon&lrativelocatiTes: chimin!, etc, 379
Diacritic poims, 4
Diminutive suffix, 230
Dooi, 819
Doubling of demonstratives : tauni Imini,
etc., 286
Doubling of locatives : ml mintftk, etc., 362
DoubUng of locatives: pikmlni kniSUtS,
etc. 377
Dual idioms, 18
Dual nouns, 17
During, to express, 618
Each other, 263
East and west, 804
Elthkfik, suffix, 135
Epeil, in namcrals, SS6
Everybody, 763
Everything. 767
Everywhere. 774
ExclamalOTy eipressioni in fi, pi,' and vt.
Exclamatory
n petU, 629
FamUy. 787
Firintoi, in locative verbs, 418
Few, 602
Fewi by hik, kwcniiq, etc, 243
Financial terni?, SOO
Fingers, for hand. 749
Fit, it does not, etc., 785
For instance, 747
Future tense, 427
Futare lime: in kQ QnmlkQ, etc,
INDEX
379
Gender, 23
Gneninim'ne, 539
Gnen&nim'ne, examples, 541
Gno&k, suffix, 1%
Gnur'mi, 537
Gnur'mi, examples, 538
Gnur'mi, paradigm, 537
Gw5ak, suffix, 196
Hik, partitive suffix, 244
Half, 599
Hand, 749
Have, as to keep, etc., 846
Have much, many, 553
Here, 353
Here and there, 777
Himself, 269
Homonyms, 26
H5r&t&, suppose, 752
House, description of a native, 810
House, plan of native, 811
How good, 271
How many, 303
How many have you ? 301
Hum, 627
Hw5, 352
Hwli and mlini, 353
Hwi, examples, 359
Hwalth^ 734
Hw^ngghuchaki, 264
Hwing^uyukkluku, 576
Hwithloka, 733
Hwitkiiptk, 726
Idiomatic use of futures, 61
Idioms, 798
lepi, 649
lepiki, 645
leplrute, term for deceased wife, 824
If I were you, 520
Iletak, suffix, 209
Iliaka, 639
Ill&k^, paradigm, 644
Ilthk^k, suffix, 134
Imini, paradigm, 281
Iminalthktik, 284
Imperative, examples, 494
Imperative, future, 486
Imperative, on the, 481
Imperative, paradigm, 482
Imperative, various examples, 489
Impersonal verbs expressing the seasons,
604
Increments of homonyms, 27
Ingldi, 638
Inglu, 630
Inglu, paradigm, 635
Ingluki, 636
Ing'ni, Ingkuk, Tngkut, 277
Inkuyukkluke, 576
Instance, for, 747
Instead of, 507
Interjections, 626
Interrogation : by k&, 718
Interrogative aspect, examples, 461
Irutkli, suffix, 189
I thought it was you, 576
It is I, 259
It is you, 261
ly&k, suffix, 240
K&, interrogative, 718
Kah&r'mi, alone, 674
Kikii, when, 624
K&mmegautit, 874
Kamtchatka, specimen of the Aino Ian-
guage, 847
K&n&qt5i, 858
King, no, 780
Kinnirit, sleeps, camps on a journey,
844
Kinvik, when, in the past, 625
Kiptk, 726
Kissilupeit, 183
Kitunrika, my son, full paradigm, 73
Kauyi, suffix, 241
Kizhgi, description of, 809
Kei, interrogative pronoun, 293
Keiklk, 299
Kemi, alone, 668
Kcr*l^, imperative, 485
KSrtah, suffix, 200
Ketik, imperative, 501
KniTgint8k, 741
Kithlun, 721
KTttuchaki, 305
Klyuhwi, 724
Klyume, 725
Kl«k, 149
Kl^k, time forms, 150
Kl^k, possessive, 151
Kllk, 162
38o
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
KHk, time forms, 163
Kn^fhika, 193
Kn^iki, time forms, 195
Kdik&n, every, 616
Kdchecheru^ii, putting snow to dr^,
866
Kd6rqku, suffix, 620
Kii ; in time expressions : iinwikii, 625
Kuch&g&k, suffix, 242
KukkS, 190
Kiikki, paradigm, 192
Kumi, 514
Kumi, intransitive, 518
Kum&, paradigm, 519
Kurile Islands, specimen of language of,
847
Kwenuq, suffix, 246
Late, the, to express, 828
Le, declension : lilUngtiirne, 178
Le, paradigm, 180
Le, possessive, 179
Ll^oi, verbs in, 797
LIgh6k, mode variations, 133
LIgh6k, suffix : mtkknilghdk, 131
LIk, mode variations, 126
Ufk, suffix : tungrillk, 124
Ukely, it is, 737
Ulra^, suffix, 170
LIr*nur*mitt65, verbs in, 410
List of modes, 548
list of verbs, 543
Lm&, suffix, 247
LoS, 470
Lo^, examples, 476
Localis case, 44
Localis, in comparison, 45
Localis, in idioms, 778
Localis, in time expressions, 46
Locatives, augmentative : yakfilk, etc, 368
Locatives, chek : minluchek, etc., 407
Locatives, demonstrative : emugw5i, 381
Locatives, demonstrative : p&kumlna, etc.,
379
Locatives, doubling of : ml m&ntdk, etc.,
377
Locatives, impersonal : ml, etc., 361
Locatives, modes, 411
Locatives, on the, 344
Locatives, possessive, 386
Locatives, possessive diminutive, 403
Locatives, possessive paradigm; chinnTki,
399
Locatives, primary : yin, etc, 364
Locatives, rai, 420
Locatives, relative : pikminll^dk, 385
Locative verbs in mTttd&, 383
Locative verbs in shiqtdi, 404
Locative verbs in shTqtoi, augmentative,
406
Locative verbs in shlqtoi, diminutive, 405
Locative verbs in \jq\\ p&kmiintdi, etc,
371
L5k, suffix, 184
L5q*ldk, suffix, 184
Lthkuk, suffix, 199
Lthkiik, with pronouns : Tmln<hkttk, 284
Lueriit, suffix, 188
Luku, 474
Liine, 473
Liine and luku, idioms, 480
MikuchJ^k, 282
Mani, 352
Mlinluchaki, 408
Miraimi, after ; see 76 in Index of Modes,
548
Marriage, 790
Msm^i, the passive ; see 78 in Index of
Modes, 548
Me, suffix : chenme, etc., 707
Meteor, term for, 855
Meut, suffix, 102
Meutik, 105
Mi, 361
MItt5i, verbs in, 383
Modalis case, the, 48
Modes, index of, 548
Money, 800
Month, declension, 613
Months, names of the, 605
Mountain spirits, 838
Much and many, 553
My, 676
Nik, suffix, 219
NikklTkaki and chuchuk&ki, 843
Nikllng. 757
Nikmen, own, 743
Nimethlen, 760
Namflth, 761
Ninne, 712
INDEX
381
Nlinti, 713
Nintizme, 708
Nithlene, in the time of, 757
N^tdkfane, 368
Nauhwli, 710
Negative, on the, 780
Negative, substitute for, 451
Negative verbs, 445
Negatives in nr^tndk, 161
Nobody, 764
Ndk, suffix, 159
North and south, 802
Nothing, 768
Nouns, complete paradigm: k&tiinr&k&,
73
Nouns ending in consonants, 33
Nouns ending in vowels, 32
Nouns, future form, 60
Nouns, list of possessives, 66
Nouns, past form, 58
Nouns, possessive paradigm, 67
Nouns, time forms, 57
Nouns, verb form, 453
Now and then, 776
Nowhere, 773
Number, 34
Numerals, 580
Nuqhak, suffix, 212
Nuttttm, 744
Often : pulTngtSk, 751
Olden times, 623
On account of, 745
Once, 583
One another, 268
One by one, 591
One, 1 am that, 382
One, I have, 589
One of these, 771
Only : kema, 672
Or, 732
Pa, exclamations in, 628
Pair, 584
Pak, 223
Pak, in time expressions : duration, 616
PakmSne, 376
Pakminll^6k, 385
PamalTr'nuka, 410
Parentage, 789
Partitive suffix, the, 243
Passive, on the ; see 78 in Index of Modes,
548
Past tense, 426
Past tense, " was and is yet," 550
Payment, 755
Pei, suffix, 181
Pe^kii, 681
Peliki, paradigm, 687
PeSklTk, 682
PelimkTn, paradigm, 687
Peaptk, 216
Pe&qkik, 682
Pechalthki, 682
Pech^k, 682
Pech^rriy&rak, 682
Peka, 676
Peka, paradigm, 678
PekSki, 677
Pekaki, paradigm, 683
Pekikiki, 679
Pekaun, 682
Pekalitika, 682
Pekllle and the negative, 484
Pedk, deceased, 826
Peplk, 215
Personal endings, intransitive, 438
Personal endings of verbs, paradigm, 467
Persons, 433
Petlkkloa, 745
Petle, 629
Peu^i, paradigm, 686
Pewlk, 682
Peyun, 682
PT, various meanings, 832
PIk, suffix, 214
Pik^, paradigm, 685
Plkk^rle and negative, 485
P!kkl£kut6k, paradigm, 498
PIkmkTn, paradigm, 685
PIksea, 684
Plllg'ma, 526
Plllg'ma, double thirds, 529
PHTg'ma, paradigm, 528
Pnie and negative, 483
PnthkS, pethlTmne, etc, 680
PTyuqtaka. 867
Place for, expressed by fin&, 821
Plural nouns, 19
Poor me 1 266
Positive, idiomatic use of, as nlithlo&k&,
781
382
ESSENTIALS OF INNUIT
Possessive, future form : iy&thljkikikii, 97
Possessive, future form, modalis, 99
Possessive locatives, examples, 400
Possessive noun, full paradigm : kiitiinr&ki,
73
Possessive, paradigm of the present : nikii,
nlmi, etc., 78
Examples in the localis : nTmne, 79
Examples in the modalis : nlmniik, 82
Examples in the terminalis: kimniln,
80
Examples in the vialis : nlmkun, 83
Possessive, past form, 85
Possessive, past form paradigm: Ithkii,
Ithlmi, 90
Examples in the agentialis, 91
Elxamples in the localis : thlTmne, 92
Examples in the modalis : thlTmniik,
93
Examples in the terminalis : thlTmniln,
94
Examples in the vialis : thllmkiin, 95
Possessive suffix, condensed paradigm, 65
Possessive suffix, examples, 66
Possessive suffix, full paradigm, 67
Possessive, time forms, 74
Present tense, the, 425
Present tense, the, its double form, 428
Pronouns, personal, examples, 270
Pronouns, personal, paradigm, 257
Pronouns, reduplication of, 286
Pronouns, the, 251
Pugwok, 820
Pukn^, 502
Pullngtak, often, 751
Qtik, suffix, 107
Rai, 164
Ra^, declension, 166
RaH, time forms, 165
Rai^a, 462
Rau'15q, suffix, 185
Reduplication, 286
Relationship, 789
Robin, on the, 836
Ruk, suffix, 229
Saliva, superstitious use of, 839
Salutation, 822
Saun£, 508
Sea 9^rpent, the, 228
Seasons, the, 603
Seasons, verb form of the, 604
Secondary meanings in chdi, 231
Secondary meanings in p&k, 224
Secondary meanings in the third singular
of verbs, 437
Shimin, Siberian term for sorcerer, 125
Shun, suffix, 108
Sleeps or camps, measure of time, 844
Some of these, 771
Somebody, 765
Something, 769
Song, 841
Sti and ste, 136
Stli and ste, time forms, 137
Sti, declension of, 138
Sti, future form, 141
Sti, past form, 140
Ste, 144
Ste, paradigm, 147
Ste, possessive verb form, 148
Stories, native, 799
Substantive verb, the, 549
Suffixes, on the, 101
Sun, suffix, 108
Sun or shun, possessive, 114
Sun or shun, time forms, 112
Suppose, to express by h5r&ti, 752
Sweletik^, suffix, 210
Tiggoa, 861
Tillk, suffix, 127
T^lTk, time forms, 128
Timi = at once, 754
T^makliki, 655
Tamilthk6r*ma, 652
T^minli, 276
T^mirim^, 653
TamStft, 360
Tingvemi, paradigm, 533
TinCm, 262
T^qhreu^i, 868
TSrSchugliak, 236
Tiitkaikli, 873
Tauni, 274
Talinc, 509
Tenses, the, 424
Terminalis case, idioms, 52
There is one, 596
Third person, double form of, 69
INDEX
383
Third person, double form of, paradigm,
71
Thlik, suffix : as hwlitoithUk, 621
Thllnik, examples, 358
Thllnik, suffix, 197
Thliiq, suffix, 204
Thousand, 587
Through, u^wine, 748
'Hgai and tketo&, 842
Time, 619
Time idioms, 620
Time idioms, in thlSk: &kkw2lw&thUlk,
621
Time idioms, with tdk : hwSltSitSk, 469
TIngliiki, paradigm, 468
TTyemi, absent, 759
Toa, 352
Toa, examples, 356
ToaqpeSk, 739
Toithlune, 740
Toatfi, 735
T5i and toThwi, 357
Tonsure, 830
Too large, too small, etc., 785
Tu^nthk6k, 659
Tu^nthkokS, 660
Tule, 173
Tiingki, 663
TungleSnllgfiSk, 667
Tungllka, 665
Tutoa, 859
Tutut, stranded ice, 860
TuvveSluk, suffix, 207
UchekSghS, 872
Ufk«n6, 505
Ufk^n^, examples, 506
U^ii, verbs in : as eu^^, Su^^, etc., 439
Ug'^'Sne, on account of, 748
Uhwit, suffix, 221
Ule, 171
Ulloak, woman's knife, 865
Un, suffix, 108
Un&, down, 280
Una, this, 273
UnStlrai, 870
Unlfkinftk, 829
Until, 622
Unuqtum^n, idiom, 750
UpnSt, 869
UqpfletSka, 211
Uqtdi, 812
Us, idiom, 778
Ut^k, suffix, 218
Uyok, 348
VeSluk, suffix, 208
Vealulththluq, suffix, 206
Verb, the, 421
Verb, impersonal, 545
Verb, impersonal, examples, 544
Verb, interrogative intransitive, condensed
paradigm, 459
Verb, interrogative transitive, condensed
paradigm, 460
Verb, intransitive, condensed paradigm,
457
Verb, ITghoa, 797
Verb, present tense. Arrangement I : tlng-
luw&k^, 468
Verb, present tense. Arrangement II : t^ng-
v&g^ki, 469
Verb, raS^nS. 462
Verb, synopsis of the various parts, 543
Verb, transitive, condensed paradigm: ke-
putaki, 458
Verb, transitive, personal endings, full para-
digm, 467
Very, chakn6k, 753
Vialis case, use of, 55
Vik, modes, 123
VTk, possessive, 120
Vlk, suffix, 117
Vlk, time forms, 121
Vocative, on the, 351
Vowel change, 16
Want to, in the sense of desiring one's
presence, 847
We mortals, idiom, 778
What month is it? 608
When, 624
When, chime, 309
Where, 710
Where I am, 409
Which, 306
Which, paradigm : nilleik, 307
Which way is north ? 806
Who, 293
Who am I ? 300
Whoever, 295
Whom I am, 305
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11